JP2021037208A - Optical receiver - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide an optical receiver that can maintain accuracy in receiving an optical signal while automatically supporting a positional deviation when positions of a game machine and an optical receiver (data display unit) are deviated.SOLUTION: An image sensor unit 2311 of a data display unit 2001 images light from two lamps 3305a, 3305b of a game machine 3001, accumulates differences in luminance value between frames at a light source position, and determines therefrom whether the light from the light source is lost. When it is determined that the light from the light source is lost, the image sensor unit searches the light source again and, when a searched light source position and the original light source position are present within a predetermined range, the image sensor unit identifies the searched light source position as the latest light source position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 395

Description

The present invention relates to an optical receiver that receives an optical signal from an optical transmitter.

Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. Such a data display displays game information such as the number of hits of bonus games, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals won during the hit game state, and the effect is based on the game information. It is configured to be possible.

Further, this data display device is configured to receive information from the game machine, and displays and produces game information based on the information from the game machine. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device.

Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

In a game machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the information transmitted by the game machine is small and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device. A configuration that provides information to LEDs has been proposed.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting used in the store lighting and the production of the adjacent game machine becomes ambient light, and the communication is performed. Accuracy is reduced. In addition, the installation positions of the game machine and the table display (data display) may be displaced by opening and closing the front door of the game machine and by the player touching the table display (data display).

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and when the position of a game machine or an optical receiver (data display) is displaced, the position of the gaming machine or the optical receiver (data display) is automatically adjusted to the displacement, and the optical signal An object of the present invention is to provide an optical receiving device capable of maintaining reception accuracy.

The present invention provides the following optical receivers.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical receiver (for example, data display 2001 or image sensor unit 2311) that receives an optical signal from an optical transmitter (for example, a game machine 3001).
The optical receiver is
An optical signal receiving means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432, ISP circuit 2445) that receives an optical signal from the optical transmitter and converts it into image data (for example, YUV image data).
A light emission specifying determination means for determining whether or not the light emission position of the optical signal of the optical transmission device can be specified based on the image data (for example, a host controller 2441 that determines the number of irregularities based on the accumulated difference between frames). )When,
It has a light emitting position specifying means (for example, a host controller 2441) for specifying a light emitting position of the light transmitting device when it is determined that the light emitting position cannot be specified by the light emitting specifying determination means.
The emission identification determination means extracts brightness data from the image data, determines whether the emission position can be specified based on the accumulated data accumulated over the extracted brightness data over a plurality of frames, and determines whether the emission position can be specified.
When the light emitting position of the light transmitting device is specified by the light emitting position specifying means, the light emitting position of the light transmitting device specified in advance and the specified light emitting position are within a predetermined range (for example, within 5 pixels). If there is, the specified light emitting position is configured to be a new light emitting position of the light transmitting device.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the position of the game machine or the optical receiver (data display) shifts, the position shift can be automatically dealt with and the reception accuracy of the optical signal can be maintained.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The accumulation of the luminance data of the light emission specifying determination means is the accumulation of the image data received at a frame rate earlier than the control cycle when the optical transmission device emits an optical signal.
When the optical transmitter emits light, it is repeatedly turned on and off at a ratio according to the brightness based on the control cycle.
The optical signal receiving means can receive the repetition of turning on and off, and can receive the repetition of turning on and off.
As the accumulated data, the brightness data corresponding to the repetition of turning on and off is accumulated, and the luminance data is accumulated.
The light emitting position specifying means is configured to determine that the light emitting position can be specified if the on / off repetition is repeated a predetermined number of times or more, and that the light emitting position cannot be specified if the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times. Will be done.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the position of the game machine or the optical receiver (data display) shifts, the position shift can be automatically dealt with and the reception accuracy of the optical signal can be maintained.

According to the present invention, when the position of the game machine or the optical receiving device (data display) is displaced, the displacement can be automatically dealt with and the reception accuracy of the optical signal can be maintained.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is an overall front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the auxiliary control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviation of the winning role in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode-up lottery table in CZ1 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point-up lottery table in CZ2 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in a normal ART in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in a normal ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table during CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of sets in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which added the number of ART games in the bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table at the end of a bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal middle start processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start in CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ3 middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of a normal ART of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of CT of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of BB of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART end processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management process of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio indicator of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information display of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern example of the lighting timing of the state indicator in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the notification method of the presence or absence of the winning of the transition lottery to a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the basic game flow of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of each game state which the pachislot machine has. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table and the transition lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the realization method of CZ in the case of performing the transition lottery to an ART game state with a uniquely determined probability. It is a figure which shows the counting method of the limit game in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the limit processing of the specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern example of the signal output timing to an external device in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the navigation securing method in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the saving method of the navigation number in the case of executing the specific section of the navigation number management in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the production example when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection method of CZ with a different end period in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of control at the time of setting change in the said pachislot machine. This is a transition flow of the ball ejection state of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process during MB operation in the ball ejection state. It is a figure which shows the outline of the payout state and the game state in a list. It is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_ART lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_ SCZ mode transition lottery table when the specified number of games is reached. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_SCZ lottery table. It is a figure which shows the SCZ_ART lottery table. It is a figure which shows the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ. It is a figure which shows the drawing table which usually ends advantageous section | advantage section. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in "ART" in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART_ART mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_normal addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of MB operation_ART games. It is a figure which shows ART_history type lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_addition special zone lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_initial high accuracy lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_chance mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_chance mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_chance mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows the common | upper rank addition game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_last freeze lottery table. It is a figure which shows the common_end advantageous section end lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on Example 1. FIG. It is a figure for comparing the payout amount in the advantageous section of the specification example 1 and the embodiment 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the end of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 2. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the end of the advantageous section which concerns on Example 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining after the power is turned on when there is no setting change and after the power is turned on when the setting is changed as the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the number of progress games which are usually advantageous and a privilege. It is a figure which shows the method of history lottery during ART. It is a figure which shows another example of the history lottery during ART. It is a figure which shows the addition notification method during ART. It is a figure which shows the production stage during ART. It is a figure which shows the production stage during ART. It is a figure which shows the ending control during ART. It is a transition flow of the game state which concerns on the modification of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state of the advantageous section and advantageous section lamp which concerns on the modification of another embodiment in a list. It is a figure which shows the addition control in an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the addition control in an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the privilege at the time of ART transition. It is a figure which shows the re-recognition of a state reset. It is a figure which shows the arbitrary reset of an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the number of games ceiling using an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the playability using an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the playability by the setting difference no bonus in a normal section. It is a figure which shows another example of the transition lottery method to an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the transition lottery table of the advantageous section used in the said alternative example. It is a figure which shows the transition lottery table of the advantageous section used in the said alternative example. It is a figure which shows the calculation method of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows another composition example of an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows another example of the advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp. It is a figure which shows another example of the limiter of an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the control method of the number limiter. It is a figure which shows the adjustment striking method of the number limiter. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a transition flow of the game state. It is a figure which shows the outline of the payout state and the game state in a list. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a lottery type. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a navigation type. It is a figure for demonstrating the navigation control of 3 choices. It is a figure for demonstrating the navigation control of 3 choices. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in an advantageous section. It is a figure which shows the outline of the history lottery. It is a figure which shows the outline of the history lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the control using an AT point. It is a figure which shows the management method of AT point. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal_initial normal mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_CZ mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_CZ lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_normal mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_AT lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_history lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal advantage_ ceiling benefit lottery table. It is a figure which shows the CZ_CZ type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the CZ_AT lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone preparation_Bernavi lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone preparation_special zone start lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone_the number of games addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone_the number of games addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone_the number of games addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone_the number of games addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special zone_special zone end lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_initial AT mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_AT mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_icon type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_specialized zone stock lottery table. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table in AT_AT. It is a figure which shows the AT_history lottery table. It is a figure which shows the AT_final addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the CZ_scenario lottery table in AT. It is a figure which shows the CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table in AT. It is a figure which shows the common_specialized zone type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the common_fixed combination invalid lottery table. It is a figure which shows the common_lottery invalid lottery table. It is a figure which shows the common_stock lock occurrence lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating AT point control. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a transition flow of the game state. It is a transition flow of the game state. It is a figure which shows the outline of the payout state and the game state in a list. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a lottery type. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a navigation type. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the next game transition lottery table at the time of normal_bonus. It is a figure which shows the normal_normal time bonus type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the bonus lottery table in CZ_CZ. It is a figure which shows the next game transition lottery table at the time of CZ_bonus. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table at the time of CZ_CZ. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in BIG and CZ. It is a figure which shows the BIG_point addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table at the time of reaching BIG_S rank. It is a figure which shows the REG_ promotion lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect control at the end of an advantageous section. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a bell. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a bell. It is a figure for demonstrating stop control. It is a figure for demonstrating lamp control. It is a figure for demonstrating the detection method of an illegal setting change. It is a figure for demonstrating the function of the MAX bet button. It is a figure which shows the structure of the plurality of reels and a plurality of stop buttons in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a transition flow of a bonus and RT state in the pachislot machine of the said embodiment. It is a transition flow of the state related to the notification in the pachislot machine of the above-described embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination and a lottery type. It is a figure which shows the advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the MAP lottery table. It is a figure which shows the pseudo-bonus lottery table of the first hit. It is a figure which shows the first hit pseudo bonus type lottery table. It is a figure which shows the first hit pseudo RB lottery table. It is a figure which shows the first hit mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the freeze lottery table. It is a figure which shows the special lottery table. It is a figure which shows the ordinary advantageous maintenance lottery table. It is a figure which shows the pseudo BB lottery table in pseudo bonus. It is a figure which shows the pullback game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows the pseudo-bonus lottery table during pullback. It is a figure which shows the pseudo-bonus type lottery table during pullback. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the pseudo BB lottery table in specialization. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control process by state. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in a normal section. It is a flowchart which usually shows advantageous middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in pseudo-bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the process during pullback. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during specialization. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the number of RT games, MAP and a zone. It is a figure for demonstrating the control of the pseudo setting value using the RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating the control of the pseudo setting value using the RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting change operation in one-step setting. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability between RB flags. It is a figure for demonstrating the control of the pseudo setting value using the RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating the control of the pseudo setting value using the RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating the control of the pseudo setting value using between flags. It is a figure for demonstrating the game example of the pseudo-set value using the RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating the game example of the pseudo-set value using the RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating the game example of the pseudo-set value using the RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating AT control using SB. It is a figure for demonstrating the roll control using 4 reels. It is a figure for demonstrating the roll control using 4 reels. It is a figure for demonstrating the roll control using 4 reels. It is a figure for demonstrating the roll control using 4 reels. It is a figure for demonstrating game control using between RB flags. It is a figure for demonstrating game control using between RB flags. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game system including the display device for a game which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is an overall perspective view of the display device for games which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the display device for a game which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the screen unit of the game display device which concerns on 7th Embodiment from the back side. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the display content of the game display device which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is an overall perspective view of the display device for games which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the display device for a game which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the display device for a game which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the game display device which concerns on modification 1 of the 9th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the game display device which concerns on modification 2 of the 9th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the game apparatus which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the game apparatus which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the gaming apparatus which concerns on 10th Embodiment from the back side. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the gaming apparatus which concerns on 10th Embodiment from the back side. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the optical path pattern of the light from the LED traveling through the light guide plate which concerns on tenth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the illumination mode of the light guide plate which concerns on tenth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the gaming apparatus which concerns on 10th Embodiment from the back side. It is a perspective view of the projector accommodating body included in the game apparatus which concerns on 11th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a projector housing body included in the gaming device according to the eleventh embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the projector containing body which concerns on eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart of the control process executed by the control circuit which concerns on eleventh embodiment. It is a perspective view of the data display and the game machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the data display which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine as a pachinko machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game machine as a pachislot machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the data display device which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state determination table which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern table which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the detail of the signal for each terminal transmitted from the external terminal board of the gaming machine as a pachinko machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the detail of the signal for each terminal transmitted from the external terminal board of the gaming machine as a pachislot machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition diagram of the gaming state of the gaming machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display interlocked with the effect of the game machine which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the effect execution process executed by the control unit which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the top lamp which concerns on the modification of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the top lamp which concerns on the modification of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern table which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition table which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the effect execution process which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game system including the game apparatus which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine as a pachislot machine which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game apparatus which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the image sensor unit which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the effect execution process executed by the control unit of the game apparatus which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of LED control processing executed by the sub-control unit of the game machine which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the data reception process executed by the image sensor unit of the game apparatus which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the light source exploration process executed by the image sensor unit of the game apparatus which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the light source exploration process which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the light source exploration process which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the light source exploration process which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the light source exploration process which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the noise removal processing executed by the image sensor unit of the game apparatus which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the noise removal processing which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the noise removal processing which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the noise removal processing which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the decoding process executed by the image sensor unit of the game apparatus which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating CDMA coding which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating PSM coding which concerns on 14th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game system which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting pattern of a lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the model identification pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the outline of the menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows the character customization screen for customizing a character. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control processing (at the time of power-on) performed in a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control processing performed in a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control processing (at the time of custom start) performed in a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting pattern detection processing performed in a data display. It is a figure which shows the model identification table. It is a figure which shows the game system which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting pattern of a lamp. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control processing (at the time of password input) performed in a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting pattern detection processing performed in a data display. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting pattern of a lamp. It is a figure which shows the setting suggestion effect lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the pattern detection for the effect during a game performed in a data display. It is a flowchart which shows the Illuminations control process performed in a data display. It is a figure which shows the game system which concerns on 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lock-related processing performed in a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start processing performed in a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation lock effect-related processing performed in a data display. It is a figure which shows the game system which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the model identification pattern which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the image sensor unit which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the outline of the sparse search in the light source search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the light source search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the light source search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the light source search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the light source search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the light source search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the white balance adjustment process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the white balance adjustment process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the color learning process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the order of the color of the LED light source which emits light by the light emission control in the color learning process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the disappearance determination / light source re-search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the disappearance determination / light source re-search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the change of the brightness of the LED light source with the lapse of time, and the timing of a frame in relation to the disappearance determination / light source re-search process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the correction process by the temperature change which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the temperature change of the CMOS image sensor after the start-up of a data display in relation to the correction process by the temperature change which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the temperature and the RGB value in the CMOS image sensor in relation to the correction process by the temperature change which concerns on 19th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, it is not limited to game machines that pay out game media, but is applied to enclosed game machines that enclose game media such as game balls and give benefits as electronic data such as points earned when predetermined grant conditions are met. It is also possible to do. Further, in the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability is higher than usual during a specific number of plays. A pachislot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT and the RT are operated at the same time will be described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machines]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachi-slot machine 1 has one value (for example, 0 to 65535) from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Hereafter, a random number value) is extracted.

The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 described later) draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means has a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game with respect to the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). To determine the internal winning role.

By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 31, described later, motor drive circuit described later). 39, the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R) described later control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. Do.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed. .. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to four symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

When the internal winning combination that allows the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the above-mentioned specified time to set the combination of the symbols to the winning line (hereinafter, "effective line"). The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the effective line using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to the winning. Judge whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means.

When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating is the first stop operation and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the series of flows described above, various effects can be produced by using the light (video) output performed by the display unit 100, the sound output performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Will be done.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. The sub-control board, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the game has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet 61, and a lower front surface of the cabinet 61. It has a lower door 62b arranged in. The cabinet 61 accommodates equipment used for games (for example, reels). The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so as to be able to close the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61.
Since the cabinet 61 is a member for fixing the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be referred to as a front door.

The upper door 62a has a display unit 100 in the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used.

A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, which will be described later. The display window 4 displays a cross-up line diagonally to the upper right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 pattern. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the center line out of these five lines is the effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining the winning.

The effective line (center line) is activated by operating the MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the term "number of inserted medals" includes both the number of BETs inserted by operating the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

A plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row in the cabinet 61. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on which a sequence of symbols as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner.

A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. Within the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, a medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1-bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 4) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided.

By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (3 medals) used for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button is pressed once. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are referred to as "insertion operations".

An information display 14 is provided at substantially the center of the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted medals). Further, the information display 14 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits), and the like. Is provided with a digital display (not shown) that digitally displays the information to the player.

Further, the information display 14 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the combination of symbols according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a "pushing order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operations (pushing order) are different. The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, to display "1" when notifying the push order "1st (performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)". , When notifying the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3C in the middle)", "2" is displayed, and the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R)" is displayed. To do) ”is displayed as“ 3 ”. The details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later in FIG. 48.

As shown in FIG. 4 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be used to notify the information of the stop operation, for example. The display unit 100 described above may notify the information of the stop operation.

In this case, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means may be different. That is, in the instruction monitor, the information of the stop operation to be notified may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays "1" which is uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation on the left. It may be possible to directly notify what is to be done to the reel 3L of the above.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the ART gaming state (see FIG. 7) described later without notifying the stop operation information in the general gaming state (non-ART) described later.

Further, on the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 10, a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation is provided. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 15 at the lower part of the front surface, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 is specified as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's tilt operation to start a variable display of a symbol in the display window 4. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the angle range of.

Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by pressing the player. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6 and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

A first sub-display device 201 and a second sub-display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the upper part of the lower door 62b. The first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are lateral to the front surface of the lower door 62b, which stands substantially perpendicular to the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side), and the second sub display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal insertion slot 22 side).

At least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, in the present embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, and the touch sensor 201a is provided via the touch sensor 201a. The display can be switched according to the operation of the accepted player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub-display device 201 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 5) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

Speakers 9L and 9R for producing sounds such as sound effects and voices are provided on the left and right in front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout outlet 15 for paying medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. At the lowermost part of the lower door 62b, a medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid medals is provided.

In addition, on the front surface of the lower part of the lower door 62b, which is sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the motif of the model is placed. It is attached. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind it.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machines]
This concludes the description of the structure of the pachislot machine 1. Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. The pachislot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, an external centralized terminal board 73 electrically connected to these, and a peripheral device (actuator).

<Main control board>
FIG. 4 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 has a microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board as a main component. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse.

The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the intended use.

(Peripherals and circuits)
Peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 30 include stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. Further, the input / output ports of the microcomputer 30 include a motor drive circuit 39 and a hopper drive circuit 41 for controlling the operation of each peripheral device, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, and the like. Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes a symbol changing means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the establishment of the predetermined start conditions.

The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit according to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation.

The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate at a constant angle.

The main CPU 31 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).

Next, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 50.

That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the positions of the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 has reached the number of medals to be paid out. ..

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 73 receives signals such as the number of medals inserted / paid out from the main control board 71, the number of games played, and information on whether or not the bonus is activated, and displays the signals such as the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or the host computer of the amusement park. The external display is installed above, for example, the pachislot machine 1, updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, and notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that enables the medal payout or the re-game to be recognized, and is output at the time of the medal payout (including credit storage) or at the time of the re-game operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons, switches, and information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected so that information can be transmitted only to the sub-relay board 75, and the information is not transmitted from the sub-relay board 75. As a result, information can be transmitted between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 in one-way communication.

A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1-bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal received in the medal insertion slot 22 has passed through the selector. Further, the MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. Further, the 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the effective line based on the detection results of the medal sensor 42S, the MAX bet switch 11S, and the 1-bet switch. Further, the settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, and 107R for displaying the acceptance status thereof, and the number of medals and the advantageous stop operation are unique. The information display 14 (instruction monitor) that notifies the user is connected.

<Sub-control board>
FIG. 5 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control board 71. The ROM cartridge board 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, an effect random value is extracted, and the effect content (effect data) is determined. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 9R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and sound data related to BGM and sound effects. Various storage areas such as a storage area for storing the data and a storage area for storing lamp data related to the pattern of turning on and off the light are included.

The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are connected to the sub-control board 72 via a predetermined relay board. For example, in the sub-control board 72, an accessory relay board (not shown) is connected to the display unit 100, and the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device are connected via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). Connected to 202. The display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub-control board 72.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a sub-relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, and relays the wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. .. For example, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 with various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown), and is a sub-control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). The 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Transition flow of game state of pachislot machine]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

<Transition flow of basic game state>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 71 distinguishes between the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus (F_BB1, 2). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not operating, and the inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus is winning and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state. Is the state in which the bonus is activated.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not the bonus is activated is determined by the game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with six types of states, from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is the gaming state in which the winning combination related to the replay is the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. Further, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

These RT0 gaming states to RT5 gaming states are managed based on the data stored in the gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags from the RT1 game state flag to the RT5 game state flag, and the RT game state is managed by managing the on / off of these flags in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the ON RT gaming state flag as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT game state flags are off, the main control board 71 identifies that the current RT game state is the RT1 game state.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 71 plays a game from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state when (1) the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state. Transition the state. Then, when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in (2) the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Further, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (216) is paid out in the (3) bonus state, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 game state, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the RT1 game state to the RT0 game state after (4) 20 games have elapsed, and (5) bell spills are displayed before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spilled eyes are displayed.

Further, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) displays the RT4 transition lip in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, when (8) a bell spill or an RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly, the bell in the RT4 gaming state. When the spilled eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Here, the bell spills are determined for each type of push order bell when the push order bells (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) described later are determined as internal winning combinations. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. Further, in the RT2 transition lip, when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of maintenance lip is not specified. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, in the RT3 transition lip, when the RT3 lip (F_RT3 lip_1st, F_RT3 lip_213, F_RT3 lip_231, F_RT3 lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT3 lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, in the RT4 transition lip, when the RT4 lip (F_RT4 lip_123, F_RT4 lip_132, F_RT4 lip_2nd, F_RT4 lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT4 lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 manages the game state based on the presence / absence of the bonus win / operation, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability, and notifies the player of the advantageous stop operation. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between a general gaming state and an ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The general gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) that does not notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the contrary, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying a stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and is a gaming state which is advantageous for the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the general game state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART game state which is advantageous to the player. ..

The general gaming state is a gaming state in which ART is not won among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 7, the general gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states in which the game states of the transition destinations are different from each other. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is performed by shifting from the normal game state to the CZ and shifting from the CZ to the ART game state. Is done.

The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to CZ. Specifically, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed in the normal gaming state, and (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ.

The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that the CZ will shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, the CZ performs a transition lottery to ART, and (B) when the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state, and (C) this When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normally ART or CT) via the preparation for ART.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 6, since the RT4 gaming state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 gaming state via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state does not start immediately even after winning the ART. Absent. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 is in the process of preparing for ART until it shifts to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART, and notifies the stop operation necessary for shifting to the RT4 gaming state during the ART preparation.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 7, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. The normal ART and the CT are gaming states having different game characteristics, and the normal ART is for displaying a stop operation (for example, a combination of symbols with a large number of medals to be paid out) that is advantageous to the player during a predetermined number of games. It is a gaming state that notifies the stop operation of the player and the stop operation required to maintain the RT4 game state), and the CT notifies the player of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds the duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, the game is usually performed without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or general gaming state. Specifically, in normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed, and (D) When the lottery for transition is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from normal ART to CT. Further, the duration of the normal ART is managed. (E) When the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Normally, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the duration is managed according to the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals paid out during normal ART and the difference number, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation). The duration may be managed by the number of times).

As shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CT to the normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CT is managed by the duration of 8 games per set, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 37).

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility of shifting from the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, (2) when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 is in the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

In the bonus state, a lottery for transition to ART is performed. (G) If the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the transition from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state has occurred, the main control board 71 will move from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) even if the transition lottery is not won. ) To shift the game state). Further, (H) When the transition lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state shifts from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for ART. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 48.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "White 7", "Blue 7", "Chile Top 1", "Chile Top 2", "Chile Bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2". And "Cactus 3" are included.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8, when the reel index is detected, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0", and the reel 3L Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions "0" to "19" are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C, and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 8, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 8 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", and "hat" as described above. , "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "Chile top 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each symbol (symbol code 4-10) of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3". , "00000100" to "000001010" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12. The symbol combination table is used when a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and the combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the benefits (the number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the prize is won. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous operation device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored and "data (bits corresponding to the combination of symbols in 1-byte data)" stored in the storage area. Data for specifying) ”is specified. In the present embodiment, 22 1-byte storage areas are used to determine the combination of each symbol. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 9 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 11, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 9, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the valid line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, the combination names "R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition B_02" are bell spills. When a bell spill is displayed along the effective line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

The combination names "C_maintenance lip A_01" to "C_maintenance lip G_01" are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the valid line, the replay is activated.

The combination names "C_RT2 rip A_01" and "C_RT2 rip A_02" are RT2 transition rips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the cross-up line displayed in the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

The combination name "C_RT3 lip_01" is an RT3 transition lip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the valid line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

The combination names "C_RT4 rip A_01" to "C_RT4 rip D_02" are RT4 transition rips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

Further, the combination names "C_chililip A_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are chili lip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the symbol “upper chili 1” and the symbol “lower chili” are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chilean symbol is a name when the symbol "Chile top 1" and the symbol "Chile bottom" are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated.

Of the chili lip, the combination name "C_chili lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes called "single reel lip". In addition, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip B_01" and "C_chili lip C_01" are a combination of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on two reels of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, in the following, it may be called "double chili lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or the corresponding one). This is a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols fails (so-called a mistake in pressing a button), and may be referred to as a "triple reel" below.

Further, the combination names "C_reach eye lip A_01" to "C_reach eye lip P_02" are reach eye lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special combination of symbols is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name "C_reach eye lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated.

In addition, the combination names "C_RB role A_01" to "C_RB role G_02" are the ninth cards in the BB. When the 9th BB roll is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals are paid out. In addition, among the 9th cards in the BB, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" is 7 symbols (designs) in any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. It is a combination of symbols in which three "white 7" or symbols "blue 7") are displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols fails). In the following, it may be referred to as "7 sets in BB". On the other hand, the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" are a combination of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. I may call it.

The combination names "C_9 sheets A_01" to "C_9 sheets H_04" are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals will be paid out.

In addition, the combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first cards. When the first medal is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. In addition, the combination names "C_SP1_01" and "C_SP2_01" are definite rolls. When a confirmed roll is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out.

The combination names "C_3 sheets A_01" to "C_3 sheets F_01" are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the valid line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_weak 2 sheets A_01" to "C_weak 2 sheets B_03" are weak cherries, and the combination names "C_strong 2 sheets A_01" to "C_strong 2 sheets C_09" are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the valid line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 13 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 14 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 13, it can be seen that the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities related to the replay determined as the internal winning combinations in each gaming state are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is not determined as a combination, but is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. In the pachislot machine 1, when "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are determined as internal winning combinations during the RT4 game state, specific control (described later). Flag conversion) is performed, and this specific control will be described later.

Even in the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state, "F_reach eye lip A to D" may be determined as an internal winning combination together with "F_BB1, 2" (No. 3 to 6, No.). (Refer to .15-18), "F_reach eye lip A to D" is not determined alone as an internal winning combination. Therefore, when "F_reach eye lip A to D" is determined as the internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state (from the player's point of view, the combination of symbols according to the "F_reach eye lip A to D" is (When displayed), the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.

Further, in the RT5 game state, which is a state between flags, the combination related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 game state shown in FIG. 14, the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
15 to 20 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 has different stop controls depending on the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationships shown in FIGS. 16 to 22 are shown. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped so that the combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 16 to 22, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the circles corresponding to the winning combinations are listed. Even a combination of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially pulled in) is made different according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current gaming state. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, FIGS. 21 and 22 show the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during non-flag and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (some combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a "push order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order) are different. The combination of symbols associated with the "correct answer in push order" in FIG. 21 is a combination of symbols that is advantageous for the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to the "incorrect answer in push order". The attached symbol combination is a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, the pushing order which is the correct answer is notified, and as a result, the combination of the symbols associated with the "pushing order correct answer" is displayed. Even in the ART game state, the push order that is an incorrect answer may be notified, but the details will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order combination indicates the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the end "1st" of the name of the combination means that the correct push order is that the first stop operation is for the reel 3L on the left, and the end "2nd" of the name of the combination is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the reel 3C in the middle, and the last "3rd" in the name of the combination means that the correct push order is the reel whose first stop operation is on the right. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end "123" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left, middle, right", and the end "132" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left". , Right, middle ", and the ending" 213 "of the role name means that the correct push order is" middle, left, right ", and the ending" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct push order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 21, the combination “F_chili lip” is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 15 of the chili lip (see FIG. 9). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 20 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the replays (see FIG. 9) are shown in FIGS. 15 to 20. One of the displayable symbol combinations shown is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 15 to 20, the combination “F_chili lip” cannot display the triple chili lip (“C_ chili lip D_01” to “C_1 certain chili lip D_01”), and the single chili lip or the double chili lip (“C_ chili lip”) cannot be displayed. It can be seen that only A_01, "C_Chillilip B_01", and "C_Chillilip C_01") can be displayed. That is, the role "F_chili lip" is a role in which the triple chili lip cannot be displayed.

In addition, the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are roles in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and when the pressing order is correct, the chili lip (see FIG. 9) is selected. If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, FIGS. 15 to 9 of the replay (see FIG. 9). Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 20 is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 15 to 20, it can be seen that the combinations “F_certain chili lip” and “F_1 certain chili lip” can display triple chili lip. That is, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are roles that can display triple chili lip.

In addition, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are roles in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach eye lip (reach eye lip () If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, a replay (FIG. 9) is performed. 9), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the effective line.

In addition, the order of pressing the correct answers in the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip" and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be arbitrary, but this implementation In the embodiment, the push order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is set as the correct push order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination "F_reach eye lip A" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

Further, for the combination "F_maintenance lip A" and "F_maintenance lip B", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the replays (see FIG. 9) is an effective line regardless of the pressing order. It is displayed along with. In addition, the combinations "F_maintenance rip_1st" to "F_maintenance rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, replay (see FIG. 9). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 9) Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the effective line.

Further, the combinations "F_RT3 rip_1st" to "F_RT3 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rip (see FIG. 9). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is displayed on the valid line. It is displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_RT4 rip_123" to "F_RT4 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rip (see FIG. 9). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is displayed on the valid line. It is displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are combinations in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 11). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a bell spill (see FIG. 9) or a first sheet (see FIGS. 11 and 12) is displayed.

Further, in the combination "F_common bell", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the bells (see FIG. 11) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the combinations "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the cacti (see FIG. 12) is along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Is displayed.

Further, for the combination "weak chili", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the weak cherries (see FIG. 12) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the roles "F_strong chili 1" and "F_strong chili 2", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the strong cherries (see FIG. 12) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination between the flags and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (some combinations are omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1”) during the inter-flag state. "C_BB2") can be displayed. In "whether or not BB is established" in FIG. 22, "○" indicates that BB can be displayed, and "x" indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

If the BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination will be displayed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the combination other than the combination related to this bonus is as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_chilip", the BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_chilip" in FIG. 21 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is correct may be displayed, or only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed. It may be.

For example, since the BB cannot be displayed in the combination "F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st", the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" in FIG. 21 is displayed. It is possible to display only the bell that is displayed when the push order is correct, and to make it impossible to display the bell spilled eye or the first sheet that is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Further, in the case of the combination "F_BB1 + F_RT3 rip_1st", only the replay displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rip displayed when the push order is correct may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the inter-flag state, when the combination related to the bonus and any of "missing", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation for winning role>
In the above, the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped has been described. Next, the data table used when performing various lottery in the general game state, the ART game state, etc. will be described. In the following, the winning combination used when referring to the data table is represented by an abbreviation, so that the data table is used. Before the explanation of, the abbreviation of the winning role will be explained. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an abbreviation for the winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 23 (A), in the following, the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are referred to as the combination "BB", and the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are referred to as the combination "push order bell". The role "F_common bell" is called the role "common bell", the roles "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2" are called the role "cactus", the role "F_weak chili" is called the role "weak cherry", and the role "F_strong" "Chile 1" and "F_strong Chile 2" are called the role "strong cherry".

Further, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are called "triple chili lip" when they win the flag conversion lottery, and are called "replay" when they do not win the flag conversion lottery. Similarly, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are called the role "reach eye lip" when they win the flag conversion lottery, and are called "replay" when they do not win the flag conversion lottery.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (B). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" alone serves as an internal winning role during the RT4 game state. Once determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, an addition of the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given.

As shown in FIG. 21, for the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "triple chili lip", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip". (For example, push forward to aim at the Chilean pattern). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "replay", and information for displaying the combination of symbols of "replay" is notified (for example). , Notifies the push order other than forward push).

Similarly, for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "reach eye lip", and the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is treated. Notify the information to be displayed (for example, push forward to aim at the symbol "white 7"). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "replay", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay". Is notified.

By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, special benefits are given according to the winning of the flag conversion lottery, but from the player's point of view, the special benefits are displayed because the combination of the "triple chili lip" symbols is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

In order to enhance the playability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state rather than being constant. Since the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, the winning probability of the combination is different as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given depending on the state. A method is also conceivable (in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be different depending on whether or not the bonus is activated and the RT gaming state. Therefore, for example, only the RT4 gaming state is used as the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing other gaming states such as the RT6 gaming state and the RT7 gaming state is also conceivable). However, since the triggers for different winning probabilities of the winning combination (triggers for shifting the RT gaming state) are limited, this method lacks flexibility.

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the lottery result are performed without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of the combination of the given symbols can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in a state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased, and conversely, in a state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased. Can reduce the frequency of appearance.

In the following, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" will be referred to as "triple" to win the flag conversion lottery when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as internal winning roles. It may be referred to as "converting to" chili lip "(or simply converting to" triple chili lip "), and when the roles" F_reach eye lip A "to" F_reach eye lip D "are determined as internal winning roles. Winning the flag conversion lottery of is referred to as converting the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" to "reach eye lip" (or simply converting to "reach eye lip"). There is.

[Flow of the game during the general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 24, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the normal gaming state in the general gaming state is shifted to the CZ in the general gaming state, and then the CZ in the general gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state, so that the general gaming state (non-ART) is changed to the ART gaming state. (See FIG. 7). FIG. 24A is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the normal gaming state in the general gaming state to the CZ in the general gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 24 (A), the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states in which the expectation of winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is different, the low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state is the CZ lottery. It is in a state where it is easy to do. If the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 7).

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during the CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone to win the ART lottery without fail, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ transitioning from the normal game state is drawn from among these CZ1 to CZ3.

Subsequently, FIG. 24B is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the general gaming state CZ1 and CZ2 to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half portion and a second half portion. The first half is a period for promoting ranks having different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during CZ, and the second half is a period for notifying the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank by a battle effect.

During CZ1, 6 levels of modes are used as ranks, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ1, the first number of games (for example, 12 games at the maximum) is continued, and the mode promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game in the second half of CZ1.

In addition, during CZ2, points of 10 levels are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, 15 games at the maximum) is continued, and points are promoted by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A play against each other is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B play against each other is performed. This battle production continues for the third number of games (for example, up to 4 games), and the victory or defeat is managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. Further, in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination in each game, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare role is determined as an internal winning role during the battle production, an ART lottery is performed and the result of the battle production is rewritten based on the result.

In CZ1 and CZ2, if the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the battle effect in the latter half, and basically, the game state shifts to the normal game state after that. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is won, the battle effect in the latter half is won, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for the ART. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur. In this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via during ART preparation).

Subsequently, FIG. 24C is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ3 in the general gaming state to the ART gaming state. CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and ART lottery is performed for each game based on the internal winning combination. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and from the next game, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and even in this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) from the next game via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the number of the fourth game elapses without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for ART. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during general game state]
Subsequently, the data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30.

<Normal medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 25 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery of the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is changed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also changed at the end of the bonus and the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 25A is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 25B is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ at the end of the bonus, and is referred to at the time of setting change, the end of the bonus, or the end of CZ, ART.

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25A defines information on the lottery value for the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and the winning combination.

In the various data tables shown below, the lottery value information is conceptually shown. In the figure, "0" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0%" is defined, and "extremely low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0% to less than 1%" is defined. It means that it is specified, "extremely low" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "1% to less than 10%" is specified, and "low" means a lottery probability "10%". It means that the lottery value corresponding to "~ 30% or less" is specified, and "medium" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is specified. "High" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "60% to less than 80%" is defined, and "extremely high" means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability "80% to less than 99%". It means that the value is specified, "extremely high" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%" is specified, and "confirmed" means the lottery probability " It means that the lottery value corresponding to "100%" is specified.

Then, in the various data tables shown below, the data are extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). The random number value for lottery is sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery value, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred) is determined, so that the internal lottery is performed. Will be.

With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. .. In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it can be seen that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry as the internal winning combination. ..

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25B defines information on the lottery value for the lottery state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 26 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 26 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery based on an internal winning combination during a normal game state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery as to whether or not to pull back the CZ at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (A) defines information on lottery values related to winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state is in the high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the case where the current CZ lottery state is in the low probability.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (B) defines lottery value information regarding winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or at the end of the ART game state, the CZ pullback lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (B).

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 27 is a CZ1 medium mode-up lottery table used for the mode-up lottery of CZ1 in the first half of CZ1. The mode-up lottery table in CZ1 defines the lottery value information about the result of the mode-up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 29 (A) described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the mode increases, and when the mode increases to 6, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "mode 1 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result "mode 2 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of CZ1 will increase from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result "mode 6UP_freeze occurs" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 28 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for the CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of the CZ2. The CZ2 middle point lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current points and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 29 (B) described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the points increase, and when the points increase to 10, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "point 2UP" means that the points of CZ2 are increased by 2. For example, when the current point is "2" and the "point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is "point 2UP". It will go up from "2" to "4". In addition, when the lottery result "Point 10UP_freeze occurs" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
29 and 30 are an ART lottery table in CZ used for ART lottery in CZ, and FIG. 29 (A) is an ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. 29 (B) is an ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ used in the first game of the latter half of CZ2, and FIG. 29 (C) is a CZ used in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2. It is a medium ART lottery table (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), and FIG. 29 (D) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

The ART lottery table (for CZ1) in CZ shown in FIG. 29 (A) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of winning of the ART lottery in association with the current mode. Further, the ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ shown in FIG. 29B defines information on the lottery value as to whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current points. With reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) and the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ2), it can be seen that in CZ1 and CZ2, the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle) shown in FIG. 29C defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. With reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), when the rare role (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning role in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, it is determined. It can be seen that there is a probability of winning the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table (for CZ3) in CZ shown in FIG. 30 (D) defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3), you can see that if you win the ART lottery in CZ3, you will always win the CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described. The pachislot machine 1 usually has ART and CT as ART game states (see FIG. 7), and the CT is used as an additional chance zone. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the game is normally performed with the aim of shifting to CT during ART. FIG. 31 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the transition lottery to CT during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages of level 1 to level 4, and is mainly controlled based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. Then, the CT lottery state affects the CT lottery performed during the normal ART and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Flag conversion during normal ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the roles “F_certain chili lip”, “F_1 certain chili lip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye” during the RT4 game state (that is, during the ART game state) When any one of "Rip D" is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an addition of the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 31 (B), during normal ART, the pachislot machine 1 performs a flag conversion lottery with reference to the ART level and the CT lottery state. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip" and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" (for example, in order). Notification to aim at a predetermined pattern by pressing) is performed. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" (for example, the notification of the push order other than the forward push) is performed. When the player performs a stop operation according to this notification, a combination of symbols according to the notification content, that is, a combination of symbols of "triple chili lip" or a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. The combination of symbols is displayed, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed.

[Data table normally used during ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 32 is an ART flag conversion lottery table that is normally used for a flag conversion lottery during ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is first performed, and when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when the second stage flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are converted into "triple chili lip", and the first stage flag conversion lottery or the second stage flag conversion lottery. If it is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as "replay" without being converted into "triple chili lip".

FIG. 32 (A) is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 32 (B) is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 32A defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery of the first stage in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", and for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D". Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 32B defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In addition, until the CT is won once in the normal ART, the "first time (until the CT is won once)" column of the item "ART level" is referred to.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B), in each of the flag conversion lottery tables during ART, the random values (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used in the first and second stages. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be imitated as a lottery performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, the main side is required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to ball ejection, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables lottery without impairing playability while suppressing the capacity.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the probability denominator 65536 can be drawn, so that the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second stage lottery, it is possible to perform a flag conversion lottery according to the current state as well as the internal winning combination, so that various playability can be achieved. You can perform a flag conversion lottery with you.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 33 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 33 (A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level at the time of winning the ART, and FIG. 33 (B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33 (A) defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 27 and the like), the ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33B defines information on the lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33B defines information on the lottery value for the migration destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART at the time of CT entry. .. That is, during normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and the ART level shifts even at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 34 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for drawing a CT lottery state during normal ART. The normal ART medium-high probability lottery table defines the lottery value information for the CT lottery state of the migration destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium- and high-probability lottery table, you can see the role "Triple Chili Lip" (role "F_Probability Chili Lip""F_1 Probability Chili Lip" winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) "and the role" Reach Eye Lip It can be seen that in "A" to "F_reach eye lip D" (winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) ", the CT lottery state easily shifts (falls) to" low probability ". In the above explanation, if the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, which is contrary to the above explanation. As will be described later in the above section, the roles "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" are always won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special privilege of CT winning is still given.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 35 is a CT lottery table during ART which is usually used for CT lottery during ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, if "cactus", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", and "BB" are determined as internal winning roles, the probability denominator range is 256. CT lottery is performed using random values. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, CT lottery is performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

The pachislot machine 1 has "normal CT" and "high accuracy CT" as CTs. "Normal CT" and "high-accuracy CT" have different expectations for the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone), and "high-accuracy CT" has a larger number of ART games than "normal CT". Is easy to add (see FIG. 40).

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 36 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for an extra lottery to add the number of ART games during the normal ART. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 37. As shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by playing eight times in one set. During CT, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the number of games is not subtracted when the additional lottery is won, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Will be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times in the same set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and 37 (B), when the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT (that is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip" is won, the flag conversion lottery is won. ), 8 games per set are reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played seven times in the same set, the CT will end if another game in which the number of ART games is not added is played, but the role "triple chili lip" If the game is won, the CT will be reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times. Therefore, the CT becomes easier to continue as the role "triple chili lip" is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 37 (C) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During CT, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the role "triple chili lip". As described above, if the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT, the CT is reset. Therefore, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is reset. It will be set.

On the other hand, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of being converted to "reach eye lip", Table 1 has the next lowest probability of being converted to "reach eye lip", and Table 2 Is most likely to be converted to a "reach eye lip". If the role "reach eye lip" is won during CT, CT is newly assigned as shown in FIG. 41 described later.

As shown in FIG. 37 (C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in high-probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Table during CT lottery table>
FIG. 38 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The table during CT lottery table defines the lottery value information for the table used for the flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed from now on. The table during CT lottery table is referred to at the start of CT when it is decided to win the CT lottery and shift to CT, and determines the table to be used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<Flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 39 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CT flag conversion lottery table, it can be seen that during CT, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the combination "triple chili lip".

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 40 is an additional lottery table during CT used for an additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The additional lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 40 is not won in the additional lottery during CT.

In addition, in the additional lottery during normal CT, the number of additional games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won. Specifically, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", it is easy to determine "10 games" as the number of additional games, and during the same CT. When the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won is "9 to 16 times", it is easy to determine "20 games" as the number of additional games, and the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT. When is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and when the number of times the winning role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more". , "50 games" is easily determined as the number of additional games.

More specifically, in the additional lottery table during CT, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", the role "triple chili lip" in the figure is used. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT becomes "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure becomes " Promoted to "20 games". Furthermore, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "17 times or more", it corresponds to the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure. The number of additional games is promoted to "30 games". Similarly, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure are supported. The number of additional games to be played is promoted to "50 games".

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased according to the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "triple chili lip" is won, the CT will be reset. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, since the number of times that triggers the increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), an excessive profit is given to the player. It can be prevented from giving, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Lottery table with the number of sets added during CT>
FIG. 41 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT, which is used for the lottery for adding the number of sets for which a new CT is given during CT. The lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the lottery for adding the number of sets in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 41, when the winning combination "reach eye lip" is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is assigned due to the lottery with the number of sets added, the new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed is completed.

It should be noted that the number of times the above-mentioned combination "triple chili lip" is won is counted only during the same CT, but this "during the same CT" is when the number of sets added during the CT is added to the lottery. It may or may not include the new CT given to.

[Flow of games during bonus state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 42, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 42 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the game shifts to the bonus state during the general gaming state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 42 (B) shows the case where the bonus state shifts to during the normal ART. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game, and FIG. 42C is a figure which shows the flow of the game when it shifts to the bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 42 (A) to 42 (C), the pachislot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when the bonus state shifts. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after the end of the bonus state, the process shifts to CT via the preparation for ART. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow will be different depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 42 (A), when the game shifts from the general gaming state to the normal BB, an ART lottery is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. If you win this ART lottery, after the bonus state ends, you will shift to normal ART via ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games will be added to the lottery during the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 42 (B), when the transition from the normal ART to the normal BB is performed, a CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery has a 50% chance of winning, and if it wins, it shifts to CT via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state, and if it does not win, it shifts to normal ART via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state. To do. In addition, during the bonus state after shifting from the normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

With reference to FIG. 42 (C), when the CT shifts to the normal BB or the special BB, the shift to the CT is performed via the preparation for ART after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state after shifting from the normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Subsequently, the data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 43 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines the lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Lottery table with the number of ART games added during the bonus>
FIG. 44 is a bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games used in the lottery for adding the number of ART games and the lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the bonus state. The lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the bonus defines information on the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value for the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

The lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus will be used for the ART lottery in the state of no ART winning (until the winning of the ART lottery in the normal BB transitioned from the general game state). That is, if the number of additional games is determined to be 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after winning the ART, the lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus is used for the lottery for adding the number of ART games.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 45 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for a CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the game state before the transition to the bonus state. With reference to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus shown in FIG. 45, it can be seen that, for example, if the normal BB is performed during the normal ART, the CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 46, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the normal gaming state is shifted to the CZ during the general gaming state, and the ART gaming state is aimed at by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 46, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols. doing. As shown in FIG. 21, since the combination of symbols for shifting the RT game state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation of the player, even if the notification is not performed. , It may accidentally shift to the RT4 game state.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be determined as the internal winning combination, so even during the general gaming state (non-ART), It is possible to display the reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state during the general game state (non-ART), the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" can be displayed. In such a state, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

More specifically, when the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations during the general game state and the RT4 game state, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and this When the flag conversion lottery is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is given, and the right of ART is granted. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "replay" is performed, and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is controlled so as not to be displayed.

<Flag conversion lottery table during non-ART>
FIG. 47 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the general game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by main side control]
Conventionally, in pachislot machines, information on stop operations (pushing order, etc.) has been notified to the ART machine under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side, but the presence or absence of the notification is in the interest of the player ( In recent years, it has been required that the main (main control board 71) side, which manages the interests of the player, perform the notification in order to affect the so-called payout). Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information, and the stop operation information is notified under the control of the main side. It is supposed to be.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 48, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of "1" to "11" uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and "1" to "3" indicate the types of reels that perform the first stop operation, respectively. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

Further, "4" to "9" indicate the push order to be notified, "4" means that the push order is "left, middle, right", and "5" means that the push order is "left, middle, right". "Left, right, middle" means "6" means that the push order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the push order is "middle, right, left". That means that "8" means that the push order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the push order is "right, middle, left".

Further, "10" and "11" are for notifying the role related to the bonus, and "10" means a combination of symbols "C_BB1" consisting of "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means the combination of symbols "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

Here, although the numerical values of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly grasp the contents of the notification. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that some players may not be able to grasp the content of the notification simply by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the content of the stop operation is notified not only on the main side but also on the sub side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 controlled by a sub-control board 72, and notifies information of a stop operation under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed on the sub side on the left reel 3L of the display unit 100. "1" is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right", "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pushing order is "middle, left, right". When "F_BB1" is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 48 (A), during the preparation for ART, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. The "bell navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "bell" for the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". In addition, the "maintenance lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" for the combinations "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd". In addition, the "RT3 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition lip_3rd". In addition, the "RT4 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT4 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT4 transition lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition lip_3rd".

The timing of the notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which the notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is accepted, or the main side may be notified at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the above is received. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is accepted or when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts. As a result, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), during the ART gaming state, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. In the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", or "replay" symbols based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side, but only on the sub side.

As mentioned above, the combination of the "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" symbols is related to the granting of special benefits, so the presence or absence of notification will affect the player's profit (ball output). Can also be considered. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a special privilege is actually given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the given privilege. That is, when the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the combination of the "replay" symbols is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In that case, even if the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the profit (ball output) of the player, the sub is not notified by the instruction monitor on the main side. Notification is performed by the display unit 100 only on the side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 48 (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is performed to aim at a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), when the role "F_BB1" is carried over, "white 7 navigation" is performed, and as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the role "F_BB2" is carried over. If so, perform "Blue 7 Navi". The "white 7 navigation" notifies the combination "F_BB1" of the stop operation information for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "C_BB1", and the "blue 7 navigation" notifies the combination "F_BB2" of the information of the stop operation. Notify the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB2".

Here, as described above in FIG. 22, in the inter-flag state, the combination related to the bonus and any of "off", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. If so, the combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and if other combinations are determined as the internal winning combination together with the combination related to the bonus, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 48 (D), when the main control board 71 is controlled on the main side, the combination related to the carry-over bonus and the “off”, “F_special combination 1”, and “F_special combination” Only when either "2" or "F_special role 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

The main control board 71 may perform "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after notifying that the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying the bonus confirmation screen or turning on the bonus confirmation lamp.

As an example, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to perform an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games and display a bonus confirmation screen according to the result of this continuous effect. It is commonly done. If "White 7 Navi" or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known in the middle, which may spoil the interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is made. The method of making it possible for the main side to grasp the timing of the bonus announcement is arbitrary.

As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus is announced, and after digesting this number of games, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7" A method of performing "navigation" is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games required for the bonus notification, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing when the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games since the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus-related combination, and after the counting result reaches the predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the bonus-related role and any of "Out of line", "F_Special role 1", "F_Special role 2", and "F_Special role 3" are determined as internal winning roles. I do.

As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination in a state where the combination related to the bonus is not carried over, the effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed by the display unit 100 is performed. It is determined and notified to the sub-control board 72. By executing the effect notified by the sub-control board 72 and displaying the bonus confirmation screen, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

Of course, the timing at which the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that the main control board 71 can accept. .. For example, since the main control board 71 can accept the signal associated with the stop operation, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed in a state where the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, it is possible to announce the bonus. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “combination related to bonus””. , Stop operation "other than forward push"), give a bonus notification. Since the trigger of such a bonus notification can also be grasped by the main control board 71, the timing at which the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side.

[Explanation of operation of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 65, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using the program will be described.

<Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 49 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to the internal lottery table (FIGS. 13 and 14) according to the current gaming state, and draws a combination determined as the internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the combination "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 game state flag and sets the game state to the inter-flag game state (S6).

Following the processing of S6, or when it is determined in S5 that the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently determined by the state described later in FIG. The game control process is performed (S7).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the main side navigation control process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 48. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the reel stop initial setting process described later in FIG. 60 (S9). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production such as the internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and then the reels are accelerated and controlled. It is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process described later in FIG. 61 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed, respectively. Reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line, according to the combination of the symbols such as medal payout and replay operation. Give profits. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data of the winning operation command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the BB check process described later in FIG. 62 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the RT check process described later in FIGS. 63 and 64 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls to shift the RT game state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the CZ / ART end time processing described later in FIG. 65 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ pullback lottery. When the CZ / ART end processing is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the processing to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the RT4 gaming state (S31). In the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the flag conversion process described later in FIG. 51 (S32).

Following the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). When in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the normal middle start process (S34), which will be described later in FIG. 52, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ (S35). If it is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ middle start process (S36), which will be described later in FIG. 53, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in normal ART (S37). When the normal ART is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process (S38), which will be described later in FIG. 57, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CT (S39). If CT is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CT start-time process (S40), which will be described later in FIG. 58, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the BB start time process (S42) described later in FIG. 59, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the main CPU 31 is preparing for ART, the main CPU 31 performs processing according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the start of CT (S50). If it is the start of CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the table number used for the flag conversion lottery during CT with reference to the flag conversion table lottery table during CT (FIG. 38). (S51).

Following the processing of S51, or when it is not the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 47) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 47) is set. , The ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 32) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the CT flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 39) is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning is won (S54). If the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "triple chili lip".

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state is accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state in which the notification of the general gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current game state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), then sets the next game to be preparing for ART (S58), and flags it. End the conversion process. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

Further, in S54, if the flag conversion lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 performs the flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "replay".

<Processing at start during normal operation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the normal middle start process will be described. In the normal middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (A) and performs CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). When the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ, and when CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half). If the CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if the CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table of FIG. 25 (A) for internal winning. The transition lottery of the lottery state of the CZ is performed based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal middle start processing is ended.

<Processing at start during CZ>
Next, the process at the start during CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In the CZ middle start process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ1 (S71). If CZ1 is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing (S72), which will be described later in FIGS. 54 and 55, and ends CZ intermediate start processing.

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If CZ2 is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing (S74), which will be described later in FIGS. 54 and 55, and ends CZ intermediate start processing. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in the rank (mode or point) in which the expectation of winning the ART lottery is different, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing as the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ3 middle process (S75) described later in FIG. 56, and ends the CZ middle start process.

<CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing>
Next, the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). The main CPU 31 shifts the process to S82 when it is the first half (YES), and shifts the process to S91 of FIG. 55 when it is not the first half (the second half) (NO).

In the case of the first half of the CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs the mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of the CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 28) and performs the point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze is won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). When a freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (first half) (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 in the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). To do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 55, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). In the case of the first game of the second half, ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIGS. 29 (A) and (B)) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets "4" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when winning the ART lottery, and sets "3" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when not winning the ART lottery. "Is set.

Following the processing of S95, or when it is not one game in the latter half of S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 serves as an internal winning combination with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 29 (C)). Based on this, an ART lottery is performed (S96), and it is determined whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). And set (S98).

Following the processing of S98, or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). .. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the time when CZ fails (S103) and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<CZ3 middle processing>
Next, the processing during CZ3 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. In the CZ3 middle processing, first, the main CPU 31 referred to the CZ middle ART lottery table (FIG. 30 (D)) and performed an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and did the ART lottery win? It is determined whether or not (S122).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process to temporarily stop the progress of the game (S125).

Following the processing of S125, or if the freeze has not been won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ3.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (A)). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

<Processing at start during normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the process at the start during normal ART will be described. In the normal start processing during ART, the main CPU 31 first adds 1 to the ART continuous game number counter (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that normally counts the number of games that ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuous game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that can be normally continued by ART is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuous game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, the ART game state is changed. finish.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 35), performs a CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of CT sets, sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and then sets the type that wins the next game. Set CT (S145).

Following the processing of S145, or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (B)) and counts the number of ART continuous games. The ART level is drawn and set based on the value of (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the CT lottery state of the migration destination based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination with reference to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 34) (S147). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during normal ART (FIG. 36), performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the additional lottery has been won. Judgment (S149). If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

Following the processing of S150, or when the additional lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently reaches the value of the ART continuous game number counter to the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not the game has been performed (S151). If the value of the ART continuation game number counter does not reach the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 normally ends the process at the start during ART.

On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuation game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then at the end of ART. It is set (S153), and the normal start processing during ART is ended.

<Processing at start during CT>
Next, the process at the start during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 58. In the process at the start of CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 40) and performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and the additional lottery is performed. It is determined whether or not the player has won (S162).

If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT, the amount of addition per time increases.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (that is, whether or not it is converted to the combination “triple chili lip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 51) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets 8 to the CT game number counter (S165), and ends the process at the start during CT. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination "triple chili lip", the (NO) main CPU 31 ends the processing at the start during CT.

In S162, when the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the additional lottery table (FIG. 41) for the number of sets during CT, and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (S167). If the lottery for adding the number of CT sets is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery for the number of CT sets is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process at the start during CT.

When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and ends the process at the start during CT. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets a normal ART for the next game (S174), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

<Processing at start during BB>
Next, the process at the start during BB will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the process at the start of BB, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games (FIG. 44), and draws the number of ART games added based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S182). If the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process at the start during BB.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB start process. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185) and ends the process at the start during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the reel stop number based on the internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table and acquires each information based on the rotating cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires various information associated with the rotation stop number, such as determination data for each pressing order.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. 61. In the reel stop control process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. If the main CPU 31 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 has a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (not shown) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) and is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Use to manage the order of stop operations (push order).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

Next, the main CPU 31 executes the sliding piece number determination process (S206). This sliding piece number determination process determines the number of sliding pieces specified at the stop start position based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the internal winning combination from the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table. It is a process.

Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 33. The generation process is executed (S167). This reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of slip pieces determination data, and stores the stop schedule position in the main RAM 33 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of the predetermined numerical values "0" to "4" defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Is.

Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes the symbol code storage process (S210). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel.

Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

If the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this pull-in priority storage process, the pull-in priority of all the symbols of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. 62. In the BB check process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently processes the winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 49). The number of medals paid out in is subtracted (S222).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently continues. Process at the end of the bonus (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag on.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus (FIG. 45), performs the CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets in S227, and 1 is added to the number of ART sets.

Following the processing of S227, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO). S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets ART preparation in the next game (S229), and performs a BB check process. finish.

On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state in the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of the CZ (S231) with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 25 (B)), and ends the BB check process.

If the bonus state is not in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). If the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the bonus type with reference to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 43) (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs the bonus start processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start processing, the main CPU 31 starts the operation of the bonus and performs various processing such as setting the bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the RT5 game state is in progress (S241). When the RT5 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when the RT5 game state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently in the RT0 game state. It is determined whether or not it is (S242).

When the RT0 gaming state is in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S243). If the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if the "bell spilled eye" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines. Subsequently, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to on, the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). When the RT1 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT1 game state flag, and shifts from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games have passed in the RT1 game state (S248). If 20 games have not passed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if 20 games have passed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game status flag and RT1 The game state is changed to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When the RT2 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (S251). If "RT3 transition rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT3 transition rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT3 game state flag is set to on and the RT2 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state (S252), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the RT3 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (S262). When "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT3 game state flag, and changes from the RT3 game state to the RT2 game. It shifts to the state (S263) and ends the RT check process.

On the other hand, when neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. (S264). If "RT4 transition rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT4 transition rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT4 game state flag is set to on and the RT3 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state (S265).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 has the number of CT sets. Is determined to be 1 or more (S267).

When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a normal ART for the next game, sets a predetermined value in the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state (NO) in S261, since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not it is (S270). If neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition rip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition rip" is displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT4 game state flag, shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ / ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 65, the processing at the end of CZ / ART will be described. In the CZ / ART end time processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the CZ failure time or the ART end time (S281). If it is neither at the time of CZ failure nor at the end of ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing at the end of CZ / ART, while at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART (YES). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 26 (B)) to perform a CZ pullback lottery (S282), and determines whether or not the pullback lottery has been won (S283).

When the pullback lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ of the type winning the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. Then (S285), the processing at the end of CZ / ART is terminated.

On the other hand, if the pullback lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state for the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of the CZ with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 25 (B)) (S287), and ends the CZ / ART end time processing.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 by using the program will be described.

<Sub-side navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the sub-side navigation control process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data is included in the received start command data.

When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub-side navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). With reference to FIG. 48, for example, when the sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data “4”, the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for notifying the push order “left, middle, right” as the sub side navigation data. To do. As a result, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

On the other hand, if the navigation data has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to be navigated, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine whether or not navigation is necessary from various information included in the start command data. ..

If it is determined that navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub-side navigation control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub-side navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub-side navigation control process. For example, in the sub CPU 81, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won, the navigation data for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip" is displayed. (For example, navigation data that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward) is set, and the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol of "replay" Set navigation data for displaying combinations (for example, navigation data indicating a pressing order other than forward pressing). As a result, even if the main side does not notify the content of the stop operation, the sub side alone can notify the content of the stop operation.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is accepted on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is accepted on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been accepted. To do.

When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the player registration state (S312). As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. Controls the display screen of 201.

On the other hand, if the registration operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration deletion operation has been accepted (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub-display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration deletion operation has been accepted. If the registration deletion operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 makes it impossible to display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201, and displays the first sub display. It controls the display screen of the device 201.

<History management process>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. 68. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires the game result from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322) and ends the history management process. For example, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, determined as the internal winning combination). Whether or not a role is won) can be grasped. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition status of the gaming state from, for example, start command data. From these game results acquired from various command data, the sub CPU 81 has various values such as, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (number of games), the number of CZs, the number of CZ successes, the number of wins for each role, and the probability of winning. Game history can be managed.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 99. The same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment will not be described in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
The control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60 and a sub control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet-side relay board 440, and a power supply device 450 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 73 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 440, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and a reset switch 442.
Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal plate 73 and the hopper device 40 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 410 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 410 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 420 includes a ratio display board 421 connected to the main control board 71, a ratio display 422 connected to the ratio display board 421, and a changeover switch 423. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on the signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio display 422 displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and an accessory ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio display 422.
The configuration of the ratio display 422 and the details of the various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

The setting key type switch 430 is set when setting one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the magnitude of the profit given to the player, or in the pachi-slot machine 1. It is used to confirm the set value that has been set. When the main control board 71 receives an operation using the setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a setting value according to the content of the operation from a plurality of setting values.

The cabinet-side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71 to the external centralized terminal board 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used when resetting (initializing) various data of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The power supply device 450 has a power supply board 451 connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 452 connected to the power supply board 451. The power switch 452 is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a selector 461, a door open / close monitoring switch 462, a BET switch 11S, and a settlement switch 13S connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 460 and the door relay terminal plate 460. , Start switch 6S, stop switch board 463, game operation display board 470, and sub-relay board 75. Since the BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub-relay board 75 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The selector 461 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 461.

The door open / close monitoring switch 462 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The stop switch board 463 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. Further, a stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 463. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display 14, and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, when replaying a game, and the like. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals and the like on the information display 14. Further, the LED group 471 is connected to the game operation display board 470, and the LED group 471 is connected to, for example, a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, etc. based on the signal input from the game operation display board 470. Turn on.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460 and the sub-relay board 75. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has speakers 9L, 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 75.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 82 and a liquid crystal relay board 480 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 82 and the liquid crystal relay board 480 are housed in the sub-control board case together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 82 is a board for managing image (video), audio, optical, and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 480 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. Since the configuration of the sub-control circuit mounted on the sub-control board 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. 5, the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 70A, the main control circuit is mainly composed of a microcomputer 30 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32, and a main RAM 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. Further, the main ROM 32 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to the unit game.

The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Ratio indicator>
Next, the configuration of the ratio indicator 422 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As described above in FIG. 69, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ratio indicator 422 that displays various ratios. FIG. 71 (A) shows an example of mounting the ratio display 422, and FIG. 71 (B) shows the contents displayed on the ratio display 422.

(Composition of ratio display)
As shown in FIG. 71, the ratio indicator 422 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and as will be described later in FIG. 71 (B), the upper two digits indicate the type of the ratio to be displayed, and the lower two digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio indicator 422 is provided inside the housing 60 of the pachi-slot machine 1 because it is used by an administrator (such as a clerk at a game store) to check whether the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with. At this time, in order to prevent fraud on the ratio display 422 itself, it is preferable that the ratio display 422 is provided inside the main control board case that covers the main control board 71.

As a specific mounting example, as shown in FIG. 71 (A-1), the ratio indicator 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and is also shown in FIG. 71 (A-2). As described above, it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. 71 (A-3), 7 segments as the ratio display 422. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), it is preferable that the main control board 71 is provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71.

Normally, a seal is attached to the main control board case, but when the ratio indicator 422 is provided in the main control board case, the seal may impair the visibility of the ratio indicator 422. It is preferable to attach a sealing sticker so that there is no such thing. Further, a sticker for caulking recording is also attached to the main control board case. The caulking record sticker is a sticker on which the person in charge of caulking opening record, a date entry field, a serial number of the main control board, and a two-dimensional code for identification used at the time of manufacturing are described. Depending on the model, a two-dimensional code sticker used at the time of manufacturing may be attached to the main control board case. It is preferable that the arrangement is such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired by the sticking member such as a sticker.
Further, the front door (upper door 62a or lower) may also be made of a caulking member or harness to be assembled to the main control board, another board in the case of a board configuration in which a plurality of boards are arranged in an overlapping manner, or other members in the housing. It is preferable to design the door 62b) so that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired when the door 62b) is opened, and by doing so, the efficiency of the manager's confirmation work of the ratio indicator is improved.

(Display contents of the ratio display)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 71 (B), the ratio display 422 shows the cumulative specific section ratio, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio between the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous character ratio and the character ratio. , Is displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 422, "AU" is displayed in the upper two digits of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, and when displaying the continuous character ratio between the latest 6000 games. , "= R" is displayed in the upper two digits, and when displaying the character ratio between the last 6000 games, "= b" is displayed in the upper two digits, and the cumulative continuous character ratio is displayed. When this is done, "Ar" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "Ab" is displayed in the upper two digits when the cumulative percentage of the bonus is displayed. Further, the corresponding ratio is displayed as a percentage in the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED.

Here, the "specific section ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player to the number of games played (that is, the total number of games played) in all the game states. In this case, the gaming state advantageous to the player may include, for example, the bonus state during the bonus operation and the ART gaming state, as well as the CZ having a high expectation of transition to the ART gaming state (see FIG. 7). ).

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games, which indicates the number of games in all the game states, and the specific number of games, which indicates the number of games in the game state which is advantageous to the player, at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, the specific section ratio is calculated by the formula shown below.
Specific section ratio = specific number of games / total number of games x 100

In addition, the "continuous bonus ratio" is related to the first-class special bonus or the first-class special bonus with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states (that is, the total number of medals paid out). The ratio of the total number of medals paid out while the accessory continuous operation device is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all game states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The number of medals paid out during the first specific game, which indicates the total number of medals paid out while the continuous bonus actuating device according to the above is being operated, is counted, and the ratio of continuous bonuses is calculated by the following formula.
Consecutive character ratio = number of payouts during the first specific game / total number of payouts x 100

The "feature ratio" is the total number of medals paid out while any of the bonuses is in operation with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (that is, the total number of medals paid out). The percentage that occupies. In addition, any of the characters is a type 1 special character, a character continuous operation device related to the type 1 special character, a type 2 special character, and a character continuous operation related to the type 2 special character. A device or an ordinary accessory. Further, since the player is in an advantageous state during the ART gaming state and the CZ, it may be included in the state in which any of the accessories is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and medals paid out while any of the accessories is operating. The number of medals paid out during the second specific game, which indicates the total number of medals, is counted, and the bonus ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Character ratio = number of payouts during the second specific game / total number of payouts x 100

Further, "cumulative" means the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and "between the latest 6000 games" means the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of "cumulative", the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the entire period, and when calculating the ratio of "between the latest 6000 games", The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result that has been counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

The pachi-slot machine 1 is configured so that none of the counting items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased due to power failure. Specifically, the data is saved in the backup area provided in the main RAM 33 at the time of power failure, and the data is read from the backup area and reset at the time of recovery. As a result, even when the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened, data can be continuously accumulated from the time of installation.

Further, the right of the replay game accompanying the winning of the replay can be considered as the payout of the same number of medals as the medals used for the game, or can be considered as the payout of 0 medals. In the above-mentioned calculation of the ratio, the calculation result may differ between the calculation method A in which the right of replay is considered as the payout of medals and the calculation method B in which the right of replay is not considered as the payout of medals. For example, in calculating the ratio to the total number of medals paid out (total number of medals paid out) in all game states, such as the ratio of continuous characters and the ratio of characters, the calculation method A in which the right to replay is regarded as the payout of medals. Then, the total number of payouts will increase by the number of times the replay wins, and as a result, the ratio will decrease. On the contrary, in the calculation method B in which the right of replay is not considered as the payout of medals, the winning of the replay does not affect the total number of payouts, and as a result, the ratio becomes high. Such a gap between the calculation method A and the calculation method B increases as the number of times the replay wins increases, and therefore increases as the number of games increases.

Therefore, in the ratio display 422, the calculation result by the calculation method A and the calculation result by the calculation method B may be displayed in a switchable manner. In this case, the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. Further, if there is a margin in the size of the substrate on which the ratio display 422 is provided, a 7-segment unit of the ratio display 422 may be added to display both at the same time.
Further, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio on the setting screen (so-called hall menu) that can be displayed by the store manager, the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods can be displayed in the same manner. Good.

(Display contents of ratio display (switching display))
The ratio display 422 switches and displays various ratios calculated by the main control board 71. The method of switching the content to be displayed on the ratio display 422 is arbitrary. For example, various ratios may be automatically switched at predetermined intervals, and depending on the operation of the changeover switch 423 (see FIG. 69). The various ratios may be switched manually, or the various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Display contents of the ratio display (when an error occurs))
Pachislot machines have rules in the industry so as not to increase gambling, for example, the ratio of gaming states that are advantageous to the player to all games does not become too high, and In order to be able to play games with peace of mind in the normal game state, the base (so-called coin holding) in the normal time is lowered by paying out more than a predetermined number of medals not only in the advantageous game state but also in the normal game state. There are regulations such as not to go too far. The above-mentioned various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 make it possible to confirm whether or not these regulations are satisfied. Although it may temporarily exceed the regulation value due to the continuous establishment of accidental bonuses, etc., from a statistical point of view, the value of the ratio shown on the display as the number of games increases is in line with the regulation. It converges as it approaches the created design value. Therefore, when the number of trials is large, such as 100,000 games, and a value that deviates from the design value is still displayed, it can be inferred that a fraudulent act has been performed. In addition, when a value having a large deviation from the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific table, the administrator can infer that a fraudulent act has been performed on that specific table, such as hanging an illegal board. In this way, whether or not the value displayed on the ratio display 422 exceeds the specified value functions as a clue for the administrator to detect fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 exceed the specified value, it is preferable that the administrator can appropriately grasp the fact. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned various ratios (specific section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or higher than the specified values set for the ratio. The display mode of the ratio on the ratio indicator 422 is different depending on the case where the ratio is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio display 422 blinks the ratio when it is equal to or more than the specified value, and lights and displays the ratio when it is less than the specified value. As a result, the manager can grasp at a glance whether or not the various ratios satisfy the specified values.

In addition, if there is a ratio that is equal to or higher than the specified value, it may be notified to an external device (for example, a hall computer) to that effect (for example, a notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value). Good. Specifically, when the calculated ratio includes a ratio equal to or higher than a specified value, the main control board 71 notifies the external device to that effect via the external centralized terminal plate 73. If the output pins from the external centralized terminal board 73 are limited, the output pins currently used as error output are used to notify the external device (that is, error output). May be good.

It should be noted that just because there is a ratio that exceeds the specified value, it cannot be said that it is an immediate fraudulent act. Therefore, in the case of a model equipped with a first error output that is output when an abnormality with a strong suspicion of fraud is detected and a second error output that is output when an abnormality that occurs in a normal game is detected, it is specified. An error based on exceeding the value is preferably a second error output. Here, abnormalities with a strong suspicion of fraud include, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write inability, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage abnormality, and a role that has not been won internally. There are cases such as a winning abnormality in which the symbol related to the above is displayed on the valid line, a case where a payout is detected at a timing when the payout cannot be originally made, and a case where the set value shows a value other than 6 levels. In addition, abnormalities that occur in normal games include, for example, a hopper empty where the medals of the hopper device 40 bottom out, a medal clogging detection at the payout exit of the hopper device 40, a medal overflow that fills the medal auxiliary storage, and medals. A door caused by a hall clerk opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) to replenish medals when a medal jam or backflow of medals is detected at the time of insertion, or when the number of inserted medals is detected as an abnormal number such as four. For example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper is disconnected during an opening error or when replenishing medals.

By giving a predetermined notification to the external device when the ratio is equal to or higher than the specified value in this way, the administrator can perform various types without looking at the ratio indicator 422 provided inside the housing 60. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not the ratio satisfies the specified value, the burden on the administrator can be reduced.

(Display contents of the ratio display (immediately after installation))
Until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, such as immediately after the installation of the pachislot machine 1, various ratios have a large blur width and move up and down greatly. Therefore, various proportions may be displayed differently until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of ratio to be calculated. For example, the cumulative ratio is displayed in a different mode (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches "17,500", and after the total number of games reaches "17,500", it is displayed. While displaying in a normal mode (for example, displayed in red), the ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed in a different mode until the total number of games reaches "6000", and the total number of games is displayed. After reaching "6000 times", it may be displayed in a normal manner.

Further, the output to the external device may not be performed until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, even if the various ratios are equal to or higher than the specified value. Even in this case, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of ratio to be calculated.

(Modification example of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachislot machine does not have a ratio display, it is necessary to make a major modification to the existing pachislot machine in the installation example of the ratio display shown in FIG. 71 (A). Therefore, the display provided in the existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio display for displaying various ratios. Specifically, in the existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of medals stored (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (number of payouts). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachislot machine, the display unit that displays the number of credits (described later) displays the type of ratio to be displayed on the display unit (credit lamp 145 described later) and displays the number of payouts (described later). The display of the display may be switchable so that the ratio of the type is displayed on the payout number lamp 146).

Although the special operation is optional, it is preferable that the operation uses a switch provided inside the housing 60. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing a special operation.

<Information display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the configuration of the information display 14 including the instruction monitor in which the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation will be described.
As shown in FIG. 72, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, and the like. It is configured to include a limit lamp 148.

The insert lamp 141 lights (or blinks (hereinafter omitted)) to notify the player that a medal can be inserted, and the start lamp 142 lights to play a game as the start lever 6 is operated. The replay lamp 143 notifies the player that the medal can be automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game by turning on the replay lamp 143. Further, the bet number lamp 144 informs the player of the number of medals bet by turning on the lamp, and the credit lamp 145 lights up to inform the player of the number of medals stored inside the pachislot machine 1 (number of credits). Is reported to the player, and the payout number lamp 146 is turned on to notify the player of the number of medals (payout number) paid out as a result of the game.

Further, the instruction monitor 147 includes a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, so that the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player. Further, the state display 147b is turned on to notify the player that the current game state is a game state (for example, an ART game state) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. ..
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. May be used to notify the information of the stop operation.

Further, the limit lamp 148 is turned on when the gaming state favorable to the player continues for a long period of time. If the playing state that is advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a risk that the gambling will be agitated. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, the ART gaming state is forcibly terminated even before the duration of the ART gaming state expires. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 lights up when the ART gaming state is completed by this limit processing, and notifies the player that the limit processing has been performed. Further, the limit lamp 148 may blink when the limit processing is about to be activated and turn on when the limit processing is actually performed.
The details of the limit processing will be described later in FIGS. 79 and 80.

The insert lamps 141 to limit lamps 148 are turned on, blinked, and turned off by LEDs (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LED to notify the player of various information related to the game.

<Status indicator>
Next, the state display 147b provided in the information display 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting timing pattern of the status indicator 147b.
In FIG. 73, timing T1 is the start of the game, timing T2 is the start of reel rotation of the game, timing T3 is the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. It is an operation, timing T5 is a third stop operation of the game, timing T6 is a stop of all reels of the game, timing T7 is the end of the game, and timing T8 is the start of the next game. It's time.

In the example shown in FIG. 73, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for transition to the specific section (for example, the ART game state) is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the winning game. For example, in lighting pattern example 1, the state indicator 147b is lit at the start of the game (timing T1) that wins the transition lottery to a specific section. Further, in the lighting pattern example 2, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the start of reel rotation (timing T2) of the game won in the transition lottery to the specific section, and in the lighting pattern example 3, the transition lottery to the specific section is won. The status indicator 147b is turned on during the first stop operation (timing T3) of the game, and in lighting pattern example 4, the status indicator is turned on when all reels of the game won in the transition lottery to a specific section are stopped (timing T6). The 147b is turned on, and in the lighting pattern example 5, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game (timing T7) that wins the transition lottery to the specific section.

The lighting pattern example shown in FIG. 73 is only an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the status indicator 147b may be turned on during the game in which the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, and the timing thereof may be set. Is optional.

By turning on the state indicator 147b during the game in which the transition lottery to the specific section is won in this way, the player can grasp that he / she has won the transition lottery to the specific section. It is suitable because it can have expectations.

(Improvement of notification by status indicator)
By the way, if the presence or absence of the winning was announced only by turning on / off one lamp, the presence or absence of the winning can be immediately known, but the player feels that only the lamp should be turned on. As a result, there is a risk of losing interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the winning of the transition lottery to the specific section is notified during the game without becoming monotonous by the method shown below.

(Ingenuity for status indicator 1)
72 (B) and 72 (C) show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72B has a plurality of lamps "a" to "i", each of which lights up, blinks, and turns off, and is based on a pattern of turning on, blinking, and turning off the plurality of lamps. , Inform that you have won the transition lottery to a specific section.

As an example, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a plurality of lamps are lit in a specific pattern (for example, "a", "c", "d", "h", and "i" are lit). If not, multiple lamps will light up in a pattern other than this particular pattern. The specific pattern is not limited to one, and may have a plurality of patterns. This makes it possible to give a deeper notification than when one lamp simply lights up to notify the winning. For example, as the game is repeated and the lighting pattern at the time of winning is memorized, the detection of the winning becomes faster. It is possible to realize such playability.

It should be noted that the presence or absence of winning of the transition lottery may be reported not based on the lighting pattern but based on the number of lit lamps. For example, when the transition lottery is won, a specific number of lamps among the plurality of lamps are lit, and when the transition lottery is not won, a number other than the specific number of the plurality of lamps is lit. The lamp may be turned on. Further, for example, when the transition lottery is won, a specific number or more (or a specific number or less) of the lamps are lit, and when the transition lottery is not won, a plurality of lamps are lit. A number of lamps less than a specific number (or more than a specific number) may be turned on.

In addition, by controlling the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning the transition lottery by using the plurality of lamps. For example, when the lighting pattern for notifying the winning of the transition lottery is "all lamps are lit", the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation). By increasing or decreasing the number of lamps that light up according to (when all reels are stopped, etc.), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the transition lottery according to the progress of the game.

(Ingenuity for status indicator 2)
The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C) is similar to the status indicator 147b of FIG. 72 (B) in that each has a plurality of lamps that are turned on, blinking, and turned off, but the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. The state indicator 147b is different in that the plurality of lamps have no meaning as a whole, whereas the state indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C) has a meaning as a whole. That is, in the state display 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C), for example, the manufacturer name of the pachislot machine 1, the model name of the pachislot machine 1, the character name that became the motif of the pachislot machine 1 and the manufacturer, the shape of the character, and the like. Characters and shapes that you want to impress the player are also used as decorations. By using such decorations for a plurality of lamps, the characters and shapes represented by the decorations can be strongly memorized for the player, which leads to improvement of brand power.

Even in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the transition lottery is won, and to control the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game. Then, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the winning of the transition lottery.

Note that some pachislot machines may have a plurality of types of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player as specific sections, and may shift to any specific section based on the result of the transition lottery. For example, in a pachislot machine having an ART game state and a CZ, a pachislot machine that shifts the game state to the ART game state or the CZ based on the result of the transition lottery, or an ART game state and an initial game in which the initial number of games is 50 games. A pachislot machine or the like having an ART game state in which the number of games is 100 and shifting the game state to the ART game state of the initial number of games determined by the transition lottery can be considered.

Here, when a plurality of lamps are used as in the above-mentioned devices 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) are turned on or off in different combinations of patterns according to the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery. You may let it. As an example, when the number of initial games is 50 games and the ART game state is won, the state indicator 147b is lit in the first lighting pattern, and when the initial number of games is 100 games and the ART game state is won. , The status indicator 147b may be lit in a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

As a result, since the lighting pattern differs depending on the type of the specific section, it is possible to increase the variation of the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b. For the player, as the variation of the lighting pattern increases, it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the content of each lighting pattern, so that the player does not lose interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

On the contrary, regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery, a plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) may be turned on or off in the same combination pattern. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the winning specific section, it is not possible to grasp the type of the winning specific section from the lighting pattern. Depending on the skilled player, the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps may be memorized. Therefore, a specific section that is truly advantageous for the player (for example, a long ART game state such as 50 games) and a specific section that is not so advantageous for the player (for example, an ART game state that ends in one game) are defined. By providing the same lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b in any of these specific sections, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the type of the winning specific section.

Further, as a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the waist panel 25 or the like. For example, the waist panel 25 of a design that is generally introduced does not display the contents of the lighting pattern, but is used for the waist panel 25 of a pachislot machine that is mainly shipped to stores with many beginners such as low ball rental stores. May display the contents of the lighting pattern. Further, the purchasing store may be able to order the desired waist panel 25 from the manufacturer based on the customer base. This makes it possible to report or not report the content of the lighting pattern according to the customer base of the game store.

Since the design change of the lumbar panel 25 does not require testing by a testing institution and the burden of manufacturing and development costs is not large, a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications can be provided by simply changing the panel according to the market environment. Can be and is suitable. Instead of changing the design of the lumbar panel 25 itself, it may be possible to switch between reporting and not reporting the content of the lighting pattern by a sheet member to which a predetermined seal member is attached or replaceable. Further, the place where the content of the lighting pattern is displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as it can be recognized by the player during the game. However, it is desirable that the location is easy for the player to see.

(Ingenuity for status indicator 3)
Further, in order to prevent the presence or absence of winning from being known by whether or not one lamp is lit, the state indicator 147b may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The position that is difficult to see may be, for example, an arbitrary location such as the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, or the back of the medal insertion slot 22. Further, by covering the status indicator 147b with an opaque cover so that the status indicator 147b can be visually recognized only from the hole (peep hole) formed in the cover, the status indicator 147b is made difficult to be visually recognized. be able to. Further, for example, a bill clip or a clip for a parking lot use service ticket may be provided on the pachi-slot machine 1, and a status indicator 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Ingenuity for status indicator 4)
In addition, if the status indicator 147b that informs the success or failure of the transition lottery to a specific section is in the same position, it will be immediately known if only that location is viewed, so even if the position of the status indicator 147b is switched. Good. As a specific method, it is conceivable that at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) of the pachi-slot machine 1 have the function of the status indicator 147b, and the lamps for notifying the success or failure of the transition lottery are different for each hour. Be done. As a result, for example, at a certain timing, the lamp at the upper right portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b, but at another timing, the lamp at the lower left portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the success or failure of the transition lottery only from the lighting pattern of the state display 147b, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

(Ingenuity from playability)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 74, a device from the playability regarding a method of making it difficult to understand that the lottery for transition to a specific section is won will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, "F_3 choice bell_1st", "F_3 choice bell_2nd", and "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are provided as push order combinations, and nine medals are paid out when the push order is correct (bell's). The combination of symbols is displayed), and 0 or 1 medal is paid out when the push order is incorrect (the combination of bell spilled or 1st symbol is displayed). Then, in the ART game state, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order according to the push order combination is notified. Therefore, during the ART game state, by playing the game according to the notification, a number of medals (for example, 9 medals) exceeding the medals used for the game (for example, 3 medals) will be paid out.

As a device from the playability, first, a push order combination is further provided in which medals less than or equal to the medals used in the game are paid out even when the push order is correct. In the example shown in FIG. 74, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), push order combinations such as "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination _1st", "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination _2nd", and "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination_3rd" are provided. For "F_3 choice 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination 3rd", when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of the first pattern is displayed, one medal is paid out, and the order of pressing is not correct. When the answer is correct, the combination of the outliers is displayed and 0 medals are paid out.
In addition, the newly provided push order combination does not have to increase the number of medals even when the push order is correct, and the number of medals (third quantity) equal to or less than the number of medals used in the game when the push order is correct is paid out. Then, when the push order is incorrect, a smaller number (fourth quantity) of medals than the corresponding number (third quantity) is paid out, or no medals are paid out (that is, 0 medals).

In addition, as a device from the viewpoint of game playability, at least two types of ART game states are provided as ART game states. Specifically, all push order combinations ("F_3 choice 1-sheet combination _1st" to "F_3 selection 1-sheet combination_3rd" and "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd") are determined as internal winning combinations. The correct answer is given when the ART game state that notifies the correct push order when the answer is made and "F_3 choice 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination_3rd" among the push order combinations are determined as internal winning combinations. When the push order is notified and "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are determined as the internal winning combination, a one-card combination ART game state in which the correct push order is not notified is provided.

Then, as a device from the game property, the state indicator 147b is turned on regardless of whether the game state is the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state. The lighting pattern of the state indicator 147b may be different or the same lighting pattern may be used between the ART gaming state and the single-card combination ART gaming state.

With such a device, the state display 147b can notify that the current game state is a game state for notifying the push order, but the state display 147b alone is truly advantageous for the player. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether the player is in the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state.

It should be noted that the transition to the ART gaming state that is truly advantageous for the player is performed by winning the transition lottery to the specific section, but the transition to the single-card combination ART gaming state that is not necessarily advantageous for the player. Can be done arbitrarily.

In the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), all the games other than the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the 11th game, the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state) is won, so that the games after the 11th time. Is in the ART game state. During this ART game state, a 3-choice 1-card combination ("F_3 selection 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 selection 1-card combination_3rd") and a 3-choice bell ("F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd") Regardless of which of the two is decided as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), all the games before winning the lottery to shift to the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state. In this one-card combination ART game state, in the game in which the three-choice one-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination (first game), the correct push order is notified, while the three-choice bell is the internal winning combination. In the game determined as the role (second game), the correct push order is not notified.

In this way, when all the games other than the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state, the state indicator 147b is always lit regardless of whether or not the lottery for shifting to the ART game state is won. Therefore, the player cannot grasp that the transition lottery has been won only by turning on / off the status indicator 147b.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), among the games other than the ART game state, only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination is set as the 1-card combination ART game state, and the other games are set. , ART game state and single-card combination ART game state (normal). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the 11th game, the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state) is won, so that the games after the 11th time. Is in the ART game state.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), among the games before winning the lottery to shift to the ART game state, only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination is selected as the 1-card combination ART. It is in a gaming state, and other games are in a normal gaming state. Specifically, since the three-choice one-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first game, the game state of this first game is set to the one-card combination ART game state, and the notification of the correct push order is notified. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the three-choice one-card combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, it is in the normal game state and the correct push order is not notified.

In this way, even if only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the 1-card combination ART game state, the status indicator 147b has 3 choices. In a game in which one card combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the light is turned on regardless of whether or not the lottery for transition to the ART game state is won, so that the player can turn on / off the status indicator 147b. It will not be possible to know that the transition lottery has been won by itself. Further, even if it is said that the single-card combination ART game state is used, the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. Therefore, if the single-card combination ART game state is always set as shown in FIG. 74 (B), There is a risk that the notification game state in which the push order is notified will continue for a long period of time, and the gambling of the game will be unnecessarily enhanced. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the 1-card combination ART game state, so that the notification game is performed. The period of the state can be limited, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from increasing unnecessarily.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, the basic game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that FIG. 75 shows only the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification, and the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of bonus operation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section that does not notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and a specific section that notifies the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The normal section corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state during the general gaming state in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section corresponds to, for example, the general game in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The CZ and ART gaming states in the state correspond (see FIG. 7).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
The transition from the normal section to the specific section is made by winning the transition lottery to the specific section. Here, the transition lottery to the specific section includes both the transition lottery to the CZ and the transition lottery to the ART gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed based on the information having no difference in the set values. "Information with no difference in set values" means a combination that is determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all set values in the internal lottery process (unquestioned combination), or in all set values when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a combination of symbols that will be displayed with the same probability (a combination of symbols with no setting difference).

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition lottery to a specific section is performed, and the combination with the setting difference (setting difference combination) is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, the lottery for transition to a specific section will not be performed. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols having no setting difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a transition lottery to a specific section is performed and a combination of symbols having a setting difference is displayed. In that case, the lottery for transition to a specific section is not performed.

In addition, the lottery for transition to a specific section is performed based on a predetermined and perfect probability that does not change at all. The "predetermined perfect probability that does not fluctuate at all" means at least the probability that the probability does not fluctuate based on the set value (that is, the probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).

In this way, the transition lottery performed based on "information with no difference in the set value" is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, so that the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be used for a specific section. The degree of expectation regarding the transition can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in ball ejection performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of the setting difference combination with the setting difference.

(Example of lottery table used for transition lottery)
Here, an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for transition to a specific section is shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 77 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining the internal winning combination, and FIG. 77 (B) is a transition lottery table for performing a transition lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table has a probability denominator of 32768, and the transition lottery table has a probability denominator of 256.

As in the example shown in FIG. 77 (A), the internal lottery table defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. Here, the winning combination determined by lottery using the internal lottery table includes a setting difference combination in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and a set unquestioned combination in which the lottery value is the same regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 77 (A), the combination “F_BB1”, “F_maintenance lip A”, etc. are setting difference combinations in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and the combination “F_sabo1” “F_chili lip” “F_BB1 + F_reach eye lip”. , Etc. are set unquestioned roles with the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the pachislot machine 1, when the set difference combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery to the specific section is not performed, and when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed. be able to. It should be noted that not performing the transition lottery to a specific section includes not performing the transition lottery itself, and also including performing the transition lottery but always being a non-winning prize. In addition, the transition lottery to a specific section does not necessarily have to be performed when any of the setting unquestioned roles is determined as the internal winning combination, and the setting unquestioned role that performs the transition lottery and the setting unquestioned combination that does not perform the transition lottery are not required. A role may be provided.

Subsequently, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 77 (B), the transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery for each set unquestioned combination determined as the internal winning combination. As described above, since the transition lottery to a specific section is performed based on a predetermined and perfect probability that does not change at all, the lottery value information specified in the transition lottery table is the same regardless of the set value. The value.

It should be noted that the "perfect probability that is predetermined and does not fluctuate at all" may be further included as the probability that is uniquely determined for "information that does not differ in the set value". In recent pachislot machines, a state in which it is easy to win a transition lottery and a state in which it is difficult to win may be provided in the transition lottery. In such a case, when the transition lottery is performed with the "probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value", for example, at the time of winning the setting unquestioned role, regardless of the gaming state. The transition lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed. On the contrary, when the transition lottery is performed with a "probability that is not a uniquely determined probability (that is, a probability that fluctuates) for information that does not have a difference in the set value", for example, when the setting unquestioned role is won, A transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current gaming state is a low probability state. In that case, a transition lottery, which wins with a low probability, will be performed.

(How to realize CZ when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
By the way, when the transition lottery is performed with the probability uniquely determined in this way, the transition lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the game state, so that the transition lottery is performed as in the CZ (chance zone). In order to provide a state in which it is easy to shift to the ART gaming state, it is necessary to take some measures. Subsequently, an example of a method for realizing CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 78.

FIG. 78 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ART lottery method in CZ. For example, it is decided to notify the correct push order of the push order combination with no setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination during CZ, and the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed at the time of the push order combination winning with no setting difference. It will be performed based on the combination of displayed symbols. Specifically, as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (A), when a combination of bell symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, a transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed, and a bell spill or 1 is performed. When the combination of the symbols on the reels is displayed, the lottery for shifting to the ART game state is not performed.

Comparing the normal section and the CZ, the winning probability of the push order combination is the same, but since the correct push order is not notified in the normal section, it is difficult to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery will be performed. On the contrary, since the correct push order is notified during CZ, it is easy to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery will be performed. As a result, the frequency of transition lottery is increased during CZ compared to the normal section, and even when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, CZ (chance) that makes it easy to shift to the ART gaming state. Zone) can be realized.

Further, FIG. 78 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method in CZ. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination (replay) related to the re-game can be changed by shifting the RT game state. Therefore, by making the winning probabilities of some of the roles (replays) related to the replay with no setting difference different in the RT game state, the ART game is performed between one RT game state and another RT game state. Transition to state The frequency with which lottery is performed can be different.

Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), the combination “F_Chillilip” is a setting-independent combination with no setting difference, and as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), this combination When "F_Chillilip" is determined as the internal winning combination, a lottery for transition to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), the winning probability differs depending on the RT game state, although there is no setting difference in the combination “F_chili lip”, and the winning probability differs depending on the RT game state, and the RT2 game state is higher than the RT1 game state. It is decided as an internal winning role with a high probability.

Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the frequency of the transition lottery is higher than in the RT1 gaming state, and even when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ that easily shifts to the ART gaming state (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 gaming state can be used as the CZ.

(Another example of how to realize CZ when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
Subsequently, FIG. 78 (C) is a diagram showing another example of a method for realizing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 78 (C), CZ is realized by using MB (a continuous operation device for a special accessory of the second kind). The pachislot machine 1 in this method has a single bonus (hereinafter “SB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter “RB”) as the characters to be drawn during the MB, and the termination condition of the MB is (A). The number of medals exceeding the specified number has been paid out, (B) SB has been established during MB (determined as an internal winning combination, or a prize has been won), and (C) RB has been established during MB (determined as an internal winning combination). Or to win a prize), one of the three conditions shall be met. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB ends according to the satisfied end conditions. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the MB ends due to the establishment of RB, the state shifts to the ART game state after the end of the MB, and when the MB ends due to other conditions, the state shifts to the ART game state after the end of the MB. Will not migrate.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), if the MB ends (so-called puncture) due to the establishment of SB or the RB is established before the specified number of medals are paid out, the state shifts to the ART gaming state. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) to win.
As a reel stop control during MB, even in a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to preferentially stop a combination of symbols for which medals are paid out, so that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds the specified number. There may be a game in which there is a game and a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning role are the same game. In such a case, it is preferable to shift to the ART gaming state on the assumption that the end condition (C) is satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), (1) When the MB wins in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the MB which is the CZ. Then, (2) when the number of medals exceeding the specified number is paid out in the MB, or when the SB is established, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, (3) when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the game state shifts between the RB flags. Then, (4) when the RB wins between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to the RB, and then (5) when the RB ends, the ART gaming state is started at the high RT generated when the RB ends. .. If the RB wins a prize in a game in which the RB in the MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the RB starts from the next game in which the MB ends without going through between the RB flags.

In such a pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of MB (functioning as CZ) in the normal section and the winning probability of RB (triggering the transition to the ART gaming state) in MB are common to all the set values. However, the winning probability of SB (which triggers the end of CZ) in MB may be a common probability for all set values or a different probability depending on the set values. For example, when the probability of winning SB in MB is different depending on the set value, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of winning SB, making it easier for MB to continue for a long time, so that the ART gaming state in CZ (MB) It is possible to raise the degree of expectation for the transition to, and to increase the variety of ball ejection specifications.
In addition, the winning probability of RB, which triggers the transition to the ART game state, can be arbitrarily set depending on the relationship with other end conditions, but it is better to set the probability that the winning can be expected realistically for better game balance. Therefore, it is preferable that the specified number of sheets is as small as 10 to 30 sheets, and RB is determined as an internal winning combination in MB with a relatively high probability.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, the internal lottery using the internal lottery table and the transition lottery using the transition lottery table are executed on the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited, the variation of the lottery becomes monotonous when the transition lottery is performed in addition to the internal lottery. Therefore, an improved method of the main control board 71 is shown below.

FIG. 70B is a diagram showing another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 70B, the main control circuit is provided with a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so that bidirectional communication is possible by serial communication or the like. Since the configurations of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 70, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and second main control boards 71b are provided as the main control boards, and for example, the first main control board 71a is subjected to internal lottery using the internal lottery table to perform the second main control. By performing the transition lottery using the transition lottery table on the substrate 71b, it is possible to secure a sufficient capacity of the storage means used for each lottery, and it is possible to perform the lottery rich in variation.

In FIG. 70B, the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main control board 71a is used. The configuration may be such that communication is possible only in one direction (from the first main control board 71a to the second main control board 71b) with the upstream and the second main control board 71b as the downstream. By using only one-way communication, it is possible to reduce the communication load as compared with the case of two-way communication.

When the internal lottery and the transition lottery are performed on different substrates (first main control board 71a and second main control board 71b), the order in which the internal lottery and the transition lottery are performed is arbitrary. For example, the transition lottery may be performed on one substrate first, and then the internal lottery may be performed on the other substrate. On the contrary, the internal lottery may be performed on one substrate first, and then the transition lottery may be performed on the other substrate. It may be that. In this case, if the transition lottery is performed first, the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) cannot be grasped at the time of the transition lottery, so that the transition lottery is performed in a form that is not affected by the result of the internal lottery. For example, in the case of a specification in which a transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each unit game regardless of the internal winning combination, such a configuration may be used. As a result, even if a fraudulent act of illegally inputting the winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination is performed, the result of the transition lottery is not affected, so that the fraudulent act of generating an advantageous transition lottery result is generated. Can be suppressed. Further, when the transition lottery is performed first, since the internal winning combination is irrelevant, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set values can be performed only by performing the lottery with no difference in the set values.

On the contrary, when the internal lottery is performed first, the transition lottery may be performed with reference to the internal winning combination determined as a result of the internal lottery, or the internal winning amount determined as a result of the internal lottery may be performed. The transition lottery may be performed without referring to the winning combination. When the transition lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination, by performing the transition lottery based on the setting unquestioned combination as described above, the lottery can be performed based on the information with no difference in the set values, and the internal When the transition lottery is performed without referring to the winning combination, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set values can be performed by performing the lottery with no difference in the set values.

Further, FIG. 70C is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. Since what is lacking in the main control board 71 is the capacity of the storage means (main ROM), in FIG. 70C, one main control board 71 is shown, as in the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b. A plurality of main ROMs are provided on the top. In this case, for example, by storing various tables used for the internal lottery in the first main ROM 32a and storing various tables used for the transition lottery in the second main ROM 32b, the storage means used for each lottery can be stored. A sufficient capacity can be secured, and a variety of lottery can be performed.

(Transition from specific section to normal section)
Subsequently, returning to FIG. 75, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The transition from the specific section to the normal section occurs when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. As the end condition of the specific section, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the difference number, etc. can be used. .. Further, the end condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section. For example, the end condition may be different between the CZ and the ART gaming state.

In this way, the specific section basically ends when the end condition is satisfied, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, exceptionally, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the end condition is not satisfied. , The transition from the specific section to the normal section (limit processing), and even when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is not performed, then the guaranteed number of times It continues without ending the specific section until the navigation is performed, and shifts from the specific section to the normal section according to the number of guaranteed navigations (navigation guarantee processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, the limit processing in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flow of limit processing in a specific section.
In pachislot machines, if a specific section such as CZ or ART game state is continuously performed for a long period of time, the profit gained by the player during the specific section will increase and the overall profit will be balanced. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profit that the player gets during the normal section, which increases the gambling of the game. Therefore, in recent years, it has been required to limit the duration of the advantageous state for the player to a certain period. The limit process is a process of limiting the duration of a specific section, which is advantageous for the player, to a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(How to count the number of limit games)
First, with reference to FIG. 79, a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing limit processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (A), when the specific section continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuous games (the number of limit games). For example, when the ART game state is continuous, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuous games by 1 for each game. Further, for example, when the game shifts from the normal section to the CZ and then shifts to the ART gaming state, the specific section includes at least the CZ and the ART gaming state as described above, so that the main control board 71 is a continuation game of the CZ. The sum of the number and the number of continuous games in the ART gaming state that are continuously performed thereafter is counted as the number of limit games.

By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), when shifting to the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the waiting section may be sandwiched without immediately shifting. For example, in a pachislot machine in which the RT gaming state is different between the normal section and the specific section, it is necessary to start the specific section after the RT gaming state is changed, so that the waiting section may be inserted once. As a specific case, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a waiting section may be inserted when transitioning from a normal section to a specific section, and a bonus (role) may be given during the specific section. When activated, a waiting section may be inserted when returning to a specific section after the end of the bonus.

The main control board 71 may or may not count such a standby section as the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 may count the games for the number of times "A1" to "An" in FIG. 79 (B) as the number of limit games, or may not count them as the number of limit games. Good.

Further, the main control board 71 may or may not be counted as the number of limit games depending on the type of the standby section. For example, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the specific section sandwiched between the normal section and the specific section is not counted as the number of limit games, and a bonus (feature) is activated during the specific section. In this case, the waiting section sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the end of the bonus may be counted as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in a series of advantageous states as a whole.

Further, the main control board 71 may or may not be counted as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the standby section. When a waiting section is provided to transition the RT gaming state, it is necessary to notify at least to transition the RT gaming state during the waiting section, but the notification regarding the push order combination related to the increase or decrease of medals is not always required. You don't have to do it. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, since the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes changes the RT game state, it is necessary to notify the push order role "push order bell" related to the increase or decrease of medals. When the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is controlled so that the RT game state is not changed, the push order combination "push order bell" related to the increase / decrease of medals does not necessarily have to be notified during the waiting section.

Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the waiting section for notifying the push order combination related to the increase / decrease of medals as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in an advantageous state for the player, and pushes related to the increase / decrease of medals. The waiting section in which the notification of the forward combination is not performed may not be counted as the number of limit games.

In addition, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), if the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the bonus flag is set during the specific section. There may be a gap and a bonus state. The main control board 71 may or may not count the games between these flags or in the bonus state as the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 counts the games for the number of times "C1" to "Cn" in FIG. 79 (C) and the games for the number of times "D1" to "Dn" as the number of limit games. Also, it may not be counted as the number of limit games.

In this case, the main control board 71 may count the games between the flags as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games, and conversely, between the flags. The games in the middle may not be counted as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games. Further, both the game during the flag and the game in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games, and conversely, both may not be counted as the number of limit games.

Further, the main control board 71 may or may not count as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed between the flags. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts the number of medals as the number of limit games during the period between the flags for notifying the push order combination related to the increase / decrease of medals, assuming that the player is in an advantageous state. The number of limit games may not be counted during the period between the flags that do not notify the push order combination related to the increase / decrease.

Further, the main control board 71 may or may not be counted as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the bonus state. Depending on the pachislot machine, it may be possible to win a push order combination (that is, a combination in which the number of medals paid out differs depending on the push order) even during the bonus state. In such a pachislot machine, the player can obtain more profit by notifying the push order combination during the bonus state. Therefore, when the main control board 71 notifies the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the bonus state, the game in the bonus state is counted as the number of limit games, which is advantageous to the player during the bonus state. If the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the games in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games.

(Flow of limit processing)
Subsequently, the flow of the limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. 80. As shown in FIG. 80 (A), when the number of limit games counted according to the counting method described above reaches a certain number of games (for example, 1500 games), the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Let me. That is, when the number of limit games reaches a certain number, the main control board 71 ends a specific section even if the number of games, the number of navigations, etc. still remain (when the end condition is not satisfied). ..

Then, at the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs an initialization process for initializing the values of variables related to the generation of notification (navigation). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is, or may be initialized to RT0, which is a low RT state. For example, in the RT game state for the ART game state, the RT game state ends when the specified number of games are exhausted or the bonus is won without shifting to the RT game state by combining symbols such as bell spills and fall replays. In this case, even if the navigation is not generated due to the limit processing, the high RT state that is advantageous to the player continues. Therefore, as the latter specification, it is desirable to set the game state with a low replay probability. In particular, when the specified number of games is a large value such as 6000 games and the RT game state is such that the RT game state is substantially continued until the next bonus, the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed by dropping the RT game state by limit processing. it can.

When the limit processing is performed in this way, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status indicator 147b until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, and the specific section ends. Then, the status indicator 147b is turned off. Further, when the main control board 71 ends the specific section by the limit process, the limit lamp 148 is turned on for a predetermined period thereafter. As the predetermined period, when the limit processing is performed at the end of the game in which the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, for example, it may be during the next game of the game in which the limit processing is performed. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit processing is about to be activated to notify the player that the limit processing is about to be activated.

Here, for example, when counting the games in the bonus state as the number of limit games, the number of limit games may reach a certain number during the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 80B, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing even in the bonus state to shift the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Further, as shown in FIG. 80C, the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing at the timing when the bonus ends without performing the limit processing during the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (B), the gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, and in the example shown in FIG. 80 (C), the limit is set. The game state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the bonus state ends, not at the timing when the number of games reaches a certain number of games.

Of course, when counting as the number of limit games during the waiting section of a specific section or during the bonus flag, the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the waiting section or between the flags. Then, the limit processing may be performed even during the waiting section or between the flags, and the timing of shifting from the waiting section to the specific section after the number of limit games reaches a certain number, or the number of limit games After reaching a certain number of games, limit processing may be performed at the timing of shifting from between flags to a specific section through a bonus state.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
Further, when the specific section is completed by the limit processing, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal indicating that fact to an external device (data counter or hall computer). By receiving the output of this signal, the hall side can grasp that the limit processing has been performed in the pachislot machine, and can grasp new information that could not be grasped in the past.
If the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the bonus state, the main control board 71 uses the external device at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number (that is, during the bonus state). A predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal to the external device (that is, the main control board 71 is in the bonus state during the specific section). When the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, a predetermined signal may be output to an external device at the end of the bonus state).

Further, the main control board 71 is not only a signal (limit signal) indicating that the limit processing is performed when the limit processing is performed more times than normally expected in one pachislot machine 1. , A signal (error signal) indicating that the limit processing has been performed more times than expected may also be output to the external device. Specifically, the main control board 71 is specified to the outside when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games (that is, the number of times limit processing is performed) reaches a predetermined number of times within a specific period. Output a signal. As an example, when the limit processing is performed more times than expected between the time when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on and the time when the power is turned off, the main control board 71 also sends an error signal to the external device together with the limit signal. Output. This makes it possible for the hall side to grasp that, for example, when the limit processing is performed an unusual number of times such as 10 times in a day.

(Navigation guarantee processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 81, the navigation guarantee process in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flow of navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section.
In the case of a pachislot machine that manages the end conditions of a specific section based on the number of games, if the number of times the winning combination to be notified (for example, push order bell, etc.) is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific section, it will be during the specific section. There are few medals to be paid out, and the player may feel a sense of loss. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when shifting to a specific section, the minimum number of navigations is guaranteed, and the specific section is continued without ending until the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

Here, in FIG. 81, the end condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games, and in FIGS. 81 (A) to 81 (C), the end condition of the specific section is satisfied at the end of 50 games. It is assumed that there is. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (A), when the specific section continues for 50 games (that is, the end condition is satisfied), the notification (navigation) for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the end condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (A), after that, the winning combination (for example, the push order bell) of the notification target is determined as the internal winning combination in the 54th game, and the combination of the notification target is notified. When the main control board 71 is notified for the guaranteed number of times in connection with this notification, the main control board 71 ends the specific section. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed even by the notification after satisfying the end condition of the specific section.

By the way, in the pachislot machine, as push order combinations, a plurality of types of push order combinations in which the number of medals paid out at the time of correct answer of the push order are different are provided, and the main control board 71 is used for these push order combinations during a specific section. May inform you of the correct push order. As multiple types of push order, for example, even if the correct answer is given in the push order, the number of medals does not increase (that is, the number of payouts is less than or equal to the number of inserts), or the increase of medals is extremely small (for example, payout at the time of 3 bets). It is conceivable that the number of medals is increased (for example, the number of medals paid out at the time of 3 bets is 9) when the number of medals is correct. It should be noted that, in any push order combination, when the answer is incorrect in the push order, the number of medals paid out is smaller than when the answer is correct in the push order, or the number of medals paid out is 0 in common.

From the player's point of view, even if the medals do not increase or the increase is extremely small when the push order is answered correctly, the total number of medals to be acquired during the specific section does not increase. Does not need to guarantee the number of navigations during a specific section. On the other hand, for the push order combination, in which the number of medals increases when the push order is correct, the total number of medals acquired during the specific section is affected, so the player is guaranteed the number of navigations during the specific section. Is preferable.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of types of push order combinations in which the number of medals paid out when the push order is correct is different, only the push order combination in which the number of medals paid out when the push order is correct is larger than the number of inserted numbers The number of navigations may be guaranteed, and the number of navigations may not be guaranteed for the push order combination in which the number of payouts when the correct answer is the number of pushes is less than or equal to the number of input. In addition, among multiple types of push order combinations with different numbers of medals paid out when the push order is correct, only the push order combination with the largest number of payouts when the push order is correct is guaranteed the number of navigations, and other push order combinations. The number of navigations may not be guaranteed.

Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the number of navigations when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in a situation where the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section. Regardless of the number of notifications to the unguaranteed push order combination, the specific section is ended on the condition that the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71 does not notify the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section, and if the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, the specific section Is continued without ending, and then the specific section is terminated at the timing when the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is performed for the guaranteed number of times.

By doing so, the number of notifications (navigation) about the push order role that affects the total number of medals acquired in a specific section is guaranteed, so that the loss felt by the player can be reduced. ..

Next, a case where the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being notified for the guaranteed number of times while sandwiching the bonus state will be described. In FIGS. 81 (B) and 81 (C), when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, but during the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. An example of transitioning to the bonus state once is shown.

Since the bonus state is basically a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player when the specific section as a whole is viewed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the main control board 71 is in the specific section even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. When the state has been changed to the bonus state even once, the specific section may be terminated when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), when the main control board 71 satisfies the end condition of the specific section, if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed, the main control board 71 is in the specific section. Regardless of whether or not the system has transitioned to the bonus state, the specific section may be continued until the guaranteed number of notifications is given, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the guaranteed number of notifications are given. Good.

Subsequently, a case where the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without being notified for the guaranteed number of times will be described. If the specific section continues until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player. Therefore, the main control board 71 is shown in FIG. 81 (D). As shown, when the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the specific section may be terminated even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), even if the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 has not yet been notified for the guaranteed number of games. The specific section may be continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

In addition, when the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, it is optional whether or not the so-called additional lottery is performed during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. That is, the main control board 71 may perform the additional lottery until the end condition is satisfied during the specific section, while the additional lottery may not be performed even during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. On the contrary, the main control board 71 may perform an additional lottery for a period from the time when the termination condition is satisfied until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

Further, when the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, the normal screen is returned to the normal screen at the timing when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied on the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100, and then. When the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order notification (navigation) may be performed on this normal screen. That is, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being notified for the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status indicator 147b, but the sub control board 72 displays the display screen during the specific section. Switch the display screen to the display screen during the normal section. After that, when the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the push order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub-control board 72 notifies the push order combination. , The push order is notified on the normal screen. Then, when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, the main control board 71 may turn off the status indicator 147b.

<Outline of each game state>
The outline of the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 76, an outline of each gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 76, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment is roughly classified into a normal section, a standby section, and a specific section. The normal section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, the waiting section is a state after winning the transition lottery to the specific section and before the transition from the normal section to the specific section.

In the normal section, the waiting section, and the specific section, the winning combination related to the bonus is not determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus is activated, depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is won or whether or not the bonus is activated. Set to the probability that "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" that is not activated and the winning combination related to the bonus are determined as the internal winning combination, and "between the flags" that the bonus is not activated and determined as the internal winning combination. There is no difference. The bonus according to the bonus combination is operating "Bonus state (no setting difference)" and the bonus according to the bonus combination with the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is operating " "Bonus state (with setting difference)" and the game state of.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 , The status indicator 147b is turned off, and when the combination related to the notification is determined as the internal winning combination, these combinations are grouped and transmitted to the sub-control board 72. Specifically, when any of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st", "F_3 selection bell_2nd", and "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 groups these combinations. Information is transmitted to the sub-control board 72, assuming that the combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" and "bonus state (no setting difference)" of the normal section, the main control board 71 draws a transition to a specific section based on the information having no difference in the set values. On the other hand, in the "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform the transition lottery to the specific section. Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 continues the specific section. No additional lottery for the period or notification at the time of winning the push order will be given.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 is the state indicator 147b. Turn on. The main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in different modes during the standby section and during the specific section.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins the push order. It may or may not be notified of the push order of the correct answer of the time. When notifying the correct push order, the main control board 71 transmits to the sub control board 72 without grouping the roles related to the notification. Specifically, when any of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st", "F_3 selection bell_2nd", and "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 actually has the internal winning combination. Information that can identify the type of combination determined as is transmitted to the sub-control board 72. On the other hand, when the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is not performed, the main control board 71 groups the combinations related to the notification and transmits the combination to the sub control board 72.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins. The transition lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the transition lottery may be performed for the specific section different from the specific section to be won). Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 does not perform an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section. In the "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the standby section, the main control board 71 may perform an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value. It may not be.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section, the main control board 71 is the state indicator 147b. Is lit, and the correct push order is notified when the push order is won. Therefore, the main control board 71 serves as a notification in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 72 without grouping.

In addition, the main control board 71 wins in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. The transition lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the transition lottery may be performed for the specific section different from the specific section to be won). Further, the main control board 71 adds the duration of the specific section based on the information that there is no difference in the set values in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" and "bonus state (no setting difference)" of the specific section. While the lottery is performed, the additional lottery for the duration of the specific section is not performed in the "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the specific section.

The main control board 71 may perform a lottery for shifting to a specific section only at the time of 3 bets or an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section, and may not perform these lottery at the time of 1 bet or 2 bets.

<Output of the transition lottery result to an external device>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the flow when the result of the transition lottery to the specific section is output from the pachislot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

At the amusement store, external devices such as a data counter and a hall computer are installed together with the pachislot machine. For example, when the bonus state starts in the pachislot machine, a signal is output from the pachislot machine to the data counter and data is output. Count the number of bonuses at the counter. In the conventional pachislot machine, since the lottery for transition to a specific section is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the main control board 71 is an event that can be recognized on the main (main control board 71) side (for example, in the RT state). The lottery result was estimated from the transition and the stop operation was performed multiple times in a specific pressing order, and the signal was output to the external device based on the estimation. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the winning of the transition lottery is delayed by several games from the timing of actually winning, and a specific pushing order is accidentally repeated by the player's stop operation. If this happens, it is presumed that the game has won even though the game has not won the transition lottery, and as a result, an erroneous signal may be output.
In addition, in the specification that outputs a signal based on the transition of the RT game state, when the bonus is subtracted during ART, the signal is also displayed when the RT game state at the end of the bonus is returned to the RT game state for ART after the bonus is exhausted. Was sometimes output. In such a case, the signal is output more than the accurate number of winning ARTs and the number of digested sets, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the accurate information when guessing the setting or selecting the machine. Was occurring.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery to a specific section itself is output to the external device as it is, not from the estimation result, so that the result of the transition lottery is accurately output to the external device. Can be output.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output timing pattern to an external device. In FIG. 82, the timing T1 is the start of the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section (for example, the ART game state), the period P1 is the period between one game of the game, and the period P2 is. This is the period between one game of the next game.

In the example shown in FIG. 82, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for transition to the specific section is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition lottery to the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, so that the main control board 71 can grasp that the transition lottery has been won from the time of the timing T1. ..

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game period P1 in which the transition lottery is won. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at the start of the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section (that is, when the start lever 6 is operated). doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device when the reel rotation of the game starts, and in the output pattern example C, the external device is used during the first stop operation of the game. The result of the transition lottery is output to the device, and in the output pattern example D, the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device when all the reels of the game are stopped.

Further, as shown in the output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can output the result of the transition lottery to the external device in the game after the game won in the transition lottery. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device when the medal is inserted for the next game of the game won in the transition lottery. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 is subjected to a transfer lottery to the external device during an arbitrary game in which a plurality of games are subsequently performed (for example, at the start of a game in which a specific section starts). The result is output.

Note that the output pattern example shown in FIG. 82 is only an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery is displayed to the external device at an arbitrary timing after winning the transition lottery to the specific section. Can be output.

Further, by arbitrarily combining the lighting pattern example of the state display 147b shown in FIG. 73 and the signal output pattern example to the external device shown in FIG. 82, it is possible to realize an unprecedented novelty. Specifically, a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device before the status indicator 147b is turned on. On the contrary, the external device may be turned on after the status indicator 147b is turned on. A signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device, or a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device at the same time as the status indicator 147b is turned on. Good.

For example, by outputting the signal to the external device before the status display 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) before the status display 147b is turned on, so that the pachislot machine It is possible to detect the transition of a specific section from an external device other than 1. Further, for example, in consideration of the processing time in the external device, by outputting the signal to the external device slightly before the lighting of the status display 147b, the status display 147b is lit (notification in the pachislot machine 1). The timing can be matched with the update timing of the external device (notification other than the pachislot machine 1), and the player's discomfort can be reduced.

In addition, for example, when there are many types of bonuses and there is no free output pin in the 8-pin signal line that outputs a signal to an external device, or when the output pin from the external centralized terminal board 73 is limited. The main control board 71 may not output a signal to an external device even when the transition lottery is won.

Further, in the above embodiment, the signal is output when the transition lottery is won, but the signal may be output when a specific section such as ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which one set of 30 games is set in the ART game state and the number of sets is managed, a signal is output when the transition lottery is won (so-called first hit), and two sets are output after the first set of 30 games is digested. It is possible to output an external signal at the timing when the eyes are started. By outputting the signal in this way, the exact number of sets can be grasped. Further, the signal for the first hit and the signal for the continuation may be different signals, and the number of first hits and the number of continuations may be accurately grasped by the data counter. In this case, the accuracy of grasping the game situation can be further improved. ..

In such a game machine that manages the number of sets, if the bonus state starts in the middle of the ART game state, a pachislot machine or a pachislot machine that restarts the game from the number of games remaining from the time of winning the bonus in the set after the bonus ends. , There is a pachislot machine that starts a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, when 25 games out of 30 games in one set of ART game state are consumed and the bonus state is started, the number of remaining games is 5 games after the bonus ends (remaining at the time of bonus winning). The ART game state is restarted from the number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal when the ART is restarted because one set is simply separated in the middle. On the other hand, in the latter case, as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART game state, one set of ART is substantially added, so it is desirable to output a signal when the ART is restarted. The same signal output processing can be applied not only to the type of ART in which the predetermined number of games is set as one set, but also to the type in which the number of sets of ART is managed by the difference number or the number of navigations.

It should be noted that a pachislot machine having both a pattern of restarting the game from the number of games remaining from the time of winning the bonus in the set after the end of the bonus and a pattern of starting a new set from the beginning after the end of the bonus can be considered. For example, if the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than the predetermined value and the bonus is won, one set is added as a remedy, and if the number of remaining games is more than the predetermined value and the bonus is won, the remaining after the bonus ends. Specifications such as restarting the game from the number of games can be considered.

In such a pachislot machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output depending on whether or not ART is added at the time of winning the bonus. That is, when the addition of ART occurs at the time of winning the bonus, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when the ART game state resumes after the end of the bonus, and the addition of ART does not occur at the time of winning the bonus. The main control board 71 does not output a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the end of the bonus. More specifically, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than a predetermined value, it assumes that an additional ART has occurred and outputs a signal when the ART is restarted after the bonus ends. If the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the signal is not output when the ART is restarted after the bonus ends, assuming that the ART has not been added.
In other words, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than the predetermined value, the ART game state of a set different from the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. Is restarted and a signal is output to the outside. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 resumes the ART game state of the same set as the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. At the same time, no signal is output to the outside.

Further, it may be determined whether or not the signal is output depending on not only whether or not the ART is added at the time of winning the bonus but also whether or not the ART is added from the bonus winning to the start of the ART.

The signal output described so far is a signal in which the value of the data counter is increased by 1 by one output, but when starting a high-value ART gaming state, the data counter is increased according to the magnitude of the value. It may be a signal in which the value of is increased by a plurality of values. For example, when a long ART consisting of 90 games per set is started, which is usually an ART of 30 games per set, a signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by 3. ..
In addition, although it is usually an ART of 30 games per set, when starting an ART that continues until the next bonus, the signal is output so that the value of the data counter rises according to the average number of games up to the bonus winning. May be good. For example, when the winning probability of the bonus is 1/150, the average number of continuous games is 150 games, which corresponds to 5 sets, so that a signal in which the value of the data counter increases by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of continuous games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) regardless of the setting so that the setting is not specified. Outputs a signal according to. By doing so, even if the pachislot machine has a plurality of ART gaming states having different values at the start, it becomes easy to determine how much profit has been obtained from the data counter or the like after the fact. The signal in which the value of the data counter rises by a plurality of values may be a signal in which a signal for raising the value by one is transmitted a plurality of times at intervals so that an external device can identify it, or a dedicated signal for raising the value by a plurality of values. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production linked with an external device)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, an example of an effect performed in cooperation with an external device will be described when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won. FIG. 83 shows an example of an effect in which a signal is output to an external device during the game of winning the transition lottery to the specific section, and FIG. 84 shows the external in the game after winning the transition lottery to the specific section. An example of production when a signal is output to a device is shown.

(Production example 1)
In the production example 1 shown in FIG. 83, in the game of winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 reversely rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R prior to the start of reel rotation, and then rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R forward. The game is progressing by letting it. In this production example 1, the timing T1 is the timing at which the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the timing T2 is the timing at which the forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started (that is, at the start of reel rotation). ), And the timing T3 is when all reels of the game are stopped. Further, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b at the timing of the lighting pattern example 4 (when all reels are stopped), and externally indicates that the transition lottery has been won at the timing of the output pattern example B (when the reel rotation starts). Output to the device.

As shown in the timing T1, in the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section, the main control board 71 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the opposite directions. Further, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display that attention is paid to the data counter installed on the upper part of the pachi-slot machine 1, and also displays a countdown of 5 seconds. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate from the bottom to the top, so that the player sees the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. As a result, the line of sight is guided from the bottom to the top. Further, in addition to guiding the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the display unit 100 also attracts the attention of the data counter, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

At timings T1 to T2, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to proceed with the countdown. After that, at the timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the forward direction, and outputs a signal to the data counter indicating that the transition lottery has been won. Upon receiving this signal, the data counter updates the counter and displays "hit" or the like.

As described above, in the production example 1, the line of sight is guided to the data counter by using the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display by the display unit 100, and then a signal is output to the data counter. , Notifies that the player has won the lottery for transition to a specific section on the data counter that gathers the line of sight of the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect linked with not only the pachislot machine 1 but also an external device (data counter).

Further, in the production example 1, when the timing T3 is reached, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b. The sub-control board 72 displays an image or the like indicating that the display unit 100 has won a specific section in accordance with the lighting timing of the status display 147b. As described above, in the effect example 1, various effects can be performed in conjunction with each other by performing the effect according to the lighting timing of the status display 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Can be done.

(Production example 2)
Subsequently, an effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART game state, the specific section is not started immediately after winning the transition lottery to the specific section, and the specific section is started after a predetermined number of games have passed after winning the transition lottery. In some cases, so-called precursory effects may be performed during the predetermined number of games. By the way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is, as in the output pattern examples A to D shown in FIG. 82, , Even in the game that wins the transition lottery, the result of the transition lottery can be output to the external device. Here, if the result of the transition lottery is output to an external device in the game that wins the transition lottery, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device), so the data is being produced during the precursory effect. The effect result (that is, the success or failure of the transition lottery) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is lost.

Therefore, in the production example 2 shown in FIG. 84, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game 32 games after the game won in the transition lottery of the specific section. To do. Then, as shown in the effect example A, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform a precursory effect during the 32 games. As a result, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the precursor effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the precursor effect.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the transition lottery of a specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game, but the result of the transition lottery from the status indicator 147b during the precursory effect is obtained. It is preferable that the result of the transition lottery is difficult to understand from the status indicator 147b, because if it can be grasped, the interest will be lost. The method of making the result of the transition lottery difficult to understand from the status indicator 147b is as described above.

Further, when the registration operation is accepted from the player, the period for performing the precursory effect may be customizable. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the precursory effect is performed for 32 games in the effect example A, but the precursory effect is performed for 16 games in the effect example B, and after that, the winning of the specific section is confirmed. It is decided to perform a later standby production. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing in the pachislot machine 1, a story introduction, or the like, or an effect that suggests a set value. Further, even when the period of the precursory effect can be customized in this way, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of the presence or absence of customization. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 84, the main control board 71 is 32 games after the game won in the transition lottery of the specific section regardless of whether the effect example A is performed or the effect example B is performed. The result of the transition lottery is output to the external device during the game.

<How to secure navigation in a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 85, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the specific section will be described. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART game state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game in the specific section becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by creating a state in which navigation is easily performed in a specific section, it is possible to prevent the game in the specific section from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the timing to start a specific section is set to the start of the bonus state, and during this bonus state, there is a higher probability that the push order role (notification target role) is higher than when the bonus is not activated. Is determined as an internal winning role. Then, when the specific section is also started at the start of the bonus state, the correct push order is notified to the winning push order combination during the bonus state, and the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not notify the push order during the bonus state. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which navigation is not performed during a specific section, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the specific section.

In particular, since the timing to start the specific section is the start time of the bonus state, it is once in the situation where the bonus state is never reached during the specific section, that is, the situation where navigation is easy to be performed during the specific section (bonus state). As a result, the player can receive a certain number of times of navigation during a specific section.

(Example of how to start a specific section at the start of a bonus)
Here, the method of setting the start timing of the specific section as the start time of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-1), the main control board 71 responds to the fact that the combination related to the bonus, which is a non-setting unquestioned combination, is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, the bonus winning) during the normal section. Then, a transition lottery is performed. Then, when the main control board 71 is in a state of winning the transition lottery and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state and is the main control board. The 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct push order to the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed in the state where the main control board 71 has not won the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section. The control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 do not notify the correct push order even if the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-2), the main control board 71 does not determine the combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination, but serves as the combination related to the bonus which is an unquestioned combination during the normal section. Depending on the combination of the corresponding symbols being displayed (that is, the bonus winning), the transition lottery may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-3), the main control board 71 may perform a transition lottery during the normal section regardless of the winning combination related to the bonus. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to a specific section based on information having no difference in set values during the normal section, and if the transition lottery is won, the right to shift to the specific section. Is given. Then, when a combination of symbols according to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed after that, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state when the transition right is granted, and the main control board 71 starts the specific section together with the bonus state. The board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct push order to the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the transition right is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 push forward during the bonus state. Does not notify the correct push order even if is determined as the internal winning combination.

(Data example)
FIG. 85B is a data configuration example for realizing a navigation securing method in a specific section. As shown in FIG. 85 (B), during the bonus state, there is a higher probability that the push order combination (“F_3 selection combination_1st”, “F_3 selection combination_2nd”, “F_3 selection combination_3rd”” is higher than that during the non-bonus state. ) Is determined as an internal bonus. For this push order combination, for example, if the correct answer is given in the push order, a combination of symbols for which 9 medals are paid out is displayed, and if the answer is incorrect for the push order, a combination of symbols for which 5 medals are paid out is displayed. It is what is displayed. Further, the bonus state is terminated when, for example, 10 or more medals are paid out.

According to such a data example, when notifying the push order of the correct push order to the push order combination during the bonus state, the player has 18 medals (= 9 medals x 2 times) during the bonus state. If the player does not notify the push order of the correct push order during the bonus state, the player can receive 10 cards (= 5 cards x 2 times) during the bonus state. You may not be able to pay or receive medals.

<Method of realizing precursors using a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, a method of realizing the precursory effect in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a transition lottery to a specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game to notify that the transition lottery has been won. Is not suitable for notifying the result of the transition lottery using. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific section (first specific section) different from the specific section (second specific section) for which the result is reported is used, and a precursory effect is produced during the first specific section. Is to be done.

(Precursor method 1 regarding transition to a specific section)
First, with reference to FIG. 86, one method of realizing a precursor for the transition to the second specific section will be described. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations, a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section), are provided, and the game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the long ART. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, a short ART that continues for a first period (for example, three games) and a second period that exceeds the first period (for example, for example). A long ART that continues (for 53 games (3 + 50)) is provided, and a lottery for transition to a short ART or a long ART is performed during the normal section. FIG. 86B is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery. Based on the information (internal winning combination) that does not differ in the set value, the main control board 71 performs a lottery for transition to the short ART or the long ART with a probability that does not fluctuate depending on the set value.

In this transition lottery, if either the short ART or the long ART is won, the pachislot machine 1 performs a precursory effect of notifying whether or not the long ART is won during the period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, when the short ART is won, a precursor effect is performed to notify that the long ART is not won during the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when the long ART is won, the long ART is won from the start to the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In addition to performing a precursory effect to notify that, an effect unique to long ART is performed after this precursory effect.

When the precursor effect is performed using the short ART, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b because both the short ART and the long ART are specific sections. That is, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. Further, when the long ART is won in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the second period, which is the continuation period of the long ART. The main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in different modes for the short ART and the long ART, or may light in the same mode.

In addition, the method of outputting a signal to an external device when performing a precursory effect using a short ART is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, and only when it wins the long ART in the transition lottery, it signals to the external device. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device regardless of whether the short ART is won or the long ART is won in the transition lottery.

In addition, as the end condition of the short ART and the long ART, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the difference number, etc. Can be used. In this case, the end condition used for the short ART and the end condition used for the long ART may be of the same type or may be of different types. The same type means, for example, when the number of games is used as the end condition of the short ART, the number of games is also used as the end condition of the long ART. When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the end condition of the long ART.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 86 (C), an example of an effect in the case of performing a precursory game using the short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect of, for example, "explosion chance rush" in the display unit 100. This "explosion chance" effect is an effect of notifying the winner of the long ART depending on whether or not the bomb can be detonated during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 86, it is assumed that the duration of the short ART is 3 games.

If the sub-control board 72 has won the short ART in the transition lottery (that is, if it has not won the long ART), the sub-control board 72 ends the "explosion chance" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transition lottery. If so, perform a production that succeeds in blasting the bomb in the "Bombing Chance" production. It should be noted that the timing at which the bomb is successfully detonated when the long ART is won is arbitrary. For example, if the duration of the short ART is 3 games, the bomb may be successfully detonated in the 1st or 2nd game, or the bomb may be successfully detonated in the 3rd game. You may succeed in exploding the bomb at the beginning of the fourth game.

Further, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 can notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode during the precursory effect. In the example shown in FIG. 86 (C), since the push order combination is won during the “explosion chance” effect, which is the precursor effect of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in the push order combination. On the other hand, the order of pushing the correct answer is notified. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player during the precursory effect, so that the player is given a sense of loss during the precursory effect that should enhance the interest of the game. There is no chance of getting lost.

(Precursor method 2 regarding transition to a specific section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 87, another method of the precursor realization method regarding the transition to the second specific section will be described. In the above-mentioned precursor method 1, since the result of the transition lottery has already been determined at the start of the “explosion chance” effect, the result of the precursor effect has already been determined at the start of the precursor game. Another method described below is a method in which the result of the precursory effect can be determined during the precursory game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections of CZ (first specific section) and ART game state (second specific section) are provided, and the game in CZ is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the ART game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the pachislot machine 1 performs a transition lottery to CZ during the normal section and a transition lottery to ART during CZ. FIG. 87 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery. On the main control board 71, the lottery for shifting to the CZ is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed based on the combination of symbols. Specifically, when the combination of bell spilled stitches or the first symbol is displayed on the main control board 71, the transition to the ART gaming state is not performed, and the combination of bell symbols is displayed. , ART game state transition lottery is performed. Then, by notifying the push order bell of the correct push order during the CZ, it is possible to easily shift to the ART gaming state during the CZ.

In the pachislot machine 1, when the CZ is won in the transition lottery performed during the normal section, the “explosion chance” effect shown in FIG. 87 (C) is produced. This "explosion chance" effect continues, for example, for three games, and if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination during these three games, the correct push order is notified, and as a result, the game shifts to the ART game state. You can get a lottery. Then, when the CZ ends without winning the transition lottery to the ART game state, the sub-control board 72 ends the "explosion chance" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and shifts to the ART game state before the end of the CZ. If the lottery is won, the effect of successfully blasting the bomb is executed in the "explosion chance" effect.

The main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b in both the CZ and ART gaming states, but the lighting mode of the status indicator 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in different modes depending on the CZ and the ART gaming state, or may light in the same mode.

Further, the method of outputting the signal to the external device is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the CZ in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, and only when it wins the ART gaming state in the transition lottery, the signal is sent to the external device. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device regardless of whether the CZ is won in the transition lottery or the ART gaming state is won.

Further, the end conditions of the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and different types of end conditions may be used, or the same type of end conditions may be used.

Further, as a modification of the above example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of the so-called gap MB can be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, a payout of medals whose end condition of the MB exceeds 14, and a combination of symbols in which 14 medals are paid out or a combination of symbols in which 15 medals are paid out in the MB. In the MB in which is displayed, in the state where the notification is performed, in the first game in the MB, the push order in which the combination of the symbols to which 14 medals are paid out will be displayed is notified, and in the next game. , The combination of symbols for which 15 medals will be paid out will be displayed. By notifying the push order, 29 medals can be paid out, but in the state where the notification is not performed, 15 medals will be displayed. A combination of symbols to be paid out is often displayed, and refers to an MB that ends with the payout of 15 medals.

In the above example, it is necessary to wait until the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but if the short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the push order is pushed in the game of starting the short ART and the next game. Since the forward navigation occurs, it is not necessary to keep waiting until the push forward role is decided as the internal winning role, and the game is not delayed, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Also, even if you finish with a short ART, the game will not be delayed due to the gap MB, so you can get more medals than you can get more than the number of bell navigations in a normal game, and you can experience the profitable navigation consumption, so you can experience the long ART. It is possible to reduce the disappointment caused by not connecting to the game and suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

<How to save the number of navigations>
In a so-called pachislot machine that manages the number of navigations, which uses the number of navigations performed during the specific section as the end condition of the duration of the specific section, if the roles to be navigated (the roles to be notified) are concentrated and won. Navigation is concentrated, and as a result, a specific section ends immediately. If the specific section ends immediately, it may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, the method of saving the number of navigations will be described below with reference to FIG. 88.

When the number of navigations is used as the end condition of the continuation period of the specific section, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player even during the bonus state is notified. A necessary bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) that does not require notification of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the combination of symbols corresponding to MB1 is displayed, and sets the MB2 gaming state in which the combination of symbols corresponding to MB2 is displayed. Start.

As shown in FIG. 88 (B), during the MB1 game state, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols having different numbers of payouts according to the pushing order, “F_maintenance lip_1st + all small combinations” and “F_maintenance” While rip_2nd + all small wins and "F_maintenance rip_3rd + all small wins" are determined as internal winning combinations, only the combinations that display the same combination of symbols with the same number of payouts regardless of the push order are inside during the MB2 game state. Determined as the winning role. Then, during the MB1 game state, the number of payouts may differ depending on the push order. Therefore, when these combinations are determined as the internal winning combinations, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in the correct push order. Notify (pushing order in which 9-card combination is displayed).

By doing so, if the MB1 gaming state starts during the specific section, the game will be played while consuming the number of navigations, but if the MB2 gaming state can be started during the specific section, Can play a game without consuming the number of navigations, and can reduce the consumption speed of the number of navigations.

In the MB1 game state, a combination in which a combination of symbols having different payout numbers is displayed according to the push order is determined as an internal winning combination, while in the MB2 game state, the payout number is the same regardless of the push order. The method of realizing that only the winning combination for which the combination is displayed is determined as the internal winning combination is arbitrary. As an example, the MB1 game state is set as a 3-bet-only game state, and during the MB1 game state, only the winning combination related to the replay is individually drawn, and all the small winning combinations are individually drawn when the internal winning combination is determined. The stop control is different depending on the type of replay that has been saved. As a result, during the MB1 game state, it is possible to determine as the internal winning combination a combination in which a combination of symbols having a different number of payouts is displayed according to the pressing order. On the other hand, the MB2 game state is set to the game state dedicated to 2 bets, and the number of medals paid out is the same for all small wins at the time of 2 bets. As a result, during the MB2 game state, only the winning combination in which the combination of symbols having the same number of payouts is displayed regardless of the pressing order can be determined as the internal winning combination.

<Individual management of Lip Navi and Bell Navi>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94, a method of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation during a specific section will be described. In conventional pachislot machines, it is common to notify both the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state and the notification for increasing the number of medals during a specific section. By managing each of the above, it is possible to realize a new playability that has never existed before.

(Game example 1)
First, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91, a game example 1 in which the lip navigation and the bell navigation are individually managed will be described. This game example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections, Lipnavi AT and Bernavi AT, as specific sections. The Lipnavi AT provides notifications for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state, but does not provide notifications for increasing medals. Further, in the Bernavi AT, at least the notification for increasing the number of medals is given, and the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is given as necessary.

FIG. 89A is a game flow in Game Example 1. As shown in FIG. 89 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with three types of RT game states, an RT0 game state to an RT3 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. .. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state in which the player stays after the bonus ends, the initialization process, the setting change, or the like. Further, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state mainly used in the normal game. In addition, the RT2 game state is a game state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and if it shifts according to the notification, it is treated as a Lipnavi AT, and if it shifts regardless of the notification. Is a game state that is treated as a normal game. Further, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and is a gaming state mainly used in the Bernavi AT.

There is a possibility of shifting from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the bell spilled symbols is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), the combination of the bell spilled symbols is the combination of the push order roles "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd". Is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the push order in the game in which "" is determined as the internal winning combination. In the game in which the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are determined as the internal winning combination, when the correct answer is in the push order, the combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT1 game state, the winning combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, when a combination of bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combinations “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed. When the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed by the correct answer in the push order, the main control board 71 maintains the game state in the RT2 game state, and the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed by the incorrect answer in the push order. In this case, the gaming state is changed from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed. When the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed by the correct answer in the push order, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state, and the combination of the symbols of the replay is changed by the incorrect answer in the push order. When it is displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the RT2 gaming state.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when a combination of bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in the game in which the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 displays a combination of bell symbols according to the correct push order. While paying out 9 medals, the game state is maintained in the RT3 game state, and if a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed due to an incorrect push order, the number (or 0) is less than 9. While paying out the medals, the gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 90C, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the Lipnavi AT based on the internal winning combination. It should be noted that this transition lottery table indicates that the transition lottery to the Lipnavi AT is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the type of combination for which the transition lottery is to be performed is merely an example.

Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 90C, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT based on the combination of the displayed symbols. In this game example 1, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the Bernavi AT only when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed. Be sure to win the Bernavi AT.

In the illustrated example, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed for the transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT, that is, the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. It is supposed to be performed on the condition that the correct answer is given in the push order in the played game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 71 simply has the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" inside. If it is decided as the winning combination, a lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT may be performed.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the winning combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination during the RT2 gaming state, and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_321" during the other RT gaming states. F_RT3 transition rip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition rip_321 "are not determined as the internal winning combination, or during other RT gaming states, there is a lower probability than during RT2 gaming state the combination" F_RT3 transition rip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition rip_321 ". Is determined as the internal winning role. Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the transition lottery to the Bell Navi AT is performed more frequently than in the other RT gaming states, and the main control board 71 is in the other RT gaming states (particularly, the RT1 gaming state) during the RT2 gaming state. ) More frequently, the lottery for transition to Bernavi AT is performed.

In the pachislot machine 1 (main control board 71 and sub control board 72), when neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bernavi AT is won, the player is notified of the advantageous stop operation mode (correct answer pressing order). do not do. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when the Lipnavi AT is won, the notification associated with the Lipnavi AT is performed, and when the Bernavi AT is won, the notification associated with the Bernavi AT is performed.

Specifically, in the case of winning the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to. When either "F_RT3 transition lip_321" or the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the order of pressing the correct answer is notified. On the other hand, even when the Lipnavi AT is won, one of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination for the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Even if it is done, the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified.

Further, when the bell navigation AT is won, one of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination for the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. , Notify the correct push order. In the case of winning the Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition". When either "Rip_321" or the combination "F_Maintenance Lip_123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order may be notified or may not be notified.

By doing so, it is possible to treat during Lipnavi AT as a specific section for notifying to maintain the RT2 gaming state where the frequency of transition to Bernavi AT is high, and during Bernavi AT, medals can be awarded. It can be treated as a specific section for notifying to increase. As described above, in the game example 1, since the Lipnavi AT and the Bernavi AT have specific sections having different roles, the meaning of the notification differs depending on the type of the specific section for the player. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest without the notification becoming monotonous.

Further, during the Lipnavi AT, the notification for increasing the number of medals is not performed, so that the increase of medals can be suppressed. With pachislot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits of the player and the game store, but if the period of increase in medals is long, the profits that the player will get will be excessive, making it difficult to shift to a specific section. It is necessary to balance profits in other parts. In this regard, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the game example 1, there is a specific section called the Lipnavi AT, which does not notify the number of medals, in addition to the Bellnavi AT, which notifies the number of medals. It is possible to balance the interests of the player and the amusement store while realizing the playability that is easy to shift to.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section is made the same for each set value by performing the transition lottery performed based on the information that does not differ in the set values. .. In this respect, the transition lottery itself may be performed based on information that does not differ in the set values, but the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section may be different for each set value. The specific method is shown below.

In the above-mentioned game example 1, in response to the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" being determined as the internal winning combination (more specifically, the correct answer when determined as the internal winning combination). (According to the stop operation in the push order), the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT will be performed. Since the transition lottery is performed based on the information that does not differ in the set values, the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" have a probability according to the current gaming state regardless of the set value. Must be determined as. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability regardless of the set value during the RT2 gaming state. As described above, even in the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state, the winning combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" may be determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the main control During the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state (for example, the RT1 gaming state), the substrate 71 has a probability lower than a predetermined probability regardless of the set value, and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321". Is determined as the internal winning role.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the probability of winning the transition lottery to a specific section is the same regardless of the set value, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are inside. Depending on the winning combination (more specifically, depending on the stop operation in the correct push order when determined as the internal winning combination), the winning combination has the same probability regardless of the set value. It is necessary to carry out a transition lottery. Therefore, when the transfer lottery to the Bell Navi AT is performed, the main control board 71 performs the lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321", which trigger the lottery for transition to Bernavi AT, are determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT will be won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT is the same for each set value, but in this method, by giving a setting difference regarding the transition of the RT gaming state, the transition to the Bernavi AT is related. The degree of expectation is different for each set value.

Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state with a probability corresponding to the set set value. As described above, during the RT2 game state, the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed more frequently than in other RT game states. Therefore, this RT2 game is performed without setting a difference in the trigger of the transition lottery and the winning probability. By providing a setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT can be made different for each set value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 89 (B), the probability (lottery value information) of determining the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination is determined. , By making it different for each set value, it is possible to provide a setting difference regarding the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, the set value with a high probability of determining the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination is likely to shift to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, it is possible to show the characteristics of each set value regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT.

(Example of production in Game Example 1)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91, an production example in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1 will be described. FIG. 91 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the game when the effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 91 (A), the first game is in the RT1 game state, and is a game that has not won either the Lipnavi AT or the Bernavi AT. In the first game, since neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bellnavi AT was won, the status indicator 147b was turned off, and both the number of Lipnavi and the number of Bellnavi remained 0. The number of rip navigators includes any of the roles "F_RT2 transition rip_123" to "F_RT2 transition rip_321", the roles "F_RT3 transition rip_123" to "F_RT3 transition rip_321", and the role "F_maintenance rip_123". It is the number of times to notify the push order of the correct answer when it is decided as the winning combination, and the number of bell navigations is that any one of the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination. It is the number of times to notify the pressing order of the correct answer in the case.

Subsequently, in the second game, the lottery for transition to Lipnavi AT is won. Therefore, the status indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1, and the number of times of lip navigation is 5 times. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (a) of FIG. 91 (B) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays that the number of times of lip navigation has been given to the display unit 100, and also displays that the "search challenge" effect is started. The "search challenge" effect is an effect of searching for treasures performed during Lipnavi AT, and if the treasure can be found while the number of times of Lipnavi remains, it will be a success (Bernavi AT). Is.

Subsequently, in the third game, any of the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and promote the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from 5 to 4 in the third game. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (b) of FIG. 91 (B) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for shifting from the standby state (RT1 game state) to the treasure room (RT2 game state) on the display unit 100. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and then, as shown in (b) of FIG. 91 (B), the sub-control board 72 is displayed on the display unit 100. A display indicating that the item has arrived between the waiting period and the treasure is displayed.

Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the third game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the fourth game, any of the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is in the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and prompt the player to maintain the RT2 game state. Along with this notification, in the fourth game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from four to three. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (c) of FIG. 91 (B) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the RT2 gaming state is maintained and the search among the treasures is continued.

Subsequently, in the fifth game, any of the roles "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, but since it is in the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub The control board 72 does not notify the correct pressing order. Therefore, as shown in (d) of FIG. 91 (B), the sub-control board 72 displays the display unit 100 indicating that the pressing order is unknown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 91, since it is assumed that the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state in accordance with the display of the combination of the bell spilled symbols. Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that the display unit 100 has fallen from the treasure room (RT2 game state) to the standby time (RT1 game state).

Subsequently, in the sixth game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1 because the transition to the RT1 game state was performed in the fifth game. Further, in the sixth game, any of the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and promote the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the sixth game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from three to two. Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for shifting from the standby state (RT1 game state) to the treasure room (RT2 game state) on the display unit 100. After that, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the display unit 100 is displayed to indicate that it has arrived between the standby and the treasure.

Subsequently, in the seventh game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the sixth game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the seventh game, any of the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is in Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order. Along with this notification, in the seventh game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from two to one. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (f) of FIG. 91 (B) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the correct pressing order on the display unit 100.

Here, when any of the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed and the winning is won to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 indicating that the Bell Navi AT has been won. Further, depending on the winning of the Bell Navi AT, the initial value (10) is added to the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi, respectively. It should be noted that the number of rip navigators at the time of winning the Bernavi AT is 11 because one time remains as the number of rip navigators when the bell navigator AT is won.

After that, the game state becomes the Bell Navi AT from the eighth game, and the main control board 71 lights the state display 147b in the lighting pattern 3. In this Bell Navi AT, as long as the number of rip navigations remains, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the combinations "F_RT2 transition rip_123" to "F_RT2 transition rip_321" and the combinations "F_RT3 transition rip_123" to "F_RT3 transition". Notify the correct answer pressing order to the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" and the role "F_maintenance lip_123", and press the correct answer for the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection_3rd" as long as the number of bell navigations remains. Notify the order.

(Game example 2)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, a game example 2 in the case of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation will be described. In this game example 2, both Lip Navi and Bell Navi are performed during the specific section, and the number of notifications of both is managed individually. That is, in this game example 2, the number of times of both Lip Navi and Bell Navi is used as the end condition of the specific section. The lip navigator is a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state, and the bell navigation is a notification for increasing the number of medals.

FIG. 92 (A) is a game flow in Game Example 2. As shown in FIG. 92 (A), the game example 2 has a normal section and a specific section, and during the specific section, there is a high probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. (For example, the RT2 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state in the game example 1) and the lip low probability (for example, the RT1 gaming state in the game example 1) in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low.

In the game example 2, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to a specific section during the normal section, and when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal section to the specific section. .. In Game Example 2, the lottery for transition to a specific section may be performed by an arbitrary method.

Further, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0 times in the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in the game example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 give notifications for maintaining the RT game state in the high lip state for the number of times indicated by the number of rip navigations, and medals for the number of times indicated by the number of bell navigations. Notify to increase. Then, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation reach 0, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section.

Further, when the combination of the fall replay symbols is displayed during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the RT game state from the high rip state to the low rip state, and when the promotion replay symbol combination is displayed. , The main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the low lip state to the high lip state. The combination of the symbols of the fall replay and the promotion replay is arbitrary, but in accordance with the expression of Game Example 1, for example, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the fall replay, and the RT2 transition. The combination of the symbols of the lip and the RT3 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay.

In addition, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed when the push order is incorrect when the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, and the RT2 transition lip and RT3 The combination of the symbols of the transition lip is the correct answer when the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. Sometimes displayed. Therefore, the lip navigation in the game example 2 is a combination of the symbols of the fall replay by notifying the correct push order when the roles "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. When the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as internal winning combinations. This includes notifying the order of pressing the correct answer and prompting the display of the combination of symbols in the promotion replay.

If the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the combination of the replay symbols is displayed and the RT game state is displayed. Is maintained in the current RT gaming state. That is, when the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination in the high lip state, the main control board 71 displays the combination of the replay symbols (press). (Correct answer), while maintaining the RT game state in the high rip state, when the combination of the fall replay symbols is displayed (push order incorrect answer), the RT game state is changed from the high rip state to the low rip state. ..

Subsequently, FIG. 92B is a diagram showing the characteristics of the specific section of Game Example 2. As shown in FIG. 92 (B), the game example 2 has a plurality of states of a normal ART and a special state in a specific section. Comparing the normal ART and the special state, the normal ART is a state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is faster than that in the special state. Further, in Game Example 2, the number of rip navigators and the number of bell navigators are added during a specific section. When comparing the normal ART and the special state, the amount of the extra number of bell navigators is reduced during the special state as compared with the normal ART. On the other hand, increase the amount of additional Lipnavi. That is, in the special state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is suppressed, the number of lip navigations is given priority over the number of bell navigations and added.

(How to realize a special state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 93, a method of realizing a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the roles "F_3 choice bell A_1st", "F_3 choice bell A_2nd", "F_3 choice bell A_3rd", and the roles "F_3 choice bell B_12t", "F_3 choice bell B_2nd", and "F_3 choice" are the targets of the bell navigation. Bell B_3rd ". In the following, the roles "F_3 choice bell A_1st" to "F_3 choice bell A_3rd" are simply referred to as the role "F_3 choice bell A", and the roles "F_3 choice bell B_1st" to "F_3 choice bell B_3rd" are simply referred to as the role "F_3". Sometimes called "Choice Bell B".

As shown in FIG. 93 (A), when the bonus is not won, that is, when the winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination, either the combination "F_3 selection bell A" or the combination "F_3 selection bell B" The combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different. Specifically, for both the combination "F_3 selection bell A" and the combination "F_3 selection bell B", when the push order is correct, the combination of bell symbols is displayed, 9 medals are paid out, and the push order is irregular. When the answer is correct, a combination of bell-spilled symbols is displayed, and a number (or 0) of medals less than 9 is paid out.

Therefore, in the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, when either the combination "F_3 selection bell A" or the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section when the bonus is not won, Performs bell navigation (notification of correct push order) for the number of bell navigations. In other words, during a specific section when the bonus is not won, the number of bell navigations will decrease regardless of whether the role "F_3 choice bell A" or the role "F_3 choice bell B" is decided as the internal winning role. Become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), during the flags, that is, in the state where the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_3 choice bell B" is displayed according to the pressing order. Although the combinations of symbols are different, the combination of symbols displayed in the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is the same regardless of the pressing order. Specifically, for the role "F_3 choice bell B", a combination of bell symbols is displayed when the push order is correct, nine medals are paid out, and a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed, and a number (or 0) of medals less than 9 is paid out. On the other hand, for the role "F_3 choice bell A", the combination of bell symbols is displayed regardless of the pressing order, and nine medals are paid out.

Therefore, when the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section between the flags, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 do not notify the push order and between the flags. When the combination "F_3 choice bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section of the above, the bell navigation (notification of the correct push order) is performed for the number of times of the bell navigation. In other words, during the specific section between the flags, even if the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of bell navigations does not decrease, and the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination. The number of bell navigations will be reduced.

In this way, by distinguishing between the normal ART and the special state according to whether or not the role related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning role, the realization of a special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations can be suppressed. can do. That is, in the case of the above example, by setting the specific section at the time of non-winning of the bonus as a normal ART and setting the specific section between the flags as a special state, the realization of a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations can do.

(Additional example)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 94, a method of adding the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation will be described. The additional lottery table of FIG. 94 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the additional amount of the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations for each internal winning combination and game state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 adds the number of times of bell navigation and the number of times of lip navigation with reference to the addition lottery table shown in FIG. 94 (A). Note that FIG. 94 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of the degree of expectation of the addition according to the addition lottery table of FIG. 94 (A).

With reference to FIGS. 94 (A) and 94 (B), it can be seen that the expected degree of addition of the number of times of bell navigation and the degree of expectation of addition of the number of times of lip navigation are different between the normal ART and the special state. Specifically, in the addition based on cactus and weak cherry, the number of bell navigations is usually more likely to be added during ART, while the number of lip navigations is more likely to be added during special conditions. More specifically, during the special state, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is smaller than that during normal ART, and conversely, the amount of addition of the number of lip navigations is increased.
In the example shown in FIG. 94, the addition based on the strong cherry has the same addition expectation in the normal ART and in the special state.

In such a pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, the lip navigation and the bell navigation are managed individually in a specific section, the lip navigation is performed for the number of times of the lip navigation, and the bell navigation is performed for the number of times of the bell navigation. As a result, even if either the role targeted for Lip Navi or the role targeted for Bell Navi is concentrated and determined as the internal winning combination during a specific section, only one of the navigation times is consumed. And since the other number of navigations is not consumed, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, a normal ART and a special state are provided as specific sections, and the degree of expectation of addition differs depending on the current state. Specifically, during normal ART, where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is high, it is easy to add the number of bell navigations, and conversely, during a special state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is suppressed, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is reduced. , Increase the amount of additional lip navigation. As a result, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed, and as a result, the interest in a specific section is not impaired.

<How to select CZs with different end periods>
Subsequently, a method of selecting CZs having different end periods will be described with reference to FIG. 95. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the transition from the specific section to the normal section is performed without satisfying the end condition (limit processing). Further, since the specific section includes the CZ in addition to the ART gaming state, when the limit processing is performed, the ART gaming state continuously performed from the CZ has a gaming period corresponding to the number of games in which the CZ continues. It will be shortened. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select the CZ to be executed from the CZs having different end periods, and at the time of selection, the CZ considered to be preferable for the player can be easily selected. There is.

As shown in FIG. 95, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. Specifically, the CZ "short-term battle" shown in FIG. 95 (A) is a CZ with an end period of 0 games, and the CZ "game" shown in FIG. 95 (B) is a CZ with an end period of 1 game. Yes, the CZ "stable" shown in FIG. 95 (C) is a CZ with an end period of 10 games, and the CZ "turbulence" shown in FIG. 95 (D) is a CZ with an end period of 10 games. The CZ "long-term battle" shown in (E) is a CZ with an end period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the lottery for transition to the ART gaming state before the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and changes the gaming state to the ART gaming state. Transition.

Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (E) are selection screens for selecting CZ. A selection cursor for selecting a CZ is provided on this selection screen. In FIG. 95, the selection cursor points to the CZ "short-term battle" in FIG. 95 (A), the CZ "game" in FIG. 95 (B), and the CZ "stable" in FIG. 95 (C). In FIG. 95 (D), it refers to the CZ “turbulence”, and in FIG. 95 (E), it refers to the CZ “long-term battle”. This selection cursor, for example, switches the CZ to be selected with the passage of time.

The selection screen accepts the player's operation on the chance button (not shown), and the main control board 71 executes it assuming that the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor is selected at the timing when the chance button is operated. Accepts the selection of CZ and then starts the selected CZ. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as selecting the CZ "short-term battle", and then accepts the selection from the player, and then the CZ "short-term battle". Start the battle. The method of specifying the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor by the main control board 71 is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 can also count the interval at which the CZ pointed by the selection cursor is switched. The CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the substrate 71 can be specified.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the selection cursor points to the CZ "short-term battle" having the shortest end period in the initial state, and then points to other CZs in the order of the shortest end period with the passage of time. .. For example, the selection cursor points to CZ in the order of CZ "short-term battle", CZ "game", CZ "stable", CZ "turbulence", and CZ "long-term battle" with the passage of time.

Here, when the limit processing is performed as described above, the game period in the ART game state is shortened by the number of games in which the CZ continues, so that the CZ "short-term battle" with the shortest end period is a game. It is considered to be preferable for the person. In the pachislot machine 1, the CZ is selected based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor, but by pointing to the CZ "short-term battle" as the initial state of the selection cursor, the CZ that is kind to the player The selection method can be realized.

Further, depending on the player, the game may proceed without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the start lever 6 is operated and the game is started (that is, when a predetermined operation is performed) without accepting the operation for the chance button on the selection screen, the player has not made a selection. become. When the game is started without accepting the selection of the CZ in this way, the main control board 71 starts the CZ having the shortest end period among the plurality of CZs having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting the CZ, the main control board 71 performs the CZ "short-term battle" having the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. It is automatically selected, and then the CZ "short-term battle" is started. This makes it possible to realize a CZ selection method that is kind to the player.

It should be noted that such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in other words, in a state where the right to shift to CZ is granted. That is, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the CZ for performing a shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the ART gaming state, and in a state where the right to shift to the CZ is granted, a plurality of types of CZs. Accepts the selection of one CZ from among.

<Reel control at the start of a specific section>
Subsequently, the reel control at the time of starting the specific section will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reel stop control can display a combination of specific symbols such as "7-7-7" (hereinafter referred to as "AT start number") when starting a specific section. I do. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the specific section when it wins the lottery to shift to the specific section. The right to shift to the specific section is carried over until the gaming state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (deprived) when the gaming state shifts to the specific section. That is, when the main control board 71 satisfies the transition condition to the specific section (for example, the AT start result is displayed) while the transition right is granted, the game state is shifted to the specific section and the transition right is given. clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not (that is, the reel stop control). To make it different).

96 and 97 are views showing an example of a rotating cylinder stop initial setting table used for reel stop control, and are used in steps S9 and S12 of FIG. 49 described above. This rotation cylinder stop initial setting table is referred to when determining the reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel stop initial setting table is used when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in association with the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence or absence of the right to shift to a specific section. Specifies reel stop control information. The main control board 71 refers to the reel stop initial setting table, acquires reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, the game state, and the presence / absence of the transition right, and uses the reel stop control information to obtain the reel 3L. Stop 3C and 3R.

The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the game state, and the presence / absence of the transfer right includes the rotation cylinder stop number, the determination data for each pressing order (pull-in priority table number, pull-in priority selection table number), and table number selection. Value (change status, stop table data), 1st cylinder 1st stop table change data, 1st cylinder stop data table selection data (left 1st stop table), 1st cylinder 1st stop Table change Information including initial data selection value (change status, table number) and search order data table number.

The "judgment data for each pressing order" includes a pull-in priority order table number and a pull-in priority selection table number. The “draw-in priority table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table (not shown). The "draw-in priority selection table number" is a number for selecting the pull-in priority selection table (not shown).

The "table number selection data" is a value referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a change status and stop table data.

The "stop table number" is a number for selecting a stop table to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The "change status" is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referenced in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is the initial stage of the line status in the present embodiment. The state is A line. Here, when the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, and when the change status is "2", if the line status is A line, it is changed to B line.

The first stop reel is the first cylinder for the first cylinder first stop table change data, the first cylinder stop data table selection data, and the first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value. That is, it is the data referred to when the left reel is 3L.

"Table change data for the first stop of the first cylinder" indicates whether to use or change the same stop table after the first stop on the left after the second stop when the first stop reel is the left reel 3L. It is the data which shows. If there is a value (value other than 0) in the table change data for the first stop of the first cylinder, select the change data search table based on the planned stop position, search the data, and perform the second and subsequent stops. Select the stop table for.

The "first cylinder stop data table selection data" is a number for selecting the first cylinder stop data table (not shown) referred to when the first cylinder is stopped.

The "first table change initial data selection value for the first cylinder stop" is data referred to when the second and third cylinders are stopped, and includes a table number and a line status. The "table number" is a number for selecting a stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder, which is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The "change status" is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder selected based on the table number. If the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, if it is "2", it is changed to B line if the line status is A line, and if it is "3", it is changed to B line. If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

The "search order table number" is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of sliding pieces.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, different reel stop control information is used in the pachislot machine 1 depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 96 (A), which is referred to when the winning combination related to the bonus is not won, the reel stop number "17" is used for the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". In the reel stop control information of the above, and in the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table of FIG. 96 (B), which is referred to when the winning combination related to the bonus is won, for the same combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". The reel stop control information of the reel stop number "31" is specified. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information is changed according to the presence or absence of the winning combination of the bonus, so that the reel stop control is different when the winning combination of the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Can be made.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 96A and 97C, different reel stop control information is used in the pachislot machine 1 depending on whether or not the transfer right is granted. Specifically, in the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 96 (A), which is referred to when the transition right is not granted, the reel stop number "17" is assigned to the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". In the reel stop stop initial setting table of FIG. 97 (C), which is referred to when the reel stop control information is specified and the transition right is granted, the reel is rotated for the same combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". The reel stop control information of the stop number "41" is specified. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the transfer right, so that the reel stop control can be changed when the transfer lottery to a specific section is won.

Subsequently, FIG. 98 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol when the reel stop control is performed using the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 98, in a normal section to which the right to shift to a specific section is not granted, if the internal winning combination is "off", a combination of "out of place" symbols is displayed, and the internal winning combination is also displayed. When is the role "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd", the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, and the bell spilled or first appearance symbol is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect. The combination is displayed.

On the other hand, in the waiting section of the specific section to which the right to shift to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is "off", if the push operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result. Is displayed, and if the eye-pressing operation is inaccurate, a combination of "missing" symbols is displayed. In addition, when the internal winning combination is the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd", if the eye-pressing operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result is displayed, and the eye-pressing operation is not possible. If it is accurate, a combination of bells, spilled bells, or the first pattern is displayed.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to make the reel stop control different depending on the presence or absence of the right to shift to the specific section, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result is changed according to the stop operation of the player at the start of the specific section. The rotation of the reel can be stopped as shown.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control may be different depending on the type of the specific section of the transition destination. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 is granted the right to shift to one specific section and the one specific section. The reel stop control may be different depending on the case where the right to shift to another specific section different from the above is granted. Specifically, when the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, depending on whether the right to transfer to one specific section is granted or the right to transfer to another specific section is granted. A reel stop initial setting table may be provided so that the reel stop control information used is different.

As a result, the reel stop control can be changed according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination. Therefore, for example, there are cases where the reel is shifted to a specific section which is more advantageous for the player and cases where the reel is shifted to another specific section. Therefore, the combination of symbols displayed at the start of a specific section can be changed. For the player, the degree of advantage of the subsequent game differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, so that the player has a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section. The interest of the game is improved.
In the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the internal winning combination differs depending on the bonus state and the RT game state, but the winning probability of the internal winning combination does not differ depending on the type of the specific section.

Here, in recent years, a pachislot machine in which another reel (hereinafter, “second main reel”) is provided in addition to a reel (hereinafter, “first main reel”) controlled according to the result of internal lottery is also known. ing. For example, a pachi-slot machine having three reels of the above-mentioned reels 3L, 3C, and 3R as the first main reel and a reel provided in only one row to the right of the reel 3R as the second main reel is known. .. The reels having different stop controls depending on the result of the shift lottery may be the first main reel or the second main reel.

When the stop control of the second main reel is changed according to the result of the shift lottery, the main control board 71 uses the first main reel according to the operation of the start lever 6 in the game in which the shift lottery to the specific section is performed. The rotation of the second main reel is started before the rotation of the second main reel is started. Then, when the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel according to the result of the transition lottery to the specific section. Specifically, when the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so that a symbol that is not displayed if the lottery is not won can be displayed. When the rotation of the second main reel is stopped according to the result of the transition lottery to the specific section in this way, the main control board 71 then starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R. However, in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, a stop button dedicated to the second main reel may be provided. Good. Further, the second main reel may be provided in a plurality of reels instead of one.
By separating the stop operation for the result of the transition lottery of the specific section and the stop operation for the result of the internal lottery in this way, both sides can be enjoyed and the player can easily grasp the game.

<Control when changing settings>
Subsequently, the control at the time of changing the setting will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the control contents when the setting is changed and when the main RAM 33 is cleared. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a new set value is set (when the setting is changed), the main control board 71 is a combination related to a bonus carried over as an internal winning combination even during the flag period. Is maintained without clearing, the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transition lottery is maintained even during the waiting section that is winning the transition lottery of the specific section. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even if a new set value is set during the flag interval, the specific section, or the standby section, the gaming state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. ..
The case where a new setting value is set (when the setting is changed) is not limited to the case where the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 and the same setting such as setting 1 to setting 1. It also includes the case of resetting the value (so-called resetting to the same setting).

On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control board 71 clears all the gaming states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus when the RAM is cleared during the period between the flags, and ends the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section. The game state is shifted to the normal section, and when the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the shift lottery is cleared.

In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section, but maintains the specific section as it is when the setting is changed during the specific section. From the game store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear a specific section while changing the set value, so that the game store side can be given various options regarding the operation of the pachislot machine.

The setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 69), and the RAM clear operation can be performed, for example, via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 69). It can be carried out.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. The detailed description of the configuration and control of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment in the same manner as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment will be omitted. Further, the "specific section" described in the second embodiment is referred to as an "advantageous section" in the third embodiment, and a gaming state in which so-called navigation and production modes are added is referred to as a "ball ejection state". In addition, when different terms are used with the same or similar elements as those described in the first to third embodiments, the terms used in the first to third embodiments are added in parentheses at the end of the terms. The features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first to third embodiments.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the third embodiment]
First, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a transition flow of the ball ejection state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a process during the MB operation in the ball ejection state. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an outline of a ball ejection state and a game state in a list. The ball ejection state and mode shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are controlled by the main control board 71.

As shown in FIG. 100, the ball ejection state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control board 71, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned on by the control of the main control board 71. Will be done. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section depending on the off state, and notifies the player that he / she is staying in the advantageous section depending on the lit state. However, in the present embodiment, even if the player stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is possible to suppress the notification of the necessary stop operation information to the player depending on the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are (unacceptable) and acceptable states. As shown in FIG. 101, the MB operates according to the winning of the MB in both the normal section and the advantageous section. In this embodiment, a short MB (abbreviated as "SMB") that always wins a prize in any pushing order at the time of winning and ends with 1G with the payout of more than one medal as an end condition, and basically the winning. There is a long MB (abbreviated as "LMB") that wins a prize after passing through a state between flags and ends by digesting a plurality of games on the condition that more than 81 medals are paid out. LMB has no setting difference in winning probability, and SMB has a setting difference in winning probability. In the following description, SMB and LMB are collectively referred to as MB.

In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 controls the ball ejection state by performing various lottery processes, and the various lottery processes for controlling the ball ejection state are roughly classified into a normal process and a common process. Divided. The main control board 71 performs only the normal processing during the normal section and does not perform the common processing, and can perform both the normal processing and the common processing during the advantageous section.

The normal process is a process performed according to the internal winning combination and the displayed symbol combination. In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the main control board 71 draws various lots according to the determined internal winning combination. Performs processing and controls the ball ejection state. This normal process is a lottery process performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when a combination having no setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 102, while the LMB is operating, various normal processes are performed according to the internal winning combination, but while the SMB is operating, the normal processing based on the internal winning combination is not performed. This is because the LMB has no setting difference in the winning probability, so there is no setting difference in the probability of staying in the state where the LMB is operating, but the SMB stays in the state where the SMB is operating because there is a setting difference in the winning probability. There is a setting difference in the probability of doing. Since the normal process is a process performed without a setting difference, the setting difference appears when the probabilities of staying in the state are different. Therefore, the main control board 71 does not perform the normal process during the operation of the SMB.

Further, the common process is a process performed when the bonus is activated, and in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs various lottery processes when the MB is operated to control the ball ejection state. This common process is a lottery process performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when the MB is operated. The operation time of the MB means the timing at which the MB (bonus) is activated when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (see S235 in FIG. 62 of the first embodiment). In addition, unlike the above-mentioned common process, the main control board 71 can execute various lottery processes by the common process both when the SMB is operating and when the LMB is operating.

In the normal section, "normal" is executed as the ball ejection state. As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, "normal" is an initial state after the power is turned on or after the setting is changed, and all variables related to the advantageous section are cleared after the end of the advantageous section described later, and this "normal" Move to the state. In "normal", navigation is not performed, and an advantageous section transition lottery is executed for each unit game (one game). If you win in the advantageous section transition lottery, you will win the advantageous section. There are "normal winning" and "ART winning" in the advantageous section winning. In the case of "normal winning", the next game shifts to "normal advantage", which will be described later, as a ball-out state. On the other hand, in the case of "ART winning", it shifts to "ART precursor" which will be described later as a ball ejection state. The advantageous section transition lottery will be described later.

In the advantageous section, "normal advantage", "SCZ", "ART precursor", "MB_HCZ", "additional specialization zone", "ART", and "ending" can be executed as the main payout states. The advantageous section is a state in which a navigation (bell navigation) that can win a prize in the push order small winning combination (in this embodiment, "push order bell" or "batting order bell") of the maximum number of payouts can be generated, and according to the advantageous section It cannot be terminated until the privilege is granted. In addition, in this embodiment, the privilege according to the advantageous section means the generation of the bell navigation (winning of the push order bell) or the operation of the bonus (MB). In other words, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section may be terminated until at least one of the termination conditions such as the occurrence of the bell navigation (winning of the push order bell) or the operation of the bonus (MB) is satisfied. Can not. When the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end lottery described later is executed, and the process shifts to "normal" according to the lottery result. Advantageous section end Depending on the lottery result of the lottery, the advantageous section may be continued. However, in the present embodiment, except when the MB is activated, the bell navigation is not generated even if the push order bell is hit from the start of the advantageous section until, for example, 100 G has passed (notification suppression). State, also called "waiting section"). That is, in the present embodiment, as a general rule, the first bell navigation can be generated according to the winning of the push order bell on the condition that the predetermined number of games (100 G) has passed without the MB operating from the start of the advantageous section ( Bell navigation can be generated, notification is allowed). As an exception, even before the predetermined number of games (100G) has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section, if the MB is won, the bell navigation can be generated (notification allowable state). In addition, regardless of the number of games, the winning of the push order bell may be managed by a flag, and the bell navigation non-occurrence state and the bell navigation generation possible state may be controlled according to the presence or absence of the flag and the number of flags. Further, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is set even before the end condition of the advantageous section (pushing order bell winning, bonus (MB) operation) is satisfied. Limit processing such as forcibly ending and shifting to the normal section (“normal” state) is executed. For example, when the ART state reaches 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section, the limit process is executed even if the number of remaining games in the ART remains. As a result, the advantageous section is terminated together with ART, and the section is shifted to the normal section.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the "normal advantage" shifts to the "normal win" by the advantageous section lottery in the "normal". In addition, "normal advantage" shifts to the case where a lottery result that continues in the advantageous section end lottery at the end of "ART" is obtained, and also when the remaining 0G is left due to ART non-winning in "SCZ" described later. To do. In the "normal advantage", the SCZ lottery and the ART lottery described later are executed. When the SCZ lottery is won, the state shifts from "normal advantage" to the state of "SCZ" described later, and when the ART lottery is won, the state shifts from "normal advantage" to the state of "ART precursor" described later.

The "normal advantage" includes a normal mode in which the "ART" winning probability of the ART lottery is different, such as "low probability", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", and "next precursor". The type of the normal mode is initially determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery, which will be described later, when the advantageous section lottery results in the "normal win" in the "normal". In the normal mode in the "normal advantage", the normal mode transition lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and basically the mode is promoted to the mode in which the winning probability of the ART lottery is high or the mode is maintained according to the lottery result.

Further, the "normal advantage" includes SCZ modes in which the winning probabilities of "SCZ" such as "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", "high accuracy C", and "high accuracy D" are different. .. The type of SCZ mode is initially "low accuracy" and is promoted / fallen or maintained by the SCZ mode transition lottery performed during the "normal advantage". In the present embodiment, the SCZ mode transition lottery performed during the "normal advantage" includes the SCZ mode transition lottery performed according to the winning combination, the SCZ mode transition lottery performed when the MB is activated, and the progress during the "normal advantage". There is an SCZ mode transition lottery dedicated to when the specified number of games is reached, which is performed when the number of games reaches the specified number of games. Here, in the SCZ mode transition lottery performed according to the winning combination, the SCZ mode basically falls or is maintained in a mode in which the winning probability of "SCZ" is low, and in the SCZ mode transition lottery performed when the MB is activated, it is basically. In particular, the SCZ mode is promoted or maintained in a mode in which the winning probability of "SCZ" is high.

In addition, the SCZ mode transition lottery dedicated to reaching the specified number of games is executed when, for example, the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" reaches 20G, 40G, or 80G, and is promoted or maintained in a mode in which the winning probability of "SCZ" is high. Will be done. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage" reaches 120 G, the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated lottery mode (high probability D), and the winning probability increases in the SCZ lottery and the ART lottery from the beginning. After the "Hamari Ceiling", which is the dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D), is set, the advantageous section end lottery (see FIG. 122), which will be described later, will be performed as an opportunity to shift from "normal advantage" to "normal". It is desirable that there is no such thing and that the "ART" winning is substantially confirmed. By taking such a remedy, it is possible to give benefits to the player who has reduced the number of medals by advancing the game for about 120 games without winning the push order bell or MB. Even if you are unfortunately unable to pull the push order bell or MB (winning) in the "normally advantageous" state, you will be able to proceed with the game with the expectation of reaching the "Hamari ceiling", and the game will be played. It is possible to prevent the decline in the interest of the game. The number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" means the number of games elapsed from the transition from "normal" to "normal advantage" to the transition to "ART" or "normal". At this time, it may shift to "SCZ" or "MB_HCZ" before shifting to "ART" or "normal", but the number of elapsed games in this "SCZ" and the number of elapsed games in "MB_HCZ" can be determined. It may or may not be included in the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage". If the number of elapsed games in "SCZ" and the number of elapsed games in "MB_HCZ" are not included, "SCZ" or "MB_HCZ" will be used in "normal advantage" after "SCZ" or "MB_HCZ" is completed. The number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" may be counted by taking over the number of elapsed games counted before the transition, or the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" may be newly counted from the beginning. Good.

Further, in the "Hamari ceiling" mode (high accuracy D), only "ART" may be drawn, or only "SCZ" may be drawn. In addition, the probability of winning "ART" or "SCZ" is higher than that of each normal mode and SCZ mode, and when the "Hamari Ceiling" is reached, it becomes difficult to win "ART" or "SCZ". It is desirable to prevent it from occurring in order to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, even if you win the "SCZ" and fail in the "SCZ", you can return to the "Hamari Ceiling" mode (high accuracy D), and benefit more than the "ART" winning section, which is the medal increase section. It is desirable to guarantee. In addition, if you win "SCZ" in the "Hamari Ceiling" mode (high accuracy D) where the benefits of "ART" or higher are confirmed, the number of games until "ART", which is the medal increase section, is started as a result. However, if you win the "ART" via the "SCZ", the ART will start from the "additional specialization zone" described later, so it will be consumed during the "SCZ" of about 5 games. Even if you consider the medals, the expected value of the medals that can be obtained is higher than when you win directly to "ART", so even though "ART" is confirmed, the medals are reduced by extra chance games. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, in the "normal advantage", the winning probability of the MB described later is about 1/17, and the possibility of winning the MB is high by the time it reaches 100G. Then, when the MB wins, the bell navigation can be generated, the advantageous section end lottery described later is executed after the MB operation is completed, and the process shifts to "normal" according to the lottery result. In short, if you shift to "normal advantage" and exceed the predetermined number of games (100G), you will be in a state where bell navigation can be generated, but there is a possibility that you will win a prize in a game where MB is established by the time you reach 100G or after a state between flags. Since it is high, the average number of "normally advantageous" staying games is about 25G. As will be described in detail later, the MB symbol combination is pulled in 1 (in all push orders, which) so that the player does not intentionally delay the winning of the MB and the ball output rate increases. It is desirable to configure the symbol arrangement and reel stop control so that the prize can be won even if the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are stopped at the timing.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the “SCZ” shifts to the SCZ winning by SCZ lottery in the “normal advantage”. The "SCZ" is a chance zone (CZ) that is relatively easy to win the "ART" described later. There are types of "SCZ" such as "normal" and "legend" in which the winning probability of the ART lottery differs depending on the SCZ mode. For example, when the SCZ mode is "high probability A" and the type is "legend", the probability of winning ART is higher than when the SCZ mode is "high probability A" and the type is "normal". Basically, when the type is "Legend", the probability of winning ART is higher than when it is "Normal". The type of SCZ is determined by a lottery regardless of the role. If the ART lottery is won during the "SCZ", the state shifts from the "SCZ" to the "additional specialization zone" described later. When the specified number of games (5G) of "SCZ" is completed without winning the ART lottery, the game shifts to "normal advantage". In addition, in "SCZ", the navigation of the winning push order bell is basically not performed. Further, the type of "SCZ" may be determined by referring to the internal winning combination of the unit game (game) won in the SCZ lottery. For example, when the "SCZ" is won with the winning of the "strong bell", the "legend" may be selected more easily than when the winning of another role is used. Further, the type of "SCZ" may refer to the SCZ mode at the time of winning "SCZ", and "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", "high accuracy C", "high accuracy". The selection rate of "Legend" may be different for each SCZ mode such as "D" or a part thereof. In addition, in the above-mentioned "Hamari ceiling" mode (high accuracy D), the player's willingness to play is increased by providing benefits such as the confirmation of "Legend" and providing relief measures for the player who has reduced the number of medals. It may be a specification that suppresses a decrease. In addition, during "SCZ", ART lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination for 5 games, but at the time of loss, it is considered that the internal winning combination is not winning, so ART lottery is not performed. May be. In addition, the ART lottery may be performed with reference to at least one of the internal winning combination and the stop result. When the ART lottery is performed based on the stop roll, the player can enjoy the roll on the reel, and when the ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination, the control load of the main control board 71 is reduced. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the “ART precursor” shifts by becoming an ART winning by ART lottery in “normal” or “normal advantage”. The "ART precursor" shifts to "ART" through the ART preparation state after the specified number of games have been exhausted. However, if the normal mode stays in "special" and shifts to "ART precursor" due to the winning of ART, it shifts to "ART" via the "additional specialization zone" described later. In the "ART precursor", the rank-up lottery of the initial mode of various modes used during ART from the start is executed. Basically, the higher the rank of the various modes used during ART, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, if the rank can be increased in the rank-up lottery during "ART precursor", immediately after the start of "ART" Various modes (initial modes) are advantageous modes for the player.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, "MB_HCZ" is transferred by winning the LMB regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section. In "MB_HCZ", the HCZ mode promotion lottery and the ART lottery regardless of the role are executed. In the HCZ mode, the higher the rank, the more advantageous the player. When the operation of the LMB is completed by winning the ART lottery, the process shifts from "MB_HCZ" to "ART" through the state of the "additional specialization zone" described later. When the operation of the LMB is completed without winning the ART lottery, the state shifts from "MB_HCZ" to the original payout state (for example, "normal" or "normal advantage").

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the “additional specialization zone” is a period during which ART is likely to be added, and the number of games specified for the ART winning in “SCZ” or “MB_HCZ” or the “ART precursor”. Migrate after the end. Although details will be omitted, in the present embodiment, a plurality of "additional specialization zones" are provided, and in the "additional specialization zone", an additional lottery for the number of ART games is executed according to the type of the additional specialization zone. The type of "additional specialization zone" can be earned arbitrarily. For example, a plurality of additional specialization zones having different average additions may be provided, and a plurality of additional specialization zones having different additional game characteristics may be provided. It may be provided. After the specified number of games in the "additional specialization zone" has been exhausted, if you win the end lottery, if there is stock in the extra specialization zone, it will be in the state of "additional specialization zone" as it is, and if there is no stock in the extra specialization zone, "ART" Move to.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the “ART” is a so-called ART state, and shifts from the “additional specialization zone” or the “ART precursor”. "ART" has modes having different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery such as ART mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode, and additional lottery and various mode transition lottery are executed. For "ART", for example, 100G is given as the initial number of games, and the number of games is added according to the result of the additional lottery. At the end of the number of games of "ART", an advantageous section lottery regardless of the winning combination is executed, and if the lottery result is "continuation", it shifts to "normal advantage", while if it is "end", it shifts to "normal". To do.

The ART mode has a plurality of modes having different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery during ART called "mode 0", "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C", and basically "mode 0". Is the most disadvantageous ART mode, and additional lottery during ART is advantageous in the order of "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" ("mode C" is the most advantageous). During ART, the ART mode transition lottery is executed, and the ART mode shifts according to the result of this transition lottery. The transition to ART mode basically maintains the current ART mode or falls to an ART mode lower than the current ART mode (falls from "mode C" to "mode B", " Fall from "mode B" to "mode A", or fall from "mode A" to "mode 0" (note that it may include two or more steps of fall). Then, when the ART mode falls to the lowest "mode 0", the additional lottery during the ART is suppressed. On the other hand, when the ART mode is other than "mode 0" ("mode A", "mode B", "mode C"), the additional lottery etc. is not suppressed and the additional lottery etc. is performed with a normal probability. Win. In the present embodiment, when the ART mode is other than "mode 0", the winnings are all the same for the additional lottery and the like, but the ease of falling to "mode 0" where the additional lottery and the like are suppressed is easy. Since each ART mode is different, the degree of advantage such as additional lottery during ART is different. The ART mode is maintained or falls in the transition lottery by the normal processing, but may be promoted by the transition lottery by the common processing at the time of MB operation.

In the present embodiment, in the ART mode "mode 0", the additional lottery during ART is suppressed, but the additional lottery during ART may be prohibited instead of being suppressed. In a normal pachislot machine, the addition during ART is performed with a so-called rare role as an opportunity, but a weak rare role and a strong rare role may be provided as a rare role that triggers the addition. Here, when the additional lottery or the like is prohibited, the additional lottery will not be performed even when the strong rare role is won, and the player is likely to feel dissatisfied. In this respect, by suppressing the additional lottery as in the present embodiment, the additional lottery can be performed at the time of winning the "strong bell" which is a strong rare role, so that the player does not feel dissatisfied.

In addition, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode have different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery during ART such as "normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", and "ultra high accuracy", respectively. Basically, "normal" is the most disadvantageous mode, and "high-accuracy preparation", "high-accuracy", and "ultra-high-accuracy" are advantageous in the order of additional lottery during ART ("" "Ultra high accuracy" is the most advantageous). Chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode are managed individually. For example, in a certain game, each mode may be a different mode (chance A mode "high accuracy", chance B mode "super". High accuracy ", Chance C mode" Normal "), some modes may be common (Chance A mode" High accuracy ", Chance B mode" High accuracy ", Chance C mode" Normal "), all modes May be common (chance A mode "high accuracy", chance B mode "high accuracy", chance C mode "high accuracy"). During ART, a transition lottery is executed for each mode, and each mode shifts individually according to the result of the transition lottery.

In the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode, the triggers for the addition during the ART to be managed are different. In the present embodiment, the chance B mode is a mode for managing the additional lottery based on the "SP lip A2" described later (see FIG. 134), and the chance C mode is the additional lottery based on the "SP lip A1" described later. It is a mode for managing (see FIG. 135), and the chance A mode is a mode for managing additional lottery based on other combinations (see FIG. 133). The present invention is characterized in that individual modes are managed for each additional trigger, and the additional triggers managed by each mode are not limited to those described above. As an example, a mode to manage the addition based on the internal winning combination, a mode to manage the addition when the cycle is reached, a mode to manage the addition when the bonus is activated, a mode to manage the addition during the bonus operation, and an addition during ART preparation. It is possible to manage individual modes for each additional trigger, such as a mode for managing and a mode for managing additional charges while waiting for ART to end.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the ball ejection state may shift to the “ending” during the “ART”. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains. Although the limit processing itself is performed when 1500 games are reached, since the pachislot machine 1 internally manages the number of remaining games, it is possible to grasp in advance whether or not to reach 1500 games in the future before reaching 1500 games. it can. Therefore, the main control board 71 shifts the payout state to the "ending" when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or more than the specified value. In the case of shifting to the "ending", since it is decided that the limit processing will be performed in the future, the main control board 71 does not perform all the lottery related to the addition. It should be noted that the threshold value of the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section that triggers the transition to the "ending" can be arbitrarily set. As an example, since the limit processing is performed when 1500 games are reached, the threshold value may be set to 1500 games, but in the present embodiment, when the limit processing is performed, the ending effect between 100 games is performed, so that the threshold value is 1400 games. It is supposed to be. Then, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section reaches 1400 games, the ending effect of 100 games is performed after the 1400 games are digested, and the limit processing is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, "MB" is a so-called bonus state, and can be generated according to a winning in either a normal section or an advantageous section except during LMB operation. In "MB", a normal mode transition lottery, an SCZ mode transition lottery, an ART mode transition lottery, a lottery for adding the number of games, and the like are executed.

[Game state controlled by the main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a gaming state under the control of the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming states include RT0 and RT1 having a relatively low replay winning probability, and RT2 and RT3 having a relatively high replay winning probability. RT0 is the initial state after the setting change or the game state after the end of LMB, and is the state of staying when the ball ejection state is "normal", and when the RT1 transition symbol or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, RT1 Move to. RT1 is a state of staying mainly when the ball ejection state is "normal", and when the RT2 transition lip is displayed, it shifts to RT2. RT2 is in the middle of the transition to RT3, and when the RT3 transition rip is displayed, it shifts to RT3. RT3 is a so-called ART state in which the payout state corresponds to "ART" or "additional specialization zone", and shifts to RT1 via the display of the RT1 transition symbol or the RT1 transition lip.

The initial state after the setting change is always the "normal" state at RT0, while the initial state after the power is turned on without the setting change is the gaming state (generally RT1) before the power is turned off. Until then, it will be in the "normal" state. In the initial state after the setting change, if the advantageous section is won in the "normal" state of RT0, the advantageous section becomes relatively advantageous compared to the case where the advantageous section is won in the initial state after the power is turned on without the setting change. .. This will be described later with reference to FIG. 146.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 104 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 21 symbol positions "0" to "20" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "20" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "20" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "Black BAR", "Red BAR", "Red 7", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Replay C", "Bell A", "Bell B", and "Bell C". And "Bell D" are included.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 104, when the reel index is detected, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0", and the reel 3L Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions "0" to "20" are assigned to each of the 21 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C, and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 104, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 104 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "black BAR", "red BAR", "red 7", "replay A", "replay B", "replay C", and "bell A" as described above. , "Bell B", "Bell C" and "Bell D".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "black BAR" symbol (symbol code 1), and similarly, each symbol of "red BAR" to "bell D" (symbol code 2 to 10). Also, "00000010" to "0000001011" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. The symbol combination table is used when a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and the combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the benefits (the number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the prize is won. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous operation device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

Here, in the present embodiment, when the number of medals provided for the unit game is "2" (at the time of 2BET), the left column of the 3x3 symbols displayed in the display window 4 Two lines are valid: the bottom line connecting the lower row, the lower row of the middle row, and the lower row of the right row, and the Oyama line connecting the lower row of the left row, the middle row of the middle row, and the lower row of the right row. When the number of medals used for the unit game is "3" (at the time of 3BET), it becomes a line, and among the 3x3 symbols displayed in the display window 4, the middle and middle of the left column. One line of the center line connecting the middle row of the row and the middle row of the right column is the effective line. It should be noted that only 2BET games are possible while the SMB is operating, and only 3BET games are possible while the LMB is operating and the MB is not operating.

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored and "data (bits corresponding to the combination of symbols in 1-byte data)" stored in the storage area. Data for specifying) ”is specified.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination.

With reference to FIG. 105, for example, the combination names "S_red CL lip_01" to "S red CL lip_18" are combinations of symbols related to "W-matched lip". More specifically, in the combination names "S_red CL lip_01" to "S_red CL lip_18", both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols.

In addition, in the combination of the symbols related to the combination name "S_red CL rip_01" among the "W-matched rips", both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" are displayed side by side in a straight line. In other combinations of symbols, both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" are not displayed side by side in a straight line. This is because the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" may not be stopped and displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation due to the arrangement of the symbols arranged on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the combination name. The symbol combinations other than "S_red CL lip_01" indicate the symbol combinations that are displayed instead when the so-called eye-pressing operation is not appropriate. This also applies to other symbol combinations such as "Red BAR Lip".

Further, the combination names "S_red XU lip" to "S_red XD lip_06" are a combination of symbols related to "red BAR lip", and three symbols "red BAR" can be displayed side by side in a straight line. Is a combination of. Further, the combination names "S_red 7CL lip_01" and "S_red 7CL lip_02" are a combination of symbols related to "W-matched lip", and both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" are linear. It is a combination of symbols that can be displayed side by side. Further, the combination names "S_red 7XU lip_01" to "S_red 7XD lip_04" are a combination of symbols related to "red 7 lip", and three symbols "red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols.

With reference to FIGS. 106 and 107, the combination names "S_common lip 1_01" to "S_common lip 3_04" are a combination of symbols related to "red BAR fanning", and the symbol "red BAR" is linear. Although two can be displayed side by side, three are a combination of symbols that are not lined up. Similarly, the combination names "S_common lip 4_01" to "S_common lip 6_03" are a combination of symbols related to "red 7 fanning", and two symbols "red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line. Three are a combination of symbols that are not lined up.

That is, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols in which three symbols "red BAR" can be displayed in a straight line is called a "red BAR lip", and two symbols "red BAR" are displayed in a straight line. The combination of symbols that can be obtained but the three are not lined up is called "red BAR fanning". Similarly, a combination of symbols in which three symbols "Red 7" can be displayed in a straight line is called a "red 7 lip", and although two symbols "Red 7" can be displayed in a straight line, 3 The combination of symbols that are not lined up is called "Red 7 Fan". Further, a combination of symbols in which both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" can be displayed side by side in a straight line is called a "W-aligned lip".

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 109 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of RT0 to RT3, MB inside, and MB (operating).

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of RT0 to RT3 shown in FIG. 109, it can be seen that the types of the winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination are different in each game state. By the way, in RT0 to RT3 or MB, the push order bells ("F_4 choice bell 1A (No.34)" to "F_4 choice bell 4B (No.41)") have an internal winning probability of about 1/4. Determined as a role.

In addition, SMB is a bonus combination having a setting difference, and can be determined as a single winning combination of "SMB (No. 48)". On the other hand, LMB is a bonus combination with no setting difference, and can be determined as a duplicate winning combination of "LMB + F_Further Lip B (No. 49)" or "LMB + F_XD Lip (No. 50)". Here, although FIG. 109 shows only the internal lottery table for setting 1, SMBs having a setting difference between RT0 to RT3 are determined and set as internal winning combinations with a probability of about 1/18 in setting 1. In 6, it is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/15. In addition, when SMB and LMB are added, the MB (“SMB (No. 48)” to “LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50)”) in RT0 to RT3 has a probability of about 1/17 of the internal winning in setting 1. It is determined as a combination, and in setting 6, it is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/15.

In addition, "SMB" is a single win only, and the symbol combination corresponding to "SMB" is pulled in 1 (in all pressing orders, at what timing the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are stopped, it can be used for other purposes. The symbol arrangement and reel stop control are designed so that the prize can be won as long as it is not hindered), and the prize is always won in the established game (the game that won the prize for the first time, not carried over from the non-winning bonus state), so it may be carried over. Absent. In the established game, "LMB" is internally won in duplicate with the replay, and the replay is given priority over "LMB". Therefore, when "LMB" is established, there is always a gap between the flags. It shifts to the inside of MB which is the state. Then, since the symbol combination corresponding to "LMB" is also drawn in 1, a prize is always won unless a small winning combination or a replay winning combination that gives priority to the bonus is established at the same time in the inter-flag state. With such a role configuration, the player intentionally avoids winning the MB by pushing, delaying the satisfaction of the end condition of the advantageous section, and increasing the arrival rate to the "Hamari ceiling". It is possible to prevent the strategy and prevent unexpected damage to the hall side.

In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 109, the lottery values of "F_RT1 middle lip 1 (No. 1)" to "F_common lip (No. 24)" between inside the MB and during the MB (operation) are omitted. However, in the inside of the MB and in the MB, the lottery value according to the RT state at that time is specified. Further, during the MB, the lottery values of "F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_1 card combination (No. 47)" are omitted, but during the operation of the MB, regardless of the internal lottery process. Win all small roles ("F_4 choice bell 1A (No.34)" to "F_1 card combination (No.47)").

As described above, in the MB, the winning probability of the current RT state (that is, the lottery value shown in FIG. 109) is inherited and the lottery is performed for the replay combination, while the lottery for the small combination is not performed. , All small roles can be decided as internal winning roles. As illustrated in FIG. 102, the LMB inherits the internal RT state that shifts due to the internal winning of the LMB combination (No. 49, 50 in FIG. 109) during the LMB operation, and the SMB takes over the SMB combination (No. 49, 50 in FIG. 109). The RT state of any of RTs 0 to 3, which is the RT state in the game internally won in .48), will be inherited during the SMB operation. As shown in FIG. 103, the transition to RT0 (low RT) occurs after the end of the operation of the LMB, but the SBM does not change the RT state in any of the cases of internal winning, start of operation, and end of operation. By not shifting from high RT to low RT triggered by SMB with a small number of acquisitions and a high winning probability, it is easy to maintain high RT and the rate of increase in ball output by "ART" is not reduced. ..

In addition, the method for determining the internal winning combination in MB is not limited to the above. For example, in the MB, the internal lottery table according to the current RT state is referred to (that is, the internal lottery table for the MB is not specified), and all the above-mentioned winning numbers (“F_4 choice bell 1A (No. 34)). ) ”To“ F_1 card combination (No. 47) ”), so that it can be determined whether or not it is a win based on the specified lottery value, and then all the small combinations (“F_1 choice bell) 1A (No. 34) ”to“ F_1 card combination (No. 47) ”) may be further determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, the data capacity related to the internal lottery table can be reduced.

Further, as a method of determining the internal winning combination in the MB, all the small winning combinations (“F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F_1 sheet” without performing the lottery using the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 109. The combination (No. 47) ”) may be determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the data capacity and the processing load can be further reduced.

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 110 to 111 are tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

FIG. 110 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped in the normal state (that is, the game state of the main control board 71 is other than inside the MB and during the MB (operation) (see FIG. 102)). It is a figure which shows. When the internal winning combination is determined, the main control board 71 displays the reels 3L, 3C, 3R so that the combination of the symbols shown in FIG. 110 is displayed based on the determined internal winning combination and the order (pushing order) of the stop operation. To control.

For example, when "F_normal lip B (No. 14)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop operation is the operation for the left reel 3L (left middle right or left and right middle) of "left 1st". When the stop operation is performed in the push order, the combination of symbols related to "replay" (see the content column of FIG. 106) is displayed, and the first stop operation is the operation for the reel 3C in the middle (middle left / right or middle right / left). When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of a certain "middle 1st", the combination of symbols related to "red BAR fanning" is displayed, and the first stop operation is the operation for the right reel 3L (right left middle or right middle left). When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "red 7 reel" is displayed.

In addition, when "F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed and " When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st", the combination of symbols related to "red BAR lip" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "right 1st", it is related to "red 7 fanning". The combination of symbols is displayed. Similarly, when "F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st", the combination of symbols related to "red BAR fanning" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "right 1st", it becomes "red 7 lip". The combination of such symbols is displayed.

As described above, during ART, the additional lottery based on "SP Lip A2" is managed by the chance B mode, and the additional lottery based on "SP Lip A1" is managed by the chance C mode. The additional lottery based on the "SP lip A2" is performed when "F_SP lip A2 (No. 21)" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the additional lottery is won, the main control of the pachislot machine 1 The board 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 notify (instruct) the pressing order of the "middle 1st" and display the combination of symbols related to the "red BAR lip". Similarly, the additional lottery based on the "SP lip A1" is performed when "F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the additional lottery is won, the pachislot machine 1 The main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the above notify (instruct) the pressing order of "right 1st" and display the combination of symbols related to "red 7 lip".

On the other hand, when there is an instruction for a symbol to be aimed at, if the symbols are always aligned, the playability becomes monotonous. Therefore, when "F_normal lip B (No. 14)" is determined as the internal winning combination, Alternatively, when the additional lottery based on "SP Lip A1" or the additional lottery based on "SP Lip A2" is not won, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 have a predetermined probability of " The push order in which the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR fanning" and "Red 7 fanning" is displayed is notified (instructed), and the symbols are aligned. When the symbols are not aligned, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 notify (instruct) the pressing order of the “left 1st” and relate to the “replay”. Display the combination of symbols.

Also, when "F_SP rip B1 (No. 22)" to "F_SP rip B3 (No. 24)" are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols displayed differs according to the pressing order, and "left 1st". When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the symbols are aligned. The combination (“red BAR fanning”, “red 7 fanning”) is not displayed, but the combination of symbols with the same pattern (“red BAR lip”, “red 7 lip”, “W matching lip”) is displayed. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the additional lottery is won during ART, the additional lottery may be notified after being temporarily held instead of immediately notifying the additional lottery. ) ”To“ F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24) ”are used when the addition is notified later. For example, when the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 notify the addition of 50 games held, "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)" to "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)" to " When "F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)" is determined, the push order in which the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lip" is displayed is notified (instructed), and the addition of 100 games held is notified. , The combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip" is displayed. When the push order is notified (instructed) and the addition of 150 games held is notified, the combination of symbols related to "W-matched Lip" is displayed. Notify (instruct) the pressing order to be performed.

The combination of symbols that can be displayed when another combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal time is as shown in FIG. 110, and the winning combination and the stop during the MB internal or MB (operation). The correspondence with the combination of the displayed symbols is as shown in FIG. 111.

[Flow of games during non-ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 112, the flow of the game during non-ART (“normal” or “normal advantage”) will be described. As shown in FIG. 112 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 basically has the playability of playing a game from non-ART to ART. As shown in FIGS. 112 (A) and 100, in the pachislot machine 1, the transition route from non-ART to ART is an ART direct hit route that directly transitions from non-ART to ART, and a non-ART to SCZ route. There is a route via SCZ that shifts to ART and a route via MB_HCZ that shifts from non-ART to ART via MB_HCZ. In the following, the flow between the ART direct hit route and the route via SCZ will be described.

FIG. 112 (B) is a diagram showing the flow of the game of the ART direct hit route. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an advantageous section transition lottery during the “normal” (normal section), and shifts from the “normal” to the advantageous section when the transition lottery is won. To do. In this advantageous section transition lottery, the main control board 71 also draws the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination. For example, when ART is determined as the transition destination, the main control board 71 directly shifts from "normal" to the ART of the advantageous section. Transition.

On the other hand, when the normal advantage is determined as the transition destination in the advantageous section transition lottery, the transition from "normal" to the normal advantage of the advantageous section is performed. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery during a normal advantage, and when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal advantage to the ART. In the present embodiment, when ART is determined as the transition destination in the advantageous section transition lottery performed during the "normal", or when the ART lottery performed during the normal advantage is won, the non-ART directly to the ART. Transition (ART direct hit route).

The ART lottery, which is usually advantageous, is performed based on the normal mode. This normal mode has a plurality of modes such as "low probability", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", and "next precursor", and the winning probability of the ART lottery is different for each mode. Specifically, the winning probability of ART lottery is highest in "super heaven", next highest in "heaven" and "special", next highest in "heaven preparation", and "low probability" in the normal mode. The lowest. The "next precursor" is a normal mode in which it is confirmed that the ART lottery will be won. The normal mode during the normal advantage can be arbitrarily shifted. For example, the main control board 71 performs a normal mode shift lottery according to the winning combination during the normal advantage, and shifts the normal mode according to the lottery result. be able to.

Further, comparing the winning probability of the ART lottery based on the normal mode with the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery in the "normal", the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery in the "normal" Is slightly higher than the winning probability of the ART lottery based on the normal mode "preparation for heaven". Therefore, in the present embodiment, depending on the normal mode, the winning probability of the ART lottery in the advantageous section may be lower than the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery during the "normal" (for example,). Normal mode "Low probability" "Preparation for heaven").

As described above, when the number of elapsed games in the normal advantage reaches 120 games (Hamari ceiling), the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D). Here, during the normal advantage after the ceiling, the main control board 71 performs the ART lottery during the normal advantage based on the SCZ mode "high accuracy D" regardless of the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 115 described later, the ART lottery based on the SCZ mode “high accuracy D” has a higher winning probability than the normal mode “super heaven”.

FIG. 112 (C) is a diagram showing a game flow of a route via SCZ. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs SCZ lottery during normal advantage, and shifts to SCZ when the SCZ lottery is won. Further, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery during the SCZ, and when the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART. In this way, when the SCZ lottery usually performed during the advantageous period is won and then the ART lottery performed during the SCZ is won, the process shifts from the non-ART to the ART via the SCZ (route via SCZ). On the other hand, when the SCZ is completed without winning the ART lottery performed during the SCZ, the shift from the SCZ is usually advantageous. The SCZ ends when the specified number of games (5G) has elapsed without winning the ART lottery.

The SCZ lottery in the usual advantage and the ART lottery in the SCZ are performed based on the SCZ mode. This SCZ mode has a plurality of modes such as "low probability", "high probability A", "high probability B", "high probability C", and "high probability D", respectively, of SCZ lottery and ART lottery. The winning probability is different. Specifically, the winning probabilities of SCZ lottery and ART lottery are highest in "high probability D", next highest in "high probability C", and next highest in "high probability B" among SCZ modes. "High probability A" is the next highest, and "Low probability" is the lowest. These SCZ modes can be arbitrarily shifted, but in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs a shift lottery for the SCZ mode according to the number of elapsed games during the normal advantage and the winning combination during the normal advantage. , The SCZ mode is shifted according to the lottery result.

[Various data tables used for ART direct hit routes]
Next, the configurations of various data tables used in the ART direct hit route will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

<Normal_Advantageous section transition lottery table>
First, the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing an advantageous section transition lottery based on the internal winning combination for each game (unit game) in the "normal" state (normal section). As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, chance lip, weak chance", "medium chance, fanning" The lottery values of "non-winning", "normal advantage", "specific role", and "LMB", which indicate the lottery result for each reference item, are defined as "rip", "strong bell", "fixed role", and "LMB". Is regulated. As the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 109, the "batting order bell" corresponds to "F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_4 selection bell 4B (No. 41)", and "common bell, 1 sheet" is , "F_common bell A (No.45) to F_common bell B (No.46)", "F_1 card combination (No.47)", and "common lip, chance lip, weak chance" is " Corresponds to "F_common lip (No.25)", "F_chance lip (No.26)", and "F_weak chance role (No.44)", and "medium chance, fanning lip" is "F_medium chance role". (No. 43) ”,“ F_Further Lip A (No.31) ”to“ F_Further Lip B (No.32) ”, and“ Strong Bell ”is“ F_Strong Bell (No.42) ” The "fixed role" corresponds to "F_black BAR lip (No.37)", "F_red BAR lip (No.28)", "F_red 7 lip A (No.29)" to "F_red". 7 Lip B (No. 30) ”, and“ LMB ”corresponds to“ LMB + F_Further Lip B (No. 49) ”to“ LMB + F_XD Lip (No. 50) ”. The "specific combination" as a result of the lottery serves as a "fixed combination" and triggers a specific process. Further, in other lottery tables, "batting order rip", "SP rip A1", "SP rip A2", "SP rip B1", and "SP rip B2" may be used as reference items, but "batting order rip" Corresponds to "F_RT1 middle lip 1 (No. 1)" to "F_maintenance lip 5 (No. 19)", and "SP lip A1" corresponds to "F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)". "SP Lip A2" corresponds to "F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)", "SP Lip B1" corresponds to "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)", and "SP Lip B2" corresponds to "SP Lip B2". It corresponds to "F_SP lip B2 (No. 23)" and "F_SP lip B3 (No. 24)".

According to the advantageous section transition lottery using such a normal_advantageous section transition lottery table, if a "batting order bell" is won in the "normal" state, there is a 1/256 probability that the "normal advantageous" lottery result will be obtained. Obtained, and based on the lottery result, the state becomes "normally advantageous" from the next game. In addition, for example, if a player wins a "medium chance" or a "fanning lip", a lottery result of "normal advantage" is obtained with a probability of 248/256, and based on the lottery result, a state of "normal advantage" is obtained from the next game. In addition, a lottery result of "ART" may be obtained with a probability of 8/256, and in this case, the state of "ART precursor" is set from the next game based on the lottery result. The winning probability of such "ART" is about 3.2% at the time of winning "Medium chance, fanning lip", about 12.5% at the time of winning "Strong bell", and winning in "advantageous section". It is kept lower than the probability of doing it.

<Normal_Advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table>
Next, the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 114. Normal_advantageous section initial normal mode The lottery table sets the normal mode of the first game to the advantageous section in the first game (unit game) immediately after shifting to the "advantageous section" by winning the advantageous section transition lottery from "normal". It is a table referred to when determining by the initial normal mode lottery. As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, chance lip, weak chance", "medium chance" , "Further Lip", "Strong Bell", "Definite Role", "LMB" are specified, and as the types of normal modes that show the lottery result for each reference item, "Low accuracy", "Heaven preparation", "Heaven", The lottery values for "super heaven", "special", and "next precursor" are specified.

According to the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery using such a normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, for example, when the "batting order bell" is won in the first game of "normal advantage", there is a probability of "low" with a probability of 248/256. A “probability” lottery result is obtained, and in the first game, the “low probability” normal mode is set based on the lottery result. On the other hand, for example, in the case of winning the "batting order bell", the lottery result of "preparation for heaven" is obtained with a probability of 6/256, and in this case, in the first game of "normal advantage", based on the lottery result, " It becomes the normal mode of "heaven preparation". After the first game of "normal advantage", the normal mode may be promoted according to the lottery result of the normal mode transition lottery. In normal mode, you are promoted in the order of "low probability", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", "next precursor" (including promotion of two or more stages), and basically promoted. The winning probability of "ART" (see Fig. 115) is getting higher, but in the case of "special" which can be the normal mode in the first game, the winning probability of "ART" is "super heaven". It is not always higher than the case (see FIG. 115). Also, the winning probability of "ART" when the normal mode is "Low accuracy" or "Heaven preparation" in the "normal advantage" state is lower than the winning probability of "ART" in the "normal" state. (See FIGS. 113 and 115). As a result, immediately after the transition from "normal" to "normal advantage", it tends to be more difficult to win "ART" than in the "normal" state. This will be described in detail with reference to the usual advantage_ART lottery table described below.

<Normal advantage_ART lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the normally advantageous_ART lottery table will be described. Normal advantage_ART lottery table is for each type of normal mode ("low accuracy", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", "next precursor") and SCZ mode "high accuracy D". It is a table provided and referred to when deciding the transition to "ART"("ARTwinning") based on the internal winning combination for each mode. As shown in the figure, in the normal advantage_ART lottery table corresponding to each mode, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "weak chance", ""Chancelip","mediumchance", and "strong bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

According to the ART lottery using such a normal advantage_ART lottery table, in the "normal advantage" state, for example, in the "low probability" normal mode, if the "weak chance" is won, 1/256 The lottery result of the "ART" winning is obtained with a probability, and then the state shifts to the "ART" state via the "ART precursor".

Here, when the normal mode is "low probability" or "preparation for heaven", the probability of winning "ART" is the probability of winning "ART" ("low probability" or "heaven" when the winning probability of the internal winning role is also taken into consideration. Preparation ") = 0.4% × 0.8 + 0.8% × 0.3 + 12.5% × 0.1 = 1.81%. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 113, the probability of winning the "ART" by the advantageous section transition lottery in the "normal" time is the same as the probability of winning the internal winning combination, and the probability of winning the "ART" (normal time) = 2. It will be about 5%. That is, in the present embodiment, the initial normal mode (mainly "low accuracy" or "preparation for heaven") that shifts to "normal advantage" has a lower probability of winning "ART" than the "normal" state. It is suppressed, and it is more difficult to shift to "ART" immediately after shifting to "normal advantage" than in the "normal" state. As a result, even in the "normal" state, the expectation that the player may shift to the "ART" without going through the "normal advantage" can be raised, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, even if the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off, it cannot be said that the situation is the most disadvantageous, so let's stop the game when the lamp is turned off. It is possible to motivate the player who thinks that the game is to be continued. In addition, in amusement parks other than immediately after the store opens, a vacant platform will be selected from the situation where the predecessor was left with the game stopped. Even if the above-mentioned measures are taken, there is a tendency for more units to be left unattended with the advantageous section lamp turned off, and the situation where the advantageous section lamp is turned off is the relatively most disadvantageous situation for that model. Once that is confirmed, the player may hesitate to start the game, thinking that it may not be necessary to start the game from the most unfavorable situation. It can be said that a player has a very high motivation to play when he / she goes to the amusement park to see the model, but if such a player's motivation is discouraged, the utilization rate will decrease. As mentioned above, by making the specification that the situation where the advantageous section lamp is off is not necessarily the most disadvantageous situation in the game state of the model, it cannot be said that it is the most disadvantageous situation for the time being, and the game is played by this. It is also possible to expect the effect of suppressing the decrease in the operating rate by making the player feel the desire to go.

[Various data tables used for routes via SCZ]
Next, the configurations of various data tables used in the route via SCZ will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

<Normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table when the specified game is reached>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the SCZ mode transition lottery table when the normal advantage_specified game is reached will be described. Normal advantage_When the specified game is reached The SCZ mode transition lottery table is provided for each number of normally advantageous elapsed games ("20G elapsed", "40G elapsed", "80G elapsed"), and is currently (before transition). ) Is a table that is referred to when determining the destination SCZ mode from the SCZ mode. As shown in the figure, the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (SCZ mode of the transition destination) is defined for each current SCZ mode in the SCZ mode transition lottery table when the normal advantage_specified game is reached.

According to the SCZ mode transition lottery using the SCZ mode transition lottery table when the specified game is reached, in the SCZ mode transition lottery when the specified game is reached, the larger the number of games that have passed during the normal advantage, the more games have passed. It is easy to shift to a higher SCZ mode. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of elapsed games in the normal advantage reaches 120 G, the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D), and then "high accuracy D" until the transition to ART. Never migrate from. This transition to "high accuracy D" is performed without performing a transition lottery, and the main control board 71 shifts the SCZ mode to "high accuracy D" when the number of elapsed games in the normal advantage reaches 120 G. ..

<Normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the normally advantageous_SCZ mode transition lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table is provided for each type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D”). This is a table that is referred to when determining the SCZ mode of the migration destination based on the internal winning combination for each mode. In the normal advantage _SCZ mode transition lottery table corresponding to each mode, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip", "chance lip", ""Mediumchance" and "strong bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (SCZ mode of the migration destination) is defined for each reference item.

According to the SCZ mode transition lottery using such a normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table, the SCZ mode shifts based on the internal winning combination during the normal advantage. In the example shown in FIG. 117, in the transition lottery based on the internal winning combination, the SCZ mode only falls or is maintained, and is not promoted. In this respect, the SCZ mode may be promoted even in the transition lottery based on the internal winning combination.

<Normal advantage_SCZ lottery table>
Next, the normally advantageous_SCZ lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 118. The normal advantage_SCZ lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining the transition to "SCZ"("SCZwin") based on the SCZ mode in each game during normal advantage. As shown in the figure, the normally advantageous_SCZ lottery table has the current SCZ modes (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D” as reference items. ") Is specified, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is specified for each reference item.

According to the SCZ lottery using such a normal advantage_SCZ lottery table, in the state of "normal advantage", for example, in the SCZ mode of "high accuracy A", there is a probability of 24/256 of the "SCZ" winning. The lottery result is obtained, and then the state shifts to the "SCZ" state. In the example shown in FIG. 118, in the SCZ lottery that is usually advantageous, the transition to "SCZ" is determined by a uniform lottery regardless of the internal winning combination, but the lottery is not limited to this, and the lottery is a uniform lottery. You may change or, in addition to the uniform lottery, perform the SCZ lottery based on the internal winning combination and the SCZ mode. Further, when the lottery result of the "SCZ" winning is obtained in the SCZ lottery, the type of "SCZ" ("normal", "legend") may be determined by the lottery. The lottery result of the type of "SCZ" may be different depending on the internal winning combination when the lottery result of the "SCZ" winning is obtained. For example, when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy D", the "legend" may be easily determined, or the "legend" may be determined without fail.

<SCZ_ART lottery table>
Next, the SCZ_ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 119. The SCZ_ART lottery table is provided for each type of "SCZ" and type of SCZ mode ("low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", "high accuracy C", "high accuracy D"). It is a table that is referred to when deciding the transition to "ART"("ARTwinning") based on the internal winning combination for each mode. As shown in the figure, in the SCZ_ART lottery table, the type of SCZ (“normal”, “legend”) and the type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”) are used as reference items. , "High accuracy C", "High accuracy D"), Internal winning role ("Batting order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium""Chance" and "strong bell") are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

According to the ART lottery using such an SCZ_ART lottery table, for example, in the "normal" "SCZ", when the SCZ mode is "high probability D", if the "medium chance" is won, 128/256 The lottery result of the "ART" winning is obtained with the probability of, and then the state shifts to the "ART" state via the "additional specialization zone".

<SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ>
Next, the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ is a table that is referred to when determining the SCZ mode of the migration destination for each current SCZ mode when "SCZ" ends without winning the transition to "ART". is there. As shown in the figure, in the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ, a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (SCZ mode of the transition destination) is defined for each current SCZ mode.

According to the SCZ mode lottery using the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ, for example, when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy D", the SCZ mode is maintained as "high accuracy D".

<Normal advantage_advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a lottery table at the end of the normally advantageous_advantageous section will be described. Normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode ("low accuracy", "heaven preparation", "heaven", "super heaven", "special"), and "normal advantage" It is a table referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section based on the internal winning combination for each normal mode. When the normal mode is "next precursor", there is no advantageous section end lottery table corresponding to "next precursor" in order not to end the advantageous section. Further, as described above, since the advantageous section is not terminated even when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy D", the main control board 71 is advantageous regardless of the type of the normal mode when the SCZ mode is "high accuracy D". No lottery at the end of the section. As shown in the figure, in the normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table corresponding to each normal mode, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak""Chance","ChanceLip","MediumChance", and "Strong Bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined for each reference item.

According to the advantageous section end lottery using such a normal advantageous_advantageous section end lottery table, after reaching, for example, 100 G from the start of the advantageous section, in a "normally advantageous" state, for example, a "low probability" normal mode. In the case of, if the batting order bell is won, a lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained with a high probability of 252/256, and from the next game, the state of the "normal advantage" of the advantageous section changes to the "normal" of the normal section. Transition to the state of. On the other hand, for example, even when the "batting order bell" is won in the "low accuracy" normal mode, the lottery result of continuing the advantageous section may be obtained with a low probability of 4/256. In this case, the advantageous section is continued without being terminated. It should be noted that the transition to the "normal" state of the normal section may be made after the predetermined number of games has elapsed after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained. In addition, after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained, the advantageous section is continued or the advantageous section is continued by winning in the predetermined number of games by providing the transition waiting state of the predetermined number of games before the transition to the "normal" state of the normal section. / And It may be possible to perform continuous production over a plurality of games such as winning ART and ending an advantageous section due to defeat, which can enhance the interest of the game. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the advantageous section lamp is turned off during the continuous production and the defeat is confirmed during the continuous production, which reduces the interest. In addition, the continuous production is configured so that the basic settlement can be made with the number of games one or more shorter than the predetermined number of games waiting for the transition, so that the pattern will be revived in the next game in which the defeat production as the basic settlement occurs. You may do it. If the advantageous section lamp is turned off at the time of the third stop of the game in which the defeat confirmation effect has occurred, for example, there is no possibility that the advantageous section will be continued or the ART will be won in the revival effect, so that the motivation to continue the game of the next game is reduced. Therefore, it is a consideration to avoid such a situation. As a specific example, there is a case where the predetermined number of games is 5 games, and the content up to the conclusion of the continuous production excluding one game for the revival production is composed of a maximum of 4 games, and the revival production is performed in one game. By turning off the advantageous section lamp after the player confirms that the revival effect does not occur, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest of the continuous effect is lowered in the middle. When the limiter (limit processing) is activated, the transition waiting state cannot be set until the transition from the "normal advantage" to the "normal" of the normal section. Therefore, immediately before the limiter is activated, the above-mentioned advantageous section is used. It is preferable to suppress the occurrence of continuous production related to continuation and prevent the situation where the continuous production is terminated by the limiter.

[Flow of games during ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 122, the flow of the game during "ART" (more specifically, the flow of the game regarding the addition during ART) will be described. As shown in FIG. 122 (A), in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 adds the number of games to extend the number of games that can continue "ART" and specializes in granting the right of "addition specialization zone". Two types of additions, zone stock addition and zone addition, are performed during "ART". Here, as described above, during "ART", the addition is controlled based on a plurality of modes such as ART mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode. Hereinafter, the relationship between the mode in "ART" and the addition will be described.

FIG. 122 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the ART mode and the addition. As described above, the ART mode includes a plurality of modes having different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery during ART such as "mode 0", "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C". The initial state of the ART mode at the time of transition to "ART" is basically "mode A", but when the transition to "ART" is triggered by the "fixed role", "mode B" or "mode C" May start with. More specifically, when the mode shifts to "ART" triggered by "fixed combination 1", the ART mode starts from "mode B", and when the mode shifts to "ART" triggered by "fixed combination 2", ART The mode starts from "mode C". The "fixed combination 1" corresponds to "F_red BAR lip (No. 28)", "F_red 7 lip A (No. 29)", and "F_red 7 lip B (No. 30)". , "Fixed role 2" corresponds to "F_black BAR lip (No. 37)".

As shown in FIG. 122 (B), the ART mode has different addition expectations, and basically, "mode 0" has almost no addition expectation, and "mode A", "mode B", and "mode B" Mode C "is added with a predetermined probability. As described above, when the ART mode is other than "mode 0", the expected degree of addition is the same, but the ease of falling to "mode 0" is different in each ART mode. , The degree of advantage regarding addition in "ART" is different in "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C". Of course, by making the probability of winning the extra lottery in "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" different, the degree of advantage regarding the addition in "ART" may be different. The degree of advantage regarding the addition may be different from both the probability of winning the addition lottery and the ease of falling to "mode 0". At this time, the ART mode, which is less likely to fall to "mode 0", may have a higher probability of winning an additional lottery (for example, "mode C" has the highest probability of winning an additional lottery). The ease of falling up to mode 0 ”and the probability of winning an additional lottery may be mixed and adjusted. As an example, the probability of winning an additional lottery or the like in "mode A", which is most likely to fall into "mode 0", may be higher than the probability of winning an additional lottery or the like in "mode B". By doing so, when the ART mode falls to just before "mode 0", it becomes easier to add it.

Further, the main control board 71 performs an ART mode transition lottery during "ART", and shifts to the ART mode according to the result of the transition lottery. The ART mode transition lottery is performed by a lottery (normal process) based on the internal winning combination, and also by a common process when the MB is activated. In the present embodiment, in the transition lottery based on the normal processing, the ART mode is basically maintained or dropped, but in the transition lottery based on the common processing, the ART mode is basically maintained or promoted. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ART mode may be promoted even in the transition lottery based on the normal processing, and the ART mode may be able to fall in the transition lottery based on the common processing.

Subsequently, FIG. 122 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the chance mode and the addition. As described above, the present embodiment has a plurality of modes such as chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode, which have different triggers for management. Specifically, the chance B mode manages the addition based on the "SP lip A2", and the chance C mode manages the addition based on the "SP lip A1". In "SP Lip A2", the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lip" is displayed in which three symbols "Red 7" are displayed side by side by performing the stop operation in the pressing order of "Right 1st". , "SP Lip A1" displays the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip" in which three symbols "Red BAR" are displayed side by side by performing the stop operation in the pressing order of "Medium 1st". Therefore, it can be said that the chance B mode manages the addition based on the red 7 alignment, and the chance C mode manages the addition based on the red BAR alignment. Further, the chance A mode manages the addition based on the winning combination other than "SP lip A1" and "SP lip A2".

In addition, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode have different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery during ART such as "normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", and "ultra high accuracy", respectively. There is a mode of. During "ART", the main control board 71 performs an individual mode transition lottery for each of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode, and shifts the mode of each chance mode according to the result of the transition lottery. .. Therefore, chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode are managed individually during "ART". For example, in a certain game, each mode may be a separate mode, or some modes are common. Sometimes it's all modes in common.

Subsequently, FIG. 122 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the last freeze, which is a special addition in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 draws a lottery as to whether or not to generate the last freeze at the timing when the number of remaining games of "ART" is subtracted from 1 to 0. When this lottery is won, the main control board 71 adds a value (= 1500-the number of games in the advantageous section that has been digested) to the number of games remaining in the ART until the limit of the advantageous section is reached, and performs a predetermined freeze process. .. As an example, when the number of games digested in the advantageous section is 200 times and the lottery of the last freeze is won, the main control board 71 adds 1300 to the number of remaining games of ART. On the other hand, if the lottery is not won, the main control board 71 performs a predetermined process at the end of ART. In addition, when the lottery of the last freeze is won, it is confirmed that the limit processing is performed, so that the main control board 71 shifts the ball ejection state to the "ending", and then does not perform any additional lottery.

Further, the timing of drawing the last freeze may be any timing of the final game of "ART", for example, it may be at the start of the game of the final game of "ART", or the final game of "ART". It may be during the first stop operation to the third stop operation of. The stop operation may be when the stop switch 7S is turned on or when the stop switch 7S is turned off.

[Various data tables used during ART]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used for additional lottery in "ART" will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

FIGS. 123 to 128 shown below are data tables used for control related to the ART mode. Specifically, FIGS. 123 and 124 are data tables used for the ART mode transition lottery, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are data tables used for the additional lottery of the number of games based on the ART mode. 127 and 128 are data tables used for additional lottery of stock in specialized zones based on ART mode.

Further, FIGS. 129 to 135 are data tables used for control related to the chance mode. Specifically, FIG. 129 is a data table used for drawing chance modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) at the time of transition to “ART”, and FIGS. 130 to 132 are respective data tables. It is a data table used for the transition lottery of the chance mode, and FIGS. 133 to 135 are the data tables used for the additional lottery of the number of games based on each chance mode.

Further, FIG. 136 is a data table used for the additional lottery when the number of games of 100 games or more is added, and FIG. 137 is a data table used for the lottery of whether or not to generate the last freeze.

<ART_ART mode transition lottery table>
First, the ART_ART mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The ART_ART mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining the transition destination of the ART mode based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_ART mode transition lottery table is provided for each type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”), and is provided as a reference item. , "Batting order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium chance", "Strong bell" are defined, and lottery result for each reference item The lottery value corresponding to (ART mode of the migration destination) is defined.

According to the ART mode transition lottery using such an ART_ART mode transition lottery table, the main control board 71 performs an ART mode transition lottery (normal processing) based on the internal winning combination during "ART", and this The ART mode is shifted based on the lottery result. For example, if the current ART mode is "mode B" and the "batting order bell" is won, a lottery result of transition (falling) to "mode A" is obtained with a probability of 12/256, and the ART mode is "mode". The transition from "B" to "mode A".

<MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table>
Next, the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 124. The MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table is a table used in common processing during MB operation and referred to when determining the transition destination of the ART mode. As shown in the figure, the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table has a lottery result (transition destination) for each type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”). The lottery value corresponding to the ART mode) is specified.

According to the ART mode transition lottery using such an MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table, the main control board 71 performs an ART mode transition lottery (common process) when the MB is operated during "ART", and this lottery is performed. The ART mode is shifted based on the result. For example, when the current ART mode is "mode 0", a lottery result of transition (promotion) to "mode A" is obtained with a probability of 63/256, and the ART mode is changed from "mode 0" to "mode A". And migrate.

<ART_normal extra lottery table>
Next, the ART_normal addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 125. The ART_normal additional lottery table is used in the additional lottery based on the ART mode performed during "ART", and determines the number of additional games (that is, the number of games for extending the period during which "ART" can be continued) based on the internal winning combination. It is a table that is referred to when doing so. As shown in the figure, the ART_normal addition lottery table is provided for each type of the current ART mode ("mode 0", "mode A", "mode B", "mode C") and is used as a reference item. , "Batting order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium chance", "Strong bell" are defined, and lottery result for each reference item The lottery value corresponding to (the number of additional games) is specified.

According to the additional lottery using such ART_normal additional lottery table, the main control board 71 draws the number of additional games based on the internal winning combination and the ART mode during "ART", and based on the lottery result. And extend the period during which "ART" can be continued. For example, if the current ART mode is "mode A" and a "medium chance" is won, a lottery result of "30G" is obtained as the number of additional games with a probability of 28/256, and the period during which "ART" can be continued. Will be extended by 30 games.

Here, referring to ART_normal additional lottery table, in the present embodiment, "100A", "100B", and "100C" may be determined as the lottery result of the number of additional games. These "100A" to "100C" are lottery results in which the number of additional games of at least 100 games or more is determined, and when "100A" to "100C" are determined, the main control board 71 is subsequently subjected to. The number of games to be actually added is drawn by referring to the common_upper game number lottery table shown in FIG. 136, which will be described later.

Comparing the ART_normal addition lottery table corresponding to the ART mode "mode 0" and the ART_normal addition lottery table corresponding to the ART modes "mode A" to "mode C", in the ART mode "mode 0", It can be seen that the additional lottery during ART is suppressed. Specifically, in the state where the ART mode is "mode 0", the addition is performed only when the "strong bell", which is a strong rare role, is won, and the addition is not performed when the other roles are won.

When the number of additional games for extending the period during which "ART" can be continued (the number of remaining games) is determined, the main control board 71 updates the value of a predetermined counter managed by itself (that is, adds to the number of remaining games). (Add the number of games) to extend the period during which "ART" can be continued. At this time, the sub-control board 72 may notify the player of the number of added games when the main control board 71 determines the number of added games, and the main control board 71 determines the number of added games. It is also possible to temporarily hold the number of additional games added and notify the player of the number of games held at a predetermined opportunity thereafter. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 is a counter (notified counter) for counting the period (number of notified games) notified to the player as a counter for counting the period (number of remaining games) during which "ART" can be continued. ) And a counter (unannounced counter) that counts the unannounced period (the number of unannounced games) for the player. The value of the counter that counts the period during which "ART" managed on the main (main control board 71) side can be continued is the value of the notified counter managed on the sub (sub control board 72) side and the value of the unnotified counter. Matches the sum with the value.

Here, the fact that the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games as an "trigger" to notify the number of additional games is not limited to the game in which the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games. This includes notifying after a predetermined number of games from the game. That is, in pachislot, the determined number of additional games may be notified by the result of continuous production performed over a plurality of games, and the main control board 71 may notify the number of additional games as a result of such continuous production. The decision may be included in notifying the number of additional games as an "opportunity".

In addition, the "predetermined opportunity" for notifying the number of additional games temporarily held can be arbitrarily set. For example, the apparent number of remaining games (notified counter) has become less than or equal to the predetermined value. It may be the case, and even though the so-called rare role (in the case of this embodiment, for example, "weak chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", "strong bell", etc.) is determined as the internal winning role. , It may be the case that the additional lottery is not won, or it may be a predetermined number of games after the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games, and the main control board 71 may be the number of additional games. It may be after a predetermined time has passed since the determination of.

In the following, the notification of the number of additional games by the sub-control board 72 triggered by the determination of the number of additional games by the main control board 71 may be referred to as "immediate notification", and the main control board 71 may be referred to as "immediate notification". Temporarily holding the determined number of additional games by the sub-control board 72 may be referred to as "latent" below. Further, in the present embodiment, the additional lottery is performed triggered by various conditions, but the immediate notification of the number of additional games and the hiding are the results of the additional lottery using the ART_normal additional lottery table. Not only that, the same can be applied to the lottery results of other additional lottery.

<MB operation_ART game number additional lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table will be described. The MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table is a table used in common processing at the time of MB operation and referred to when determining the number of additional games based on the ART mode. As shown in the figure, the current ART mode type (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”) is specified as a reference item in the MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table. The lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (the number of additional games) is defined for each reference item.

According to the additional lottery using the MB operation_ART game number additional lottery table, the main control board 71 draws the number of additional games based on the ART mode during "ART", and based on the lottery result. Extend the duration of "ART". Specifically, in the state where the ART mode is "mode 0", the main control board 71 does not determine the number of additional games in the common processing when the MB is operated ("0G" is always determined), and "mode 0". In a state other than "," 50G "is determined as the number of additional games with a probability of, for example, 12/256 in the common processing when the MB is operated, and the period during which" ART "can be continued is extended by 50 games.

<ART_History type lottery table>
Next, the ART_history type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The ART_history type lottery table is a table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to transfer with high history based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_history type lottery table has "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip", and "medium" as reference items. "Chance" and "strong bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

According to the transition lottery to the history high accuracy using such an ART_history type lottery table, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the history high accuracy based on the internal winning combination during "ART", and this If you win the lottery, set the history high accuracy state for 5 games. During the history high accuracy state between these five games, a stock lottery of the "additional special zone" is performed with reference to the ART_addition special zone lottery table described later in FIG. 128, and when the stock lottery is won, " One stock of "Additional Special Zone" will be given. For example, if you win the "medium chance", you will get a lottery result of winning with a high probability of history with a probability of 32/256, and the history will be high for the next 5 games.

<ART_Additional special zone lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the ART_addition special zone lottery table will be described. The ART_additional special zone lottery table is a table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to grant the stock of the "additional specialization zone" based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, in the ART_addition special zone lottery table, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip" , "Medium chance" and "Strong bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, Gase 1, Gase 2, winning) is specified for each reference item. The lottery result "non-winning, Gase 1, Gase 2" means that the stock lottery in the "additional specialization zone" is not winning, but in the case of the lottery result "Gase 1, Gase 2", the sub ( On the sub-control board 72) side, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that is non-winning but arouses the winning) is executed.

The main control board 71 refers to the ART_addition special zone lottery table only during the history high accuracy during "ART" to perform a stock lottery of the "addition special zone", and when this lottery is won, "addition" is performed. The type of "specialized zone" is determined by lottery, and the state shifts from "ART" to "additional specialized zone". According to the stock lottery of the "additional specialization zone" using such an ART_addition specialization zone lottery table, for example, if a "medium chance" is won during a high history, there is a 128/256 probability of "additional specialization". The lottery result of winning is obtained in the stock lottery of "Zone".

Here, comparing the ART_history type lottery table shown in FIG. 127 with the ART_addition special zone lottery table shown in FIG. 128, both tables are the lottery results when the "batting order bell" and "common bell" are won. It can be seen that only "non-winning" is determined. Similarly, when winning "Common Lip, Fake Lip", "Weak Chance", "Chance Lip", "Medium Chance", and "Strong Bell", the "Win" will be decided with a certain probability for both tables. I understand. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if a winning combination that can be transferred with high history accuracy wins during high history accuracy, it will win the stock lottery of the "additional specialization zone" with a predetermined probability. In other words, in this embodiment, rare roles ("common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", "strong bell") are played twice during the five games in "ART". If you win, you may win the stock lottery in the "additional specialization zone". In this embodiment, it is possible to control the addition of "ART" based on the game result between 5 games without having the history data (for example, the history of the winning combination between 5 games). The points will be described later.

In addition, comparing both tables, the ART_history type lottery table has a different probability of winning the transition lottery to high history depending on the type of rare role won, whereas the ART_addition special zone lottery table has a different probability. , It can be seen that the stock lottery of the "additional special zone" is won with a uniform probability (for example, 50%) regardless of the type of rare role won. As a result, in the present embodiment, if the history can be transferred with high accuracy, the stock of the "additional special zone" can be expected regardless of the type of the rare role (even when the so-called weak rare role is won). become.

The transition lottery to the history high accuracy referring to the ART_history type lottery table is performed in a state other than "mode 0" in the ART mode, and is not performed in a state in which the ART mode is "mode 0". Therefore, the history does not shift with high accuracy during "mode 0". Since the stock lottery of the "additional special zone" referring to the ART_addition special zone lottery table shown in FIG. 128 is performed only during the high history accuracy, the ART mode "mode 0" has a low expectation of addition. You can see that.

<ART_Initial high-accuracy lottery table>
Next, the ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 129. The ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining the initial states of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode at the start of "ART". As shown in the figure, the ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table defines the opportunity to shift to "ART" as a reference item, and the lottery result (ALL normal, chance A, chance B, chance A + B, chance) for each reference item. The lottery value corresponding to C, chance A + C, chance B + C, ALL high accuracy) is defined.

As described above, the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode have a plurality of modes of "normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", and "ultra high accuracy". The lottery result determined by the lottery with reference to the ART_initial high accuracy lottery table indicates the type of chance mode in which "high accuracy" is set as the initial state at the start of "ART". For example, when the main control board 71 determines "chance A" as a lottery result, the chance A mode "high accuracy", the chance B mode "normal", and the chance C mode "normal" are set as the initial states at the start of "ART". If "Chance B + C" is determined as the lottery result, chance A mode "normal", chance B mode "high accuracy", chance C mode "high accuracy" are set as the initial state at the start of "ART". When "ALL normal" is determined as the lottery result, chance A mode "normal", chance B mode "normal", and chance C mode "normal" are set as the initial state at the start of "ART".

Further, the transition trigger to "ART" provided as a reference item can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the following transition trigger is used as an example. For example, when the main control board 71 shifts to "ART" via "SCZ" of "Legend", a lottery is performed using the reference item of "Opportunity B", and "F_Red 7 Lip A (No. 29) ”,“ F_Red 7 Lip B (No.30) ”when the game shifts to“ ART ”, a lottery is performed using the reference item of“ Trigger C ”and“ F_Red BAR Lip (No.30) ” When the game shifts to "ART" triggered by the winning of ".28)", a lottery is performed using the reference item of "Chance D", and "ART" is triggered by the winning of "F_Black BAR Lip (No. 37)". In the case of shifting to "ART", a lottery is performed using the reference item of "Opportunity E", and when shifting to "ART" triggered by other conditions, a lottery is performed using the reference item of "Opportunity A".

According to the lottery using such ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table, if "trigger C (" F_red 7 lip A "" F_red 7 lip B ")" is used as an opportunity to shift to "ART", chance B If the initial state of the mode is always "high accuracy" and the transition to "ART" is triggered by "trigger D (" F_red BAR lip ")", the initial state of chance C mode is always "high accuracy". become. Here, as described above, the chance B mode is a mode for managing the addition based on the red 7 alignment, and the chance C mode is a mode for managing the addition based on the red BAR alignment. Therefore, in the case of shifting to "ART" triggered by Red 7 ("F_Red 7 Lip A" and "F_Red 7 Lip B"), the initial state of "ART" was given preferential treatment based on the Red 7 set. When the state is changed to "ART" triggered by the red BAR ("F_red BAR lip"), the initial state of "ART" is in a state where the addition based on the red BAR alignment is given preferential treatment.

<ART_Chance mode transition lottery table>
Next, the ART_chance mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. The ART_chance mode transition lottery table is referred to in the chance mode transition lottery, FIG. 130 is a table referred to in the chance A mode transition lottery, and FIG. 131 is a table referred to in the chance B mode transition lottery. FIG. 132 is a table referred to in the chance C mode transition lottery. ART_Chance mode transition The lottery table has the types of chance modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) and the current mode ("normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", "ultra high accuracy". ), And as reference items, "Batting order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium chance", "Strong bell" The lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (transition destination mode) is specified for each reference item.

According to the transition lottery using such an ART_chance mode transition lottery table, when the main control board 71 wins the "chance lip" in the state where the chance A mode is "normal" during "ART", 32 / With a probability of 256, a lottery result of transition to "highly accurate preparation" is obtained, and chance A mode shifts from "normal" to "highly accurate preparation". As described above, the main control board 71 manages the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode individually. That is, when the main control board 71 determines the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 individually performs a transition lottery for each of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode based on the internal winning combination.

<Additional lottery table for ART_Chance mode>
Next, the additional lottery table for ART_chance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. The additional lottery table for ART_chance mode is referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance mode, FIG. 133 is the table referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance A mode, and FIG. 134 is the additional lottery based on the chance B mode. It is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 135 is a table to be referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance C mode. The additional lottery table for ART_chance mode includes the types of chance modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) and the current mode ("normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", "ultra high accuracy". "), And as reference items," batting order bell "," common bell, 1 sheet "," batting order lip "," SP lip A1 "," SP lip A2 "," SP lip B1 "," SP lip "B2", "weak chance, common lip", "chance lip", "medium chance, fake lip", "strong bell" are specified, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (number of additional games) is specified for each reference item. To.

According to the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for ART_chance mode, the main control board 71 is set to the internal winning combination and the chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) during "ART". Based on this, the number of additional games is drawn, and based on the lottery result, the period during which "ART" can be continued is extended. In the unit game during "ART", the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery based on the chance A mode, an additional lottery based on the chance B mode, and an additional lottery based on the chance C mode, respectively. However, as you can see by comparing the figures, the winning combination that may win the extra lottery differs depending on the chance mode, so the addition based on the chance A mode, the addition based on the chance B mode, and the chance C mode There is no overlap with the base addition.

In the present embodiment, the additional lottery based on the ART mode is performed during "ART", but the additional lottery based on the ART mode and the additional lottery based on the chance mode may overlap. For example, when the "strong bell" is won, "30G" is determined as the number of additional games based on the ART mode (see FIG. 125), and "50G" is determined as the number of additional games based on the chance A mode. (See FIG. 133), "80G (= 30 + 50)" will be added in the game.

Here, referring to the ART_additional lottery table for chance B mode shown in FIG. 134, the number of additional games may be determined at the time of winning the "SP Lip A2" in the additional lottery based on the chance B mode. .. As described above in FIG. 110, when the "SP Lip A2" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed and the "middle 1st" is pressed. When the stop operation is performed in order, the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR fanning" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "Right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lip" is displayed. Will be done. Aligning specific symbols that are normally difficult to align when the addition is performed can improve the interest of the game because the addition and the alignment of the symbols are related. When the additional lottery based on the chance B mode is won at the time of winning the "SP Lip A2" (that is, when a value other than "0G" is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 are As the first stop operation, it is preferable to stop the right reel 3R and perform an effect of encouraging the aim of the symbol "Red 7" (as a result, the combination of the symbols related to the "Red 7 lip" is displayed). On the other hand, when the "SP Lip A2" is won and the additional lottery based on the chance B mode is not won (that is, when "0G" is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 is an effect of urging the left reel 3L to be stopped as the first stop operation (as a result, the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed), and the middle reel 3C is stopped as the first stop operation, and the symbols are displayed. It is also possible to perform an effect that encourages the aim of "red BAR" (as a result, a combination of symbols related to "red BAR fanning" is displayed).

The same applies to the chance C mode, and when the additional lottery based on the chance C mode is won at the time of winning the "SP Lip A1" (that is, when other than "0G" is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and (Or) The sub-control board 72 stops the reel 3C inside as the first stop operation and prompts the player to aim at the symbol "red BAR" (as a result, the combination of the symbols related to the "red BAR lip" is displayed). When the "SP Lip A2" is won and the additional lottery based on the chance C mode is not won (that is, when "0G" is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 is an effect of urging the left reel 3L to be stopped as the first stop operation (as a result, the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed), and the right reel 3R is stopped as the first stop operation, and the symbols are displayed. It is also possible to perform an effect that encourages the aim of "Red 7" (as a result, a combination of symbols related to "Red 7 fanning" is displayed).

<Common_Top-ranked number of additional games lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the common_upper-ranked game number lottery table will be described. The common_top additional game number lottery table is a table that is referred to when any of "100A", "100B", and "100C" is determined as the lottery result in the additional lottery in "ART". In the common_top additional game number lottery table, "100A", "100B", and "100C" are defined as reference items, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (additional game number) is defined for each reference item.

When the main control board 71 determines any of "100A", "100B", and "100C" in the additional lottery based on the ART mode and the additional lottery based on the chance mode performed during "ART", the number of common_upper additional games With reference to the lottery table, the number of additional games is drawn. For example, when "100A" is determined by an additional lottery based on the ART mode, the main control board 71 determines "100G" as the number of additional games with a probability of 246/256, and as the number of additional games with a probability of 8/256. "200G" is decided, and "300G" is decided as the number of additional games with a probability of 2/256.

<ART_Last Freeze Lottery Table>
Next, the ART_last freeze lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 137. The ART_Last Freeze Lottery Table is a table that is referred to at the end of "ART" when deciding whether or not to perform the Last Freeze regardless of the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_last freeze lottery table defines a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning).

When the value of the counter that counts the number of remaining games of "ART" managed by the main control board 71 becomes 0, the main control board 71 performs a lottery with reference to the ART_last freeze lottery table, and when the lottery is won, " The value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached is added to the number of remaining games of "ART", and a predetermined freeze process is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery is not won, the main control board 71 performs a lottery with reference to the common_end advantageous section end lottery table shown in FIG. 138 below.

<Common_End of advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the common_end advantageous section end lottery table will be described. The common_end advantageous section end lottery table is, for example, a table that is referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section at the end of "ART" regardless of the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined in the common_end advantageous section end lottery table.

According to the end-time advantageous section end lottery using such a common_end-time advantageous section end lottery table, for example, at the end when the number of games of "ART" is exhausted, 243/256 is irrespective of the internal winning combination. The lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained with a probability, and the state shifts to the "normal" state of the normal section from the next game. On the other hand, for example, at the end of the number of games of "ART", a lottery result of continuation of an advantageous section may be obtained with a probability of 13/256 regardless of the internal winning combination. In this case, the advantageous section is continued by shifting from the "ART" to the "normally advantageous" state without ending the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, in the ART (AT) related processing, a common table is adopted for all the settings 1 to 6. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling due to an extremely high difference in ART (AT) settings, and to reduce the data capacity required for ART (AT) lottery on the main control board 71. Can be done.

[About the flow of advantageous sections]
Next, the flow of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 146. FIGS. 139 to 141 illustrate the specification example 1 in which the bell navigation is generated from the beginning of the advantageous section, and in the specification example 1, the flow of the advantageous section is shown for three patterns in which the batting order bell combination and the winning order of the MB are different. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment of the third embodiment. As a difference from the specification example 1, in the first embodiment, the bell navigation is suppressed (the bell navigation is not generated) immediately after the start of the advantageous section. FIG. 143 is a diagram for comparing the payout amount in the advantageous section between the specification example 1 and the first embodiment, and shows the effect of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the specification example 2, and FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment of the third embodiment. Is. FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining, as the third embodiment of the third embodiment, after the power is turned on when the setting is not changed and after the power is turned on when the setting is changed. The specification example is a specification exemplified for explaining the effect of each embodiment, but each specification example is not a well-known technique, and when adopted, the effect according to each specification is exhibited. , It is a specification that can be appropriately adopted as a means of solving a problem depending on the playability intended by the planner. In the following description, "MB" corresponds to both "SMB" and "LMB" shown in FIG. 109, so these are collectively referred to as "MB", but "SMB" having a high winning probability is mainly used. Assuming, the state between flags is not shown.

<End condition of advantageous section>
The end conditions of the advantageous section in Specification Example 1 shown in FIGS. 139 to 141 and Example 1 shown in FIG. 142 are as follows.
Condition 1: Occurrence of push order notification by winning the batting order bell at least once Condition 2: MB winning or operating at least once (because it operates by winning, it may be judged based on either)
Condition 3: A predetermined end condition is satisfied on the premise that at least one of condition 1 or condition 2 is satisfied. When the predetermined end condition in this condition 3 is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated. There is no difference between 1 and Example 1.
In addition, a predetermined period elapses from the start of the advantageous section (20 games or more have passed) or the end lottery of each game advantageous section is performed from the start of the advantageous section, and the end lottery is performed before the above-mentioned condition 1 or condition 2 is satisfied. Even if the end flag is set and the advantageous section is terminated by assuming that the condition 3 is satisfied in the game in which the condition 1 is satisfied by the occurrence of the bell navigation or the game in which the condition 2 is satisfied by the MB operation. Good. Further, a state of waiting for transition of a predetermined number of games of at least one game may be provided between the time when the condition 3 is satisfied and the time when the advantageous section is completed. Although it is described as MB for convenience of explanation, the operation of a predetermined bonus other than MB may be the termination condition. In addition, as a modification, in a model without a bonus, or a model having only a single bonus (SB) or a CT bonus (CB) for only one game as a bonus, navigation occurs due to the establishment of a batting order bell without setting condition 2. There is no problem even if only is set as a prerequisite for the end of the advantageous section.

<Specification example 1>
Specification example 1 is characterized in that the bell navigation is confirmed from the start of the advantageous section until the batting order bell is first won. In this specification, after the batting order bell is hit in the advantageous section, the bell navigation (pushing order notification) is performed as soon as possible, the bell navigation is confirmed immediately after the start of the advantageous section, and if the batting order bell is hit, the first bell navigation is performed accordingly. Will be generated, and then the advantageous section will be terminated according to the result of the lottery. The purpose of this specification is to shift the advantageous section to the endable state as soon as possible when the player does not win the "ART" which is the ART state in which the number of medals increases uniformly. For example, when a player wins an advantageous section of "normal advantage", the number of games that is excessively long is notified as an advantageous section even though the result is ART non-winning, and the game is played in a situation where it is difficult for the player to stop the game. When forced to continue, a player who feels that he / she has been shown an extremely long sensation that he / she may not have hit in the end may significantly reduce his / her interest in the game machine, and appropriately suppress such a case. It is a specification that can be done.
As a flow until the end of the advantageous section, the three patterns of FIGS. 139 to 141 will be described below in the order shown in the drawings.
First, FIG. 139 shows a case where the batting order bell is won before the MB after the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ends without winning the MB. In this case, since the batting order bell is acquired by the player by the navigation, the "payment by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 143 occurs. The winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4, and although there is a setting difference in the winning probability of MB, it is about 1/15 to 1/17, so this pattern that the batting order bell wins before MB is The frequency of occurrence is high. In addition, it may happen that you win the MB before the end of the advantageous section after hitting the batting order bell and the push order navigation occurs more than once, but the winning number of MB and the number of acquisitions during MB operation are pushed. It is not affected by the occurrence of forward navigation, and does not affect the "payment by bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / for high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 143. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. As will be described together, the MBs of this specification example and the embodiment have the same specifications, and the specifications are such that 9 sheets can be paid out when the correct answer of the push position and 8 sheets can be paid out when the correct answer of the push position. In order to secure the minimum skill intervention, there is a case where 8 cards are won, but for example, 9 cards can be obtained by stopping the red BAR symbol on at least one reel. The specifications are such that even beginners can play games with peace of mind as they can easily win prizes.

Next, FIG. 140 shows a pattern in the case where the MB is won before the batting order bell in the specification example 1 and then the advantageous section is completed without hitting the batting order bell. In this pattern, as described above, the “payment by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)” shown in FIG. 143 does not occur, but since the MB has a lower winning probability than the batting order bell, the figure is shown in the figure. It occurs less frequently than the pattern shown in 139. In addition, when only the winning probability is considered, if the MB winning probability is set to a higher probability than the batting order bell, it is considered that the frequency of occurrence of bell navigation can be suppressed, but even if the number of payouts by the MB is small, it will be issued. In the ball test, there is a possibility of nonconformity in the item of the character ratio (nonconformity reason due to the ratio of the bonus payout to the total payout being too high), and the solution of increasing the MB winning probability than the batting order bell is adopted. In that case, the degree of freedom in batting design is extremely low.

Next, FIG. 141 shows a pattern in which the batting order bell wins before the MB in the specification example 1 and the bell navigation occurs, but the MB wins before the end of the advantageous section thereafter. In this case, as a result, the end condition of the advantageous section can be satisfied by satisfying the above condition 2 by winning and operating the MB, so that the ball ejection by the navigation in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section is suppressed. By that amount, I want to increase the acquisition of balls in ART (sometimes referred to as this AT) and increase the interest of the game by getting enough balls in "ART" which is the "hit" that the player has been waiting for. From the point of view of the ball ejection design concept, it can be said that the specification that allows the batting order bell navigation to occur immediately after entering the advantageous section has acted in an unfavorable direction. This event can be suppressed by the method of immediately ending the advantageous section when the first bell navigation occurs, but since the batting order bell is established with a high probability of about 1/4, immediately after the advantageous section lamp lights up. In an average of about 4 games, when the bell navigation occurs once and the advantageous section ends, a state of "normal advantage" is set and whether or not to win ART for an appropriate number of games is produced. Since it is difficult to entertain with the game, if this method is adopted, the degree of freedom in batting design and production design will be greatly reduced.

<Example 1>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, the following conditions are applied to the advantageous section.
First condition: From the start of the advantageous section until 100 G has passed, even if the batting order bell is hit, the bell navigation is not generated and the bell navigation is not generated.
Second condition: The probability of winning MB is about 1/17, which is relatively high (see FIG. 109).
Third condition: After the MB operation is completed, the advantageous section is terminated according to the lottery result of the advantageous section end lottery.
As a result, from the start of the advantageous section until it reaches 100G, even if the batting order bell is hit, the advantageous section cannot be ended (bell navigation non-occurrence state), but the probability of winning the MB is relatively high, so 100G. It is easy to win the MB by then, and then the end lottery of the advantageous section is performed for each game (unit game) as the end possible state of the advantageous section (bell navigation generation possible state), and the MB is activated by winning the end of the advantageous section. After the end, the advantageous section will end. According to the first embodiment, the player suppresses the ball ejection by the navigation in the "normal advantageous" state of the advantageous section, and increases the acquisition of the ball ejection in the ART (sometimes referred to as the main AT) by that amount. From the ball-out design concept of wanting to get enough balls with the long-awaited "hit""ART" to enhance the interest of the game, as shown in Fig. 139 and Fig. 141, the batting order Bell Navi is "normally advantageous". It is possible to suppress an unfavorable event in which a bell is won by the occurrence and a ball is obtained. In addition, since the acquisition of medals by MB operation is not affected by navigation, by suppressing the navigation occurrence rate in "normal advantage", the base value (input) of "normal" and "normal advantage" in the normal section The ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of medals) can be suppressed to a value close to each other, and the amount of medals to be paid out can be distributed to "ART".

In such a flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment, the occurrence of push order navigation in the advantageous section can be appropriately suppressed, and the degree of freedom in ball ejection design can be increased. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, the amount of balls shown by the white arrows can be allocated to the balls such as "ART" without increasing the number of balls in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the ball.

In the explanation so far, the MB has been illustrated and described as an "SMB" that always wins a prize in the established game. On the other hand, in "LMB", winning is hindered by replay in the established game, and a bonus flag-to-flag state (carrying over) occurs. Here, in the state between the flags of the bonus, the specification may be such that the push order navigation is generated, or the specification may not be generated. From the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of bell navigation in the above-mentioned "normally advantageous" state, it is effective to have a specification that does not generate push-order navigation. In addition, based on the fact that the LMB was won with a winning probability of about 1/448 (see winning numbers No. 49 and No. 50 in FIG. 109, the winning probability is 146/65536) during the advantageous section, the winning was won in "ART". In the case of letting the player proceed, the game progresses in the flow of "ART" during the inter-flag state, LMB winning, LMB operation, and the inter-flag state is also a gaming state that the player can equate with the ART winning state. It is desirable to have specifications that generate. In the case of the first embodiment, there is only one type of carry-over bonus, but in the case of a model equipped with a plurality of types of carry-over bonuses such as LMB1 and LMB2, push order navigation is performed according to the type of bonus being carried over. May be generated or not generated so that the player can guess the type of bonus depending on the presence or absence of navigation, and in the batting order bell winning game being carried over, the specification is such that navigation is always generated. Alternatively, it may be processed uniformly as a specification that does not occur at all, and the bonus type may be narrowed down by the stop roll (so-called reach) of the main reel because it is difficult to narrow down the bonus type depending on the presence or absence of navigation.

<Specification example 2>
Next, the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the specification example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As shown in the figure, in the specification example 2, when the ART finishes after digesting the predetermined number of games (for example, 100 G), the advantageous section also ends and the initialization process is performed. As a result, after the ART is completed, the next game shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section). According to the flow at the end of such an advantageous section, it is possible to play the game while expecting to get a certain amount of balls during ART, but in exchange for that, it shifts to the normal section after the end of ART. Since it is confirmed that the game will end, the player tends to end the game at the end of the ART. That is, if the specifications are such that the advantageous section ends at the same time as the end of ART, not only the interest of the game cannot be enhanced, but also the operating rate of the game machine is likely to decrease.

<Example 2>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, when the ART finishes after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 G), the above-mentioned end-time advantageous section end lottery is performed. If the result of the end-advantageous section end lottery is "end", the game will shift to the normal section (non-advantageous section) from the next game after the ART is completed, as in the specification example 2.

On the other hand, if "continue" is won as a result of the end-advantageous section end lottery at the end of ART, the normal mode is determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery without shifting to the "normal" of the normal section, and the advantageous section "normal" is determined. Shift to "usually advantageous". At this time, in the "normally advantageous" state, since the predetermined number of games (100G) is basically exceeded from the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section end lottery is performed for each game, and thus the advantageous section end lottery is performed. If you win, it will shift to the "normal" state of the normal section through the initialization process of the advantageous section.

Also, in the "normal advantage" state, if the rank of the normal mode is promoted and becomes higher (for example, in the case of "super heaven" or "next precursor"), it becomes easier to win the ART lottery, and then the ART wins. , "ART precursor" and so on, and will shift to ART again.

According to the flow at the end of the advantageous section of the second embodiment, the expectation that the advantageous section may continue and shift to the ART even after the end of the ART is raised, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. This can contribute to increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine.

<Example 3>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146. As shown in the figure, in the third embodiment, for example, the mode displayed on the display unit 100 at the time of opening the store may be different.

For example, in the initial state after the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened without changing the settings, as shown in (a) of the figure, a general display according to the "normal" state is displayed. The aspect is displayed on the display unit 100. At this time, in general, the gaming state is RT1.

On the other hand, in the initial state after the setting is changed (for example, the setting is changed from the setting 1 to the same setting again after the setting change work is performed) before the store opens, (b) in the figure. ), In order to suggest that it is in RT0, which is different from RT1 which generally stays as a game state at the time of opening, the display unit 100 has a display mode such as "early rising is Sanbun no Toku stage". Is displayed in. That is, in the initial state at the time of opening after changing the setting, the game state is RT0, and it is suggested in the display unit 100 that this RT0 is in the "normal" state.

When the advantageous section is won in the "normal" state between RT0 and another RT (for example, RT1), a difference in advantage is provided in any of the first to third patterns as shown below. ..
(First pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: It is easy to win the ART because the push order navigation is 2 times or more and there is a ball.
In the case of winning the advantageous section in other RTs: It is easy to win the CZ without paying out with one push order navigation.
(Second pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: The winning of ART is confirmed.
If you win an advantageous section at another RT: You can win either AR or CZ.
(Third pattern)
In the case of winning an advantageous section at RT0: Of ART and CZ, the ratio of winning ART is relatively high. In addition, "relatively high" may include the case where the ratio of winning ART is 100% and the ratio of winning CZ is 0%.
In the case of winning an advantageous section in other RTs: Of ART and CZ, the ratio of winning ART is relatively low. In addition, "relatively low" may include the case where the ratio of winning ART is 0% and the ratio of winning CZ is 100%.

According to such an initial state of the third embodiment, it is possible to determine a state in which an advantage can be expected even in a "normal" state depending on the display mode at the time of opening, and when the player selects a game machine in the morning. It can be effectively used as a guide.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned specifications have a demerit that the setting change is easy for the amusement park side. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not the set value has changed from the previous day by re-setting to the same setting, but if the number of installed units is large, the work of changing the setting of all units is enormous. It takes effort. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the same screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) may be displayed after the power is turned on, provided that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous power failure. In this case, the predetermined time is generally set to about 2 hours or 4 hours after a midnight power failure so that the suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) is not displayed due to a temporary power failure during business hours. It is desirable to set the length of time that will elapse.

Then, when the player performs an operation of turning on the mobile terminal interlocking function on the gaming machine so that the user can actively use the service provided by the manufacturer such as the mobile terminal interlocking function (Unimemo (registered trademark)). Only the specifications may be used to display an advantageous screen at the time of opening as shown in FIG. 146 (a). Further, on the customer waiting screen in which the player has not inserted any medals, a common customer waiting screen (demo screen) may be displayed so that it cannot be determined whether or not the setting has been changed. .. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine the state for the first time by borrowing a medal and actually inserting the medal, so the motivation to first sit down and borrow the medal and from the time of opening the store Can motivate customers to visit the store. However, in a store where the number of players at the time of opening is extremely small, a player who takes a borrowed medal and walks across a plurality of medals to monopolize the advantageous RT0 may appear. As a countermeasure against such a player, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the setting change suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) can be displayed by the staff of the game hall in the hall menu. A store that does not want to be discriminated against may be provided with a function that enables a setting that displays a normal screen as shown in FIG. 146 (b) even when the setting is changed.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Subsequently, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the fluctuation control means, the internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the state control means, and the advantageous state notification. It functions as a means, a mode control means, and an RT control means. The stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R function as stop operation means. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means. The sub-control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a function as operation mode notification means. The status indicator 147b functions as an advantageous status notification means. These functions will be described in the following appendix, and the corresponding ones in the embodiment will be written in parentheses at the end.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may have functions as described below, for example.

For example, in the case of winning (continuing) in the end-advantageous section end lottery at the end of ART, a state of a guaranteed section in which stay in the "normally advantageous" advantageous section is guaranteed for a predetermined number of games may be provided. .. If a guaranteed section is provided, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ends in one game or two games even though the lottery for the end of the advantageous section at the end is won, and even if the advantageous section is continued, the game is played. It is possible to suppress a person's feeling of stress.

As the guarantee section, a fixed period such as 20 games may be given. When the fixed period is set, the load due to the processing of the ball ejection lottery by the main control board 71 can be reduced, and the game playability becomes clear. On the other hand, the number of games to be granted as the guaranteed section may be determined by lottery based on the conditions regarding the continuation and termination of the guaranteed section. The grant of the guarantee section itself may also be decided. Further, the number of games in the guaranteed section may be collectively determined together with the continuation of winning by the lottery at the end of the advantageous section at the end. In such a case, the data required for the lottery process can be reduced. When the number of games in the guaranteed section is determined by a lottery separate from the end lottery for the advantageous section at the end, various game characteristics can be realized.

Further, the guarantee section may be continued until a predetermined number of winnings or winnings are made by a predetermined combination (for example, bell or replay, MB, etc.) without managing the number of games.

The lottery for the end of the advantageous section in the "normal advantage" may not be performed until the end of the guaranteed section, or may be performed during the guaranteed section. If you win (end) in the advantageous section end lottery in the guaranteed section, store the winning result as a flag, for example, and go to the normal section ("normal") at the end of the guaranteed section or in the next game at the end. You may make the transition.

It may be suggested or notified that the guarantee section is in progress or that the end condition of the guarantee section is satisfied. In such a case, it becomes easy to understand that it is an opportunity after the end of ART, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the game machine. For example, the display unit 100 may be clearly notified by displaying "chance state continuation confirmation remaining 20 games" or the like, or an effect of displaying a stage or the like suggesting that ART is easy to win may be performed. It may be. Further, the production may be executed in the production mode dedicated to the guaranteed section by the production execution means such as video, sound, and lamp.

Regarding the possibility of the guarantee section, a setting difference may be provided, and the degree of advantage in the decision regarding the guarantee section may be different based on the set value. For example, when determining the number of games in the guaranteed section by lottery, setting 1 is set to 20 games on average, setting 6 is set to 50 games on average, and the higher the setting, the more ART is pulled back (ART is The specification may be such that it is easy to win the ART again immediately after the end. In such a case, the player can surely detect the end of the advantageous section by confirming that the state indicator 147b is turned off, and can surely grasp the number of games in the advantageous section after the end of ART. Furthermore, the player can estimate the set value according to the number of games in the advantageous section after the end of the ART, and even if the number of balls to be played after the end of the ART is reduced, the expected value of the set value and the pullback can be expected. By playing the game while holding the game, the fun of the game can be enhanced.

[Another control peculiar to pachislot]
Subsequently, another control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 153.

<Relationship between the number of elapsed games and benefits during normal advantage>
First, with reference to FIG. 147, the relationship between the number of elapsed games and the privilege during the “normal advantage” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 147, the end condition in the above-described first embodiment is adopted. Specifically, as the first condition, the condition that "until 100 G has passed from the start of the advantageous section, even if the batting order bell is hit, the bell navigation is not generated and the bell navigation is not generated" is adopted. Of course, in the following description, the end condition in the above-mentioned specification example 1 may be adopted.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game property of playing a game from "normal (normal section)" to "ART (advantageous section)", and the main control board 71 is in "normal". We are conducting a lottery to shift to an advantageous section. If you win "ART" in this transition lottery, you can directly transition from "normal" to "ART", but in many cases, "ART" via "normal" to "normal advantage (advantageous section)". Move to. As shown in FIG. 102, the notification content (pushing order instruction) is restricted during "normal advantage" as compared with during "ART", and for example, notification for shifting to high RT (RT3) or maintaining high RT is performed. Is not performed, so it is in a disadvantageous state as compared with "ART", and in the case of this embodiment, it is designed as a section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1. Therefore, even if it is possible to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, if it shifts to "normal advantage" instead of "ART", the medal will be consumed as a result and the benefit will be small. There is a risk that the willingness to play will be reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 grants a predetermined privilege to the player according to the number of elapsed games during the "normal advantage". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control board 71 grants the first privilege (privilege 1) to "40G" when the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage" reaches "20G". When it reaches, the second privilege (privilege 2) is given, and when it reaches "80G", the third privilege (privilege 3) is given. The first privilege, the second privilege, and the third privilege are the transition (promotion) of the SCZ mode, and the larger the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage", the easier the transition to the higher SCZ mode (Fig.). See 116).

As mentioned above, although there is a setting difference, MB wins with a probability of about 1/15 to 1/17, so it is realistic that the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" reaches "20G" and "40G". It is possible, and it can rarely reach "80G". However, the privilege given at this time is the promotion lottery of SCZ mode, and when SCZ mode is promoted, it is only easy to shift to the chance zone of "ART" called "SCZ", and immediately "ART". It does not mean that it will move to. Therefore, even if the privilege of promotion of SCZ mode is given according to the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage", the player is not given an excessive privilege, and the gambling property can be enhanced. Absent. On the other hand, for the player, as the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" increases, it becomes easier to shift to a state of playability different from "normal advantage" called "SCZ", so that the playability changes in various ways. This will improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage" reaches "120G", the main control board 71 grants a fourth privilege (privilege 4). This fourth privilege is "Hamari Ceiling", and the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated mode "High accuracy", and the SCZ mode does not fall until it shifts to "ART". In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, when the number of elapsed games during the "normal advantage" reaches "120G", the subsequent transition to "ART" is confirmed. Here, the winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4, and even if the first condition in the above-described first embodiment is adopted, neither the batting order bell nor the MB is won, and "normally advantageous". It is extremely rare that 120 games have passed. In addition, if "normal advantage" has passed 120 games, a predetermined amount of medals may have been consumed during "normal advantage", so "ART" is confirmed in such an extremely rare case. Even if the "Hamari ceiling" is used, the player will not be given excessive benefits.

Since "normal advantage" is an advantageous section, the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" is included in the count of the number of games for which limit processing is performed. Therefore, even if a large privilege is given as a result of staying in the "normal advantage" for a long period of time, the advantageous section ("ART") for notifying the player of the advantageous stop operation mode continues more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily increased.

It should be noted that the main control board 71 only needs to be able to give some kind of privilege when the "normal advantage" continues for a predetermined period of time, and is not limited to the one that gives a larger privilege as the person stays for a long period of time. Absent.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. The main control board 71 has 7Rs, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. It functions as a stop control means and a state control means.

Further, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the player of the predetermined push order, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify the player of the predetermined push order. In order to notify the order, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as operation mode notification means.

Further, since the main control board 71 counts the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" and grants a privilege (promotion of SCZ mode) to the player according to the number of elapsed games, the main control board 71. Functions as a counting means and a privilege giving means.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with a predetermined counter for managing the number of remaining games of "ART", and basically, when the number of remaining games becomes 0, "ART" is terminated, but during a series of advantageous sections. When the number of games played in (for example, the sum of the number of elapsed games in "ART" and the number of elapsed games in "normal advantage") reaches 1500 times, the advantageous section regardless of the number of remaining games in "ART". The main control board 71 functions as a state control means in order to perform the limit process for terminating the above.

<Pseudo history lottery>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, a pseudo history lottery in "ART" will be described. Note that FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an outline of a pseudo history lottery in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an outline of another example of the pseudo history lottery.

In a conventional pachislot machine, historical data related to past games may be retained, and various lottery may be performed based on the historical data. In such a conventional pachislot machine, various lottery was performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side, which has a sufficient capacity, so this was not a problem. If the main control board 71) side has to do this and the history data is held on the main side where the capacity is limited, or if various lottery is performed based on the history data, the data capacity and processing load will increase. It will increase. On the other hand, since the lottery is performed by taking into account the history of past games, it is possible to realize a variety of playability, which improves the interest and, from the player's point of view, the role of rare etc. is continuously won. In some cases, the so-called feeling of loss is not felt, so that the game can be played with peace of mind.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo history lottery is realized by performing the controls shown in FIGS. 148 and 149. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo history lottery is realized by combining the control by the main control board 71 and the control by the sub control board 72.

Here, FIG. 148 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery specification of a pseudo history lottery, and shows a control example by the main control board 71. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the history high accuracy during "ART", and when the transition lottery is won, the history high accuracy shifts between five games. .. Then, the main control board 71 performs a stock lottery of the "additional special zone" during the history high accuracy between the five games, and when the winning is won, a privilege (stock of the "additional special zone") is given and is not. When 5 games have passed with the winning, the history high accuracy ends. As a result, in the present embodiment, a privilege can be given when a rare role is continuously won in a short period of time (between 5 games).

Subsequently, FIG. 148 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo history lottery effect. The sub-control board 72 displays a history display window and a history icon in a predetermined display area of the display unit 100 in order to give the player the illusion that the past history is being referred to. The history display window is a display area for displaying the history of past games, and is composed of, for example, five display areas corresponding to five games (note that the history display window is a predetermined effect information (described later). The history icon) may be a display area displayed corresponding to a predetermined number of games, and is not necessarily limited to the window frame area. By setting the window frame area, a predetermined effect information is displayed. Even if it is not, it is preferable in that the player can identify the area where the predetermined effect information is displayed, but the history display area is considered in consideration of the overlap with other effects. It is also possible to display only the predetermined production information when the rare role is won or won, without providing a window frame or the like to clearly indicate that the role is.) Each of the five display areas is provided corresponding to each of the five games from this game to the previous game. For example, the leftmost display area (window) is the previous game. The game history is displayed, the second display area (window) from the left displays the history of the game two games ago, and the third display area (window) from the left displays the history of the game three games ago. The fourth display area (window) from the left displays the history of the game four games ago, and the rightmost display area (window) displays the history of the game five games ago (note that the history of the game five games ago is displayed. In detail, from the start operation of this game to the third stop operation, the history of the previous game is displayed in the leftmost display area, and the third stop operation of this game to the start operation of the next game are displayed. Until this is done, the history of this game is displayed in the leftmost display area (the same applies to other display areas).

Then, the sub-control board 72 has a rare role (“common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell”) that can win a lottery for transition to high history. When determined as the internal winning combination, predetermined effect information (history icon) is displayed in the corresponding display area of the display window. As shown in FIG. 148 (B), the history icon has a “red icon” and a “green icon”, and the sub-control board 72 has a “red icon” when the transition to high history accuracy is drawn. "Or" green icon "is displayed with a predetermined probability, and if the lottery for transition to high history is not won, the" green icon "is always displayed. As a result, the "red icon" is not displayed in the case of non-winning in the transition lottery to the history high accuracy, so the "red icon" has a role of notifying that the history is highly accurate. It will be.

The sub-control board 72 may display the history icon on the condition that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and on the condition that the combination of symbols corresponding to the rare combination is displayed. The history icon may be displayed. Here, since the combination of symbols according to the rare combination is not displayed unless the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 states that "the rare combination has been determined as the internal winning combination. Correspondingly, it can be said that the history icon is displayed. This point also applies to another example of the pseudo history lottery shown in FIG. 149.

On the other hand, on the sub-control board 72, when the "batting order bell" and the "common bell, one sheet" that do not win the transition lottery to the history high accuracy are determined as the internal winning combination, the corresponding display of the display window. Neither the "red icon" nor the "green icon" is displayed in the area. As a result, the winning history of the rare role between the five games is displayed in the display window for five games using the "red icon" and the "green icon". The position of the display area for displaying the history icon slides according to the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 148 (B), the "red icon" displayed in the leftmost display area slides to the rightmost display area at the end of the next game. As a result, the history icon disappears from the display window 5 games after the rare role is won, so that the history icon is displayed in the display window during the history high accuracy.

After that, when the rare combination is determined again as the internal winning combination during the history high accuracy, the sub-control board 72 displays the history icon in the corresponding display area of the display window. The type of history icon to be displayed at this time may be determined based on the transition lottery of the history high accuracy based on the rare role won this time, and the "addition special zone" in the history high accuracy. It may be performed based on the result of the stock lottery, or it may be performed in consideration of both. As a result, if a rare role is won while the history is high, at least two history icons will be displayed in the display window for five games.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), the stock lottery of the "additional special zone" is performed internally based only on the result of the game of the rare role in the history high accuracy, and the past history is referred to. Although not, the sub-control board 72 performs effects such as causing a plurality of history icons displayed in the display window and the display window itself to emit light. From the player's point of view, the display window that displays the past history and the history icon that shows the past history emit light, which makes it feel as if a history lottery has been performed, which improves the interest of the game. On the other hand, as the control on the main side, it is sufficient if the main control board 71 can grasp that the history is highly accurate only when a specific condition is satisfied, and the history for 5 games as in the conventional case. Since it is not necessary to update and retain the data every game, the data capacity and processing load do not increase.

In addition, although the case where the display of the history icon is updated every time one game progresses is illustrated here, the update condition of the display of the history icon is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. As an example, the sub-control board 72 may update the display of the history icon every time the internal winning combination corresponding to the history icon is established, and the history may be updated every time an internal winning combination other than the replay combination is established. The icon display may be updated. By updating the display of the history icon every time a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in this way, it is possible to continue the state in which the pseudo history lottery effect is performed for a predetermined period without setting a fixed number of games. it can. In addition, the sub-control board 72 has a fixed end condition of history high accuracy, such as ending when the loss (internal winning combination non-winning) is determined 5 times as the internal winning combination, and ending when the batting order combination is established 5 times. It may be associated with conditions other than the number of games. In addition, the batting order combination is established 5 times may mean that the batting order combination is determined as the internal winning combination 5 times, and when the batting order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it stops in the correct push order. As a result of the operation, the combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player may be stopped and displayed. On the contrary, when the batting order combination is not established five times, that is, the sub-control board 72 is stopped in the incorrect pressing order even though the batting order combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is stopped and displayed, the history high accuracy may be terminated. In this case, the display rule and update timing of the history icon may be appropriately determined so that a plurality of icons are not displayed in one history display window. For example, when the history high accuracy is terminated after 5 times of loss, the update rule may be set such that the history icon is advanced by one every time the loss or rare role is won.

The sub-control board 72 may change the mode of the effect using the display window and the history icon according to the result of the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone”. For example, when the stock lottery in the "additional specialization zone" is won, an effect associated with the success or failure of the stock lottery is performed in at least one of the display window and the history icon (for example, a large light is emitted around the display window). , When the stock lottery in the "additional specialization zone" is not won, an effect (for example, a small light emission around the display window) associated with the success or failure of the stock lottery is performed in at least one of the display window or the history icon. It may be that.

Subsequently, FIG. 148 (C) is an effect example 2 in a pseudo history lottery. FIG. 148 (B) shows an example of the production when the rare role is won again during the history high accuracy, but in FIG. 148 (C), the transition lottery with the history high accuracy is won at the time of the first rare role winning. After that, an example of the production when the rare role is won again within 5 games is shown. In this case, since the history is not highly accurate at the time of the second rare role winning, the stock lottery of the "additional special zone" is not performed on the main side, but the sub-control board 72 is the rare role winning during the history high accuracy. As with the time, multiple history icons displayed in the display window and the display window itself are made to emit light. By doing so, even if the history is not highly accurate internally, it can be made to feel as if the history lottery was performed.

Since there are fewer restrictions on the sub side than on the main side, the sub control board 72 can perform the same effect in the history high accuracy and other than the history high accuracy by any method. As an example, by holding the history data, the sub-control board 72 may perform the same effect during the history high accuracy and other than the history high accuracy, and the history icon is displayed in the display window. Based on the information that a plurality of images are displayed, the same effect may be performed in the history high accuracy and other than the history high accuracy.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 148, as a pseudo history lottery, a case where a rare role is won a plurality of times (twice) during a predetermined number of games (5 games) has been described as an example. In addition to such a history lottery, a history lottery performed when a predetermined winning combination is "continuously" won is also included. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 149, a pseudo history lottery method when a predetermined combination is continuously won will be described. Note that FIG. 149 describes a method of granting a predetermined privilege when the bell is won four times in a row.

FIGS. 149 (A) and 149 (B) are diagrams showing an example of an internal lottery specification of a pseudo history lottery, and show a control example by the main control board 71. As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the main control board 71 has "non-high accuracy", "history high accuracy A", "history high accuracy B", and "history high accuracy C" as the history high accuracy states. .. As shown in FIGS. 149 (A) and 149 (B), the main control board 71 ends the state of high history accuracy in one game when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination in "non-high accuracy". Move to "Probability A". Then, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during this "history high accuracy A" (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 shifts the history high accuracy state to "history high accuracy B". , If the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy A", "History High Accuracy A" is terminated and the state of History High Accuracy is changed to "Non-High Accuracy".

Further, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during the "history high accuracy B" (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 shifts the history high accuracy state to the "history high accuracy C". If the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy B", "History High Accuracy B" is terminated and the state of History High Accuracy is changed to "Non-High Accuracy". Then, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy C" (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 grants a privilege such as extending the period during which "ART" can be continued. However, if the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy C", "History High Accuracy C" is terminated and the state of History High Accuracy is shifted to "Non-High Accuracy". When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during the "history high accuracy C", the main control board 71 may maintain the history high accuracy state as the "history high accuracy C". It may be possible to shift to "non-high accuracy".

Subsequently, FIG. 149 (C) is an production example in a pseudo history lottery when the bells are continuously won. When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 displays a "bell icon" suggesting the winning or winning of the bell in the corresponding display area of the display window, and conversely, the bell serves as the internal winning combination. If not determined, the "bell icon" will not be displayed in the corresponding display area of the display window.

Then, when four "bell icons" are continuously displayed on the display window, the sub-control board 72 has an effect such as causing a plurality of "bell icons" displayed in the display window or the display window itself to emit light. I do. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the privilege was given based on the continuous winning of the bell without having the historical data on the main side.

In the example shown in FIG. 149, when the bell is won, the history high accuracy state is always promoted by one, and when the history high accuracy state is the highest state (“history high accuracy C”), the bell is set. If you win, you will always be given a privilege, but it is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 71 may promote one state with a high probability of history at the time of winning the bell with a predetermined probability. Further, for example, the main control board 71 may be able to promote a state with high history accuracy in a plurality of stages at a time when the bell is won (for example, one promotion with a 95% probability and two promotion with a 5% probability). Etc.). Further, in these cases, the probabilities may be different for each state of the current high probability of history. Further, the main control board 71 may give a privilege with a predetermined probability when the bell is hit when the state with high history accuracy is the highest state.

Up to this point, the case where the pseudo history lottery is performed by combining the processes of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 has been described, but in order to further reduce the processing load of the main control board 71, the main control A pseudo history lottery effect may be performed only by the effect display controlled by the sub-control board 72 without having the history high accuracy state on the board 71.

In this case, the main control board 71 may determine the granting of the privilege based on the winning of the predetermined combination, and may not have the history high accuracy state equivalent to 5 games. The sub-control board 72 displays the first history icon corresponding to the case where a predetermined combination is won. After that, if the privilege is given by the main control board 71 according to the internal winning combination within 5 games, the sub control board 72 displays the second history icon in the display area corresponding to the game, and the second history icon is displayed. The first and second history icons and the history display window may be used to refer to the history and produce an effect as if the hit was made. By doing so, it is possible to further reduce the processing of the main control board 71 while giving the player the impression that the history lottery has been performed.

The internal winning combination in the display game of the first history icon and the second history icon may be the same combination or different combinations. For example, the first history icon display game may be a cherry role, which is one of the rare roles, and the second history icon display game may be a watermelon role, which is another rare role.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the sub-control board 72 has five display areas provided corresponding to each of the five games from the current game to the game three times before when the pseudo history lottery is performed. Since the display window is displayed on the display unit 100, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a display window.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery to the history high accuracy performed by the rare role winning in "ART", the history high accuracy is started, and 5 games are played during this history high accuracy. Then, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means in order to end the history high accuracy. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the rare role during the high history, it is possible to give the privilege of granting the stock of the "additional special zone", so that the main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means.

Then, the sub-control board 72 has a rare combination among a plurality of display areas of the display window displayed on the display unit 100 in response to the fact that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination during "ART". When a history icon is displayed in the display area corresponding to the game determined as the winning combination, and the main control board 71 grants a privilege in connection with the rare winning combination whose history is highly accurate (that is, the history icon is displayed in the display window). The sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as effect execution means in order to perform an effect associated with the success or failure of the stock lottery in at least one of the display window and the history icon (when two or more are displayed).

<Additional notification during ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 150, the addition notification (addition effect) in "ART" will be described. In pachislot, it is common to perform an additional lottery at the opportunity of a rare role such as watermelon or cherry that players such as watermelons and cherries can easily pay attention to during ART (AT), and to notify the winning additional lottery when the additional lottery is won. However, it is said that if the addition is not performed frequently even though the role of rare is won, the player will be discouraged and the interest of the game will be reduced. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown below, it is intended to increase the frequency of additional notification at the time of winning a rare role that is easy for the player to pay attention to. In the following, the rare role means a role that can win the additional lottery during ART. For example, in the case of the additional lottery based on the ART mode, "weak chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", "strong". "Bell" corresponds (see FIG. 125).

FIG. 150A is a diagram showing an outline of additional notification by the sub-control board 72. In the present embodiment, when the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games, the sub-control board 72 may immediately notify the addition or may be hidden. As shown in FIG. 150 (A), in a state where the number of additional games is hidden, the sub-control board 72 is, for example, a hidden additional game in the case of non-winning in the additional lottery performed by the main control board 71 thereafter. Notify the number of games instead. On the other hand, even if the number of additional games is hidden, if the main control board 71 subsequently wins the additional lottery, the sub-control board 72 may use, for example, an additional game for the latent amount. While holding the number, the number of additional games determined as a result of the additional lottery is notified. As a result, in a state where the number of additional games is hidden, the additional notification is performed regardless of the result of the additional lottery, so that the frequency of the additional notification can be increased.

Here, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery (see FIG. 125) based on the normal processing when the rare role is won, and also displays the combination of symbols according to the MB when the MB is operating (that is, the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is displayed. When the operation is performed), the additional lottery (see FIG. 126) is performed based on the common process, but the sub-control board 72 basically immediately notifies the number of additional games when the additional lottery when the MB is operated is won. Keep (hidden) unannounced without. Then, the sub-control board 72 subsequently notifies the number of additional games at the time of MB operation, which has been hidden, at the time of the additional lottery triggered by the winning of the rare role. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the additional notification is given at the time of winning the rare role that the player can easily pay attention to. On the other hand, although the additional notification is not performed when the MB is activated, the player only feels that the additional lottery itself is not performed when the MB is activated, and the frequency of the additional notification when the MB is activated is high or low. Not that it does not cause the player's disappointment.

Subsequently, FIG. 150 (B) is a diagram showing a control example 1 when the sub-control board 72 performs additional notification. In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), first, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games of "50G" in the additional lottery when the MB is operated. As a result of the sub-control board 72 holding the number of additional games at the time of MB operation without notifying, at this point, the sub-control board 72 adds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount.

In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), as a result of winning the rare combination, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery to determine the number of additional games of "10G". At this point, the sub-control board 72 holds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount, but the sub-control board 72 holds the sub-control board 72 because it wins the additional lottery triggered by the rare role. While maintaining "50G", the number of additional games of "10G" decided this time is notified. Therefore, the player is notified that 10 games have been added due to the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 still maintains the number of games for the latent amount, the sub-control board 72 holds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount at this point.

In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), as a result of subsequently winning the rare combination, the main control board 71 performed an additional lottery, but did not win the additional lottery. At this point, since the sub-control board 72 holds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games in the range of "50G" held. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of games that may be added by the rare role that triggered the additional lottery within the range of the number of games held as the number of hidden games. With reference to FIG. 125, for example, in an additional lottery triggered by a “weak chance”, “10G”, “20G”, and “30G” may be determined as the number of additional games, and the number of hidden games may be determined. The "50G" held as is never determined. Therefore, in this case, the sub-control board 72 notifies any one of "10G", "20G", and "30G". Further, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by the "strong bell", the number of additional games may be determined as "30G", "50G", "100A (100G or more)", but the number of games for the latent amount. It holds only "50G" which is held as. Therefore, in this case, the sub-control board 72 notifies either "30G" or "50G", and does not notify "100G or more", which exceeds the number of games held for the latent amount. The sub-control board 72 may be notified within the range of the number of games for the latent amount, and it is necessary to notify the maximum number of games among the number of games that may be added by the rare role that triggered the additional lottery. However, in the range of the number of games for the latent amount, a part or all of them can be notified as appropriate.

In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), the sub-control board 72 may be added by the rare role that triggered the additional lottery from the range of the number of games held as the number of games for the latent portion. "50G" is determined as the number of games with "50G", and the number of additional games of "50G" is notified. As a result, the player is notified as if 50 games were added due to the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 has notified the number of games for the latent amount, the number of games for the latent amount held by the sub-control board 72 is "0G" at this point.

Subsequently, FIG. 150 (C) is a diagram showing a control example 2 when the sub-control board 72 performs additional notification. In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games for the latent portion instead in the case of non-winning in the additional lottery at the time of winning the rare combination. In the control example 2 shown in (C), when the sub-control board 72 wins the extra lottery at the time of winning the rare role, the sub-control board 72 notifies by adding the number of additional games for the latent amount to the number of additional games won.

Specifically, in the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), first, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games of "50G" in the additional lottery when the MB is operated. As a result of the sub-control board 72 holding the number of additional games at the time of MB operation without notifying, at this point, the sub-control board 72 adds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount.

In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (C), as a result of winning the rare combination, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery to determine the number of additional games of "10G". At this point, since the sub-control board 72 holds "50G" as the number of games for the latent amount, the sub-control board 72 adds the number of additional games for the latent amount to the "10G" won in the additional lottery and notifies the user. To do. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 holds the number of games that may be added by the rare role that triggered the additional lottery as the number of additional games won in the additional lottery and the number of hidden games. Notify within the range of the sum with the number of additional games. In the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), the sum of the number of additional games won in the additional lottery and the number of additional games held as the number of hidden games is "60G", but the trigger for the additional lottery is It is assumed that there is "50G" instead of "60G" as the number of games that may be added by the role of rare. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games of "50G". As a result, the player is notified as if 50 games were added even though only 10 games were added due to the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 has notified the number of games for the latent amount, the number of games for the latent amount held by the sub-control board 72 is "10G" at this point.

In the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), as a result of winning the rare role after that, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery, but since the additional lottery was not won, the sub-control board 72 , Notifies the number of additional games of "10G" held. As a result, the number of games for the latent amount held by the sub-control board 72 becomes "0G".

In addition, the sub-control board 72 may notify the number of additional games for the latent amount that is always held in the case where the additional lottery based on the rare role is not won in the state where the number of additional games is held. Often, the number of additional games held by the latent amount may be notified with a predetermined probability.

<Additional notification and setting suggestion during ART>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board 72 rotates the number of additional games for the latent amount at the time of winning the rare combination, thereby increasing the frequency of the notification of the addition at the time of winning the rare combination, and also at one time. The number of additional games is increasing. According to the control using such latency, it is possible to control the setting suggestion as follows.

In recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery (normal processing) related to ART (AT) based on an internal winning combination or the like with a common probability regardless of the set value. As a result, the fluctuation of the profit balance is suppressed, and the game can be played with peace of mind, but there is a problem that the setting estimation factor is reduced. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a new setting guessing element is realized by hiding the lottery result using the common process while eliminating the setting difference from the lottery based on the normal process related to ART (AT). There is.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (D), in the pachislot machine 1, the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination in order to completely eliminate the setting difference from the additional lottery based on the normal processing triggered by the rare combination. Both the probability of winning and the additional lottery at the time of winning the rare role are performed with a common probability regardless of the set value. For the sake of simplicity, in the example shown in FIG. 150 (D), the probability that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination is about 1/60 common to all settings, and is determined by the additional lottery at the time of winning the rare combination. The expected degree of the number of additional games that can be played is about "10G" for all settings.

In the additional lottery based on the common processing at the time of SMB operation, the lottery probability itself of the additional lottery is common to all settings, but the probability that the SMB is determined as the internal winning combination is set differently. For the sake of simplicity, in the example shown in FIG. 150 (D), the probability that the SMB is determined as the internal winning combination is set to about 1/18 in setting 1 and about 1/15 in setting 6, and when the SMB is operating. The expected degree of the number of additional games that can be determined in the additional lottery is about "5G" for all settings.

In such a case, for example, when 180 games are played, the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination three times regardless of the set value, and "30G" can be expected to be added with the rare combination as an opportunity. On the other hand, regarding SMB, in setting 1, SMB operates 10 times, and an additional "50G" can be expected triggered by SMB operation, and in setting 6, SMB operates 12 times, triggered by SMB operation. An additional "60G" can be expected.

At this time, as described above, the sub-control board 72 hides the additional amount when the MB is operated and turns it into the additional notification when the rare role is won, so that the total number of additional games of "80G" is notified in the setting 1. In setting 6, the total number of additional games of "90G" is notified. By hiding the additional amount when the MB is activated, the player feels that the additional amount is not performed when the MB is activated, so the setting difference is completely eliminated from the lottery regarding ART (AT) based on the normal processing. However, it is possible to provide the player with a setting guessing element.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols according to the MB, and when the MB is operated, the number of additional games of "ART" is determined, and the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination. , In order to determine the number of additional games of "ART", the main control board 71 functions as a first additional determination means and a second additional determination means. At this time, when the number of additional games is determined, the main control board 71 extends the period during which "ART" can be continued by the determined number of additional games, so that the main control board 71 functions as an additional control means.

Further, since the sub-control board 72 holds the number of additional games by the additional lottery at the time of MB operation without being notified, the sub-control board 72 functions as an additional latent means. Then, the sub-control board 72 notifies the player of the number of additional games determined by the main control board 71 using the display unit 100, and does not notify the additional lottery at the time of winning the rare role in the case of non-winning. The sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as notification means in order to notify the number of additional games held as they are instead.

<Direction stage during ART>
Subsequently, the production stage in "ART" will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. First, with reference to FIGS. 151 (A) and 151 (B), a control example different from that of FIG. 150 regarding notification of the number of hidden additional games in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games by aligning the symbols.

As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when "F_SP rip B1 (No. 22)" to "F_SP rip B3 (No. 24)" are determined as internal winning combinations, the symbols displayed according to the pressing order. The combination is different, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the combination of symbols with the same symbols ("red BAR lip", "red 7 lip", "W matching lip") is displayed. To. In the pachislot machine 1, when there is a number of hidden additional games, a combination of symbols such as "red BAR lip", "red 7 lip", and "W-matched lip" is displayed to notify the number of hidden additional games. .. Specifically, when there is no hidden additional game number or when the number of hidden additional games is not notified, the push order of "left 1st" is notified and the combination of symbols related to "replay" is notified. Prompt to display. In this case, the push order is notified by at least the sub-control board 72 via the display unit 100, but the main control board 71 may also be notified via the notification lamp 147a together with the sub-control board 72. ..

On the other hand, when the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games for 50 games, the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lips", and adds 50 games. An additional notification effect indicating that the above has been performed is performed. Similarly, when the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games for 100 games, the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols related to the "red BAR lip", and adds 100 games. When an additional notification effect is performed to indicate that the above is performed and the number of hidden additional games is notified for 150 games, the push order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols related to the "W-matched lip" is notified. An additional notification effect indicating that 150 games have been added is performed.

Subsequently, FIG. 151 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of additional games for the latent amount held by the sub-control board 72 without being notified and the push order notified by the sub-control board 72. In FIG. 151, in addition to "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)" to "F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)", "F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)" and "F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)" ) ”Is also illustrated. Here, "F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)" and "F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)" are roles used in the additional lottery based on the chance C mode and the chance B mode, as shown in FIG. 151. In addition, since it may be used for notifying the number of additional games for the latent amount, it will be described together.

First, the "F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)" can display the "red BAR lip" used for the "100G notification" as a combination of symbols having the same symbols. Therefore, when the number of hidden additional games is "0 to 49G" and "50 to 99G", the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order of "left 1st" and displays the symbol related to "replay". The display of the combination is urged, or the effect of urging the aim of the symbol "Red 7" is performed together with the pressing order of "Right 1st", and the display of the combination of the symbols related to "Red 7 fanning" is urged. In addition, when the number of hidden additional games is "100 to 149G" or "150G or more", the sub-control board 72 is an effect that encourages the aim of the symbol "red BAR" along with the pressing order of "middle 1st". Is performed to prompt the display of the combination of symbols related to the "red BAR lip", and an additional notification effect indicating that 100 games have been added is performed.

The same applies to "F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)" to "F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)", and the sub-control board 72 is held as unreported as shown in FIG. 151 (B). A predetermined push order and a symbol to be aimed at are notified according to the number of additional games for the latent amount, and an additional notification effect indicating that the predetermined number of games has been added is performed. For example, at the time of winning "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)", the sub-control board 72 is "left 1st" when the number of hidden additional games is "0 to 49G" and "50 to 99G". Notifies the pressing order of, prompts the display of the combination of symbols related to "replay", and when the number of hidden additional games is "100 to 149G", the symbol "Middle 1st" is pressed together with the symbol " A production that encourages the aim of "Red BAR" is performed, a display of a combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip" is performed, and an additional notification effect indicating that 100 games have been added is performed, and the game is hidden. When the number of additional games is "150G or more", a production is performed to encourage the player to aim for the symbol "Red BAR" along with the pressing order of "Right 1st", and the display of the combination of symbols related to "W-matched lip" is promoted. At the same time, an additional notification effect indicating that 150 games have been added is performed. In the present embodiment, since the symbol "red 7" is arranged next to the symbol "red BAR" on all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the combination of the symbols related to the "W-aligned lip" is displayed. In the case of urging, it is sufficient to perform an effect urging the aim of the symbol "red BAR".

In this way, the sub-control board 72 associates the number of additional games to be notified for each combination of symbols with which the symbols are aligned, and the number of hidden additional games can be stopped and displayed in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. When the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of symbols is greater than or equal to the number of additional games to be notified, the number of additional games associated with the combination of symbols is notified while the push order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols is notified. Notify the addition. As a result, the number of additional games notified by one additional effect can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the sub-control board 72 is always required when the number of hidden additional games is equal to or greater than the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. The notification for the additional production may be performed, or the notification for the additional production may be performed with a predetermined probability.

In addition, there is also a role in which a plurality of combinations of symbols associated with the number of additional games to be notified can be stopped and displayed, and the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of the plurality of symbols is hidden more than any of the numbers. There may be a large number of additional games. As an example, "F_SP rip B1 (No. 20)" can stop and display "red BAR rip" associated with "100G" and "W-aligned rip" associated with "150G". Therefore, when "F_SP Lip B1 (No. 20)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of hidden additional games is "150G or more". In this case, the sub-control board 72 may perform any notification, and for example, the type of notification may be determined according to the production stage shown below.

Next, the production stage during "ART" will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of production stages as the production stages during "ART", and the sub-control board 72 performs an additional notification effect according to the effect stage in which the player is staying. The production stage is a kind of production state, and is determined according to the game state. As the production stage, for example, in addition to the background and the scene (scene), the type of the displayed character or the movement of the character, or a combination thereof can be used. Here, the sub-control board 72 uses, for example, various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to addition during "ART" as the game state for determining the effect stage. In addition to the mode, the number of additional games hidden is also taken into consideration.

FIG. 151 (C) is a conceptual diagram of the correspondence between the number of hidden additional games and the production stage. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (C), as the production stage in "ART", for example, "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "stage C" are included. For example, "Stage A" is a basic production stage, and "Stage B" is a production in which a player is relatively likely to aim at the design "Red 7" and encourage the display of "Red 7 Lip". It's a stage. In addition, "Stage C" is a production stage in which it is relatively easy to direct the player to aim at the design "Red BAR" and encourage the display of "Red BAR Lip", and "Stage D" is the production stage in which the design "Red BAR" is relatively easy to be performed. This is a production stage in which it is relatively easy to perform a production that encourages the player to display "W-matched rip".

The sub-control board 72 determines the production stage according to the number of hidden additional games, and (a part of) the number of additional games hidden by the additional notification effect corresponding to the determined production stage is given to the player. To notify. For example, in the sub-control board 72, the larger the number of hidden additional games, the easier it is to determine "stage D" as the production stage, and the smaller the number of hidden additional games, the more "stage A" is used as the production stage. Easy to decide. For the player, when he / she moves to a higher-level production stage, he / she can have expectations for the subsequent game, and the interest is improved. In addition, since the number of additional games hidden is large, it is possible to realize various production controls such as performing a more lively production on the upper production stage.

In addition, if the production stage is determined only from the number of additional games that are hidden, even if it is a higher production stage, only the latent amount is notified, and from the viewpoint of a skilled player who understands the specifications. , The interest is lost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board 72 determines the production stage from the various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to the addition during "ART" and the number of hidden additional games. To do. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the notification is an additional notification for the latent amount or an additional notification as a result of an additional lottery based on various modes, so that the player's interest in the additional notification effect is reduced. Never. In particular, in the present embodiment, the chance B mode manages the addition based on the "red 7 lip (red 7 alignment)", and the chance C mode manages the addition based on the "red BAR lip (red BAR alignment)". Then, since the notification of the addition of the latent amount is also performed based on the "Red 7 rip" and the "Red BAR rip", the chance B mode and the chance C mode and the number of hidden additional games are taken into consideration. By determining the production stage, it is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the trigger of the additional notification, and it is possible to attract the player's interest in the additional notification production.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an effect stage during “ART” in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 152 (A), the types of production stages in "ART" in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 has five production stages, "ART stage 1", "ART stage 2", "ART stage 3", "ART stage 4", and "ART stage 5", as production stages during "ART". In detail, as the production stage during "ART", there is a production stage called "Ending Stage", but this "Ending Stage" is a dedicated production stage corresponding to the ball ejection state "Ending". Therefore, it is omitted in the description of FIG. 152 because the migration is performed according to the dedicated migration conditions.

As shown in FIG. 152 (A), "ART stage 1" is a basic production stage in "ART", and "ART stage 2" has a chance A mode of "high accuracy" or higher ("high accuracy"). , "Ultra-high accuracy"), or a production stage that suggests that the number of hidden additional games is "small" (0 to 49G). In "ART stage 3", the chance B mode is "high accuracy" or higher ("high accuracy", "ultra-high accuracy"), or the number of hidden additional games is "medium" (50 to 99G). It is a production stage that suggests that there is, and in "ART stage 4", the chance C mode is "high accuracy" or higher ("high accuracy", "ultra-high accuracy"), or the number of additional games hidden is " It is a production stage that suggests that it is "large" (100 to 149G). Further, in "ART stage 5", a plurality of modes of chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode are "high accuracy" or higher ("high accuracy", "ultra high accuracy"), or hidden. This is a production stage that suggests that the number of additional games is "extra large" (150G or more).

By doing so, the frequency with which the sub-control board 72 performs the additional effect differs between the five production stages, and in the "ART stage 1", the frequency with which the sub-control board 72 performs the additional effect is the lowest. Corresponding to a stage, "ART stage 2" corresponds to an effect stage in which the sub-control board 72 performs an additional effect, and "ART stage 3" corresponds to an effect stage in which the sub-control board 72 performs an additional effect. It corresponds to the next lowest production stage, "ART stage 4" corresponds to the production stage where the sub-control board 72 performs the additional production, and "ART stage 5" corresponds to the sub-control board 72. Corresponds to the production stage where the frequency of performing is the highest.

FIG. 152 (B) is a sub_effect stage shift lottery table that is referred to when the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage. A sub_ production stage transition lottery table is provided for each current production stage (in FIG. 152 (B), the sub_ production stage transition lottery is referred to when the current production stage is “ART stage 1”. Only the table is shown, and the table referred to when staying at other production stages is omitted).

Sub_ production stage transition In the lottery table, as reference items, "Chance C + Chance B high accuracy or higher", "Chance C high accuracy or higher", "Chance B high accuracy or higher", "Chance A high accuracy or higher", "Hidden" "Extra large", "Latent large", "Hidden", and "Latent small" are defined, and the lottery value for the lottery result (the production stage of the transition destination) is defined for each reference item. According to such a sub_ production stage transition lottery table, for example, in the case of "chance C high accuracy or higher", the production stage is maintained as "ART1 stage" with a probability of 16384/32768, and 16384/32768. There is a probability that the production stage will shift from "ART1 stage" to "ART4 stage".

The reference item "chance C + chance B high accuracy or higher" means that the chance C mode and chance B mode are "high accuracy" or higher, and "chance C high accuracy or higher" means chance C. It means that the mode is "high accuracy" or higher, "chance B high accuracy or higher" means that the chance B mode is "high accuracy" or higher, and "chance A high accuracy or higher" means. It means that the chance A mode is "high accuracy" or higher. In addition, "hidden extra large" means that the number of hidden additional games is "extra large" (150 G or more), and "hidden large" means that the number of hidden additional games is "large" ( It means that it is 100 to 149G), "in hiding" means that the number of additional games that are hidden is "medium" (50 to 99G), and "small latent" means that it is hidden. It means that the number of additional games played is "small" (0 to 49G).

These conditions specified by the reference item may be satisfied more than once. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 searches for the conditions defined by the reference items according to the search order shown in FIG. 152 (C), and uses the first satisfied condition as the reference item to perform the transition lottery of the effect stage. In this way, by determining the production stage from the various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to the addition during "ART" and the number of hidden additional games, the notification of the additional amount of the latent amount is notified. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether it is an additional notification as a result of an additional lottery based on various modes.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means and a stop control means. ..

Further, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games of "ART" when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and extends the period during which "ART" can be continued by the determined number of additional games. Functions as an additional determination means and an additional control means.

Further, since the sub-control board 72 can hold the number of additional games without being notified, the sub-control board 72 functions as an additional latent means. Then, since the sub-control board 72 notifies the player of the number of additional games determined by the main control board 71 using the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as notification means. ..

Further, the sub-control board 72 can determine one production stage from a plurality of production stages according to the number of hidden additional games (the number of unreported additional games), and the number of hidden additional games. The sub-control board 72 functions as an effect stage determining means because it is possible to execute an additional notification effect that promotes the alignment of symbols according to the effect stage.

<Ending control during ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 153, the ending control during "ART" will be described. In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but the stage where it is confirmed that the limit process will be performed in the future. (At the stage when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or higher than the specified value), the main control board 71 shifts the ball ejection state to the "ending". On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state on the sub side to the "ending" even when the ball ejection state is shifted to the "ending" on the main side, and is predetermined. The production state is shifted to "ending" when the condition is used. In particular, the details of the control in which the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” will be described below. In the present embodiment, since the advantageous section includes "ART", "normal advantage", etc., the advantageous section and "ART" do not completely match, but the advantageous section and "ART" are used in the control shown below. Since the difference from "" is irrelevant, it will be described below assuming that the advantageous section and "ART" are in exactly the same gaming state.

First, FIG. 153 (A) shows the relationship between the main side counter counting on the main (main control board 71) side and the sub side counter counting on the sub (main control board 71) side in relation to the advantageous section. It is a figure which shows. The main control board 71 uses the first counter to count the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games), and uses the second counter to continue the advantageous section for a period (the number of remaining games). ) Is counted. When the value of the first counter reaches "1500", the main control board 71 performs limit processing, ends the advantageous section regardless of the value of the second counter, and the value of the first counter becomes "1500". If the value of the second counter reaches "0" before reaching, the advantageous section ends.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 counts the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games) using the third counter, and the period during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fourth counter (the number of games that have been digested). The period of notification to the player (number of games remaining) is counted, and the game during the period (number of games remaining) during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fifth counter. The unreported period (the number of unreported games (= the number of hidden additional games)) is counted for the person. When the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games, the number of notified games is added and the number of unreported games is subtracted by the number of notified games.

Since the number of digested games counted in both the main and sub is basically the same, the value of the first counter on the main side and the value of the third counter on the sub side are the same (note that the advantageous section). If "ART" and "ART" do not match, the limit processing is not performed on the sub side, so there is no need to count the number of digested games in the advantageous section on the sub side, and the number of digested games in "ART" should be counted. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but they are not related to the control described below).

Further, on the sub side, since the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported are individually counted, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub side are counted individually. Also, the value of the second counter on the main side and the value of the fifth counter on the sub side do not match. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported matches the number of remaining games counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the sub The sum of the value of the 4th counter and the value of the 5th counter on the side are the same.

As shown in FIG. 153 (B), the main control board 71 performs transition control to the “ending” based on the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, for example, the number of games. As a result of the addition, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value, the payout state is shifted to the "ending".

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 "ends (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games) of the sub-side effect state according to the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section. END) ”. Here, FIG. 153 (C) is a conceptual diagram of the "ending" transition control on the sub side, and FIG. 153 (D) is referred to when the sub control board 72 shifts the effect state to the "ending". Sub_ending transition lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 153 (D), the sub_ending transition lottery table defines the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games as a reference item, and whether or not to shift to the "ending" for each total value. Information on the lottery value for the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is specified. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games is "1000 to 1199G", there is a probability of 24576/32768 to the "ending". The transition lottery is not won, and the transition lottery to the "ending" is won with a probability of 8192/32768.

As shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D), the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the "ending" with a higher probability as the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. .. Then, when the effect state is shifted to the "ending", the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage to the dedicated "ending stage" and maintains the effect stage at the "ending stage" until the advantageous section ends. If the ball ejection state has not shifted to the "ending" on the main side, it is not necessary to perform a lottery to shift to the "ending" on the sub side, so that the sub control board 72 is in the ball ejection state on the main side. Is shifted to the "ending" (that is, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value in the counter managed by the main side), the sub-side production A lottery may be performed as to whether or not to shift the state to the "ending".

By shifting to the dedicated production stage at the time of shifting to the "ending" in this way, the player can know in advance that the limit processing will be performed. Since it is confirmed that the limit processing will be performed after the transition to the "ending stage", there is no point in performing an additional notification effect on the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the "ending stage".

In addition, the transition to the "ending stage" is performed with a higher probability as the total value on the sub side (excluding the number of unreported games) increases while the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. Therefore, the probability of transition to the "ending stage" is higher as the number of additional games held unannounced (number of unannounced games) is smaller, and the greater the number of additional games held unannounced. It has a low probability. The transition control of the production stage during the above-mentioned "ART" in FIGS. 151 and 152 is similarly performed even when the transition to the "ending stage" is not performed even though the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. It can be applied, and the sub-control board 72 shifts to an effect stage in which the frequency of performing the additional notification effect is relatively high with a high probability when the number of additional games held in the unannounced state is large. For the player, the entertainment is improved when the additional notification effect is performed. Therefore, the entertainment of the game can be improved by controlling the production mode according to the notification status of the number of remaining games.

In addition, after shifting to the "ending stage", in principle, the production of the "ending stage" is continued until the end of the advantageous section, the production of the "ending stage" is ended in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the game ends. At the time or at the start of the next game, the stage shifts to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

In addition, during the stay of the "ending stage", even if a bonus such as LMB is activated, the limit processing will still be performed in the near future, so it is desirable to maintain the "ending stage". Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous section (for example, a game in which the value of the first counter is "1499"), when a predetermined number of games is applied to a bonus required for digestion such as LMB and the bonus is activated During the operation of the bonus, the first counter reaches "1500", the limit processing is performed, and the advantageous section ends. At this time, if the "ending stage" is terminated and the stage is shifted to another production stage (the production stage corresponding to the normal section or the production stage during the bonus operation) even though the bonus operation is in a state where the number of balls is increased. , May give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the operation of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 continues the production stage as the "ending stage" until the end of the bonus, and at the end of the bonus (of the advantageous section). It is also possible to shift to the production stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing end notification, immersive prevention display, etc.).

Further, even if the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is activated such that the value of the first counter is "1498" to "1500" and is carried over without winning a prize, the sub-control board 72 will be placed on the sub-control board 72. It is preferable to perform the delay processing of the end of the ending state in which the "ending stage" is continued, the bonus combination being carried over wins a prize, and the end of the activated bonus is waited for to end the "ending stage". In this case, the sub-control board 72 is used because the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even if the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing and the push order and the like are not notified (normal section). It is preferable that the "ending stage" in such a non-advantageous section has a different effect from the "ending stage" in the advantageous section to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not out of order. In addition, the sub-control board 72 wins a bonus role in a game in which a bonus role can be won in the "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section (a game that does not win a role that hinders the winning of the bonus role such as replay). It is also possible to inform the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying the player that the "ending stage" will end after the end of the bonus and the notification that the instruction function has ended. Further, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the bonus operation, or when there is a high possibility that the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 is different from the other bonus operating. The effect (for example, an effect that congratulates a large amount of acquisition or an effect that includes some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, operation, or end of the bonus.

Further, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, an operation of inserting a medal for the next game or an operation of automatically reinserting or starting by operating a re-game) for a predetermined time after all reels are stopped. Etc.) may not be accepted, and freeze processing may be performed at the end of the advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information on the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section, the number of digested games, or the number of sets. In addition, the entanglement prevention display may be displayed in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 causes a freeze at the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing so as not to hinder the digestion of the bonus. Instead, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. In addition, regardless of the end of the advantageous section, the predetermined time at the end of the bonus is for the purpose of securing time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus. If the freeze of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 Only the freeze at the end of the bonus may be performed at the end of the bonus, and during the freeze at the end of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 may display information regarding an advantageous section, a display for preventing entanglement, and the like. By suppressing the occurrence of multiple delays in the game due to freeze, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from becoming worse. The contents described so far may be applied even when the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation due to the limit processing of another example described later, and the specification designer may apply the above depending on the type of limiter to be activated. Whether the process is applied or not can be arbitrarily decided in consideration of the flow of the production and the like.

<Variable limiter>
Up to this point, the conditions for executing the limit processing for ending the advantageous section have been described on the premise that the execution conditions for the limit processing are constant, for example, when the advantageous section reaches 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section. However, the execution condition of the limit processing by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and it is sufficiently excessive gambling if the advantageous section is not continued beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section). Can exert the effect of suppressing. Therefore, when the first counter (the number of digested games) satisfies the predetermined end condition, the main control board 71 sets the advantageous section before the first counter (the number of digested games) exceeds the upper limit value. The limit processing to be terminated may be performed.

For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the timing is halfway for the number of games in one set (for example, due to the "normal advantage" period or the bonus during "ART". , 1480G, which is the remaining 20G up to the upper limit), the "ART" of this set may end. In such a case, the next set of "ART" cannot be performed for all one set (50G), and limit processing is performed in the middle of the set. Even though the next set of "ART" has started, the player may be dissatisfied if it is forcibly terminated immediately. Therefore, although the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the "ART" of this set, which is well separated, although it is before reaching the upper limit value. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) always ends at a well-separated timing, so that the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

Further, depending on the pachislot machine, it is conceivable to perform a predetermined ending control when performing the limit processing, and therefore, a case of performing such an ending control will also be described. For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450G (with a predetermined end condition). When the setting range) is reached, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50G as one set for the ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and one set for the ending is set. The limit processing may be executed on the assumption that a predetermined end condition is satisfied at the time of end, and the advantageous section may be ended. That is, the limit processing is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450 G from the start of the advantageous section, and is executed from 1450 to 1500 G. By allowing the limit processing to have a certain range of execution timings in this way, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and giving the player a sense of discomfort. .. In addition, even if the number of games per set of "ART" is fixed, the timing at which one set for the ending is decided is due to the addition of bonus activation and additional specialization state that is different from the basic set. Since it is not always exactly 1400 games, which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable to have a range in the setting range of the predetermined end condition (the period during which the limit processing can be reserved).

As will be described later, the limit processing can be performed not only based on the number of games but also based on the difference number of medals acquired by the player during the advantageous section and the number of occurrences of navigation (number limiter, payout number limiter, which will be described later). Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter is applicable regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 is not limited to the case where the limit processing execution timing reaches the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value) of the limit processing activation counters (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation number counter, etc.). When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold value is reached. The predetermined end condition is arbitrary, but as an example, if the "ART" of the next set is started in the set number management type "ART", the limiter is activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set. It can be adopted that it is predicted that the game will be done (in Pachislot, the amount of increase in medals per game in "ART" and the winning probability of each role can be grasped from the design specifications. Even when the number limiter, the payout number limiter, or the navigation number limiter described later is used, it can be predicted that the limiter will be activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set).

The technical ideas on this point can be summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (the number of remaining games that can be continued in the advantageous section, the number of differences, the number of navigations), which indicates the remaining period during which a specific game state (advantageous section) can be continued, reaches the end threshold (0 games remaining, 0 cards, 0 times). When it reaches, the specific game state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value (number of digested games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Alternatively, if a range is allowed for the execution timing of the limit processing as in the modified example, the value of the second numerical value is the end if any of the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, etc.). A specific state ending means (main control board 71) that terminates the specific gaming state even when the threshold value has not been reached.
In addition, although the specific state termination means is described collectively for both the process of ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the right of the advantageous section becomes zero such as "ART" and the case of ending the advantageous section by the limit process. , It may be provided as a separate process in the program.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts the advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 0, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, or when the limit is reached. In the case where the execution timing of the process is widened, the advantageous section is terminated when the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as an example is reached, so that it functions as a specific state start means and a specific state end means.

Further, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have numerical values related to the advantageous section (for example, the number of digested games in the advantageous section, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, and the number of notified games among the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. Or, in order to count the number of unreported games), the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 function as counting means.

Further, since the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify a part of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section and manages it as the number of notified games, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 may be used. It functions as a means for notifying the remaining period. Then, since the sub-control board 72 holds the remaining number of unreported games out of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section without being notified, the sub-control board 72 functions as a remaining period latent means. Then, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify a part of the number of unreported games held as unreported as the number of additional games, and also notifies according to the number of notified additional games. In order to update the number of completed games and the number of unreported games, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as additional notification means. Since the sub-control board 72 determines one production stage from the plurality of production stages, the sub-control board 72 functions as a production stage determination means.

<Last freeze during ART>
Next, the last freeze performed by the main control board 71 at the end of "ART" will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 draws a lottery as to whether or not to generate the last freeze at the timing when the number of remaining games of "ART" is subtracted from 1 to 0. When this lottery is won, the main control board 71 adds a value (= 1500-the number of games in the advantageous section digested) to the number of remaining games in the ART until the limit of the advantageous section is reached, and performs a predetermined freeze process. .. As an example, when the number of games digested in the advantageous section is 200 times and the lottery of the last freeze is won, the main control board 71 adds 1300 to the number of remaining games of ART. Since the limit processing is performed when the number of games digested during the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, for example, the game during the "normal advantage" is performed 50 times, then the game shifts to the "ART", and the game is performed during the "ART". If the last freeze lottery is won after playing 100 games, the number of games digested during the advantageous section will be 150 times (= 50 + 100), and 1300 will be added to the remaining number of games in ART. In addition, when the main control board 71 wins the lottery of the last freeze, it is sufficient to allow the continuation of "ART" until the limit processing is performed, and the value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached for the number of remaining games of ART is set. It is not always necessary to perform the addition process of adding. For example, the main control board 71 may allow the continuation of "ART" until the limit processing is performed by prohibiting the end of the advantageous section other than the limit processing. For example, the main control board 71 may allow the continuation of "ART". , Regardless of the number of games in the advantageous section that has been digested so far, by adding a value (9999) that exceeds the limiter to the number of games remaining in ART, it is allowed to continue "ART" until limit processing is performed. May be good.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts an advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is an example in a case where the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times or a case where the execution timing of the limit process is widened. When the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as is reached, the advantageous section is terminated, so that the game functions as a specific state start means and a specific state end means.

Further, since the main control board 71 counts numerical values related to the advantageous section (for example, the number of digested games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section), the main control board 71 functions as a counting means. Then, when the number of remaining games of "ART" becomes 0, the main control board 71 determines whether or not to perform the last freeze, and when it is determined to perform the last freeze, the limit is limited to the number of remaining games of "ART". While adding the number of games until the processing is performed, if it is determined not to perform the last freeze, the "ART" is terminated. Therefore, the main control board 71 has the end processing determination means and the end processing execution means. Functions as.

[Modified example of the third embodiment]
Further, as a modification of the third embodiment, for example, the flow of the gaming state as shown in FIG. 154 may be used, and the ball ejection state as shown in FIG. 100 may be applied to such a gaming state. ..

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been described that the lighting / non-lighting state of the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) corresponds to the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section (normal section). For example, it is shown in FIG. 155. As described above, a standby section related to a bonus (BB or the like with no setting difference) may be set as a section in the middle of transitioning from a non-advantageous section (normal section) to an advantageous section.

The standby section means a section in which the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is not turned on until the bonus is won, even if the advantageous section is won when the bonus is won without any setting difference. That is, from the winning of the bonus to the winning, the advantageous section lamp is not lit and the waiting section is set, and when the bonus is won, the advantageous section lamp is lit and the advantageous section progresses.

For such a waiting section, for example, the waiting section flag is set by winning "BB1 + watermelon", and the waiting section progresses until the winning of BB1, while the waiting section flag is not set by winning "BB1 + cherry", and the winning section is not set. It is also possible to determine whether or not to set the waiting section for each flag so that the advantageous section is started without going through the waiting section on the condition of. However, it is desirable not to distinguish whether the standby section is set or not with the same flag. As described above, in the bonus corresponding to the setting of the waiting section, the advantageous section lamp can be turned off as the waiting section while the bonus is carried over even if the winning of the bonus is won and the advantageous section is won.

[Another control example]
Subsequently, another control example peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 different from the peculiar control described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 163.

<Additional control during advantageous section>
First, the additional control in the advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. Depending on the pachislot machine, a role (hereinafter referred to as a specific role) that makes it easy to give a privilege to the player when it is determined as an internal winning role, such as a so-called fixed role or a premier role, may be provided. Normally, such a specific role (fixed role or premier role) has a lower probability of being determined as an internal winning role than other roles, while the probability of granting benefits to the player is higher for other roles. The granting of benefits is given preferentially, such as being relatively high (for example, 100%), or the benefits granted are greater than the benefits granted at other occasions.

By the way, in the case of a pachislot machine that performs limit processing for a game in an advantageous section as described above, if a specific role that is given preferential treatment is determined as an internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is performed. However, even if a large privilege is given according to the specific role, the limit processing is applied, so that the large privilege given by the specific role is wasted, and there is a possibility that the motivation to play is impaired. On the other hand, if the benefits are given without limitation during the game state that is advantageous to the player such as the advantageous section (ART), the player's gambling spirit will be unnecessarily enhanced, and the gambling will be felt too high. There is also the problem of being shunned by some players.

In this regard, as shown below, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention executes additional control in an advantageous section that does not impair the motivation for playing while balancing gambling by limit processing. Although the details will be described later, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 limits the granting of benefits according to the timing when the specific combination wins. Here, in a normal pachislot machine, a combination of unique symbols is displayed at the time of winning a specific role so that the player can grasp the winning of the specific role. Therefore, it is displayed for the player. The winning of a specific role can be known from the combination of symbols. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a large privilege is given based on a specific combination, the main control board 71 performs stop control so that a combination of unique symbols is displayed, and grants the privilege based on the specific combination. When limiting, stop control is performed so that a combination of general-purpose symbols that can be displayed in other combinations is displayed. For the player, since it is not possible to grasp that the specific role is winning, even if the granting of the privilege is restricted, the player does not feel a sense of loss.

First, with reference to FIG. 156 (A), the combination of the combination and the symbol used to explain the additional control of the advantageous section will be described. In the following, the additional control in the advantageous section will be described with reference to the combination of symbols described in the first embodiment. In the explanation of the additional control in the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. Three types of roles are used. The winning probability of each specific combination is omitted because it is not related to this control.

"F_single chili lip", "F_2 consecutive chili lip", and "F_3 consecutive chili lip" have different combinations of symbols to be stopped and displayed depending on the mode of the stop operation, and when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode, a unique symbol is used. The combination of symbols is displayed along the valid line, and when the stop operation is performed in a mode other than the specific mode, a general-purpose symbol combination is displayed along the valid line.

Specifically, the main control board 71 displays the combination of symbols related to "single chili lip" along the effective line when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left 1st" at the time of winning "F_single chili lip". , When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the effective line. Further, when the main control board 71 is stopped in the pressing order of "left 1st" at the time of winning "F_2 consecutive chili lip", the combination of symbols related to "double chili lip" is displayed along the effective line, and " When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the effective line. Further, when the main control board 71 is stopped in the pressing order of "left 1st" at the time of winning "F_triple chili lip", the combination of symbols related to "triple chili lip" is displayed along the effective line, and " When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the effective line.

As described in the first embodiment, in the combination of the symbols related to the "single chili lip", the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. It is a combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols related to "double chili lip" is a combination of symbols in which chili symbols are displayed on two reels, and the combination of symbols related to "triple chili lip" is on all reels. It is a combination of symbols that display the Chilean symbol. However, in the first embodiment, "single chili lip", "double chili lip", and "triple chili lip" are not a combination of symbols peculiar to a certain role, but in the following description, "single chili lip" Is a combination of symbols unique to "F_single chili lip", "double chili lip" is a combination of symbols unique to "F_double chili lip", and "triple chili lip" is unique to "F_triple chili lip". It shall be a combination of symbols.

On the other hand, the symbol related to "replay" displayed when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st" in "single chili lip", "double chili lip", and "triple chili lip". The combination of symbols is a general-purpose combination of symbols, for example, a combination of symbols displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation at the time of winning "F_replay". The mode of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols peculiar to the specific combination is arbitrary and is not limited to the pressing order. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 156 (A), the mode of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the combination of unique symbols is common to all the specific combinations, but the mode is not limited to this, and each stop is made separately. It may be an mode of operation, or only a part of the specific combination may be another mode of stop operation.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 156 (B), an outline of the additional lottery when each specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination will be described. In this control, the granting of benefits is restricted when a specific role is won, but in the following, in order to simplify the explanation, as an example of limiting the granting of benefits, the granting of benefits will be described. Of course, limiting the granting of benefits is not limited to invalidating it, but also includes lowering the probability of granting benefits when limiting it than when not limiting it. Here, lowering the probability includes setting the probability to 0%.

As shown in FIG. 156 (B), the additional lottery based on the specific combination differs depending on whether the section is valid or invalid. Here, the valid section is a section in which the additional lottery based on the specific combination is performed, and the invalid section is a section in which the additional lottery based on the specific combination is not performed. In the case of the effective section, the main control board 71 gives a "small privilege" when "F_single chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and "inside" when "F_2 consecutive chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination. "Privilege" is given, and when "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is decided as an internal winning role, "big privilege" is given. In addition, "small privilege", "medium privilege", and "big privilege" in this explanation are for comparison, and "medium privilege" is larger than "small privilege" and more than "big privilege". It means small, and does not mean that a "small benefit" is an absolutely small benefit. In addition, the type of privilege to be granted is arbitrary, and depends on the management method of the duration of the advantageous section. As an example, when the duration is managed by the number of games, the number of additional games for extending the duration and the right (stock) of the additional special zone for easily acquiring the number of additional games correspond.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 156 (C), the outline of the push order navigation in the valid section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination will be described. Note that, in FIG. 156 (C), only the case where the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is won will be described, but the same applies to the "F_single chili lip" and the "F_2 consecutive chili lip". As shown in the figure, when the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the effective section, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are set to "left 1st" via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notifies the push order of "" and the symbol to be aimed at. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the combination of symbols related to the "triple chili lip" is displayed on the effective line. On the other hand, in the invalid section, when the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are, for example, "middle 1st" via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the push order. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed on the effective line. It should be noted that whether or not the privilege is given is determined regardless of the pressing order of notification. Therefore, the notification in this case is performed by the sub control board 72 via the display unit 100 and not by the main control board 71. May be good.

During the valid section, a "big privilege" is given according to the fact that "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is decided as an internal winning combination, so the player can combine the symbols related to the displayed "3 consecutive chili lip". It is possible to grasp that the "big privilege" has been granted and to enjoy the privilege. On the other hand, no privilege is given during the invalid section, but since the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed, the player has decided that "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is the internal winning role. It is not possible to grasp that, and it does not spoil the interest.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 157, an example of a method of setting the valid section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination will be described. FIG. 157 (D) is a diagram showing a first method of setting a valid section and an invalid section. In this first method, based on the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed (in other words, the period elapsed from the start of the advantageous section), the valid section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination To set. Since the size of the privilege given to each specific combination is different as described above, in this first method, the period set as the valid section or the invalid section is different for each specific combination.

As an example, "F_3 consecutive chili lip" to which "big privilege" is given is until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "1000G" (in other words, after the advantageous section starts, "500G". (Until it elapses) is set as a valid section, and after that is set as an invalid section (note that during the normal section, it is set as a valid section regardless of the type of specific combination). In addition, the "F_2 consecutive chili lip" to which the "medium privilege" is given is until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "800G" (in other words, after the advantageous section starts, "700G". (Until it elapses) is set as a valid section, and after that is set as an invalid section. In addition, "F_single chili lip" to which "small privilege" is given is until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "600G" (in other words, "900G" after the advantageous section starts. (Until it elapses) is set as a valid section, and after that is set as an invalid section. Of course, the setting method shown in FIG. 157 (D) is only an example, and the valid section and the invalid section can be set according to the size of the privilege to be given.

When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section (from the start of the advantageous section to the elapse of the specified number of games), the main control board 71 may grant the privilege corresponding to the specific combination. On the other hand, if a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the invalid section (after the specified number of games has passed since the start of the advantageous section), no privilege is given. Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 combine the symbols unique to the specific combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. The mode of the stop operation required to display the stop is notified (the push order of "left 1st" and the symbol to be aimed at are notified), and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have a specific combination inside during the invalid section. When the winning combination is determined, the mode of the stop operation required for stopping and displaying the combination of general-purpose symbols is notified via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100 (notifying the pressing order of "middle 1st"). To do.

In this control, the granting of benefits is restricted when a specific role is won, but as described above, limiting the granting of benefits is more advantageous than when limiting is not performed. Includes lowering the probability of granting. Here, the control processing of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 when the probability of granting the privilege is lowered will be described. The following description also applies to the case where the valid section and the invalid section are set as shown in FIGS. 157 (E) and 157 (F) described later. Further, in the following description, the invalid section will be re-read as "reduction section" and described. The reduction section refers to a section in which the probability of granting a privilege at the time of winning a specific combination is reduced.

The main control board 71 has a first probability (may include 100%) when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the effective section (from the start of the advantageous section until the specified number of games elapses). On the other hand, if the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the reduction section (after the specified number of games has passed since the start of the advantageous section), the first It is determined that the privilege corresponding to the specific combination is given with a second probability (which may include 0%) lower than the probability of. Then, when the main control board 71 decides to give a privilege in response to the determination of the specific combination as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 pass through the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. The mode of the stop operation required to stop and display the combination of symbols unique to the specific combination is notified (notification of the pressing order of "left 1st" and the symbol to be aimed at), and the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Nevertheless, if the main control board 71 decides not to give the privilege, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 stop and display the combination of general-purpose symbols via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the mode of the stop operation required for this (notify the pressing order of "middle 1st"). The second probability of granting the privilege during the reduction section may be changed, for example, in the period elapsed from the start of the advantageous section (in other words, the remaining period until the limit processing is performed). The longer the length, the lower the second probability may be, and the larger the privilege to be given, the lower the second probability may be.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 157 (E), the second method of the method of setting the valid section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination will be described. In this second method, the special section in the advantageous section is regarded as an invalid section, and the other sections are set as valid sections. The special section means, for example, a state in which a plurality of stocks of additional special zones are owned. Depending on the pachislot, if you win the premier role during the normal section, it will shift to the advantageous section (ART) and the advantageous section (ART) will start with multiple stocks of the additional special zone from the beginning. is there. If the premier role is further won in such a state, an excessive profit will be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 157 (E), in the second method, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in such a state, the granting of the privilege is restricted. Specifically, the main control board 71 can grant a privilege corresponding to the specific combination when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section (that is, other than the special section). If a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the invalid section (that is, during the special section), no privilege is given. Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is given), the notification lamp 147a and the display are displayed. Through the unit 100, the mode of the stop operation required to stop and display the combination of symbols unique to the specific combination is notified, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the specific combination during the invalid section. Is determined as the internal winning combination (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is not given), in order to stop and display the combination of general-purpose symbols via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the mode of the required stop operation.

The special section can be set arbitrarily, and as described above, the stock of the additional special zone may be possessed by a predetermined number or more, and the advantageous section (ART) can be continued. An additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) for extending the period may be possessed in a predetermined amount or more without being notified. Further, during the special section, the player may be allowed to stay in a dedicated production stage so that the player can grasp that the special section is in progress.

Further, in FIG. 157 (E), the range of the special section is common to each of the plurality of specific combinations having different privilege sizes, but they may be different. For example, the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" to which "big privilege" is given is a special section in which the stock of the additional special zone is possessed by the first predetermined number or more, and the "medium privilege" is given to "F_2". "Ren Chiri Lip" is a special section where the stock of the special zone for addition is more than the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number or more is possessed, and "F_single chili lip" to which "small privilege" is given is added. A special section may be a state in which the stock of the special zone is possessed by a third predetermined number or more, which is larger than the second predetermined number.

Subsequently, FIG. 157 (F) is a diagram showing a third method of setting a valid section and an invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination. In this third method, an effective section and an invalid section are set in combination with the first method and the second method. That is, in the third method, regardless of the type of the specific combination, the special section in the advantageous section is set as an invalid section, and the "F_3 consecutive chili lip" to which the "big privilege" is given is advantageous other than the special section. Of the sections, until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed reaches "1000G" (in other words, from the start of the advantageous section until "500G" elapses), it is regarded as a valid section, and after that, it is invalid. Set as an interval. Similarly, for "F_2 consecutive chili lip" to which "Medium privilege" is given, among the advantageous sections other than the special section, until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "800G" (in other words). And, from the start of the advantageous section until the elapse of "700G") is set as the valid section, and after that is set as the invalid section. In addition, for "F_single chili lip" to which "small privilege" is given, among the advantageous sections other than the special section, until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes "600G" (in other words, in other words). (From the start of the advantageous section to the elapse of "900G") is set as the valid section, and the subsequent sections are set as the invalid section.

Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section (that is, other than the special section), the main control board 71 can grant the privilege corresponding to the specific combination, while during the invalid section. If a specific role is determined as an internal winning role, no benefits will be given. Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective section of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is given), the notification lamp 147a and the display are displayed. Through the unit 100, the mode of the stop operation required to stop and display the combination of symbols unique to the specific combination is notified, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the specific combination during the invalid section. Is determined as the internal winning combination (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is not given), in order to stop and display the combination of general-purpose symbols via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the mode of the required stop operation.

In this way, the advantageous section is divided into an effective section in which a privilege based on a specific combination can be granted and an invalid section (reduction section) in which the grant of the privilege is restricted, and the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed is different in each. By notifying, the profit given to the player does not become excessive, it is possible to balance the gambling appropriately, and the player does not feel a loss. It does not impair the player's willingness to play.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. The main control board 71 has 7Rs, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. It functions as a stop control means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts the advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 0, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, or when the limit is reached. In the case where the execution timing of the process is widened, the advantageous section ends when the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as an example is reached, so that the process functions as a state control means.

Further, the main control board 71 can give a privilege related to an advantageous section with a predetermined probability when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the main control board 71 determines the specific combination as the internal winning combination. It functions as a probability changing means because it changes the probability that the privilege can be given according to the state (effective section or reduction section) at the time of being granted. Further, if the main control board 71 satisfies a predetermined condition during the advantageous section, the state satisfying the condition can be set as a special section (special state). Therefore, the main control board 71 can be used as a state control means. Function.

Further, when the specific combination is won, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the player of a predetermined pressing order, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify the player. The main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as notification means in order to notify the predetermined pressing order.

<Granting benefits when transitioning to ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 158, the privilege grant at the time of ART transition in the pachislot machine 1 will be described. First, the transition flow of the gaming state in this control will be described with reference to FIG. 158 (A). As shown in the figure, the pachislot machine 1 of this control has a normal section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into a “normal advantage” and an “ART” ball ejection state. The normal section is a non-notification state in which the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 do not notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section is the main control board 71 and / or the sub. The control board 72 is in a notification state capable of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation. Further, "normal advantage" and "ART" are "ART" rather than "normal advantage", although the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation. Is a state in which the frequency (probability) of notifying the mode of the stop operation is higher. This point is the same as the relationship between "normal advantage" and "ART" in the third embodiment (see FIG. 102). In this control, the normal section and the "normal advantage" are sections in which the ball output rate does not exceed 1, and the "ART" is a section in which the ball output rate is higher than the normal section and the "normal advantage" (for example, the ball output rate). Is a section exceeding 1).

As shown in the figure, in this control, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the “normal advantage” of the advantageous section. This transition condition is arbitrary, for example, it may be the winning of the transition lottery, it may be the passage of a predetermined number of games, and a specific winning combination has been determined as the internal winning combination. It may also be that a specific combination of symbols is displayed along the valid line. In this control, the transition from the normal section of (1) to the "normal advantage" is performed with a relatively high probability, for example, the transition is assumed to have a probability of about 1/30.

Further, in this control, the main control board 71 can shift from (2) "normal advantage" to "ART" in an advantageous state. This transition condition is also arbitrary as described above, but in this control, the transition from "normal advantage" to "ART" in (2) is performed with a lower probability than the transition from the normal section to "normal advantage". For example, it is assumed that the transition is made with a probability of about 1/100. Further, the main control board 71 may be shifted from "normal advantage" to "ART" as a ceiling when a predetermined number of games (for example, 500 games) have elapsed while being "normally advantageous".

Further, in this control, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (3) "ART" to the normal section. This transition condition is that "ART" ends, for example, when the period during which "ART" can be continued reaches the end threshold, or when the number of games digested during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold. When the limit processing is performed, the main control board 71 ends "ART" and shifts the game state to the normal section.

As shown in the figure, in this control, the main control board 71 may shift the gaming state from (4) “normal advantage” to the normal section. This transition condition is also arbitrary as described above, and the transition probability is also arbitrary. For example, the probability of transition from the normal section of (1) to "normal advantage" may be the same, the probability may be higher than the transition probability of (1), and the probability of transition of (1) may be higher. It may be a probability between the transition probability and the transition probability from "normal advantage" to "ART" in (2), it may be similar to the transition probability in (2), and ( The probability may be lower than the transition probability of 2). In the example shown in the figure, as in the case of the transition probability of (2), it is assumed that the transition from the "normal advantage" to the normal section has a probability of, for example, about 1/100.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a transition flow of the gaming state, the transition to the advantageous section of the first stage (“normal advantage”) is frequently performed, so that the transition of the gaming state is performed frequently. Since the playability is diversified, it becomes an element to continue the game even during non-ART. On the other hand, the transition to the second-stage advantageous section (“ART”) has a lower probability than the transition probability to the first-stage advantageous section, so it becomes difficult to transfer to the second-stage advantageous section. There is. In this control, the main control board 71 responds to the length of the period that has elapsed in the first-stage advantageous section (“normal advantage”) without shifting to the second-stage advantageous section (“ART”). Benefits will be given at the time of transition to "ART". Specifically, the main control board 71 is set at the start of the initial number of "ART" games (that is, the more the number of games that have passed while remaining "normally advantageous" without shifting to "ART". A large number of games will be given as a period during which "ART" can be continued.

Here, FIG. 158 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a privilege to be given at the time of transition to “ART” in this control. As shown in the figure, when shifting from "normal advantage" to "ART", the main control board 71 becomes "ART" when the number of games elapsed while remaining "normal advantage" is "0 to 99G". "50G" is given as the initial number of games, and when the number of games is "100 to 199G", "100G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART", and the number of games is "200 to 299G". In some cases, "200G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART", and when the number of games is "300 to 399G", "300G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART". When the number is "400 to 499G", "500G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART", and when the number of the same games is "500G", "1000G" is given as the initial number of games of "ART". Is given. When "normal advantage" has passed 500 games and then "ART" has passed 1000 games, the advantageous section will continue for 1500 games, and the limit processing will be applied. Therefore, the initial game of "ART" given when the number of games is "500G" is the same as the number of remaining games until the limit processing regarding the advantageous section is performed.

According to such control, the duration of "ART" is determined according to the period from "normal advantage" to transition to "ART", and the longer the period, the longer the duration of "ART". .. As a result, even if the "normal advantage" continues for a long time, not only the medals are consumed, but also the expectation that the "ART" will continue for a long period of time can be expected. , It is possible to suppress the reduction of the motivation to play. On the other hand, also in this control, since the main control board 71 performs the limit processing of the advantageous section, the "ART" does not continue more than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily enhanced. ..

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, when the main control board 71 satisfies the transition condition (first start condition) in the normal section, the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the "normal advantage", and the transition condition (second start condition) in the "normal advantage". When the condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from "normal advantage" to "ART", and when the transition condition (end condition) is satisfied in "normal advantage", the game state is shifted from "normal advantage" to the normal section. The control board 71 functions as a first state control means, a second state control means, and a third state control means.

Further, the main control board 71 gives a larger number of games as the initial number of games of "ART" as the number of games that have passed while remaining "normally advantageous" without shifting to "ART" is increased. Functions as.

<Re-recognition of state reset>
Subsequently, the re-recognition of the state reset in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 159. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 initializes (reset) all the information about the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, what kind of advantageous section has passed in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section? There is a risk that the subsequent game will become monotonous because it is not possible to grasp. Therefore, in this control, the main control board 71 bypasses the initialization of the information by the reset through the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of the reset (the result), and re-recognizes the information after the reset.

FIG. 159 (A) is a diagram showing the concept of this control (reset re-recognition). In this control, the combination of symbols displayed when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped (rolls) is associated with a specific state in advance. Then, as shown in the figure, the main control board 71 reads out the associated specific state from the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped after returning from the initialization of the information by reset, and the specific state is read. Recognize that is after reset.

Subsequently, FIG. 159 (B) is a diagram showing the flow of this control (reset re-recognition). In the example shown in the figure, when the combination of predetermined symbols "replay downward to the right" is stopped and displayed, the main control board 71 ends the predetermined gaming state and shifts to another gaming state, and the predetermined gaming state is entered. At the end of the gaming state, all information related to the predetermined gaming state is initialized (reset). Then, the state of the end of the predetermined game state is associated with the "lower right of the replay" which is a combination of the predetermined symbols.

As shown in the figure, when the combination of symbols "replay downward to the right" is displayed, the main control board 71 ends a predetermined gaming state and resets various information. Here, until the next game is started, the combination of the symbols "replay downward to the right" remains displayed, and the reset control by the main control board 71 is performed in an extremely short time, so that the information is initialized by the reset. Even after returning from, the combination of the symbols "replay downwards to the right" remains displayed, and the main control board 71 can read the symbol combination "replay downwards to the right". Therefore, in this control, the main control board 71 is associated with the combination of the symbols in advance from the combination of the symbols “replay downward to the right” that is read after returning from the initialization of the information by the reset. The state "end of the predetermined gaming state" is read, and it is re-recognized that it is the end of the predetermined gaming state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 159 (C) and 159 (D), the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 using this control will be described. FIG. 159 (C) is an example of the transition flow of the gaming state when this control is preferably used. Since the details of each game state are as described above, they will be omitted. As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the “normal advantage” of the advantageous section, and (2) the gaming state from the “normal advantage” to the “ART”. Can be transferred, (3) the game state can be transferred from "ART" to the normal section, and (4) the game state can be transferred from "normal advantage" to the normal section. It should be noted that the respective transition conditions and transition probabilities will be omitted from the description except for those related to the playability using this control.

With reference to the figure, when the game state is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from "ART" to the normal section as shown in (3) and "" as shown in (4). There is a case of shifting from "normal advantage" to the normal section. When this control is used, a combination of specific symbols (end result) is displayed for either the transition condition from "ART" to the normal section or the transition condition from "normal advantage" to the normal section. The condition is set to that, and the combination of the specific symbols is associated with the end of the corresponding gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 159, the end condition of "ART" is used to display a specific combination of symbols, and for a specific combination of symbols, it is the end of "ART". Correspond.

By doing so, even if the information about the advantageous section is reset when the gaming state is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section, it is possible to grasp what kind of advantageous section the transition has been made to the normal section. Can be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), since the "normal advantage" ends regardless of the combination of symbols associated with the specific state, the "normal advantage" advantageous section is changed to the normal section. In the case of the transition, the main control board 71 does not re-recognize that it is in a specific state from the combination of the displayed symbols after returning from the reset. On the other hand, since "ART" ends when a combination of symbols associated with a specific state is displayed, the main control board 71 returns from the reset when shifting from the advantageous section of "ART" to the normal section. After that, it is possible to re-recognize that it is the end of "ART" from the combination of the displayed symbols.

That is, in order to initialize the information about the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section having a plurality of states of "normally advantageous" and "ART", what kind of advantageous section ("normally advantageous" or "normally advantageous" or It is not possible to know if "ART") has ended. On the other hand, according to this control, although the information about the advantageous section is initialized at the end of the advantageous section having a plurality of states of "normal advantage" and "ART", at the end of "ART", "at the end of ART". In order to re-recognize "being", it is possible to grasp what kind of advantageous section ("normal advantage" or "ART") has ended after the end of the advantageous section.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a stop control means.

Further, the main control board 71 terminates "ART" and performs reset control at the end of "ART" in response to the stop display of the combination of specific symbols. Then, after returning from the reset control, the main control board 71 re-recognizes "it is the end of ART" from the combination of the specific symbols displayed, so that the main control board 71 uses the state control means, It functions as a termination means and an initialization means.

<Arbitrary reset of advantageous section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 160, the arbitrary reset control of the advantageous section in the pachislot machine 1 will be described. In a pachislot machine that has a normal section and an advantageous section and has "ART" as an advantageous section and a state other than ART (for example, "normal advantage"), the advantageous section ends at the end of "ART" and shifts to the normal section. It is conceivable to do. However, during the normal section, it is difficult to change the transition probability to the advantageous section, so pullback cannot be expected after the end of "ART" (= after the end of the advantageous section), and the timing when "ART" ends. It becomes easy to stop the game, and there is a risk that the operation of the game machine will be reduced.

In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, after the end of "ART", it is possible to shift to "normal advantage" without ending the advantageous section (see FIG. 138), but there is a limit to the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, if "ART" ends immediately before the limit and then is maintained as an advantageous section, even if it is possible to return to "ART" immediately after the end of "ART", limit processing is performed. The "ART" pulled back by will end immediately.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, the player can arbitrarily reset the advantageous section. Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when the player performs a reset operation. The method in which the main control board 71 accepts the reset operation is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 can accept the reset operation by the player in association with the operation of an arbitrary operation unit or the like. Further, the timing at which the player can reset the advantageous section may be any timing during the advantageous section, but in the explanation shown below, the player performs the reset operation of the advantageous section at the end of "ART". It shall be possible.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 determines whether or not a reset operation has been accepted from the player at the end of "ART". When the reset operation is accepted, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from "ART" to the normal section. On the other hand, when the reset operation is not accepted, the main control board 71 continues the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from "ART" to "normal advantage" in the advantageous section.

Subsequently, FIG. 160 (B) is an example of a transition flow of the gaming state when this control is preferably used. Since the details of each game state are as described above, they will be omitted. Further, the respective transition conditions and transition probabilities will be omitted from the description except for those related to the playability using this control.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the advantageous section “ART”. In addition, since this control is characterized in that it is possible to shift to "normal advantage" without ending the advantageous section after the end of "ART", in the figure, the normal section is directly shifted to "ART". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition from the normal section to the “ART” via the “normal advantage” may be used.

Further, when "ART" is completed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from "ART" to the normal section when (2) the reset operation is received from the player, and (3) resets from the player. When the operation is not accepted, the gaming state is changed from "ART" to "normal advantage" in the advantageous section. The correspondence between the main control board 71 accepting the reset operation and the player performing the reset operation is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may accept the reset operation when the player intentionally performs the operation, and the main control board 71 accepts the reset operation when the player does not perform any operation. It may be that.

Further, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (4) "normal advantage" to "ART", and can shift the gaming state from (5) "normal advantage" to the normal section. .. As shown in the figure, the degree of expectation of transition to "ART" is higher in "normal advantage" than in the normal section. In other words, the probability of satisfying the transition condition to "ART" (start condition of "ART") in the normal section and the probability of satisfying the transition condition to "ART" (start condition of "ART") in "normal advantage". Then, the latter has a higher probability.

According to this control, the chance zone for pulling back the "ART" ("normal advantage") can be set after the end of the "ART", and the decrease in the operation after the end of the "ART" can be suppressed. .. Further, when the end of "ART" is close to the limit of the advantageous section, the player can clear the advantageous section by his / her own will and reset the period until the limit. As a result, for the player, it is possible to select whether or not to perform the reset operation after considering the merits and demerits, so that the selection after the "ART" is completed should be strategic. It is possible to expand the range of playability.

The "normal advantage" after the end of "ART" is to be continued for a maximum of 100 games, and if the transition to "ART" cannot be achieved within these 100 games, the main control board 71 is advantageous. The section may be ended and the game state may be shifted to the normal section.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

Since the main control board 71 can perform limit processing when the number of games digested during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold and can accept a reset operation from the player at the end of "ART", the main control board 71 can receive the reset operation. The 71 functions as an operation receiving means.

Further, when the transition condition to "ART" is satisfied, the main control board 71 shifts the game state to "ART", and when the reset operation is accepted, the game state is changed to the normal section after the end of "ART". If the reset operation is not accepted, the gaming state shifts to "normal advantage" after the end of "ART", so that the main control board 71 functions as a state control means.

<Number of games using advantageous sections Ceiling>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 161, the number of games ceiling using the advantageous section in the pachislot machine 1 will be described. FIG. 161 (A) is an example of the transition flow of the gaming state when this control is preferably used. In this control, the main control board 71 manages the RT state and the state related to notification. The RT state is a state in which the type of "replay" related to the operation of the replay and the probability that "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination are different. In the following explanation, "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination. It has a "low RT" with a low probability and a "high RT" with a high probability that "replay" is determined as an internal winning combination. Further, the state related to the notification is a state in which the probability of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation is different from the state related to the notification, and in the following description, the normal section and the advantageous section are provided. It should be noted that the normal section is basically a state in which the player is not notified of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation can be notified to the player, but as will be described later. The number of games The mode of the stop operation is not notified until the ceiling is reached.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 changes from "low RT" to "low RT" when the combination of symbols related to "7-aligned replay" described later in (1) "low RT" is displayed along the effective line. Shift the RT state to "high RT". Further, when the main control board 71 satisfies a predetermined condition (arbitrary first condition) in (2) "high RT", the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from "high RT" to "low RT". The predetermined conditions that trigger the transition from "high RT" to "low RT" are arbitrary. For example, the winning combination of the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus is activated. , The operation of the bonus is finished, and so on.

Further, when (3) a specific condition (arbitrary second condition) is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the state related to notification from the normal section to the advantageous section. Since the specific conditions that trigger the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section are not related to this control, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 shifts the state related to notification from the advantageous section to the normal section when the combination of the symbols related to "7-aligned replay" is displayed along the effective line in (4) the advantageous section. Further, the main control board 71 also performs limit processing when the number of times of digestion reaches 1500 times in the advantageous section, and shifts the state related to notification from the advantageous section to the normal section.

In this way, in this control, when the combination of symbols related to "7-aligned replay" is displayed along the effective line, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from "low RT" to "high RT" and at the same time. , The state related to notification is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. As will be described later, in this control, the RT state in the advantageous section is set to "low RT", and the RT state in the normal section is set to "high RT". Therefore, when the advantageous section (“low RT”) and the normal section (“high RT”) are compared, the normal section is in a more advantageous state.

Subsequently, FIG. 161 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the combination configuration used in this control and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination. In this control, there is a "choice number rip" ("F_choice number rip_01" to "F_choice number rip_ ??") as a combination to be notified in the advantageous section. In addition, "selection number rip" is a combination (replay) in which the combination of symbols displayed as stops differs depending on the mode of the stop operation, and when the stop operation is performed in a mode that gives the correct answer for each "selection number rip". The combination of symbols related to "7-matched replay" is displayed along the effective line, and if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the effective line. Is displayed.

During the advantageous section (“low RT”), the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) is determined to have the “selection number lip” as the internal winning combination because the notification is not performed until the number of games reaches the ceiling. However, while not notifying the mode of the stop operation, after reaching the game number ceiling, the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) sets the mode of the stop operation to be the correct answer for each "selection number lip". Notify. As a result, after reaching the number of games ceiling, the combination of symbols related to "7-match replay" is displayed along the effective line at the time of winning the "selection number rip", and the normal section ("high RT") is entered. It will be. Even if the notification is not performed, the player may accidentally perform the stop operation in a manner that gives the correct answer, and even in this case, the combination of symbols related to "7-match replay" is along the effective line. Is displayed, and the normal section (“high RT”) is entered. In order to avoid such a case, it is preferable to increase the number of choices of the "choice number lip" as much as possible. For example, when the number of choices is set only by the push order of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the maximum number of choices is 6, but by adding the push order and different symbols to be aimed at, the number of choices can be increased to 6 or more. Can be increased.

Subsequently, FIG. 161 (C) is a diagram showing an outline of the flow of the game in this control. As shown in the figure, in this control, the advantageous section is set to "low RT", and the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) in this advantageous section ("low RT") reaches the ceiling of the number of games. No notification is given until. After that, when the number of games reaches the ceiling during the advantageous section (“low RT”), the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) lifts the ban on notification, and then the “selection number lip” is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the mode of the stop operation that is the correct answer is notified for each "selection number lip". As a result, the combination of symbols related to "7-matched replay" is displayed along the effective line, and as a result, the main control board 71 (and the sub-control board 72) shifts the game state to the normal section ("high RT"). To do. After that, for example, the game will be played with "high RT" until the bonus is won. That is, according to this control, when the predetermined number of games elapses without winning the bonus in the "low RT" (advantageous section) state, the game becomes the ceiling state, and then the game until the bonus is won is "high RT". It can be done in the state of (normal section).

The number of games on the ceiling can be appropriately set according to the period (number of games) in which notification is not performed during the advantageous section. Therefore, the main control board 71 may determine and set a period during which the notification is not performed at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section by lottery. As a result, the period during which the notification is not performed during the advantageous section changes each time, and as a result, the number of games until reaching the ceiling also changes. Further, in the explanation shown in FIG. 161, the number of games ceiling is taken as an example as the ceiling, but the method of realizing the ceiling is arbitrary. For example, the ceiling is realized according to the number of times that the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It may be that. Specifically, the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) does not notify until the number of times the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section reaches the predetermined number of times, and reaches the predetermined number of times. It may be notified later.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, when the combination of symbols related to "7-aligned replay" is displayed along the effective line, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from "low RT" to "high RT" and is usually from the advantageous section. The state related to notification is transferred to the section. Further, since the main control board 71 shifts the state related to notification from the normal section to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 has RT state control means, state end means, and Functions as a state start means.

In addition, the main control board 71 counts the number of games that have passed during the advantageous section, and when the number of games that have passed reaches the number of times corresponding to the number of games ceiling, "7 sets are aligned" at the time of winning the "selection number lip". The main control board 71 functions as a counting means and a notifying means in order to notify the mode of the stop operation necessary for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to the "replay". Further, since the main control board 71 can determine the number of times according to the number of games ceiling at the start of the advantageous section (that is, the period during which the notification is not performed during the advantageous section), the main control board 71 is a predetermined value setting means. Functions as.

<Playability using advantageous sections>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 162, a method of realizing a new game property using the advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. In a pachislot machine having a normal section and an advantageous section, it is difficult to change the transition probability to the advantageous section during the normal section, while lottery can be performed with various probabilities during the advantageous section. Therefore, "normal advantage" and "ART" are provided as advantageous sections to enable the transition from "normal advantage" to "ART", and the probability of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section "ART" and the "normal advantage". By making the probability of transition from "ART" to "ART" different, a plurality of states having different transition probabilities to "ART" are realized (for example, "normal" of the third embodiment and "normal" in the third embodiment are usually advantageous. Normal mode "low probability""heaven" etc.).

By the way, since an upper limit is set in the advantageous section, if the transition from "normal advantage" is the main transition route as the transition route to "ART", the limit processing may be performed. The period of "ART" in which only the amount of games in the "normal advantage" (advantageous section) can be played is impaired. Therefore, in this control, the transition from the normal section to "ART" is set as the main transition route to "ART", and even when the limit processing is performed, the period of "ART" that can be played is set. Prevent it from being wasted.

FIG. 162 (A) is an example of the transition flow of the gaming state when this control is preferably used. Since the details of each game state are as described above, they will be omitted. Further, the respective transition conditions and transition probabilities will be omitted from the description except for those related to the playability using this control.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the “normal advantage” of the advantageous section, and (2) “ART” from the normal section to the advantageous section. The game state can be transferred to. Further, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (3) "normal advantage" of the advantageous section to the normal section, and (4) "ART" of the advantageous section from "normal advantage" of the advantageous section. The game state can be transferred to. Here, as shown in the figure, the degree of expectation of transition to "ART" is higher in the normal section than in the "normal advantage". In other words, the probability of satisfying the transition condition to "ART" (start condition of "ART") in the normal section and the probability of satisfying the transition condition to "ART" (start condition of "ART") in "normal advantage". Then, the former has a higher probability.

By controlling the gaming state in this way, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), during non-ART, the expectation of transition from "normal advantage" to "ART" is low, and the expectation of transition to "ART" is low. The game will be played aiming at the normal section where the value is high. In other words, during non-ART, it has a playability of how to exit the advantageous section (“normal advantage”) and shift to the normal section. Then, since the transition to the "ART" is performed directly from the normal section, according to this control, the period of the playable "ART" is not wasted even when the limit processing is performed. ..

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachislot machine 1 performs limit processing when the number of games digested during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold value, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and the game shown in FIG. 1 In order to control the progress, the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to "normal advantage", and when the second condition is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to "ART". When the third condition is satisfied in "normal advantage", the gaming state is shifted to the normal section, and when the fourth condition is satisfied in "normal advantage", the gaming state is shifted to "ART". Since the main control board 71 is more likely to shift to the "ART" from the normal section than from the "normal advantage", the main control board 71 functions as a state control means.

<Playability using bonus roles with no setting difference during the normal section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 163, the control using the bonus combination with no setting difference in the normal section of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. In a pachislot machine having an advantageous section, various benefits can be given with the bonus combination as an opportunity. For example, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section and then the bonus is activated, the main control is performed. The board 71 can be given a privilege when the bonus is activated (common processing). Bonuses associated with bonus operation during this advantageous section can be given to multiple bonus combinations in common, and even if the bonus combination has a different probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus Benefits can be granted when the is activated. The common process is performed when the bonus is activated during the advantageous section, but the bonus is not activated unless the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, the common processing is "the bonus combination is the internal winning combination." It can be said that it is a process that is performed "when it is determined as."

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal section, the main control board 71 can give the privilege (normal processing). Bonuses associated with the bonus winnings during this normal section can be given individually for each of the multiple bonus winning combinations, but can be given for bonus winning combinations with different probabilities of being determined as internal winning combinations. However, it can be performed only when the bonus role with no setting difference is won.

In this control, the playability as shown below is realized by using the difference between the normal process and the common process. First, the configuration of the bonus combination that can be suitably used in this control will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (A). In this control as shown in the figure, BB1 and BB2 are provided as bonuses, and these bonuses can be overlapped with other combinations and determined as internal winning combinations. Specifically, in this control, the role of "F_BB1" in which BB1 wins alone, the role of "F_BB2" in which BB2 wins alone, and the role of "F_BB2 + special role" in which BB2 wins together with the special role. It has the role of. Then, for "F_BB1", the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is set so that there is no setting difference, and for "F_BB1", the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is set so as to have a setting difference, and "F_BB2 +" is set. For "special role", set so that there is no difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination.

In such a bonus combination configuration, even if any of "F_BB1", "F_BB2", and "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section (when the bonus is activated thereafter). , The main control board 71 performs common processing. As a result, during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 grants a common privilege regardless of the type of bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB2 + special combination”).

On the other hand, during the normal section, the main control board 71 can perform a unique process (normal process) according to the type of the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination, and the main control board 71 can perform, for example, , When "F_BB1" is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section, processing specific to "F_BB1" (normal processing) is performed, and "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section. Then, the processing (normal processing) peculiar to "F_BB2 + special role" is performed. On the other hand, even if "F_BB2" is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section, no processing is performed because "F_BB2" is a bonus combination with a setting difference. As a result, during the normal section, the main control board 71 grants a unique privilege according to the type of bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB2 + special combination”).

In this control, the game playability peculiar to this control is realized by providing a difference between the common privilege by the common processing in such an advantageous section and the unique privilege by the normal processing (unique processing) in the normal section. To do. As an example, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), the probability that "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination is set to be lower than that of other bonus combinations, while "F_BB2 + special combination" in the normal section. Make the unique benefits based on "role" larger than the common benefits based on common processing during the advantageous section. More specifically, "F_BB2 + special role" is a so-called premium bonus combination (for example, winning at about 1/164384 common to settings 1 to 6), and when it is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section, , Gives a very big privilege according to the premier role. On the other hand, if it is decided as an internal winning combination during the advantageous section, a privilege common to other bonus combinations will be given.

By doing so, according to this control, the period during which the premium benefit can be received can be set during the normal section, and conversely, the period during which the premium benefit cannot be received during the advantageous section. can do. In a pachislot machine having a normal section and an advantageous section, the status indicator 147b lights up during the advantageous section to notify that the player is staying in the advantageous section. For the player, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the player is in the advantageous section from the lighting state of the status indicator 147b, so that the operation of the game is reduced when the player is not in the advantageous section (during the normal section). There is a possibility that it will end up. In this regard, according to this control, a premium privilege can be received when the player is not in the advantageous section, so even if it is found that the state indicator 147b is in the normal section from the lighting state, the game can be operated. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In this control, if "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section, only a small privilege based on the common processing is given, so that the player may feel a loss. Therefore, in the main control board 71, basically a common combination of symbols is an effective line when "F_BB2" is determined as the internal winning combination and when "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination. Stop control is performed so that it is displayed along with. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), when the stop operation is performed in the "first operation mode", the main control board 71 is in the case where "F_BB2" is determined as the internal winning combination. Even if there is, even if "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control is performed so that the combination of common symbols is displayed along the effective line. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the "second operation mode", the main control board 71 has "F_BB2 + special combination" even when "F_BB2" is determined as the internal winning combination. A combination of symbols different from the case determined as the internal winning combination (for example, a combination of lost symbols when winning "F_BB2", a combination of symbols according to "special combination" when winning "F_BB2 + special combination") is effective. Stop control is performed so that it is displayed along the line.

At this time, in the "first operation mode" in which the combination of common symbols is displayed, the timing of the stop operation is such that a small combination other than the "special combination" is missed (not the pull-in 1). It is preferable that there is no timing (so-called "small winning combination recovery method"). More preferably, in the "second operation mode" in which the combination of individual symbols is displayed, the timing of the stop operation is the timing of missing a small combination other than the "special combination". Further, more preferably, the number of medals to be paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the "special combination" is displayed along the effective line is the number of medals corresponding to the small combination other than the "special combination". Less than the number of medals paid out when the combination of is displayed along the valid line.

By doing so, as long as the game is performed in the "first operation mode (small winning combination recovery method)", is "F_BB2" determined as the internal winning combination from the combination of the displayed symbols? Since it is not possible to determine whether "F_BB2 + special combination" has been determined as the internal winning combination, no loss is felt. The example shown in FIG. 163 has a combination of “F_BB2” and “F_BB2 + special combination”, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in this control, it is sufficient that the bonus combination (BB2) is common, but the type of combination that is duplicated with the bonus combination is different.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. The main control board 71 has 7Rs, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. It functions as a stop control means.

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous section, the main control board 71 executes a common process of granting a common privilege regardless of the type of the determined bonus combination, and in the normal section, " When "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, it functions as a common processing means and an individual processing means in order to give a premium privilege.

[Modification example]
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 173.

<Separate control regarding transition lottery of advantageous section>
First, a modified example of the transition lottery of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167. FIG. 164 (A) shows the probability of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section (probability of transition to the advantageous section (= P (X))) for each gaming state in the normal section. The reference item "when the accessory is not operating" in FIG. 164 is a state in which the accessory (first-class special accessory, etc.) is not operating. In addition, "general middle when the accessory is not activated (hereinafter," general middle ")" is a state in which the accessory is not operating and the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, "inside when the accessory is not activated (hereinafter," inside ")" means that the accessory is not operating and the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination (between the flags). Is. Further, "in general BB when the accessory is not operating (hereinafter," general in BB ")" is a state in which the accessory is not operating although it is in the bonus state. Further, the reference item "when the accessory is operating" is a state in which the accessory is operating. Further, "in operation of RB when the accessory is in operation (hereinafter," RB is in operation ")" is a state in which the first-class special accessory (RB) among the accessories is in operation. Further, "the CB is operating when the accessory is operating (hereinafter," CB is operating ")" is a state in which the second type special accessory (CB) is operating among the accessories.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 can perform a lottery for transition to an advantageous section, but it is necessary to ensure that the probability of transition to an advantageous section is uniform. Therefore, this transition lottery cannot be performed except for "general middle" when the lottery value used for the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination (excluding replay) fluctuates depending on the game state. The principle pattern in FIG. 164 (A) shows a pattern in which the advantageous section transition probability fluctuates depending on the gaming state. In such a principle pattern, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 can perform the transition lottery to the advantageous section only in "general middle", and cannot perform it in other cases. ..

Here, since it is sufficient to guarantee that the probability of transition to the advantageous section is uniform, if the lottery value used for the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination is the same as that of "general middle", the uniform guarantee is provided. Therefore, the main control board 71 can exceptionally perform a transition lottery to an advantageous section.

As an example, the exception pattern 1 in the figure is a lottery value used for an internal lottery related to a small winning combination (a winning combination with a payout) and a replay in which the winning probability does not change even if the RT state changes (hereinafter, “advantageous section lottery target combination”). However, the case where "general middle", "internal middle", and "BB general middle" are common (in other words, the winning probability of the winning combination for the advantageous section lottery is common) is shown. In the case of this exception pattern 1, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 may perform a transition lottery to an advantageous section in the same manner as in "internal middle" and "BB general middle" as in "general middle". it can.

Further, the exception pattern 2 in the figure shows a case where the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is the same as that of "RB in operation", "general medium", "internal medium", and "BB general medium". In the case of this exception pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 shifts to an advantageous section in the same manner as in "internal medium", "BB general medium", and "RB operating" as in "general medium". It can be performed.

Further, the exception pattern 3 in the figure shows a case where the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is common to "CB in operation", "general in", "internal in", "BB in general", and "RB in operation". In the case of this exception pattern 3, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 has the same advantages as "internal", "BB in general", "RB in operation", and "CB in operation" as in "general". A lottery for transition to a section can be performed.

It should be noted that "internal", "RB in operation", "BB in general", and "CB in operation" are provided according to the specifications of the pachislot machine, and may not be partially provided depending on the specifications of the pachislot machine. As an example, BB (continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory) and RB (first-class special accessory) are not installed, and CB (second-class special accessory) is installed (MB (second-class special accessory). A pachislot machine (which may include a continuous differential device related to the accessory), or a pachislot machine equipped with a BB or RB, but "in general BB" or "during RB operation", draw a lottery to shift to an advantageous section. Instead, in the pachislot machine, the main control board 71 is referred to as "general medium" and "internal medium" as shown in exception pattern 4 of FIG. 164 (B). It is possible to perform a lottery to shift to an advantageous section when "CB is operating".

In addition, the main control board 71 draws a lottery to shift to an advantageous section based on not only a combination with no setting difference (setting difference combination) but also a combination with a setting difference (setting difference combination) in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination. You may do it. Further, the main control board 71 may perform the transition lottery to the advantageous section with the same probability regardless of the set value, or may perform the lottery with different probabilities depending on the set value.

Here, in FIG. 165, the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed based on both the set unquestioned combination and the set difference combination, and the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value. This is an example of a lottery table for transition to an advantageous section, which is preferably used in some cases.

As a general rule, the main control board 71 performs a lottery for transition to an advantageous section only during "general middle" of "when the accessory is not operating". As an exception, even in a state other than "general medium", it can be guaranteed that the result of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is uniform only when the same configuration as "general medium" is used, and the advantageous section is entered. Transition lottery can be done. For example, in the example of the figure, the internal winning probabilities of "Replay 1", "Cherry", "Watermelon 1", "Watermelon 2", "Pushing order bell 1" to "Pushing order bell 6" are "BB general" and "RB is operating". If it is the same as "general middle", the transition lottery to the advantageous section may be performed as in "general middle". In addition, if the specifications are such that the re-game does not win during the bonus state such as "BB general" and "RB is operating", the transition lottery to the advantageous section at the time of the re-game win of "general" is not performed (lottery processing). Uniformity can be ensured if the lottery value is set to "0" even if it is excluded from the target of itself or the lottery process is performed.

In the figure, "Replay 1" is a replaying combination in which the winning probability does not change even if the RT state fluctuates, and "Replay 2" is a replaying combination in which the winning probability changes when the RT state fluctuates. As shown in (Note 1), if the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed based on "Replay 2", the advantageous section transition probability differs depending on the RT state, and uniformness cannot be ensured. Therefore, the main control board 71 does not perform the transition lottery to the advantageous section even when the "replay 2" is won. On the other hand, since the "replay 1" can be guaranteed to be uniform, the main control board 71 can perform a lottery to shift to an advantageous section when the "replay 1" is won. Even if the replays have different winning probabilities in the RT state or the like, the main control board 71 may perform a lottery to shift to the advantageous section only during the replay probability non-variable state (RT0) in which the RT state is inactive. Good.

Further, in the figure, "cherry" may be determined alone as an internal winning combination, "cherry (No. 3)", and may even be determined as an internal winning combination together with BB1 "BB1 + cherry (No. 11)". ) ". In this case, since both of the reference lottery are "cherries", as shown in (Note 2), the main control board 71 uses the lottery value of the transition lottery linked to the "cherries" to enter the advantageous section. Perform a transition lottery.

On the other hand, regarding watermelon, the reference lottery differs between "watermelon 1" and "watermelon 2" between "watermelon 1 (No. 4)" and "BB2 + watermelon 2 (No. 12)". Therefore, as shown in (Note 3), the main control board 71 can perform the transition lottery to the advantageous section by using different lottery values.

In addition, the bonus combination, such as "RB (No. 13)", which is determined independently as the internal winning combination, is the internal winning combination in "internal medium", "BB general medium", "RB operating", and "CB operating". The probability of being determined as is fluctuating from "general medium". Therefore, as shown in (Note 4), the main control board 71 does not perform the transition lottery to the advantageous section even when the "RB" determined as the internal winning combination is won independently.

Subsequently, FIG. 166 is preferably used when the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed based on both the setting unquestioned combination and the setting difference combination, and the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed with different probabilities depending on the set value. This is an example of a lottery table for transition to an advantageous section.

As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 may perform the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section with different probabilities depending on the set value. It should be noted that the method of providing a setting difference in the transition lottery to the advantageous section is arbitrary, and for example, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section may be different for all the set values as in "Replay 1". Further, some set values may be common, such as "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6". Further, even for a combination having a different probability of being determined as an internal winning combination such as "cherry", the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section may be performed with a different probability depending on the set value. Further, as in "Watermelon 2", the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section may be common in all the set values. Further, in "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6", the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section in "push order bell 1" to the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section in "push order bell 6". Is common, but the winning probability may be different depending on the type of "push order bell".

Subsequently, FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a method of calculating the accessory ratio in this modified example. FIG. 167 (A) is a method of calculating the accessory ratio in a model that does not have an instruction function (AT) for notifying (instructing) a player of an advantageous stop operation mode. In the case of such a model, the main control board 71 is paid out while any of the accessories is operating (during the bonus operation) with respect to the total number of medals (= X + Y) paid out in all the gaming states. The ratio occupied by the total number of medals (= X) is calculated as the accessory ratio.

Further, FIG. 167 (B) is a first calculation method of the accessory ratio in the model having the instruction function, and FIG. 167 (C) is a second calculation method of the accessory ratio in the model having the instruction function. is there. If the player has an instruction function, the medals to be paid out to the player are (X) medals to be paid out during the bonus operation, (Y) medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the bonus operation, and (Z) bonus. It can be divided into medals that are paid out when the instruction function does not work.

As shown in FIG. 167 (B), in the first calculation method, the main control board 71 was paid out during the bonus operation with respect to the total number of medals (= X + Y + Z) paid out in all the gaming states. The ratio occupied by the total number of medals (= X) is calculated as the accessory ratio. Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), in the second calculation method, the main control board 71 pays out the total number of medals (= X + Y + Z) paid out in all the gaming states during the bonus operation. The ratio of the sum (= X + Y) of the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the bonus operation is calculated as the accessory ratio.

In the model having the instruction function, the accessory ratio may be calculated by using the first calculation method, or the accessory ratio may be calculated by using the second calculation method. By using the second calculation method, it is possible to improve security by making it easier to detect not only the goto that illegally activates the bonus but also the goto that illegally activates the instruction function. it can. The first calculation method and the second calculation method may be automatically switched and confirmed manually or with the passage of time.

Further, the method of calculating the accessory ratio may be different depending on the method of the transition lottery to the advantageous section. For example, when the main control board 71 has the same probability of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section regardless of the set value as shown in FIG. 165, the main control board 71 calculates the accessory ratio by the first calculation method. , May be displayed on the ratio display 422. Further, for example, when the main control board 71 performs the transition lottery to the advantageous section with different probabilities according to the set value as shown in FIG. 166, the accessory ratio is used in the first calculation method and the second calculation method. May be calculated and both may be displayed on the ratio display 422.

If there are too many items to be displayed on the ratio display 422, the calculation load on the main (main control board 71) side will increase. Therefore, when displaying the accessory ratio calculated by the second calculation method, The specific section ratio (advantageous section ratio (= value indicating the ratio of the number of games staying in the advantageous section among the total number of games)) may not be displayed.

Further, the method of calculating (Y) medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the operation of the bonus is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 may add the number of medals actually paid out to the payout number counter for calculation so as not to deviate from the actual number of medals to be paid out. In this case, if the batting order combination (pushing order combination) is missed as a result of a stop operation different from the instruction (navigation), the value of the counter for the number of payouts is maintained or +0 is processed and the value changes. do not do. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may calculate the medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function, assuming that the medals corresponding to the batting order are paid out when the instruction (navigation) is given. Good. In this case, when the batting order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 may update the value of the payout number counter by the number of medals corresponding to the batting order combination. As a result, it is possible to grasp the behavior of the game machine that is not affected by the accidental operation error of the player.

Further, the medal for calculating the number of payouts in (Y) may be a medal paid out while the instruction function is operating, or a medal paid out in response to the activation of the instruction function. You may. Here, in pachislot, during ART (during the operation of the instruction function), a winning combination (for example, a push order bell (batting order bell)) in which the result of the game (for example, the number of medals to be paid out) differs depending on the mode of the stop operation is internally won. When determined as a combination, the player is notified of an advantageous stop operation mode, while a combination (for example, a so-called rare role such as a watermelon or a cherry) having a different game result regardless of the stop operation mode is inside. Since there is no need to notify when the winning combination is determined, the player is not notified of the mode of the stop operation.

When the number of medals to be paid out in (Y) is calculated from the former (medals paid out while the instruction function is operating), the main control board 71 is paid out during ART (during the operation of the instruction function) regardless of the presence or absence of notification. The number of medals (Y) to be paid out is calculated using all the medals (for example, medals paid out for the rare role). On the other hand, when the number of (Y) payouts is calculated from the latter (medals paid out in response to the activation of the instruction function), the main control board 71 is during ART (operation of the instruction function) as a result of the notification. Only the medals paid out in (middle) are used to calculate the number of medals paid out in (Y), and the medals paid out without notification are used in the calculation of the number of medals paid out in (Z).
Further, in the latter case, the main control board 71 may perform the following control.

As described above, during the operation of the instruction function, when a combination in which a combination of different symbols is displayed depending on the mode of the stop operation is determined as the internal winning combination, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. To do. As a role to be notified by such an instruction function, for example, a predetermined symbol combination (bell-bell-bell) is displayed when the batting order is correct, and a specific symbol combination (bell spilled eye) is displayed when the batting order is incorrect. Is displayed (pushing order bell (batting order bell)), but depending on the pachislot, a predetermined symbol combination (bell-bell-bell) is displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation (pull-in 1). (Common bell) may be provided. Such a "common bell" does not need to notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, but is the winning combination when the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed is the "push order bell"? Since it is possible to know whether or not it is a "common bell" from the presence or absence of notification, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 can be used even when the "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination. It is also possible to notify the push order in a dramatic manner.

Here, the notification of the push order at the time of winning the "common bell" is a directing one and does not affect the result of the game (the number of medals to be paid out). Therefore, when calculating the number of medals paid out in (Y) from the latter, it is not necessary to include the number of medals paid out by the "common bell" in the number of medals paid out in (Y), but the main control board 71 uses the "common bell". The number of medals paid out in (Y) may or may not be included in the number of medals paid out.

When the number of medals paid out by the "common bell" is included in the number of medals paid out in (Y), a counter that counts the number of medals paid out when the instruction function is activated (the notification lamp 147a is lit) is uniformly added. Since the processing can be performed uniformly, the program capacity on the main (main control board 71) side can be reduced.

It should be noted that the notification of the pressing order at the time of winning the "common bell" can be performed by the main control board 71 using the notification lamp 147a, but can also be performed by the sub control board 72 using the display unit 100. It can also be performed on both the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Here, if only the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order at the time of winning the "common bell" and the main control board 71 does not, it is assumed that the instruction function is not activated and the "common bell" is used to pay out. The number of medals awarded may not be included in the number of medals paid out in (Y).

Further, when the accessory ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 60%) close to a predetermined value (70%), the main control board 71 is instructed at the time of winning the role of the lead-in 1 such as "common bell". If the activation of the function (lighting of the notification lamp 147a) is reduced or the activation is not activated, and the accessory ratio is less than a predetermined threshold value (for example, less than 60%), the attraction 1 is performed. The frequency of activation of the instruction function may be changed according to the ratio of the accessory, such that the activation of the instruction function is allowed when the role of the pull-in 1 is won.

<Another configuration example of advantageous section>
In the examples and specification examples so far, the concept that the advantageous section is only one advantageous section is premised, and by devising a state in which the batting order combination instruction (navigation) is likely to occur and a state in which it is difficult to occur. I have explained the invention that enhances the fun of the game while increasing the degree of whiteness of the batting design. From here, by further subdividing the concept of advantageous sections, we will organize the game characteristics and
It is also possible to improve the efficiency of development. Hereinafter, as an example, as shown in FIG. 168, a proposal will be described in which, among the advantageous sections, the section in which the number of balls is difficult to increase is defined as the “directing section”, and the section in which the number of balls is likely to increase is defined as the “increase section”. ..

First, as a premise, each section is defined as follows.
Normal section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (instruction is optional), and the transition rate to the production section or increase section is set at a rate of 1.
Production section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (instruction is optional), and the transition rate to other production sections or increase sections is the same as in the normal section, but the transition destination (processing related to the instruction function) Sections with different contents). Included in the advantageous section. It should be noted that the "normal advantage" in the above description may be defined as the effect section as in the present proposal.
Increased section: This is the section where the number of game medals increases (the ball output rate does not always exceed 1), and unlike the normal section and the production section, instructions are given for each state of the increased section predetermined in the increased section. A section in which processing related to functions can be performed freely. Included in the advantageous section.
On the premise of this definition, it is preferable that the advantageous section lamp is turned on when the production section or the increasing section is won and the ball output rate exceeds 1, and is turned off when the ball is initialized. .. By doing so, the situation in which the number of medals does not increase even though the advantageous section lamp is lit does not occur. Therefore, at least the number of medals increases, so that the gaming machine has specifications that are easy for the player to understand.
Further, when the increasing section is terminated, the fairness among the players can be ensured by initializing the parameters related to the performance related to the instruction function and shifting to the normal section. Then, as in the case of winning in the advantageous section continuous lottery at the end of the above-mentioned "ART", in the game state where the player shifts to the production section after the increase section and expects the "ART" consecutive villa, the number of balls is reduced. Even so, the specifications may be made in consideration of keeping the advantageous section lamp lit and preventing the player from stopping the game in a state where "hits" may be continuous.

The fact that the transition ratio (winning probability) to another production section or increase section is the same and the transition destination (contents of processing related to the instruction function) is different refers to the following game specifications as an example.
1: Advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section Winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100
Transition destination distribution production section (CZ) 75% increase section (ART) 25%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (CZ) approx. 1/133 Increase section (ART) approx. 1/400
1: Advantageous section transition lottery in the production section (CZ) Winning probability of advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100 This winning probability 1/100 is common and the transition ratio is the same.
Transition destination distribution Production section (upper CZ) 10% Increase section (ART) 90%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (upper CZ) Approx. 1/1000 Increase section (ART) Approx. 1/111
In this way, by changing the distribution of the transition destination, the winning coefficient of the advantageous section lottery refers to the same value, and the advantageous section is shifted to the increasing section where medals increase, such as "ART". Like "normal advantage" and "SCZ", although the increase in medals cannot be expected so much, it is possible to have a wide range of distribution as to whether or not to make the ART winning chance state, and the overall processing flow is simplified. At the same time, it is possible to create various transition variations of the gaming state.
If the production section is too long, the player will be forced to play the game excessively without expecting an increase in medals, which may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, for example, the number of games should be 16 or less, or 32. A certain number of games may be set as an upper limit, such as a game. In addition, the number of games that function as an index that does not excessively restrain the player, such as when the number of medals consumed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) or when the number of times the batting order bell is established reaches a predetermined number (for example, 8 times). It may be set as the end condition of the effect section by referring to the parameters other than.

In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination with no setting difference, but in this modified example, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the determination of the internal winning combination with the setting difference. Is supposed to be done. Even in this case, there is no setting difference in the lottery table related to the advantageous section. By referring to the lottery table common to all settings, the difference in the payout rate and the ART occurrence rate are based on the difference in the winning probability of the internal winning combination. To make a difference. As a result, it is possible to create a difference in the ball output rate and an ART occurrence rate without increasing the capacity of the lottery table itself related to the advantageous section.

If the "directing section" is won during the bonus operation, it is desirable to turn on the advantageous section lamp because the advantageous section, the directing section, and the bonus operation can be expected to increase the number of game medals. You can enjoy the game while paying attention to the advantageous section ramp without digesting work while the bonus is operating. In this case, if the player temporarily shifts to the production section (CZ, etc.) after the bonus, the advantageous section lamp is turned off when the bonus ends. When shifting to an increasing section (ART, etc.) after the bonus, it is advisable to keep the advantageous section lamp lit as it is.
While preparing for so-called ART to shift RT to high RT, it is definitely confirmed that the right to shift to ART, which is very advantageous for the player, has already been granted, although the ball output rate does not necessarily exceed 1. By notifying, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is inadvertently stopped while leaving the ART right.

In addition to the internal winning combination, lottery and determination related to the advantageous section may be performed based on the display appearance (also referred to as symbol combination, winning result, result display) on the effective line of the main reel. For example, there is an internal winning combination A that can win either a 3-card combination or a 1-card combination depending on the timing of pressing. In this case, if the 3-card combination wins, the advantageous section-related lottery will not be performed, or if the 1-card combination wins, the lottery will be performed under more disadvantageous conditions than if the 1-card combination wins. By recommending a batting method that intentionally pushes the player to avoid winning the 3-card role, as a condition that is more favorable than when the 3-card role wins, the base at normal times is For the player who chooses a low batting method, the specification can be such that ART is easy to win.
With such specifications, you can enjoy a long game with a game that is hard to win ART instead of pushing the role of 3 cards in normal times and not reducing the number of medals so much, or push the role of 1 card in normal times. Then, instead of the speed at which medals are reduced is fast, it is easy for the player to win the ART, which means that the game can be enjoyed for a short period of time, or the player can arbitrarily select, and the range of the game can be expanded.
It should be noted that the above is just an example, and it is not limited to the one that requires a small number of payouts such as a single role, but the RT transition roll (small role spilled eye or fall replay) that shifts to an RT with a low degree of advantage by pushing. ) May be displayed, or the lottery related to the advantageous section may be performed under better conditions than when the advantageous display result is derived.
To summarize this idea, when a predetermined internal winning combination with different display results is determined depending on the stop operation mode, it is most advantageous in terms of the benefit of winning judgment for granting game value (medal), transition of RT, operation of bonus, etc. It is more advantageous than when a predetermined advantageous section-related lottery is performed based on the derivation of the display result that is not, or the lottery content of the advantageous section-related lottery is derived with the most advantageous display result regarding the benefit of the payment judgment. When it comes to being done in, it can be expressed.

By overlapping and determining the internal winning combination so that the number of medals is substantially reduced during some bonus operations, the number of increased cards per game during ART is increased to about 3 by the amount of the reduced bonus. There is no method, and during the bonus operation, only the non-net increase is established and the net increase is 0, so the bonus is used in the game machine type test to offset the speed of increase during ART and adapt it. Specifications are also conceivable. In addition, as a lottery related to the advantageous section inside the bonus, the normal section, the production section, and the advantageous section also stay at the RT inside the bonus, and by increasing the small winning probability, the bonus that the bonus is extremely difficult to win can be contained. Various specifications may be adopted according to the modified example to provide a game machine having an appropriate ball ejection speed, which is highly desired by players and playgrounds.
In addition, since some players feel that gambling is high when the ball ejection speed is high, it is necessary to shorten the number of limiter games from 1500 games to 1200 games to appropriately suppress gambling and prevent so-called immersiveness. Consideration may be given from the viewpoint.
Further, regarding the number of games that is a condition for activating the limiter, the count may be started from the start of the advantageous section including the effect section, or may be started from the start of the increase section. In addition, in the game of the day, the difference other than the advantageous section is activated, such as activating the limiter when 3000 medals increase from the starting point of the difference number at the time when the most negative point is seen from the customer side. With reference to the situation such as the number of medals, the gambling may be suppressed by a limiter according to factors other than the number of games.

Further, as an example in which the transition ratio (winning probability) to another production section or increase section is the same and the transition destination (content of the process related to the instruction function) is different, the game specification shown in FIG. 169 may be used.

Specifically, FIG. 169 (A) shows an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery to the advantageous section. As shown in the figure, in the transition lottery table, information on the lottery value for the lottery result is defined for each reference item (internal winning combination). Here, as a result of the lottery, the processing to be performed at the time of winning (winning processing) is specified. As shown in FIG. 169 (B), this winning treatment differs depending on the state of stay when the winning treatment is determined. For example, even when "winning treatment 1" is determined, the winning treatment is determined. When the staying state is the "normal section", the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the effect section A, and when the staying state is the "effect section A", the main control board 71 is mainly used. The control board 71 shifts from the effect section A to the effect section B. By doing so, it is possible to realize control in which the transition ratio (winning probability) is the same and the migration destination (content of the processing related to the instruction function) is different, and as a result, the uniformity of the advantageous section transition probability is guaranteed. It is possible to realize fair playability and reduce the data capacity.

The main control board 71 may be freely added and drawn by referring to a table or the like predetermined in the “increase section”. For example, it is possible to provide a plurality of states (additional low accuracy, high accuracy, ultra-high accuracy, specialized zone) in the "increasing section" and perform an additional lottery according to the current state.

<Another example of lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 170, the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) in the pachi-slot machine 1 having the “directing section” and the “increasing section” as the advantageous section, particularly the “increasing section” is shifted. The relationship between the notification effect for notifying that the decision to be made has been made and the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 having the "effect section" and the "increasing section", the main control board 71 can turn on the advantageous section lamp at the timing of shifting to the "increasing section" instead of the timing of shifting to the advantageous section. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the sub-control board 72 can execute an effect (precursor effect) relating to whether or not it is possible to shift to the “increase section” during the “effect section”. As shown below, in this control, when it is determined to shift to the "increase section", the sub-control board 72 performs a precursor effect during the "effect section" and, as a result of the precursor effect, "increase section". The main control board 71 turns on the advantageous section lamp when the notification effect for notifying that the decision to shift to the "effect section" has been made is performed and then the shift from the "effect section" to the "increase section" is performed. In other words, in this control, the main control board 71 turns on the advantageous section lamp after the sub-control board 72 notifies the result of the precursor.

First, FIG. 170A is a first pattern showing the relationship between the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of notifying the result of the precursor (timing of the notification effect). In the figure, it is determined that the main control board 71 shifts to the “increasing section” after shifting to the “directing section” in the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section. By this decision, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the "directing section" of the advantageous section from the timing of the transition to the "increasing section", but the advantageous section lamp is not yet lit. In order to use the inside of the "effect section" as a precursor to the "increase section", the sub-control board 72 performs a precursor effect to fuel the transition to the "increase section" during the "effect section" via the display unit 100. After that, when the precursor is about to end, the sub-control board 72 executes a notification effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the "increasing section" via the display unit 100. In the case of the example shown in the figure, since it is determined to shift to the "increasing section" in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the sub-control board 72 shifts to the "increasing section" in the notification effect. Notify that a decision has been made to make the transition. After that, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the "effect section" to the "increasing section", but at the timing of shifting to the "increasing section", the advantageous section lamp is turned on.

Subsequently, FIG. 170 (B) is a second pattern showing the relationship between the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of the notification effect. In the figure, in the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, it is determined that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section without shifting to the “increasing section” after shifting to the “directing section”. .. By this decision, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the "effect section" of the advantageous section, but the advantageous section lamp is not yet lit. The main control board 71 also performs a transition lottery during the “effect section”, and in the example shown in the figure, the transition to the “increase section” is determined as a result of the transition lottery during the “effect section”. Similar to FIG. 170 (A), the sub-control board 72 performs a precursory effect that fuels the transition to the “increased section” during the “effect section” via the display unit 100. After that, when the precursor is about to end, the sub-control board 72 executes a notification effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the "increasing section" via the display unit 100. In the case of the example shown in the figure, although the transition to the "increase section" is not determined in the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the "increase" is performed in the transition lottery performed during the subsequent "directing section". Since it has been decided to shift to the "section", the sub-control board 72 notifies that the decision to shift to the "increasing section" has been made in the notification effect. After that, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the "effect section" to the "increasing section", but at the timing of shifting to the "increasing section", the advantageous section lamp is turned on.

By setting the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp after the notification effect in this way, according to this control, the player moves to the "increasing section" when the precursor effect or the notification effect is executed in the "effect section". There is no way to know whether or not it is a win for the transition, and you will not lose interest in the production.

Subsequently, FIG. 170 (C) is another example of the lottery result (winning process) of the transition lottery to the advantageous section. As shown in the figure, when the main control board 71 determines "winning process 1" in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the "directing section" and the "directing section". After 15 games have passed, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is started. Further, when the main control board 71 determines "winning process 2" in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the "directing section", and 15 games have passed in the "directing section". Later, the game shifts to ART (“increase section”) in which the initial number of games is 50 games.

By doing so, the length of the "directing section (precursor)" depends on whether the transition to the "increasing section (ART)" is won or not in the transition lottery during the normal section. Can be the same. For the player, since it is not possible to predict the subsequent development during the "directing section (precursor)", the game will be played without losing interest until the end, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the main control board 71 performs the push order navigation when the push order combination is won, that is, the push order navigation which has the profit of increasing the number of balls due to the occurrence of the navigation, for the "directing section" among the advantageous sections. It may be possible to end without generating it. Because the "directing section" is a section where the advantageous section lamp does not light up, the player does not feel that there is no benefit even though it lights up, and there is no risk of discouraging the player. is there. Further, the main control board 71 may allow a slight increase in the number of balls to be played or a reduction in the consumption of medals by notifying the pushing order in the game in which the pushing order is won in the "directing section". , It is desirable that the frequency of notification of the push order in the game in which the push order is won is relatively low as compared with the "increase section", and the number of balls is not increased so much. This is because if the increase in the number of medals in the "directing section" is increased, it may lead to a relative decrease in the payout to be paid out in the "increasing section" in order to adjust the balance of the payouts.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control board 71 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 71 functions as a game control unit.

Further, the main control board 71 can determine the transition of the gaming state, and at least sets the gaming state in the normal section and the advantageous section having the "directing section" and the "increasing section" which are more advantageous than the normal section. Since it can be controlled, the main control board 71 functions as a transition determination means and a state control means.

Further, when the gaming state becomes the "increasing section", the main control board 71 lights an advantageous section lamp capable of notifying that the gaming state is the "increasing section". Therefore, the main control board 71 and the advantageous section lamp are used. Functions as a notification means.

Further, the sub-control board 72 can control the effect via the display unit 100 and execute a notification effect (specific effect) for notifying that the game state has been determined to shift to the "increasing section". Therefore, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect control unit and a notification effect execution means.

Further, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to perform the stop operation advantageous to the player. In order to notify the mode, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (number limiter)>
Subsequently, another example of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173. So far, as the limiter of the advantageous section, the limiter using the number of games digested during the advantageous section (hereinafter, "game number limiter") has been described, but the type of the limiter of the advantageous section is not limited to the game number limiter. Absent. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. A limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a "number limiter".

FIG. 171 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis is the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), and is also referred to as a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number is the value seen from the player, and if the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of medals inserted (plus on the player side), plus or vice versa. In the case of, it becomes negative. The horizontal axis is the number of games, and the more to the right, the more games have been digested from the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter starts at the time when the number of medals is the lowest so that the player does not win an extremely large number of medals at one time, and forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 medals is obtained. It is something that makes you.

In the figure, about 100 medals have decreased since the start of the advantageous section. This means that the number of medals has decreased, for example, during preparation for ART or in a precursory state. The number of medals has continued to increase from the start of the advantageous section to -100, and finally the number of medals has increased to about +2300. At this point, from the player's point of view, at least 2400 medals are at hand. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter to forcibly terminate the advantageous section. Thereby, gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

The main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number limiter, and may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter and the number of games. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed by using both the limiter and the limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when one of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous section starts. In this explanation, the number of games limiter is 1500 games and the number of game limiters is 2400. This is an example, and a value smaller or larger than this is adopted according to the game specifications to make the gambling appropriate. It may be controlled to.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the number number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, it is the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (expected net increase per game, expected net increase including increase due to bonus operation) and the activation condition of the number of games limiter. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C, which is a condition for activating the number limiter, will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section is "3" and the number of games B which is the activation condition of the number of games limiter is "100 games".

In the first specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) × B (100 games) = C (300 sheets)) in which the inclination value A × the number of games of the number of games limiter B = the difference number of sheets C of the number of sheets limiter is Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and it is possible to stably control an advantageous section and appropriately suppress gambling.

In the second specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games) <C (400 sheets)) is that the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B <the difference number C in the number limiter. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter is activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games is played. The limiter is activated. If the number of bonuses is drawn more than the expected value, or if the push order role with a large net increase is drawn extremely more than the expected value, the number limiter is activated, and if the game progresses at a value close to the expected value, the number of games The limiter is more likely to be activated. Since the inclination value is "3", as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number of games limiter by reaching 100G is easier to activate than the number limiter, and the player's consciousness is the game rather than the difference number. It will lean toward the number.

That is, since the inclination value is "3", 400 medals are paid out in 133.3 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number of games limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is as follows: game number limiter> number number limiter. If you do not want to worry about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference in the number of sheets, it is better to use such specifications. For example, in the case of a type in which the end condition (not the limiter) such as ending with a net increase of 100 sheets per set is managed by the difference number, if such a limiter specification is used, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed and the player can use it. The limiter can reduce the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off, and can suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the third specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games)> C (200 sheets)) in which the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B> the difference number C in the number limiter is set. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter is activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games is played. The limiter is activated. Since the inclination value is "3", 200 medals will be paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are exhausted. Therefore, the ease of activation is such that the number of games limiter <the number of games limiter. If you don't want to worry about the activation of the number of games limiter due to the number of games, you can use this specification. For example, for a specification in which the net increase in the number of games per game is relatively low, such as 0.1 to 1, but the number of games continues for a long time, such a specification can suppress the activation frequency of the limiter, and the player can use the limiter. As a result, the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off can be reduced, and the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In any specification, the rate at which the advantageous section ends due to the end conditions of the advantageous section other than the limiter (such as the number of ART games and the number of sets stock becomes zero) rather than the rate at which the limiter is reached. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to digest the advantageous section is erased by activating the limiter as a ball ejection design with a high rate.

Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end-time effects by using the display unit 100 when the number limiter is activated and when the game number limiter is activated. If each is a dedicated production, it will lead to a game motivation to see each production once. Further, the sub-control board 72 may have different distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section depending on the type of the limiter. For example, if the number limiter is used, the accuracy of setting suggestion may be higher than when the game number limiter is activated (the difference in coefficients for each setting is large, or it is easy to produce an effect in which a specific setting is fixed). By obtaining specific information such as setting suggestions or seeing a special effect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is cut off by the limiter. Further, the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the above-mentioned limiter specifications. For example, in terms of specifications, it is easier for the player to determine the effect (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion is high) that the sub-control board 72 is preferable to the case where the limiter that is difficult to activate is activated rather than the limiter that is easy to activate. May be good.

(Ending production according to the type of limiter)
Further, the sub-control board 72 has an ending effect 1 when the number limiter is activated heavily, and an ending effect 2 when the game number limiter is activated heavily. There is no big difference in the rate of occurrence, but if at least one of them occurs more heavily, ending effect 3 (may be an effect with a branch to ending effect 1 or 2), etc. It is also possible to provide an advantageous section end suggestion effect period (ending) before the limiter is activated so that the player does not feel uncomfortable due to sudden termination at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, "the situation where the number limiter is activated" means, for example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the difference number, the difference calculated from the difference number so far and the remaining ART period. The sum with the number of sheets (for example, "the number of remaining games x the inclination value" in the case of ART for managing the number of games) is set to the threshold value (for example, the difference number of sheets in which the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number of sheets). It is when the number of sheets is reached, and when, for example, ART is managed based on the number of difference sheets, the sum of the number of sheets of difference so far and the number of remaining sheets reaches a threshold value. In addition, "the situation where the activation of the number of games limiter is concentrated" is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the number of games. The sum with the number of games to be played (for example, "remaining difference number / gradient value" in the case of ART for managing the difference number) is slightly smaller than the number of games in which the limiter for the number of games is activated or the number of games. (Small value) is reached, and for example, when ART is managed based on the number of games, the sum of the number of games that have passed so far and the number of remaining games reaches the threshold value.

(Notify or suggest the type of limiter activated on the history screen)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the game history screen that the player can view on the menu screen about the type of the activated limiter or the effect generated corresponding to the limiter type (the type of the ending effect, etc.). Is also good. In this case, since a large number of balls have been obtained in the first place, it is possible to arouse the motivation to play that a high setting can be expected.

(Outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of a type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall side can grasp which of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated by a hall computer or the like. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from different pins of the external terminal board. For example, in the case of the original ball ejection specification, the number of games limiter is mainly activated, and in the model where the number limiter is not activated so much, if the number limiter is activated frequently, some kind of goto action is performed or the game The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

If the activation condition of the number limiter and the activation condition of the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, the main control board 71 may output one of the predetermined signals, or two types of signals. May be output in a predetermined order. When outputting in order, it is preferable to wait a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the output of the next signal so that the signal can be reliably received. Further, when the activation condition of the number limiter and the activation condition of the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, it is assumed that only one of the limit processing is performed and the other processing is not performed, and the main (main control board 71). In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of the type of limiter)
Further, if there is a margin in the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal board for external signal output, they may be different as described above, but the same external signal is used regardless of the type of limiter. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter, so that the hall computer or the like can detect that the advantageous section has ended. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(Example of external signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal immediately after the game or the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots obtained exceeds the number of number limiters, it does not mean that the limiter function was inadequate, and the bonus was activated near the number limiter reached by chance to win the ball. Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when the limiter is activated while the bonus is operating (at the end of the bonus))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end. Such a specification may be used when it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the game state in which the number of balls is substantially increased.

(Production when the player misses a small role in a game that may activate the number limiter)
For example, in a three-card game with six remaining sheets until the number limiter is activated, nine medals are paid out at the time of the correct answer, and the push order bell is won, and the correct push order is notified. If the player makes a mistake in the push order, the number limiter may be activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game, and the production when the number limiter is activated may be started from the start of the game. In such a case, as a result of making a mistake in the pushing order, the number limiter is not activated, but the sub-control board 72 is scheduled to activate the number limiter that started from the start of the game (for example, the number limiter is scheduled to be activated). The effect) may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted by determining that the number limiter is not activated.

(Production when the limiter to be activated is changed by the operation of the player)
In addition, the type of limiter to be activated may differ due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation where the number of remaining games until the number limiter is activated is 6 and the number of games remaining until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out at the time of correct answer in a 3-card game. This corresponds to the case where the order bell is won and the correct answer is notified in the order of pressing. In such a case, if the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order without following the notification, the game number limiter is activated in the next game. (In addition, there is a possibility that the number limiter will be activated in the next game, but here, it is assumed that the number of games limiter is activated with priority when multiple limiter activation conditions are satisfied).
In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the push order bell is won, and at an arbitrary timing of the transition in which the non-activation of the number limiter is confirmed (first stop operation to all). When the reels are stopped, at any time after the display of the missing or small number of symbol combinations is confirmed), switch to the effect when the number of games limiter is activated, or temporarily switch to the effect that does not correspond to the suggestion of either limiter activation. It is preferable to perform a process of returning the limiter to avoid a contradiction between the activated limiter and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, delay of the end effect and extension of the ending effect due to the activation of the limiter inside)
Regarding the effects and controls performed in connection with the limit processing described so far, if the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus ends the timing of the production according to the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing. By using a method of delaying the time or until immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

<Control method of number limiter>
Subsequently, a method of controlling the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (B). In the number limiter, the point where the absolute value of medals decreases the most from the start of the advantageous section is set as the lowest point (starting point), and the plus amount from the latest lowest point is used as the difference number that triggers the activation of the number limiter. .. The figure shows an example in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, the increase / decrease of medals is repeated in 1 to 8 games, and then the number of medals is increased to reach the number limiter.

In the figure, the point where the absolute value of medals decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is "-9", so the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference is "+2391" in the N game. ing. The counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of collecting the correct bells in the order of pushing in the N + 2 game, although the difference from the starting point exceeds "+2400", the number limiter has already been activated and the advantageous section (ART) has ended. It's only temporary and there is no problem.

In the figure, the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of the payout of the game is shown, but it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to win the game machine. Of course, the corresponding counter may be won and used to show the player the number of acquired cards.

Further, the starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. It may be recognized as the lowest point simply because the value of the counter (number counter) used for the limiter is 0 without having the starting point flag, but whether or not the difference number subtraction until the number limiter is activated has started. Is produced on the sub (sub control board 72) side, etc., by referring to the starting point flag that can be performed only by ON / OFF judgment, and producing the value of the number counter without transmitting it to the sub side, the main (main control board). The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In that case, the sub side receives the information on the number of input and the number of payouts transmitted from the main and performs the same processing as the number counter on the sub side, and produces the status of the number counter (notification of the number of sheets until the number limiter is activated). Etc.) may be performed.

The lowest point (starting point) may be updated either when the value becomes the same as or less than the latest lowest point. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number becomes "-3" and then increases once, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference becomes "-3" again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. Actually, since the number of medals has decreased since then, the absolute difference number at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section is "-9", which is the starting point in the number limiter.

In the figure, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the digestion of one game at the start of the advantageous section (when the absolute difference number is 0) is set. It is set as the first lowest point, the end of one game is the second lowest point, the time when it becomes minus 9 is the third lowest point, and when 2400 sheets are increased from the third lowest point, the number limiter is activated. May be. Further, in the figure, when the replay wins a prize, the number counter is updated with 0 inserted and 0 paid out. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number of sheets at the time of replay, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, it is also possible to pay out the number of inserted sheets at the time of winning the replay and update the number counter with the number of inserted sheets being three in the next game. By doing so, the value of the number counter between the time when the replay wins and the operation to start the next game is performed can be matched with the actual difference number behavior, and the value of the number counter can be changed to the actual increase / decrease number. It can be easily diverted to display the number of sheets for production.

The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display unit 100 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player can grasp or suggest the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated, and if the number of remaining sheets is 2000 or more until the number of sheets limiter is activated, the first production stage, if the remaining 1000 to 1999 sheets, the second production stage, and the remaining 999 sheets. If the number of sheets is less than the number of sheets, it may be suggested that the production stage such as the background is different depending on the number range until the number limiter is activated, as in the third production stage.

Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal so that it can be displayed on a data display for viewing game data installed on a hall computer, an upper part of a pachislot machine, or the like. It is preferable that the main control board 71 maintains the values of the starting point flag and the number counter without erasing even when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may erase the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when the setting is changed.

<Adjustment method of number limiter>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 173 (C), an adjustment striking method of the number limiter will be described. In the specification of forcibly ending the advantageous section using the number limiter, a method of activating the number limiter can be considered by adjusting the increase / decrease of medals immediately before the activation of the number limiter. For example, if the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "9" medals will be paid out, and if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect push order. In the specification where the payout of medals is "0", 3 medals are required in one game, so if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order at the time of winning the push order, the number counter will be " If the number is "+6" and the stop operation is performed in the wrong push order when the push order is won, the number counter is set to "-3". Therefore, for example, when the push order is won three times, if the push order is incorrect twice and the correct answer is made once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

By adjusting the number of sheets limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for the winning of the bonus as ART just before the number of sheets limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment batting method starts from the M game, and the adjustment batting method is performed up to the X game that wins the BB (bonus). As a result, in the X + 10th game, +2512 medals, which exceeds +2400 in which the number limiter is activated, have been obtained.

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, the batting method (different from the batting order navigation) that can give the player the maximum profit by performing an effect of suggesting or notifying that it is advantageous to intentionally oppose the batting order notification. You may prompt the stop operation). It should be noted that such an effect may be performed by the sub-control board 72 via the display unit 100 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

If there are multiple types of bonus roles such as a mini bonus with a net increase of about 15 cards and a relatively high winning probability (15 cards in the bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult) and a bonus with a net increase of 120 cards, the number limiter The effect of recommending the above adjustment striking method may be performed on a line in which the remaining difference number until reaching is larger than the net increase number in the mini bonus. Further, as for the small winning combination other than the pushing order combination, the number of payouts may be easily adjusted (for example, the number of payouts is 3) without increasing the number of payouts exceeding 3. In this way, by making the game playable so that the ball output rate can be improved by devising the way of hitting, the interest of the game is enhanced.

If you place importance on the disadvantages such as the complexity of the game being avoided by beginners, the number counter is not added by the actual net increase, but by the net increase when the game is played as instructed. You may do it. For example, in a three-card game, when a push order bell in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer is won, the main control board 71 notifies the player of the correct push order, and the player's operation mode and winning a prize. Regardless of the result, the number counter is set to +6. As such a specification, a specification that seals such an adjustment striking method may be used.

<Playability with specifications that block the adjustment method>
Next, the playability that can be realized by the specification that seals such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(No bonus installed)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is composed only of a small role and a replay without installing a bonus role, the player does not have to ask the player for the above-mentioned complicated batting method, and the playability becomes easy to understand.
(Equipped with a bonus that does not increase or decrease or decreases)
In addition, as another specification example of suppressing the above-mentioned batting method, the bonus may be a non-increasing / decreasing bonus in which only a small winning combination in which the same number of coins is paid out during operation is won, and the bonus is thrown during operation. It may be a reduced bonus in which only small wins are paid out, which is less than the number of cards. In this case, the bonus may be performed during the bonus operation or during the bonus operation in the lottery of the advantageous section instead of increasing the medals, and although the advantageous processing is not performed, the player at the game store As long as a normal game is performed, the reel control hinders the winning of the bonus, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(The net increase in the number of cards during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Assuming a three-card game, there is no payout at the time of bonus winning, so the difference in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus ends in one game with three cards, the maximum number of winnings that can be generated during the bonus operation is 6 cards or less. By doing so, the difference number of sheets from the time when the bonus is activated to the end of the bonus does not become a positive value, so that the value of the number counter does not increase due to the bonus operation, and the above-mentioned complicated hitting The player does not have to do the law.

<Playability with specifications that allow adjustment batting>
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that allow such an adjusted batting method will be described.

(Removing small roles during bonus operation or reducing the number of acquired cards)
In addition to the specifications that can be used for the above-mentioned striking method, if the number limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the number of bonuses obtained is intentionally reduced to end the bonus, and after the bonus, the above-mentioned striking method is used. It may be most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the life of the advantageous section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, it is possible to drop a small winning combination in the pressing timing or pressing order, or to win a winning combination with a small number of payouts. In this case, it is desirable that the number of winnings with a small number of payouts is smaller than the number of coins inserted during the bonus operation. For example, when a specific point is pressed, 14 cards are paid out, and when other points are pressed, 15 cards are paid out. A certain effect can be achieved even if a role that allows fine adjustment such as being received is provided.

(Normal roles other than push order are only replays or roles less than the number of inputs)
For example, it is assumed that the bonus is not activated and three cards are hung. The number of push order bells is 9, but other roles such as so-called watermelon, cherry, and bell without the concept of push order are configured as a replay role or a role with 3 or less payouts. By doing so, even if another small role is drawn in a situation where the number limiter operates with the net increase of the remaining few sheets, the number limiter does not operate and the difficulty of the strategy is reduced, making it easier to play.

(The player can intervene at the frequency of winning a specific number of cards (1-2 cards) when the stop operation is different from the navigation of the push order role.)
There is a specification that one sheet will be paid out or missed if the stop operation is different from the push order navigation. In this case, since the increase / decrease of the game occurs in two ways, minus 2 and minus 3, it is difficult to calculate and it may be confusing while playing. Compared to such specifications, when the number of sheets is fixed, such as when 1 or 2 sheets are always aligned when ignoring the navigation, the negative value when ignoring the navigation with the number of sheets at the last minute is fixed to, for example, minus 2. Therefore, it is easy to calculate, and the careless mistake that the player makes a mistake in the calculation and hits the part that should be ignored by the navigation one more time according to the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

It should be noted that a certain effect can be exhibited even if the sheet is generally stabilized, such as one sheet being paid out or being missed at a high frequency, not always. In addition, the number of payouts may be stable due to the pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when the batting order navigation of "1, 2, 3" (left, middle, right is the correct batting order) occurs, the winning rate of 1 card is "middle 1st"> "right 1st", and 3 cards If you want to reduce it, you may choose the right first stop, and if you want to reduce the number of cards, you may choose the middle first stop. In addition, if you miss the second stop after the first stop is correct in the game, and if you stop in the order of "1.3.2", there is a higher probability than other navigation-ignored batting orders, or one card will always win. , It is good that the player can select how to reduce by batting order.

(Navigation mode changes when navigation should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play according to the navigation, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order in the first mode (blue numbers, etc.), and when it is optimal to play against the navigation, the sub-control board 72. Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).
(Changes depending on the situation or production that should be ignored in navigation)
The main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 may be different depending on the situation in which the BGM, the image, the lamp, or the like is followed by the navigation and the situation in which the navigation is against the navigation. It is desirable to be able to grasp in advance whether or not the situation should be against the navigation when the navigation occurs in the next game before the navigation occurs.
(Lock or reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may be provided with a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) or a temporary operation acceptance invalidation period of the stop button immediately after the lever is turned on or after the reel rotation is started. As a result, the player can be alerted and the case where the advantageous section is accidentally ended can be prevented. In addition, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 also alert the user with audio or video.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (payout number limiter)>
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), that is, based on the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. , Limit processing is to be performed, but it is not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is called a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for ending the advantageous section when a predetermined number of medals (for example, 2400 medals) are paid out during the advantageous section.

In the above-mentioned number limiter, the limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the input number from the payout number, but in the payout number limiter, the payout number is referred to as it is without subtracting the input number from the payout number. When the number of payouts reaches the specified value, limit processing is performed. In such a payout number limiter, the main control board 71 initializes the payout number counter at the start of the advantageous section or the increase section, and updates the payout number counter every time a payout occurs due to a small winning combination. Then, when the value of the payout number counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and a limit processing for initializing the value related to the advantageous section.

Even in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when the winning combination related to the replay is won is arbitrary, and it may be counted as 3 payouts, or it is counted as 0 payouts. However, it is desirable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payouts when the winning combination related to the replay wins. By doing so, for example, in a 3BET game, there are cases where a three-card combination (a combination in which three medals are paid out when a prize is won) is won, and a case where a combination related to replay is won, and a payout number counter. Changes in the value of can be made different. That is, the number of payout counters does not advance when the combination related to the replay wins, compared to the case where the three-card combination wins, so that the player can feel a sense of profit, which is substantially the same. It is possible to make a difference in the value between the three-card combination, which is the value, and the combination related to the replay.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (navigation number limiter)>
Further, as the type of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section, the navigation number limiter described below can also be used. When the navigation count limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers the player to be notified (navigated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) during the advantageous section (that is, the number of navigations is a specified value). When the result is reached), the limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, among the navigations performed to the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, the normal section is to maintain the medals or decrease the medals during the advantageous section. There is a navigation system to suppress it compared to the inside. The former navigation is, for example, in the 3BET game, when the correct answer is stopped (for example, when the push order is correct), more than 3 medals (for example, 9 medals) are paid out. It refers to notifying the mode of the stop operation, and the latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, three in the case of a correct stop operation mode in a 3BET game, or three or more. In the case of the correct answer stop operation mode, there are less than three medals, but in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation mode (for example, when the push order is incorrect), more medals are paid out. It means to notify the aspect of. The former role that is the target of navigation can be called an increasing role that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART) from that role. In pachislot, which of the plurality of roles should be used as an increasing role can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 counts the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the increasing combination, which is a condition for generating the limit processing by the navigation number limiter, while the non-increasing combination. The number of navigations performed at the time of winning may be excluded from the counting target of the number of navigations, and the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role may also be included in the counting target of the number of navigations. May be good. By excluding the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role from the count target, the number of medals has increased too much, as in the case where many non-increasing roles were accidentally established after the start of the advantageous section (ART). If this is not the case, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event unrelated to the purpose of the limiter, which is to suppress excessive ball ejection, and the player will not be dissatisfied.

In such a navigation count limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation count counter (navigation counter), which is a condition for generating a limit process at the start of an advantageous section or an increase section, to generate a navigation to be counted. The value of the navigation count counter is updated each time. Then, when the value of the navigation count counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value related to the advantageous section. In the various limiters described so far, the method of updating the counter may be an addition type or a subtraction type.

<Another example of the limiter period>
Further, in the above description, an example in which a limiter such as a game number limiter, a number number limiter, a payout number limiter, and a navigation number limiter is used only in an advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not in the advantageous section. It can be adopted at any time. For example, if you accidentally continue to hit the advantageous section, medals will be paid out only for the maximum number of medals in each advantageous section, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous section, the total Then, many medals may be paid out, which may incite excessive gambling. Therefore, apart from the limiter in the advantageous section, a value (for example, the payout rate and the difference number) indicating the increase status of the period (for example, the latest 6000 games) for the latest predetermined number of games is a predetermined predetermined value. A special limiter may be provided to end the advantageous section when the number exceeds (for example, 170% or +10000 sheets from the viewpoint of the player). According to such a special limiter, when the activation condition of the special limiter is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 has just started the advantageous section, and the game number limiter and the number number limiter are completely activated. Even if the situation is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

In addition, in the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, the right regarding the advantageous section currently acquired (the number of AT games, the number of AT stocks, the number of possible difference numbers, etc.) and the payout rate are referred to as special. When there is a risk that the limiter will be activated, the main control board 71 reduces the possibility of activating the special limiter by reducing the occurrence rate of addition before reaching the specified value, or when the special limiter is activated. It may be controlled so that the right of the increasing interval (ART) to be erased is reduced.

Further, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate and the difference number of medals) may be based on a value other than the number of games, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 10). Determine the predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information such as time) and a predetermined number of inserted sheets (for example, 18,000 inserted sheets) that can determine that the player has played the game over a predetermined period. May be.

The configuration of a pachislot machine using such a special limiter is shown below.
It is a game machine that can be played using the game value,
The right to make the gaming state an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous section in pachislot, an increasing section (AT, ART), a probabilistic state in pachinko, or a shortened time state) (pachislot). It may be the AT stock, the number of AT games, etc. in the pachinko machine, or it may be the right to shift to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, etc. in pachinko). When,
A game state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied based on the right.
Advantageous gaming state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state when there is the right (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is the number of AT stocks in the pachislot machine, etc., and the pachinko machine). It may be a continuation of the probable change state or the time saving state in)),
An increase status storage means (for example, a difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the activation condition of the special limiter) for storing a value indicating an increase status of the game value from a predetermined unit game to the elapse of a predetermined period. Counter for monitoring the payout rate) and
A gaming machine including a special termination means (special limiter) for terminating the advantageous state even if the right is granted when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined predetermined value.

Further, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, and may be, for example, a daily limiter, or both may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the daily unit is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 is cut off for a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power failure during business hours such as 2 hours and 4 hours and can be presumed to be a power failure during closing due to the closing of business). Or, a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, by resetting the information for the previous day) from the start point (starting point) of the day when the power is turned on after the power is turned off for a predetermined time or longer. The special limiter is controlled by monitoring the payout rate and the difference number. Further, the main control board 71 resets the information for the previous day from the starting point (that is, the information for the previous day) with the time when a predetermined time (1 hour or the like) or more has elapsed in the power-on state as the starting point (starting point) of the day. ), The special limiter may be controlled by monitoring a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number). In any case, the timekeeping method can be realized by mounting a timekeeping means such as an RTC on the main control board 71.

<Penalty for navigation mistakes>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 may be given a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the case of a specification in which an additional lottery of ART is performed while waiting for a transition to high RT such as during preparation for ART, the transition to high RT is avoided and the preparation for ART is postponed to prepare for ART. You can receive a lot of extra lottery. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such an additional lottery of ART when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether the error is an accidental error or an intentional error, for example, the main control board 71 changes the degree of penalty according to the number of stop operations that do not follow the notification. May be.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 220. The same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment and various modifications will not be described in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples, and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples can be similarly applied. The feature 1 can be similarly applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below.

The pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below is an AT machine. Generally, so-called ART machines and AT machines are known as pachislot machines having a notification state for notifying (navigating) a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous for the player. The ART machine generally involves a transition of the RT state between the non-notification state and the notification state. For example, the game in the non-notification state is basically performed in the low RT state where the winning probability of the replay is low. , During the notification state, the navigation for the notification target role such as the push order bell (batting order bell), the navigation for shifting to the high RT state with a high probability of winning the replay, and the navigation for maintaining the high RT state are performed. On the other hand, in an AT machine, it is common that the RT state is not changed between the non-notification state and the notification state. For example, during the inter-flag state (inter-flag RT) in which the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination. By continuing to avoid winning bonuses, the RT between flags is maintained in both the non-notification state and the notification state, and by switching the presence / absence of notification during the RT between flags, the notification state and the non-notification state are switched. ..

Here, the specifications of the inter-flag RT in the AT machine are various, but in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-217777, 2 BET is played by playing 3 BET in the inter-flag state in which the bonus dedicated to 2 BET is carried over. A specification that keeps the state between flags while avoiding winning a special bonus is disclosed. The bonus dedicated to 2BET means a bonus that is determined as an internal winning combination only in the game played in 2BET and can be won only in the game played in 2BET. For example, the bonus dedicated to 2BET in the game played in 2BET. If the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination and then the 3BET game is played with the bonus carried over, the bonus will not be won during the 3BET game. Similarly, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below, the notification state and the non-notification state are switched while playing the 3BET game during the inter-flag state in which the bonus (BB1 or BB2) dedicated to 2BET is carried over. By doing so, we have realized an AT machine. The pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment is not limited to the AT machine, but can be similarly applied to the ART machine, and the AT machine specifications also carry over the bonus dedicated to 2BET. It is not limited to what is done during the interim state, and can be applied to other specifications.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
First, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 178.

[Design arrangement table]
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 174 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

[Design code table]
Further, as shown in FIG. 174, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 174 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to this embodiment are "black BAR", "red BAR", "purple 7", "replay A", "replay B", "replay C", "replay D", and "bell". , "Blank top" and "Blank bottom", and 1 byte of data is assigned to each.

[Internal lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 175, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. When the 3BET bonus is not operating, the "3BET, general" column is referred to, while the 3BET bonus is inside, the "3BET, inside" column is referred to, and when the 3BET bonus is operating, "3BET, BB". The column is referred to, the "2BET, general" column is referred to while the 2BET bonus is not operating, and the "2BET, internal" column is referred to during the 2BET bonus internal. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game progresses by playing the game of 3BET during the inside of the bonus dedicated to 2BET (state between flags), so basically, the internal lottery corresponding to the inside of 3BET. The table is referenced and no other internal lottery table is used.

In FIG. 175, when the combination indicated by "No. 1 (F_normal lip 1)" to "No. 45 (F_BB3)" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is described in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the same figure. Derivation of various combinations of symbols is allowed (winning is allowed). The contents of the symbol combinations described in the "corresponding symbol combinations" column are shown in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 176 and 177. Further, in FIG. 178, when each combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols actually winning among the combinations of symbols permitted to win a prize (correspondence between the internal winning combination and the display combination). ) Is shown.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the symbol combination table, combinations of a plurality of symbols are defined in advance. In addition, in FIG. 176 and FIG. 177, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this constitutes the combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Show that. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effective line is the center line.

In FIGS. 176 and 177, the combination of symbols corresponding to "BB1" to "BB3" is a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus, and the combination of symbols corresponding to "RP01" to "RP19" is the replay. It is a combination of symbols related to operation. Further, the combination of symbols corresponding to "NM01" to "NM34" is a combination of symbols related to the payout of medals.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination (combination of symbols actually won), and the like in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 178 shows the correspondence in the 3BET game in which the bonus dedicated to 2BET is carried over as the internal winning combination, and the correspondence in other states is omitted. As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the replay combination is a batting order combination (3 selection combination) in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the first stop operation is different. , Pushing order small combination ("F_Batting order 1 bell A" to "F_Batting order 6 special B") is a 6-choice push order with different combinations of symbols displayed according to the 1st stop operation and the 2nd stop operation. It is a batting order (6 choices).

Further, in the figure, "TL rip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_TL rip (RP01)", and the symbols "replay (designs" replay A "to" replay D "are along the top line (TL)". It is a combination of symbols that can be displayed side by side. The "middle rip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_middle rip (RP03)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "replay" can be displayed side by side along the center line (middle). .. Further, the "XU bell lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_XU bell lip (RP19)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "bells" can be displayed side by side along the cross-up line (XU). .. In the following, the "XD lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_XD lip (RP02)", and the symbol "replay" can be displayed side by side along the crossdown line (XD). Refers to a combination.

Further, in the figure, "purple 7 lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_purple 7TL lip (RP10)" to "C_purple 7XU lip (RP12)", and 5 of the center line to the cross down line. It is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "purple 7" can be displayed side by side along any of the lines of the book. Further, "purple 7 fake" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_purple 7 fake 1 (RP13)" to "C_purple 7 fake 3 (RP15)", and can be used in any of the center line to the cross down line. Is also a combination of symbols in which three symbols "purple 7" are not displayed side by side.

Further, in the figure, "red BAR rip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_red BARXD rip (RP06)" to "C_red BARXU rip (RP08)", and is any of the center line and the cross-down line. It is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "red BAR" can be displayed side by side along the crab. The "red BAR fake" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_red BAR fake 1 (RP16)" to "C_red BAR fake 3 (RP18)", and can be used in any of the center line and the cross down line. Is also a combination of symbols in which three symbols "red BAR" are not displayed side by side.

Further, in the figure, "W-matched lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_W-matched lip 1 (RP05)" and "C_W-matched 2 (RP09)", and is any one of the center line to the cross-down line. It is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "red BAR" can be displayed side by side along one line, and three symbols "purple 7" can be displayed side by side along other lines from the center line to the cross-down line. The "black BAR lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_black BAR lip (RP04)", and a combination of symbols in which three symbols "black BAR" can be displayed side by side along the center line. Is.

Further, in the figure, the "lower bell" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_BL bell (NM30)", and three symbols "bells" can be displayed side by side along the bottom line (lower row). Is a combination of. The "middle bell" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_CL bell (NM31)", and is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "bells" can be displayed side by side along the center line (middle). is there. The "upper bell" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_TL bell (NM32)", and is a combination of symbols in which three symbols "bells" can be displayed side by side along the top line (upper row). is there.

Further, in the figure, "irregular 1" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_irregular bell 1 (NM27)", and "irregular 2" is a combination name "C_irregular bell 2 (NM28)". It is a combination of the symbols concerned, and the "irregular 3" is a combination of the symbols related to the combination name "C_irregular bell 3 (NM29)".

Further, in the figure, "chance" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_chance 1 (NM33)" and "C_chance 2 (NM34)", and "1 sheet" is the combination name "C_L1st Miss 1". (NM01) ”to“ C_R2nd Miss 6 (NM26) ”is a combination of symbols. Further, "1 sheet (1/2)" or "1 sheet (1/4)" is inappropriate because a combination of "1 sheet" symbols is displayed when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. In some cases, it means "off". In addition, "off" is a combination of symbols in which none of the combinations defined in FIGS. 176 and 177 is displayed.

As shown in the figure, when "F_purple 7 fake 1 (No. 7)" to "F_black BAR lip (No. 13)" are determined as internal winning combinations, the order of stop operations is left 1st (left). A special combination of symbols is displayed when it is middle right or left and right middle), but when the order of the stop operation is middle 1st (middle left and right or middle right left) or right 1st (right left middle or right middle left) If, the combination of "TL Lip" symbols is displayed. Although the details will be described later, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a control for invalidating the fixed combination may be performed. When the determinant combination is invalidated, the main control circuit 91 (and the sub control circuit 101) notifies the pressing order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", thereby combining the symbols of "TL lip". If you are prompted to display and do not invalidate the fixed combination, no push order is notified (by notifying the push order of "left middle right" or "left and right middle"), and a special combination of symbols is used. Enable display.

Regarding "F_purple 7 fake 1 (No. 7)" to "F_black BAR lip (No. 13)", in the present embodiment, when the order of the stop operation is the left 1st, a special combination of symbols is used. Is displayed and the order of the stop operation is the middle 1st or the right 1st, the combination of the symbols of "TL Lip" is displayed, but the order of the stop operation in which the special combination of symbols is displayed , The order of the stop operations in which the combination of the symbols of "TL Lip" is displayed may be different for each role.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 sets the special mode to ON at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and among the combinations of symbols related to replay (RP), "XD". When a combination of symbols other than "Rip (RP02)" (RP01, RP03 to RP19) is displayed, the special mode is updated to OFF. That is, among the combinations of symbols related to replay, "XD rip" functions as a combination of symbols that keeps the special mode ON, and among the combinations of symbols related to replay, combinations of symbols other than "XD rip" are It functions as a combination of symbols that update the special mode to OFF.

Here, as shown in the figure, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination (No. 1 to No. 13) related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination, "XD lip" is displayed. There is no such thing, and combinations of symbols other than "XD Lip" are always displayed. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special mode is ON and the combination related to replay (No. 1 to No. 13) is determined as the internal winning combination, the special mode is always updated to OFF. Will be done.

In this regard, the main control circuit 91 may stop and control some of the combinations related to the replay so that the "XD rip" can be displayed, and when the pressing order is partial. May be stopped and controlled so that "XD rip" can be displayed, and when some of the winning combinations related to the replay are determined as internal winning combinations, it is a partial push order. In addition, the stop control may be performed so that the "XD lip" can be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may stop control so that the "XD lip" can be displayed when it is in a specific gaming state. As a specific gaming state, for example, states having different RT states may be used. In the case of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played in the flag-to-flag RT (3BET game in the inside of the 2BET exclusive bonus), but in the case of non-flag-to-flag (what is the flag-to-flag RT) (In the case of different RT states), in other words, in the 3BET game in which the bonus dedicated to 2BET is not carried over, the main control circuit 91 may stop control so that the "XD lip" can be displayed. Even in this case, the main control circuit 91 may stop and control a part (or all) of the combinations related to the replay in different RT states so that the "XD lip" can be displayed. Further, for some (or all) combinations, only the "XD rip" may be stopped and controlled so that it cannot be displayed, and combinations of symbols other than the "XD rip" may be stopped and controlled so as not to be displayed. Further, the main control circuit 91 can display "XD rip" for some (or all) of the combinations related to the replay in different RT states when the pressing order is partial. When the stop control is performed and the push order is different, the stop control may be performed so that a combination of symbols other than the "XD lip" can be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may or may not perform stop control so that the "XD lip" can be displayed, depending on the number of BETs. In the case of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a 3BET game is assumed, but in the case of a 2BET game, the main control circuit 91 may stop and control so that "XD lip" can be displayed. Alternatively, the stop control may be performed so that only the "XD lip" is displayed. Even in this case, the main control circuit 91 stops so that "XD rip" can be displayed (or only "XD rip" is displayed) for some of the combinations related to the replay of the 2BET game. It may be controlled, or it may be stopped and controlled so that "XD rip" can be displayed when a part of the 2BET game is pushed, and it is a 2BET game and the role related to the replay. When some of the winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations and some of the push orders are in order, the "XD lip" may be stopped and controlled so that it can be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may make a difference whether or not the stop control is performed so that the "XD lip" can be displayed in consideration of the gaming state (RT state) and the number of BETs. As an example, when the main control circuit 91 is in a specific gaming state (RT state) and has a specific number of BETs, the main control circuit 91 is stopped and controlled so that "XD lip" can be displayed, and in other cases, it is stopped and controlled. The "XD lip" may be stopped and controlled so that it cannot be displayed. Even in this case, when the main control circuit 91 is in a specific gaming state (RT state) and has a specific number of BETs, the main control circuit 91 is a part of the winning combination related to the replay. The stop control may be performed so that "XD rip" can be displayed (or only "XD rip" is displayed), and when the game state (RT state) is specified and the number of BETs is specified. The "XD rip" may be stopped and controlled so that it can be displayed when it is a part of the pressing order, and when it is in a specific gaming state (RT state) and has a specific number of BETs. When some of the winning combinations related to the replay are determined as internal winning combinations and some of the winning combinations are in the push order, the "XD rip" may be stopped and controlled so as to be displayable.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the fourth embodiment]
Subsequently, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a transition flow of the ball ejection state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an outline of the ball ejection state and the game state in a list. The ball ejection state and the mode shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 are controlled by the main control board 71 (main control circuit 91).

As shown in FIG. 179, the ball ejection state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control circuit 91, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) is turned on by the control of the main control circuit 91. Will be done. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section depending on the off state, and notifies the player that he / she is staying in the advantageous section depending on the lit state. However, in the present embodiment, even if the player stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is possible to suppress the notification of the necessary stop operation information to the player depending on the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are (unacceptable) and acceptable states.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 controls the ball ejection state by performing various processes, and the various processes for controlling the ball ejection state are roughly classified into a lottery process (lottery process) and a lottery process. It is divided into processing that does not depend on (other processing).

In the normal section, "normal" is executed as the ball ejection state. "Normal" is the initial state after the power is turned on or after the setting is changed, and after the end of the advantageous section, all variables related to the advantageous section are cleared, and the state shifts to this "normal" state. In "normal", navigation is not performed, and an advantageous section transition lottery is executed for each unit game (one game). If you win in the advantageous section transition lottery, you will win the advantageous section. There are "normal winning" and "AT precursor winning" in the advantageous section winning. In the case of "normal winning", the next game shifts to "normal advantage" as the payout state, and in the case of "AT precursor win", the payout state shifts to "AT precursor". In addition, in "normal", when the fixed combination described later is determined as the winning combination, it becomes "AT winning" and the payout state shifts to "specialized zone preparation".

In the advantageous section, the main ball output states are "normal advantage", "CZ precursor", "AT precursor", "CZ", "specialized zone preparation", "specialized zone", "AT", "AT middle CZ", "special AT", and "ending". Is feasible. In the advantageous section, a navigation (bell navigation) that displays the combination of symbols of the maximum number of payouts can be generated at the time of winning a small batting order (in this embodiment, "F_batting order 1 bell A" to "F_batting order 6 special B"). The main control circuit 91 performs bell navigation in the "specialized zone", "AT", "special AT", and "ending" in the advantageous section, and performs "normal advantage", "CZ precursor", "AT precursor", and "CZ". In "AT Naka CZ", bell navigation is not performed, and in "specialized zone preparation", bell navigation is performed according to the lottery result. The above-mentioned limiter is provided in the advantageous section, and when the limiter reaches, for example, 1500G after the advantageous section is started, the limit processing by the game number limiter is executed, and the difference number after the advantageous section is started is, for example, 2400. When it reaches, the limit processing by the number limiter is executed. As a result, the advantageous section is terminated together with the AT, and the section is shifted to the normal section.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "normal advantage" shifts to the "normal win" by the advantageous section lottery in the "normal". In addition, the "normal advantage" also shifts to the case where the remaining 0G is left in the "CZ" due to the AT non-winning. In "normal advantage", AT lottery and CZ lottery are performed. When the CZ lottery is won, the state shifts from the "normal advantage" to the "CZ" state, and when the CZ lottery is won, the state shifts from the "normal advantage" to the "AT precursor" state. Further, in the "normal advantage", when the fixed combination described later is determined as the winning combination, the winning combination becomes "AT winning" and the payout state shifts to "specialized zone preparation".

Further, the "normal advantage" includes a normal mode in which the winning probability of the AT lottery is different, such as "low accuracy", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", and "special". When the advantageous section lottery results in the "normal win" in the "normal", the initial value of the normal mode is determined by the initial normal mode lottery. During the "normal advantage", the normal mode transition lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and the mode transition is controlled according to the lottery result.

Further, the "normal advantage" includes a CZ mode in which the winning probability of "CZ" is different, such as "low probability", "high probability A", and "high probability B". The type of CZ mode is initially "low accuracy" and is promoted / fallen or maintained by the CZ mode transition lottery performed during "normal advantage". In the present embodiment, the CZ mode is controlled according to the transition lottery of the CZ mode performed during the "normal advantage", and is performed when the number of elapsed games during the "normal advantage" reaches the specified number of games. It may be controlled by ceiling control.

Further, in "normal advantage", lottery processing such as history lottery and ceiling benefit lottery, and other processing such as ceiling control are performed. The history lottery is a process of determining whether or not to grant a privilege according to the number of times the winning combination is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game, and the details will be described later in FIGS. 186 and 187. The ceiling benefit lottery and ceiling control are processes performed when the number of elapsed games in the "normal advantage" reaches the specified number of games, which will be described in detail later in FIG.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the “CZ precursor” shifts to the CZ winning by the CZ lottery in the “normal advantage”. The "CZ precursor" ends when the number of precursor games between 1 and 2 games elapses, and shifts to the "CZ" state. In addition, during "CZ precursor", AT lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and when winning, the state shifts from "CZ precursor" to "AT precursor" or "specialized zone preparation", and will be described later. When the final winning combination is determined as the winning combination, the ball ejection state shifts to "specialized zone preparation".

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the “CZ” shifts when the “CZ precursor” is played for the number of precursor games. "CZ" is a chance zone (CZ) that is relatively easy to win "AT" and continues for 5 games. There are two types of "CZ", "normal" and "special", which have different winning probabilities of AT lottery. Basically, the AT winning probability is higher when the type is "special" than when it is "normal". If you win the AT lottery during "CZ", after the specified number of games (5G) of "CZ" has elapsed, the state shifts from "CZ" to the state of "specialized zone preparation", and "CZ" without winning the AT lottery. When the specified number of games (5G) of "" has passed, the state shifts to the "normally advantageous" state. Even if the AT lottery is won, the "CZ" will continue until the specified number of games (5G) has elapsed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the AT lottery may be won a plurality of times during the "CZ", and in this case, a plurality of AT stocks (more specifically, special zone stocks) are given. However, in "CZ", when the fixed combination described later is determined as the winning combination, the payout state becomes "specialized zone preparation" from the next game regardless of the number of remaining games in CZ.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the “AT precursor” shifts to the AT precursor winning by AT lottery in “normal” or “normal advantage”. The "AT precursor" ends when the number of precursor games between 1 and 2 games has elapsed, and the state shifts to the "specialized zone preparation" state. During the "AT omen", the special zone type promotion lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and when the winning combination is won, the special zone type is changed to a higher type.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, when the "specialized zone preparation" becomes an AT win by AT lottery in "normal", "normal advantage", and "CZ", the number of precursor games in "AT precursor" is equal to the number of precursor games. When a game is played, or when the number of AT games becomes 0 while the AT stock is 1 or more in "AT", the transition occurs. In "specialized zone preparation", the special zone start lottery at the time of winning the normal rip ("F_normal rip 1" "F_normal rip 2") or the special rip ("F_special rip 1" "F_special rip 2") Is executed, and if it wins, it shifts from the "specialized zone preparation" to the "specialized zone" state. In addition, in the "specialized zone preparation", the lottery for adding the number of games is executed according to the winning combination, and if the winning is won, the winning result is added to the result of the lottery for adding the number of games performed in the special zone. ..

In addition, in "specialized zone preparation", other processing such as ceiling control is performed. In ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 grants AT stock when the number of times "off" is determined as an internal winning combination in "specialized zone preparation" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling), and also " When the number of continuous games of "specialized zone preparation" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling), the highest type (specialized zone 4) is determined as the type of specialized zone. In the present embodiment, the number of games that determines the duration of AT is determined by the special zone, and when the number of AT games becomes 0 and there is AT stock, the special zone is used. The transition is made again, and the number of AT games for the stock is determined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the stock of the AT and the stock of the specialized zone are the same. In the present embodiment, when the AT lottery performed in various states is won, the stock of AT (specialized zone) is given, and when the AT (specialized zone stock lottery) performed in various states is won, AT ( Special zone) stock is granted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "specialized zone" shifts when it is started by the special zone start lottery in the "specialized zone preparation". In the "specialized zone", the lottery for adding the number of games and the lottery for ending the special zone are executed, and the number of games determined in the lottery for adding the number of games is the number of AT games before the end of the special zone end lottery. Is added as. In addition, the "specialized zone" includes a plurality of specialized zones with different expectations for adding the number of games, such as "specialized zone 1", "specialized zone 2", "specialized zone 3", and "specialized zone 4". .. As for the degree of expectation for adding the number of games, "specialized zone 4" is the highest, "specialized zone 3" is the next highest, "specialized zone 2" is the next highest, and "specialized zone 1" is the lowest. The type of special zone is basically determined at the time of winning the stock of AT (special zone), and may be promoted according to the winning combination in "special zone preparation".

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "AT" shifts to the "specialized zone" when it is terminated by the special zone end lottery. The duration of "AT" is managed by the number of games, and when the number of remaining games becomes 0 without stock of AT (specialized zone) (more specifically, it is not won in the final additional lottery). (In case of) quit and move to "normal". In "AT", the CZ lottery during AT is executed, and when the lottery is won, the state shifts from "AT" to "CZ during AT". Further, in "AT", a special zone stock lottery is executed, and if the lottery is won, the stock of the special zone is given.

Here, the "AT" has an AT mode in which the expected degree of stocking in the specialized zone such as "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", and "high accuracy C" is different. The AT mode is set by the initial AT mode lottery executed at the start of "AT" (at the time of transition from "specialized zone" to "AT"), and then executed during "AT". It is transferred by the AT mode transition lottery.

Further, in the "AT", lottery processing such as history lottery and final addition lottery, and other processing such as ceiling control are performed. The history lottery is a process of determining whether or not to grant a privilege according to the number of times the winning combination is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game, and the details will be described later in FIGS. 186 and 187. In addition, the final additional lottery is a lottery process performed when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 when there is no AT stock, and in the case of winning, there are 3 AT (specialized zone) stocks or As a result of giving 5 pieces, the ball ejection state shifts to "specialized zone preparation". On the other hand, in the case of non-winning in the final additional lottery, the advantageous section ends with the end of AT, and the ball ejection state shifts to "normal". Further, in the ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 grants the stock of AT (specialized zone) when the number of times that "off" is determined as the internal winning combination in "AT" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling). Further, when the number of continuous games of "AT" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling), the ball ejection state shifts from "AT" to "AT in CZ".

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "AT-in-AT CZ" shifts to the AT-in-CZ winning in the "AT". "AT in CZ" is a chance zone (CZ) in which the stock of the special zone is relatively easy to win, and continues for any period of 5, 10, or 15 games. In "AT in CZ", the special zone stock lottery is executed, and if the lottery is won, the stock of the special zone is given. Even if the special zone stock lottery is won, the "AT middle CZ" will continue until the specified number of games (5, 10, 15 G) has elapsed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special zone stock lottery may be won a plurality of times during "AT in CZ", and in this case, a plurality of special zone stocks are given.

Further, in "AT in CZ", other processing such as ceiling control is performed. In the ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 grants the stock of the special zone when the number of times that "off" is determined as the internal winning combination in the "AT middle CZ" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling).

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "special AT" shifts when the black BAR wins when the fixed combination is valid. The black BAR means "F_black BAR lip". In the present embodiment, the fixed combination is controlled to be valid / invalid according to the ball ejection state when the fixed combination is determined as the winning combination. As shown in FIG. 180, in the ball ejection state "normal", "normal advantage", "CZ precursor", "AT precursor", and "CZ", the fixed combination is effective, and the ball ejection state "special zone", "special AT", and " In "Ending", the fixed role is invalid. In addition, in the ball ejection state "specialized zone preparation", "AT", and "AT in CZ", the fixed combination is conditionally effective, but this point will be described later.

In the present embodiment, "F_black BAR lip", "F_W matching lip", "F_red BAR lip", and "F_purple 7 lip" are provided as definite combinations. If the fixed combination is valid, the corresponding privilege is granted, and if the fixed combination is invalid, the corresponding privilege is not granted. In addition, the fixed combination is associated with a combination of unique symbols and a combination of general-purpose symbols (TL lip) that is commonly used with other replay combinations. If the fixed combination is invalid, the combination is associated with each other. , The combination of general-purpose symbols is displayed As a result of notifying the pressing order, the combination of general-purpose symbols is displayed. On the other hand, when the fixed combination is valid, the push order in which the unique combination of symbols is displayed is notified (or no push order is notified), and as a result, when the "F_black BAR lip" is won, "black" is given. The combination of the "BAR rip" symbols can be displayed, and the combination of the "W-matched rip" symbols can be displayed when the "F_W-matched rip" is won, and the "red BAR rip" symbol can be displayed when the "F_red BAR rip" is won. Can be displayed, and when the "F_purple 7 rip" is won, the combination of the "purple 7 rip" symbols can be displayed.

When the fixed combination is valid and the "F_black BAR lip" is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state to the "special AT". In the "special AT", other processing such as ceiling control is performed. In the ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 grants the stock of the special zone when the number of times that the "outside" is determined as the internal winning combination in the "special AT" reaches the specified number of times (ceiling).

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the "ending" shifts when the ending transition condition is satisfied. The ending transition condition is arbitrary. For example, when it is determined that the limiter of the advantageous section (game number limiter or number limiter) is reached from the number of remaining games of AT or the number of remaining stock of AT, the ending transition is performed. The conditions may be met. The "ending" continues until the limiter of the advantageous section is reached.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment having such specifications, the ball ejection state "normal" and "normal advantage" are normal gaming states (non-notifying states) that are disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the ball ejection states "specialized zone", "AT", "special AT", and "ending" are game states (notification states) that are advantageous for the player. The ball ejection state "AT precursor" and "specialized zone preparation" are states in which the transition to "AT" has been confirmed, and are the precursor period and preparation period of the gaming state that are advantageous for the player. Further, the ball-out state "CZ" is a chance zone in which the player has a high expectation of transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player, and the ball-out state "CZ precursor" is a precursor period of the chance zone. In addition, the ball ejection state "AT during CZ" is a chance zone performed during AT. In addition, in the ball ejection state "AT in CZ", the navigation of the pushing order is not performed.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination and lottery type]
Subsequently, FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the lottery type. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery based on the internal winning combination, but if the lottery result is provided for each combination, the amount of data required for one lottery is enormous. Become. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of combinations are first grouped into a ball ejection flag, a lottery type is determined based on the ball ejection flag, and various lottery is performed based on the determined lottery type. For example, "F_Batting order 1 bell A" is grouped into a ball ejection flag "Batting order bell (No. 5)", and based on this ball ejection flag "Batting order bell", No. The "batting order bell" of 1 is decided. Then, various lottery is performed with reference to this lottery type.

The fixed combination belongs to the lottery type "fake / fixed combination" in the lottery process, and the lottery type "fake / fixed combination" basically results in a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the lottery process according to the fixed combination is basically a disadvantageous result, but when the fixed combination is valid, the process that does not depend on the lottery (processing at the time of winning the fixed combination) is performed for the player. Control to be in an advantageous state.

Specifically, when the definite combination "F_purple 7 lip", "F_red BAR lip", and "F_W matching lip" are valid, the main control circuit 91 grants one AT (specialized zone) stock. When the fixed combination "F_Black BAR Lip" is valid, 3 or 5 AT (specialized zone) stocks are given. Then, as a result of the stock of the AT (specialized zone) being given, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state to "AT precursor", "specialized zone preparation", or the like.

The fixed roles "F_Purple 7 Lip", "F_Red BAR Lip", and "F_W Matching Lip" have the same number of AT (specialized zone) stocks, but the types of specialized zones are different. "F_W Matching Lip" gives the stock of the most advantageous special zone, "F_Red BAR Lip" gives the stock of the next advantageous special zone, and "F_Purple 7 Lip" gives the stock of the next advantageous special zone. Grant zone stock.

Therefore, among the fixed roles, "F_Black BAR Lip" that grants multiple stocks is the role that grants the largest privilege, and "F_W Matching Lip" that grants stock in the advantageous specialized zone is the next largest privilege. "F_Red BAR Lip" is the role that grants the next most advantageous special zone stock, and the next most advantageous special zone stock is granted. "F_Purple 7 Lip" is the role that gives the smallest privilege.

[Navigation type in each state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 182, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the navigation type set by the main control circuit 91 at the time of winning the push order combination will be described. In the figure, the navigation type "1" is the navigation type that notifies the player of batting order 1 (left, middle, right), and the navigation type "2" is the batting order 2 (left, right, middle) to the player. The navigation type to notify, the navigation type "3" is the navigation type to notify the player of batting order 3 (middle left and right), and the navigation type "4" is the batting order 4 (middle right left) to the player. The navigation type to notify, the navigation type "5" is the navigation type to notify the player of batting order 5 (right, middle, left), and the navigation type "6" is the batting order 6 (right, middle, left) to the player. This is the type of navigation to be notified. Further, in the figure, "state 1" refers to the case where the fixed combination is "valid" and the push order instruction is "present", and "state 2" means the case where the fixed combination is "invalid" and the push order instruction is "present". To say.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the navigation type for "F_purple 7 fake 1 (No. 7)" to "F_black BAR lip (No. 13)" in "state 2" is "5". "Or" 6 "is specified, but it is not limited to this, and in" state 2 (fixed combination "invalid"), it is possible to notify the push order in which the combination of the symbols of "TL lip" is displayed. All you need is.

Here, as described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the push order small combination is a 6-choice combination of 6-choice push order, while the replay combination is a 3-choice combination of 3 choices of push order. As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the push order is notified to the replay combination which is the 3-choice combination, the push order of 6 options (navigation type "5" or "navigation type" 5 "or" 6 ”) is notified. The navigation control of the three-choice combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184.

[Navigation control of 3 choices]
First, a comparative example of this control will be described with reference to FIG. 183. In conventional AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball output). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. Here, since the navigation performed under the control of the sub side has a meaning as a production, the navigation content on the sub side may not match the navigation content on the main side. For example, in a specification having a three-choice push order combination that requires only the first stop operation and a six-choice push order combination that requires the first stop operation and the second stop operation, when the three-choice push order combination is won. On the main side, navigation is performed according to the push order of 3 choices, while on the sub side, in order to make it difficult to tell whether it is a push order of 6 choices or a push order of 3 choices, 6 choices are intentionally selected. There were times when navigation was performed according to the order of pressing.
The comparative example shown in FIG. 183 relates to a navigation control in which the navigation contents on the main side and the navigation contents on the sub side do not match.

FIGS. 183 (A) and 183 (a) are diagrams showing the navigation types on the main side in the comparative example. As shown in the figure, in the comparative example, different navigation types are set for the 3-choice push-order navigation and the 6-choice push-order navigation. Specifically, the navigation type "1" is set for the left 1st, which means that the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L, and the navigation type "4" is set for the left middle right push order. Is set.

Subsequently, FIGS. 183 (A) and 183 (b) are diagrams showing an example of navigation performed at the time of winning the 6-choice combination in which the correct pressing order in the comparative example is right and left. As shown in the figure, in such a case, on the main side, the navigation type "8" corresponding to the middle right and left is displayed on the instruction monitor, and on the sub side, the right and left on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). Display the push order of the inside. As described above, in the comparative example, in the navigation at the time of winning the 6-choice combination, the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side match.

Subsequently, FIGS. 183 (A) and 183 (c) are diagrams showing an example of navigation performed at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct pressing order in the comparative example is the right 1st. As shown in the figure, in such a case, on the main side, "3", which is a navigation type corresponding to the right 1st, is displayed on the instruction monitor. At this time, if the sub side also only navigates the three-choice push order, the main side navigation and the sub-side navigation match, but when navigating the six-choice push order in a dramatic manner, On the sub side, the liquid crystal display (display unit 100) displays the right, middle, and left push orders, which are the six-choice push orders that satisfy the right 1st. As a result, the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side do not match.

Subsequently, FIG. 184 (B) is a diagram showing the navigation control at the time of winning the three-choice combination in this control. In this control, the navigation content on the main side and the navigation content on the sub side are controlled to match when the three-choice combination is won. In this control, the navigation contents on the main side and the navigation contents on the sub side are matched by navigating the originally unnecessary information on the main side as well, and the control example shown below is only an example. That is, in the example shown below, the content to be navigated is related to the push order, but the content to be navigated is not limited to the push order, and may be to navigate the so-called push timing (design to be aimed at). As an example, navigation is performed in a combination in which a predetermined symbol is aimed at the left reel and an arbitrary symbol may be used for other reels, and a combination in which a predetermined symbol is aimed at the left reel and the middle reel. The contents may be matched. Further, regarding the push order, the push order required for the three-choice combination may be a second stop operation or a third stop operation instead of the first stop operation. As an example, a three-choice combination that requires that the second stop operation is for a predetermined reel, and a six-choice combination that requires that all the orders from the first stop operation to the third stop operation are appropriate. In, the contents to be navigated may be matched.

FIGS. 184 (B) and 184 (a) are diagrams showing the navigation type on the main side in this control. As shown in the figure, in this control, the navigation types related to the three-choice push order are not provided, and only the navigation types related to the six-choice push order are provided.

Subsequently, FIGS. 184 (B) and 184 (b) are diagrams showing an example of navigation performed at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct pressing order in this control is the right 1st. When navigating at the time of winning the three-choice combination in this control, the main control circuit 91 acquires a navigation type that matches the three-choice push order from the navigation types provided for the six-choice push order. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 selects the navigation type "1" corresponding to the left middle right or the navigation type "2" corresponding to the left middle right at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the left 1st order. At the time of winning the 3 choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the middle 1st order, the navigation type "3" corresponding to the middle left and right or the navigation type "4" corresponding to the middle right left is acquired, and the correct answer is pushed in the right order. At the time of winning the 1st three-choice combination, the navigation type "5" corresponding to the middle right and left or the navigation type "6" corresponding to the middle right and left is acquired. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs a navigation type change lottery at the time of winning the three-choice combination, and when the lottery is won, one of the navigation types matching the three-choice pressing order. (Even) navigation type is acquired, and if it is not won, the other (odd) navigation type of the navigation types matching the three-choice pressing order is acquired.

As a result, if the navigation type "5" is acquired at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the right 1st order, the main side displays the navigation type "5" corresponding to the middle right and left on the instruction monitor. On the sub side, the liquid crystal display (display unit 100) displays the pressing order in the middle right and left. Similarly, if the navigation type "6" is acquired at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the right 1st order, the main side displays the navigation type "6" corresponding to the right, middle, and left on the instruction monitor. On the sub side, the liquid crystal display (display unit 100) displays the pressing order of right, middle, and left. As a result, in this control, it is possible to match the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side while performing the navigation of 6 choices in a dramatic manner when the 3-choice combination is won.

Subsequently, a specification example using this control will be described. Depending on the pachislot machine, as control of the push order (selection), the RT state may be changed to a low RT at the time of incorrect answer, or the player may be advantageous / disadvantageous in the production such as battle production. As an example, even if the answer is incorrect for the 3-choice combination, the fallout that shifts the RT state to low RT is not displayed, but the 6-choice combination is for the case where the answer is incorrect in the push order. In some cases, a fall-out roll may be displayed. In addition, for example, in a pachislot machine in which a 3-choice role is a replay and a 6-choice role is a push order bell, in a predetermined production such as a battle production, if the replay is won, the result (defense) is disadvantageous for the player, and the bell is Winning may have a favorable result (attack) for the player.

In such a specification, in order to prevent the player from knowing whether the winning combination is a 3-choice role or a 6-choice role, the sub-side should perform a 6-choice navigation in a dramatic manner when the winning combination is won. However, in the control as in the comparative example, the expert can grasp whether the winning combination is a 3-choice role or a 6-choice role from the navigation contents on the main side. On the other hand, according to this control, the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side match, so even an expert can determine whether the winning combination is a 3-choice role or a 6-choice role. I can't figure it out. As a result, for example, in the case of the fall control specification in the RT state, since the possibility of falling is not known from the navigation type, the player will play the game with a sense of tension so as not to make a navigation mistake. , In the case of the advantageous / disadvantageous specifications of the production, since the advantage (attack) / disadvantage (defense) is not known from the navigation type, the game will be played while maintaining the expectation until the end, compared to the comparative example. The fun of the game is improved.

[Flow of games in advantageous section]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 185, the flow of the game in the advantageous section in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 (A) is a diagram for explaining the control of the special mode of the advantageous section, and FIG. 185 (B) is a diagram for explaining the end control which is usually advantageous.

(Special mode control)
First, the control of the special mode will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (A). The special mode is a mode in which various lottery and the like are disadvantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, when the special mode is ON, AT (specialized zone stock) lottery, CZ lottery, and various mode transitions are made. The probability of winning a favorable result for the player in a lottery or the like is low (or there is no winning), and the probability of navigating the pushing order when winning the pushing order role is low (or not navigating).

As shown in FIGS. 185 (A) and 185 (a), the main control circuit 91 performs a transition lottery to an advantageous section in the ball ejection state "normal" (that is, a normal section), and it is advantageous to win in this transition lottery. The game state is transferred to the section. The main control circuit 91 sets the special mode to ON when the gaming state is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, and then, when the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD lip" is displayed in the advantageous section, the special mode is set. Switch the mode to OFF. That is, the condition for turning on the special mode is that the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the condition for turning off the special mode is that the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD lip" is displayed. ..

Subsequently, a control example of the special mode will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (b). As shown in the figure, the special mode is not used in the "normal" state, and the special mode is set to ON when shifting from the "normal (normal section)" to the advantageous section. When a combination other than the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section, the combination of symbols related to the replay is not displayed, so that the special mode is kept ON. After that, when the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section and the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed, the special mode is updated to OFF, and thereafter it is maintained as OFF.

Subsequently, FIG. 185 (c) is an additional explanatory diagram of a control example of the special mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the "XD rip" is not displayed when the replay combination is won, and the combination of symbols related to the replay other than the "XD rip" is always displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination is won after shifting to the advantageous section, the special mode is updated to OFF. In this regard, as described above, "XD rip" may be displayed at the time of winning the replay role, and "XD rip" may be displayed in a specific RT state. In the BET number of, "XD lip" may be displayed. The figure shown in FIG. 185 (c) is a control example of the special mode in the specification that "XD lip" can be displayed at the time of winning the replay combination.

As shown in the figure, the special mode is not used in the "normal" state, and the special mode is set to ON when shifting from the "normal (normal section)" to the advantageous section. When a combination other than the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section, the combination of symbols related to the replay is not displayed, so that the special mode is kept ON. Further, even when the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section, the special mode is kept ON when the combination of symbols related to "XD lip" is displayed. After that, when the replay combination is determined as the winning combination in the advantageous section and the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed, the special mode is updated to OFF, and thereafter it is maintained as OFF.

Here, in the present embodiment, the notification state (specialized zone or AT) is started after the replay combination is won. More specifically, in the special zone preparation, the special zone is started when the special zone start lottery is won, but this special zone start lottery is when the replay role (normal lip or special lip) is won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special mode is always updated to OFF at the timing when the notification state is started, and as a result, the navigation probability becomes high (details are not controlled so that the navigation probability becomes low). In this regard, in the specification that can display "XD rip" at the time of winning the replay role (normal rip or special rip), the special mode may remain ON even at the timing when the notification state is started. In such a case, the navigation probability remains low even in the notification state. According to such a specification, since the navigation probability immediately after the start of the notification state can be made different, it is possible to give a sharp feeling to the ball.

Of course, it is also possible to control so as not to lower the navigation probability during the notification state by performing the special zone start lottery according to the combination of the displayed symbols instead of performing according to the winning combination. .. Specifically, when displaying the combination of symbols related to "XD rip" that keeps the special mode ON, the combination of symbols related to replay other than "XD rip" is displayed without performing the special zone start lottery. Sometimes, by performing a special zone start lottery, it is possible to control so as not to lower the navigation probability during the notification state.

It should be noted that the control of the special mode may be performed not based on the combination of the displayed symbols, but based on other conditions. As an example, the main control circuit 91 may update the special mode to OFF when the number of games played after the special mode is turned ON reaches a predetermined number of times. Further, the main control circuit 91 may control the special mode by combining the number of games and the combination of symbols. For example, the special mode is displayed when the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed. May be updated to OFF, and the special mode may be updated to OFF even when a predetermined number of games are played without displaying a combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip". Further, the main control circuit 91 may update the special mode to OFF when a predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination instead of the combination of the displayed symbols. Further, the main control circuit 91 may control the special mode by combining the winning combination, the number of games played, and the combination of symbols. In this case, the conditions to be combined may be all conditions or any two conditions. Further, the predetermined combination is not limited to the replay combination, and may include a small combination related to the payout of medals and a bonus combination related to the operation of the bonus. Further, the combination of the displayed symbols is not limited to the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination, and may be the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small combination or the bonus combination.

(Usually advantageous end control)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 185 (B), the normally advantageous termination control will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the staying period in the “normal” state of paying balls is short, and in the normal game, many periods are stayed in the “normally advantageous” state. Here, "normal advantage" is an advantageous section, and restrictions such as the number of games limiter are applied. Therefore, during a normal game, the "normal advantage" is changed to "normal" at regular intervals, and then immediately changed to "normal advantage". Migrate. This transition from "normal advantage" to "normal" at regular intervals is performed by temporary ceiling control and ceiling control.

As shown in FIGS. 185 (B) and 185 (a), the temporary ceiling control is performed when the "normal advantage" continues for 400 games. In the temporary ceiling control, the main control circuit 91 performs a ceiling benefit lottery when the "normal advantage" continues for 400 games. When the ceiling benefit lottery ends (lottery result "fall"), the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state from "normal advantage" to "normal". In addition, when it is decided to shift the CZ mode to "high accuracy A" in the ceiling benefit lottery (lottery result "CZ mode high accuracy A"), the CZ mode is maintained while the ball ejection state is maintained at "normal advantage". To "High accuracy A". Further, when the AT winning is determined in the ceiling benefit lottery (lottery result "AT winning"), the main control circuit 91 grants one stock of AT (specialized zone) and makes the ball ejection state "normally advantageous". To shift from "AT precursor". As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the "normal advantage", an opportunity such as the end of the advantageous section, the chance of CZ, or the AT winning comes every 400 games.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), the ceiling control is performed when the "normal advantage" continues for 500 games, and the main control circuit 91 is in a ball ejection state when the "normal advantage" continues for 500 games. From "normal advantage" to "normal". As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the advantageous section always ends every 500 games during the "normal advantage".

In the present embodiment, the temporary ceiling control and the ceiling control are performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage", but the opportunity to perform the temporary ceiling control and ceiling control is the number of continuous games of "normal advantage". Instead, the number of continuous games in the ball-out state other than the state that is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section may be used. That is, the temporary ceiling control and the ceiling control may be performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage", "CZ omen", and "CZ". In this case, the transition to the ball ejection state "normal" may be made only from the "normal advantage", and the transition (fall) to the "normal" from the "CZ precursor" or "CZ" may be made. Further, only one of the temporary ceiling control and the ceiling control is performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage", "CZ precursor" and "CZ", and the other is the continuation of "normal advantage". It may be performed based on the number of games. As an example, ceiling control should be performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage", "CZ precursor" and "CZ", and temporary ceiling control should be performed based on the number of continuous games of "normal advantage". May be.

[Summary of history lottery]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, an outline of the history lottery in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 186 (A), the types of history combinations that trigger the history lottery will be described. The main control circuit 91 manages the history information of the winning combination related to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination for a predetermined number of games (5 games). In other words, the main control circuit 91 stores the history information of the winning combination regarding the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination for a predetermined number of games (5 games).

(Type of history role)
As shown in FIGS. 186 (A) and 186 (a), in the history lottery in "normal advantage", "replay" and "rare role" are provided as history combinations. The history role "replay" in "normal advantage" includes normal rip, special rip, and chance rip. The normal lip is "F_normal lip 1", the special lip is "F_special lip 1" and "F_special lip 2", and the chance lip is "F_chance lip".

In addition, the history role "rare role" in "normal advantage" includes chance lip, fake lip (non-navigation), strong bell, medium chance, weak chance, and 15 bells. The chance lip is "F_chance lip", and the fake lip (non-navigation) is "F_purple 7 fake 1", "F_purple 7 fake 2", and "F_red BAR fake" when the push order navigation is not performed. , The strong bell is "F_strong bell", the medium chance is "F_XU bell lip", and the weak chance is "F_weak chance". In addition, 15 bells will be won by stopping operation in the correct push order at the time of winning "F_common bell 1" or "F_batting order 1 bell A" to "F_batting order 6 bell B". is there.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 186 (A) and 186 (b), in the history lottery in "AT", "replay", "rare role", and "missing" are provided as history roles. The history role "replay" in "AT" includes a normal lip, a special lip, a chance lip, a fake lip (navigation), and a fixed role (navigation). The normal rip is "F_normal rip 1", the special rip is "F_special rip 1" and "F_special rip 2", and the chance rip is "F_chance rip". In addition, the fake rip (navigation) is "F_purple 7 fake 1", "F_purple 7 fake 2", and "F_red BAR fake" when the push order navigation is performed, and the definite role (navigation) is the push order navigation. It is "F_purple 7 lip", "F_red BAR lip", "F_W matching lip", and "F_black BAR lip" when it is performed.

In addition, the history role "rare role" in "AT" includes chance lip, fake lip (non-navigation), strong bell, medium chance, and weak chance. The chance lip is "F_chance lip", and the fake lip (non-navigation) is "F_purple 7 fake 1", "F_purple 7 fake 2", and "F_red BAR fake" when the push order navigation is not performed. , The strong bell is "F_strong bell", the medium chance is "F_XU bell lip", and the weak chance is "F_weak chance".

In addition, the history combination "off" in "AT" includes out, normal lip 2, common one, and BB. The loss is determined as the internal winning combination, the normal lip 2 is "F_normal lip 2", the common one is "F_common one", and the BB is "F_BB1" to "F_BB3". Is.

(Contents of history lottery)
Subsequently, FIG. 186 (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the history lottery. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery according to the number of times the history combination is determined as the winning combination between predetermined games (between 5 games). Specifically, in the "normal advantage", the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery according to the number of consecutive wins of the history combination "replay" between predetermined games, and also determines the history. A history lottery is performed according to the number of rare roles (number) that the history role "rare role" has won between games. Further, in the "AT", the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery according to a replay (ream), a history lottery according to a rare combination (number), and a history combination "off" between predetermined games. The history lottery is performed according to the number of consecutive wins. In the present embodiment, the history combination "replay" and the history combination "missing" perform the history lottery according to the number of consecutive wins, but the number of consecutive wins is not the number of consecutive wins, but between predetermined games. The history lottery may be performed according to the number of times the game is won. Further, although the history combination "rare role" is supposed to perform the history lottery according to the number of times of winning between the predetermined games, the history combination may be performed according to the number of times of winning in succession.

In the history lottery according to the "normal advantage" rerepui (ream), the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (CZ lottery) and wins when the history combination "replay" wins three or more times in a row. In that case, the CZ is won and the gaming state is changed from "normal advantage" to "CZ precursor" or "CZ". In addition, the history lottery (CZ lottery) according to the rerepui (ream) is won with a predetermined probability when the history role "replay" is won three times in a row, and the history role "replay" is consecutive. Then, when you win 4 times or more, "4 or more rips", you must win.

Further, in the history lottery according to the rare combination (number) of "normal advantage", the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (AT lottery) when the history combination "rare combination" is won three times or more, and wins. If this happens, the game will be won and the game state will be changed from "normal advantage" to "AT precursor" or "specialized zone preparation". In addition, the history lottery (AT lottery) according to the rare role (number) is won with a predetermined probability when the history role "rare role" wins three during a predetermined game and "three rare roles", and the history role "rare role" When "rare role" wins 4 or more during a predetermined game, "rare role 4 or more" always wins. In addition, since the history role "rare role" of "normal advantage" includes 15 bells, the history lottery according to the rare role (number) of "normal advantage" is performed at the off-edge of the third stop operation. ..

Further, in the history lottery according to the rerepui (ream) of the "AT", the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (CZ lottery during AT) when the history combination "replay" is won three or more times in a row. If the player wins, the CZ is won during AT and the game state is changed from "AT" to "CZ during AT". In addition, the history lottery (CZ lottery during AT) according to the rerepui (ream) is won with a predetermined probability when the history role "replay" is won three times in a row, and the history role "replay" is won. Be sure to win when "4 or more rips" are won 4 times or more in a row.

Further, in the history lottery according to the rare role (number) of the "AT", the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (specialized zone stock lottery) when the history role "rare role" is won twice or more. , If you win, one stock of special zone will be given. The stock of the special zone to be granted is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be granted. In the history lottery (specialized zone stock lottery) according to the rare role (number), when the history role "rare role" wins two during a predetermined game and "two rare roles", the history role is won with a predetermined probability. When "rare role" wins 3 or more during a predetermined game, "rare role 3 or more" always wins.

Further, in the history lottery according to the loss (ream) of the "AT", the main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery (AT mode UP lottery) when the history combination "miss" wins four or more times in a row. If you win, the AT mode is promoted by one. The AT mode is "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", and "high accuracy C" in order from the lowest mode. In the history lottery (AT mode UP lottery) according to the lost role (ream), the history role "missing" is won four times in a row, and when the "missing four consecutive" is won, the history role "missing" is won with a predetermined probability. If you win 5 times in a row, you will win with a higher probability than when you win 5 consecutive times.

Here, referring to FIG. 186 (A), the chance lip is included in the history combination “replay” and also in the history combination “rare role”. In the present embodiment, in the main control circuit 91, when the chance lip is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game, the number of times the combination included in the history combination "replay" is determined as the winning combination and the history combination "rare". Add both the number of times the combination included in "role" is determined as the winning combination and the number of times.

Therefore, at the time of winning the chance lip, the lottery condition of the replay (ream) and the lottery condition of the rare role (number) may be satisfied at the same time. For example, the winning role 4 games ago is a role included in the history role "rare role", the winning role 3 games ago is a role included in the history role "rare role", and the winning role 2 games ago is history. If the winning role in the game is a chance lip, and the winning role in the previous game is a role included in the history role "replay", the winning role in the game is "3 rips" in the game. And "3 rare roles" are established at the same time. In such a case, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs all history lottery satisfying the lottery conditions. That is, the main control circuit 91 performs both a history lottery based on the "triple rip" and a history lottery based on the "three rare combinations". As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of history lottery can be performed by taking one opportunity of winning the chance lip. At this time, the main control circuit 91 can give the privilege corresponding to the winning history lottery, and when both of the plurality of history lottery are won, the privilege of both is given.

Subsequently, FIG. 187 (C) shows a display example of the winning history. The sub-control circuit 101 displays a history display window for five games on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). In this history display window, the history information of the winning combination for five games is displayed, and the old history information is replaced with the new history information for each game. As shown in the figure, the sub-control circuit 101 displays the history combination "replay" with a blue circle, and displays the history combination "rare role" with a jewel (white) or a jewel (red). Further, when the sub-control circuit 101 is a history combination "missing", the history combination "missing" is expressed by leaving the history display window corresponding to the game blank. The display of chance rips belonging to both the history role "replay" and the history role "rare role" is arbitrary. For example, the blue circle corresponding to the history role "replay" and the history role "rare role" are displayed. The jewel (white) or the jewel (red) may be alternately blink-displayed, only one of them may be displayed, or a unique display may be performed.

In addition, whether to display the jewel (white) or the jewel (red) at the time of the history role "rare role" is determined by lottery. This lottery is performed by the main control circuit 91 with reference to the AT_icon type lottery table of FIG. 209, and the sub-control circuit 101 displays a jewel (red) when the lottery is won and the sub-control circuit 101 displays a jewel (red) when the lottery is not won. Display the jewel (white). As shown in FIG. 187, when the jewel (red) is displayed (more specifically, when the lottery performed by the main control circuit 91 is won), the jewel (in other words, the jewel (in other words, the jewel) While (red) is displayed), the probability of winning the stock lottery in the special zone is higher than when the jewel (white) is displayed (see FIG. 210).

Subsequently, FIG. 187 (E) is a diagram showing a history lottery method. The main control circuit 91 performs the history lottery when the lottery condition of the history lottery is satisfied in the game. As shown in the figure, for example, the winning role four games ago is a role included in the history role "rare role", and the winning role two games ago is included in the history role "rare role". When the winning role of the game is a role included in the history role "rare role", the number of rare roles in the game is "3 rare roles". Therefore, in such a case, the main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery based on "three rare combinations".

On the other hand, the winning role of 4 games before is a role included in the history role "rare role", the winning role of 3 games before is included in the history role "rare role", and the winning role of 1 game before is included. If the role is included in the history role "rare role" and the winning role in this game is other than the role included in the history role "rare role", the number of rare roles in the predetermined game is three. In this game, the condition of "3 rare roles" is not satisfied. Therefore, in such a case, the main control circuit 91 does not perform the history lottery.

[Control using AT points]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 188, the control using the AT point in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the AT points are numerical information regarding the number of medals that can be paid out in a specific gaming state (difference number = number of payouts-number of inserts). It should be noted that the specific gaming state is a series of gaming states related to the notification state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and in the present embodiment, the ball ejection state "specialized zone preparation" and "special zone preparation" It means "Chemical zone", "AT", "CZ during AT", and "Special AT". The main control circuit 91 acquires game information in each game in these specific game states, and calculates AT points according to the acquired game information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188 (A), AT points are calculated by summing the accumulated points and possessed points. The accumulated points are numerical information regarding the total value of the number of medals granted so far in the above-mentioned specific gaming state, and each game in the specific gaming state (more specifically, the player in the specific gaming state). This is numerical information obtained by accumulating the number of medals to be paid out in this game in a game in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, the possession points are numerical information regarding the total value of the number of medals that can be granted in the specific game state described above, and in each game in the specific game state, the number of remaining games of AT and the AT (specialized zone). ) Is calculated according to the number of remaining stocks.

The main control circuit 91 acquires the winning combination as the game information in the game in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Then, the main control circuit 91 adds 24 points to the accumulated points when the winning combination of 15 cards is determined, and when the winning combination of 6 cards is determined, the cumulative points are added. Add 6 points to it. The 15-card combination is a combination in which 15 medals can be paid out at the time of winning. In this embodiment, "F_common bell 1", "F_strong bell", "F_batting order 1 bell A" to "F_batting order 6" "Bell B". In addition, the 6-card combination is a combination in which 6 medals can be paid out at the time of winning, and in this implementation system value, "F_common bell 2", "F_batting order 1 special A" to "F_batting order 6 special B" Say.

Here, if 15 medals are paid out in the 3BET game, the number of medals increases by 12 in the game, and if 6 medals are paid out in the 3BET game, the medals are increased in the game. Increase by 3 cards. Therefore, in the present embodiment, one medal is converted into two points (1 point = 0.5) to calculate AT points.

Further, the main control circuit 91 acquires the number of remaining games of AT and the number of remaining stocks of AT (specialized zone) in each game in a specific gaming state. Then, the main control circuit 91 adds 600 points for each remaining stock of AT (specialized zone), and adds 7 points for possession points for each remaining AT game. to add. In this embodiment, the expected value of medals to be paid out per game during AT is 3.5. Therefore, it can be said that the possession points set for each game remaining in the AT are points according to the expected value of the medals to be paid out per game during AT. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of additional games determined from each stock of the specialized zone is about 85 games. Therefore, the possession points set for each stock in the special zone are the number of additional games determined from each stock in the special zone and the expected value of medals to be paid out per game during AT. It can be said that the points correspond to (600 ≈ 85 × 7).

In this way, the accumulated points represent the actual number of medals actually paid out so far, and the possessed points represent the expected value of the number of medals that can be paid out in the future. The AT points are the sum of the accumulated points and the possessed points, and represent the number of medals that can be paid out in a specific gaming state.

The main control circuit 91 updates the AT points by updating the accumulated points and the possessed points in each game in a specific game state. For example, if one game is played during "AT", the number of remaining games of AT is reduced by 1, and as a result, the possessed points are reduced by 7 points, while the accumulated points are updated according to the winning combination in the game. That is, the expected value of the increase in medals per game (possessed points) is replaced with the actual value (cumulative points) of the number of medals actually paid out, and the AT points are updated. Further, for example, when the number of AT games is determined by consuming the stock in the state of the "specialized zone", the stock of the AT (specialized zone) is reduced by 1, while the remaining number of ATs is equal to the determined number of games. As the number of games increases, 600 points for one stock will decrease from the accumulated points, while the points possessed for the increased number of games will increase.

It is preferable that the AT points are not reported to the player. On the other hand, the AT points may be reported to the clerk of the amusement store. The method of notifying the AT point to the clerk of the game store is arbitrary, but for example, the inside of the game machine that can be confirmed with the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) of the pachislot machine 1 open. The value of the AT point may be displayed on the display unit of, and the value of the AT point can be displayed on the hall computer by transmitting the value of the AT point from the pachislot machine 1 to the hall computer of the amusement store. It may be identifiable. In addition, the information to be reported to the clerk of the amusement store may be AT points, cumulative points, possession points, or all of these. It may be a part of these. By notifying the amusement store side of the AT point in this way, it can be useful for detecting fraud. For example, if many medals are paid out even though the AT points (cumulative points) are small, it can be determined that there is a possibility of fraud.

Subsequently, FIGS. 188 (B) to 188 (E) show control examples using the calculated AT points. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the threshold values of the AT points used in the control using the AT points are all multiples of 256. Further, in the present embodiment, various controls are invalidated when the AT point exceeds the threshold value, but in the control using the AT point, the threshold value is set when the AT point exceeds the threshold value. The control may be more disadvantageous to the player than the case of less than, and is not necessarily invalidated. As an example, when the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the probability of performing control advantageous to the player is lower or the probability of performing control disadvantageous to the player is higher than when the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value (for example,). (The probability that a favorable lottery result will be obtained in a predetermined lottery is reduced).

(Definite combination control)
First, the fixed combination control using the AT point will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (B). As described above in FIG. 180, the fixed combination is conditionally valid in the ball ejection states "specialized zone preparation", "AT", and "AT in CZ". The fixed combination control described below relates to control of whether to enable or invalidate the fixed combination in the payout states "specialized zone preparation", "AT", and "CZ during AT".

As shown in the figure, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the threshold value of the AT point is set for each type of the fixed combination, and in the game in which the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the target fixed combination is determined as the winning combination. Even in such a case, the fixed combination becomes invalid. Further, in a game in which the AT point is less than the threshold value, when the target fixed combination is determined as the winning combination, an invalid lottery is performed using the common_fixed combination invalid lottery table shown in FIG. When "valid" is determined, the fixed combination becomes valid, and when "invalid" is determined as a result of the lottery, the fixed combination becomes invalid.

As described above, when the fixed combination is invalid, the privilege corresponding to the fixed combination is not given, and as a result of navigating the push order of right / left middle or right middle left, a general-purpose symbol combination ( TL Lip) is displayed. In addition, when the fixed combination is valid, the privilege corresponding to the fixed combination is given, and the push order other than the right 1st is navigated (or no push order is navigated), and as a result, it is unique to the fixed combination. The combination of symbols is displayed.

Here, as shown in the figure, the threshold value of the AT points to be invalidated is gradually increased based on the size of the privilege to be granted. That is, the lowest threshold is set for the definite role "F_black BAR lip" that gives the largest privilege, and it is easily disabled, while the definite role "purple 7 lip" that gives the smallest benefit On the other hand, the highest threshold value is set, and it is difficult to be invalidated and controlled. As a result, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if a large number of medals are paid out during AT or the like, or if a large number of medals can be expected to be paid out in the future from the number of remaining games and the number of remaining stocks, it is confirmed. The role is likely to be invalid.

(Final addition control)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 188 (C), the final addition control using the AT point will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of remaining games of AT becomes 0 (at the end of AT) when there is no stock of AT, the final addition lottery is performed, and when the winning is won, AT (special feature). Grant 3 or 5 stocks of (Chemical Zone). The final addition control described below relates to control of whether or not the final addition lottery is performed at the end of the AT.

As shown in the figure, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the threshold value of the AT point is set, and if the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value at the end of AT, the final addition is not performed (the final addition lottery itself is performed). Not performed). On the other hand, if the AT point is less than the threshold value at the end of AT, the final addition lottery using the AT_final addition lottery table shown in FIG. 213 is performed, and when "winning" is determined as the lottery result of this lottery, The final addition is performed, and if "non-winning" is determined as a result of the lottery, the final addition is not performed.

(Control of various lottery during AT)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 188 (D), control regarding various lottery during AT using AT points will be described. In the present embodiment, in a specific gaming state such as AT, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery. The control of various lottery during AT described below relates to the control of whether or not to perform these various lottery. In the following description, as various lottery to enable / disable, the stock lottery of the special zone during AT using the AT_specialized zone stock lottery table shown in FIG. 210 and the AT_icon type lottery shown in FIG. 209. The target is a lottery for whether or not to display the jewel (red) when the history role "rare role" using the table is won, but other lottery may be valid / invalid.

As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AT point type is associated with each AT point threshold value, and when the AT point is less than 768 points, "type 0" is set as the AT point type. When the points are 768 points or more and less than 1280 points, "type 1" is associated as the AT point type, and when the points are 1280 points or more and less than 2560 points, "type 2" is associated as the AT point type. If the number of points is 2560 points or more, "type 3" is associated as the AT point type.

The main control circuit 91 performs an invalid lottery using the common_lottery invalid lottery table shown in FIG. 218 according to the AT point type in each game in a specific game state such as AT, and as a result of the lottery, " When "valid" is determined, the various lottery described above is valid (lottery is performed), and when "invalid" is determined as a result of the lottery, the various lottery described above is invalidated (lottery is not performed). As shown in the figure and FIG. 218 described later, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower the AT point, the easier it is to determine "valid" in the invalid lottery, and the higher the AT point, the more "invalid" is determined in the invalid lottery. Easy to do.

As mentioned above, if it is decided to display the jewel (red) at the time of winning the history role "rare role", the probability of winning the stock lottery in the special zone during the subsequent predetermined game is the jewel. It will be higher than when (white) is displayed. Therefore, if it is decided to display the jewel (red) at the time of winning the history combination "rare role", the invalid lottery based on the AT points may not be performed during the subsequent predetermined game.

(Control of CZ scenario lottery type during AT)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 188 (E), control regarding the scenario lottery type of CZ during AT using AT points will be described. In the present embodiment, the state of "CZ during AT" is managed according to the scenario, and the degree of advantage differs depending on the scenario. The control of the scenario lottery type of the CZ during AT is a control in which the degree of advantage of the scenario to be drawn differs according to the AT point.

As shown in the figure, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the scenario lottery type is associated with each AT point threshold value, and when the AT point is less than 768 points, "type 0" is set as the scenario lottery type. If it is associated with 768 points or more and less than 1280 points, "type 1" is associated as the scenario lottery type, and if it is 1280 points or more and less than 2560 points, "type 2" is associated as the scenario lottery type. If the number of points is 2560 points or more, "type 3" is associated with the scenario lottery type.

At the start of the AT-in-AT CZ, the main control circuit 91 refers to the AT-in-AT CZ_scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 214 (A) to perform a scenario lottery based on the scenario lottery type. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the scenario lottery type "type 0" is most likely to determine a scenario advantageous to the player, and the scenario lottery type "type 1" is next to the scenario advantageous to the player. It is easy to determine, and in the scenario lottery type "type 2", the scenario advantageous to the player is easily determined next, and in the scenario lottery type "type 3", the scenario advantageous to the player is the most difficult to determine. In other words, in the present embodiment, the lower the AT point, the easier it is to determine an advantageous scenario, and the higher the AT point, the more difficult it is to determine an advantageous scenario.

[AT point management method]
Subsequently, a method of managing AT points in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 189. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 is provided with a counter for counting AT points. As shown in FIG. 189 (A), the counter for the AT point is a counter composed of two bytes, a high-order byte (1 byte) and a low-order byte (1 byte).

In the upper byte, a value that is an integral multiple of 256 is counted, and in the lower byte, a fractional part value (0 to 255) that cannot be counted by the integer multiple of the AT points is counted. As shown in FIG. 189 (B), for example, when the AT point is 256 points, the upper byte counts "1" and the lower byte counts "0", and as a result, the upper byte "01" in hexadecimal. It can be represented by "100H" of the lower byte "00". Similarly, when the AT point is 257 points, it can be represented by "101H" of the high-order byte "01" and the low-order byte "01", and when the AT point is 292 points, the high-order byte "01". It can be represented by "124H" of the lower byte "24" of "01", and can be represented by "214H" of the upper byte "02" and the lower byte "14" when the AT point is 532 points.

Subsequently, FIG. 189 (C) is a diagram showing a threshold value used for control using the AT point. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a multiple of 256 is used as the threshold value of the AT point. When a multiple of 256 is used as the threshold value in this way, as shown in the figure, the lower byte is always "00", so it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or higher than the threshold value by comparing the values of the upper byte. And the value of the lower byte is not required for the threshold value.

For example, when 3072 points are used as the threshold value, the threshold value can be represented by "C00H" of the upper byte "0C" and the lower byte "00", and when the upper byte of the AT point counter is "0C" or more, , It can be determined that the value is equal to or higher than the threshold value regardless of the value of the lower byte, and if the upper byte of the AT point counter is less than "0C", it is less than the threshold value regardless of the value of the lower byte. It can be determined that there is.

Similarly, when 2048 points are used as the threshold value, the threshold value can be represented by "800H" of the upper byte "08" and the lower byte "00", and when 1792 points are used as the threshold value, the threshold value is higher. Byte "07" can be represented by "700H" of lower byte "00", and when 768 points are used as the threshold value, the threshold value is represented by "300H" of upper byte "03" and lower byte "00". Can be done. Then, by comparing the threshold value (only the upper byte) with the upper byte of the counter for the AT point, it is possible to determine whether or not the threshold value is equal to or higher than the threshold value.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, 2-byte data is used as the counter for the AT point, while only 1-byte data is used as the threshold value, and the upper byte of the counter for the AT point is used. By comparing the value with the value of 1 byte of the threshold value, the threshold value can be controlled with respect to the AT point.

As an example, FIG. 189 (D) shows an example of threshold control when the AT point is 2000 points. When the AT point is 2000 points, the value of the counter for the 2-byte AT point is "7D0H" of the upper byte "07" and the lower byte "D0". For example, when comparing with the threshold value of 3072 points, the threshold value can be represented by "0CH" of only 1 byte. Therefore, the threshold value "0CH" is compared with the upper byte "07H" of the counter for AT points and 2000. The point can be determined to be less than the threshold (3072). Similarly, when compared with the threshold value of 1792 points, the threshold value can be represented by "07H" having only one byte. Therefore, the threshold value "07H" is compared with the upper byte "07H" of the counter for AT points. It can be determined that 2000 points is equal to or higher than the threshold value (1792).

[Various data tables used to control the ball ejection state]
Next, the configurations of various data tables used in controlling the ball ejection state will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

[Normal_Advantageous section transition lottery table]
First, the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 190. The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing an advantageous section transition lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal" state (normal section). The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the advantageous section transition lottery for each lottery type. When the "non-winning" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normal" state without shifting the ball ejection state. Further, when the "normal advantage" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal" to "normal advantage", and at the same time, the normal_initial stage shown in FIG. Normal mode Refer to the lottery table to determine the normal mode and set it as the initial value of the normal mode.

In addition, when the "AT precursor" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal" to "AT precursor", and at the same time, the AT (specialized zone) Grant one stock. The number of stocks to be given is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be given. At this time, the main control circuit 91 also determines the type of the assigned specialized zone stock by referring to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216. Further, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets the number of precursor games of "AT precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

In the figure, in the advantageous section transition lottery based on the lottery type "fake / fixed combination", the probability of winning the "normal advantage" with a high probability and the probability of winning the "AT precursor" is extremely low. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery process according to the fixed combination is basically a disadvantageous result, but when the fixed combination is valid, the process is not based on the lottery (at the time of winning the fixed combination). This is because the processing) is controlled so as to be in an advantageous state for the player.

[Normal_Initial normal mode lottery table]
Subsequently, the normal_initial normal mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 191. The normal_initial normal mode lottery table is referred to when the "normal advantage" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery, and is used for the initial normal mode lottery that determines the initial value of the normal mode according to the internal winning combination (lottery type). Be done. The normal_initial normal mode lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the initial normal mode lottery for each lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets the normal mode determined as a result of the lottery as the initial value of the "normal advantage" normal mode for shifting to the next game.

[Normal advantage_CZ mode transition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 192, the normally advantageous_CZ mode transition lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_CZ mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a CZ mode transition lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal advantage" state. The usually advantageous_CZ mode transition lottery table defines the lottery value information for the migration destination CZ mode for each of the migration source (current) CZ mode and lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets the CZ mode determined as the lottery result as the CZ mode of the next game.

[Normal advantage_CZ lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 193, a normally advantageous_CZ lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_CZ lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a transition lottery to CZ based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal advantage" state. The usually advantageous_CZ lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery to CZ for each current CZ mode and lottery type. When the "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normal advantage" without shifting the payout state, and when the "winning" is determined as the lottery result. Shifts the payout state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "CZ precursor", and determines and sets the number of precursor games of "CZ precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

[Normal advantage_Normal mode transition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 194, the normal advantage_normal mode transition lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_normal mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a normal mode transition lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal advantage" state. The normal advantage_normal mode transition lottery table defines the lottery value information for the normal mode of the migration destination for each of the normal mode of the migration source (current) and the lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets the normal mode determined as the lottery result as the normal mode of the next game.

[Normal advantage_AT lottery table]
Subsequently, the usually advantageous_AT lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 195. The normal advantage_AT lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a transition lottery to AT based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "normal advantage" state. The normal advantage_AT lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the transition lottery to AT for each of the current normal modes and lottery types. When the "non-winning" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normally advantageous" state without shifting the ball ejection state. On the other hand, if "winning" is determined as a result of the lottery, the ball output state of the next game is changed from "normal advantage" to "AT precursor", and one AT (specialized zone) stock is given. .. The number of stocks to be given is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be given. Further, when the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 also refers to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216 and also includes the type of the assigned special zone stock. decide. Further, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets the number of precursor games of "AT precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

[Normal advantage_History lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 196, the usually advantageous_history lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_history lottery table is a table referred to when the above-mentioned history lottery is performed in the "normal advantage" state, and FIG. 196 (A) is referred to when the history lottery based on the replay series is performed. It is a normal advantage_history lottery table (replay series), and FIG. 196 (B) is a normal advantage_history lottery table (rare combination number) referred to when performing a history lottery based on the number of rare combinations.

The normal advantage_history lottery table (replay series) defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (replay series) in which the replay is continuously determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. When the "winning" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the payout state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "CZ precursor" and "from 1 game to 32 games". Determine and set the number of precursor games for "CZ precursor".

The normal advantage_history lottery table (number of rare combinations) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (the number of rare combinations) the rare combination is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. When the "win" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball output state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "AT precursor" and stocks the AT (specialized zone). Give one. The number of stocks to be given is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be given. Further, when the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 also refers to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216 and also includes the type of the assigned special zone stock. decide. Further, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets the number of precursor games of "AT precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

[Normal advantage_ceiling benefit lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 197, a normally advantageous_ceiling benefit lottery table will be described. The normal advantage_ceiling benefit lottery table is referred to when the number of elapsed games of "normal advantage" reaches 400 games, and is used for the ceiling benefit lottery as to whether or not to give the benefit in the temporary ceiling control when the number of games reaches 400 games. Be done. The usually advantageous_ceiling benefit lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the ceiling benefit lottery. When the "fall" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "normal". Further, when "CZ mode high accuracy A" is determined as a result of lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normal advantage" without shifting the ball ejection state, and as the CZ mode of the next game. Set "High accuracy A". In addition, when the "AT win" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball output state of the next game from "normal advantage" to "AT precursor" and AT (specialized zone). Grant one stock of. The number of stocks to be given is not limited to one, and a plurality of stocks may be given. Further, when the "AT win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 also refers to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216 and also includes the type of the assigned special zone stock. To decide. Further, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets the number of precursor games of "AT precursor" from 1 game to 32 games.

[CZ_CZ type lottery table]
Subsequently, the CZ_CZ type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 198. The CZ_CZ type lottery table is referred to when performing a CZ type lottery for determining the type of CZ to be started from the CZ winning to the start of CZ (in the present embodiment, at the start of CZ). It's a table. The CZ_CZ type lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the CZ type lottery. When "normal" is determined as a result of lottery, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets "normal" as the type of CZ to be started. Further, when "special" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 determines and sets "special" as the type of CZ to be started.

[CZ_AT lottery table]
Subsequently, the CZ_AT lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 199. The CZ_AT lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a transition lottery to AT based on an internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "CZ" state. The CZ_AT lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the transfer lottery to AT for each type of CZ and lottery type. The main control circuit 91 does not give the stock of AT (specialized zone) when "non-winning" is decided as a lottery result, and when "winning" is decided, AT (specialization) One (or a plurality) of the stocks of the zone) are given, and the type of the given special zone stock is also determined by referring to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216.

The duration of "CZ" is managed by the number of games, and even if the AT lottery is won during "CZ", the game does not shift to the ball-out state "CZ" for 5 games. If the main control circuit 91 has AT stock at the end of "CZ" (5 games have passed), the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "CZ" to "specialized zone preparation". If you do not have the stock of AT, the ball output state of the next game is changed from "CZ" to "normal advantage".

[Specialized zone preparation_Bernavi lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 200, the special zone preparation_Bernavi lottery table will be described. As described above in FIG. 180, in the state of "specialized zone preparation", bell navigation is performed according to the lottery result. Specialized zone preparation_Bernavi lottery table is referred to at the time of winning a small batting order ("F_Batting order 1 bell A" to "F_Batting order 6 special B") in the state of "specialized zone preparation", and the correct batting order is pushed. This is a table that is referred to when performing a bell navigation lottery as to whether or not to notify. Specialized zone preparation_Bernavi lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of whether or not to perform bell navigation for ON / OFF of the special mode. The main control circuit 91 does not give any notification when "non-winning" is determined in the bell navigation lottery, and performs bell navigation when "winning" is determined. According to the figure, when the special mode is ON, it is difficult to perform bell navigation even if the push order small winning combination is won.

In the present embodiment, the special mode is updated to OFF at least at the start of the specialized zone, so that it is always OFF in the "specialized zone" or "AT" state, and is never ON. In this regard, if the specifications are such that "XD rip" can be displayed when the replay role (normal rip or special rip) is won, as in the above specification example, in the "specialized zone" or "AT" state. In some cases, the special mode remains ON. In the case of such specifications, the main control circuit 91 may perform the bell navigation lottery based on the ON / OFF of the special mode even in the "specialized zone" or "AT" state. In the bell navigation lottery in the "specialized zone" or "AT" state, if the special mode is ON, the bell navigation is won with a predetermined probability, and if the special mode is OFF, the probability is higher than the predetermined probability. You may win the Bernavi (more preferably 100% probability). In addition, in the "specialized zone preparation", "specialized zone", and "AT" states, the bell navigation lottery is performed only when the special mode is ON, and when the special mode is OFF, the bell navigation lottery is always performed without performing the bell navigation lottery. , Bell navigation may be performed.

[Specialized zone preparation_Specialized zone start lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 201, the special zone preparation_specialized zone start lottery table will be described. Specialized zone preparation_Specialized zone start lottery table is used when performing a specialized zone start lottery to decide whether to start the specialized zone at the time of winning a normal rip or a special rip in the state of "specialized zone preparation". It is a table referenced by. As shown in the figure, "first time", "specialized zone 1", "specialized zone 2", "specialized zone 3", and "specialized zone 4" are provided as the specialized zone types, and the first "specialized zone" is provided. In "Preparation", "First time" is referred to, and in the second and subsequent "Specialized zone preparation", "Specialized zone 1", "Specialized zone 2", "Specialized zone 3", and "Specialized zone" are used according to the type of specialized zone. Zone 4 ”is referenced. More specifically, in "specialized zone preparation" that has shifted from "normal", "normal advantage", "CZ precursor", "CZ", and "AT precursor", "first time" is referred to, and from "AT" and "special AT". In the migrated "specialized zone preparation", the table according to the type of specialized zone is referenced.

The special zone preparation_special zone start lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the special zone start lottery for each type of special zone. The main control circuit 91 maintains the ball ejection state as "specialized zone preparation" when "preparation continuation" is determined as the lottery result, and when "start" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the ball ejection state. Move the ball output state of the next game from "specialized zone preparation" to "specialized zone".

[Specialized zone_lottery table with the number of games added]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 202 to 205, the special zone_game number addition lottery table will be described. FIG. 202 is a lottery table for adding the number of special zones_games, which is referred to when the type of the special zone is “special zone 1”, and FIG. 203 shows the special zone type of “special zone 2”. It is a special zone_game number addition lottery table referred to when "specialized zone_game number addition", and FIG. 204 shows a specialization zone_game number addition reference when the specialization zone type is "specialized zone 3". It is a lottery table, and FIG. 205 is a lottery table for adding the number of special zones_games, which is referred to when the type of the special zone is “special zone 4”.

The special zone_game number additional lottery table is a table that is referred to when the number of additional games is drawn based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the state of the "specialized zone". The special zone_game number additional lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the number of additional games for each type of special zone and lottery type. When the main control circuit 91 determines the number of additional games for each unit game in the special zone, the determined number of additional games is added up and managed. Then, when the special zone ends, the main control circuit 91 adds the total number of additional games to the number of remaining AT games.

[Specialized zone_Specialized zone end lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 206, the special zone_specialized zone end lottery table will be described. Specialized zone_Specialized zone end lottery table determines whether or not to end the specialized zone based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the state of "specialized zone". It is a table that is referred to when performing. The special zone_special zone end lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the special zone end lottery for each special zone type and lottery type. When "continuation" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the ball ejection state as the "specialized zone". Further, when "end" is determined as a result of lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "specialized zone" to "AT" and is determined in the specialized zone. The total value of the number of additional games is added to the number of remaining games of AT, and the stock of AT (specialized zone) is subtracted by 1. In addition, the special zone is provided with a guarantee period, and the main control circuit 91 does not perform the special zone end lottery during the guarantee period, and the special zone ends in the unit game after the guarantee period ends. Make a lottery. The warranty period may be constant regardless of the type of special zone, or may be different depending on the type of special zone. In this embodiment, the guarantee period of "specialized zone 1" is 5 games, and the guarantee period of other specialized zones is 10 games.

[AT_initial AT mode lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_initial AT mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 207. The AT_initial AT mode lottery table is used when performing an initial AT mode lottery for determining the initial value of the AT mode from the AT winning until the AT is started (in the present embodiment, at the start of the AT). It is a table referenced by. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the stock of the AT (specialized zone) remains after the end of the AT, the AT is restarted via the special zone or the like. Here, the main control circuit 91 determines the initial value of the AT mode only at the start of the first AT, and at the start of the AT that consumes the stock and starts again after the end of the AT, the initial AT mode lottery is not performed. The AT mode at the end of AT may be taken over as it is. Of course, the initial AT mode lottery may be performed at the start of the AT that consumes the stock and starts again after the end of the AT.

The AT_initial AT mode lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery results of the initial AT mode lottery. The main control circuit 91 sets "low accuracy" as the AT mode when "low accuracy" is determined as the lottery result, and AT mode when "high accuracy A" is determined as the lottery result. When "High accuracy A" is set and "High accuracy B" is determined as the lottery result, "High accuracy B" is set as the AT mode and "High accuracy C" is determined as the lottery result. In this case, "high accuracy C" is set as the AT mode.

[AT_AT mode transition lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_AT mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 208. The AT_AT mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "AT" state. The AT_AT mode transition lottery table defines lottery value information for the AT mode of the migration destination for each AT mode of the migration source (current) and the lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets the AT mode determined as the lottery result as the AT mode of the next game.

[AT_icon type lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_icon type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 209. AT_icon type The lottery table shows the icon type of whether or not the history role "rare role" is displayed as a jewel (red) when the history role "rare role" is determined as the internal winning role in the "AT" state. It is a table that is referred to when drawing lots. The AT_icon type lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the icon type lottery for each lottery type. When the main control circuit 91 determines "non-winning (white)" as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 notifies the sub control circuit 101 to that effect, and the sub control circuit 101 that receives the notification is a liquid crystal display (display unit). A jewel (white) is displayed in the history display window of 100). Similarly, when the "win (red)" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 notifies the sub control circuit 101 to that effect, and the sub control circuit 101 that receives the notification is a liquid crystal display ( A jewel (red) is displayed in the history display window of the display unit 100).

As described above, when "invalid" is determined as the lottery result in the common_lottery invalid lottery table shown in FIG. 218, the main control circuit 91 does not perform the icon type lottery. In this case, the sub-control circuit 101 displays a jewel (white) in the history display window of the liquid crystal display (display unit 100).

[AT_specialized zone stock lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_specialized zone stock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 210. The AT_specialized zone stock lottery table is a table that is referred to when the stock lottery of the special zone is performed based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "AT" state. The AT_specialized zone stock lottery table defines the lottery value information for the stock lottery of the special zone for each AT mode and the lottery type. In the state of "special AT", the "special AT" column is referred to, and during the predetermined number of games (between 5 games) after "winning (red)" is determined by the above-mentioned icon type lottery, "red jewel" is used. ”Column is referenced, otherwise the column corresponding to the current AT mode is referenced.

The main control circuit 91 does not grant the stock of the special zone when "non-win" is determined as the lottery result, and when "win" is determined as the lottery result, the AT special zone One (or a plurality) of the stocks of the above are given, and the type of the given special zone stock is also determined by referring to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216. Further, when the "special win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 grants a plurality of stocks of the AT special zone and refers to the common _specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216. The type of specialized zone stock granted is also determined.

As shown in the figure, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the "red jewel" column is referred to, the probability of winning the stock lottery in the special zone is the highest. Therefore, while the jewel (red) is displayed in the history display window along with the history role "rare role", it can be said that it is easy to win the stock lottery in the special zone.

Here, as described above, when "invalid" is determined as the lottery result in the common_lottery invalid lottery table shown in FIG. 218, the main control circuit 91 does not perform the stock lottery of the special zone. In addition, it may be possible to perform only the stock lottery of the special zone referring to the "red jewel" column.

[CZ lottery table during AT_AT]
Subsequently, the CZ lottery table in AT_AT will be described with reference to FIG. 211. The AT_AT-in-AT CZ lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a transition lottery to the AT-in-AT CZ based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the "AT" state. The AT_AT CZ lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery to the AT CZ for each lottery type. The main control circuit 91 maintains "AT" without shifting the payout state when "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, and when "winning" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 maintains the ball ejection state as "AT". , The payout state of the next game is changed from "AT" to "CZ during AT".

[AT_History lottery table]
Subsequently, the AT_history lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 212. The AT_history lottery table is a table referred to when performing the above-mentioned history lottery in the "AT" state, and FIG. 212 (A) shows the AT_history lottery referred to when performing the history lottery based on the replay series. It is a table (replay series), FIG. 212 (B) is an AT_history lottery table (rare combination number) referred to when performing a history lottery based on the number of rare combinations, and FIG. 212 (C) is an outlier series. It is an AT_history lottery table (outside ream) that is referred to when performing a history lottery based on.

The AT_history lottery table (replay series) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (replay series) in which replays are continuously determined as winning combinations during a predetermined game. When the "winning" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the payout state of the next game from "AT" to "CZ during AT".

The AT_history lottery table (number of rare combinations) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (the number of rare combinations) the rare combination is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. When the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 grants one (or a plurality) of AT (specialized zone) stocks, and the common_specialized zone type lottery shown in FIG. 216. Refer to the table and determine the type of specialized zone stock that has been assigned.

The AT_history lottery table (lost ream) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the history lottery for each number of times (lost ream) in which the loss is determined as the winning combination during a predetermined game. The main control circuit 91 promotes the AT mode by one when "winning" is determined as a result of the lottery.

[AT_final addition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 213, the AT_final addition lottery table will be described. The AT_final addition lottery table is a table used for the final addition lottery performed when the number of remaining games of AT becomes 0 when there is no stock of AT. The AT_final additional lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the final additional lottery for each invalidity of the fixed combination. If the fixed combination has not been invalidated by the end of AT, the "not invalid" column is referred to, and if the fixed combination is invalid, the "invalid" column is referred to. When the "win" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 grants 3 or 5 AT (specialized zone) stocks and the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216. Also determine the type of specialized zone stock granted by referring to.

In addition, the main control circuit 91 performs the final addition lottery only when the fixed combination is invalid (in other words, only when it is decided not to give the privilege according to the fixed combination), and is not invalidated. In that case, the final addition lottery may not be performed. Further, as shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, when the fixed combination is invalid, the final additional lottery is always won, but when the fixed combination is invalid, the final addition lottery is always won. It suffices if the probability of winning the final additional lottery is different (higher or lower) than when it is not invalidated.

[CZ_scenario lottery table during AT]
Subsequently, the CZ_scenario lottery table during AT will be described with reference to FIG. 214. The AT-in-AT CZ_scenario lottery table is used to determine the AT-in-AT CZ scenario to be started from the winning of the AT-in-CZ to the start of the AT-in-AT CZ (in the present embodiment, at the start of the AT-in-AT CZ). This is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery. The CZ_scenario lottery table during AT defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the scenario lottery for each scenario lottery type. The main control circuit 91 sets a scenario determined as a lottery result, and controls the game of CZ during AT.

The scenario lottery type is information determined according to the AT point (FIG. 188 (E)), and the main control circuit 91 determines the scenario lottery type according to the AT point at the time when the scenario lottery is performed. To determine. In addition, the larger the scenario number, the more advantageous the scenario is for the player. In the scenario lottery types "Type 0" to "Type 3", the scenario in which "Type 0" is advantageous is the scenario lottery type that is most likely to win. Yes, "Type 1" is the scenario lottery type that is easy to win the advantageous scenario next, "Type 2" is the scenario lottery type that is easy to win the advantageous scenario next, and "Type 3" is the advantageous scenario. Is the most difficult scenario lottery type. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the smaller the AT points, the easier it is to determine a scenario that is advantageous to the player.

Subsequently, FIG. 214B is a diagram showing the contents of the scenario. The scenario is information that defines the CZ type for every five games. For example, scenario 1 is a scenario of CZ during AT that ends in 5 games, and is a scenario in which the CZ type of 1 to 5 games is 1 (blue). Further, scenario 10 is a scenario of CZ during AT that ends in 15 games, and the CZ type of 1 to 5 games is 1 (blue), the CZ type of 6 to 10 games is 2 (green), and 11 to 15 games. This is a scenario in which the CZ type is 3 (red). In the state of "AT in CZ", the production is performed using the unique production stage, and the color information (blue, green, red) at the end of the CZ type represents the color of the production stage. Therefore, the player can grasp the CZ type from the color of the production stage.

[CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table during AT]
Subsequently, the CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table during AT will be described with reference to FIG. 215. The AT-in-AT CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table is a table that is referred to when the special zone stock lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the state of "AT-in-CZ". The CZ_specialized zone stock lottery table during AT defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the stock lottery for each CZ type and lottery type. The main control circuit 91 does not grant the stock of the special zone when "non-win" is determined as the lottery result, and when the "win" is determined, the stock of the special zone is set to 1. In addition to assigning one (or a plurality), the type of the assigned specialized zone stock is also determined by referring to the common_specialized zone type lottery table shown in FIG. 216.

The duration of the AT CZ is managed by the number of games for each scenario, and even if the AT lottery is won in the AT CZ, the ball-out state "AT CZ" remains as long as the number of games corresponding to the scenario. Do not migrate. When the CZ during AT is completed, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "CZ during AT" to "AT".

[Common_specialized zone type lottery table]
Subsequently, the common_specialized zone type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 216. The common_specialized zone type lottery table is a table that is referred to when the type of special zone is drawn when the stock of AT (specialized zone) is given. The common_specialized zone type lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the special zone type for each stock opportunity. Here, when the stock of the special zone is given according to the fixed role "F_purple 7 lip", the stock opportunity "purple 7" is referred to, and the special zone according to the fixed role "F_red BAR lip". When the stock of is given, the stock opportunity "Red BAR" is referred to, and when the stock of the special zone is given according to the fixed role "F_W matching lip", the stock trigger "W matching" is referred to. , When the stock of the special zone is given according to the fixed role "F_black BAR lip", the stock opportunity "black BAR" is referred to, and the special zone in the normal mode "special" in the "normal advantage" state. When the stock of is given, the stock trigger "normal mode special" is referred to, and when the stock of the special zone is given as a trigger other than these, the stock trigger "normal (other than right)" is referred to. ..

When the "specialized zone 1" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 sets the type of the specialized zone of the stock to the "specialized zone 1" and sets the "specialized zone 2" as the lottery result. If it is decided, the type of the special zone of the stock is set to "special zone 2", and if "special zone 3" is decided as a result of the lottery, the type of the special zone of the stock is set. If "specialized zone 3" is set and "specialized zone 4" is determined as a result of lottery, the type of specialized zone of the stock is set to "specialized zone 4". In the specialized zone, the expected degree of additional number of games differs depending on the type, and the expected degree of additional number of games is highest in "specialized zone 4", next in "specialized zone 3", and " "Specialized zone 2" is the next highest, and "Specialized zone 1" is the lowest.

In addition, "specialized zone 1" is a specialized zone in which the number of games is added although the number of games is small regardless of the winning combination, and "specialized zone 2" is an additional number of games according to the winning combination. Although it may not be performed, it is a specialized zone in which at least 50 games are added at the time of winning a normal rip (“F_normal rip 1”). When a normal lip is won in the "specialized zone 2", the main control circuit 91 notifies the push order of right / left middle or right middle left and displays a combination of symbols related to "purple 7 lip". prompt. Further, the "specialized zone 3" is a specialized zone in which at least 100 games or more are added at the time of winning a normal lip, although the number of games may not be added depending on the winning combination. When the normal rip is won in the "specialized zone 3", the main control circuit 91 notifies the pressing order of the middle left / right or the middle right / left and prompts the display of the combination of the symbols related to the "red BAR rip". ..

In addition, "specialized zone 4" has the characteristics of "specialized zone 1" to "specialized zone 3", and the number of games played is added regardless of the winning combination, and at the time of winning a normal lip. At least 50 games (with a high probability of 100 games) will be added, and at least 200 games will be added at the time of winning the special rip ("F_special rip 1" "F_special rip 2"). is there. When the normal lip is won in the "specialized zone 4" and 50 games are determined as the number of additional games, the main control circuit 91 notifies the right-left middle or right-middle-left push order and "purple". When the display of the combination of symbols related to "7 rips" is urged, and when the normal rips are won and 100 games are determined as the number of additional games, the main control circuit 91 pushes the middle left and right or the middle right and left. Notify and prompt to display the combination of symbols related to "Red BAR Lip". Further, when the "F_special lip 1" is won in the "specialized zone 4", the main control circuit 91 notifies the push order of the right, left, middle, or right, middle, and left, and the symbol related to the "W-aligned lip" is displayed. When the display of the combination is prompted and the "F_special lip 2" is won, the main control circuit 91 notifies the pressing order of the middle left / right or the middle right / left and displays the combination of the symbols related to the "W-aligned lip". prompt.

[Common_fixed role invalid lottery table]
Subsequently, the common_fixed combination invalid lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 217. The common_fixed combination invalid lottery table is in the state where the fixed combination is conditionally valid ("specialized zone preparation", "AT", "CZ during AT"), and when the fixed combination is won, it is not invalid based on the AT points. , It is a table referred to when performing an invalid lottery as to whether or not to invalidate the fixed combination. That is, when the fixed combination "F_black BAR lip" is determined as the winning combination and the AT points are less than 768 points, the main control circuit 91 performs an invalid lottery using the common_fixed combination invalid lottery table. If the AT points are 768 points or more, the lottery is not performed and the AT points are invalidated.

The common_fixed combination invalid lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the invalid lottery of the fixed combination. When "valid" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 validates the winning fixed combination and grants a privilege according to the fixed combination. Further, when "invalid" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 invalidates the winning fixed combination and does not give the privilege according to the fixed combination.

[Common_lottery invalid lottery table]
Subsequently, the common_lottery invalid lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 218. The common_lottery invalid lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing an invalid lottery as to whether or not to invalidate various lottery in a specific game state such as during AT. The common_lottery invalid lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the invalid lottery for each AT point type. When "valid" is determined as a lottery result, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery in the game, and when "invalid" is determined as a lottery result, various lottery is performed in the game. Not performed.

The AT point type is information determined according to the AT point (FIG. 188 (D)), and the main control circuit 91 is the AT point type according to the AT point at the time when the invalid lottery is performed. To determine.

[Common_Lock occurrence lottery table at stock]
Subsequently, the common_stock lock generation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 219. The common_stock lock generation lottery table is a table that is referred to when drawing whether or not to generate a lock state when AT (specialized zone) stock is given. Common_The lock occurrence lottery table at the time of stock defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of whether or not to generate the lock state for each state at the time of stock winning and the lottery type at the time of stock winning. Here, when the stock of AT (specialized zone) is given in the ball ejection state "normal" or "normal advantage", the "normal / normal advantage" column is referred to, and in the ball ejection state "AT", AT ( When the stock of the special zone) is given, the "AT" column is referred to.

The main control circuit 91 does not generate a lock state when "non-winning" is determined as a lottery result, and stops the progress of the game when "winning" is determined as a lottery result. Generate a state. In addition, when the lock state is generated, the main control circuit 91 may give a further privilege. For example, when the lock state is generated, the main control circuit 91 may further add one or more stocks in addition to the stock of the AT (specialized zone) for the amount that triggered the lottery. Good.

As shown in the figure, during the ball ejection state "AT", a locked state occurs with a relatively high probability when the stock of the special zone is given. Here, when the jewel (red) is displayed based on the history combination “rare role” as described above, the stock of the special zone is likely to be given during the subsequent predetermined number of games (see FIG. 210). Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jewel (red) is displayed based on the history combination “rare combination”, the locked state is likely to occur during the subsequent predetermined number of games.

[Summary of playability of the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment has been described above, but the playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is summarized as follows.

[Control using AT points (change in additional probability)]
As described above in FIG. 188, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 is in a specific gaming state (in the present embodiment, the ball ejection state “specialized zone preparation”, “specialized zone”, and “AT”. Numerical information regarding the number of medals (difference number = number of payouts-number of inserts) that can be paid out in "CZ during AT" and "special AT") is managed by AT points. The main control circuit 91 acquires game information in each game in a specific game state, and calculates AT points according to the acquired game information.

Specifically, when the main control circuit 91 acquires game information for specifying the number of medals actually paid out in this game, such as a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination or a winning combination, the main control circuit 91 is actually paid out. Calculate the added value of points according to the number of medals to be received, and update the accumulated points. Further, when the main control circuit 91 acquires game information such as the number of games remaining in the AT and the number of stocks remaining in the AT, the number of medals that can be granted in the future, which is expected from the number of games remaining in the AT and the number of stocks remaining in the AT. Calculate the possession points according to the expected value. Then, the main control circuit 91 calculates the total of the accumulated points and the possessed points as AT points.

Then, when the calculated AT point exceeds the threshold value (more specifically, when it exceeds the threshold value), the main control circuit 91 determines the probability of granting the privilege (for example, extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period in a specific gaming state). Change. As an example, when the AT point exceeds the threshold value, the main control circuit 91 is more expected to give a privilege such as extension of the gaming period in a specific gaming state such as a fixed combination than other combinations. Even if the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the fixed combination is invalidated and the privilege is not given.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the extension information regarding the extension of the game period in the specific game state changes according to the AT points regarding the number of medals that can be given in the specific game state, so that the specific game The game in the state is diversified, and the fun of the game is improved. In addition, when the player has already obtained a lot of profits in a specific gaming state or can obtain a lot of profits in the future, the profits that the player can obtain becomes excessive by performing control such as invalidating the fixed combination. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while preventing excessive immersiveness.

It should be noted that the extension information regarding the extension of the game period in a specific gaming state is arbitrary, and in order to change the extension information, in addition to invalidating (not extending) as in the present embodiment, there is a probability. It also includes lowering the probability and increasing the probability. That is, this gameplay includes, in addition to invalidating the fixed combination, changing the probability of invalidating the fixed combination when the AT point exceeds the threshold value, and is limited to the control of the fixed combination. However, when the AT point exceeds the threshold value, the additional lottery of the stock of the AT (specialized zone) is invalidated, and the probability of winning the additional lottery is changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games is not added during AT, but when the AT points exceed the threshold value, the additional lottery for the number of games is invalidated, and the probability of winning the additional lottery is changed. This includes changing (increasing or decreasing) the number of games to be added when the additional lottery is won.

[Control using AT points (diversification of outcomes)]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the fixed combination is invalid, the push order of right / left middle or right middle left is notified, and when the fixed combination is valid, the push order is not notified. As a result, when the fixed combination is invalid, a combination of symbols (TL lip) that can be displayed in other replay combinations is displayed, and when the fixed combination is valid, each fixed combination has a unique symbol. The combination is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the fixed combination is valid, no pressing order is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing order in which the combination of symbols unique to the fixed combination is displayed is notified. May be.

As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning the fixed combination (roll) differs depending on the AT point, and the roll (result display) that the player pays attention to. Will be diversified and the interest of the game will be improved. At this time, the outcome when the fixed combination is valid is unique to the fixed combination, while the outcome when the fixed combination is invalid is determined as the winning combination other than the fixed combination. It is a roll that can be displayed even if it is. Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the fixed winning combination is won and invalidated or another winning combination is won from the displayed general-purpose roll, and the player is not aware of the roll. It is possible to control states with different variations. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), since the types of fixed combinations to be invalidated increase stepwise according to the AT point, the variation of the outcome can be changed stepwise.

In this game playability, the variation of the outcome is different depending on the AT point, and the object to be different is not limited to whether it is a unique outcome or a general-purpose outcome. For example, in the main control circuit 91, when the AT point is in a specific range (less than the first threshold value), the push order is displayed so that a specific result (combination of symbols) is displayed at the time of winning a specific combination. If the AT point is in a predetermined range different from the specific range (1st threshold or more and less than the 2nd threshold), a predetermined result (combination of symbols) is displayed when a specific combination is won. It may be the one that navigates the push order so as to be performed.

[Definite combination control using AT points and final addition control]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determinant combination is valid, the main control circuit 91 grants a privilege triggered by the winning of the determinant combination, but when the determinant combination is invalid. Can grant benefits based on the final additional lottery performed at the end of AT, which is a game after the game that won the final winning combination. As a result, when the fixed combination is invalidated, other benefits can be given instead, so that it is possible to reduce the unilateral disadvantage of the player. In this case, if the fixed combination is invalidated, a general-purpose result will be displayed. Therefore, the player does not notice that the fixed combination has been invalidated, and the final addition lottery is performed. You can get the benefits based on. When the fixed role is invalidated in this way, it is possible to compensate for the actual disadvantage by granting a substitute benefit, and it is possible to diversify the benefits associated with the winning of the fixed role. it can. In the present embodiment, the privilege based on the final additional lottery and the privilege based on the fixed combination "F_black BAR lip" are the same privilege, but the privilege is not limited to this. That is, the privilege based on the definite combination to be invalidated and the privilege to supplement the invalidated privilege are not limited to the same one, and may be different privilege.

Further, when the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value (1024) at the time of the lottery of the final addition lottery (that is, at the end of AT after the game in which the fixed combination is won), the main control circuit 91 is the final addition lottery. Do not do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the profit obtained by the player from becoming excessive, and as a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while preventing excessive devotion. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the final additional lottery is invalidated based on the AT points, but the final additional lottery may not be invalidated regardless of the AT points. Further, the probability of winning the final additional lottery may be different depending on the AT point. In addition, when the fixed combination is invalidated, the final additional lottery is not invalidated regardless of the AT points, and when the fixed combination is invalidated, the final additional lottery is invalidated based on the AT points. May be good.

[History type control using AT points]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the history combination "rare combination" is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 displays a jewel (red) or a jewel (white) in the history display window. Decide if you want to. If it is decided to display the jewel (red), the probability of winning the stock lottery of the special zone during AT increases during the subsequent predetermined number of games. The main control circuit 91 also determines whether or not to display this jewel (red) with reference to the AT point. Specifically, the lottery invalid lottery is performed based on the AT points, and when "invalid" is determined in this lottery, the jewel (red) is displayed because the jewel (red) is not displayed. The decision to do so will be based on AT points. As a result, not only the probability of displaying the jewel (red) but also the probability of granting the privilege (specialized zone stock) thereafter changes according to the AT points, so that various playability can be realized.

In addition, when the stock lottery of the special zone during AT is won, a locked state in which the progress of the game is stopped may occur (see FIG. 219). As described above, since the probability of granting stock in the specialized zone changes according to the AT point, the frequency of occurrence of the locked state can be different according to the AT point, so that various playability can be realized. it can.

[Examples of other specifications for playability using AT points]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 220, other specification examples applicable to the playability using AT points will be described. First, FIGS. 220 (A) and 220 (a) show a basic pattern of this game playability. As shown in the figure, in this game playability, the probability of addition (giving a privilege) and the content of the outcome are changed based on the AT points. Specifically, when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value, the main control circuit 91 makes the addition probability different and the content of the outcome different. In addition, to make the additional probability different means to enable / invalidate the fixed combination as described above, and to make the winning probability of the additional lottery based on other roles (replay, small role, rare role) different. In addition to this, it includes increasing or decreasing the winning combination of the additional lottery. Further, to make the contents of the outcomes different is to control the push order to be navigated at the time of winning the winning combination in which different combinations of symbols are displayed according to the push order, as described above.

Further, regarding the addition probability, when there are the addition control A and the addition control B, both may be changed together, or both may be changed individually. Specifically, when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value, the main control circuit 91 may change the winning probabilities of the additional control A and the additional control B, and the main control circuit 91 has the AT point at the first threshold value. When the above is achieved, the winning probability of the additional control A may be changed, and when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the second threshold value, the winning probability of the additional control B may be changed.

Further, FIGS. (B) and (c) show application patterns of the game playability to other specification examples. As shown in FIG. 3B, when the AT point exceeds the threshold value, the main control circuit 91 controls the addition probability to be different, while controlling the content of the outcome so as to be constant regardless of the AT point. You may. In such a specification example, although the contents of the outcome are the same, the probability of addition changes. From the player's point of view, since the visible outcomes are the same, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of addition from the outcome such as a rare role, but it is not added internally.

On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 6C, the main control circuit 91 controls the addition probability to be constant regardless of the AT point, while the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value for the content of the outcome. It may be controlled so as to change when becomes. In such a specification example, although the addition probability is the same, the content of the outcome changes. Since the contents of the outcomes are different, it is possible to provide a state in which the outcomes are likely to appear or are difficult to appear, such as a rare role, without changing the expectation of the addition. From the player's point of view, there are situations in which rare roles and other rolls appear frequently, but no additional rolls are made, and conversely, rare roles and other rolls are not added at all. Since the situation such as being performed occurs, the interest of the game is improved.

Subsequently, FIG. 220 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the threshold value for changing the addition probability and the threshold value for changing the content of the outcome. As shown in the figure, the main control circuit 91 may share a threshold value for changing the addition probability and a threshold value for changing the content of the outcome. As an example, in the main control circuit 91, when the AT point is less than the threshold value 1, the addition probability is the probability A, the content of the result is the result A, and the AT point is the threshold value 1 or more and less than the threshold value 2. The addition probability is the probability B, the content of the outcome is the outcome B, and when the AT point is equal to or more than the threshold value 2 and less than the threshold value 3, the addition probability is the probability C, the content of the outcome is the outcome C, and AT. When the points are the threshold value 3 or more and less than the threshold value 4, the addition probability may be the probability D, and the content of the outcome may be the outcome D.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may have a different threshold value for changing the addition probability and a threshold value for changing the content of the outcome. As an example, the main control circuit 91 has a probability A when the AT point is less than the threshold value 2, a probability B when the AT point is the threshold value 2 or more and less than the threshold value 3, and the AT point is the threshold value 3 or more. When the value is less than 4, the probability C is set. On the other hand, regarding the content of the result, the result is A when the AT point is less than the threshold value 1, and the result B when the AT point is 1 or more and less than the threshold value 3. , When the AT point is the threshold value 3 or more and less than the threshold value 4, the result C may be set. Further, when the AT point is less than the threshold value 3, the main control circuit 91 may change the addition probability while setting the content of the roll as the roll A. As an example, if the AT point is less than the threshold value 1, the addition probability is the probability A, if the AT point is the threshold value 1 or more and less than the threshold value 2, the addition probability is the probability B, and the AT point is the threshold value 2 or more and less than the threshold value 3. In some cases, the additional probability may be the probability C.

Subsequently, FIG. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a point type used for changing the addition probability and the content of the outcome. As shown in pattern 1 of the figure, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 changes the addition probability and the content of the outcome based on the AT point, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the AT point is composed of a cumulative point and a possession point, and the main control circuit 91 can change the addition probability and the content of the outcome by using any of the AT point, the cumulative point, and the possession point.

The point types used may be common in both the addition probability and the content of the outcome, or may be different. Pattern 2 in the figure shows a case where different point types are used in the addition probability and the content of the outcome. Specifically, in the main control circuit 91, the addition probability may be changed based on the AT point, and the content of the outcome may be changed based on the cumulative point.

Further, the point type to be used may be different depending on the range of AT points. It should be noted that the point type to be used may be different based on the range of accumulated points or possessed points instead of the range of AT points. Pattern 3 in the figure shows a case where the point type to be used is different depending on the range of AT points. Specifically, when the AT point is in the first range (less than the threshold value 1), the main control circuit 91 changes the addition probability and the content of the outcome based on the accumulated points, and the AT point is in the second range (less than the threshold value 1). When the threshold value is 1 or more and less than the threshold value 2), the addition probability and the content of the outcome may be changed based on the AT point.

In this case, the range of AT points may be common in both the addition probability and the content of the outcome, or may be different. Pattern 4 in the figure shows a case where the range of AT points is different in both the addition probability and the content of the outcome. Specifically, when the AT point is in the first range (threshold value less than 1), the main control circuit 91 changes the addition probability based on the cumulative points, and the AT point is in the second range (threshold value 1 or more and threshold value 2). If it is less than), the addition probability may be changed based on the AT point, while the content of the outcome may be changed based on the AT point as long as the AT point is less than the threshold value 2.

Further, the point type to be used may be common in both the addition probability and the content of the outcome, or may be different. Pattern 5 in the figure shows a case where different point types are used in the addition probability and the content of the outcome. Specifically, when the AT point is in the first range (less than the threshold value 1), the main control circuit 91 changes the addition probability based on the cumulative points and changes the content of the outcome based on the AT points. When the AT point is in the second range (threshold value 1 or more and less than threshold value 2), the addition probability may be changed based on the AT point, and the content of the outcome may be changed based on the possession point.

[AT point management method]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 updates the AT points every game by updating the accumulated points and the possessed points every game in a specific game state such as during AT. For example, if one game is played during "AT", the number of remaining games of AT is reduced by 1, and as a result, the possessed points are reduced by 7 points, while the accumulated points are updated according to the winning combination in the game. Further, for example, when the number of AT games is determined by consuming the stock in the state of the "specialized zone", the stock of the AT (specialized zone) is reduced by 1, while the remaining number of ATs is equal to the determined number of games. As the number of games increases, 600 points for one stock will decrease from the accumulated points, while the points possessed for the increased number of games will increase.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each game in a specific game state, AT points are updated according to the game information (winning combination, etc.) of the game, so that medals that can be given in the specific game state can be given. It is possible to properly manage AT points related to the quantity of. That is, as the game progresses, the expected value of the amount of medal increase per game (possession points) is replaced with the real number (cumulative points) of the number of medals actually paid out, so the AT is closer to the real number. Points can be calculated.

[Comparison method with threshold value]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AT point is counted by using a counter composed of 2 bytes of upper byte (1 byte) and lower byte (1 byte), and a multiple of 256 is used as the threshold value. Then, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the AT point is equal to or higher than the threshold value by comparing the value of the counter of the upper byte with the value of the multiple portion of the threshold value. As a result, the value of the lower byte is not required for the threshold value, so that the data capacity can be reduced and the processing load required for comparison control can be reduced.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 has an "AT" state in which AT points are counted and various controls based on the AT points are performed, and a "normal" state in which the AT points are not used, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a "normal" state. 1 has a plurality of gaming states including a predetermined gaming state (normal or the like) and a specific gaming state (AT or the like). Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the stop operation is performed in the push order of the left 1st, a combination of symbols peculiar to the fixed combination is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the push order of the right 1st or the like. It has a plurality of definite combinations in which a combination of general-purpose symbols that are also displayed in other replay combinations is displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 91 acquires game information such as an internal winning combination and the number of remaining games of the AT in each game in a specific game state such as AT, and also acquires a specific game state according to the acquired game information. In order to calculate the AT point which is the numerical information regarding the number of medals that can be given in the above, the main control circuit 91 functions as a numerical calculation means.

In addition, the main control circuit 91 acquires information on the number of medals to be given in the current game (for example, the internal winning combination and the number actually paid out in the current game) in each game in a specific game state. Cumulative points are calculated according to the acquired information. Further, the main control circuit 91 acquires the number of remaining stocks of the AT (specialized zone) and the number of remaining games of the AT in each game in a specific gaming state, and also obtains the number of remaining stocks and the number of remaining games according to the acquired number of remaining stocks and the number of remaining games. , Calculate possession points. Then, the main control circuit 91 calculates the AT point from the accumulated points and the possession points. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 functions as a first numerical value calculating means, a second numerical value calculating means, and a third numerical value calculating means. Further, since the main control circuit 91 can consume the stock number of the AT (specialized zone) and add the remaining number of games of the AT, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game period determining means.

Further, since the main control circuit 91 changes the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of a specific gaming state such as AT when the AT point becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value, the main control circuit 91 functions as the extension information changing means. As the extension information regarding the extension of the game period in a specific gaming state, for example, the stocking of the special zone accompanying the fixed combination or the special zone stock lottery performed during AT can be used, and the fixed combination is effective. / Extension information can be changed by disabling it or changing the probability of winning the special zone stock lottery. Further, the main control circuit 91 performs various controls by comparing the AT points and the threshold values, and these various controls are the points (cumulative points) and the threshold values according to the number of medals actually paid out so far. It may be performed by comparing with, or it may be performed by comparing the points (possession points) according to the number of medals that can be awarded in the future with the threshold value, and the cumulative points and possession points may be compared. The total AT points may be compared with the threshold value.

Further, the main control circuit 91 determines the type of the definite combination that notifies the right 1st push order when the winning combination is determined according to the AT point, and the determined type of definite combination is determined as the winning combination. Then, the main control circuit 91 functions as a target combination determining means and a notifying means in order to notify the push order of the right, left, middle, or right, middle, and left. At this time, the main control circuit 91 gradually increases the types of the determinant combination that notifies the right 1st push order in order from the determinant combination with the largest privilege to be given (see FIG. 188 (B)).

Further, the main control circuit 91 can give a privilege according to the fixed combination when the fixed combination is valid at the time of winning the fixed combination, and when the fixed combination is invalidated, at the end of AT. Since the privilege can be given by the final addition lottery to be performed, the main control circuit 91 functions as a privilege granting means, a first privilege granting determining means, and a second privilege granting determining means. At this time, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not to invalidate the fixed combination according to the AT point in the game in which the fixed combination is won, and also performs the final addition lottery according to the AT point at the end of AT. Decide whether or not.

Further, since the main control circuit 91 can determine whether to display the jewel (red) or the jewel (white) in the history display window when the history combination "rare combination" is determined as the winning combination. The main control circuit 91 functions as a history type determining means. Then, in the pachislot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 101 displays the history information of the winning combination during the predetermined number of games in the history display window of the liquid crystal display, and displays the jewel (red) based on the history combination "rare role". Then, when it is determined, the jewel (red) is displayed on the history display window, so that the sub-control circuit 101 and the history display window of the liquid crystal display function as the history display means.
The main control circuit 91 determines whether or not to display the jewel (red) based on the history combination “rare combination” based on the AT point. Specifically, the lottery invalid lottery is performed based on the AT point, and when it is decided to invalidate the lottery, the lottery itself as to whether or not to display the jewel (red) is not performed, so that the main control circuit The 91 functions as an invalidation control means.

Further, when the main control circuit 91 decides to display the jewel (red) based on the history combination "rare role", the stock grant lottery of the special zone is won with high probability during the predetermined number of games thereafter. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 functions as a privilege giving means. Further, since the main control circuit 91 can generate a lock state in which the progress of the game is stopped when the stock is given by winning the stock grant lottery in the special zone, the main control circuit 91 is a lock control means. Functions as.

Further, since the main control circuit 91 counts the AT point with the counter for the AT point composed of two bytes of the upper byte and the lower byte, the main control circuit 91 functions as a two-byte counter.

[Special mode control during advantageous section]
The main control circuit 91 sets the special mode to ON at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and when the combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed in the state where the special mode is ON, the special mode is set to ON. Update to OFF. When the special mode is ON, the lottery result such as AT (specialized zone stock) lottery is disadvantageous for the player, and the probability of navigating the push order at the time of winning the push order small role is low. The playability described below relates to the control of the navigation of the push order by the special mode.

If you win the AT in the "normal" state, and then move to the "specialized zone preparation" state with the special mode ON, the push order navigation will change to the special mode in the "specialized zone preparation" state. Since it is performed with a corresponding probability (see FIG. 200), in the "specialized zone preparation" state, the ball ejection feeling differs depending on the special mode, and the ball ejection feeling becomes sharp.

In addition, the transition from the "specialized zone preparation" state to the "specialized zone" state, which functions as a notification state in which push order navigation is performed, is performed at the time of winning a normal rip or a special rip. The start is determined at (see FIG. 201). At this time, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the normal rip or the special rip is won, basically, a combination of symbols related to the replay other than the "XD rip" is displayed, so that the "specialization" functioning as a notification state is displayed. When the state shifts to the "zone" state, the special mode is updated to OFF. In this way, in the "specialized zone" state, the special mode is turned off, so the probability of navigating the pushing order when the push order small winning combination is won increases, and the special mode is ON in the "specialized zone preparation" state. Compared to the above, the ball ejection feeling is different, and the ball ejection feeling is sharp between the state of "specialized zone preparation" and the state of "specialized zone".

When the RT state is different, the main control circuit 91 can also perform stop control so as to display a combination of symbols of "XD lip" at the time of winning a normal lip or a special lip. That is, the main control circuit 91 can display a combination of symbols related to the replay (TL rip, etc.) other than the "XD rip" at the time of winning the normal rip in the inter-flag RT (3BET game inside the 2BET dedicated bonus). Stop control is performed, and in the RT state other than the RT between flags, the combination of the symbols of "XD rip" is displayed at the time of winning the normal rip, and the combination of the symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" cannot be displayed. To do.

When such control is performed, in the inter-flag RT, when the normal rip that triggers the start of the state of the "specialized zone" is won, the special mode is set according to the display of the combination of symbols related to the replay other than the "XD rip". While it is updated to OFF, in the RT state other than the RT between flags, the combination of the symbols of "XD rip" is displayed at the time of winning the normal rip, so when the state of "specialized zone" is started Even if there is, the special mode is kept ON. That is, the main control circuit 91 normally shifts from the "specialized zone preparation" state to the "specialized zone" state only when the lip is determined as the winning combination, but switches the special mode. Is not performed only when the normal rip is determined as the winning combination, but is performed when a combination of symbols related to the replay other than "XD rip" is displayed.

Then, the main control circuit 91 navigates the push order with a predetermined probability in the "specialized zone" state in which the special mode is ON, and is predetermined in the "specialized zone" state in which the special mode is OFF. By navigating the push order with a higher probability (more preferably 100% probability) than the probability of, it is possible to give a sharp feeling to the ball immediately after the start of the "specialized zone".

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a normal gaming state (predetermined gaming state) that is disadvantageous to the player such as a "normal" or "normally advantageous" state, and a "special feature" that is more advantageous to the player than these normal gaming states. Multiple gaming states including the state of the "specialized zone" (specific game state) and the state of the "specialized zone preparation" (standby game state), which is the waiting period until the state of the "specialized zone" starts. Have. Further, the pachislot machine 1 has a flag-to-flag RT in which the 2BET-dedicated bonus is carried over as a winning combination, and a non-flag-to-flag RT in which the bonus is not carried over as a winning combination. It should be noted that the probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination differs between the flag-to-flag RT and the non-flag-to-flag RT, and therefore, the pachislot machine 1 has a different flag that the probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination is different. It has a plurality of RT states including inter-flag RT and non-flag inter-flag RT.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a push order small combination (“F_batting order 1 bell A” to “F_batting order 6 special B”) that can notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode when the winning combination is determined. In the inter-flag RT, it is possible to display the combination of symbols (TL rip) related to the replay other than "XD rip", and in the non-flag RT, only the combination of the symbols of "XD rip" can be displayed, and "XD". Since the pachi-slot machine 1 has a role such as a normal rip that cannot display a combination of symbols related to the replay other than the "rip", the pachislot machine 1 has a notification target combination and a specific combination as a plurality of combinations.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 has a special mode, and in order to make the probability of navigating the correct push order different when the push order small winning combination is won, the probability of navigating the correct push order is different depending on the ON / OFF of the special mode. , It has a second notification mode (special mode OFF) in which the probability of navigating the correct pressing order is higher than that of the first notification mode.

Further, when the main control circuit 91 wins the AT lottery in the "normal" state, the gaming state can be shifted to the "specialized zone preparation" state by passing through the "AT precursor" state and the like. , When the start is decided by the special zone start lottery performed at the time of winning the normal rip or special rip in the state of "specialized zone preparation", the game state can be shifted to the state of "specialized zone", so the main The control circuit 91 functions as a game state control means.

Further, when the main control circuit 91 shifts from the "normal" state, which is a normal section, to the "specialized zone preparation" state, which is an advantageous section, the special mode can be set to ON, and the "specialized zone" is also set. When shifting from the "preparation" state to the "specialized zone" state (more specifically, a combination of symbols related to replays other than "XD rip" due to the winning of the normal rip that triggered the lottery of the special zone start lottery. Is displayed), the special mode can be set to OFF, so that the main control circuit 91 functions as a notification mode setting means.

Further, when the main control circuit 91 wins the push order small combination when the special mode is ON, it navigates the correct push order with a predetermined probability, and when the special mode is OFF, it becomes the push order small combination. If the prize is won, the main control circuit 91 functions as a notification means because the correct push order is navigated with a probability higher than a predetermined probability.

[Navigation control of 3 choices]
The playability described below relates to a control in which the navigation content on the main side and the navigation content on the sub side match when the three-choice combination is won. When navigating at the time of winning the three-choice combination, the main control circuit 91 acquires a navigation type that matches the three-choice push order from the navigation types provided for the six-choice push order. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 selects the navigation type "1" corresponding to the left middle right or the navigation type "2" corresponding to the left middle right at the time of winning the three-choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the left 1st order. At the time of winning the 3 choice combination in which the correct answer is pressed in the middle 1st order, the navigation type "3" corresponding to the middle left and right or the navigation type "4" corresponding to the middle right left is acquired, and the correct answer is pushed in the right order. At the time of winning the 1st three-choice combination, the navigation type "5" corresponding to the middle right and left or the navigation type "6" corresponding to the middle right and left is acquired. Then, the main control circuit 91 navigates the push order on the instruction monitor based on the acquired navigation type.

Then, the sub-control circuit 101 performs navigation according to the navigation type on the main side on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). Specifically, when the navigation type on the main side is "1", the sub-control circuit 101 displays the pressing order of left, middle, and right on the liquid crystal display, and the navigation type on the main side is "2". In that case, the push order of left and right is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and when the navigation type on the main side is "3", the push order of middle and left and right is displayed on the liquid crystal display and the navigation type on the main side is "3". If it is "4", the pressing order of middle right and left is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and if the navigation type on the main side is "5", the pressing order of right and left middle is displayed on the liquid crystal display. When the navigation type is "6", the right, middle, and left pressing order is displayed on the liquid crystal display. As a result, in this control, it is possible to match the navigation on the main side and the navigation on the sub side while performing the navigation of 6 choices in a dramatic manner when the 3-choice combination is won.

When navigating when the 6-choice combination is won, the main control circuit 91 acquires the navigation type according to the correct push order (6 choices) and navigates in the push order, and the sub-control circuit 101 navigates in the push order. , Navigation according to the navigation type on the main side is performed on the liquid crystal display.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means. Further, since the sub-control circuit 101 controls the effect related to the game, the sub-control circuit 101 functions as an effect control means.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 has a 3-choice combination and a 6-choice combination, and when the right 1st batting order is in the 3-choice combination, a predetermined combination of symbols (TL lip) is displayed and left. In the case of the 1st batting order, "F_purple 7 rip" that displays the combination of other symbols (purple 7 rip) is included, and the 6 choices include the case of the right and left middle push order. When a specific symbol combination (upper bell) is displayed in, and the specific symbol combination is not displayed when the push order is other than right, middle, and left, "F_Batting order 5 bell A" or when the push order is right, middle, and left. Since the pachislot machine 1 includes "F_batting order 6 bell A" in which a specific symbol combination (upper bell) is displayed and a specific symbol combination is not displayed when the pressing order is other than right, middle, and left. It has a first-choice combination and a second-choice combination as a plurality of combinations, and further, a specific first-choice combination as the first-choice combination and a specific second-choice combination as the second-choice combination. It has a second choice combination.

Further, since the main control circuit 91 can notify the push order via the instruction monitor and the sub control circuit 101 can notify the push order via the liquid crystal display (display unit 100), the main control circuit 91 can notify the push order. The instruction monitor functions as the main side notification means, and the sub control circuit 101 and the liquid crystal display function as the sub side notification means.

[Navigation control in CZ during AT]
Next, the playability related to the navigation control in the CZ during AT will be described. When the transition condition is satisfied in the "AT" state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state to the "AT in CZ" state. Since the main control circuit 91 does not navigate the correct push order when the push order small winning combination is won, the state of "AT in CZ" is more disadvantageous than the state of "AT" in terms of increasing medals. , The state of "CZ during AT" is more likely to be stocked with the special zone than the state of "AT". As a result, the profit (medals and specialized zone stock) given to the player in "AT in CZ" is kept within an appropriate range without impairing the playability of "AT in CZ", which is the extension of the period of "AT". be able to. In addition, by lowering the ball output rate in the state of "CZ during AT", the ratio can be passed to other parts, for example, the frequency of transition to the state of "CZ during AT" and "during AT". It is also possible to increase the degree of expectation of stock grant in the state of "CZ". In the present embodiment, the push order is not navigated in the "AT in CZ" state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of navigating the push order is lower than in the "AT" state. Just do it.

Further, in the "AT" state, the main control circuit 91 does not give stock of the special zone when the push order small winning combination to be notified is won (see FIG. 210), but "CZ during AT". In the state of "", the stock of the special zone may be given at the time of winning the push order small winning combination (see FIG. 215). In this way, when the push order small winning combination is won in the state of "AT middle CZ" where the probability of navigating the push order is low, it is possible to give stock of the special zone instead of the disadvantage of not navigating. Then, the player does not feel dissatisfied with the winning of the push order small role in the state of "AT in CZ", so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a normal gaming state (predetermined gaming state) that is disadvantageous to the player such as a "normal" or "normally advantageous" state, and a "normal gaming state" that is more advantageous to the player than these normal gaming states. It has the state of "AT" and "CZ during AT" (specific gaming state), and also has the state of "AT" (normal section) as a specific gaming state and the stock of the specialized zone rather than the state of "AT". Has a state of "CZ during AT" (additional section) in which is easily given. Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the number of medals (15 medals) to be paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct batting order is the number of medals to be paid out when the stop operation is performed in the incorrect batting order. It has "F_Batting Order Bell 1A" to "F_Batting Order Bell 6B" which are more notification target roles than (0 or 1).

Further, since the main control circuit 91 can notify the correct push order when the winning combination is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 functions as a notification means. At this time, in the state of "AT", the main control circuit 91 always (or with high probability) navigates the correct push order when the winning combination of the notification target wins, but in the state of "AT in CZ". , Navigating (or not navigating) the correct push order with a lower probability than during "AT".

Further, the main control circuit 91 can shift the gaming state to the "AT in CZ" state when the transition condition to the "AT in CZ" state is satisfied in the "AT" state, and the "AT in CZ" state. When the end condition is satisfied in the state of, the main control circuit 91 functions as an additional section control means because it is possible to end "CZ during AT" and shift to "AT". Further, in the state of "AT" or "CZ during AT", the main control circuit 91 can add stock of the special zone according to the internal winning combination (lottery type), and in particular, the "CZ during AT". In the state, the stock of the special zone can be given even when the winning combination of the notification target is won, so that the main control circuit 91 functions as an additional control means.

[History lottery method]
Subsequently, the playability of the history lottery method in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. The main control circuit 91 performs a history lottery according to the number of times the history combination is determined as the winning combination between predetermined games (between 5 games). The pachislot machine 1 has a history role "replay" and a history role "rare role" as such history roles, but the chance lip ("F_chance lip") has a history role "replay" and a history role "rare role". It belongs to both. Therefore, when the chance rip is decided as the winning role, both the number of the history role "replay" and the number of the history role "rare role" are added, and as a result, when the chance rip is won, the replay (ream) lottery is drawn. The condition and the lottery condition for the rare role (number) may be satisfied at the same time. When the two lottery conditions are satisfied in this way, the main control circuit 91 can give a privilege according to all the history combinations that satisfy the lottery conditions.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a chance lip (“F_chance lip”) that belongs to both the history role “replay” and the history role “rare role”. Further, since the main control circuit 91 stores the history information of the winning combination related to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination for a predetermined number of games (5 games), the main control circuit 91 functions as a history management means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 can give a privilege when the lottery condition of the replay (ream) is satisfied and the history lottery is won, and the privilege is given when the lottery condition of the rare role (number) is satisfied and the history lottery is won. Since it can be given, the main control circuit 91 functions as a privilege giving means. It should be noted that the main control circuit 91 can grant the benefits of both when the chance lip is won and the replay (ream) lottery condition and the rare combination (number) lottery condition are satisfied at the same time.

Further, since the sub-control circuit 101 displays the history information of the winning combination during the predetermined number of games in the history display window of the liquid crystal display, the sub-control circuit 101 and the history display window of the liquid crystal display function as history display means. ..

[Fifth Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 243. The same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment and various modifications will not be described in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples, and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples can be similarly applied. The feature 1 can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment shown below.

In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment shown below, like the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, is playing 3BET games while carrying over the bonus (BB1) dedicated to 2BET while playing 3BET. It is an AT machine that realizes the AT function by switching between the notified state and the non-notified state.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
First, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225.

[Design arrangement table]
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 221 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

[Design code table]
Further, as shown in FIG. 221, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 221 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "replay A", "replay B", "bell", "watermelon A", and "watermelon B". , "Cherry" and "Blank", and 1 byte of data is assigned to each.

[Internal lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 222, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. When the 3BET bonus is not operating, the "3BET, general" column is referred to, while the 3BET bonus is inside, the "3BET, inside" column is referred to, and when the 3BET bonus is operating, "3BET, BB". The column is referred to, the "2BET, general" column is referred to while the 2BET bonus is not operating, and the "2BET, internal" column is referred to during the 2BET bonus internal. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game progresses by playing the game of 3BET during the inside of the bonus dedicated to 2BET (state between flags), so basically, the internal lottery corresponding to the inside of 3BET. The table is referenced and no other internal lottery table is used.

In FIG. 222, when the combination indicated by "No. 1 (F_normal lip)" to "No. 45 (F_BB2)" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is described in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the same figure. Derivation of combinations of various symbols is allowed (winning is allowed). The contents of the symbol combinations described in the "corresponding symbol combinations" column are shown in the symbol combination tables of FIGS. 223 and 224. Further, in FIG. 225, when each combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols actually winning among the combinations of symbols permitted to win a prize (correspondence between the internal winning combination and the display combination). ) Is shown.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224, a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the symbol combination table, combinations of a plurality of symbols are defined in advance. In addition, in FIG. 223 and FIG. 224, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this constitutes the combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Show that. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effective line is the center line.

In FIGS. 223 and 224, the combination of symbols corresponding to "BB1" and "BB2" is a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus, and the combination of symbols corresponding to "RP01" to "RP18" is the operation of replay. It is a combination of symbols related to. Further, the combination of symbols corresponding to "NM01" to "NM43" is a combination of symbols related to the payout of medals.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination (combination of symbols actually won), and the like in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 225 shows the correspondence in the 3BET game in which the bonus dedicated to 2BET is carried over as the internal winning combination, and the correspondence in other states is omitted.

In the figure, "normal lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_CL lip (RP01)", and is a general term for the symbols "replay (symbols" replay A "and" replay B "" along the center line (CL). ) ”Is displayed side by side. The "reach eye lip" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_reach eye lip A1 (RP05)" to "S_reach eye lip B3 (RP15)". Further, the "cherry arrival reach eye" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_reach eye lip C1 (RP16)" to "S_reach eye lip C3 (RP18)".

Further, in the figure, "CL" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "C_CL bell (NM09)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the center line (CL). Yes, "TL" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_TL bell (NM10)", and is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the top line (TL). "BL" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" and "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)", and the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the bottom line (BL). It is a combination of. Further, "XU" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "C_XU bell 1 (NM06)" and "C_XU bell 2 (NM07)", and the symbols "bells" are lined up along the cross-up line (XU). It is a combination of symbols to be displayed, and "XD" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_XD bell (NM08)", and the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the crossdown line (XD). "Small V" is a combination of symbols related to the combination name "S_Small V Bell (NM11)", and the upper (left reel), middle (middle reel), and upper (right reel) are small. It is a combination of symbols in which symbols "bells" are displayed side by side in a V-shape (small V) shape.

Further, in the figure, "XU (BAR)" refers to "XU (BAR)" when a stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. It means that the combination of the symbols of "XU" is displayed. Further, "BL (blue 7)" is "BL" when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7" at the symbol position "13" in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. It means that the combination of symbols of is displayed.
Therefore, in the game in which "F_Batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell A2" are determined as winning roles, the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" is in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. When the stop operation is performed aiming at, the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the bottom line (BL), and the symbol position "13" is displayed in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7", the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the cross-up line (XU).

Further, in the figure, "BL (BAR)" refers to "BL (BAR)" when a stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" in the upper region corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. It means that the combination of the symbols of "BL" is displayed. Further, "XU (blue 7)" is "XU" when a stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7" at the symbol position "13" in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. It means that the combination of the symbols of is displayed.
Therefore, in the game in which "F_Batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell B2" are determined as winning roles, the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" is in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. When the stop operation is performed aiming at, the symbol "bells" are displayed side by side along the cross-up line (XU), and the symbol position "13" is displayed in the upper area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7" of, the symbols "bells" are displayed side by side along the bottom line (BL).

Further, in the figure, the “middle stage check” is a combination of symbols related to the combination name “S_middle stage check (NM12)”, and is a combination of symbols in which the symbol “cherry” is displayed in the middle stage of the left reel. Further, "Kakuche" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_Kakuche 1 (NM16)" and "S_Kakuche 2 (NM17)", and the symbol "cherry" is displayed on the upper or lower row of the left reel. It is a combination of symbols to be made. Further, "off" is a combination of symbols in which none of the combinations defined in FIGS. 223 and 224 is displayed.

Further, in the figure, "watermelon" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_CL watermelon (NM01)" to "S_XD watermelon (NM03)", and can be any of a center line, a cross-up line, and a cross-down line. It is a combination of symbols in which the symbols "watermelon (collective term for the symbols" watermelon A "and" watermelon B ")" are displayed side by side. Further, in the figure, "watermelon spill" is a combination of symbols related to the combination names "S_watermelon F1" to "S_watermelon F3", and is a combination of symbols displayed when the watermelon is dropped. Further, "1 sheet (1/2)" or "1 sheet (1/4)" is inappropriate because a combination of "1 sheet" symbols is displayed when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. In some cases, it means "off".

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the fifth embodiment]
Subsequently, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. 226 and 227 are transition flows of the ball ejection state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a diagram showing an outline of the ball ejection state and the game state in a list. The ball ejection state and the score rank shown in FIGS. 226 to 228 are controlled by the main control board 71 (main control circuit 91).

As shown in FIG. 226, the ball ejection state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control circuit 91, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) is turned on by the control of the main control circuit 91. Will be done. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section depending on the off state, and notifies the player that he / she is staying in the advantageous section depending on the lit state. However, in the present embodiment, even if the player stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is possible to suppress the notification of the necessary stop operation information to the player depending on the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are (unacceptable) and acceptable states.

In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 controls the ball ejection state by performing various processes, and the various processes for controlling the ball ejection state are roughly classified into a lottery process (lottery process) and a lottery process. It is divided into processing that does not depend on (other processing).

In the normal section, "normal" is executed as the ball ejection state. "Normal" is the initial state after the power is turned on or after the setting is changed, and after the end of the advantageous section, all variables related to the advantageous section are cleared, and the state shifts to this "normal" state. In "normal", navigation is not performed, and when the rare role is determined as the winning combination, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed. In this embodiment, the rare role means "F_cherry 1 (No. 16)" to "F_watermelon 2 (No. 19)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is a definite role in addition to the rare role, but in the present embodiment, the definite role is "F_reach eye lip A1 (No. 2)" to "F_fixed chelip 2 (No. 10)". ) ”“ F_middle cherry (No.15) ”.

If you win in the advantageous section transition lottery performed in the "normal" state, you will win the advantageous section. There are two types of advantageous section winnings: "Gase precursor winning" and "Bonus winning". In the case of "Bonus winning", the next game transition lottery is executed at the time of bonus. There are "via precursor" and "direct bonus" in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, and it becomes "bonus win" in the advantageous section transition lottery, and when winning "via precursor" in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, "book" It becomes a precursory winning. In addition, if the "bonus win" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery, and the "direct bonus" is won in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, the "direct hit win" is obtained. In addition, when the fixed winning combination is determined as the winning combination in the "normal" state, it becomes the "direct hit winning combination" by the fixed combination winning combination processing (without performing the advantageous section transition lottery).

In the case of "Gase Omen Win", the next game shifts to "Omen (Gase Omen)", and in the case of "Hon Omen Win", the next game shifts to "Omen (Hon Omen)". To do. On the other hand, in the case of "direct hit winning", the next game shifts to the "first bonus" as a ball-out state. In addition, in the case of "this omen winning" and "direct hit winning", a normal bonus type lottery is further performed to determine the type of "first bonus".

In this embodiment, there are a "first bonus" and a "ream bonus" as the payout state, but these are games without the operation of the accessory (without changing the lottery coefficient for the internal winning combination). It is a so-called pseudo-bonus in which the player is in an advantageous state by being notified of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, if you win a rare role in the "normal" state, you will have a chance of a "first bonus" that is a pseudo bonus, and if you win a fixed role in the "normal" state, you will get a "first bonus" that is a pseudo bonus. Determine. When the role of rare is won, there is a possibility of winning the "first bonus", but there is also the possibility of not winning, so the "first bonus" in this "precursor" state is passed through the "precursor" state. A production that informs the success or failure of. On the other hand, when the winning combination is won, the winning of the "first bonus" is fixed, so the state immediately shifts to the "first bonus" state without going through the "precursor" state.

Subsequently, in the advantageous section, "Gase precursor", "Main precursor", "First bonus", "CZ", "CZ medium precursor", and "Continuous bonus" can be executed as the main payout states. In the advantageous section, a navigation (bell navigation) that can display the combination of symbols of the maximum number of payouts is generated at the time of winning the push order small combination (in this embodiment, "F_batting order 1 bell A1" to "F_batting order 6 bell B2"). It is possible, and the main control circuit 91 does not perform bell navigation in the "gase precursor", "main precursor", "CZ", and "CZ middle precursor" in the advantageous section, and performs bell navigation in the "first bonus" and "ream bonus". .. The main control circuit 91 may also perform bell navigation in "CZ" and "CZ middle precursor". The above-mentioned limiter is provided in the advantageous section, and when the limiter reaches, for example, 1500G after the advantageous section is started, the limit processing by the game number limiter is executed, and the difference number after the advantageous section is started is, for example, 2400. When it reaches, the limit processing by the number limiter is executed. As a result, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is shifted to.

There is a possibility that "Gase Omen" and "Hon Omen" will shift when the rare role is determined as the winning role in "Normal". "Gase Omen" and "Hon Omen" are the production sections of one game, and the production that informs whether or not the "first bonus" is won is executed according to the winning of the rare role. The "Gase Omen" is a production section (precursor) when the "first bonus" is not won, and a production (defeat, etc.) is executed to inform that the "first bonus" is not won. On the contrary, the "main sign" is the production section (precursor) when the "first bonus" is won, and the production (winning, etc.) that informs that the "first bonus" is won is executed. .. When one game is played in the "Gase precursor", the main control circuit 91 ends the advantageous section and shifts to the "normal" state. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 generates a locked state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the "first bonus" state when one game is played in the "main omen".

In the present embodiment, the "gase precursor" and the "main precursor" are in the state of one game, but the "gase precursor" and the "main precursor" are not limited to one game, and the predetermined number of games. It may be between. In this case, when the main control circuit 91 is played a predetermined number of times, the main control circuit 91 shifts from the "gase omen" or the "main omen" to another ball ejection state, and the sub control circuit 101 is in the predetermined number of games. , Perform a production to inform you that you have won the "first bonus".

Subsequently, the "first bonus" shifts to the case where the "precursor" is completed, or when the "normal" is "direct hit win". The "first bonus" includes REG (first REG) and BIG (first BIG), and the lottery of the normal bonus type lottery performed in the case of "main omen winning" and "direct hit winning" in "normal". It is sorted according to the result. The expected value of medals obtained by the player in the "first bonus" differs between REG and BIG, and the expected value of medals obtained by the player is higher in BIG than in REG. Further, in the case of BIG, after that, it always shifts to the "CZ" state, whereas in the case of REG, it basically returns to the "normal" state without shifting to the "CZ". I will end up.

At the start of the "first bonus", the main control circuit 91 performs a reel effect, and a predetermined combination of symbols is automatically displayed regardless of the player's stop operation. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 automatically rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the start of the "first REG", and thereafter, a combination of symbols in which the symbols "BAR" are lined up in a straight line (BAR-). BAR-BAR) is displayed, and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are automatically stopped. Further, the main control circuit 91 automatically rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the start of the "first BIG", and thereafter, a combination of symbols in which the symbols "blue 7" are arranged in a straight line (blue 7-blue). The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are automatically stopped so that 7-blue 7) is displayed.

The "first REG" is a pseudo-bonus that continues for 12 games, and a promotion lottery is executed. When 12 games have passed without winning the promotion lottery, the "first REG" ends and the state shifts to the "normal" state. At this time, the advantageous section also ends with the end of the "first REG", and the locked state occurs at the end of the advantageous section as described above. In addition, when the promotion lottery is won, the "ream bonus" starts immediately after 12 games have passed from the start and the "first REG" is completed (0 game ream).

The "first BIG" is a pseudo-bonus that includes a "small role game" and a "JAC game" and ends when a total of 25 "small role games" are executed. The "small role game" is the initial state when the "first BIG" is started, and continues for 25 games. In the "small role game", JAC-IN processing is performed when the replay role is won, and the game shifts from the "small role game" to the "JAC game". The replay combination that triggers the JAC-IN process is "F_normal lip (No. 1)" to "F_confirmed chelip 2 (No. 10)". That is, all of the replay roles of the present embodiment are replay roles that trigger the JAC-IN process. The "JAC game" shifts when the JAC-IN process is performed in the "small role game" and continues for four games.

When four games are played in the "JAC game", the game shifts to the "small role game" again, and each time a replay role is won in the "small role game", the game shifts to the "JAC game" by JAC-IN processing. The "first BIG" ends when the total number of games played in the "small role game" reaches 25, and the game shifts to the "CZ" or "ream bonus" state. The end condition of the "first BIG" is the number of games played in the "small role game", and does not include the number of games played in the "JAC game". In addition, since the number of games played in the "JAC game" is not included in the number of games played in the "small role game", if a large number of games can be transferred to the "JAC game", the number of games in the "first BIG" will be increased by that amount. Therefore, many medals can be expected to be paid out.

The "first BIG" has a game property of earning points and aiming for a high rank, and points are added and lottery is performed in each game of the "small role game" and the "JAC game". In the "small role game" and the "JAC game", the "JAC game" is set so that more points can be obtained. Therefore, if a large number of "JAC games" can be transferred, it will be advantageous not only for paying out medals but also for earning points.

At the end of the "first BIG" when the total number of games played in the "small role game" reaches 25, the score rank distribution process is executed. In this score rank distribution process, the result of the "first BIG" is ranked based on the points earned during the "first BIG" (the sum of the points earned in the "small role game" and the points earned in the "JAC game"). Attach. The score rank is information that defines the winning expectation of the "ream bonus" in the "CZ" after the end of the "first BIG", and is "rank E", "rank D", "rank C", and "rank B" in order from the lowest rank. "Rank A" and "Rank S" are provided.

If the scoring rank is "Rank S", the "ream bonus" starts immediately after the "first BIG" ends without going through the "CZ" (0 game ream). In this case, the main control circuit 91 executes the bonus type lottery at the time of S rank, and determines the type of the "ream bonus" in which 0 games are continuous.

Subsequently, the "CZ" shifts when the "first BIG" or "ream bonus" ends. "CZ" and "normal" are the same in that the game is played aiming at a pseudo bonus, but "CZ" is a chance zone (CZ) in which it is easier to win a pseudo bonus than "normal", 32. Continue between games. In addition, "normal" plays a game aiming at a "first bonus" consisting of REG or BIG, and "CZ" plays a game aiming at a "ream bonus" consisting only of BIG.

In "CZ", a bonus lottery during CZ is executed. This CZ medium bonus lottery corresponds to the advantageous section transition lottery in "normal", but the advantageous section transition lottery in "normal" is not executed only when the rare role is won, but the CZ medium bonus lottery in "CZ" is It is also executed when a role other than a rare role (all roles) is won. There are two types of winnings in the bonus lottery during CZ: "Gase omen winning" and "Bonus winning". In the case of "bonus winning", the next game transition lottery is executed at the time of bonus. There are "via precursor" and "direct bonus" in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, and it becomes "bonus win" in the bonus lottery during CZ, and when winning "via precursor" in the next game transition lottery at the time of bonus, "book" It becomes a precursory winning. In addition, if the bonus lottery during CZ wins the "bonus win" and the next game transition lottery at the time of the bonus wins the "direct bonus", it becomes the "direct hit win".

In the case of "Gase omen", the game shifts to "CZ medium omen (Gase omen)" from the next game, and in the case of "this omen", "CZ medium omen (this omen)" is released from the next game. ) ”. On the other hand, in the case of "direct hit winning", the next game shifts to "ream bonus" as a ball-out state. Further, in the case of "this omen winning" and "direct hit winning", a bonus type lottery at the time of CZ is further performed, and the type of "ream bonus" is determined.

"CZ Nakamoto Omen" shifts to the case of "Gase Omen Win", and "CZ Nakamoto Omen" shifts to the case of "Honjo Omen". "CZ Nakagase Omen" and "CZ Nakamoto Omen" are production sections of one game, and an effect of notifying whether or not a "ream bonus" is won is executed according to the winning combination. The "CZ Nakagase Omen" is a production section (precursor) when the "ream bonus" is not won, and a production (defeat, etc.) is executed to inform that the "ream bonus" is not won. On the contrary, "CZ Nakamoto Omen" is the production section (precursor) when the "ream bonus" is won, and the production (winning, etc.) that informs that the "ream bonus" is won is executed. Will be done.

When one game is played in "CZ Nakamoto Omen", the ball ejection state is shifted to the "CZ" state, and when one game is played in "CZ Nakamoto Omen", the "ream bonus" The payout state is transferred to the state. The "CZ" ends when a total of 32 games are played, but the number of games in the "CZ middle precursor" is not included in the number of games in the "CZ". In the "CZ", 32 games are played, and if the bonus lottery during the CZ is not won in the game, the "CZ" ends and the payout state is shifted to the "normal" state. Since the advantageous section also ends with the end of the "CZ", the main control circuit 91 generates a locked state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the "CZ (advantageous section)".

Subsequently, the "ream bonus" shifts to the case where the "CZ Nakamoto omen" ends. There are SBIG (single BIG) and WBIG (double BIG) in the "ream bonus", and they are distributed according to the lottery result of the CZ bonus type lottery performed at the time of winning the "ream bonus". The expected value of the points to be acquired in the "ream bonus" is different between SBIG and WBIG, and the expected value of the points to be acquired by WBIG is higher than that of SBIG. The other playability of SBIG and WBIG is the same.

At the start of the "ream bonus", the main control circuit 91 performs a reel effect, and a predetermined combination of symbols is automatically displayed regardless of the player's stop operation. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 automatically rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the start of SBIG, and after that, a combination of symbols in which the symbols "red 7" are single-aligned (for example, only the center line). The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are automatically stopped so that red 7-red 7-red 7) is displayed along the line. Further, the main control circuit 91 automatically rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the start of WBIG, and thereafter, a combination of symbols in which the symbols "red 7" are double-aligned (for example, a center line and a cross-up line). The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are automatically stopped so that red 7-red 7-red 7) is displayed along the line.

The "ream bonus" and the "first BIG" have the same playability, and the "ream bonus" includes the "small role game" and the "JAC game", and a total of 25 "small role games" are executed. It is a pseudo bonus that ends with. The "small role game" and the "JAC game" are as described in the above-mentioned "first bonus", and points are added and lottery is performed in each game of the "small role game" and the "JAC game".

The "ream bonus" ends when the total number of games played in the "small role game" reaches 25, and at the end of the "ream bonus", the score rank distribution process is executed and during the "ream bonus". Rank the results of the "ream bonus" based on the points earned. When the scoring rank is "Rank S", the "ream bonus" starts immediately after the "ream bonus" ends without going through the "CZ" (0 game ream). In this case, the main control circuit 91 executes the bonus type lottery at the time of S rank, and determines the type of the "ream bonus" in which 0 games are continuous.

If the scoring rank is other than "Rank S", the ball-out state is shifted to the "CZ" state at the end of the "ream bonus", and then the expected value according to the privilege rank in the "CZ" is " A game aiming at "ream bonus" is performed. As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game property in which the CZ and the pseudo bonus (first bonus and consecutive bonus) loop, and in particular, the Pachislot machine 1 in the pseudo bonus is in the CZ according to the result (score rank). It has a playability that changes the bonus expectation.

As shown in FIG. 228, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment having such specifications, the deterministic combination is effective in the ball ejection states "normal", "gase precursor", "CZ", and "CZ middle gaze precursor". Be controlled. Specifically, when the fixed winning combination is determined as the winning combination in the "normal" and "CZ" states, the main control circuit 91 becomes a "direct hit winning combination" and appears in the "first bonus" and "continuous bonus" states. Transition the ball state. In addition, when the definite combination is determined as the winning combination in the state of "Gase precursor" and "CZ middle Gase precursor", the main control circuit 91 rewrites the type of the precursor to this precursor, and after that, the "first bonus" and "ream" The payout state is transferred to the "bonus" state.

On the other hand, in the ball ejection state "honen omen", "first BIG", "CZ Nakamoto omen", and "ream bonus", the fixed combination is controlled to be invalid. When the fixed combination is controlled to be invalid, the main control circuit 91 sets the pressing order in which the combination of symbols (reach eye lip, reach eye with cherry, middle stage check) corresponding to the fixed combination is not displayed. Notify. In addition, in the ball-out state "first REG", it is controlled so that only the first fixed combination in the same "first REG" is valid, and the second and subsequent fixed combinations in the same "first REG" are invalid. Is controlled by.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination and lottery type]
Subsequently, FIG. 229 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the lottery type. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery based on the internal winning combination, but if the lottery result is provided for each combination, the amount of data required for one lottery is enormous. Become. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of combinations are first grouped into a ball ejection flag, a lottery type is determined based on the ball ejection flag, and various lottery is performed based on the determined lottery type. For example, "F_Batting order 6 bell B2" is grouped into the ball ejection flag "Batting order bell B (No. 19)", and based on this batting order flag "Batting order bell B", the lottery type A is No. 4 "Batting order bell B" was decided, and No. 1 was selected as the lottery type B. The "batting order bell" of 3 is decided. Then, various lottery is performed with reference to these lottery types A and B.

[Navigation type in each state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 230, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the navigation type set by the main control circuit 91 at the time of winning the push order combination will be described. In the figure, the navigation type "1" is the navigation type that notifies the player of batting order 1 (left, middle, right), and the navigation type "2" is the batting order 2 (left, right, middle) to the player. The navigation type to notify, the navigation type "3" is the navigation type to notify the player of batting order 3 (middle left and right), and the navigation type "4" is the batting order 4 (middle right left) to the player. The navigation type to notify, the navigation type "5" is the navigation type to notify the player of batting order 5 (right, middle, left), and the navigation type "6" is the batting order 6 (right, middle, left) to the player. This is the type of navigation to be notified. Further, the navigation type "lottery" means that the navigation types "1" to "6" are drawn and determined. Further, in the figure, "state 1" refers to the case where the fixed combination is "valid" and the push order instruction is "present", and "state 2" means the case where the fixed combination is "invalid" and the push order instruction is "present". To say.

[Various data tables used to control the ball ejection state]
Next, the configurations of various data tables used in controlling the ball ejection state will be described. The various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 refers to these various data tables to perform various lottery.

[Normal_Advantageous section transition lottery table]
First, the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 231. The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when the advantageous section transition lottery is performed for each unit game in the "normal" state (normal section). The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the advantageous section transition lottery for each lottery type A. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 draws an advantageous section only when the rare role (“F_cherry 1”, “F_cherry 2”, “F_watermelon 1”, “F_watermelon 2”) is won. And do not perform the lottery when winning other roles.

When the "non-winning" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "normal" state without shifting the ball ejection state. Further, when the "Gase precursor" is determined as a result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "normal" to "gase precursor". Further, when the "bonus" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 subsequently refers to the next game transition lottery table at the time of normal_bonus shown in FIG. At the same time, the type of the "first bonus" is determined by referring to the normal_normal time bonus type lottery table shown in FIG. 233.

[Normal_bonus next game transition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 232, the next game transition lottery table at the time of normal_bonus will be described. Normal_bonus time The next game transition lottery table will be a fixed combination ("F_reach eye lip A1 (No. 2)" to "F_fixed chelip" when the "bonus" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery or in the "normal" state. 2 (No. 10) ”and“ F_middle cherry (No. 15) ”) are referred to when winning, and are used when determining the payout state of the transfer destination according to the internal winning combination (lottery type B). .. Normal_at the time of bonus The next game transition lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result regarding the ball output state of the next game for each lottery type B.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 draws a lottery regarding the payout state of the next game only when the rare combination or the fixed combination is won, and does not perform the lottery when the other combination is won. When the main control circuit 91 determines "via the omen" as the lottery result, the ball output state of the next game is changed from "normal" to "this omen", and the "direct bonus" is determined as the lottery result. In that case, the ball output state of the next game is changed from "normal" to "first bonus".

[Normal_Normal bonus type lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 233, the normal_normal time bonus type lottery table will be described. The normal_normal time bonus type lottery table is referred to when the "bonus" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery or when the fixed winning combination is won in the "normal" state, and according to the internal winning combination (lottery type A). It is used when determining the type of "first bonus". The normal_normal time bonus type lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result regarding the type lottery of the "first bonus" for each lottery type A. The main control circuit 91 determines the type of "first bonus" as "REG" when "REG" is determined as the lottery result, and "first time" when "BIG" is determined as the lottery result. Determine the type of "bonus" as "BIG".

[CZ_CZ medium bonus lottery table]
Subsequently, the bonus lottery table in CZ_CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 234. The CZ_CZ medium bonus lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a transition lottery to the "continuous bonus" based on the internal winning combination (lottery type A) for each unit game in the "CZ" state. The CZ_CZ medium bonus lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the transition lottery to the "ream bonus" for each score rank and lottery type A in the "first bonus" (or the immediately preceding "ream bonus"). ..

When the "non-winning" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the "CZ" state without shifting the ball ejection state. Further, when the "Gase precursor" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state of the next game from "CZ" to "CZ middle Gase precursor". Further, when the "bonus" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 subsequently determines the payout state of the transfer destination by referring to the next game transition lottery table at the time of CZ_bonus shown in FIG. 235. At the same time, the type of the "ream bonus" is determined with reference to the CZ_CZ bonus type lottery table shown in FIG. 236.

[CZ_bonus next game transition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 235, the next game transition lottery table at the time of CZ_bonus will be described. At the time of CZ_bonus The next game transition lottery table is referred to when the "bonus" is won in the transition lottery to the "ream bonus", and the payout state of the transition destination is determined according to the internal winning combination (lottery type B). Used when. At the time of CZ_bonus, the next game transition lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result regarding the ball output state of the next game for each lottery type B. When "via precursor" is determined as the lottery result, the main control circuit 91 shifts the payout state of the next game from "CZ" to "CZ Nakamoto precursor", and the lottery result is "direct bonus". If it is decided, the payout state of the next game is changed from "CZ" to "ream bonus".

[CZ_CZ bonus type lottery table]
Subsequently, the bonus type lottery table at the time of CZ_CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 236. The CZ_CZ bonus type lottery table is referred to when the "bonus" is won in the transition lottery to the "ream bonus", and when determining the type of the "ream bonus" according to the internal winning combination (lottery type A). Used. The CZ_CZ bonus type lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result regarding the type lottery of the "ream bonus" for each lottery type A. The main control circuit 91 determines the type of "ream bonus" as "SBIG" when "SBIG" is determined as the lottery result, and "ream" when "WBIG" is determined as the lottery result. Determine the type of "bonus" as "WBIG".

As shown in FIGS. 231 to 236, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various lottery processes in the "normal" state and various lottery processes in the "CZ" state correspond to each other. That is, the normal_bonus next game transition lottery table of FIG. 231 corresponds to the CZ_CZ medium bonus lottery table of FIG. 234, and the normal_bonus next game transition lottery table of FIG. It corresponds to the next game transition lottery table, and the normal_normal time bonus type lottery table of FIG. 233 corresponds to the CZ_CZ time bonus type lottery table of FIG. 236. However, as can be seen by comparing FIG. 231 and FIG. 234, the winning expectation of the pseudo bonus (first bonus or consecutive bonus) is higher in the "CZ" state than in the "normal" state, and in particular, the "normal" state. In the state of "", the pseudo-bonus can be won only in the rare role or higher, whereas in the state of "CZ", there is a possibility of winning the pseudo-bonus even in the replay or bell.

[Flow of games in BIG and CZ]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in BIG and CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 237. First, the flow of the game during BIG will be described with reference to FIG. 237 (A). As described above, in the present embodiment, the BIG (pseudo-bonus) includes the first BIG of the first bonus and the SBIG and WBIG of the consecutive bonuses, but the playability is the same in any of the BIGs.

As shown in FIG. 237 (A), the BIG is composed of a small role game and a JAC game, and when the JAC-IN process is performed in the small role game, the game shifts to the JAC game, and four games have elapsed in the JAC game. , Move to a small role game. In both the small role game and the JAC game, points are earned for each unit game based on the internal winning combination (lottery type B). However, the JAC game has a higher expectation of earning points than the small role game, and if more JAC games can be played, the points earned in the BIG will increase.

At the end of the BIG, the score rank is set according to the total points earned during the BIG. FIG. 237 (B) is a table showing the correspondence between the total value of the acquired points and the score rank. The main control circuit 91 sets the score rank "Rank E" when the total value of the points acquired during the BIG is "0 to 49 points", and sets the score rank "Rank E" when the total value is "50 to 99 points". Set the score rank "Rank D", set the score rank "Rank C" if it is "100 to 199 points", and set the score rank "Rank B" if it is "200 to 299 points". If it is "300 to 499 points", the score rank "Rank A" is set, and if it is "500 points or more", the score rank "Rank S" is set.

The score rank is information that defines the winning expectation of the consecutive bonus in CZ after the end of BIG, and as shown in FIG. 237 (C), the winning expectation of the consecutive bonus is the lowest in "Rank E", followed by Then, the higher the order is, "Rank D", "Rank C", "Rank B", and "Rank A". In addition, when the scoring rank is "Rank S", the consecutive bonus is started immediately after the end of BIG without going through the CZ (0 game consecutive).

Subsequently, FIG. 237 (D) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the CZ. When points are earned in the initial bonus or consecutive bonus, the score rank is set based on the points earned. During CZ, a lottery to shift to a consecutive bonus is performed according to the score rank, and if this lottery is won, the lottery shifts to a consecutive bonus, and the CZ and the consecutive bonus loop. On the other hand, if the CZ ends without winning the transition lottery to the consecutive bonus, the loop between the CZ and the consecutive bonus ends, and the process shifts to normal.

[BIG_point addition lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 238, the BIG_point addition lottery table will be described. The BIG_point addition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a point addition lottery based on the internal winning combination (lottery type B) for each unit game in the state of "first BIG" or "continuous bonus". In the "small role game" of the "first BIG", the "small role game, first time" column is referred to, and in the "JAC game" of the "first BIG", the "JAC game, first time" column is referred to. In addition, in the "small role game" of "ream bonus (SBIG)", the "small role game, SBIG" column is referred to, and in the "JAC game" of "ream bonus (SBIG)", the "JAC game, SBIG" column. Is referred to, in the "small role game" of "ream bonus (WBIG)", the "small role game, WBIG" column is referred to, and in the "JAC game" of "ream bonus (WBIG)", "JAC game, WBIG". Refer to the column.

The BIG_point addition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result regarding the point addition lottery for each type of BIG, the state in BIG, and the lottery type B. The main control circuit 91 counts the total value of the acquired points in the BIG by adding the points according to the lottery result to a predetermined counter that counts the acquired points in the BIG.

As shown in the figure, in the "small role game" and the "JAC game", the "JAC game" has a larger number of points to be added, and the WBIG has a larger number of points to be added than the SBIG. In the present embodiment, the number of points to be added is different between SBIG and WBIG only during the "small role game", and the number of points to be added is the same during the "JAC game", but the number is limited to this. Instead, even during the "JAC game", the number of points added by WBIG may be larger than that of SBIG.

[Bonus type lottery table when reaching BIG_S rank]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 239, the bonus type lottery table when the BIG_S rank is reached will be described. The bonus type lottery table when BIG_S rank is reached is referred to when "S rank" is set according to the points acquired during BIG, and is used when determining the type of "ream bonus" for 0 games in a row. The bonus type lottery table when the BIG_S rank is reached defines the lottery value information about the lottery result regarding the type lottery of the "ream bonus". The main control circuit 91 determines the type of "ream bonus" as "SBIG" when "SBIG" is determined as the lottery result, and "ream" when "WBIG" is determined as the lottery result. Determine the type of "bonus" as "WBIG".

[REG_promotion lottery table]
Subsequently, the REG_promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 240. The REG_promotion lottery table is a table that is referred to when a promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination (lottery type A) for each unit game in the state of "first REG". The REG_promotion lottery table defines the lottery value information for the promotion lottery for each lottery type A. The main control circuit 91 does not perform any processing when "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, and when "winning" is determined as the lottery result, the "first REG" After the end, the "ream bonus" is started (0 game ream). The main control circuit 91 does not perform the promotion lottery during the "first REG" after winning the promotion lottery once, and at the end of the "first REG" winning the promotion lottery, BIG_S shown in FIG. 239. Bonus type when reaching rank Refer to the lottery table to determine the type of "ream bonus" for 0 games in a row.

[Summary of playability of the pachislot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment has been described above, but the playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is summarized as follows.

[Points earned during BIG and consecutive villas]
As described above in FIG. 237, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during BIG (pseudo-bonus (AT)), points are acquired for each unit game based on the internal winning combination (lottery type B), and the BIG At the end, the score rank is distributed according to the total value of the points earned during BIG. Then, in the CZ after the end of BIG, a lottery for shifting to BIG (consecutive bonus) is performed according to this score rank, and if the lottery is won, the game shifts to BIG and points are acquired again. In this way, the degree of expectation of returning to BIG changes according to the number of points in BIG, so for the player, it is not only possible to shift from CZ to BIG, but many points can be earned. Since the game will be concentrated on the game during BIG, the interest of the game will be improved.

In addition, the BIG is composed of a small role game and a JAC game, and in the JAC game, more points can be obtained than in the small role game. For the player, since the flow of the subsequent game differs depending on whether the game is a small role game or a JAC game, the playability is further diversified and the interest of the game is improved. The JAC game shifts to the small role game by winning the replay role in the small role game (JAC-IN processing), and shifts to the small role game when four games are played in the JAC game. Further, the BIG ends when a total of 25 games are played in the small role game, but the number of games played in the JAC game is not included in the number of games played in the small role game. Therefore, if you can move to the JAC game, BIG will not end during the JAC game, and you can get a lot of points during the JAC game, so the more times you move to the JAC game, the more points you can get. The score rank will also be higher, and as a result, you can expect a BIG (ream bonus) villa.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has SBIG and WBIG as the types of consecutive bonuses, and WBIG can acquire more points than SBIG. For the player, the expected value of the points to be earned differs depending on the type of the consecutive bonus, and as a result, the expected degree of the BIG (ream bonus) consecutive villa is different. Is improved. In addition, the distribution between SBIG and WBIG is performed when the consecutive bonus is won in CZ.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a CZ state (predetermined game state) after the end of BIG and a BIG (specific game state) for notifying information of a stop operation advantageous to the player, and the BIG is small. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 has a combination game (first section) and a JAC game (second section), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a predetermined gaming state and a specific gaming state having the first section and the second section. Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 has SBIG and WBIG as BIG (ream bonus), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state.

Further, the main control circuit 91 can shift to the JAC game when the replay combination is won in the small role game, and can shift to the small role game when four games are played in the JAC game. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 can shift to the small role game. The circuit 91 functions as a transition control means during the specific game. Further, since the main control circuit 91 terminates the BIG when the number of games played in the small winning combination game reaches 25, the main control circuit 91 functions as an end control means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 gives points based on the internal winning combination for each unit game during BIG, and at the end of BIG, the score rank is determined according to the total value of the points given during BIG. Since it is possible, the main control circuit 91 functions as a numerical value giving means, a counting means, and a mode determining means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not to shift to the BIG (ream bonus) according to the score rank during CZ, and if it is determined to shift, the BIG can be started. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 is specified. It functions as a game start determination means and a start control means. Further, since the main control circuit 91 can determine the type of the continuous bonus at the start of the continuous bonus, the main control circuit 91 functions as a type determining means.

[Production control at the end of the advantageous section]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 241, the effect control using the locked state accompanying the end of the advantageous section in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 generates a locked state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the advantageous section. Here, as shown in FIG. 241 (A), in the present embodiment, in the "normal" state (normal section), if a rare role is won, a transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed, and it is advantageous to win this transition lottery. It shifts to the state of "precursor (main precursor or ghost precursor)" which is a section. As shown in the figure, when the type of precursor is "Gase precursor", the advantageous section ends with the end of the precursor and returns to the normal section. On the other hand, when the type of omen is "main omen", when the omen ends, it shifts to the pseudo bonus (AT), and when the pseudo bonus and the consecutive villa with CZ end, the advantageous section also ends, and usually Return to the section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end of the advantageous section is performed when the advantageous section ends without shifting to the advantageous state for the player (pseudo-bonus) and when the advantageous state for the player ends. Will be.

Subsequently, FIGS. (B) and (a) show an example of the production in the “precursor”. In the present embodiment, the "gase precursor" and the "main precursor" are the production sections of one game, and the production that informs whether or not the "first bonus" is won in the advantageous section transition lottery performed in the "normal" state. Is executed. As such an effect, for example, the sub-control circuit 101 executes an effect in which the main character and the enemy confront each other on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). If the "first bonus" is not won (precursor), the sub-control circuit 101 directs the main character to be defeated in this confrontation production, and if the "first bonus" is won (precursor), the sub-control The circuit 101 produces an effect in which the main character wins in this confrontation effect.

In the case of "Gase Omen", the advantageous section also ends, so a locked state occurs at the end of "Gase Omen". Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 executes the confrontation effect by using the game during the “precursor” and the subsequent locked state. As a result, even if the effect ends after a lapse of a predetermined time from the time when the game is 3 OFF (when the third stop operation is off edge), the effect is canceled by providing a period during which the game is not allowed to be played due to the locked state. Can be prevented, and the player can be controlled so as not to overlook the result of the production.

In addition, FIGS. (B) and (b) show an example of the effect of the pseudo bonus and the CZ at the end of the consecutive villa. In the present embodiment, since the advantageous section also ends with the end of the consecutive villa, a locked state occurs at the end of the consecutive villa. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 uses the locked state at the end of the consecutive villa to execute an effect related to the result of the game by the consecutive villa with the pseudo bonus and the CZ. For example, the sub-control circuit 101 displays the number of consecutive villas of BIG and the number of acquired villas on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100) to execute an effect on the game result regarding the villa with the pseudo bonus and the CZ. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by using the locked state at the end of the advantageous section, the effect of notifying the success or failure of the transition to the "first bonus" and the game result regarding the pseudo-bonus and the consecutive villa with the CZ are reported. It is possible to properly perform the effect of making it.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section corresponding to the "normal" state and an advantageous section corresponding to the "precursor" and "first bonus" states, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a predetermined gaming state and It has a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state. Since the "gase precursor" of the advantageous section is composed of only the production section in which the game is performed a predetermined number of times, the "gase precursor" of the advantageous section corresponds to the first specific gaming state. In addition, in the case of "main sign", special sections such as "first bonus", "CZ", and "ream bonus" follow after the sign, so "main sign" and the subsequent "first bonus" are the second. Corresponds to a specific gaming state.

Further, in the main control circuit 91, when the rare combination is determined as the winning combination in the "normal" state, the advantageous section transition lottery can be performed to determine the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 can determine the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination. Functions as a type determination means. Further, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the "gase precursor" when the "gase precursor" is determined as the transition destination, and ends the advantageous section and shifts to the "normal" when the "gase precursor" ends. The circuit 91 functions as a first game state control means. Further, when the main control circuit 91 determines the "main precursor" as the migration destination, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the "first bonus" or the like via the "main precursor", and when the "CZ" ends due to the failure of the CZ, the advantageous section ends. Then, in order to shift to "normal", the main control circuit 91 functions as a second game state control means.

Further, since the sub-control circuit 101 uses the liquid crystal display (display unit 100) to notify whether or not the "first bonus" has been won during the "precursor", the sub-control circuit 101 and the liquid crystal display have the effect of notifying whether or not the "first bonus" has been won. It functions as a production execution means. Further, since the main control circuit 91 generates a lock state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 91 functions as a lock control means. The main control circuit 91 may generate a locked state only at the end of the advantageous section accompanying the end of the "precursor", or generate a locked state only at the end of the advantageous section accompanying the end of the "CZ". This may be the case, or the locked state may be generated at the end of the advantageous section at all times. It should be noted that the sub-control circuit 101 executes an effect of notifying whether or not the "first bonus" has been won by using the game and the locked state during the "gase omen" when the lock state occurs due to the end of the "gase omen". At the end of the villa, a production that reports the game result regarding the villa with the pseudo bonus and the CZ is executed.

[Reel control when winning a bell]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 242 and 243, the reel control at the time of winning the bell in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the center line is used as the effective line. Further, in the following, the area in which one symbol of each reel is displayed in the display window 4 is referred to as a unit symbol display area. That is, the display window 4 has a unit symbol display area in the upper, middle, and lower rows for displaying the three symbols on the left reel 3L, a unit symbol display area in the upper, middle, and lower rows for displaying the three symbols on the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It has an upper, middle, and lower unit symbol display area for displaying the three symbols of the above, and nine unit symbol display areas of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol "watermelon A" and the symbol "watermelon B" are provided as the symbols corresponding to the watermelon, but these symbols are substantially the same symbol from the player's point of view, and both mean watermelon. It is a design to be done. Therefore, in the game playability described below, the symbol "watermelon A" and the symbol "watermelon B" can be treated as the same symbol. Of course, even with a pachislot machine having only one symbol "watermelon" as a symbol corresponding to watermelon, the playability described below can be realized. This point also applies to the symbols corresponding to the replay (symbol "replay A", symbol "replay B"). Further, in the present embodiment, a pseudo bonus that does not involve the operation of the accessory is used, but the playability described below can also be applied to a pachislot machine that uses a real bonus that involves the operation of the accessory. ..

[Stop type when pinching]
First, with reference to FIG. 242 (A), the stop type of the reel at the time of pinching (middle left and right) until the second stop will be described. In FIG. 242 (A), when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" in the upper unit symbol display area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4 (aiming at the left BAR). Shows the stop form of.

As shown in the figure, when the symbol "BAR" at the symbol position "18" is stopped in the upper unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L, the symbol position "17" is displayed in the middle unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L. The symbol "watermelon A" is stopped, and the symbol "bell" at the symbol position "16" is stopped in the lower unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L. When the symbol "bell" is displayed in the unit symbol display area at the bottom of the left reel 3L, the symbol "bell" will be on one of the five straight lines from the center line to the cross-down line according to the winning of the bell. In order to be displayed, the symbol "bell" needs to be stopped in the upper unit symbol display area or the lower unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R.

Here, as shown in FIG. 221 in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol "watermelon A" is always arranged one above the symbol "bell" on the right reel 3R. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 242 (A) and 242 (a), when the symbol "bell" stops in the lower unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R when aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "bell" is moved along the bottom line. Along with the tempai, the design "Watermelon A" is also tempered along the center line, and the design "Bell" and the design "Watermelon A" are double-tempaied. On the other hand, when the symbol "bell" stops in the upper unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R when aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "bell" is tempted along the cross-up line as shown in the figure (b). (Single tempai).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the main control circuit 91 is determined to be "off" as the internal winning combination, the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A" are doubled at the time of pinching to aim at the left BAR. The reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the tempai is not displayed. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has "bell (F_batting order 2 bell B1, F_batting order 2 bell B2)", "watermelon (F_watermelon 1, F_watermelon 2)", and "reach eye lip (F_)" as an internal winning combination. When "Reach-eye lip A1, F_Reach-eye lip A2, F_Reach-eye lip A3, F_Reach-eye lip A4, F_Reach-eye lip C)" is determined, the symbol "bell" is used when pinching the left BAR. The reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the double tempai with the symbol "Watermelon A" can be displayed, and in the case of "off", the stop type of the double tempai with the symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Watermelon A" is displayed. Control the stop of the reel so that it is not displayed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 242 (B), when the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A" are double-tempaied, and when "bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same figure. As shown in (a), when the design "bell" is displayed side by side along the bottom line, "bell (S_BL bell 1)" wins, and "watermelon" is decided as the internal winning role. , As shown in Fig. (B), the design "Watermelon A" is displayed side by side along the center line, and "Watermelon (S_CL watermelon)" wins a prize (Note that "watermelon" is so-called missing. there is a possibility). In addition, when the "reach eye lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the reach eye of the so-called small winning combination is displayed (the reach eye lip wins) as shown in the figure (c). ..

Here, if "watermelon" is determined as the internal winning role, a lottery to shift to the advantageous section (first bonus lottery) accompanying the winning of the rare role is performed, and the "reach eye" is performed as the internal winning role. If "Rip" is decided, the first bonus will be fixed with the winning of the fixed role. On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is "off", the stop type of the double tempai of the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A" is not displayed, so from the player's point of view, the symbol "bell" When the stop form of the double tempai with the symbol "Watermelon A" is displayed, you can expect to win the bonus (first bonus or consecutive bonus). In addition, if both the double-tempaid symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Watermelon A" are out of alignment, the reach is displayed and the bonus is confirmed. Therefore, the symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Watermelon A" are confirmed. It can be said that the stop form of the double tempai is a stop form that gives the player a chance of a bonus.

On the other hand, the main control circuit 91 can display the stop type of the single tempai of the symbol "bell" when the left BAR is pinched when "off" is determined as the internal winning combination. I do. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has "off", "bell (F_batting order 2 bell A1, F_batting order 2 bell A2)" and "reach eye lip (F_reach eye lip A1, F_reach eye lip A1)" as an internal winning combination. When "A2, F_reach eye lip A3, F_reach eye lip A4, F_reach eye lip C)" is decided, the stop type of the single tempai of the symbol "bell" can be displayed at the time of pinching aiming at the left BAR. The reel stop control is performed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 242 (C), when the symbol "bell" is single-tempaied and "bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, as shown in FIG. 242 (a). , If the design "bell" is displayed side by side along the cross-up line, the "bell (S_XU bell 1)" wins, and the "reach eye lip" is decided as the internal winning role, the same figure ( As shown in b), when the reach eye lip (S_reach eye lip A4) wins a prize and "out of place" is determined as the internal winning combination, as shown in the figure (c), the out of order appears. The eyes are displayed.

In this way, the stop type of the single tempai with the design "Bell" can be displayed even when the internal winning combination is "off", so from the player's point of view, the stop type of the single tempai with the design "Bell" was displayed. You can't expect much from winning the bonus alone. Also, even if the double tempai symbol "bell" comes off, the bonus is not fixed, so the single tempai stop form of the symbol "bell" is a normal stop form for the player. It can be said that.

Such reel control is performed when a stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue 7" at the symbol position "13" in the upper unit symbol display area corresponding to the left reel 3L of the display window 4 (aiming at the left blue 7). Is the same. That is, as shown in FIG. 242 (D), when the symbol "blue 7" at the symbol position "13" stops in the upper unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L, the unit symbol display area in the middle of the left reel 3L The symbol "replay A" at the symbol position "12" is stopped, and the symbol "bell" at the symbol position "11" is stopped in the lower unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L. When the symbol "bell" is displayed in the unit symbol display area at the bottom of the left reel 3L, the symbol "bell" will be on one of the five straight lines from the center line to the cross-down line according to the winning of the bell. In order to be displayed, the symbol "bell" needs to be stopped in the upper unit symbol display area or the lower unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R.

Here, as shown in FIG. 221 in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol "Replay A" is always arranged one below the symbol "bell" on the right reel 3R. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 242 (D) and 242 (a), when the symbol "bell" stops in the upper unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R when aiming at the left blue 7, the symbol "bell" becomes a cross-up line. Along with tempai along, the symbol "Replay A" is also tempered along the center line, and the symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Replay A" are double tempted. On the other hand, when the symbol "bell" stops in the lower unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R when aiming at the left blue 7, the symbol "bell" is tempted along the bottom line as shown in the figure (b). (Single tempai).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the main control circuit 91 is determined to be "off" as the internal winning combination, the symbol "bell" and the symbol "replay A" are combined with each other when the left blue 7 is pinched. The reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the double tempai is not displayed. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has "bell (F_batting order 2 bell B1, F_batting order 2 bell B2)" "replay (F_normal lip)" "reach eye lip (F_reach eye lip A1)" as an internal winning combination. , F_reach eye lip A2, F_reach eye lip A3, F_reach eye lip A4, F_reach eye lip C) " Reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the double tempai with "Replay A" can be displayed, and in the case of "off", the stop type of the double tempai with the symbol "bell" and the symbol "Replay A" is not displayed. The reel stop control is performed.

On the other hand, the main control circuit 91 can display the stop type of the single tempai of the symbol "bell" when the left blue 7 is pinched when "off" is determined as the internal winning combination. Take control. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has "off", "bell (F_batting order 2 bell A1, F_batting order 2 bell A2)" and "reach eye lip (F_reach eye lip A1, F_reach eye lip A1)" as an internal winning combination. When "A3, F_reach eye lip A4, F_reach eye lip C)" is determined, the reel stop control can be displayed so that the stop type of the single tempai of the symbol "bell" can be displayed when pinching the left BAR. Do.

In this way, even when aiming for the left blue 7, the internal winning role is not "off" at the time of double tempai, so the stop type of double tempai with the symbol "bell" and the symbol "replay A" is a bonus for the player It can be said that the stop type of the single tempai of the design "Bell" is a normal stop type for the player.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 243 (E), in the present embodiment, the double tempai stop type is a stop type with a high bonus expectation, and the single tempai stop type is a stop type with a low bonus expectation. Is. In this way, the stop type of the double tempai is a preferable stop type for the player, but it is always the double tempai at the time of winning the bell that wins with a higher probability than the rare role (watermelon) and the fixed role (reach eye lip). If the stop type is displayed, the bell will be won in many cases, so the expectation of the bonus will be low and the game will be monotonous. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the tempai type of the symbol "bell" at the time of winning the bell is distributed between the single tempai and the double tempai. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the stop type of the double tempai is displayed at the time of winning the bell with a high probability of winning, and it is possible to maintain the expectation of the bonus at the time of displaying the double tempai.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 243 (F), in the present embodiment, at the time of winning "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2", both the left BAR aim and the left blue 7 aim are the symbols. The reel stop control is performed so that the "bell" is single tempered. On the other hand, at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", the symbol "Bell" and the symbol "Watermelon A" or the symbol "Replay A" are used for both the left BAR aim and the left blue 7 aim. Controls the stop of the reel so that

Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 222, the lottery values of "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are "3056", and "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell". The lottery value of "B2" is "697". Therefore, in many cases when the bell is won, the reel stop control is performed so that the stop type of the single tempai is displayed, and as a result, the expectation of the bonus at the time of displaying the double tempai can be maintained.

Next, a specific method of sorting the tempai type at the time of winning the bell will be described. As shown in FIG. 221, in the present embodiment, the symbol "watermelon A" is arranged on the symbol "bell" when aiming at the left BAR, and the symbol "bell" is placed on the symbol "bell" when aiming at the left blue 7. "Replay A" is arranged.

Further, referring to the symbol combination table of FIG. 223, as a combination of symbols in which the symbol "bell" is displayed along the bottom line, "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" and "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)" are used in the present embodiment. ". This "S_BL Bell 1 (NM04)" is a combination of symbols displayed as "Watermelon A-Red 7 / Replay A-Watermelon A" along the effective line (center line), and is the middle stage corresponding to the left reel 3L. It is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "watermelon A" is displayed in the unit symbol display area of. On the other hand, "S_BL Bell 2 (NM05)" is a combination of symbols displayed as "Replay A-Red 7 / Replay A-Watermelon A" along the effective line (center line), and corresponds to the left reel 3L. This is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "Replay A" is displayed in the unit symbol display area in the middle row.

Similarly, referring to the symbol combination table of FIG. 223, as a combination of symbols in which the symbol "bell" is displayed along the cross-up line, in the present embodiment, "S_XU bell 1 (NM06)" and "S_XU bell 2 (" NM07) ”. This "S_XU Bell 1 (NM06)" is a combination of symbols displayed as "Watermelon A-Bell-Replay A" along the effective line (center line), and the unit symbol display in the middle stage corresponding to the left reel 3L. It is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "watermelon A" is displayed in the area. On the other hand, "S_XU Bell 2 (NM07)" is a combination of symbols displayed as "Replay A-Bell-Replay A" along the effective line (center line), and is a unit in the middle stage corresponding to the left reel 3L. This is a combination of symbols in which the symbol "Replay A" is displayed in the symbol display area.

When aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "Watermelon A" is displayed in the unit symbol display area in the middle row corresponding to the left reel 3L. Therefore, as the BL bell and XU bell when aiming at the left BAR, the symbol "Watermelon" is displayed in the middle row on the left. "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" or "S_XU bell 1 (NM06)" that requires "A" is used. Similarly, when aiming at the left blue 7, the symbol "Replay A" is displayed in the unit symbol display area in the middle row corresponding to the left reel 3L, so the BL bell and XU bell when aiming at the left blue 7 are on the left. "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)" or "S_XU bell 2 (NM07)", which requires the symbol "Replay A", is used in the middle row.

Here, referring to the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the internal lottery table of FIG. 222, NM05 and NM06 are associated with "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2". On the other hand, NM04 and NM07 are not associated with each other. Considering the left BAR aim, since NM04 is not associated and NM06 is associated, the main control circuit 91 is the left BAR at the time of winning "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2". The aim is that the "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" cannot be pulled in, while the "S_XU bell 1 (NM06)" can be pulled in. Therefore, when aiming for the left BAR at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A2", the symbol "Bell" does not temper along the bottom line, and the symbol "Bell" follows the cross-up line. Tempais and becomes a single tempai stop type.

Similarly, when considering the aim of the left blue 7, the main control circuit 91 has "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" because NM07 is not associated and NM05 is associated. When aiming at the left blue 7 at the time of winning, the "S_XU bell 2 (NM07)" cannot be pulled in, while the "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)" can be pulled in. Therefore, when aiming for the left blue 7 at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A2", the design "Bell" does not temper along the cross-up line, and the design "Bell" along the bottom line. "Tempai, and becomes a stop form of single tempai.

Similarly, referring to the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the internal lottery table of FIG. 222, NM04 and NM07 are associated with "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2". On the other hand, NM05 and NM06 are not associated with each other. Considering the left BAR aim, since NM06 is not associated and NM04 is associated, the main control circuit 91 has "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2". The aim is that the "S_XU bell 1 (NM06)" cannot be pulled in, while the "S_BL bell 1 (NM04)" can be pulled in. Therefore, when aiming for the left BAR at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", the design "Bell" does not temper along the cross-up line, and the design "Bell" along the bottom line. Tempais and becomes a double tempai stop type.

Similarly, when considering the aim of the left blue 7, the main control circuit 91 has "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2" because NM05 is not associated and NM07 is associated. While aiming at the left blue 7 at the time of winning, the "S_BL bell 2 (NM05)" cannot be pulled in, while the "S_XU bell 2 (NM07)" can be pulled in. Therefore, when aiming for the left blue 7 at the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", the design "Bell" does not temper along the bottom line, and the design "Bell" along the cross-up line. "Tempai, and becomes a stop form of double tempai.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are won, the single tempai is stopped for both the left BAR aim and the left blue 7 aim. At the time of winning "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", the double tempai is stopped for both the left BAR aim and the left blue 7 aim, but these combinations can be changed arbitrarily. As an example, FIG. 243 (G) shows another control example.

As shown in the figure, in another control example, when "F_Batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell A2" are won, the single tempai is stopped when aiming at the left BAR, while the double when aiming at blue 7. Tempai is stopped, and when "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1" and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2" are won, the double tempai is stopped when aiming at the left BAR, while the single tempai is stopped when aiming at Blue 7. Take shape. By doing so, the appearance frequency of the stop type of the double tempai, which is highly expected as a bonus, can be made different according to the target position of the left reel 3L, and the playability is diversified. It should be noted that such control can be appropriately realized by changing the correspondence between NM04 and NM07.

As described above, in this playability, the bell, which has a high probability of being determined as a winning role but has a low expectation of a bonus, and the watermelon, which has a low probability of being determined as a winning role but has a high expectation of a bonus, are sandwiched between each other. At the time of the second stop, double tempai may be performed, but when the "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are won, the watermelon does not temper and the bell single tempais. For the player, it is not necessary to worry about the watermelon being missed until the bell, which has a high probability of winning and a bonus cannot be expected, so that the troublesomeness of the stop operation can be reduced.

From the viewpoint of simplifying the stop operation of the player, it is conceivable to always perform single tempai and stop control so as not to double tempai at the time of winning the bell. However, although such stop control is preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the stop operation, the winning combination can be grasped from the shape of the tempted stop roll, and the game becomes monotonous. Not preferable from the viewpoint. In other words, when considering playability, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that it may be a watermelon (there may be a bonus expectation) from the shape of the stop roll, even when the bell is won internally. preferable.

In this respect, in this game playability, when "F_Batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell B2" are determined as winning roles, double tempai is performed at the second stop at the time of pinching. The frequency of appearance of stop rolls that both sides are tempted can be increased by the winning probability of "F_batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_batting order 2 bell B2". In this way, in this game playability, by having a bell for single tempai and a bell for double tempai, the player can have a sense of expectation according to the stop result while simplifying the stop operation of the player. it can.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a stop control means.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the symbol "bell" is formed along a linear line (any of the five lines from the center line to the cross-down line) connecting the unit symbol display areas for displaying one symbol of each reel. Can be displayed side by side, "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A1", "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A2", "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1", "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2", and any of the five lines from the center line to the cross-down line. It has "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" in which the symbols "watermelon" can be displayed side by side. Of these plurality of roles, "F_Batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell A2" correspond to the first specific combination, and "F_Batting order 2 bell B1" and "F_Batting order 2 bell B2" correspond to the second specific combination. Corresponding to the combination, "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" correspond to a predetermined combination. The probability that any of "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A1", "F_Batting Order 2 Bell A2", "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B1", and "F_Batting Order 2 Bell B2" will be determined as the winning combination, and "F_Watermelon 1" and "F_" The probability that any of "Watermelon 2" is determined as the winning role is higher in the former.

Further, when "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" are determined as winning combinations in the "normal" state, the main control circuit 91 performs an advantageous section transition lottery, while "F_" in the "normal" state. If "Batting order 2 bell A1", "F_Batting order 2 bell A2", "F_Batting order 2 bell B1", and "F_Batting order 2 bell B2" are determined as winning roles, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed. In addition, the main control circuit 91 grants a privilege such as a "first bonus" as if the reach eye lip wins when both the bell and the watermelon come off during the double tempai of the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A". Therefore, the main control circuit 91 functions as a privilege giving means. This control is advantageous in "F_Batting order 1" and "F_Watermelon 2" and "F_Batting order 2 bell A1" "F_Batting order 2 bell A2" "F_Batting order 2 bell B1" "F_Batting order 2 bell B2". It suffices if the probability of winning the section transition lottery (that is, the probability of granting a privilege) is different, and "F_batting order 2 bell A1" "F_batting order 2 bell A2" "F_batting order 2 bell B1" "F_batting order 2 bell B2" The probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery when "" is determined as the winning combination is not limited to 0% (including not performing the advantageous section transition lottery), and "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" are The probability may be lower than the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery when the winning combination is determined.

In addition, the main control circuit 91 has a symbol "bell" when "F_batting order 2 bell A1" and "F_batting order 2 bell A2" are determined as winning combinations at the time of the second stop of pinching striking aiming at the left BAR. "F_Batting order 2 bell B1" "F_Batting order 2 bell B2" "F_Watermelon 1" "F_Watermelon 2" is determined as the winning combination while the reel stop control is performed so that "" is single tempai. Controls the stop of the reel so that the symbol "bell" and the symbol "watermelon A" are double-tempered.

[Another control example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 244 to 247, another control example peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 different from the peculiar control described above will be described.

[Stop control]
First, stop control in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 244. Note that the term "stopping" means making it impossible to continue playing the game while maintaining the current playing state. For example, all the credits stored inside the pachislot machine 1 are paid out. At the same time, by controlling not to accept the insertion of new medals, the game cannot be continued. The stopped state can be played by opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) of the pachislot machine 1 and performing a predetermined release operation, or by releasing the power supply during the stopped state. become. Since the stop is performed while maintaining the current game state, when the stop is released, the game can be restarted in the state before the stop is performed, for example, during AT. If this is done, the AT can continue after the cancellation.

In order to make the stop control described below feasible, the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1 has a difference number counter that counts the difference number from the power failure recovery. This difference number counter is a counter dedicated to stopping, which is different from the counter used for limiter control of the advantageous section, and continues counting the difference number regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). To do. The difference number counter starts counting the difference number after the power is turned on, and if the difference number is a negative value at the end of the unit game, the difference number is set to 0 at the end of the unit game. clear. That is, the difference number counter counts the difference number starting from the time when the player loses the most. The difference number counter is set to 0 when the stoppage is released, when the stoppage is released, when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), or when the difference number is a negative value at the end of the unit game. It will be reset.

In the main stop control, when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14500, the main control circuit 91 generates a stop state on the assumption that the stop condition is satisfied. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 244 (A), the main control circuit 91 updates the value of the difference number counter according to the number of medals used in the game at the start of the game. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 subtracts the value of the difference number counter by the number of BETs of the game. After that, when the game is performed and the medal payout process in the game is performed, the main control circuit 91 updates the value of the difference number counter by adding the value of the difference number counter by the amount of the paid out medals. ..

Subsequently, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14500, and if it exceeds, a stop state is generated. On the other hand, if it does not exceed 14500, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the value of the difference number counter is less than 0, and if it is less than 0, the value of the difference number counter is set to 0. Clear to and end the process. Due to such control, the main control circuit 91 cannot continuously play the game when the difference number exceeds 14,500, starting from the time when the player side loses the most after the power is turned on. A possible stop state can be generated.

Subsequently, FIG. 244 (B) is a diagram showing the timing at which the stop state is generated. As shown in the figure (a), any of the accessories (first-class special accessory, first-class special accessory-related accessory continuous operation device, second-class special accessory, second-class special accessory) In the non-bonus state in which the continuous accessory operating device or the ordinary accessory) is not operating, the main control circuit 91 generates a stop state when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14500. For example, during AT, it is in a non-bonus state in which none of the accessories are operating. Therefore, if the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14500 during AT, the main control circuit 91 stops at that point. Generate a state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3B, in the bonus state in which any of the accessories is operating, the main control circuit 91 immediately receives the difference number counter value exceeding 14500 during the bonus state. The stop state is generated at the timing when the bonus state ends without generating the stop state.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, the main control circuit 91 sets a difference number counter that counts the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out as a result of the game performed after the power is turned on. The difference number counter clears the difference number to 0 when the difference number at the end of the unit game is a negative value, so that the main control circuit 91 and the difference number counter function as counting means. The timing at which the difference number counter starts counting the difference number is not limited to after the power is turned on, and the difference number counter may count the difference number after the setting is changed. Further, the difference number may be counted after the RAM is cleared.

Further, the main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the value of the difference number counter exceeds the threshold value (14500), and if it determines that the value exceeds the threshold value (14500), it is impossible to continuously play the game while maintaining the current gaming state. When a possible stop state is generated and the release condition is satisfied in the stop state, the stop state is released and the game according to the maintained game state can be continued. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 is determined by the determination means. , Functions as a stop control means and a stop release means. The main control circuit 91 clears the difference number to 0 when the difference number at the end of the unit game is a negative value, but the difference is not limited to this, and the difference number counter is negative. The value may also be counted, and the main control circuit 91 may generate a stop state at the timing when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14,500. That is, the difference number used for the stop control may be a simple difference number calculated by counting a negative value, or a difference number that does not count a negative value (the maximum difference number in a day, so-called MY). ) May be. Further, the main control circuit 91 may clear the value of the difference number counter to 0 when the stop state is released, or may maintain the value in the stop state as it is without clearing to 0. .. Further, in the case of maintaining the value in the stopped state, the main control circuit 91 may have a plurality of threshold values and generate the stopped state stepwise each time the threshold value is satisfied. For example, the first stop state is generated when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 14,500 sheets, and then the second stop state is generated when the value of the difference number counter exceeds 15,000 sheets after the stop state is released. May be generated.

[Ramp control]
Subsequently, the lamp control in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 245. It should be noted that the present invention relates to the lamp control described below and the control of the lamp that illuminates each reel. First, the configuration of the lamp for reel illumination will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (A).

In the pachislot machine 1, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are equipped with a reel sheet made of a translucent film material along the outer peripheral surface of the reel, and the design is light-transmitting on the surface of the reel sheet. It is printed with colored ink, and the areas other than those patterns are masked with light-shielding ink. As shown in the figure, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a back lamp inside the reels 3L, 3C, 3R to irradiate the reels 3L, 3C, 3R from the back surface. This back lamp is provided corresponding to the upper, middle, and lower unit symbol display areas of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and illuminates each unit symbol display area from the back surface of the reel toward the player side. Since the light emitted from the back lamp passes through the symbol printed portion of the reel sheet, it brightly illuminates the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

Further, as shown in the figure, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an upper lamp on the upper side (inside the game machine) of the display window 4. This upper lamp irradiates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R from a position (front) facing the front surface of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (reel seat). The light emitted from the upper lamp is reflected on the front of the reel seat and illuminates the entire reel seat brightly. In this control, an upper lamp that illuminates the front surface of the reel seat from above is used, but in this control, any lamp that illuminates the reel seat from the front may be used, and the side portion in front of the reel seat (for example). , The lamps provided on both sides on the back side of the display window 4) may be used, or the lamps provided on the lower part in front of the reel seat (for example, the lower part on the back side of the display window 4) may be used.

Subsequently, FIG. 245 (B) is a diagram showing an example of lamp production, and is a diagram schematically showing a visual state of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R accompanying ON / OFF of the upper lamp. FIG. 3A is an example of an effect when the upper lamp is OFF and the back lamp is ON. When only the back lamp is ON, the light from the back lamp is transmitted to the design printing part of the reel sheet, so that the design part of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is brightly illuminated, but other than the design printing part of the reel sheet. The part of is dark because it does not reflect light. Therefore, from the player's point of view, although the design is emphasized, the reel sheet around the design looks dark, which gives a calm impression as a whole.

Further, FIG. 3B is an example of an effect when the upper lamp is ON and the back lamp is ON. When the upper lamp is ON, not only the symbol printed portion of the reel sheet but also the portion other than the symbol printed portion of the reel sheet is brightly illuminated as a result of the reel sheet being illuminated from the front surface. Further, the design printed portion of the reel sheet is illuminated from both the upper lamp and the back lamp. Therefore, from the player's point of view, not only the design but also the entire surrounding reel sheet looks bright, and the entire display window 4 appears to shine.

Subsequently, FIG. 245 (C) is a diagram showing a control example of the upper lamp. The upper lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101, or another control circuit.

In this control, the main control circuit 91 switches ON / OFF of the upper lamp according to the gaming state. That is, the main control circuit 91 does not switch ON / OFF of the upper lamp for each unit game, but during a predetermined game state, the upper lamp is held in the OFF state to play the game, and during a specific game state. Holds the upper lamp in the ON state and plays a game. In this control, the upper lamp is switched ON / OFF, but the game playability is limited to ON / OFF as long as the lighting degree of the upper lamp can be controlled according to the gaming state. It's not a thing.

As shown in FIG. 245 (C), the main control circuit 91 advances the game by holding the upper lamp in the OFF state during the normal game state in which the bonus is not activated. After that, when the bonus operation starts in the normal game and the bonus state is entered, the main control circuit 91 updates the upper lamp to the ON state, and during the bonus state, the upper lamp is held in the ON state to play the game. proceed. After that, when the bonus state ends and the game shifts to the normal game, the main control circuit 91 updates the upper lamp to the OFF state, and during the normal state, keeps the upper lamp in the OFF state and proceeds with the game. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 updates the upper lamp from the OFF state to the ON state after the winning process performed after 3OFF of the game that shifts to the bonus state, and is performed after 3OFF at the end of the bonus state. When the locked state is released, the upper lamp is updated from the ON state to the OFF state.

In this way, the main control circuit 91 switches ON / OFF of the upper lamp according to the gaming state, and holds the upper lamp in the ON state or the OFF state during the corresponding gaming state. In this control, the bonus state and the normal state have been described as examples of the gaming state for switching the upper lamp ON / OFF, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, AT (ART) and non-AT (non-AT) are used. The ON state / OFF state of the upper lamp may be switched between during ART). Further, in this control, the type of the lamp that switches ON / OFF according to the game state is the upper lamp, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the back lamp is switched ON / OFF according to the game state. Alternatively, the ON / OFF of other decorative lamps (for example, the side lamps provided in the housing 60 of the pachislot machine 1) may be switched according to the game state.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Having 7R, the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, the main control circuit 91 can start the bonus state when the start condition of the bonus state is satisfied in the normal game, and can end the bonus state and shift the game state to the normal game when the end condition is satisfied in the bonus state. Yes, and at the end of the bonus state, it is possible to generate a locked state that stops the progress of the game. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game state control means and a lock control means.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with an upper lamp capable of illuminating the outer peripheral surface (surface of the reel sheet) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R from the front surface of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the main control circuit 91 is a main control circuit 91 of the upper lamp. In order to control the lighting state, the upper lamp functions as a lighting means, and the main control circuit 91 functions as a lighting control means. The main control circuit 91 holds the upper lamp in the OFF state (turned off) in the normal state, while holding the upper lamp in the ON state (lighted) in the bonus state. Further, the main control circuit 91 updates the upper lamp from the OFF state to the ON state at the start of the bonus state, and updates the upper lamp from the ON state to the OFF state when the lock state is released with the end of the bonus state.

[Detection of illegal setting changes]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 246, a method of detecting an illegal setting change by the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. First, an outline of this control will be described with reference to FIG. 246 (A). FIG. 3A is a diagram showing an outline of a basic setting change operation in the pachi-slot machine 1. In the setting change operation in the pachi-slot machine 1, (1) the power supply is updated to OFF, and after the power is turned off, (2) the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON using a predetermined key. After that, (3) the power is returned to ON, (4) a predetermined operation for changing the setting is performed, and finally (5) the setting key type switch 430 is returned to OFF using the predetermined key. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when changing the setting, it is necessary to first turn off the power before operating the setting key type switch 430. The operation of the setting key type switch 430 with the power turned on is an operation for confirming the current set value, and the setting cannot be changed.

Subsequently, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an outline of a setting change operation performed by a clerk or the like at a game store. To change the setting, (1) it is necessary to turn off the power, but since the power switch is provided inside the game machine, when the clerk performs the setting change operation, first (0) to turn off the power. The operation of opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is performed. Subsequent operations are as described above, and the clerk performs the above-mentioned setting change operations (1) to (5) after opening the front door. After that, the clerk closes (6) the opened front door and completes the setting change operation. When the clerk performs the setting change operation in this way, the operation of opening the front door is performed first, and then the power is turned off.

Subsequently, FIG. 3C is a diagram showing an outline of an illegal setting change operation to be detected in this control. When a so-called Goto teacher or the like makes an illegal setting change, various operations are performed from the outside using an illegal device such as a wire. Therefore, the above-mentioned setting change operations (1) to (5) may be performed while the front door is closed. In this control, such a setting change operation with the front door closed is detected as an illegal setting change operation.

When a clerk or the like performs a setting change operation according to a formal procedure, it is necessary to first (0) open the front door in order to turn off the power, so the front door is opened at the timing when the power is turned off. On the other hand, since the operation of changing the setting of the detection target is performed with the front door closed, the front door is closed at the timing when the power is turned off. Therefore, in this control, an illegal setting change operation is detected by monitoring the open / closed state of the front door when the power is turned off.

FIG. 246 (B) is a specific processing flow for detecting an illegal setting change operation, and FIG. 246 (a) is a non-operation command reception performed when the sub-control circuit 101 receives a non-operation command. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the time processing, and FIG. 3 (b) is the flowchart which shows the flow of the setting change command reception time processing performed when the sub-control circuit 101 receives a setting change command. It should be noted that the non-operation command is not related to various operations (for example, input operation, start operation, stop operation, etc. as operations for advancing the game) from the main control circuit 91 at regular timings. This is a command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101. The setting change command is a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in accordance with the setting change operation.

As shown in FIG. 3A, the sub-control circuit 101 acquires and stores the open / closed state of the front door by a non-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the sub-control circuit 101 receives the setting change command transmitted from the main control circuit 91, the front door open / closed state acquired from the non-operation command and saved. Is checked to determine whether the front door is open or closed immediately before the power is turned off. As described above, when a store clerk or the like performs a setting change operation by a formal procedure, the front door is open and closed immediately before the power is turned off, so this determination is NO and the process ends. On the other hand, in the case of an illegal setting change operation, the open / closed state of the front door immediately before the power is turned off is in the closed state, so this determination is YES. When this determination is YES, the sub-control circuit 101 subsequently counts the number of illegal settings and ends the process, assuming that there is a possibility of an illegal setting change operation. The sub-control circuit 101 may perform these processes at the timing when the start of the setting change operation is received, or may perform these processes at the timing when the end of the setting change operation is received. Further, these processes may be performed at the timing when the start of the setting confirmation operation is accepted instead of the setting change operation, or these processes may be performed at the timing when the end of the setting confirmation operation is accepted.

Further, when the sub-control circuit 101 detects an illegal setting change operation by the above processing, it not only counts the illegal number of times, but also externally provides predetermined warning information indicating that the illegal setting change operation has been performed. It may be output. The output of the predetermined warning information may be one in which the pachislot machine 1 issues a warning, such as one that emits a warning sound from the speakers 9L, 9R, or the like, or a hall computer or the like. It may be to send a notification that there is a possibility of an illegal setting change operation. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 may output predetermined warning information to the outside when the number of frauds reaches a predetermined number of times.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Having 7R, the main control circuit 91 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a cabinet 61 and front doors (upper door 62a, lower door 62b) arranged in front of the cabinet 61.

Further, since the sub-control circuit 101 stores the open / closed state of the front door when a non-operation command is received, the open / closed state of the front door at the time of power failure can be held, and the sub-control circuit 101 holds the open / closed state. Functions as a means. Further, when the sub-control circuit 101 accepts the setting change, the sub-control circuit 101 acquires the open / closed state of the front door at the time of power failure due to the setting change, and whether or not the front door is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change. The sub-control circuit 101 functions as an open / close determination means. The sub-control circuit 101 can grasp the power failure immediately before receiving the setting change as the power failure accompanying the setting change.

Further, the sub-control circuit 101 can count the number of times it is determined that the front door is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change, and when it is determined that the front door is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change. In addition, since predetermined warning information can be output to the outside, the sub-control circuit 101 functions as a number counting means and a warning output means.

[MAX bet button function]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 247, a new function of the MAX bet button 11 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described. When the MAX bet button 11 is operated, the number of bets is set within the range of the number of stored credits, but in the following, it is assumed that a sufficient number of credits are stored. That is, the setting of the number of bets due to insufficient credit is not related to this control, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In a conventional pachislot machine, when the MAX bet button is operated in a state where 2BET and 3BET games are possible, 3BET is set as the number of bets, and the MAX bet button is operated in a state where 1BET and 2BET games are possible. Then, 2 BET is set as the number of bets. Further, when the MAX bet button is operated in a state where only 2 BET games can be played, 2 BETs are set as the number of bets. That is, the conventional MAX bet button is used as a bet button that sets the maximum number of bets among the number of bets that can be played in the game state within the range of the number of stored credits.

On the other hand, this control has a function of setting the optimum number of bets among the number of bets that can be played in the state of the game for the MAX bet button 11 within the range of the number of stored credits. Let me. That is, in this control, the MAX bet button 11 is used as a bet button that sets an optimum number of bets instead of the maximum number of bets. As an example, when the MAX bet button 11 is operated while 2BET and 3BET games are possible, 3BET is set as the number of bets in one case, and 2BET is set as the number of bets in another case. There is.

(Outline of game status)
First, FIG. 247 (A) is an example of a gaming state in which this control is preferably used. As shown in the figure, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a non-notification state and a notification state, and the non-notification state includes a first lottery state and a second lottery state. The first lottery state is a state in which the probability of winning a lottery related to the notification state is a normal probability, and the second lottery state is a state in which the lottery related to the notification state is not performed at all (or the probability is lower than that of the first lottery state). It is a state of winning), and is a state of passing through when shifting from the first lottery state to the notification state.

For example, a normal game that is disadvantageous to the player corresponds to the first lottery state, and an AT or ART that is notified of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player corresponds to the notification state. Then, the state from the normal game to the transition to AT (ART) corresponds to the second lottery state, for example, the precursor state of AT (ART) or the preparation state until AT (ART) is started. Corresponds to the second lottery state. It should be noted that the precursory state may include not only the present precursor but also the gassing precursor. What is important as the second lottery state is that the lottery regarding the notification state is not performed (or the winning state is won with a lower probability than the first lottery state).

Further, the second lottery state may be a state from winning the ART to shifting to the high RT. In this case, the transition to high RT is possible only at 2 BET and may not be possible at 3 BET. For example, a role that can display a high RT transition symbol that shifts to high RT by being displayed wins only at 2 BET and does not win at 3 BET, so that transition to high RT is possible only at 2 BET. be able to. As an example, the main control circuit 91 performs a transition lottery to a high RT in an RT state other than the high RT, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to the high RT is promoted. At this time, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11 in the game of performing the transition lottery to the high RT, while winning the transition lottery to the high RT and high. In the game until the transition to RT, 2 BET is determined as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11. Then, in the game after shifting to the high RT, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11.

Further, as another example, the main control circuit 91 performs a transition lottery to the notification state in the non-notification state, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to the high RT is promoted and the game is played during the high RT. Executes a notification state for notifying information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the person. At this time, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11 in the game in which the lottery for shifting to the notification state is performed, while winning the lottery for shifting to the notification state and high. In the game until the transition to RT, 2 BET is determined as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11. Then, in the game after shifting to the high RT, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets according to the operation of the MAX bet button 11.

In the above example, the winning combination that can display the high RT transition symbol that shifts to the high RT by being displayed is won only at the time of 2BET and is not won at the time of 3BET, but this is limited to this. It is possible to win at the time of 2 BET with a higher probability than at the time of 3 BET. Further, the presence or absence of winning may be different according to the number of bets instead of being different according to the number of bets. For example, there is a possibility of winning at both 2BET and 3BET. When a certain combination is determined as the winning combination, the main control circuit 91 controls the reel to stop so that the high RT transition symbol can be displayed at the time of 2BET, while the reel cannot display the high RT transition symbol at the time of 3BET. It may be possible to perform stop control of.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a gaming state, in the non-notification state, it is assumed that the game can be played with any number of bets of 2BET and 3BET, and regarding the notification state, only 3BET is possible and 2BET. Suppose that the game is impossible. It should be noted that the fact that 2BET cannot be played during the notification state may mean that 2BET cannot be set in the notification state, and when 2BET is set during the notification state, the game is played. As a result of not being notified of information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the person, the game may not be in the notified state.

Subsequently, FIG. 247 (B) is a diagram showing the degree of advantage of each state based on the payout rate (= OUT number / IN number × 100). For example, regarding the non-notification state, a low RT with a bet number of 3 BET has a payout rate of 75%, a high RT with a bet number of 3 BET has a payout rate of 90%, and a low RT with a bet number of 2 BET has a payout rate of 90%. It is assumed that the payout rate is 81% and the payout rate is 95% at a high RT with a bet number of 2 BET. In such a case, from the viewpoint of the payout rate, 2BET is more advantageous to the player than 3BET in the non-notifying state.

Further, as shown in the figure, regarding the notification state, it is assumed that the payout rate is 90% at a low RT with a bet number of 3 BET and 105% at a high RT with a bet number of 3 BET. When the number of bets is 2 BET, the notification state is impossible. Therefore, in the notification state, 3BET is more advantageous for the player than 2BET.

Subsequently, FIG. 247 (C) is a diagram showing the degree of advantage of each state based on the winning probability of the lottery regarding the notification state. In the first lottery state where the number of bets is 3 BET, the lottery related to the notification state is won with a normal probability, but in the second lottery state where the number of bets is 3 BET, the lottery related to the notification state is not won (or the normal probability). Winning with a lower probability). The lottery related to the notification state is, for example, a lottery for granting stock of AT or ART.

On the other hand, when the number of bets is 2 BET, the notification state is impossible, so that the lottery related to the notification state is not won (or) regardless of whether it is in the first lottery state or the second lottery state. Win with a lower probability than normal). Therefore, from the viewpoint of lottery regarding the notification state, the first lottery state of 3BET is more advantageous to the player than the other states.

Here, from the viewpoint of the payout rate, 2BET is more advantageous for the player than 3BET in the non-notification state, but in the case of 2BET, it is expected that the notification state will be truly advantageous for the player. Therefore, from a comprehensive viewpoint that takes into account the payout rate and the lottery regarding the notification state, the notification state of 3BET is the most advantageous for the player, and the first lottery state of 3BET that can shift to the most advantageous state is Next, it will be advantageous for the player. On the other hand, regarding the remaining second lottery state, 2BET and 3BET are both disadvantageous and there is no difference in the lottery regarding the notification state, so 2BET is more advantageous from the viewpoint of the payout rate.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (D), in this control, when the MAX bet button 11 is operated in the first lottery state in the non-notification state, 3BET is set as the number of bets, and the second in the non-notification state. When the MAX bet button 11 is operated in the lottery state, 2 BET is set as the number of bets, and when the MAX bet button 11 is operated in the notification state, 3 BET is set as the number of bets. As a result, in a state where the game can be played with either the 2BET or 3BET bet number, either the 2BET or 3BET bet number can be set with only one bet button called the MAX bet button 11.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of patterns are drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by a player. Since the main control circuit 91 has 7Rs and is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the main control circuit 91 functions as a game control means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 11 capable of accepting a bet operation by a player, and the main control circuit 91 determines the number of bets for this game when the bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11. Since it is possible, the MAX bet button 11 functions as a bet operation means, and the main control circuit 91 functions as a bet control means. At this time, when the main control circuit 91 accepts a bet operation via the MAX bet button 11 in a state where the game can be played in both 2BET and 3BET and the number of credits is 3 or more, the number of bets Either 2BET or 3BET can be determined as, and in particular, when a betting operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11 in the first lottery state in the non-notification state, 3BET is determined as the number of bets and the first 2 When a bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11 in the lottery state, 2 BET is determined as the number of bets. In the pachislot machine having a bonus state, the main control circuit 91 determines 3 BET as the number of bets when the bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11 until the bonus combination is won, and the bonus combination is won. In the subsequent game (that is, inside the bonus), 1 BET (or 2 BET) may be determined as the number of bets when the bet operation is accepted via the MAX bet button 11.

Further, the main control circuit 91 can determine whether or not to shift to the notification state in the first lottery state in the non-notification state, and if it is determined to shift, the second lottery state is changed from the first lottery state. Since it is possible to shift to the notification state via the main control circuit 91, the main control circuit 91 functions as a shift determination means and a game state control means.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 248 to 289. The same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment and various modifications will not be described in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples, and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples can be similarly applied. The feature 1 can be similarly applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment shown below.

[Reel and stop button configuration]
First, a plurality of reels and a plurality of stop buttons in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 248. FIG. 248 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of a plurality of reels in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, there are four reels, 1st reel 3-1 and 2nd reel 3-2, 3rd reel 3-3, and 4th reel 3-4, in this order from the left. Has a reel. These four reels are provided side by side in the horizontal direction. The display window 4 is formed so that the player can visually recognize a part of the patterns drawn on these four reels. Specifically, in the display window 4, the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3 have three symbols (upper and middle) drawn on each reel. , Lower) A transparent window area is formed so that the player can see it. That is, as a unit symbol display area for displaying one symbol in the display window 4, the upper unit symbol is displayed for the first reel 3-1, the second reel 3-2, and the third reel 3-3. An area, a unit symbol display area in the middle row, and a unit symbol display area in the lower row are provided.

On the other hand, with respect to the 4th reel 3-4, a transparent window area is formed so that the player can visually recognize only the symbol at the position where the effective line passes (more specifically, only the symbol passing through the effective line is easily visible). The window area is formed so that the player cannot see the symbols other than the position where the effective line passes (more specifically, it is difficult to see the symbols other than the symbols passing through the effective line). In the present embodiment, the effective line is the center line passing through the unit symbol display area in the middle of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the transparent window area corresponding to the fourth reel 3-4 of the display window 4 is limited to the unit symbol display area in the middle stage. The upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area on the 4th reel 3-4 need only be formed so as to have lower visibility than the middle unit symbol display area, and are not necessarily displayed. The corresponding portion of the window 4 is not limited to being opaque. For example, the back lamp provided behind the reels of the display window 4 is set to be transparent while the parts corresponding to the upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area on the fourth reel 3-4 are also made transparent. Reel 3-1 and 2nd reel 3-2 and 3rd reel 3-3 are lit in all of the upper, middle and lower tiers, while in the 4th reel 3-4, only the middle tier is lit and in the upper and lower tiers. Is turned off to reduce the visibility of the upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area on the 4th reel 3-4 (note that the back lamp is controlled by a predetermined control means). Will be). Further, the portion of the display window 4 corresponding to the upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area on the fourth reel 3-4 may be made opaque, and a member may be arranged in front of the portion. By doing so, the relevant portion may not be physically visible.

Subsequently, FIG. 248 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of a plurality of stop buttons in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the first stop button 7-1, the second stop button 7-2, the third stop button 7-3, and the fourth stop button 7- are arranged in this order from the left. It has four stop buttons called 4. These four stop buttons are provided side by side in the horizontal direction.

The first stop button 7-1 is provided corresponding to the first reel 3-1 and the second stop button 7-1 is provided corresponding to the second reel 3-2, and the third stop button 7- 3 is provided corresponding to the third reel 3-3, and the fourth stop button 7-4 is provided corresponding to the fourth reel 3-4. The first stop button 7-1, the second stop button 7-2, the third stop button 7-3, and the fourth stop button 7-4 are connected to the stop switch 7S, and the stop switch 7S has four stops. It is detected that each of the buttons 7-1 to 7-4 is pressed by the player (stop operation). When the stop switch 7S detects a stop operation, the main control circuit 91 stops the rotation of the reels 3-1 to 3-4 of the type corresponding to the operated stop buttons 7-1 to 7-4.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the game is performed using the four reels 3-1 to 3-4, but for the fourth reel 3-4, the position where the effective line passes from the player. Since only the symbol of is visible (easy to see), the player can play the game with the same feeling as that of a conventional 3-reel pachislot machine. That is, as shown in FIG. 248 (C), from the player's point of view, the three reels of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3 are the upper, middle, and lower stages. I got the impression that the game is being played using the unit symbol display area (3 x 3), and the unit symbol display area in the middle of the 4th reel 3-4 is provided as an extra, and is a conventional one. You will have a feeling of rolling that is similar to a 3x3 pachislot machine.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the sixth embodiment]
Subsequently, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 249 is a transition flow of the bonus and RT state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 250 is a transition flow of the state related to the notification of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment.

[Bonus and RT state transition flow]
As shown in FIG. 249, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the states of the non-flag, the flag, the 1st type BB, and the 1st type RB are set according to the presence or absence of the winning of the bonus combination and the presence or absence of the operation of the bonus. Has. Between the non-flags, the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination and the bonus is not activated, and between the flags, the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and The bonus is not activated. Between the flags, the BB of the bonus combination (“F_BB” described later) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the RB of the bonus combination (“F_RB” described later). Is between the RB flags, which is the state in which is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, the type 1 BB is a state in which the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination and the bonus (BB (combined character continuous operation device related to the type 1 special accessory)) is operating. Type 1 RB is a state in which the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination and the bonus (RB (Type 1 special accessory)) is operating. In this embodiment, the game during AT (notification state) is expressed as a pseudo bonus. Therefore, the 1st class BB and the 1st class RB may be referred to as a real bonus (real BB, real RB).

When the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the non-flags, the main control circuit 91 shifts the game state between the flags. Between the flags, the main control circuit 91 waits until the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination is displayed on the valid line (in other words, until the bonus combination wins). Is carried over as an internal winning role. After that, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination is displayed on the effective line, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from between the flags to the bonus state. More specifically, when the combination of symbols corresponding to BB is displayed on the effective line, the main control circuit 91 shifts the game state from between the flags to type 1 BB, and the combination of symbols corresponding to RB is displayed. When it is displayed on the valid line, the game state is shifted from between the flags to the type 1 RB.

Further, in the bonus state, when the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is paid out, the main control circuit 91 ends the bonus state and shifts the game state from the bonus state to the non-flag state. Here, the specified number of 1st class BB is 17, and the specified number of 1st class RB is 3. In addition, in the 1st class BB, the unit game is performed in 3BET, and "1 in F_BB" in which one medal is paid out at the time of winning is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the difference number per unit game will be "-2 (= 1-3)" in the 1st class BB, and the difference number may be negative in the total in the 1st class BB. high. On the other hand, in the 1st class RB, the unit game is performed with 3 BETs, and "4 out of F_RB" in which 4 medals are paid out at the time of winning is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the difference number per unit game will be "+1 (= 4-3)" during the 1st class RB, and the difference number will be slightly positive even in the total of the 1st class RB (maintaining the status quo). Is likely to be. As a result, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the type 1 BB is a bonus state that is disadvantageous to the player, and the type 1 RB is a bonus state that is not disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the non-RT state and the RT1 state are different RT states in which the type of the "replay combination" related to the operation of the replay and the probability that the "replay combination" is determined as the internal winning combination are different. It has an RT2 state, an RT3 state, an RT4 state, an RT5 state, an RT6 state, and an RT7 state. Here, in the pachislot machine, the degree of advantage of the player is determined based on the set value. This set value determines the degree of advantage of the player by, for example, when determining the internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations, by defining the winning probability that the plurality of winning combinations are determined as the internal winning combination. At this time, the plurality of roles include a "small role" related to the payout of medals, a "replay role" related to the operation of the replay, and a "bonus role" related to the operation of the bonus. The RT state is a state in which the winning probability of the "replay combination" among these plurality of combinations and the type of the "replay combination" that can be determined as the internal winning combination can be changed.

The main control circuit 91 shifts the current RT state to another RT state when the transition condition of the RT state is satisfied. The transition conditions of the RT state are different for each RT state, and FIG. 249 (B) shows an outline of each RT state including the transition condition. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 does not shift to the RT state on the condition that the "bonus combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus is activated, and the bonus is completed. That is, in the present embodiment, the RT state is maintained the same before and after the bonus operation.

As shown in the figure, in the non-RT state, the RT state is shifted according to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line. Specifically, between the non-flags, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the non-RT state to the RT1 state when the RT1 transition symbol is displayed along the valid line in the non-RT state, and the non-RT state. When the RT2 transition symbol is displayed along the valid line in the state, the RT state is shifted from the non-RT state to the RT2 state, and when the RT3 transition symbol is displayed along the valid line in the non-RT state, the non-RT state is displayed. When the RT state is shifted from to the RT3 state and the RT4 transition symbol is displayed along the valid line in the non-RT state, the RT state is shifted from the non-RT state to the RT4 state, and the RT5 transition symbol is valid in the non-RT state. When displayed along the line, the RT state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT5 state, and when the RT6 transition symbol is displayed along the valid line in the non-RT state, the RT state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT6 state. When the RT7 transition symbol is displayed along the valid line in the non-RT state, the RT state is shifted from the non-RT state to the RT7 state.

The main control circuit 91 does not shift the RT state even if the RT transition symbol is displayed along the valid line in the non-RT state between the flags and during the class 1 BB and the class 1 RB. That is, for example, even if the RT1 transition symbol is displayed along the valid line in the non-RT state between the flags, the main control circuit 91 maintains the non-RT state without shifting the RT state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the transition from the non-RT state to the other RT state is performed only between the non-flags, and is not performed between the flags during the type 1 BB and the type 1 RB, and remains in the non-RT state. Be maintained.

Further, in the RT1 state to the RT7 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state according to the number of unit games played during the RT state. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 shifts from the RT1 state to the non-RT state when 6000 games are played in the RT1 state, and 5900 times in the RT2 state, the RT2 state. When the RT state is shifted from to the non-RT state and 4500 games are played in the RT3 state, the RT state is shifted from the RT3 state to the non-RT state, and when 4400 games are played in the RT4 state, the RT4 state is played. When the RT state is shifted from to the non-RT state and 4300 games are played in the RT5 state, the RT state is shifted from the RT5 state to the non-RT state, and when 4200 games are played in the RT6 state, the RT6 state is played. The RT state is changed from the RT state to the non-RT state, and when 3000 games are played in the RT7 state, the RT state is changed from the RT7 state to the non-RT state.

Regarding the RT1 state to the RT7 state, the main control circuit 91 does not change the RT state when a predetermined number of games are played regardless of whether the game is between non-flags, between flags, or during type 1 BB and type 1 RB. It shifts to the RT state. Further, in the RT1 state to the RT7 state, the main control circuit 91 does not shift the RT state even if the RT transition symbol is displayed along the effective line. Therefore, in the RT1 state to the RT7 state, the main control circuit 91 maintains the current RT state without shifting to another RT state until a predetermined number of games are played, unless a predetermined initialization process is performed. To do. The predetermined initialization process is a process of initializing at least a part of the storage area, for example, an initialization process when changing the setting or an initialization process when clearing the RAM.

Here, in the RT state, the winning probability of the "replay combination" and the type of the "replay combination" that can be determined as the internal winning combination can be changed, but in a plurality of RT states, the winning of each "replay combination" is changed. Any of the probability, the winning probability of the total "replay combination", the type of "replay combination" that can be determined as the internal winning combination, and the duration of the RT state may be different. The winning probability of each "replay combination" means, for example, the winning probability of replay 1 or the winning probability of replay 2 when the "replay combination" has replay 1 and replay 2. Further, the total winning probability of the "replay combination" means, for example, the total value of the winning probability of the replay 1 and the winning probability of the replay 2 when the replay 1 and the replay 2 are held as the "replay combination".

In this respect, in the present embodiment, at least the total winning probability of the "replay combination" is substantially the same (may be completely the same) in a plurality of RT states (non-RT state, RT1 state to RT7 state). ing. The winning probabilities other than the "replay combination" fluctuate according to the set value, and do not fluctuate even if the RT state changes. Therefore, when the notification state is not taken into consideration, the payout rates (= OUT number / IN number x 100) in the plurality of RT states are substantially the same (when the winning probabilities of the total "replay combination" are completely the same. Is exactly the same).

[State transition flow related to notification]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 250, the transition flow of the state related to the notification of the pachislot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a notification state in which the player can be notified of an advantageous stop operation mode for the player, and a non-notification state in which the notification is performed at a lower frequency (or no notification at all) than in the notification state. It is an AT machine having a state. In the above-described embodiment, the notification state and the non-notification state are switched while maintaining the inter-flag state, and the control is performed so as not to shift between the non-flag states. However, as will be described below. In addition, in the present embodiment, the AT function is basically realized by switching between the notified state and the non-notified state between the BB flags carrying over the BB, but when the condition is satisfied, the BB is set. It is possible to win a prize and transfer between non-flags, type 1 BB, RB flags, and type 1 RB.

As shown in FIG. 250 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has "general", "pseudo-bonus", "pullback", and "specialization" as states related to notification (ball ejection state). In general, it is a non-notification state (non-AT) in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and includes a normal section and a normal advantage which is a non-notification state in the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the notification state can be executed, and the normal section is a game section in which the notification state cannot be executed. The "pseudo-bonus" is a notification state (AT) in which a player is notified of an advantageous stop operation mode, and a pseudo-BB in which a player can obtain about 200 medals and about 100 medals are obtained. Includes possible pseudo RBs. Further, "pullback" and "specialization" may be in a non-notification state or may be in a notification state.

Comparing the "general" normal section ("general (normal section)") and the "general" normal advantage ("general (normal section)"), the "general (normal section)" is the normal section and stays. It is a game section in which the degree of expectation of granting the privilege of AT winning cannot be changed when the game is played. On the other hand, "general (normally advantageous)" is an advantageous section, and is a game section in which the degree of expectation of granting the privilege of AT winning can be changed when staying.

In the "general (normal section)", the main control circuit 91 performs a transition lottery to the advantageous section, and when the transition lottery is won, the "general (normal section)" to the "general (normal advantage)" The state of the ball is shifted to. In addition, when the AT wins in the transition lottery to the advantageous section, the main control circuit 91 can also shift the payout state from the "general (normal section)" to the "pseudo-bonus". In the "general (normal advantage)", the main control circuit 91 performs a transition lottery to the pseudo bonus (AT), and when the AT wins, the "general (normal advantage)" is changed to the "pseudo bonus". The state of the ball is shifted to. Further, in the "general (normal advantage)", the main control circuit 91 performs a maintenance lottery of the normal advantage, and when the maintenance is decided in this lottery, the ball ejection state is set to "general (normal advantage)". If it is maintained as it is and the end is decided in this lottery, the advantageous section is ended and the payout state is shifted from "general (normal section)" to "general (normal advantage)".

A plurality of zones are provided in the "general (advantageous section)", and the probability of winning the AT in the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus (AT) differs depending on this zone. As will be described in detail later, since the zone is set according to the RT state, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the AT differs depending on the RT state, and the RT state is pseudo. Functions as a setting value.

The "pseudo-bonus" is a notification state (AT) managed by the difference in the number of medals, and is the most when the push order combination ("F_A selection bell 1234" to "F_B selection bell 4321") is determined as the internal winning combination. You will be notified of the correct push order in which many medals will be awarded. The "pseudo-bonus (pseudo-BB)" ends when the difference number exceeds 200, and the "pseudo-bonus (pseudo-RB)" ends when the difference exceeds 100. The method of managing the duration of the "pseudo-bonus" is arbitrary, and it may be managed by the difference number of sheets as in the present embodiment, or it may be managed by the number of games, the number of navigations, and the like. When the end condition is satisfied in the "pseudo-bonus", the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state from the "pseudo-bonus" to the "pull-back".

"Pullback" is a game period that lasts for up to 32 games. In the "pullback", the main control circuit 91 performs a pullback lottery of the "pseudo bonus", and when the lottery is won, the payout state is changed from the "pullback" to the "pseudo bonus". "Pullback" has multiple modes such as "For non-RT", "Normal", "Chance", "Heaven", "Special 1", and "Special 2". When the maximum of 32 games) is completed, the main control circuit 91 shifts to the ball ejection state according to the mode. Specifically, when the mode is "for non-RT", "normal", or "chance", the main control circuit 91 ends the advantageous section when the "pullback" period ends without winning the pullback lottery. , Shift the ball output state from "pull back" to "general (normal section)". On the other hand, when the modes are "heaven", "special 1", and "special 2", the main control circuit 91 changes from "pullback" to "pseudo bonus" when the "pullback" period ends without winning the pullback lottery. The state of the ball is shifted to.

"Specialization" is a state in which the expectation of granting benefits is higher than that of "general" and "pseudo-bonus". The type of privilege is arbitrary, and may be a privilege related to ball ejection, or may be a privilege not related to ball ejection. In this respect, in the present embodiment, in the "specialization", the privilege related to AT (pseudo-bonus stock) is more likely to be given as compared with other ball ejection states. The main control circuit 91 performs a special lottery in the "general", and when the lottery is won, the payout state is changed from the "general" to the "specialized".

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the game is basically played between the BB flags, but when the ball ejection state shifts to "specialization", the BB is awarded. (Release between BB flags) and shift the game state between non-flags. That is, in the above-described fourth embodiment or the like, the bonus winning is impossiblely controlled during the flag interval, but in the present embodiment, the bonus winning is possible during the flag interval. In the case of such playability, it is possible to win the BB even though the payout state has not shifted to "specialization", but the main control circuit 91 wins the special lottery. If not, a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB is displayed, and when the BB wins a prize, the player is controlled to a disadvantageous state (non-permitted state). On the other hand, the main control circuit 91 is in a state that is not disadvantageous to the player when the combination of symbols corresponding to the BB is displayed and the BB wins when the special lottery is won (permission state = "permission state =". Control to "specialization").

It should be noted that the disadvantageous state for the player is arbitrary, and for example, as described above, the game may be set to a disadvantageous state by setting the difference number in the type 1 BB as a negative game, or the type 1 BB And, in the game for a predetermined period after that, it may be disadvantageous by lowering the expectation of granting the privilege related to AT. Further, the state that is not disadvantageous to the player may be advantageous as compared with the case where the special lottery is not won, and it is not always necessary for the player to be advantageous. That is, although the difference number is negative during the 1st class BB, it is not necessary to give the player a profit exceeding this negative amount, and the player suffers the disadvantage if he / she does not win the special lottery. It should be in a state where it is not received.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, in the "specialization", the expectation of giving a privilege regarding the AT is higher than that in other ball ejection states, so that the player is in an advantageous state. As another example of a state that is not disadvantageous to the player, for example, a navigation state is provided such that the difference number slightly increases for a predetermined number of games after the first type BB, and a predetermined privilege movie is provided during this navigation state. It may be a viewing section in which the above is played, and by not lowering the expectation of granting benefits related to AT, it may be in a state where it is not disadvantageous as compared with the case where the special lottery is not won.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game period during the payout state "specialization" includes the game in the type 1 BB, and the game in the type 1 BB has a negative difference in the number of cards. , The expected value of the medal balance per unit game during the period of "specialization" is not necessarily high. On the other hand, since the payout state "pseudo-bonus" is the AT period in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, the expected value of the medal balance per unit game during the "pseudo-bonus" period is At least it will be a plus. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game during the period during the payout state "specialization" is the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game during the period during the payout state "pseudo-bonus". Lower than the value. On the other hand, the expectation of granting benefits related to AT during the period of the ball-out state "specialization" is higher than the expectation of granting benefits related to AT during the period of the ball-out state "pseudo-bonus".

"Specialization" shifts to the case of winning the special lottery in "general", and then continues until the BB flag is reached again. That is, when the special lottery is won in "general (= between BB flags)", the winning of the BB is promoted, and the process shifts from between the BB flags to the non-flags via the type 1 BB. After that, when the BB is determined again as the internal winning combination between the non-flags, the winning of the BB is not permitted, and the process shifts from the non-flags to the BB flags. Then, the "specialization" ends when the transition is made between the BB flags, and when the "specialization" ends, the payout state shifts to the "pseudo bonus". That is, the main control circuit 91 shifts the ball ejection state from "specialization" to "pseudo-bonus" with the shift between the BB flags.

In the present embodiment, "specialization" ends when BB is determined as an internal winning combination between the non-flags during specialization, but is not limited to this, and between the non-flags during specialization. When the BB is decided as the internal winning combination, the specialization end lottery is performed, when the end is decided in this lottery, the "specialization" is ended, and when the continuation is decided in this lottery, the "specialization" is continued. You may do it. In this case, if it is decided to continue in the specialization end lottery, the winning of the BB is promoted, the game shifts between the non-flags via the 1st class BB, and the payout state is maintained as "specialized". Will be done. On the other hand, when the end is decided, the winning of the BB is not permitted, the game shifts from the non-flag to the BB flag, and the payout state shifts from "specialization" to "pseudo-bonus". Further, when the BB is determined as the internal winning combination between the non-flags during specialization, the specialization may be terminated according to the RT state. That is, as will be described later, "specialization" is also used as a period during which the RT state can be shifted. Therefore, for example, when the RT state is a non-RT state, "specialization" is continued and RT When the states are the RT1 state to the RT7 state, the "specialization" may be terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the RB (“F_RB”) is also provided as a bonus combination in addition to the BB (“F_BB”), when the BB flag is released and the non-flag is shifted, the BB RB may be decided as an internal winning role before. The main control circuit 91 ends the "specialization" when the BB is determined as the internal winning combination between the non-flags of the "specialization", but the RB is determined as the internal winning combination before the BB. In that case, the ball ejection state is maintained as "specialized". In addition, BB and RB, which are actual bonuses, may not be able to stop and display the combination of corresponding symbols depending on the stop operation (so-called omission), and if it was set as "specialization" until such a period, it would be "specialization". Can be intentionally extended. Therefore, the period from winning the special lottery to the winning of the BB, and the period from the determination of the RB as the internal winning combination between the non-flags in the "specialization" to the winning of the RB are set to ". As a preparatory period for "specialization", the expectation of granting benefits related to AT may be maintained at the same expectation as other ball-out states.

The main control circuit 91 sets the disallowed state when the BB is determined as the internal winning combination between the non-flags regardless of the ball ejection state. Then, when the main control circuit 91 wins the special lottery in the ball ejection state "general" between the BB flags, the disallowed state is updated to the permitted state. As will be described later, the probability of winning the special lottery differs between the "general" in which the RT state is the non-RT state and the "general" in which the RT state is the RT1 state to the RT7 state. That is, in the ball ejection state "general" between the BB flags and in the non-RT state, the main control circuit 91 updates the disallowed state to the permitted state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and between the BB flags and in the RT1 state to the RT7 state. In the ball ejection state "general", the non-permitted state is updated to the permitted state when a specific condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, when the special lottery is won, the pachislot machine 1 can execute an effect of encouraging the winning of the BB. For example, when a special lottery is won, the sub-control circuit 101 executes an effect of prompting the display of a combination of symbols corresponding to the BB via the display unit 100. Of course, the winning of the BB may be promoted by the control of the main control circuit 91, or the winning of the BB may be promoted in both the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101.

Subsequently, FIG. 250 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a game state such as an RT state and a ball ejection state. As shown in the figure, "general (normal section)" is a normal section and corresponds to all RT states. Further, "general (normal section)" is basically between BB flags. In the initial state such as at the time of shipment or when the RAM is cleared, the non-flag section also corresponds to "general (normal section)".

Further, "general (normally advantageous)" is an advantageous section and corresponds to all RT states during the BB flag. In addition, the "pseudo-bonus" is an advantageous section and corresponds to all RT states during the BB flag. Further, "pullback" is an advantageous section and corresponds to all RT states during the BB flag. Further, "specialization" is an advantageous section, and corresponds to all RT states in the type 1 BB, all RT states in the non-flags, and all RT states in the type 1 RB.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of RT states are used as pseudo setting values. Here, since the transition from the non-RT state to the RT1 state to the RT7 state can be performed only between the non-flags, the non-flags function as a period for setting a pseudo setting value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a pseudo setting value is basically set during "specialization".

As described above, the limiter is provided in the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, the main control circuit 91 gives the "pseudo-bonus" even if the end condition is not satisfied in the "pseudo-bonus". The "pseudo-bonus" ends by ending the advantageous section regardless of the remaining sustainable period. Here, referring to FIG. 249, the number of games played according to the end threshold value of the RT1 state to the RT7 state is larger than the number of games played according to the threshold value (1500 times) of the number of games limiter in the advantageous section.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Subsequently, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described.

[Design arrangement table]
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 251 data the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. It is represented by. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" are arranged along the rotation direction in each of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. Indicates the position of the symbol. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

[Design code table]
Further, as shown in FIG. 251, each symbol arranged on the first reel 3-1, the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4 is specified by the symbol code table. It is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 251 provides codes for identifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. Represents.

The patterns used in the pachislot machine 1 according to this embodiment are "red 7", "blue BAR", "black BAR", "pink", "replay", "bell", "cherry", "watermelon", and "orange". "And" purple ", and 1 byte of data is assigned to each.

[Internal lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 252 and 253, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. FIG. 252 (A) is an internal lottery table referenced between non-flags, FIG. 253 (B) is an internal lottery table referenced in type 1 BB, and FIG. 253 (C) is type 1 RB. It is an internal lottery table referred to in. Although the internal lottery table corresponding to the flags is omitted, the internal lottery tables corresponding to the flags are "F_BB" and "F_BB" among the internal lottery tables for non-flags shown in FIG. 252 (A). The lottery value corresponding to "F_RB" is added to the lottery value corresponding to "missing". Then, between the flags, the type of bonus combination carried over is always determined as the internal winning combination.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the symbol combination table, combinations of a plurality of symbols are defined in advance. In addition, in FIG. 254 and FIG. 255, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this is a combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Indicates that

Further, in the figure, the “dividend” represents the content of the dividend given when the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed along the valid line. Specifically, "dividend: BB" means that the accessory continuous operation device (the above-mentioned type 1 BB) related to the first-class special accessory is activated, and "dividend: RB" is the first-class special. It means that the accessory (the above-mentioned type 1 RB) is activated, and "dividend: RP" indicates that the replay is activated. Further, "dividend: 12" means that 12 medals are paid out, "dividend: 1" means that one medal is paid out, and "dividend: 2" means that two medals are paid out. It means that it will be paid out, and "dividend: 3" means that three medals will be paid out.

Further, in the figure, "RT transition" means the RT state of the transition destination when the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed along the effective line. As described above in FIG. 249 (B), the transition of the RT state accompanying the display of the symbol combination is performed between the non-flags and in the non-RT state. In FIGS. 254 and 255, the combination of symbols for which "RT1 transition" is defined as "RT transition" is an RT1 transition symbol, which is a combination of symbols that triggers a transition to the RT1 state. Further, the combination of symbols for which "RT2 transition" is defined as "RT transition" is an RT2 transition symbol, and is a combination of symbols that triggers a transition to the RT2 state. Further, the combination of symbols for which "RT3 transition" is defined as "RT transition" is an RT3 transition symbol, and is a combination of symbols that triggers a transition to the RT3 state. Further, the combination of symbols for which "RT4 transition" is defined as "RT transition" is an RT4 transition symbol, and is a combination of symbols that triggers a transition to the RT4 state. Further, the combination of symbols for which "RT5 transition" is defined as "RT transition" is an RT5 transition symbol, which is a combination of symbols that triggers a transition to the RT5 state. Further, the combination of symbols for which "RT6 transition" is defined as "RT transition" is an RT6 transition symbol, which is a combination of symbols that triggers a transition to the RT6 state. Further, the combination of symbols for which "RT7 transition" is defined as "RT transition" is an RT7 transition symbol, which is a combination of symbols that triggers a transition to the RT7 state.

Here, when the combination of the symbols with the name "BB" and the combination of the symbols with the name "RB" are compared, the first reels 3-1 and the second of the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols with the name "RB" are used. The symbols on reels 3-2 and 3-3 are "blue BAR", and among the symbols that make up the combination of symbols with the name "BB", the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and It is common with a part of the design of the 3rd reel 3-3.

Further, the symbol of the 4th reel 3-4 of the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the name "RB" is "purple", and the symbol of the 4th reel of the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols of the name "BB" is "purple". The design of 3-4 is different for "blue BAR". Here, referring to FIG. 251, in the fourth reel 3-4, the symbols "blue BAR" and "purple" are arranged at intervals within the maximum number of sliding pieces, and more specifically, they are arranged adjacent to each other. Therefore, by performing a stop operation aiming at the symbol "blue BAR" on the first reel 3-1, the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4, the name "BB" is given. Both the combination of symbols and the combination of symbols with the name "RB" can be aimed at at the same time.

In addition, in the 1st reel 3-1 and the 2nd reel 3-2 and the 3rd reel 3-3, the symbol constituting the combination of the symbols of the name "RB" is only "blue BAR", and the symbol of the name "BB". The symbols that make up the combination of symbols include symbols other than "blue BAR". Therefore, in a game in which the combination of symbols with the name "BB" can be stopped and displayed, the rate at which the combination of symbols with the name "BB" is stopped and displayed when the stop operation is randomly performed, and the name "RB" In a game in which the combination of symbols of "" can be stopped and displayed, the ratio of the combination of symbols of the name "RB" being stopped and displayed when the stop operation is performed at random is lower than that of the latter. Specifically, the combination of symbols with the name "BB" may be stopped and displayed at a rate of about 1/4 when the first reel 3-1 is missed and the stop operation is performed at random. it can. In addition, the combination of symbols with the name "RB" is about when the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3 are missed and the stop operation is performed at random. It can be stopped and displayed at a rate of 1/64.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination and symbol combination]
Subsequently, FIGS. 256 to 258 are tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination. .. Note that FIGS. 256A and 257B are diagrams showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped in the non-bonus state (that is, between the flags or between the flags). , FIG. 257 (C) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the type 1 BB and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped, and FIG. 257 (D) shows the internal winning combination in the type 1 RB. It is a figure which shows the correspondence | correspondence with the combination of the symbol which is stopped and displayed.

The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. In the figure, all the combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the combinations of the symbols marked with circles corresponding to the combination are listed. However, it may not be displayed. Therefore, the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed is shown in FIGS. 259 to 261.

(Correspondence between the internal winning combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a push order combination (push order bell), which is a combination of symbols displayed according to the stop operation order (push order), and a push order combination (push order bell), which are displayed regardless of the stop operation order, are displayed. It has an unquestioned push order combination in which the combinations of symbols to be played are the same. FIG. 259 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the push order combination and the combination of the symbols actually stopped and displayed, and FIGS. 260 and 261 are the combination of the push order combination and the symbol actually stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship.

First, with reference to FIG. 259, the correspondence between the push order unquestioned combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed will be described. The correspondence between the push order unquestioned combination and the symbol combination is the same regardless of the game state, and the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 259 is that the game states are between non-flags, between BB flags, between RB flags, and type 1 BB. It is the same in all of the first type RB.

As shown in FIG. 259, the combination of the symbols of the name "Rip A" is displayed along the valid line for the combination "F_1 lip", and the combination of the symbols of the name "Rip B" is valid for the combination "F_1 lip". Displayed along the line, the combination of symbols with the name "Rip C" is valid for the combination "F_2 Lip", and the combination of symbols with the name "Rip D" is valid for the combination "F_3 Lip". Displayed along the line, the combination of the symbols of the name "Rip E" is displayed along the valid line for the combination "F_4 rip", and the combination "F_5 rip" is of the name "Rip F" or "Rip G". The combination of symbols is displayed along the effective line, the combination "F_6 rip" is displayed along the effective line, and the combination "F_7 rip" is the name "Rip I". The combination of symbols is displayed along the effective line.

Since the combination of symbols related to the name "Rip B" is an RT1 transition symbol, when the combination "F_1 Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between the non-flags, the RT state is the non-RT state. To the RT1 state. Similarly, since the combination of symbols related to the name "Rip C" is an RT2 transition symbol, when the combination "F_2 Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between non-flags, the RT state is non-RT. Since the combination of symbols related to the name "Rip D" after shifting from the state to the RT2 state is the RT3 transition symbol, when the combination "F_3 Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between non-flags, Since the RT state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT3 state and the combination of symbols related to the name "Rip E" is the RT4 transition symbol, the combination "F_4 Lip" is used as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between the non-flags. When determined, the RT state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT4 state, and the combination of symbols related to the names "Rip F" and "Rip G" is an RT5 transition symbol, so that it is useful in the non-RT state between non-flags. When "F_5 Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT5 state, and the combination of symbols related to the name "Rip H" is the RT6 transition symbol, so that between the non-flags. When the combination "F_6 Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state, the RT state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT6 state, and the combination of symbols related to the name "Rip I" is the RT7 transition symbol. , When the combination "F_7 lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between the non-flags, the RT state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT7 state.

Further, in the combination "F_common bell", any combination of symbols with names "12A" to "12U2" is displayed along the effective line. In addition, in FIGS. 259 to 261, the combination of the symbols of the names "12A" to "12U2" is described as "12 sheets". Since the combination of symbols with names "12A" to "12U2" is an RT1 transition symbol, when the combination "F_common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between non-flags, the RT state is non-RT. It shifts from the state to the RT1 state.

In addition, for the combination "F_watermelon", a combination of symbols with the name "watermelon" is displayed along the effective line. Since the combination of symbols with the name "watermelon" is an RT7 transition symbol, when the combination "F_watermelon" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between non-flags, the RT state changes from the non-RT state to the RT7 state. Transition.

Further, for the combination "F_cherry", any combination of the symbols of the names "cherry A" to "cherry C" is displayed along the effective line. Since the combination of symbols with names "cherry A" to "cherry C" is an RT3 transition symbol, if the combination "F_cherry" is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-RT state between non-flags, the RT state is non-RT state. It shifts from the RT state to the RT3 state.

Further, for the combination "F_confirmed cherry", any combination of the symbols of the names "confirmed cherry A" to "confirmed cherry C" is displayed along the effective line. Since the combination of the symbols with the names "confirmed cherry A" to "confirmed cherry C" is the RT3 transition symbol, if the combination "F_confirmed cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between the non-flags, RT The state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT3 state.

Further, in the combination "F_middle cherry", the combination of the symbols of the name "middle cherry" is displayed along the effective line. Since the combination of symbols with the name "middle cherry" is an RT3 transition symbol, when the combination "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-RT state between non-flags, the RT state changes from the non-RT state to RT3. Move to the state.

Further, for the combination "F_reach eyes", any combination of symbols with the names "fixed combination A" to "fixed combination C" is displayed along the effective line. Since the combination of symbols with the names "fixed combination A" to "fixed combination C" is an RT3 transition symbol, if the combination "F_reach eye" is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-RT state between non-flags, RT The state shifts from the non-RT state to the RT3 state.

Further, for the combination "1 in F_BB", any combination of symbols with names "1A" to "1M" is displayed along the effective line. In addition, in FIGS. 259 to 261, the combination of the symbols of the names "1A" to "1M" is described as "1 sheet". Further, in the combination "4 out of F_RB", the combination of the symbols of the name "RB bell" is displayed along the effective line. In addition, in FIGS. 259 to 261, the combination of the symbols of the name "RB bell" is described as "4 sheets".

Further, for the combination "F_BB", a combination of symbols with the name "BB" or a combination of symbols of "off" that is not a combination of any of the symbols specified in FIGS. 254 and 255 is displayed along the valid line. As for "role F_RB", a combination of symbols with the name "RB" or a combination of symbols with "missing" is displayed along the effective line.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261, the correspondence between the push order combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed will be described. The correspondence between the push order combination and the symbol combination differs depending on the game state, FIG. 260 shows the correspondence relationship when the game state is between non-flags or between BB flags, and FIG. 261 shows the game state. Shows the correspondence when is between the RB flags. Further, in the figure, the pushing order indicates the order of stop operations (24 ways) for the four reels.

As shown in FIG. 260, between the non-flags and the BB flags, the combinations "F_A selection bell 1234" to "F_B selection bell 4321" are named "12A" to "12A" when the order of the stop operation is the correct pressing order. If any of the symbol combinations of "12U2" is displayed along the valid line and the order of the stop operations is the wrong push order, any of the symbol combinations of the names "1A" to "1M" is valid. Displayed along the line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 261, between the RB flags, the combinations "F_A selection bell 1234" to "F_A selection bell 4321" are named "12A" to "12U2" when the order of the stop operation is the correct pressing order. If any of the symbol combinations of "" is displayed along the valid line and the stop operation order is the wrong push order, any of the symbol combinations of the names "1A" to "1M" will be the valid line. It is displayed along. Further, for the combinations "F_B selection bell 1234" to "F_B selection bell 4321", any combination of symbols with names "12A" to "12U2" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the order of the stop operation. ..

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the RB flag, the combinations "F_B selection bell 1234" to "F_B selection bell 4321" are not the push order combination but the push order unquestioned combination, and are displayed when the answer is correct. The combinations of symbols with the names "12A" to "12U2" are displayed regardless of the pressing order. Since there is no difference in the probability of determining the internal winning combination between the non-flags, the BB flags, and the RB flags, the coin holding is better during the RB flags than between the non-flags and the BB flags. In other words, the period between the RB flags is a high-based game period compared to the non-flags and the BB flags, and the expected value of the medal balance per unit game during the RB flags is between the non-flags and the BB flag. It is higher than the expected value of the medal balance per unit game during the period.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination and lottery type]
Subsequently, FIG. 262 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the lottery type. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs various lottery based on the internal winning combination, but if the lottery result is provided for each combination, the amount of data required for one lottery is enormous. Become. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of combinations are grouped as a lottery type, and various lottery is performed based on the lottery type. For example, the roles "F_A selection bell 1234" to "F_B selection bell 4321", which are push order combinations, are No. It is grouped into 4 lottery types "bells", and various lottery is performed with reference to this lottery type.

[Advantageous section transition lottery table]
Subsequently, the advantageous section transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 263. The advantageous section transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing a transition lottery to an advantageous section based on the internal winning combination (lottery type) for each unit game in the ball ejection state "general (normal section)". The advantageous section transition lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the advantageous section transition lottery for each lottery type. In the ball ejection state "general (normal section)", when the game state is between BB flags or between non-flags, the "between BB flags and between non-flags" column is referred to, and when the game state is between RB flags. Refers to the "Between RB flags" column, refers to the "Type 1 BB" column when the game state is type 1 BB, and refers to the "Type 1 RB" column when the game state is type 1 RB. Is referenced.

The main control circuit 91 maintains the normal section when "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, and shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section when "winning" is determined as the lottery result. At the same time, the ball ejection state is changed from "general (normal section)" to another ball ejection state. Specifically, in the main control circuit 91, when the lottery type is "confirmed cherry", "middle stage cherry", and "reach eye" when the lottery result "win" is determined, the freeze lottery or specialization is further performed thereafter. A lottery is performed, and the payout state is shifted to "pseudo-bonus" or "specialization" according to the result of these lottery. On the other hand, when the lottery type is other than "confirmed cherry", "middle cherry", and "reach eye" when the lottery result "winning" is determined, the ball ejection state is shifted to "general (normal advantage)".

Here, as described above, the ball ejection state "general (normal section)" is an unauthorized state and the interval between the BB flags is maintained. Therefore, in the ball ejection state "general (normal section)", the gaming state is between the RB flags. In the case of type 1 BB and type 1 RB, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is designed to be disadvantageous as compared with the case where the gaming state is between the BB flags. In the present embodiment, when the game state is between RB flags, type 1 BB and type 1 RB, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is not won, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to win with a lower probability than when the game state is between the BB flags. This point is the same for other lottery. Further, the lottery value shown in the figure (the same applies to other lottery tables) is only an example, and may be another value. For example, in the figure, when the lottery type is "missing, normal lip", "non-winning" is always determined as the lottery result, but "winning" is determined with a predetermined probability. May be.

In addition, it is not preferable that the probability of becoming a "win" in the transition lottery to the advantageous section is too low, and it is preferable that the transition can be performed appropriately. As an example, the probability of becoming a "win" in the lottery for transition to an advantageous section may be set to about 1/100. That is, it may be possible to shift from the ball ejection state "general (normal section)" to "general (normal advantage)" at a rate of about once in 100 games.

[MAP lottery table]
Subsequently, the MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 264. The MAP lottery table is a table referred to for determining various information (MAP, zone, etc.) used for various lottery regarding AT in the advantageous section at the time of transition to the advantageous section. FIG. 264 (A) shows the MAP lottery table, FIG. 264 (B) shows the outline of the MAP obtained as a result of the lottery, and FIG. 264 (C) shows the outline of the zone determined from the MAP.

As shown in FIG. 264 (A), the MAP lottery table defines the lottery value information for the lottery result of the MAP lottery for each current RT state. When the main control circuit 91 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the main control circuit 91 performs a MAP lottery with reference to the current RT state and determines the MAP. The MAP is information that affects various lottery related to AT in the advantageous section. Basically, the smaller the MAP number, the more disadvantageous the various lottery is for the player, and the larger the MAP number, the more various lottery. It is advantageous for the player. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RT state is used as a pseudo set value. With reference to the figure, the smaller the RT number, the easier it is to determine the MAP that is disadvantageous to the player, and the larger the RT number, the easier it is to determine the MAP that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, in the RT state where the RT number is small, the pseudo set value is set low, and in the RT state where the RT number is large, the pseudo set value is set high. As will be described in detail later, the non-RT state is preferably an RT state in which a MAP disadvantageous to the player can be easily determined. In this case, the non-RT state need not be the most unfavorable RT state among the plurality of RT states.

Subsequently, an outline of various MAPs will be described with reference to FIG. 264 (B). The MAP (grant status determination information) defines a zone (grant status) for each number of elapsed games in the current RT status. The main control circuit 91 counts the number of games executed in the same RT state without shifting to another RT state, and when the MAP is determined by MAP lottery, it corresponds to this counting result (number of elapsed games). Identify and determine which zone to use. For example, when the game shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in a game in which 1000 games have passed since the RT5 state started, the main control circuit 91 first refers to the MAP lottery table and determines the MAP based on the RT5 state. At this time, when the MAP 4 is determined as the MAP, the main control circuit 91 determines the zone 3 corresponding to 1000 games of the MAP 4 as the zone. The MAP and the zone are determined only in the advantageous section and not in the normal section. The main control circuit 91 determines the MAP and the zone when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, and then initializes (clears) the MAP and the zone when the main control circuit 91 ends the advantageous section and shifts to the normal section.

The RT1 state has a duration of 6000 games, which is larger than the number of RT games specified in the MAP, but when the actual number of elapsed games exceeds the number of RT games specified in the MAP, the left side again. The zone may be determined by referring to the number of RT games in order. For example, when 3700 games have passed in the RT1 state, the zone may be determined from the MAP with the number of elapsed games set to "101 games (= 3700-3599)". Further, in the present embodiment, the zone is determined based on the number of elapsed games in the current RT state, but the zone may be determined based on the number of remaining games. In the case of the above example, the zone may be determined from the MAP with the number of remaining games "2300 (= 6000-3700)".

Subsequently, the outline of each zone will be described with reference to FIG. 264 (C). The zone (grant status) is information that determines the degree of expectation for granting benefits related to AT. Here, the degree of expectation for granting benefits related to AT includes the degree of expectation for AT and the degree of expectation for consecutive villas. The AT expectation degree is, for example, the expectation degree of the first hit of the AT, and in the present embodiment, it means the expectation degree of the AT winning in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)". In addition, the expectation level of the consecutive villa is the degree of expectation regarding the extension of the duration of the AT, for example, the degree of expectation of the consecutive villa of the AT and the addition, and in the present embodiment, the ball ejection state "pull back". It refers to the degree of expectation of AT winning in.

Here, referring to the figure, a zone is defined for each MAP every 400 games. As described above, the transition from the ball ejection state "general (normal section)" to "general (normal advantage)" is performed about once in 100 games (that is, the reciprocal of the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section). If it is possible to shift with, the zone is switched every 400 games, so it can be expected that the zone will be shifted to the advantageous section once before the zone is switched.

[First hit pseudo bonus lottery table]
Subsequently, the first hit pseudo-bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 265. The first hit pseudo-bonus lottery table is a table referred to for determining whether or not to grant a privilege (pseudo-bonus stock) related to AT in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)". The first hit pseudo-bonus lottery table is provided for each zone, and the lottery value information about the lottery result of the pseudo-bonus stock grant lottery is defined for each lottery type. The main control circuit 91 performs a pseudo-bonus stock grant lottery for each unit game in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)", and in this lottery, "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result. In that case, no privilege is given, and when "winning" is determined as a result of the lottery, one stock of pseudo BB or pseudo RB is given.

[First hit pseudo bonus type lottery table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 266, the first hit pseudo-bonus type lottery table will be described. The first hit pseudo-bonus type lottery table is used to determine the type of pseudo-bonus to be given when "winning" is determined as the lottery result in the stock granting lottery of the pseudo-bonus in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)". It is a table referenced by. The first hit pseudo-bonus type lottery table is provided for each zone, and the lottery value information about the lottery result of the pseudo-bonus type lottery is defined for each lottery type. When the main control circuit 91 wins the stock granting lottery of the pseudo bonus, the type lottery is subsequently performed, and when "pseudo RB" is determined as the lottery result in this lottery, one stock of the pseudo RB is given. When "pseudo BB" is determined as a result of lottery, one stock of pseudo BB is given.

[First hit pseudo RB lottery table]
Subsequently, the first hit pseudo RB lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 267. The first hit pseudo RB lottery table is a table referred to for determining whether or not to grant the stock of the pseudo RB in the ball ejection state "general (normally advantageous)". The first hit pseudo RB lottery table is provided for each zone, and defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the stock grant lottery of the pseudo RB. Although some zones are summarized in the figure, a table may be provided for each zone.

The main control circuit 91 counts the number of games executed in the same RT state without shifting to another RT state, and in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)", this counting result (RT state). When the result of the predetermined calculation with respect to the elapsed game number) satisfies the predetermined condition, the stock grant lottery of the pseudo RB is performed with reference to the first hit pseudo RB lottery table. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 has a pseudo RB between a game in which the remainder of dividing the number of elapsed games in the RT state by 500 satisfies 131 or more in the ball ejection state "general (normally advantageous)". The stock lottery period is set, and the stock grant lottery of the pseudo RB with reference to the first hit pseudo RB lottery table is performed.

In addition, when the main control circuit 91 wins the stock grant lottery of the pseudo bonus performed every game in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)", even during the stock lottery period of the pseudo RB, the first hit pseudo RB The stock granting lottery of the pseudo RB referring to the lottery table may not be performed, or both stock granting lottery may be performed together. Further, the main control circuit 91 may set the stock lottery period of the pseudo RB only once or a plurality of times in one advantageous section. That is, when the result of a predetermined calculation for the number of elapsed games in the RT state satisfies the predetermined condition a plurality of times in one advantageous section, only the first one may be used as the stock lottery period of the pseudo RB. The stock lottery period of the pseudo RB may be set for other than the first time. Further, the predetermined calculation for the number of elapsed games in the RT state is not limited to division, and may be an arbitrary calculation, and the conditions satisfied by the calculation result may be arbitrary.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may have different contents of a predetermined calculation for the number of elapsed games in the RT state for each current RT state. As an example, when division is used as a predetermined operation, a stock lottery period of pseudo RB can be provided at a fixed cycle. At this time, by making the divisor different for each RT state, the length of this constant cycle can be made different for each RT state. Further, the main control circuit 91 may make the predetermined condition satisfied by the result of the predetermined calculation for the number of elapsed games in the RT state different for each current RT state. As an example, when division is used as a predetermined operation, it may be a condition related to a quotient value as a predetermined condition, and even when a remainder is used, the remainder of the first range is set as a predetermined condition in one RT state. In other RT states, the remainder of the second range may be a predetermined condition. Further, the main control circuit 91 may make both the content of the predetermined calculation and the predetermined condition different for each current RT state. By doing so, the rule of the stock lottery period of the pseudo RB can be made different for each RT state.

[First hit mode lottery table]
Subsequently, the first hit mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 268. The first hit mode lottery table is used when the "winning" is determined as the lottery result in the stock granting lottery of the pseudo bonus, and then the payout state shifts to "pull back" (via the pseudo bonus). A table referenced to determine the mode. The first hit mode lottery table is provided for each zone, and the lottery value information about the lottery result of the mode lottery is defined for each lottery type. Although some zones are summarized in the figure, a table may be provided for each zone.

When the main control circuit 91 wins the stock granting lottery of the pseudo bonus, the main control circuit 91 subsequently performs a mode lottery with reference to the first hit mode lottery table, and sets the mode obtained as the lottery result. When the current RT state is the non-RT state, the main control circuit 91 sets the non-RT mode without performing a mode lottery.

[Freeze lottery table]
Subsequently, the freeze lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 269. The freeze lottery table is a table that is referred to when the lottery type is "fixed cherry", "middle cherry", and "reach eye", and is referred to for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined freeze control. The freeze lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery results of the freeze lottery. The main control circuit 91 does not perform freeze control when "non-win" is determined as a result of the freeze lottery, and executes freeze control when "win" is determined as a result of the freeze lottery. In the present embodiment, the freeze lottery is performed only in the ball ejection state "general (normal section)", but the freeze lottery may be executed in other ball ejection states.

[Specialized lottery table]
Subsequently, the specialized lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 270. The special lottery table is referred to when a stock of pseudo bonuses (pseudo BB, pseudo RB) is given, and determines whether or not to shift the payout state to "specialization" before "pseudo bonus". The table referenced for. The special lottery table is provided for each current RT state, and defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the special lottery for each lottery type. When the "non-winning" is determined as a result of the special lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the above-mentioned non-permission state without shifting the payout state to the "specialization". Further, when the "win" is determined as a result of the special lottery, the main control circuit 91 shifts the payout state to the "specialized" and updates the non-permitted state to the permitted state.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, in the non-RT state, the special lottery is won with a higher probability than in the RT1 state to the RT7 state. Therefore, when comparing the non-RT state and the RT1 to RT7 states, the conditions for updating from the non-permitted state to the permitted state are different (predetermined condition and specific condition), and the non-RT state is permitted from the non-permitted state. Easy to update to state. Although the RT1 state to the RT7 state are summarized in the figure, a table may be provided for each RT state. Further, in the present embodiment, the special lottery is performed only when the stock of the pseudo bonus (pseudo BB, pseudo RB) is given, but is the stock of the pseudo bonus (pseudo BB, pseudo RB) given? Regardless of whether or not, a special lottery may be conducted. Further, in the present embodiment, the special lottery is performed only in the ball ejection state "general", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special lottery may also be performed in the ball ejection state "pseudo bonus" or "pullback". Good.

[Normal advantage maintenance lottery table]
Subsequently, the ordinary advantage maintenance lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 271. The normal advantage maintenance lottery table is a table referred to when performing a maintenance lottery of whether to end or maintain the advantageous section based on the lottery type for each unit game in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)". Usually, the advantageous maintenance lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the maintenance lottery for each lottery type. In the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)", when the game state is between BB flags or between non-flags, the "between BB flags and between non-flags" column is referred to, and when the game state is between RB flags. Refers to the "Between RB flags" column, refers to the "Type 1 BB" column when the game state is type 1 BB, and refers to the "Type 1 RB" column when the game state is type 1 RB. Is referenced.

When "maintenance" is determined as a result of lottery, the main control circuit 91 maintains the advantageous section as it is, and maintains the ball ejection state as "general (normally advantageous)". Further, when "end" is determined as a result of lottery, the main control circuit 91 ends the advantageous section, shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and sets the ball ejection state to "general (normal section)". Move to. Further, the main control circuit 91 initializes (clears) various information (MAP, zone, etc.) regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, when the game state is other than between the BB flags or between the non-flags, "end" is always determined as the lottery result, but the game state is not limited to this. The lottery result "maintenance" may be determined with a lower probability than between the BB flags or between the non-flags.

[Pseudo BB lottery table during pseudo bonus]
Subsequently, the pseudo BB lottery table in the pseudo bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 272. The pseudo-BB lottery table in the pseudo-bonus is a table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to grant the stock of the pseudo-BB based on the lottery type for each unit game in the payout state "pseudo-bonus". The pseudo BB lottery table in the pseudo bonus is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the stock grant lottery of the pseudo BB for each lottery type. In the payout state "pseudo-bonus", when the game state is between BB flags or between non-flags, the "between BB flags and between non-flags" column is referred to, and when the game state is between RB flags, "between BB flags" is referred to. The "between RB flags" column is referred to, the "1st class BB" column is referred to when the gaming state is 1st class BB, and the "1st class RB" column is referred to when the gaming state is 1st class RB. The flag.

The main control circuit 91 does not grant the stock of the pseudo BB when the "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, and when the "winning" is determined as the lottery result, the stock of the pseudo BB is used. Give one. In the present embodiment, when the game state is other than between the BB flags or between the non-flags, the lottery for granting the stock of the pseudo BB in the ball ejection state "pseudo bonus" is not won, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the game state may be won in the pseudo BB stock grant lottery with a lower probability than between the BB flags or the non-flags.

[Lottery table for the number of pullback games]
Subsequently, the pullback game number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 273. The number of pullback games The lottery table is a table that is referred to for determining the number of pullback games, which is the duration of the "pullback", when the payout state "pseudo-bonus" ends and the payout state "pullback" is entered. Is. The pullback game number lottery table is provided for each current mode, and defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the game number lottery of the number of pullback games. The main control circuit 91 sets the number of games obtained as a result of the number of games lottery as the number of pullback games, and the ball ejection state "pullback" continues for the number of pullback games.

[Pseudo-bonus lottery table during pullback]
Subsequently, the pseudo-bonus lottery table during pullback will be described with reference to FIG. 274. The pullback pseudo-bonus lottery table is a table referred to for determining whether or not to grant a privilege (pseudo-bonus stock) related to AT in the ball-out state "pullback". The pseudo-bonus lottery table during pullback is provided for each number of games elapsed since the transition to the ball-out state "pullback", and specifies the lottery value information about the lottery result of the pseudo-bonus stock grant lottery for each lottery type. .. After shifting to the payout state "pull back", the "1G" column is referred to in the first game, the "2G" column is referred to in the second game, and the "3G" column is referred to in the third game. The columns are referred to, the "4th to 16th G" columns are referred to in the games of the 4th to 16th games, the "17th to 31st G" columns are referred to in the games of the 17th to 31st games, and the "17th to 31st G" columns are referred to in the games of the 32nd game. The "32Gth" column is referred to.

The main control circuit 91 performs a pseudo-bonus stock grant lottery using the number of games and the lottery type after shifting to the ball-out state "pullback" for each unit game in the ball-out state "pullback", and draws in this lottery. If "non-winning" is determined as a result, no privilege is given, and if "winning" is determined as a result of the lottery, one stock of pseudo BB or pseudo RB is given.

[Pseudo-bonus type lottery table during pullback]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 275, the pullback pseudo-bonus type lottery table will be described. Pseudo-bonus type during pullback The lottery table is referred to for determining the type of pseudo-bonus to be given when "winning" is determined as a result of the lottery in the stock granting lottery of the pseudo-bonus in the payout state "pullback". It's a table. The pseudo-bonus type lottery table during pullback is provided for each mode, and the lottery value information about the lottery result of the pseudo-bonus type lottery is defined for each lottery type. When the main control circuit 91 wins the stock granting lottery of the pseudo bonus, the type lottery is subsequently performed, and when "pseudo RB" is determined as the lottery result in this lottery, one stock of the pseudo RB is given. When "pseudo BB" is determined as a result of lottery, one stock of pseudo BB is given.

[Mode transition lottery table]
Subsequently, the mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 276. The mode transition lottery table is referred to when a pseudo-bonus stock granting lottery is won in the ball-out state "pull-back", or when a pseudo-bonus 0 game series is won in the ball-out state "pseudo-bonus". It is used to determine the mode of the migration destination from. The mode transition lottery table is provided for each current mode, and defines the lottery value information regarding the transition destination mode for each lottery type. The main control circuit 91 performs a mode transition lottery when a pseudo-bonus stock granting lottery is won in the ball ejection state "pullback", and sets the mode obtained as a lottery result. When the current RT state is the non-RT state, the main control circuit 91 sets the non-RT mode without performing a mode transition lottery.

[Pseudo BB lottery table during specialization]
Subsequently, a pseudo BB lottery table during specialization will be described with reference to FIG. 277. The pseudo BB lottery table during specialization is a table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to grant a stock of pseudo BB based on the lottery type for each unit game in the ball ejection state "specialization". The specialized pseudo BB lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the stock grant lottery of the pseudo BB for each lottery type. In the payout state "specialization", when the game state is between non-flags, the "non-flags" column is referred to, and when the game state is between BB flags or RB flags, "between BB flags," The "between RB flags" column is referred to, the "1st class BB" column is referred to when the gaming state is 1st class BB, and the "1st class RB" column is referred to when the gaming state is 1st class RB. The flag.

The main control circuit 91 does not grant the stock of the pseudo BB when the "non-winning" is determined as the lottery result, and when the "winning" is determined as the lottery result, the stock of the pseudo BB is used. Give one. As described above, the ball ejection state "specialization" is a permitted state and the transition to the 1st class BB is promoted. Therefore, during the ball ejection state "specialization", the pseudo BB is also in the 1st class BB and the 1st class RB. Stock grant lottery is given preferential treatment without any disadvantage. On the other hand, between the BB flags and the RB flags, it is preferable to design so that the stocking lottery of the pseudo BB is disadvantageous in order to prevent the intentional extension of the ball ejection state "specialization". By doing so, if the special lottery is won, the expectation of granting benefits related to AT can be high from the start of the first type BB until the BB is determined as the internal winning role again. it can.

[Explanation of operation of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 278 to 284, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using the program will be described.

<Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 278 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S501). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S502). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S503). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S504). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to the internal lottery table according to the current gaming state, and draws a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a bonus winning process (S505). In this process, the main CPU 31 determines in the internal lottery process whether or not the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the game is played between the non-flags and the flags. Transition state. Further, when the main CPU 31 determines the winning combination "F_BB" as the internal winning combination when the payout state is "specialized", the main CPU 31 sets a "pseudo bonus" as the payout state of the next game.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a state-specific game control process described later in FIG. 279 (S506). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs various processes according to the current ball ejection state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the main side navigation control process (S507). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets the navigation data according to the push order combination when the ball ejection state is the "pseudo bonus". The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S508). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S509). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production such as the internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S510). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and then the reels are accelerated and controlled. It is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process (S511). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the plurality of stop buttons are pressed by using the reel stop control information determined in S508. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S512). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels stopping, a profit is given according to the combination of the symbols such as the payout of medals and the operation of the re-game based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the valid line. .. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S513). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data of the winning operation command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a bonus check process (S514). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an RT check process (S515). In this process, when the transition condition of the RT state is satisfied, the main CPU 31 shifts the RT state to the RT state corresponding to the transition condition. When the RT check process is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the process to S502 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control process will be described with reference to FIG. 279. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current ball ejection state is "general (normal section)" (S521). In the case of "general (normal section)" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a process during the normal section described later in FIG. 280 (S522), and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, if the current payout state is not "general (normal section)" (NO), then the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current payout state is "general (normal advantage)". Judgment (S523). In the case of "general (normally advantageous)" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the normal advantageous intermediate processing described later in FIG. 281 (S524), and ends the state-specific control processing.

On the other hand, if the current payout state is not "general (normally advantageous)" (NO), then the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current payout state is a "pseudo bonus" ( S525). If it is a "pseudo-bonus" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a pseudo-bonus intermediate process (S526), which will be described later in FIG. 282, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current payout state is not a "pseudo bonus" (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current payout state is "pull back" (S527). In the case of "pullback" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a pullback process described later in FIG. 283 (S528), and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current ball ejection state is not "pull back" (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current ball ejection state is "specialized" (S529). In the case of "specialization" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the specialization intermediate process described later in FIG. 284 (S530), and ends the state-specific control process. On the other hand, if the current payout state is not "specialized" (NO), then the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S531) and ends the state-specific control processing.

<Processing during normal section>
Next, the processing during the normal section will be described with reference to FIG. 280. In the normal section processing, first, the main CPU 31 performs an advantageous section transition lottery (S541). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to the advantageous section transition lottery table and performs the transition lottery to the advantageous section. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition lottery to the advantageous section has been won (S542). If the main CPU 31 has not won the lottery for transition to the advantageous section (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during the normal section.

On the other hand, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won (YES), the main CPU 31 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and subsequently refers to the MAP lottery table according to the current RT state. A MAP lottery is performed (S543), and the determined MAP is set. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines and sets the zone according to the number of MAPs and RT games (S544).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the lottery type is any of "7" to "9". When the lottery type is neither "7" to "9" (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets "general (normally advantageous)" to the ball ejection state (S546), and during the normal section. End the process.

On the other hand, when the lottery type is any one of "7" to "9" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds one stock of pseudo BB (S547). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a freeze lottery with reference to the freeze lottery table (S548), and determines whether or not the freeze lottery has been won (S549). If the freeze lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs freeze control (S550) and ends the normal section processing. In the freeze process, the main CPU 31 generates a freeze state that locks the progress of the game for a predetermined time, sets a "pseudo bonus (pseudo BB)" in the ball ejection state, and sets a special 2 mode in the mode.

On the other hand, when the freeze lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the first hit mode lottery table, performs a mode lottery according to the zone and the lottery type (S551), and determines. Set the mode. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a special lottery with reference to the special lottery table (S552), and determines whether or not the special lottery has been won (S553). If the special lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets "specialization" in the payout state (S554), and ends the processing during the normal section. On the other hand, if the special lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets a "pseudo bonus (pseudo BB)" in the payout state (S555), and ends the processing during the normal section. ..

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)", the type of pseudo-bonus (pseudo-BB or pseudo-RB) to be given when winning the stock-giving lottery of the pseudo-bonus is selected by lottery. Although it is decided to be decided, in the ball ejection state "general (normal section)", the stock of pseudo BB is always given at the time of winning the stock giving lottery (S547). In this regard, the type of pseudo-bonus to be given at the time of winning the stock grant lottery may be determined by lottery even in the ball ejection state "general (normal section)". Similarly, in the present embodiment, the pseudo BB stock is always given at the time of winning the stock granting lottery for the payout state "pseudo bonus" and "specialization", but the pseudo bonus given at the time of winning the stock granting lottery The type of the above may be determined by lottery.

<Normal advantageous processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the usually advantageous intermediate treatment will be described. In the normal advantageous processing, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the first hit pseudo-bonus lottery table to perform a pseudo-bonus stock granting lottery (S571), and determines whether or not the lottery has been won (S572). When the stock grant lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the first hit mode lottery table, performs a mode lottery according to the zone and the lottery type (S573), and sets the determined mode. ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a special lottery with reference to the special lottery table (S574), and determines whether or not the special lottery has been won (S575). If the special lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds one pseudo BB stock and sets "specialization" in the payout state (S576), which is usually advantageous. End the intermediate processing.

On the other hand, if the special lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws the pseudo-bonus type by referring to the first hit pseudo-bonus type lottery table (S577). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 adds one stock of the pseudo-bonus of the winning type, sets the "pseudo-bonus" of the type to the payout state (S578), and ends the normal advantageous processing.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-bonus stock grant lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of RT games is within the lottery range, that is, the above-mentioned pseudo RB stock lottery period. Whether or not it is determined (S579). When the number of RT games is within the lottery range (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a pseudo RB stock grant lottery with reference to the first hit pseudo RB lottery table (S580), and has the lottery been won? It is determined whether or not (S581). If the lottery for granting the stock of the pseudo RB is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds one stock of the pseudo RB (S582), and subsequently, the "pseudo bonus (pseudo RB)" is added to the payout state. , And set the normal mode as the mode (S583), and end the normal advantageous intermediate processing.

On the other hand, if the number of RT games is not in the lottery range (NO), or if the pseudo RB stock grant lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal advantage maintenance lottery table. A maintenance lottery that is usually advantageous is performed (S584), and it is determined whether or not maintenance is decided as a result of the lottery (S585). If maintenance is determined as a result of the lottery (YES), the main CPU 31 maintains the ball ejection state as "general (normally advantageous)" (S586), and ends the normal advantageous intermediate processing. On the other hand, when the end is determined as a result of the lottery (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the advantageous section and sets "general (normal section)" in the payout state (S587). Normally, the advantageous processing is terminated.

<Pseudo bonus processing>
Next, the pseudo-bonus processing will be described with reference to FIG. 282. In the pseudo-bonus processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game in which the pseudo-bonus starts (S591). In the first game to start, the main CPU 31 subtracts one stock of the pseudo-bonus of the started type (S592), and then executes a reel action at the start of the pseudo-bonus (S593). As a reel action at the start of the pseudo bonus, for example, when the started pseudo bonus is a pseudo BB, the main CPU 31 has a symbol on the first reel 3-1, the second reel 3-2, and the third reel 3-3. Perform a reel action so that "Red 7" is displayed in a straight line, and if the started pseudo bonus is a pseudo RB, the symbol "Red 7" is displayed on the 1st reel 3-1 and the 2nd reel 3-2. Is displayed, the symbol "black BAR" is displayed on the third reel 3-3, and the reel action is performed so that these symbols "red 7" and the symbol "black BAR" are displayed side by side in a straight line. The symbol that stops at the 4th reel 3-4 is arbitrary. Further, the main CPU 31 may refer to the current mode or zone to make the reel action different. For example, at the start of the pseudo BB in which heaven is set as the mode, the symbol "Red 7" is likely to be aligned downward to the right, and at the start of the pseudo BB in which the normal mode is set, the symbol "Red 7" is in the middle row. The reel action may be performed so that the alignment is easy. It may also have a reel action that determines that it is in a predetermined mode. Specifically, it suffices to have a reel action to be executed only in a predetermined mode.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a stock grant lottery of the pseudo BB with reference to the pseudo BB lottery table in the pseudo bonus (S594), and determines whether or not the lottery has been won (S595). If the pseudo BB stock granting lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds one pseudo BB stock (S596).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the difference number in the pseudo bonus according to the internal winning combination (S597). In this process, the main CPU 31 updates the difference number based on the value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the BET number of the game, from the maximum number that can be paid out in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the end of the pseudo bonus (S598). Specifically, the main CPU 31 compares the difference number updated in S597 with the end threshold value of the pseudo bonus (200 sheets for the pseudo BB, 100 sheets for the pseudo RB), and if it exceeds the threshold value, Judge that it is the end time.

If it is not the end of the pseudo-bonus (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during the pseudo-bonus, while if it is the end of the pseudo-bonus (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently pulls back. Number of games The number of pullback games is determined and set with reference to the lottery table (S599). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the determined number of pullback games is 0 (S600).

When the number of pullback games to be determined at the end of the pseudo bonus is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws the pseudo bonus type by referring to the pullback pseudo bonus type lottery table (S601) and determines. Add one stock of pseudo-bonus of the type (S602).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stock of the pseudo BB or the stock of the pseudo RB is 1 or more (S603). If any of the stocks is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines and sets the mode of the migration destination with reference to the mode transition lottery table (S604). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a pseudo-bonus of a type according to the stock to be released in the ball ejection state (S605), and ends the process during the pseudo-bonus. When both the pseudo BB stock and the pseudo RB stock are present, the stock release order is arbitrary. For example, the stocks may be released in the order in which they are stocked, and the pseudo BBs may be preferentially released. Alternatively, it may be preferentially released from the pseudo RB.

On the other hand, if both the pseudo BB stock and the pseudo RB stock are 0 at the end of the pseudo bonus, the main CPU 31 subsequently sets "pull back" to the payout state (S606), and the pseudo bonus. End the middle process.

<Processing during pullback>
Next, the pullback process will be described with reference to FIG. 283. In the pullback process, the main CPU 31 first updates (subtracts 1) the number of pullback games (S611). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the pseudo-bonus lottery table during pullback to perform a pseudo-bonus stock grant lottery (S612), and determines whether or not the lottery has been won (S613).

If the pseudo-bonus stock grant lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of pullback games is 0 (S614). If the number of pullback games is not 0 (NO), the process during pullback is terminated, while if the number of pullback games is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the mode to "for non-mode". It is determined whether or not it is either "normal" or "chance" (S615). If it is any of "non-mode", "normal", and "chance" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the advantageous section and sets "general (normal section)" in the ball ejection state. Then (S616), the process during pullback is terminated.

On the other hand, if you win the pseudo-bonus stock grant lottery (YES), or the mode is neither "non-mode", "normal", or "chance" (either "heaven", "special 1", or "special 2"). ), The main CPU 31 subsequently draws a pseudo-bonus type by referring to the pullback pseudo-bonus type lottery table (S617). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 adds one stock of pseudo-bonus of the winning type (S618). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines and sets the mode of the transition destination with reference to the mode transition lottery table (S619). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a pseudo-bonus of a type according to the stock to be released in the ball ejection state (S620), and ends the pullback process.

<Specialized processing>
Next, the processing during specialization will be described with reference to FIG. 284. In the specialization intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the specialization intermediate pseudo BB lottery table to perform a stock grant lottery of the pseudo BB (S631), and determines whether or not the lottery has been won (S632). ..

If the pseudo BB stock grant lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of pseudo BB stocks is equal to or greater than the limit value (S633). The limit value may be any value. Further, the limit value may be a value different depending on the current RT state, or may be changed according to the grace period until the limiter is reached in the advantageous section. For example, the limit value is set to "8" at the timing of 1400 games remaining up to the limiter of the number of games in the advantageous section, and the limit value is set to "2" at the timing of 100 games remaining up to the limiter of the number of games in the advantageous section. The larger the grace period, the larger the limit value, and the smaller the grace period, the smaller the limit value.

If the number of pseudo BB stocks is equal to or greater than the limit value (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the lottery type is any of "2", "5", and "9" (yes). S634). If the number of pseudo BB stocks is not equal to or greater than the limit value (NO), or if the lottery type is any of "2", "5" to "9" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently continues. Add one pseudo BB stock (S635).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the lottery type is "1" (that is, whether or not the winning combination "F_BB" is won) (S636). If the lottery type is not "1" (NO), the processing during specialization is terminated, while if the lottery type is "1" (YES), the main CPU 31 is subsequently in the ball ejection state. Is set to "pseudo bonus (pseudo BB)" (S637), and the processing during specialization is terminated.

[Relationship between the number of RT games and MAP and zones]
Next, the relationship between the number of RT games and the MAP and the zone will be described with reference to FIG. 285. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main control circuit 91 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section (in other words, when the ball ejection state shifts from "general (normal section)" to "general (normal advantage)"). , The MAP and zone are determined based on the RT state at that time. Here, the MAP and the zone may be fixed or variable during the advantageous section.

Pattern 1 in FIG. 285 (A) shows the flow when the MAP and the zone are fixed during the advantageous section. In pattern 1, for example, when the number of RT games is 398 games, the section shifts to an advantageous section. Since the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has occurred, the main control circuit 91 performs a MAP lottery based on the RT state, and subsequently determines a zone based on the determined MAP and the number of RT games (see S543 and S544 in FIG. 280). ). Here, since the zone is defined for each 400 games for each MAP (see FIG. 264 (B)), the defined content of the zone in the MAP changes when the number of RT games reaches 400 games. However, in this pattern 1, since the MAP and the zone are fixed during the advantageous section, neither the MAP nor the zone fluctuates during the advantageous section.

Subsequently, pattern 2 in FIG. 285 (B) shows the flow when the MAP is fixed but the zone fluctuates during the advantageous section. Also in pattern 2, when the number of RT games is 398 games, the section shifts to an advantageous section. Since the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has occurred, the main control circuit 91 performs a MAP lottery based on the RT state, and subsequently determines a zone based on the determined MAP and the number of RT games. After that, when the unit game is performed and the number of RT games reaches 400 games, the defined contents of the zone in the MAP change, and as a result, in the pattern 2, the zone changes during one advantageous section.

Subsequently, pattern 3 in FIG. 285 (C) shows the flow when both the MAP and the zone fluctuate during the advantageous section. Also in pattern 2, when the number of RT games is 398 games, the section shifts to an advantageous section. Since the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has occurred, the main control circuit 91 performs a MAP lottery based on the RT state, and subsequently determines a zone based on the determined MAP and the number of RT games. In this pattern 3, the MAP lottery is performed based on each game and RT state during the advantageous section, and then the zone is determined based on the determined MAP and the number of RT games. As a result, in pattern 3, both the MAP and the zone fluctuate during one advantageous section.

The control of these patterns 1 to 3 can be realized according to the timing of performing the processes of S543 and S544 described in the normal section processing (FIG. 280). For example, the control of the pattern 1 can be realized by performing the processing of S543 and S544 only at the timing of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 280. Further, the processing of S543 is performed at the timing of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, while the processing of S544 is performed every game in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)" (for example, in S571 of FIG. 281). By performing S544 before), the control of pattern 2 can be realized. By performing the processing of S543 and S544 every game in the ball ejection state "general (normally advantageous)" (for example, by performing S543 and S544 before S571 in FIG. 281), the control of pattern 3 is realized. Can be done.

[Summary of playability of the pachislot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment has been described above, but the playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is summarized as follows.

[Pseudo setting value using RT state]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of RT states, and these plurality of RT states are used as pseudo set values. A pseudo set value using this RT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 and 287.

As shown in FIG. 286 (A), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)", AT lottery (pseudo-bonus stock granting lottery) is performed according to the RT state. More specifically, the main control circuit 91 draws and determines the MAP when the ball ejection state shifts from the “general (normal section)” to the “general (normal advantage)”. In this MAP, a zone for determining the expected degree of privilege grant regarding AT is defined in association with the number of elapsed games in the RT state, and when the main control circuit 91 determines the MAP, it corresponds from the number of elapsed games in the RT state. Identify and determine the zone to be used. At this time, since the main control circuit 91 determines the MAP according to the RT state, the zone also differs according to the RT state, and as a result, the lottery result of the AT lottery differs according to the RT state.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 286 (B), in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ratio of the AT (pseudo-bonus) game period to the total game period differs depending on the RT state, and the AT game Since the period affects the payout rate of the pachislot machine 1, the payout rate also differs depending on the RT state. As an example, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the AT game period to the total game period is the RT1 state, the RT2 state, the RT3 state, the RT4 state, in order from the lowest of the RT1 state to the RT7 state. Since it is designed to be in the RT5 state, the RT6 state, and the RT7 state, the payout rate is also the RT1 state, the RT2 state, the RT3 state, the RT4 state, the RT5 state, the RT6 state, and the RT7 state in order from the lowest.

In addition, since the RT state fluctuates the type of "replay role" related to the operation of the replay and the winning probability among the plurality of roles, the winning probability and the winning probability of the "small role" related to the payout of medals are changed. The winning probability of the "bonus role" does not change. Here, in the present embodiment, the winning probabilities of the total "replay combination" are substantially the same in a plurality of RT states (non-RT state, RT1 state to RT7 state). Therefore, when AT is not taken into consideration, the payout rates in the plurality of RT states are substantially the same.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ratio of the AT (pseudo-bonus) game period to the total game period differs for each RT state, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The RT state of is functioning as a pseudo setting value. By using the RT state as a pseudo set value in this way, it is possible to realize a set value of a number of steps that cannot be realized by the actual set value. For example, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the non-RT state is used. , The eight RT states of the RT1 to RT7 states enable eight-step pseudo setting values. Moreover, since it is a pseudo set value, it is possible to realize a payout rate that cannot be realized by the actual set value.

As described above in FIG. 249, the transition from the RT1 state to the RT7 state can be performed only in the non-RT state, so that the non-RT state functions as an RT state for setting a pseudo setting value. To do. At this time, the transition from the RT1 state to the RT7 state can be performed only between the non-flags and cannot be performed between the flags, so that the player avoids winning the bonus combination and continues to maintain between the flags. If this happens, the RT state can be maintained in the non-RT state as well. Therefore, it is preferable to design the non-RT state so that the payout rate is 100% or less. The payout rate in the non-RT state may be 100% or less, and this method is arbitrary. That is, it may be realized by making the AT lottery in the non-RT state disadvantageous (in other words, the non-RT state is the RT state in which the probability of granting the privilege related to AT is low), and the total "replay role". It may be realized by lowering the winning probability of.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has only one step of the set value as the actual set value. That is, although a plurality of combinations have only one set value as a set value for determining the winning probability determined as the internal winning combination, by using a plurality of RT states as pseudo setting values, eight stages of pseudo setting values are used. Can have a set value. Of course, the actual setting value is not limited to one stage, and the actual setting value is not limited to one stage, and each actual setting value has a pseudo setting value realized by a plurality of RT states. May be.

In addition, the playability using the RT state as a pseudo set value changes only depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the winning combination (bonus state) for the winning probability of the small winning combination related to the payout of medals, and does not change due to other factors. It is also applicable to pachislot machines. That is, according to the rules, in a pachislot machine, the winning probability of a small winning combination related to the payout of medals can be changed only under limited conditions such as when the winning combination is activated or the set value is changed. Therefore, a pachislot machine whose winning probability of a small winning combination fluctuates only depending on the presence or absence of operation of the winning combination and does not fluctuate due to other factors is a pachislot machine whose actual set value is one step, or an actual set value. It means a pachislot machine that has multiple levels of setting values but has no setting difference in the winning probability of a small winning combination. Even in such a pachislot machine, various playability can be realized by using the RT state as a pseudo setting value.

Further, as described above in FIG. 249, the RT state is simulated by having a duration of a sufficient length as the duration of the RT state (RT1 state to RT7 state) used as such a pseudo set value. Can be used as a setting value. The duration of the RT state is arbitrary, for example, the number of games may be larger than the number of games limiter (1500 times) in the advantageous section, and the average number of games per day (for example, 8000 times). The number of games may be large, or the number of games may be larger than the reciprocal of the winning probability of the winning combination having the lowest probability of being determined as the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine. Further, the number of games may be larger than the average number of games per AT. Further, it may be set to "65535" managed by a 2-byte value frequently used in pachislot machines.

Further, in the present embodiment, the AT lottery can be realized according to the RT state by making the zone used for the AT lottery different for each RT state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RT state is simply referred to. The AT lottery may be performed. In addition, among the "replay roles", a "normal replay role" with a low probability of winning an AT lottery and a "chance replay role" with a high probability of winning an AT lottery are provided, and a "normal replay role" is provided according to the RT state. The winning probability of "chance replay role" may be different from that of "chance replay role". In such a case, the RT state is not referred to in the AT lottery, but the winning probability of "chance replay", which has a high probability of winning the AT lottery, differs depending on the RT state. AT lottery can be performed. Even in this case, the winning probabilities of the total "replay combination" may be substantially the same (or completely the same) in a plurality of RT states.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expected degree of privilege granting regarding AT is different for each RT state, but in this game property, the expected degree of privilege granting when granting a privilege to a player is in the RT state. The benefits to be granted are not limited to those related to AT. From the viewpoint of the pseudo set value (payout rate), it is preferable that the privilege is related to the payout, but the probability of granting the privilege other than the payout may be different for each RT state. The benefits other than the payout may be, for example, a privilege related to video or a privilege related to character customization.

[Pseudo set value discrimination prevention control 1]
When the RT state is used as a pseudo setting value, it is preferable to control the current RT state so that it is difficult for the player to discriminate. Here, since the transition from the RT1 state to the RT7 state is performed according to the RT transition symbol, as shown in FIG. 286 (D), the RT state of the transition destination is grasped by grasping the RT transition symbol in the non-RT state. Can be determined, and the pseudo setting value is also grasped. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RT transition symbol is controlled so as to be displayable not only in the non-RT state but also in the RT1 state to the RT7 state. Specifically, the combinations "F_1 lip" to "role_7 lip" on which the RT transition symbol is displayed are determined as internal winning combinations not only in the non-RT state but also in the RT1 state to RT7 state (FIGS. 252 and 259). reference). Then, in the RT1 state to the RT7 state, even if the RT transition symbol is displayed, the RT state is maintained without shifting. As a result, even if the RT transition symbol is displayed, it does not necessarily shift to the corresponding RT state, and it becomes impossible to determine a pseudo set value (RT state) from the RT transition symbol.

It is not necessary to make the RT transition symbol displayable in all of the RT1 state to the RT7 state, and it is sufficient that the RT transition symbol can be displayed in a part of the RT1 state to the RT7 state. Further, it is not necessary that all of the RT transition symbols can be displayed in the RT state of one of the RT1 state to the RT7 state. That is, it is sufficient that all of the plurality of RT transition symbols displayed in the non-RT state can be displayed in the other RT states, and it is not necessary that all the RT transition symbols can be displayed in one RT state.

[Pseudo setting value changes and their restrictions]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 287 (E), the pseudo setting value change and its limitation will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the non-RT state functions as an RT state for setting a pseudo setting value, but according to the rules of the pachislot machine, the RT transition symbol is displayed between the flags carrying over the bonus combination. The RT state cannot be changed on the condition that it is displayed. That is, as shown in the figure, the main control circuit 91 can shift the RT state between the non-RT state and the non-flag on the condition that the RT transition symbol is displayed, but in the non-RT state. Even if there is, the RT state cannot be changed even if the RT transition symbol is displayed between the flags, and the RT state is maintained in the non-RT state.

Here, the transition of the RT state triggered by the RT transition symbol in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be considered. In the present embodiment, the RT1 state to the RT7 state are basically performed while maintaining the interval between the BB flags, but the RT1 state (the same applies to the RT2 state to the RT7 state), which is the period shown in FIG. Since the RT state is not changed on the condition of the transition symbol, the RT state cannot be changed triggered by the RT transition symbol during the period (1).

After that, the unit game is repeated, and when the number of games in the RT1 state reaches 6000 times, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the RT1 state to the non-RT state. Since the transition to the non-RT state is between the BB flags, the transition to the RT state triggered by the RT transition symbol cannot be performed in the non-RT state between the BB flags during the period shown in FIG.

After that, when a prize is won in the BB, the game state shifts from between the BB flags to the type 1 BB, but in the present embodiment, the RT state is not changed triggered by the RT transition symbol even during the type 1 BB. In the non-RT state during the type 1 BB, which is the period shown in (3), the transition of the RT state triggered by the RT transition symbol cannot be performed.

After that, when the BB ends, the game state shifts from the type 1 BB to the non-flag. Since the non-RT state between the non-flags can be changed to the RT state triggered by the RT transition symbol, the RT state is changed triggered by the RT transition symbol during the period shown in FIG. be able to.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even in the non-RT state, the RT state cannot be changed during the BB flag as a trigger, and the RT state is changed only during the non-flag state. The RT state can be changed with the symbol as an opportunity. Here, since the transition from between the BB flags to the non-flags goes through the type 1 BB, the display of the combination of symbols according to the BB is displayed for the transition of the RT state (pseudo setting value change). You will definitely need it. Therefore, by checking the RT transition symbol after the combination of symbols corresponding to the BB is displayed, the RT state of the transition destination can be determined, and a pseudo set value may be grasped. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pseudo set value discrimination prevention control 2 described below is executed.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition from the non-RT state to the RT1 state to the RT7 state is possible in the period shown in FIG. The non-RT state in the seed BB may also be changed from the non-RT state to the RT1 state to the RT7 state triggered by the RT transition symbol. However, during the RT1 state to RT7 state where the duration is managed by the number of games, the RT state is not changed triggered by the RT transition symbol. Therefore, in the RT1 state to RT7 state in the type 1 BB, the RT transition symbol is used. Does not shift the RT state as a trigger. Even in such a case, the pseudo set value discrimination prevention control 2 described below can be similarly applied.

[Pseudo set value discrimination prevention control 2]
The pseudo set value discrimination prevention control 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 287 (F). First, when changing the pseudo setting value, when the number of games specified for each RT state elapses between the RT1 state to the RT7 state between the flags, the state shifts to the non-RT state between the flags. In the non-RT state between the flags, by performing an effect such as "Aim for BB" to encourage the winning of the BB, the space between the flags is released and the process shifts to the first type BB. After that, when the type 1 BB ends, the state shifts to the non-RT state between the non-flags, the RT state shifts triggered by the RT shift symbol, and a pseudo set value can be set.

Here, if the transition to the first type BB is limited to the non-RT state between the flags, as described above, by confirming the RT transition symbol after the combination of the symbols corresponding to the BB is displayed. , The pseudo setting value is grasped. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition to the type 1 BB is possible even in the RT1 state to the RT7 state between the flags. When the RT1 state to RT7 state between the flags is changed to the 1st class BB, the RT state is the RT1 state to the RT7 state during both the 1st class BB and the subsequent non-flags. There is no state transition. As a result, even after the combination of symbols corresponding to the BB is displayed, the RT state can be shifted (non-RT state) and the non-shiftable state (RT1 state to RT7) triggered by the RT transition symbol. Even if the RT transition symbol is confirmed after the combination of symbols corresponding to the BB is displayed, it is not always the case that the RT state is shifted according to the RT transition symbol. It disappears, and it becomes impossible to determine the pseudo set value (RT state).

Specifically, the main control circuit 91 performs a special lottery in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)", and when the special lottery is won, the BB prize is promoted and the flag is released. As described above in FIG. 270, this special lottery is performed with reference to the RT state, and in the non-RT state, it is easier to win in the RT1 state to the RT7 state than in the case of the RT1 state. After shifting from the RT7 state to the non-RT state, a pseudo setting value is likely to be possible. On the other hand, as shown in the figure, since the special lottery is won even in the RT1 state to the RT7 state, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate the pseudo set value (RT state).

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pseudo set value (RT state) is controlled so as to be difficult to discriminate, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the current RT state (pseudo set value) may be notified to the player, or the current RT state may not be notified to the player at all. .. Note that the notification of the current RT state includes not only deterministically notifying that the current RT state is present, but also notification suggesting that the current RT state is in the specific RT state. Here, deterministic notification means notification in a notification mode corresponding to a specific RT state on a one-to-one basis, and suggestion notification includes a specific RT state and other RT states. (In this case, it is preferable that the probability that the notification is performed according to the notification mode is different for each RT state). Further, the specific RT state is not limited to one RT state, and may be a plurality of RT states. As an example, it may be notified that the ball output rate is the highest in the RT7 state, or it may be notified that the ball output rate is in the RT5 state to the RT7 state, which is relatively high.

Further, the notification of the current RT state may be performed only for a part of the RT states, or may be performed for all the RT states. As an example, even if the RT state is notified only when staying in the RT7 state where the ball output rate is the highest, and the RT state is not notified when staying in another RT state. Good. Further, the notification of the current RT state may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. The specific conditions are arbitrary, and may be, for example, at the end of the pseudo-bonus, at the end of the pseudo-bonus that has been held a predetermined number of times, at the end of the advantageous section, at the time of reaching the limiter of the advantageous section, and the like. Further, the notification of the current RT state can be performed by a predetermined control means (main control circuit 91 or / or sub control circuit 101) using a predetermined effect executing means (lamp, speaker, display unit, etc.). ..

Further, instead of the current RT state, the RT state in which the player has stayed in the past may be notified to the player. As an example, in the pachislot machine, the past game history can be confirmed from a predetermined menu screen in the pachislot machine or a player's mobile terminal linked with the pachislot machine. By displaying the RT state of staying in the past in this past game history, the RT state of staying in the past may be notified to the player. For such control, for example, in the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101, a predetermined number of the latest RT states are stored, and the stored predetermined number of RT states are stored in a predetermined menu screen (display unit). It can be realized by displaying it in (etc.). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the RT state is changed, the non-RT state is always passed. Therefore, when the RT state staying in the past is notified, the non-RT state is excluded. It may be done, and the non-RT state may also be notified. That is, when the non-RT state is also notified as the RT state stayed in the past, if the previous (immediately before) RT is the RT1 state to the RT7 state, it is grasped that the current RT state is the non-RT state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current RT state and the future RT state by notifying the non-RT state.

(Summary of pseudo setting values)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the probability of granting the privilege (particularly the privilege related to AT) differs depending on the RT state, the player's degree of advantage (wave of balls) is determined according to the RT state. Can be different. In other words, the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value, and as a result, a wave of balls can be created regardless of the actual set value.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning probabilities of the "replay combination" are substantially the same in a plurality of RT states. Here, if there is a large difference in the winning probabilities of the "replay combination" in a plurality of RT states, the frequency with which the replay is activated also changes significantly, so that the wave of balls to be ejected will be different from the viewpoint of the replay operation. .. In such a case, the player can estimate the degree of advantage from the frequency at which the re-game is activated, and as a result of easily finding out the advantages and disadvantages, the bias of the operation becomes remarkable, which is not preferable. On the other hand, by making the winning probabilities of the "replay combination" substantially the same, it becomes difficult to estimate the degree of advantage from the frequency at which the replay is activated. As a result, the pseudo set value determined according to the RT state can be made difficult to understand from the appearance (operation of re-game) like the set value in the conventional game machine, and has the conventional multi-step setting value. It is possible to make the player feel the same playability as the game machine.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the duration of the RT1 state to the RT7 state, which functions as a pseudo set value, is set to a number of games that is larger than the number of games limiter (1500 times) in the advantageous section. As a result, the wave of the ball that is determined according to the RT state can be maintained for a period of a sufficient length, so that the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Further, by making the duration of the RT1 state to the RT7 state different for each RT state, the period for which the pseudo set value is maintained can be made different according to the pseudo set value. For example, the pseudo setting value that is advantageous to the player can be set to be short so that the profit given to the player is not excessive.

In the present embodiment, the privilege related to AT is given according to the zone, and this zone is determined based on the MAP determined according to the current RT state and the number of elapsed games in the RT state. Therefore, the probability of granting the privilege will differ depending on the RT state (for determining the MAP that determines the zone), and therefore the player's degree of advantage (wave of balls) will differ depending on the RT state. be able to. In other words, the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has a probability of about 1/100, but since the zone is defined every 400 games for the MAP, the player stays in the normal section. Even if this is the case, it can be expected that the section will shift to the advantageous section once before the zone is switched.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the control means (main control circuit 91 or sub-control circuit 101) may count the number of games executed in the non-notification state without shifting to the notification state. Then, the control means (main control circuit 91 or sub control circuit 101) may notify the player of the counted number of games. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the number of games (the number of addictive games) that have elapsed since the end of the previous notification state. Further, the control means (main control circuit 91 or sub-control circuit 101) also counts the number of games executed in the same RT state without shifting to another RT state. Regarding the number of games, the number of games is counted. Since it is used directly to identify the zone, it is preferable not to notify the player.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition from the non-RT state to the RT1 state to the RT7 state is performed according to the RT transition symbol, but this transition is possible only between the non-flags and between the flags. Cannot be done. Therefore, in order to shift the RT state used as a pseudo setting value, it is necessary to win the BB and release the flag, but if the special lottery is not won, the BB winning is a game. It is controlled against the person. As a result, the distance between the flags is basically maintained, and the transition to the RT state is also restricted, but when the special lottery is won, the winning of the BB is controlled so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. , The flag can be released, and the RT state can be changed.

Here, if the cancellation between the flags is performed only in the non-RT state, the pseudo set value (RT state of the migration destination) can also be grasped by grasping the RT transition symbol after the cancellation between the flags. .. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, special lottery is performed not only in the non-RT state but also in the RT1 state to the RT7 state. As a result, even if the RT transition symbol after the flag is released can be grasped, it does not necessarily mean that the RT state is shifted according to the RT transition symbol, and a pseudo set value (RT state) is determined. You will not be able to.

In addition, when the special lottery is won, the effect of urging the winning of the BB carried over between the flags is executed, so that the player can cancel the interval between the flags by following the executed effect. As a result, the subsequent transition of the RT state becomes possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, while using the RT state as a pseudo setting value, the non-RT state in which the RT state can be transferred triggered by the RT transition symbol is set as a pseudo setting value which is disadvantageous to the player. Specifically, the non-RT state is set as the RT state in which the probability of granting the privilege related to AT is low. More specifically, in the non-RT state, it is easy to determine a MAP that is disadvantageous to the player (the probability of granting a privilege related to AT is low) in the MAP lottery. By doing so, when the game is played without releasing the flag even though the flag interval should be released, the RT state is used without giving unnecessary profit to the player. It is possible to appropriately use the playability of the pseudo set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the non-AT payout state "general (normal advantage)" and the AT payout state "pseudo-bonus" can be executed between the BB flags, so that the BB flag is exclusively used. A game is played between them. Then, when a special lottery is won between the BB flags, a prize for the BB is urged, and a privilege related to the AT is given for the period from the start of the first type BB until the BB is determined again as the internal winning role. It can be a "specialization" with high expectations. As a result, the BB carried over between the BB flags, which is the basic game period, can be meaningfully used.

In this way, "specialization" ends when BB is determined again as the internal winning combination between the non-flags that have released the BB flags, but RB is determined as the internal winning combination before BB between the non-flags. May be done. In such a case, in the pachislot machine 1, "specialization" continues even during the type 1 RB that the RB wins and starts. As a result, not only the BB, which is the trigger between the BB flags, which is the basic game period, but also the RB can be meaningfully used.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface so that the player can stop the pachi-slot machine 1. The main control board 71 includes a start switch 6S and a stop switch 7S. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, while using the RT state as a pseudo setting value, the actual setting value for determining the winning probability that a plurality of combinations are determined as the internal winning combination has only one step setting value. It may also have a set value of a plurality of stages.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of RTs are set as a variable RT state in which the probability that the "replay role" among the plurality of roles is determined as the internal winning combination and the type of the "replaying combination" that can be determined as the internal winning combination are variable. Have a state. In these plurality of RT states, the winning probabilities of the total "replay role" are substantially the same. Then, since the main control board 71 can shift the current RT state to another RT state when the shift condition is satisfied, the main control board 71 functions as an RT control means.

When the RT transition symbol is displayed in the non-RT state, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state to the RT state of the type corresponding to the displayed RT transition symbol, and executes the RT state from the RT1 state to the RT7 state. When the number of games played reaches the end threshold value provided for each RT state, the RT state is changed from the RT1 state to the RT7 state to the non-RT state. At this time, the end threshold value provided for each RT state is larger than the number of times corresponding to the number of games limiter in the advantageous section. Further, the RT transition symbol is a combination of symbols that can be displayed not only in the non-RT state but also in at least a part of the RT1 state to the RT7 state, and the main control board 71 has the RT transition symbol in the RT1 state to the RT7 state. Even if it is displayed, the RT state is maintained as the current RT state without shifting to another RT state.

Further, the main control board 71 can give a privilege (more specifically, a privilege related to AT (notification state)) to the player, and particularly in the case of the present embodiment, depending on the current RT state. Since it is possible to give a privilege (a privilege related to AT) with a certain probability, the main control board 71 functions as a privilege giving means. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 can change the winning probability that the small winning combination related to the payout of medals among the plurality of winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination. Only when the thing (bonus state) is activated, the small winning combination will change the winning probability determined as the internal winning combination, and for other factors, the small winning combination will not change the winning probability determined as the internal winning combination. May be good. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a small winning combination probability changing means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an advantageous section capable of executing an AT (pseudo-bonus) capable of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. Then, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches the number of times (1500 times) corresponding to the number of games limiter, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section regardless of the remaining period during which AT can be executed. To terminate the AT, the main control board 71 functions as a limit control means.

Further, since the main control board 71 can count numerical information (for example, the number of elapsed games and the number of remaining games) according to the number of games executed in the same RT state without shifting to another RT state. The main control board 71 functions as a counting means. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of zones for determining the degree of expectation of privilege granting regarding AT, and also has a plurality of MAPs for defining zones in association with the number of elapsed games in the RT state. Then, when the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, one MAP is selected from a plurality of MAPs according to the current RT state and determined, and the RT state elapses in the determined one MAP. Identify and determine the zone associated with the number of games. Then, the main control board 71 determines whether or not to give the privilege related to AT by using the determined zone, and can give the privilege related to AT when it is decided to give the privilege. Therefore, the main control board 71 can give the privilege related to AT. It functions as a first determination means, a privilege giving means, and a second determination means.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 has a normal section in which the expectation of privilege grant cannot be changed when staying, and an advantageous section in which the expectation of privilege grant can be changed when staying. Since the control board 71 can shift from the normal section to the advantageous section with a predetermined probability and can shift to the normal section when the end condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means. .. The zone and MAP are not determined in the normal section, but are determined only in the advantageous section. Then, while the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made with a probability of about 1/100, the zone is defined every 400 games with respect to the MAP.

Further, the main control board 71 is a combination of the symbols when the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed in the unit game in which the bonus combination (“F_BB” or “F_RB”) is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the bonus combination can be carried over as an internal winning combination until is displayed, the main control board 71 functions as a carry-over means. Permission that does not result in a disadvantageous state when a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed and a non-permitted state that is disadvantageous to the player and a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination are displayed. Since the state can be controlled, the main control board 71 functions as a permitted state control means. Specifically, the main control board 71 controls the permitted state and the disallowed state according to the result of the specialized lottery. At this time, the main control board 71 sets the disallowed state when the BB is determined as the internal winning combination between the non-flags, and wins the special lottery that wins with a predetermined probability in the non-RT state between the flags. When the disallowed state is updated to the permitted state and the special lottery that wins the prize with a specific probability different from the predetermined probability in the RT1 state to RT7 state between the flags is won, the disallowed state is updated to the permitted state. It should be noted that any control means of the pachislot machine 1 can win a special lottery, and when the non-permitted state is updated to the permitted state, it is possible to execute an effect of prompting the display of a combination of symbols according to the BB. Therefore, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, and the lamp, the speaker, the display unit, and the like controlled by the control means function as the effect executing means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a notification state (pseudo-bonus) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode and a normal state (general or pullback) in which the frequency of notification is lower than that of the notification state. And, depending on the presence or absence of benefits related to AT, the notification state and the normal state are controlled. Specifically, it has a notification state as a state in which it is possible to stay when the privilege related to AT is granted, and has a normal state as a state in which it stays when the privilege related to AT is not granted. Then, the main control board 71 can start a bonus state such as type 1 BB or type 1 RB when a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed, and when the end condition is satisfied in the bonus state. Since the bonus state can be terminated, the main control board 71 functions as a bonus control means. Further, the main control board 71 can execute the notification state (pseudo-bonus) between the flags to which the privilege related to AT (stock of pseudo-bonus) is given, and the normal state between the flags to which the privilege related to AT is not given. Since (general or pullback) can be executed, the main control board 71 functions as a notification state control means.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins a special lottery between the BB flags carrying over the BB, the main control board 71 promotes the winning of the carried over BB and starts with the display of the combination of symbols according to the BB. Since the period from the start of the above to the time when the BB is determined again as the internal winning combination can be controlled as "specialization", the main control board 71 functions as a special state control means. Then, the main control board 71 controls the granting of benefits related to AT during "specialization" so as to be more advantageous to the player than during "general" or "pseudo-bonus". Further, when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination before the BB during the "specialization", the main control board 71 is also "special" in the type 1 RB which starts with the display of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the RB. Control as "formulation".
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the period from the start of the first type BB to the determination of the BB as the internal winning combination is controlled as "specialization", but the period of "specialization" Is not limited to this. Specifically, the start timing of "specialization" is not limited to the start of type 1 BB. For example, when the special lottery is won and the carry-over BB is promoted to win a prize, "specialization" is started. , Or when the winning type BB is completed, the “specialization” may be started. In addition, the end timing of "specialization" is not limited to the time when BB is determined again as an internal winning combination, but "specialization" is terminated when one type BB for which a prize is urged ends. It is also possible to end the "specialization" when a predetermined number of games are played after the one-class BB for which a prize is urged is completed, and the one-class BB for which a prize is urged ends. Even if the period until the predetermined number of games are played after the end or until the BB is determined as the internal winning role again after the end of the type 1 BB for which the prize is urged is completed, whichever is earlier, is also defined as "specialization". Often, the period from when the BB is determined to be the internal winning combination again after the completion of the first-class BB for which a prize is urged to be played a predetermined number of times may be defined as "specialization".

[Setting change operation in 1-step setting]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the actual set value is set to one step, but when the set value is set to one step, the process of changing the set value becomes unnecessary. Pachislot machines are provided with a setting key type switch and a setting button as an operation unit for changing the setting value, but in a gaming machine that does not require changing the setting value, this setting key type switch and setting No buttons are needed. However, in a pachislot machine, removing the setting key type switch and setting button requires changing the production line, which leads to an increase in burden.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, one-step setting is performed by associating a new process with an unnecessary setting change operation while maintaining the setting key type switch 430 and the setting button (not shown). Even in the pachislot machine 1 which has only a value, the setting key type switch 430 and the setting button are effectively utilized.

First, the setting key type switch 430 is an operation unit capable of accepting an operation related to a setting value that defines an advantage degree for the player, and is an operation unit in which the switch is operated using the setting key. Further, the setting button is an operation unit capable of accepting an operation when the setting key type switch 430 is turned on.

When the main control circuit 91 receives a predetermined operation related to the set value via the setting key type switch 430, the main control circuit 91 executes the processing of the pattern shown in FIG. 288. The predetermined operation is arbitrary, and may be, for example, a setting change operation in a conventional pachislot machine, or a confirmation operation of the current set value. As described above, in the setting change operation, (1) the power supply is updated to OFF, and after the power is turned off, (2) the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON using the setting key. After that, (3) turn on the power, (4) operate the setting change button to specify the desired setting value, then operate the start lever 6, and finally (5) use the setting key to set the key type. This is an operation of returning the switch 430 to OFF. Further, the operation for confirming the current set value is to operate the setting key type switch 430 using the setting key while the power is on.

As shown in FIG. 288, in the pattern 1, the main control circuit 91 clears that the actual bonus is in progress and the AT is in progress while maintaining the RT state and the bonus flag. In the processing of this pattern 1, since the bonus flag is maintained, the RT state and the interval between the flags are maintained. Since the RT state is used as a pseudo set value and the RT state cannot be transferred triggered by the RT transition symbol during the flag period, such pattern 1 processing is an operation for maintaining the pseudo set value. It becomes.

Subsequently, in the pattern 2, the main control circuit 91 clears all of the RT state, the bonus flag, the actual bonus, and the AT. In the process of this pattern 2, since the bonus flag is cleared, the RT state and the flag are cleared, and the non-flag is in the non-RT state. Since the non-RT state between the non-flags is a state in which a pseudo set value can be set, such processing of the pattern 2 is a reset operation of the pseudo set value.

Since the actual set value is only one step in both the pattern 1 and the pattern 2, the main control circuit 91 processes the pattern 1 or the pattern 2 (that is, the game) without changing the actual set value. Performs a predetermined initialization process for the game information related to.

Further, in the main control circuit 91, for example, when the setting key type switch 430 is turned on by using the setting key when the power is off, and then the power is turned on when the setting key type switch 430 is on. , Pattern 1 (or pattern 2) processing is executed, and when the setting key type switch 430 is turned on by using the setting key while the power is on, pattern 2 (or pattern 1) processing is also executed. Good. Further, the main control circuit 91 may switch the processing between the pattern 1 and the pattern 2 according to the number of times the setting button is operated in the conventional setting change operation. As an example, when the power is off, the setting key type switch 430 is turned on by using the setting key, and after that, after the power is turned on, the setting change button is operated once (odd number of times) to start the start lever. When 6 is operated, the processing of pattern 1 (or pattern 2) is executed, and when the setting change button is operated twice (even number of times) and the start lever 6 is operated, the pattern 2 (or pattern 1) The process may be executed.

By doing so, it is not necessary to remove the setting key type switch 430 and the setting button provided in the conventional pachislot machine, and a predetermined initialization process is executed instead of the process related to the actual set value. , It is possible to effectively utilize the processing that is no longer needed.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface so that the player can stop the pachi-slot machine 1. The main control board 71 includes a start switch 6S and a stop switch 7S. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, since the setting key type switch 430 (and the setting button) of the pachislot machine 1 can accept operations related to the setting value that defines the degree of advantage for the player, the setting key type switch 430 (and the setting button) Functions as a setting operation receiving means.

Further, when a predetermined operation is received via the setting key type switch 430 or the setting button, the main control board 71 receives game information related to the game such as pattern 1 and pattern 2 without changing the set value. Since the predetermined initialization process can be executed, the main control board 71 functions as a process control means.

Further, since the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of RT states and the main control board 71 can shift the current RT state to another RT state when the transition condition is satisfied, the main control board 71 has a plurality of RT states. , Functions as an RT control means. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, since it is possible to give a privilege to the player with a probability according to the current RT state, the main control board 71 functions as a privilege giving means.

[Gameability using between RB flags]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 289, the playability using the RB flags will be described. In the present embodiment, the "replay role", "small role", and "bonus role" are attracted to the highest priority, "small role" is the second highest, and "bonus role" is the lowest. It may be set as follows.

As described above in FIGS. 260 and 261, when the non-flags, the BB flags, and the RB flags are compared, the combinations "F_B selection bell 1234" to "F_B selection bell 4321" are the push order combinations between the RB flags. Since the push order does not matter, the RB flag interval is a higher-based game period than the non-flag interval and the BB flag interval.

Further, as described above in FIG. 254, the combination of symbols with the name "BB" is missed on the first reel 3-1 and is about 1/4 of the case when the stop operation is performed at random. It is possible to display the stop, and the omission occurs at a rate of about 1/4. In addition, the combination of symbols with the name "RB" is about when the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3 are missed and the stop operation is performed at random. The stop display can be performed at a rate of 1/64, and omissions occur at a rate of about 63/64.

The type 1 BB is in a state where the difference number is likely to be negative in total, and the type 1 RB is in a state where the difference number is likely to be slightly positive (maintaining the status quo) in total. is there.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 289 (A), when a random stop operation is performed and the RB is determined as the internal winning combination between the non-flags, the symbol of the name "RB" in the game is concerned. The ratio of combinations displayed is very low, about 1/64, and shifts between RB flags at a ratio of about 63/64. Since the RB flag interval is a high-based gaming period as compared with the non-flag interval and the BB flag interval, the game can be performed while suppressing the decrease in medals.

In addition, even among the RB flags that can display the combination of symbols with the name "RB", the ratio of displaying the combination of the symbols is very low, about 1/64, so in many cases (about 63/64). ), The interval between the RB flags is maintained.

On the other hand, when BB is determined as an internal winning combination between non-flags, the ratio of displaying the combination of symbols with the name "BB" in the game is as low as about 1/4, which is about 3/4. Transition between BB flags. During this BB flag, the number of medals is likely to decrease because the game period is low, but the ratio of the combination of symbols with the name "BB" is displayed is about 1/4, so between the BB flags. It can be expected that the combination of symbols with the name "BB" will be displayed relatively early.

Subsequently, FIG. 289 (B) shows the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game when the stop operation is performed at random and the stop operation is performed so as to maintain the interval between the BB flags. Will be described. As shown in the figure, when the stop operation is performed at random, the game shifts to various gaming states such as non-flag, BB flag, RB flag, 1-type BB, and 1-type RB. Therefore, when looking at the game as a whole, a low-based period and a high-based period are mixed. In particular, in a random stop operation, the period between the RB flags tends to continue for a long period of time, so that the period of high base tends to be relatively long.

On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed so as to maintain the interval between the BB flags as in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the interval between the BB flags is basically maintained, so that the low base period is long. continue.

Therefore, the expected value of the medal balance per unit game differs between the case where the stop operation is performed at random and the case where the stop operation is performed so as to maintain the interval between the BB flags, and the former has the expected value. It gets higher. In this way, in the case of the game playability of maintaining the interval between the BB flags as in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base is lower than that in the case of randomly performing the stop operation. Can be distributed to AT lottery.

In addition, when the bonus combination having such a high base flag interval and the bonus combination having a low base flag interval are provided, the following playability can be expected. With a playable pachislot machine such as the so-called A type, which is premised on winning a bonus role, beginners who are not good at pushing eyes cannot easily arrange bonus roles. It will have a big effect on the ball output.

In this regard, as described above, by increasing the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game compared between the RB flags and the non-flags, it is possible to align the combinations of symbols corresponding to the RB. Even if this is not possible, the loss suffered by the player can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player having a low skill in the stop operation from being significantly disadvantaged.

In the pachislot machine, an effect that encourages the winning of a bonus may be executed, but if the effect that prompts the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to RB and the effect that prompts the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to BB are individually executed, the effect is executed. Depending on the player (especially the more skilled), the display of the symbol combination according to the RB that ends between the high base RB flags is avoided, and the symbol combination according to the low base BB is avoided. There is a risk of performing a stop operation so that only the display is performed.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in both the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to RB can be displayed and the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to BB can be displayed, the combination of symbols corresponding to BB is used. It may be possible to execute an effect that prompts the display.

Here, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to BB and the combination of the symbols corresponding to RB are compared, among the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to RB, the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3- The symbols of the 2nd and 3rd reels 3-3 are "blue BAR", and among the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the BB, the 1st reel 3-1 and the 2nd reel 3-2 and the 3rd reel 3 It is common with a part of the design of -3. Further, the symbol of the 4th reel 3-4 among the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to RB is "purple", and the symbol constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to BB in the 4th reel 3-4. It is placed adjacent to the "blue BAR". Therefore, as an effect of promoting the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to BB, the symbol "blue BAR" is displayed on the first reel 3-1, the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. By performing an effect that encourages the aiming and stopping operation, it is possible to aim at both the combination of symbols corresponding to BB and the combination of symbols corresponding to RB at the same time.

When the RB flags are set to a high base and the BB flags are set to a low base, the expert wants to maintain the RB flags, but wants to release the BB flags as soon as possible. In such a case, if an effect of prompting the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to BB is executed both between the RB flags and between the BB flags, the combination of symbols corresponding to BB is targeted to correspond to BB or RB. The combination of symbols is displayed. Therefore, it is not possible to perform a stop operation such as releasing only the low-base BB flags at an early stage and continuing to maintain the high-base RB flags, resulting in an excessive difference in profit depending on the skill of the player. Can be prevented.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface so that the player can stop the pachi-slot machine 1. The main control board 71 includes a start switch 6S and a stop switch 7S. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, the main control board 71 can start the bonus state when the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, and can end the bonus state when the end condition is satisfied in the bonus state. Is. Further, in the unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 has a bonus combination until the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Can be carried over as an internal bonus. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a bonus control means and a carry-over means.

The pachislot machine 1 has BB (“F_BB”) and RB (“F_RB”) as bonus combinations, and between the BB flag where the BB is carried over and between the RB flag where the RB is carried over. Then, the expected value of the medal balance per unit game is higher between the RB flags. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the player randomly performs a stop operation in a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to BB can be stopped and displayed, the ratio of the combination of symbols corresponding to BB being stopped and displayed is about about. In a game that is 1/4 and can stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to RB, the ratio of stopping and displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to RB is about 1 when the player randomly performs a stop operation. / 64.

Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to RB and the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to BB are the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third. It is common to the reels 3-3, and is arranged adjacent to each other in the fourth reel 3-4. The symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to BB are the symbols "blue BAR" in the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. You may. That is, the combination of symbols corresponding to BB may be "blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR". Further, the symbol "purple" in the fourth reel 3-4 of the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to RB and the fourth reel 3 of the symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to BB The symbol "blue BAR", which is the symbol in -4, may have a relationship in which the symbol "purple" can also be aimed at when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol "blue BAR", and they are not necessarily adjacent to each other. Not limited to what you have. For example, the arrangement interval of the symbols on the 4th reel 3-4 may be within the maximum number of sliding pieces.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to BB can be stopped and displayed or a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to RB can be stopped and displayed, it is urged to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to BB. Perform the production. In this case, the effect executing means for executing the effect is arbitrary, and the control means for controlling the effect is also arbitrary. Therefore, for example, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, and the lamp, the speaker, the display unit, and the like controlled by the control means function as the effect executing means.

[Pseudo RB lottery using the number of RT games]
When the result of a predetermined calculation for the number of elapsed games in the RT state satisfies a predetermined condition in the ball ejection state "general (normally advantageous)", the main control circuit 91 refers to the first hit pseudo RB lottery table and pseudo RB. Stock grant lottery. It should be noted that the predetermined calculation may be performed not on the number of elapsed games in the RT state but on the number of remaining games in the RT state. As a result, it is possible to have a certain rule regarding the stocking of the pseudo RB. Specifically, the main control circuit 91 performs a stock grant lottery of the pseudo RB using the remainder obtained by dividing the number of elapsed games in the RT state. By using division as a predetermined operation in this way, the division can be adjusted according to the divisor. It is possible to provide a state in which a pseudo RB stock is easily given for each number of games played, and a state such as a high probability state can be provided.

Further, since the stock of the pseudo RB is not given unless the result of the predetermined calculation for the number of elapsed games in the RT state satisfies the predetermined condition, even if the lottery has a small probability denominator (for example, 1/256), it is practical. The grant probability can be reduced. Here, if the probability denominator is small, the area for storing the random number value used for lottery and the area for storing the lottery coefficient can be small, so that the data capacity can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to realize various playability while suppressing the data capacity.

In addition, when the main control circuit 91 wins the stock grant lottery of the pseudo bonus performed every game in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)", even during the stock lottery period of the pseudo RB, the first hit pseudo RB The stock granting lottery of the pseudo RB referring to the lottery table may not be performed. By doing so, when a pseudo-bonus stock is given in the lottery performed every game, no more stock is given, so that the profit given to the player is prevented from becoming excessive. can do.

Further, the main control circuit 91 may make the content of the predetermined calculation for the number of elapsed games in the RT state and the predetermined condition satisfied by the result of the predetermined calculation different for each current RT state. By doing so, the rule of the stock lottery period of the pseudo RB can be made different for each RT state.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface so that the player can stop the pachi-slot machine 1. The main control board 71 includes a start switch 6S and a stop switch 7S. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the "replay combination" among the plurality of combinations has an RT state in which the winning probability determined as the internal winning combination can be changed, and the main control board 71 is executed in the same RT state. Since it is possible to count numerical information (the number of elapsed games in the RT state and the number of remaining games) according to the number of games played, the main control board 71 functions as a counting means.

Further, the main control board 71 performs a pseudo RB stock grant lottery when the result of a predetermined calculation for the number of elapsed games and the number of remaining games in the RT state satisfies a predetermined condition, and stocks the pseudo RB with a predetermined probability. The main control board 71 functions as a first privilege granting means. Further, since the main control board 71 can perform a lottery for granting stock of pseudo-bonus for each game in the ball ejection state "general (normal advantage)" and can grant stock of pseudo-bonus when winning, the main control board 71 can be given. Functions as a second privilege granting means.

The main control circuit 91 performs a lottery for granting benefits related to AT such as a lottery for granting stock of pseudo bonuses, but monitors the payout rate (= OUT number / IN number x 100) to control the lottery related to AT. May be. For example, when the payout rate ≥ 150%, the lottery regarding the AT may be controlled so as to be disadvantageous to the player. The period in which the payout rate ≥ 150% is satisfied is arbitrary, and may be, for example, the period from the power-on to the present, or the latest several hours.

Further, a RAM clear button is provided to clear various game information related to the game, and when the RAM clear button is operated, the main control circuit 91 performs the pattern initialization process shown in FIG. 288. May be. Further, the main control circuit 91 may transmit an outer end signal corresponding to the RT state to a data display, a hall computer, or the like. When the RT state is used as a pseudo set value, by transmitting the RT state to a hall computer or the like in this way, only the game store can grasp the pseudo set value. Further, the main control circuit 91 classifies the RT state into a high setting / low setting according to a pseudo set value, and either the RT state according to the high setting or the RT state according to the low setting. You may send it to a hall computer or the like. By doing so, since only two types of signals are required as the outer end signals, control becomes easier as compared with the case of transmitting individual RT states.

[Another control example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 290 to 302, another control example peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 different from the peculiar control described above will be described.

[Pseudo setting value using RT state (2)]
First, another example of the pseudo set value using the RT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291. In this control, the number of reels and stop buttons is arbitrary. In the following, it is assumed that there are three reels and stop buttons.

(Bonus and RT state transition flow)
FIG. 290 (A) is a transition flow of the bonus and RT states in another example. As shown in FIG. 290 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a non-bonus state and a bonus state depending on whether or not the bonus is activated. The non-bonus state is a state in which the bonus is not activated, and the bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. The main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the non-bonus state to the bonus state when the combination of symbols corresponding to the "bonus combination" is displayed in the non-bonus state and the bonus is started. Further, in the bonus state, when the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is paid out, the main control circuit 91 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the non-bonus state.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the non-RT state, the RT1 state, the RT2 state, and the RT3 are set as RT states in which the type of the "replay combination" related to the operation of the replay and the probability that the "replay combination" is determined as the internal winning combination are different. It has a state, an RT4 state, an RT5 state, an RT6 state, and an RT7 state.

The main control circuit 91 shifts the current RT state to another RT state when the transition condition of the RT state is satisfied. In this control example as well, the main control circuit 91 does not shift to the RT state on the condition that the "bonus combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus is activated, and the bonus is completed. That is, in the present embodiment, the RT state is maintained the same before and after the bonus operation.

The transition condition of the RT state differs for each RT state, and in the non-RT state and the RT7 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. Specifically, in the non-RT state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the non-RT state to the RT7 state when the bell spill (RT7 transition symbol) is displayed along the effective line. Further, in the RT7 state, when the RT1 transition rip (RT1 transition symbol) is displayed along the effective line, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the RT7 state to the RT1 state, and the RT2 transition rip (RT2 transition symbol). Is displayed along the valid line, the RT state shifts from the RT7 state to the RT2 state, and when the RT3 transition lip (RT3 transition symbol) is displayed along the valid line, the RT state shifts from the RT7 state to the RT3 state. When the RT4 transition lip (RT4 transition symbol) is displayed along the valid line, the RT state is transitioned from the RT7 state to the RT4 state, and the RT5 transition lip (RT5 transition symbol) is displayed along the valid line. Then, the RT state is shifted from the RT7 state to the RT5 state, and when the RT6 transition lip (RT6 transition symbol) is displayed along the valid line, the RT state is shifted from the RT7 state to the RT6 state.
As described above, the transition of the RT state according to the combination of the displayed symbols cannot be performed between the flags carrying over the bonus combination as the internal winning combination.

Here, the pachislot machine 1 has a combination "F_6 selection replay" as a push order role, and when this combination "F_6 selection replay" is determined as an internal winning combination, the RT1 transition lip to the RT7 transition lip are determined according to the push order. Is displayed. For example, if the push order is "left, middle, right", the RT1 transition lip is displayed, if the push order is "left, right, middle", the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and if the push order is "middle, left, right". The RT3 transition lip is displayed, the RT4 transition lip is displayed when the push order is "middle right left", the RT5 transition lip is displayed when the push order is "right left middle", and the push order "right middle left" If, the RT6 transition lip is displayed.

In addition, the RT1 state to the RT6 state do not shift the RT state in the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line, but shift the RT state according to the number of unit games played during the RT state. Specifically, in the RT1 state to the RT6 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state to the non-RT state when the number of unit games played during the RT state reaches the end threshold value. Although the end threshold value is arbitrary, it is preferably a sufficiently long period for use as a pseudo set value. In this control example, the end threshold value is a 2-byte value frequently used in pachislot machines. It is assumed to be "65535" managed by. Of course, as in the sixth embodiment, the number of games may be larger than the number of games limiter (1500 times) in the advantageous section, and the number of games may be larger than the average number of games per day (for example, 8000 times). Well, the number of games may be greater than the reciprocal of the winning probability of the winning combination with the lowest probability of being determined as the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine, and the number of games may be greater than the average number of games per AT. Good.

In such a specification, the RT1 state to the RT6 state can be used as a pseudo set value by making the expected value of the medal balance per unit game different in the RT1 state to the RT6 state. Further, the RT7 state that can shift from the RT1 state to the RT6 state used as the pseudo set value can be used as the RT state for setting the pseudo set value. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, it was a specification that a pseudo setting value could not be freely selected, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 in this control example, the combination "F_6 selection replay" in the RT7 state for setting You can freely select a pseudo setting value according to the pressing order at the time of winning.

For example, a clerk at a game store plays games for several games before the start of business, shifts the RT state from the non-RT state to the RT7 state, and in this RT state, the role "F_6 choice replay" is determined as the internal winning role. Wait for the game. In the pachislot machine 1, when the combination "F_6 selection replay" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_6 selection replay" is the internal winning combination such as "???" for the display device such as the display unit 100. Performs an effect to notify that the role has been decided.

From this production, the clerk can grasp that it is the winning role of the role "F_6 choice replay" in the RT7 state, and when selecting setting 1 as a pseudo setting value, the push order "left middle right" is set. Push order "left and right middle" when selecting 2, push order "middle left and right" when selecting setting 3, push order "middle right left" when selecting setting 4, and push order when selecting setting 5. When selecting "right, left, middle" or setting 6, the stop operation may be performed in the pressing order "right, middle, left".

In the RT1 state to RT6 state, the method of making the expected value of the medal balance per unit game different is arbitrary. For example, by making the winning probability of the "replay combination" different, the medal balance per unit game is different. The expected value of the medals may be different, and the expected value of the privilege grant related to AT may be different (that is, by granting the privilege related to AT according to the RT state), the balance of medals per unit game may be different. Expected values may be different. In the example shown below, in the RT1 state to the RT6 state, the winning probability of the total "replay combination" is substantially the same (may be completely the same), and the AT lottery is performed according to the RT state. A pseudo setting value is realized.

The AT lottery according to the RT state may be realized by simply performing the AT lottery with reference to the RT state, or may be realized by the zone as in the pachislot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment. Alternatively, it may be realized by making the winning probability of the "replay role", which has a high probability of winning the AT lottery, different. Further, in this control example, the actual set value that defines the degree of advantage for the player (that is, the actual set value that determines the winning probability that a plurality of combinations are determined as the internal winning combination) may be set as one step. Well, it may be in multiple stages.

(Transition flow of state related to notification)
Subsequently, FIG. 290 (B) is a transition flow of the state related to the notification in another example. As shown in FIG. 290 (B), the pachislot machine 1 has a normal section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section includes a normal advantage and a notification state. The notification state of the advantageous section is a state in which the player can be notified of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and the normal advantageous and normal sections of the advantageous section are notified less frequently than the notification state. It is in a state (or not notified at all). When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the normal section to the notification state of the normal advantageous or advantageous section of the advantageous section. Further, when the main control circuit 91 wins the AT lottery in the normal advantage of the advantageous section, the game state shifts from the normal advantage of the advantageous section to the notification state of the advantageous section. Further, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the advantageous section to the normal section.

In such playability, the main control circuit 91 uses the RT1 state to the RT6 state as pseudo set values by performing an AT lottery with reference to the current RT state in the normal advantage of the advantageous section. For example, as shown in the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is the lowest in the RT1 state, the next lowest in the RT2 state, the next lowest in the RT3 state, the next lowest in the RT4 state, and the next lowest in the RT5 state. By setting the RT6 state to be the highest, the RT1 state is a pseudo setting value 1, the RT2 state is a pseudo setting value 2, the RT3 state is a pseudo setting value 3, and the RT4 state is a pseudo setting value 3. The set value 4 and the RT5 state can be used as the pseudo set value 5, and the RT6 state can be used as the pseudo set value 6.

Taking the probability of winning an AT lottery as an example, the expected value of the medal balance per unit game is different, but it is not limited to this, and an additional lottery that extends the duration of the notification state is also added. Then, the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game may be different.

<Various data tables>
Subsequently, various data tables preferably used in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 (C) to 291 (E).

(Internal lottery table)
FIG. 291 (C) is an internal lottery table referenced to determine the internal winning combination. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines a lottery value when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for each of the plurality of winning combinations. In the non-RT state, the "non-RT" column is referred to, in the RT7 state, the "RT7" column is referred to, in the RT1 state, the "RT1" column is referred to, in the RT2 state, the "RT2" column is referred to, and the RT3 state is referred to. In, the "RT3" column is referred to, the "RT4" column is referred to in the RT4 state, the "RT5" column is referred to in the RT5 state, and the "RT6" column is referred to in the RT6 state.

In the figure, the lottery values for some of the winning combinations are shown for each RT state, and the lottery values for other winning combinations are omitted. In addition, in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the figure, the combination of symbols that is allowed to win a prize when it is determined as an internal winning combination is specified. By defining the combination of symbols (display combination) in which prizes are allowed for each role in this way, FIG. 291 (E) described later will be made between each combination and the combination of symbols actually displayed. It is possible to have the correspondence shown in. In this control example, it suffices if the correspondence shown in FIG. 291 (E) can be realized, and the provision in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of FIG. 291 (C) is only an example. The correspondence shown in (E) may be feasible. Further, in this control example, the combination "F_normal replay" and "F_6 selection replay" are "replay combinations" related to the operation of the replay.

Further, in this control example, the combination of the symbols of "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" is for the combination "F_pushing order bell_1st", "F_pushing order bell_2nd", "F_pushing order bell_3rd", and "F_BB middle bell". Is associated only with, and is not associated with other combinations. Further, in this control example, in the non-bonus state and the bonus state (during BB), the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game is set to be higher in the non-bonus state.

(Design combination table)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 291 (D), a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachislot machine 1 of this control example will be described. In the description of the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 in this control example, the types of symbols constituting the combination of symbols are not required, and therefore the description and illustration will be omitted. As shown in the figure, the symbol combination table prescribes a combination of a plurality of symbols.

"Symbol combination A (name" normal lip ")" is a combination of symbols in which a replay operation is performed when displayed along the effective line. Further, when the "symbol combination B (name" RT1 transition lip ")" is displayed along the valid line, the replay operation is performed, and when it is displayed in the RT7 state, the RT state is displayed. It shifts to the RT1 state. Further, when the "symbol combination C (name" RT2 transition lip ")" is displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed, and when it is displayed in the RT7 state, the RT state is displayed. It shifts to the RT2 state. Further, when the "symbol combination D (name" RT3 transition lip ")" is displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed, and when it is displayed in the RT7 state, the RT state is displayed. It shifts to the RT3 state. Further, when the "symbol combination E (name" RT4 transition lip ")" is displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed, and when it is displayed in the RT7 state, the RT state is displayed. It shifts to the RT4 state. Further, when the "symbol combination F (name" RT5 transition lip ")" is displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed, and when it is displayed in the RT7 state, the RT state is displayed. It shifts to the RT5 state. Further, when the "symbol combination G (name" RT6 transition lip ")" is displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed, and when it is displayed in the RT7 state, the RT state is displayed. It shifts to the RT6 state.

Further, "symbol combination H", "symbol combination I", and "symbol combination J" are combinations of symbols with the name "bell", and 12 medals are paid out when displayed along the valid line. "Symbol combination K", "Symbol combination L", "Symbol combination M", "Symbol combination N", "Symbol combination O", and "Symbol combination P" are combinations of symbols with the name "Bell spilled eyes" and are displayed along the effective line. When this is done, one medal is paid out, and when it is displayed in the non-RT state, the RT state shifts to the RT7 state.

(Correspondence between the internal winning combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed)
Next, FIG. 291 (E) is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), and the combination of the symbols actually displayed as stops in the pachislot machine 1 of another control example. In the figure, the correspondence relationship regarding some roles is shown, and the correspondence relationship regarding other roles is omitted.

As shown in the figure, the combination "F_6 selection replay" has a different combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left middle right (123)", "RT1" The combination of symbols related to "Transition Lip" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "Middle Left / Right (132)", the combination of symbols related to "RT2 Transition Lip" is displayed, and "Middle Left / Right (213)" is displayed. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of ")", the combination of symbols related to "RT3 transition lip" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", "RT4 transition" is performed. The combination of symbols related to "Rip" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "Right, left, middle (312)", the combination of symbols related to "RT5 transition lip" is displayed, and "Right, middle, left (321)" is displayed. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of ")", the combination of symbols related to "RT6 transition lip" is displayed.

Here, normally, the push order combination has a correct push order, and the correct push order is different among a plurality of push order combinations, but the combination "F_6 choice replay" is limited to one and pushes. The combination of the symbols displayed in order and stopped is associated with one-to-one. This is because the combination "F_6 choice replay" is used to set a pseudo setting value, and is basically provided for a clerk of a game store. That is, the clerk of the amusement store sets the pseudo setting value desired by the clerk himself by performing the stop operation in the pressing order according to the pseudo setting value to be set at the time of winning the role "F_6 selection replay". be able to.

The type of RT transition symbol (RT transition lip) displayed at the time of winning the combination "F_6 selection replay" may be different depending on the mode of the arbitrary stop operation, not the push order. As an arbitrary stop operation mode, the timing of the stop operation can be used in addition to the push order. For example, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed at the first timing (symbol positions "0" to "9") and at the second timing (symbol positions "10" to "19"). The displayed RT transition symbol (RT transition lip) may be different depending on the case.

Further, in this control example, it is possible to set a pseudo setting value of 6 steps according to the pressing order, but the number of steps of the pseudo setting value is not limited to 6 steps. For example, it may be less than 6 steps or more than 6 steps. To reduce the number of steps to less than 6, for example, by associating one (or multiple) push orders with RT transition symbols (or associating the same RT transition symbols with other push orders) in six push orders. can do. In this case, from the viewpoint of the pseudo set value, it is preferable to associate different RT transition symbols with at least two or more push orders. Further, in order to increase the number of stages to more than 6, the number of choices of the stop operation mode may be increased, and different RT transition symbols may be associated with each. In addition, as a method of increasing the number of choices of the mode of the stop operation, it can be realized by combining the push order and the stop operation timing (pressing).

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface so that the player can stop the pachi-slot machine 1. The main control board 71 includes a start switch 6S and a stop switch 7S. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, a plurality of symbols such as RT1 transition lip, RT2 transition lip, RT3 transition lip, RT4 transition lip, RT5 transition lip, and RT6 transition lip can be displayed as a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the internal winning combination is determined. When the combination of symbols of is associated and determined as the internal winning combination, any one of these combinations of symbols can be stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation such as the push order and the timing of the stop operation. Has the role "F_6 choice replay". Then, the combination of at least two or more of the plurality of symbol combinations associated with this combination "F_6 selection replay" is different when each symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the RT7 state. It is an RT transition symbol that can shift to the RT state.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability that the "replay combination" among the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination is set as a variable RT state, and functions as an RT7 state for setting and a pseudo setting value. The main control board 71 has an RT1 state to an RT6 state, and when the RT1 transition lip to the RT7 transition lip, which are RT transition symbols, are stopped and displayed in the RT7 state, the RT1 transition lip to be stopped and displayed from the RT7 state. Since the RT state can be transferred from the RT1 state to the RT7 state corresponding to the RT7 transition lip, the main control board 71 functions as an RT control means.

At this time, in the RT1 state to the RT6 state, which function as pseudo set values, the expected value of the medal balance per unit game is different. Specifically, the main control board 71 can give a privilege related to the notification state (AT) capable of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, but the granting of this privilege is given to the RT1 state. ~ RT6 Perform with a probability according to the state. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a privilege giving means.

[Pseudo setting value using between flags]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 292, a method of realizing a pseudo set value using the flags will be described. That is, in the following control example, the value between the flags is used as a pseudo setting value instead of the RT state. In this control as well, the number of reels and stop buttons is arbitrary. In the following, it is assumed that there are three reels and stop buttons.

(Bonus state transition flow)
FIG. 292 (A) is a transition flow of the bonus state in another example. As shown in FIG. 292 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a non-bonus state, a flag interval, and a bonus state depending on whether or not a bonus combination is won and whether or not a bonus is activated. The non-bonus state is a state in which the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination and the bonus is not activated, and between the flags, the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination and The bonus is not activated, and the bonus state is the state in which the bonus is activated.

In this control example, there are a plurality of bonus combinations as bonus combinations, and the flags are included between the flags of the type corresponding to the bonus combination carried over as the internal winning combination among these plurality of bonus combinations. .. In the example shown in the figure, there are six types of bonus combinations, BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, and BB6, and the state in which BB1 is carried over as an internal winning combination is between the BB1 flags and BB2 is internally. The state carried over as the winning combination is carried over between the BB2 flags, the state carried over with BB3 as the internal winning combination is carried over between the BB3 flags, the state carried over with BB4 as the internal winning combination is carried over between the BB4 flags, and BB5 is carried over as the internal winning combination. The state in which it is present is defined as between the BB5 flags, and the state in which BB6 is carried over as an internal winning combination is defined as between the BB6 flags. The number of bonus roles is arbitrary. In this control example, since the space between the flags is used as a pseudo setting value, the number of steps of the pseudo setting value can be adjusted according to the number of bonus combinations (that is, the number between the flags).

When BB1 is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state between the BB1 flags. The main control circuit 91 carries over BB1 as an internal winning combination between the BB1 flags until the combination of symbols corresponding to BB1 is displayed, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to BB1 is displayed, the BB1 flag The game state is shifted to the bonus state (BB1) from the meantime. Then, when the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied in the bonus state (BB1), the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state (BB1) to the non-bonus state.

The same applies to BB2 to BB6, and the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state between the BB2 flags when BB2 is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state, and BB3 becomes the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state. When determined, the gaming state shifts between the BB3 flags, and when BB4 is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state, the gaming state shifts between the BB4 flags, and BB5 serves as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state. When determined, the gaming state shifts between the BB5 flags, and when BB6 is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state, the gaming state shifts between the BB6 flags.

Further, the main control circuit 91 carries over BB2 as an internal winning combination between the BB2 flags until the combination of symbols corresponding to BB2 is displayed, and between the BB3 flags until the combination of symbols corresponding to BB3 is displayed. BB3 is carried over as an internal winning combination, BB4 is carried over as an internal winning combination between the BB4 flags until the combination of symbols corresponding to BB4 is displayed, and between the BB5 flags until the combination of symbols corresponding to BB5 is displayed. BB5 is carried over as an internal winning combination, and between the BB6 flags, BB6 is carried over as an internal winning combination until a combination of symbols corresponding to BB6 is displayed.

Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to BB2 is displayed between the BB2 flags, the main control circuit 91 shifts the game state from between the BB2 flags to the bonus state (BB2), and corresponds to BB3 between the BB3 flags. When the combination of symbols to be used is displayed, the game state is shifted from between the BB3 flags to the bonus state (BB3), and when the combination of symbols corresponding to BB4 is displayed between the BB4 flags, between the BB4 flags. When the game state is shifted from to the bonus state (BB4) and the combination of symbols corresponding to BB5 is displayed between the BB5 flags, the game state is shifted from between the BB5 flags to the bonus state (BB5), and the BB6 flag is displayed. When a combination of symbols corresponding to BB6 is displayed between the BB6 flags, the game state is shifted from the BB6 flag to the bonus state (BB6).

Further, when the main control circuit 91 satisfies the end condition of the bonus state in the bonus state (BB2), the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state (BB2) to the non-bonus state, and the bonus in the bonus state (BB3). When the end condition of the state is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the bonus state (BB3) to the non-bonus state, and when the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied in the bonus state (BB4), the bonus state (BB4) is used. When the gaming state is shifted to the non-bonus state and the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied in the bonus state (BB5), the gaming state is shifted from the bonus state (BB5) to the non-bonus state, and in the bonus state (BB6). When the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied, the game state is changed from the bonus state (BB6) to the non-bonus state.

Then, as shown in the figure, the payout rates are different between the BB1 flags, the BB2 flags, the BB3 flags, the BB4 flags, the BB5 flags, and the BB6 flags, so that the flags are set as pseudo setting values. Can be used. That is, the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game differs depending on the type of bonus role carried over as the internal winning combination.

Between the flags, the winning probability of the "replay combination" among the plurality of combinations and the type of the "replay combination" that can be determined as the internal winning combination may be changed to the RT state. For example, the main control circuit 91 shifts between the BB1 flags when BB1 is determined as the internal winning combination, sets the RT state to the RT state between the BB1 flags, and sets the RT state as the internal winning combination, and when BB2 is determined as the internal winning combination, the BB2 flag. When the RT state is set to the RT state between the BB2 flags and BB3 is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state is set to the RT state between the BB3 flags and the RT state is set to the internal winning combination. When determined as, the RT state shifts between the BB4 flags and the RT state becomes the RT state between the BB4 flags, and when BB5 is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state shifts between the BB5 flags and the RT state shifts between the BB5 flags RT. When the state is set and BB6 is determined as the internal winning combination, the state may be shifted between the BB6 flags and the RT state may be changed to the RT state between the BB6 flags.

(Payout rate control example 1)
Subsequently, a method of controlling the payout rate between the flags will be described with reference to FIG. 292 (B). FIG. 292 (B) is a transition flow of a state related to notification. As shown in FIG. 292 (B), the pachislot machine 1 has a normal section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section includes a normal advantage and a notification state. The notification state of the advantageous section is a state in which the player can be notified of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and the normal advantageous and normal sections of the advantageous section are notified less frequently than the notification state. It is in a state (or not notified at all). When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the normal section to the notification state of the normal advantageous or advantageous section of the advantageous section. Further, when the main control circuit 91 wins the AT lottery in the normal advantage of the advantageous section, the game state shifts from the normal advantage of the advantageous section to the notification state of the advantageous section. Further, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the advantageous section to the normal section.

In such playability, the main control circuit 91 may make the payout rate between the BB1 flag and the BB6 flag different by performing an AT lottery with reference to the current flags in the normal advantage of the advantageous section. It can be used as a pseudo setting value between flags. For example, as shown in the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is the lowest between the BB1 flags, the next lowest between the BB2 flags, the next lowest between the BB3 flags, the next lowest between the BB4 flags, and the BB5 flag. By setting so that the interval is the next lowest and the interval between the BB6 flags is the highest, the pseudo setting value 1 is set between the BB1 flags, the pseudo setting value 2 is set between the BB2 flags, and the pseudo setting is set between the BB3 flags. The value 3 and the BB4 flag can be used as the pseudo setting value 4, the BB5 flag can be used as the pseudo setting value 5, and the BB6 flag can be used as the pseudo setting value 6.

It should be noted that the AT lottery according to the flag interval may be realized by simply performing the AT lottery by referring to the flag interval, and the AT lottery according to the flag interval as in the zone of the sixth embodiment may be realized. It may be realized by making the information that affects the lottery different, or by making the winning probability of the "replay role", which has a high probability of winning the AT lottery, different between the flags (RT state between flags). You may do it.

(Payout rate control example 2)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 292 (C), another control method of the payout rate between the flags will be described. FIG. 292 (C) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the combination of the symbols actually displayed. In the figure, the push order is taken as an example, but the combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed may be different depending on the mode of the stop operation, and the mode of the stop operation is not limited to the push order. , The timing of the stop operation may be used, or the push order and the timing of the stop operation may be combined.

Further, in the figure, only the combination “F_push order bell_123” which is the push order combination is shown, but in this control example, in addition to the combination “F_push order bell_123” as the push order combination, the combination “F_ It is assumed that the player has the "F_push order bell_132" "F_push order bell_213" combination "F_push order bell_231" combination "F_push order bell_312" combination "F_push order bell_321". These correspondences in the push order combinations of the combination "F_push order bell_132" to the combination "F_push order bell_321" are the same except that the correct push order is different. That is, when the correct push order when the combination "F_push order bell_123" is selected is "left middle right (123)", the correct push order when the combination "F_push order bell_132" is selected is The correct push order for the 6 choices of "Left and Right Middle (132)" and the role "F_Push Order Bell_213" is "Middle Left and Right (213)", and the correct push for the role "F_Push Order Bell_231". The order is "middle right left (231)", the correct answer when 6 choices of the role "F_push order bell_312" is the correct answer when 6 choices of the role "F_push order bell_321" The pressing order of is "right, middle, left (321)".

As shown in FIG. 292 (C), for example, by adjusting the number of selections of the correct push order for the push order combination, the payout rate can be made different for each flag. In the figure, the combination "F_pushing order bell_123" is a pushing order combination of 6 choices between the BB1 flag and the BB3 flag, and is 12 when the correct answer is the pushing order (1/6). The combination of symbols for which one medal is paid out is displayed. On the other hand, the combination "F_pushing order bell_123" is a pushing order combination with three push orders between the BB4 flag and the BB6 flag, and when the correct answer is the pushing order (1/3), 12 medals are used. The combination of symbols for which medals are paid out is displayed. By adjusting the number of correct push order choices in this way, the payout rate can be made different for each flag.

In addition, for example, by adjusting the number of medals to be paid out when the push order is incorrect for the push order combination (in other words, the combination of symbols displayed in the case of incorrect answer), each flag can be adjusted. The payout rate can be different. In the figure, the combination "F_pushing order bell_123" displays a combination of symbols for which one medal is paid out when the pushing order is incorrect between the BB1 flags and the BB4 flags, and BB2. When the wrong answer is pushed between the flags and the BB5 flag, the combination of the symbols for which two medals are paid out is displayed, and between the BB3 flag and the BB6 flag, the wrong answer is pushed. In this case, a combination of symbols for which three medals are paid out is displayed. By adjusting the number of medals to be paid out when the correct answer is pushed in this way, the payout rate can be made different for each flag.

In the case of the example shown in the figure, a pseudo setting value (type between flags) can be specified from the number of medals paid out in the case of an incorrect answer, so more preferably, the order of pressing the incorrect answer is used. If the ratio of the combination of symbols for which the first number of medals is paid out and the ratio of the combination of symbols for which the second number of medals are paid out, which is larger than the first number, are displayed, are different between the flags. It is preferable to make the number of medals to be paid out different in case of incorrect answer. For example, between the BB1 flags, a combination of symbols in which one medal is paid out in five of the incorrect push orders is displayed, and three medals are displayed in one push order of the incorrect answer. While the combination of symbols to be paid out is displayed, the combination of symbols to which one medal is paid out in the four push orders that are the wrong answer push order is displayed between the BB2 flags, and the wrong answer push order is displayed. This can be achieved by controlling that a combination of symbols for which three medals are paid out is displayed in a certain two pushing order. Further, for example, between the BB1 flags, one medal is paid out when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing (for example, the symbol positions "0" to "4") in the case of pressing the incorrect answer. The combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed, and the combination of symbols to which three medals are paid out when the timing is other than the first timing is displayed. When the timing of the stop operation is the second timing (for example, the symbol positions "0" to "10"), the combination of symbols to which one medal is paid out is displayed, and when the timing is other than the second timing, 3 This can be achieved by controlling the display of combinations of symbols for which medals are paid out.

The method of making the payout rate different for each flag is to adjust the number of correct push order choices for the push order combination, and the number of medals to be paid out when the push order combination is the incorrect push order. (In other words, it may be realized by applying only one of the adjustments (combination of symbols displayed in the case of incorrect answer), or it may be realized by combining both.

When multiple flags are used as pseudo setting values in this way, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination carried over as the internal winning combination is not displayed during the flags, or the combination is carried over as the internal winning combination. It is preferable to control so that the bonus state corresponding to the winning bonus combination is not started. In the following description, such control may be referred to as "containing the bonus". Control for containing the bonus can be performed by any method. For example, by using the bonus combination dedicated to 2BET as described above, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination dedicated to 2BET starts in the game during 3BET. It may not be done. In addition, the probability that "missing" is determined in the internal lottery process for determining the internal winning combination between the flags (that is, the probability that only the bonus combination carried over between the flags is determined as the internal winning combination) is set to 0. At the same time, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination carried over as the internal winning combination may not be displayed by setting the attraction priority of the bonus combination among the small combination, the replay combination, and the bonus combination to the lowest.

Further, when using between a plurality of flags as a pseudo setting value, it is necessary to release the space between the flags in order to reset the pseudo setting value. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the main control circuit 91 accepts a predetermined operation, the bonus combination carried over as the internal winning combination is cleared, and the non-flag combination (non-bonus state) in which the bonus combination is not carried over is cleared. It may be controlled. It should be noted that this predetermined operation may be accepted according to the setting key type switch 430 (and the setting button) as in the sixth embodiment, or a RAM clear button is provided and the RAM clear button is used to accept the predetermined operation. It may be that.

The main control circuit 91 may determine each of the plurality of bonus combinations as the internal winning combination with the same or substantially the same probability between the non-flags (non-bonus state) in which the bonus combination is not carried over. On the contrary, the main control circuit 91 may determine each of the plurality of bonus combinations as the internal winning combination with different probabilities between the non-flags (non-bonus state) in which the bonus combination is not carried over. At this time, for example, a bonus combination with a low payout rate between flags (for example, BB1) may be determined as an internal winning combination with a higher probability, and a bonus combination with a high payout rate between flags (for example, BB1) may be determined. BB6) may be determined as an internal winning combination with a lower probability. Further, the bonus combination in which the payout rate between the flags is equal to or higher than the predetermined value may be determined as the internal winning combination with a lower probability than the bonus combination in which the payout rate between the flags is less than the predetermined value. Similarly, for one or more bonus combinations where the payout rate between the flags is within the predetermined range, there is a higher probability that the payout rate between the flags is within the predetermined range than the one or more bonus combinations. It may be decided as. In this case, the predetermined range is preferably a payout rate of about 100%, and as an example, 99% to 101% may be set as the predetermined range. By doing so, even if the clerk of the game store does not play the game until the bonus combination according to the pseudo setting value that the game store wants to set is determined as the internal winning combination, the game store is open. Pseudo setting values that do not interfere with the above will be set.

Further, in this control example, the actual set value that defines the degree of advantage for the player (that is, the actual set value that determines the winning probability that a plurality of combinations are determined as the internal winning combination) may be set as one step. Well, it may be in multiple stages.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface so that the player can stop the pachi-slot machine 1. The main control board 71 includes a start switch 6S and a stop switch 7S. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, the main control board 71 can start the bonus state when the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed, and can end the bonus state when the end condition is satisfied in the bonus state. In addition, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed in the unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination until the combination of the symbols is displayed. As possible, the main control board 71 functions as a bonus control means and a carry-over means. Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game differs depending on the type of bonus combination carried over as the internal winning combination.

Further, since the main control board 71 controls that the start of the bonus state according to the carried-over bonus combination is impossible between the flags carrying over the bonus combination as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 is a bonus seal. Functions as a means of inclusion. Further, when a predetermined operation is received, the main control board 71 clears the bonus combination carried over as the internal winning combination, and can control between non-flags (non-bonus state) in which the bonus combination is not carried over. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as an initialization means.

[Example of a game with a pseudo set value using the RT state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 293 to 295, an example of playability when the RT state is used as a pseudo set value will be described. In this control as well, the number of reels and stop buttons is arbitrary. In the following, it is assumed that there are three reels and stop buttons. Further, in the following, as an actual setting value that defines the degree of advantage for the player (that is, an actual setting value that determines the winning probability that a plurality of combinations are determined as internal winning combinations), a setting value of a plurality of stages is used. Have. The main control circuit 91 sets one of a plurality of set values in accordance with the setting change operation received via the setting key type switch 430 or the setting button.

(RT state transition flow)
FIG. 293 (A) is a transition flow of the RT state in this control example. As shown in FIG. 293 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the "replay combination" among the plurality of combinations and the type of the "replay combination" that can be determined as the internal winning combination are set as variable RT states. Has multiple RT states. In this control example, the order of transition to these plurality of RT states is defined, and is provided so as to shift from the RT state of the previous stage to the RT state of the next stage. That is, this control example has a plurality of stages of RT states that shift from the RT state of the previous stage to the RT state of the next stage.

As such an RT state, in the example shown in the figure, there are an RT1 state, an RT2 state, an RT3 state, an RT4 state, and an RT5 state in order from the previous stage. The number of RT states (number of stages) is arbitrary. When the transition condition of the RT state is satisfied, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state to another RT state. Specifically, when the RT2 transition symbol is displayed in the RT1 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the RT1 state to the RT2 state, which is the RT state of the next stage of the RT1 state. Further, when the RT3 transition symbol is displayed in the RT2 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state, which is the RT state of the next stage of the RT2 state. Further, when the RT4 transition symbol is displayed in the RT3 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the RT3 state to the RT4 state, which is the RT state of the next stage of the RT3 state. Further, when the RT5 transition symbol is displayed in the RT4 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the RT4 state to the RT5 state, which is the RT state of the next stage of the RT4 state.

Further, when the RT1 transition symbol is displayed in the RT2 state to the RT4 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the RT2 state to the RT4 state to the RT1 state which is the RT state of the earliest stage. The RT1 transition symbol is the RT1 transition lip described later, the RT2 transition symbol is the RT2 transition lip described later, the RT3 transition symbol is the RT3 transition lip described later, and the RT4 transition symbol is the RT4 transition lip described later. The RT5 transition symbol is an RT5 transition lip described later.

As described above, in this control example, the RT state shifts in order from the RT1 state, which is the RT state of the earliest stage, to the RT5 state of the rearmost stage. The RT state is not limited to one that shifts one step at a time, and may shift two or more stages at once. For example, in the RT1 state, the RT state may be changed from the RT1 state to the RT3 state by making it possible to display not only the RT2 transition symbol but also the RT3 transition symbol. In this regard, in this control example, the RT5 transition symbol can be displayed even in the RT1 state to the RT3 state, and the main control circuit 91 displays the RT5 transition symbol in the RT1 state to the RT3 state, and the RT1 state to the RT3 state. The RT state is changed from the state to the RT5 state.

Further, the RT5 state is an RT state in which the duration is managed by the number of games, and the RT state is not changed triggered by the RT transition symbol. The duration of the RT5 state is arbitrary, for example, the number of games may be larger than the number of games limiter (1500 times) in the advantageous section, and the number of games may be larger than the average number of games per day (for example, 8000 times). The number of games may be greater than the reciprocal of the winning probability of the winning combination with the lowest probability of being determined as the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine, and the number of games may be greater than the average number of games per AT. May be. Further, it may be set to "65535 times" managed by a 2-byte value frequently used in pachislot machines. When the game is played a number of times according to the duration in the RT5 state, the main control circuit 91 shifts the RT state from the RT5 state to the RT1 state.

(Transition flow of state related to notification)
Subsequently, FIG. 293 (B) is a transition flow of the state related to the notification. As shown in FIG. 293 (B), the pachislot machine 1 has a normal section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section includes a normal advantage and a notification state. The notification state of the advantageous section is a state in which the player can be notified of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and the normal advantageous and normal sections of the advantageous section are notified less frequently than the notification state. It is in a state (or not notified at all). When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the normal section to the notification state of the normal advantageous or advantageous section of the advantageous section. Further, when the main control circuit 91 wins the AT lottery in the normal advantage of the advantageous section, the game state shifts from the normal advantage of the advantageous section to the notification state of the advantageous section. Further, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the advantageous section to the normal section.

In such game playability, the main control circuit 91 performs AT lottery according to the current set value in the RT1 state to the RT4 state in the normal advantage of the advantageous section, and is different from the current set value in the RT5 state. The AT lottery, specifically, the AT lottery according to the setting "6" is performed. In this control example, when the RT state can be transferred (promoted) to the RT state of a specific stage, the expectation of privilege grant is changed to a setting value different from the current setting value. The setting value different from the setting value of is not limited to the setting "6". Further, in this control example, when the RT state can be transferred (promoted) to the RT state of the specific stage, the expectation of granting the privilege may change, and the RT state of the specific stage and before the specific stage. The degree of expectation of privilege grant may change depending on the RT state at the stage of. That is, the main control circuit 91 controls the granting of the privilege so that the expectation degree regarding the granting of the privilege becomes the first expectation degree in the RT state of the stage before the specific stage, and in the RT state of the specific stage, The granting of benefits may be controlled so that the second expectation is different from the first expectation. The degree of expectation regarding the granting of the privilege includes the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege when the privilege is granted. That is, when the RT state can be transferred (promoted) to the RT state of a specific stage, the probability of granting the privilege may increase (or decrease), and the size of the privilege to be granted may be increased (or decreased). It may be made smaller (smaller), or a combination of the two may increase (or decrease) the probability of granting the privilege, but may reduce (or increase) the size of the privilege to be granted. In this control example, if the RT state can be transferred (promoted) to the RT state at a specific stage, the degree of expectation of privilege grant may change, and whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. Is not particularly limited, but when the RT state can be transferred (promoted) to the RT state at a specific stage, the degree of expectation of privilege grant may be changed so as to be advantageous to the player.

Further, the privilege to be given is not limited to the privilege related to AT, and may be any privilege. Further, the RT state in which the degree of expectation of privilege grant changes is not limited to one, and may be plural. For example, if the RT state can be transferred (promoted) to the RT state of a specific stage, a privilege is given with a probability according to the first set value different from the current set value, and a predetermined value different from the specific stage. If the RT state can be transferred (promoted) to the RT state of the stage, the privilege will be given with a probability according to the second set value that is different from the current set value and also different from the first set value. May be.

In addition, the RT state of a plurality of stages and the normal section, the normal advantage, and the notification state are controlled separately. That is, the main control circuit 91 can control the normal section, the normal advantage, and the notification state in each of the plurality of stages of RT states. In other words, the main control circuit 91 can control the notifying state and the non-notifying state (normally advantageous or normal section) in any of the plurality of stages of RT states depending on whether or not the privilege related to the AT is given, for example. , When the privilege related to AT is given in the RT1 state, the notification state can be controlled in the RT1 state, and when the privilege related to AT is given in the RT5 state, the notification state is set in the RT5 state. It is controllable. Further, when the privilege related to AT is not given in the RT1 state, it is possible to control to the non-notification state (normal advantage or normal section) in the RT1 state, and when the privilege related to AT is not given in the RT5 state, the privilege is not given. , RT5 state can be controlled to non-notification state (normal advantage or normal section).

Further, in this control example, when the internal winning combination is determined in the notification state, the notification target combination in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified is also the same in all of the RT states of the plurality of stages. ing. More specifically, in this control example, the role of the notification target is the push order bell. Here, the push order bell is a small winning combination in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the mode of the stop operation (pushing order) is different, and if the mode of the stop operation is correct, the answer is incorrect. Even if more medals are paid out than in the case of, and the mode of the stop operation is correct, it is a combination that is not related to the transition to the RT state. On the other hand, in this control example, when the mode of the stop operation is a specific mode (correct answer), the role of shifting (promoting) the RT state to the RT state of the previous stage is not the role of the notification target. In addition, when the mode of the stop operation is a predetermined mode (incorrect answer), the role of shifting (falling) the RT state to the RT state of the previous stage may be a role to be notified. In this regard, in this control example, when the mode of the stop operation is a specific mode (correct answer), the role of shifting (promoting) the RT state to the RT state of the previous stage and the mode of the stop operation are predetermined modes ( If the answer is incorrect), the role that shifts (falls) the RT state to the RT state of the previous stage becomes the same role (role "F_RT1 middle lip 123" to role "F_RT4 middle lip 321"). Therefore, these roles are not the roles to be notified. Then, when the combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination in the notification state, the main control circuit 91 notifies the player of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player.

(Normally advantageous AT lottery table)
FIG. 293 (C) is a conceptual diagram of a normal advantageous AT lottery table used for a normal advantageous AT lottery. As shown in the figure, in the RT1 state to RT4 state, the lottery value information corresponding to the current set value is specified, but in the RT5 state, another set value different from the current set value (setting "setting" Information on the lottery value according to 6 ”) is specified. In the figure, the lottery value used for the AT lottery is made different according to the RT state, so that the AT lottery according to the setting "6" in the RT5 state is possible, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, by making the information that affects the AT lottery such as the zone of the sixth embodiment different depending on the RT state, the AT lottery in the RT5 state may be made according to other set values. As a "replay role", it has a replay role (chance replay) with a high probability of winning the AT lottery, and in the RT1 state to RT4 state, the winning probability of the chance replay is different from other set values (setting "6"), while RT5 By setting the winning probability of the chance replay in the state to the same probability as the other set value (setting "6"), the AT lottery in the RT5 state may be set according to the other set value.

(Internal lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 294 (D) is an internal lottery table referenced to determine the internal winning combination. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines a lottery value when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for each of the plurality of winning combinations. The "RT1" column is referred to in the RT1 state, the "RT2" column is referred to in the RT2 state, the "RT3" column is referred to in the RT3 state, the "RT4" column is referred to in the RT4 state, and the "RT4" column is referred to in the RT5 state. The "RT5" column is referred to. In the figure, the lottery values for some of the winning combinations are shown for each RT state, and the lottery values for other winning combinations are omitted.

(Correspondence between the internal winning combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed)
Next, FIG. 295 (E) is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), and the combination of the symbols actually displayed as stops in the pachislot machine 1 of this control example. In the figure, the correspondence relationship regarding some roles is shown, and the correspondence relationship regarding other roles is omitted.

As shown in the figure, the combinations of the symbols displayed for the combinations "F_RT1 medium lip_123" to "F_RT1 medium lip_321" are different depending on the pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order. The combination of symbols related to "RT2 transition rip" (RT2 transition symbol) is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the wrong pressing order, the combination of symbols related to "normal rip" is displayed. In addition, the combinations of the symbols displayed in the combinations "F_RT2 medium lip_123" to "F_RT2 medium lip_321" differ according to the pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the "RT3 transition lip" is performed. The combination of symbols related to (RT3 transition symbol) is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the wrong pressing order, the combination of symbols related to "RT1 transition lip" (RT1 transition symbol) is displayed. In addition, the combinations of the symbols displayed in the combinations "F_RT3 medium lip_123" to "F_RT3 medium lip_321" differ according to the pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the "RT4 transition lip" is performed. The combination of symbols related to (RT4 transition symbol) is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the wrong pressing order, the combination of symbols related to "RT1 transition lip" (RT1 transition symbol) is displayed. In addition, the combinations of the symbols displayed in the combinations "F_RT4 medium lip_123" to "F_RT4 medium lip_321" differ according to the pressing order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, "RT5 transition lip". The combination of symbols related to (RT5 transition symbol) is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the wrong pressing order, the combination of symbols related to "RT1 transition lip" (RT1 transition symbol) is displayed. Further, for the combination "F_special lip", a combination of symbols related to "RT5 transition lip" (RT5 transition symbol) is displayed regardless of the pressing order.

By doing so, it is possible to realize playability in which the stages of the RT state can be promoted in order from the RT1 state to the RT5 state while having a plurality of stages of RT states from the RT1 state to the RT5 state. Then, when the RT state can be promoted to the RT5 state, the RT5 state can be used as a pseudo setting value by giving a privilege with a probability according to another setting value different from the current setting value. , RT5 state can be used to create a wave of balls that has nothing to do with the current set value.

(AT control using SB)
Subsequently, AT control using SB will be described. In addition, SB is a single bonus (ordinary character), and if the combination of the corresponding symbols cannot be displayed in the game determined as the internal winning combination (if the prize cannot be won), the flag disappears and it is carried over to the next game or later. It's a bonus that won't happen. Further, when the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed and the bonus state starts, the bonus state ends in one game. That is, when compared with other bonuses, SB (single bonus) is significantly different from other bonuses in that there is no space between flags to be carried over as an internal winning combination.

First, FIG. 296 (A) is a comparative example with the case where SB is used, and is a control example when BB is used as a bonus. In a bonus such as BB where the flag can be carried over after the next game, if BB is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state, the gaming state until the bonus state (BB) is started will be the internal winning of BB. It will be between the flags carried over as a role. Between these flags, the RT state cannot be transferred on condition that the RT transition symbol is displayed. Therefore, when the AT function is realized by switching between the notification state and the non-notification state between the BB flags while maintaining the interval between the BB flags, it becomes difficult to include the transition of the RT state in the playability.

Subsequently, FIG. 296 (B) is a control example when SB is used as a bonus. In the bonus that the flag is not carried over after the next game like SB, when the combination of symbols corresponding to SB is displayed in the game in which SB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 91 gives the game state a bonus state. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the SB is not displayed in the game, the SB is not carried over, so that the main control circuit 91 shifts the game state to the non-bonus state. Further, since the bonus state (SB) ends in one game, the main control circuit 91 shifts the game state to the non-bonus state in the next game of the bonus state (SB).

When the SB is held in this way, since there is no gap between the flags, it is possible to shift the RT state based on the RT shift symbol in many game periods. Therefore, when the RT state of multiple stages as described above is promoted to a specific stage, in order to realize playability with different expectations for granting benefits related to AT, it is also possible to use SB without flags as a bonus. Suitable.

(Internal lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 296 (C) is an internal lottery table referenced to determine the internal winning combination. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines a lottery value when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for each of the plurality of winning combinations. In the non-bonus state, the "non-bonus" column is referred to, and in the bonus state (SB), the "SB medium" column is referred to.

In the figure, the lottery values for some of the winning combinations are shown for each RT state, and the lottery values for other winning combinations are omitted. In addition, in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the figure, the combination of symbols that is allowed to win a prize when it is determined as an internal winning combination is specified. By defining the combination of symbols (display combination) in which winning is permitted for each role in this way, FIG. 296 (E) described later will be made between each combination and the combination of symbols actually displayed. It is possible to have the correspondence shown in. In this control example, it suffices if the correspondence shown in FIG. 296 (E) can be realized, and the provision of the "corresponding symbol combination" column in FIG. 296 (C) is only an example. The correspondence shown in (E) may be feasible.

Further, in this control example, the combination of the symbols "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" is for the combination "F_pushing order bell_1st", "F_pushing order bell_2nd", "F_pushing order bell_3rd", and "F_SB middle bell". Is associated only with, and is not associated with other combinations. Further, in this control example, in the non-bonus state and the bonus state (during SB), the expected value of the balance of medals per unit game is set to be higher in the non-bonus state.

(Design combination table)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 296 (D), a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachislot machine 1 of this control example will be described. In the description of the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 in this control example, the types of symbols constituting the combination of symbols are not required, and therefore the description and illustration will be omitted. As shown in the figure, the symbol combination table prescribes a combination of a plurality of symbols.

"Symbol combination A", "Symbol combination B", and "Symbol combination C" are combinations of symbols with the name "Bell", and 12 medals are paid out when displayed along the valid line. "Symbol combination D", "Symbol combination E", "Symbol combination F", "Symbol combination G", "Symbol combination H", and "Symbol combination I" are combinations of symbols with the name "Bell spilled eyes" and are displayed along the effective line. When it is done, one medal will be paid out.

(Correspondence between the internal winning combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed)
Next, FIG. 296 (E) is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), and the combination of the symbols actually displayed as stops in the pachislot machine 1 of another control example. In the figure, the correspondence relationship regarding some roles is shown, and the correspondence relationship regarding other roles is omitted.

As shown in the figure, the combinations "F_pushing order bell_1st", "F_pushing order bell_2nd", and "F_pushing order bell_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pushing order, and stop in the correct pressing order. When the operation is performed, the combination of symbols related to "bell" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the wrong pressing order, the combination of symbols related to "bell spilled eyes" is displayed. Further, for the combination "F_SB middle bell", a combination of symbols related to the "bell" is displayed regardless of the pressing order.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface so that the player can stop the pachi-slot machine 1. The main control board 71 includes a start switch 6S and a stop switch 7S. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the internal winning combination is determined, the RT transition symbol capable of transitioning the RT state to the RT state prior to the current RT state is displayed when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order. It is possible, and when the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing incorrect answers, it has the combinations "F_RT1 medium lip_123" to "F_RT4 medium lip_321" that can display a combination of symbols different from this RT transition symbol. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the "replay combination" among the plurality of combinations has the RT1 state to the RT5 state as the RT state in which the winning probability determined as the internal winning combination can be changed, and the main control board 71 has the main control board 71. When the RT2 transition lip to RT5 transition lip, which is the RT transition symbol, is stopped and displayed in the RT1 state to RT4 state, the RT state can be shifted to the RT state at a stage earlier than the current RT state, so that the main control The substrate 71 functions as an RT control means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of setting values as setting values having different advantages for the player, and the main control board 71 receives a setting change operation via the setting key type switch 430 and the setting button. As a result, any of the set values is set from the plurality of set values, so that the main control board 71 functions as a setting means.

Further, the main control board 71 can give a privilege regarding a notification state capable of notifying the player of a mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and particularly in the RT state at a stage prior to the RT5 state. Since the privilege related to AT can be given with a probability according to the actual set value and the privilege related to AT can be given according to the set value different from the actual set value in the RT5 state, the main control board 71 grants the privilege. Functions as a means.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an advantageous section capable of executing an AT capable of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. Then, when the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches the number of times (1500 times) corresponding to the number of games limiter, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section regardless of the remaining period during which AT can be executed. To terminate the AT, the main control board 71 functions as a limit control means.

Further, the main control board 71 can start the bonus state (SB) when the combination of symbols corresponding to the SB is displayed in the non-bonus state, and one unit game is performed in the bonus state (SB). In this case, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means because the bonus state (SB) can be ended and the non-bonus state can be started.

Further, the main control board 71 can control the notification state and the non-notification state (normal advantage, normal section) depending on whether or not the privilege related to AT is given, and when the privilege related to AT is given, the notification state. It is possible to control to a non-notification state when the privilege related to AT is not given. Further, the main control board 71 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player when the combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination in the notification state. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a notification state control means and a notification means. The main control board 71 can be controlled into a notification state and a non-notification state in any of the plurality of stages of RT states, and the notification target combination is the same combination in all of the plurality of stages of RT states. ..

[Die control using 4 reels]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 300, roll control using four reels will be described. The symbols arranged on each reel in this control example may be the same as those in the sixth embodiment, or may be different.

(Reel and stop button configuration)
First, a plurality of reels and a plurality of stop buttons in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of a plurality of reels in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example.

As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example, four reels, the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4, are arranged in this order from the left. Has. These four reels are provided side by side in the horizontal direction. The display window 4 is formed so that the player can visually recognize a part of the patterns drawn on these four reels. Specifically, in the display window 4, the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4 are drawn on the respective reels. A transparent window area is formed so that the player can visually recognize the two symbols (upper, middle, and lower). That is, in the display window 4, as a unit symbol display area for displaying one symbol, with respect to the first reel 3-1, the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. , The upper unit symbol display area, the middle unit symbol display area, and the lower unit symbol display area are provided.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is effective to be formed by connecting one unit symbol display area on each of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. As a line, it has a center line. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the center line passing through the unit symbol display area in the middle stage of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4 is used as an effective line. ..

Here, in this control example, the effective line (center) of the upper unit symbol display area, the middle unit symbol display area, and the lower unit symbol display area on the first reel 3-1 or the fourth reel 3-4. The visibility between the upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area excluding the middle unit symbol display area connected by the line) may be reduced. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the type of reel that reduces the visibility of the unit symbol display area other than the unit symbol display area connected by the effective lines is changed according to the game state. For example, in the first state (for example, in the normal state), the visibility between the upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area of the fourth reel 3-4 is reduced, and the second state (during CZ or AT). ) Decreases the visibility between the upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area of the first reel 3-1. The types of the gaming states to be the first state and the second state are arbitrary, the number of gaming states having different visibility is not limited to two, and the control method of the gaming states is arbitrary. Is. That is, when the transition condition of the gaming state is satisfied, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the current gaming state to another gaming state according to the transition condition.

The method of reducing the visibility is arbitrary, and the control means for controlling the reduction of the visibility differs depending on the method of reducing the visibility. As an example, the control means may reduce the visibility by controlling the display window 4, and may, for example, reduce the transparency of the area located in front of the unit symbol display area that reduces the visibility. Further, a predetermined image may be displayed in an area located in front of the unit symbol display area that reduces visibility. Further, the control means may reduce the visibility by controlling the back lamp provided behind the reel. For example, the back lamp corresponding to the unit symbol display area that reduces the visibility is turned off. May be. Further, the control means may reduce the visibility by controlling a door member (shutter) or the like (not shown). For example, when the visibility is lowered, the unit symbol display area for reducing the visibility is used. The door member (shutter) may be controlled so as to close the area located in front of the door member (shutter), and the door member (shutter) may be opened if the visibility is not deteriorated.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example, the game is performed using the four reels 3-1 to 3-4, but the first reel 3-1 and the fourth reel 3-4 are partially used. Since the visibility of the symbol is reduced and the player can see (easily see) only the symbol at the position where the effective line passes, the player plays the game with the same feeling as a conventional 3-reel pachislot machine. Can be made.

That is, as shown in FIG. 298 (C), in the first state, the player has a unit symbol of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3. The symbol in the display area and the symbol in the unit symbol display area in the middle of the fourth reel are visible, and the symbol in the unit symbol display area in the upper and middle stages of the fourth reel is invisible (or difficult to see). From the player's point of view, the upper, middle, and lower three unit symbol display areas (3 × 3) of the three reels of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3 are used. In response to the impression that the game is being played, the unit symbol display area in the middle of the 4th reel 3-4 is provided as a bonus, and it has a similar appearance to the conventional 3x3 pachislot machine. Will embrace.

In the second state, the player can see the symbols in the upper, middle, and lower unit symbol display areas of the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4, and the first reel. The symbols in the unit symbol display area in the middle row are visible, and the symbols in the unit symbol display area in the upper and middle rows of the first reel are invisible (or difficult to see). From the player's point of view, the upper, middle, and lower three unit symbol display areas (3 × 3) of the three reels of the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4 are used. In response to the impression that the game is being played, the unit symbol display area in the middle of the first reel 3-1 is provided as a bonus, and it has a similar appearance to the conventional 3x3 pachislot machine. Will embrace.

In order to give the player a feeling of appearance similar to that of a conventional 3 × 3 pachislot machine, it is preferable to appropriately design the combination of roles and symbols. That is, from the player's point of view, when the predetermined combination is won, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination are displayed in a straight line (for example, when the bell is won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed in a straight line. ) Is common, and if the predetermined role is won even though the symbols are not lined up in a straight line, a sense of incongruity will be felt. Hereinafter, an example of a device for avoiding such a feeling of strangeness will be described.

In the first state and the second state, the device example 1 uses a state in which the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination can be changed (for example, "the first state is a non-bonus state, the second state is a bonus state", and " The first state is a predetermined RT state, and the second state is a specific RT state different from the predetermined RT state ”). As a combination, a linear line regardless of whether it is an effective line or not in the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3. A predetermined combination in which a predetermined symbol is displayed in a straight line (the symbol on the 4th reel 3-4 is arbitrary), a 2nd reel 3-2, a 3rd reel 3-3, and a 4th reel 3-3. In the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by 4, a specific symbol is displayed on a straight line regardless of whether it is an effective line or not (note that in the first reel 3-1). The design is arbitrary) and.

The predetermined symbol and the specific symbol may be the same or different. The linear line regardless of whether it is an effective line is any of a center line, a top line, a bottom line, a cross-up line, and a cross-down line, and is the line in the first state and the line in the second state. The line may be the same line or may be a different line.

In such a combination configuration, the main control circuit 91 is more than a specific combination in the first state (3 × 3 is realized by the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3). A predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability (or only a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination), and the second state (2nd reel 3-2, 3rd reel 3-3, and 4th reel 3-4). 3 × 3 is realized by), a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a higher probability than a predetermined combination (or only a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination).

More specifically, when the non-bonus state is used as the first state and the bonus state is used as the second state, the combination "normal medium bell" that can be determined as the internal winning combination only in the non-bonus state and the bonus state Only has a role "Bonus Medium Bell" that can be determined as an internal winning role. The combination "normal middle bell" may or may not be an effective line in the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3. The symbol "bell" is displayed in a straight line on a straight line (the symbol on the 4th reel 3-4 is arbitrary), and the combination "bonus middle bell" is the 2nd reel 3-2, the 3rd reel. In the 3x3 unit symbol display area realized by 3-3 and the 4th reel 3-4, the symbol "bell" is displayed on a straight line regardless of whether it is an effective line or not. Yes (the symbol on the first reel 3-1 is arbitrary). By doing so, in both the first state (non-bonus state) and the second state (bonus state), when the corresponding symbols are displayed side by side in a straight line, the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to realize the situation of winning a prize.

Ingenuity example 2 is a case where a plurality of ATs are used as ATs, AT1 is used as the first state, and AT2 is used as the second state. In AT1 (first state), when the notification target combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the 3 × 3 realized by the first reel 3-1, the second reel 3-2, and the third reel 3-3. In the unit symbol display area, the mode of the stop operation in which the symbol corresponding to the linear line regardless of whether it is an effective line is displayed on a straight line is notified, and in AT2 (second state), the notified target combination is Whether or not it is an effective line in the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by the 2nd reel 3-2, the 3rd reel 3-3, and the 4th reel 3-4 when it is determined as the internal winning combination. Notifies the mode of the stop operation in which the symbol corresponding to the straight line regardless of the line is displayed on the straight line.

As the notification target combination, for example, a push order combination can be used, and when the push order combination is used as the notification target combination, the push order is used as a mode of the stop operation for notifying the player. Can be used. Of course, the notification target combination is not limited to the push order combination, and the content to be notified is not limited to the push order. That is, the number of choices of the stop operation mode can be adjusted according to the symbol to be aimed at, and in such a case, the mode of the stop operation to be notified is not the push order but the timing of the stop operation.

Further, the notification target combinations in the device example 2 may be the same combination in the first state (AT1) and the second state (AT2), or may be different combinations. In the case of the same combination, two types of stop operation modes (for example, push order) that are correct answers are prepared, and in one of the stop operation modes that are correct answers (first push order), In the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3, the symbol corresponding to the linear line regardless of whether it is an effective line or not. Is displayed on a straight line (the symbol on the 4th reel 3-4 is arbitrary), and in the other of the correct stop operation modes (second push order), the 2nd reel 3-2 and the 3rd reel 3 are displayed. In the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by -3 and the 4th reel 3-4, the symbol corresponding to the linear line regardless of whether it is an effective line is displayed on a straight line (1st reel). The design in 3-1 is arbitrary). In the case of a stop operation mode that is an incorrect answer, the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3, and the first Corresponds to a linear line regardless of whether it is an effective line or not in both the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by the 2 reel 3-2, the 3rd reel 3-3, and the 4th reel 3-4. The design is not displayed in a straight line. Then, the main control circuit 91 notifies one of the modes of the stop operation (first push order) that is the correct answer in the first state (AT1), and is the correct answer in the second state (AT2). The other of the modes of the stop operation (second push order) is notified. By doing so, in both the first state (AT1) and the second state (AT2), when the corresponding symbols are displayed side by side in a straight line, the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination wins a prize. The situation can be realized.

Further, in either one of the first state and the second state, the corresponding symbols at the time of winning are displayed side by side in a straight line, and in the other, the corresponding symbols at the time of winning are not displayed in a straight line. Conceivable. For example, as a replay role related to the operation of a replay, a role "chance replay" with a higher expectation of granting benefits (for example, AT win, CZ win, mode transition, etc.) than the role "normal replay" and the role "normal replay" And are provided. Then, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination "normal replay", a combination of symbols in which the symbol "replay" is displayed side by side on arbitrary parallel lines (top line, center line, bottom line) is associated with the combination " As a combination of symbols corresponding to "chance replay", the symbols in the 2nd reel 3-2 to the 4th reel 3-4 are the same as the combination of the symbols corresponding to the combination "normal replay", and in the 1st reel 3-1. The symbol is the same as the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination "normal replay" and the combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols (or the symbol in the first reel 3-1 to the third reel 3-3 is the same as the combination of the symbols corresponding to the combination "normal replay". Yes, the symbols on the 4th reel 3-4 are associated with a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination "normal replay" and a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols).

More specifically, the combination "normal replay" corresponds to a combination of symbols in which the symbols "replay" are displayed side by side in the unit symbol display area in the middle of the first reel 3-1 to the fourth reel 3-4. For the combination "Chance Replay", the symbol "Replay" is in the upper unit symbol display area of the 1st reel 3-1 and the unit symbol display area in the middle of the 2nd reel 3-2-4 4th reel 3-4. Correspond to the combination of symbols in which the symbols "replay" are displayed side by side.

As a result, in the first state, when the role "chance replay" is determined as the internal winning role, the symbol "replay" is displayed in "upper-middle-middle", and in the second state, the role "chance replay". When is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol "replay" is displayed in "middle-middle-middle". On the other hand, for the combination "normal replay", the symbol "replay" is displayed in "middle-middle-middle" in both the first state and the second state. By doing so, the appearance (roll) of the role "chance replay" can be changed according to the game state, and in the second state, the role "chance replay" and the role "normal replay" can be changed. It can be difficult to distinguish.

In this case, the probability of winning the lottery of privilege grant based on the role "chance replay" in the first state and the probability of winning the lottery of privilege grant based on the role "chance replay" in the second state shall be different. It may be the same or the same. In addition, when the winning probability is different, the probability of winning the lottery of the privilege grant based on the role "chance replay" in the second state is made the same as the probability of winning the lottery of the privilege grant based on the role "normal replay". It may be different, or it may be different. Similarly, the probability of winning a lottery for granting benefits based on the role "normal replay" may be the same in the first state and the second state, or may be different from each other, and is different from the first state. In the case of different from the second state, the probability of winning the lottery of the privilege grant based on the role "chance replay" in the second state is the same as the probability of winning the lottery of the privilege grant based on the role "normal replay". In that case, the probability of making them the same may be the probability of winning a lottery for granting benefits based on the combination "normal replay" in the first state, and granting benefits based on the combination "normal replay" in the second state. It may be the probability of winning the lottery.

In this way, by making the probability of winning the lottery of privilege grant based on the role "chance replay" in the first state different from the probability of winning the lottery of privilege grant based on the role "chance replay" in the second state. , Not only can the outcome be changed according to the playing state, but the rank of the role can be changed according to the playing state. That is, in the role "chance replay", the rank of the role is demoted when it becomes the second state when the first state is used as a reference, and the rank of the role is changed when it becomes the first state when the second state is used as a reference. Promote.

In this control example, four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are used as the plurality of reels, but the number of reels may be any number, and the plurality of reels may be in the horizontal direction. It may be provided side by side, or may be provided side by side in the vertical direction. Further, in this control example, it is possible to control a gaming state in which the visibility of one end side of the plurality of reels is reduced and a gaming state in which the visibility of the reel on the other end side opposite to the one end side is reduced. All you need is.

The reel that reduces visibility is preferably a reel in which three reels that do not reduce visibility are lined up in succession. For example, when five reels are used as a plurality of reels, the visibility of the two reels at the left end and the right end is lowered, so that the visibility of the three consecutive reels in the center is not lowered, and the left side is used. By reducing the visibility of the two consecutive reels on the right side, the visibility of the three consecutive reels on the right side is not reduced, and by reducing the visibility of the two consecutive reels on the right side, the visibility on the left side is reduced. The visibility of the three consecutive reels does not decrease. By making these different depending on the gaming state, this control can be applied even in the case of five reels.

Subsequently, FIG. 297 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of a plurality of stop buttons in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example. As shown in the figure, the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example has three stop buttons, a left stop button 7L, a middle stop button 7C, and a right stop button 7R, in this order from the left. These three stop buttons are provided side by side in the horizontal direction.

The left stop button 7L is provided corresponding to the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, and is a stop switch 7S and a second stop switch 7S for the first reel that detects a stop operation on the first reel 3-1. A stop switch 7S for the second reel that detects a stop operation on the reel 3-2 is connected. When the left stop button 7L is operated, the stop switch 7S for the first reel and the stop switch 7S for the second reel can detect the stop operation, and the main control circuit 91 is the stop switch for the first reel. When the 7S detects the stop operation, the rotation of the first reel 3-1 is stopped, and when the stop switch 7S for the second reel detects the stop operation, the rotation of the second reel 3-2 is stopped. As will be described later, one of the stop switch 7S for the first reel and the stop switch 7S for the second reel connected to the left stop button 7L may be invalidly controlled. When the control is invalid, the main control circuit 91 does not stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the invalid stop switch 7S, but stops only the rotation of the reel corresponding to the valid stop switch 7S.

The stop button 7C inside is provided corresponding to the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3, and is a stop switch 7S and a third stop switch 7S for the second reel that detects a stop operation on the second reel 3-2. A stop switch 7S for the third reel that detects a stop operation on the reels 3-3 is connected. When the stop button 7C inside is operated, the stop switch 7S for the second reel and the stop switch 7S for the third reel can detect the stop operation, and the main control circuit 91 is the stop switch for the second reel. When the 7S detects the stop operation, the rotation of the second reel 3-2 is stopped, and when the stop switch 7S for the third reel detects the stop operation, the rotation of the third reel 3-3 is stopped. As will be described later, either one of the stop switch 7S for the second reel and the stop switch 7S for the third reel connected to the inner stop button 7C may be invalidly controlled. When the control is invalid, the main control circuit 91 does not stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the invalid stop switch 7S, but stops only the rotation of the reel corresponding to the valid stop switch 7S.

The right stop button 7R is provided corresponding to the 3rd reel 3-3 and the 4th reel 3-4, and is a stop switch 7S and a 4th stop switch 7S for the 3rd reel that detects a stop operation on the 3rd reel 3-3. A stop switch 7S for the fourth reel that detects a stop operation on the reels 3-4 is connected. When the right stop button 7R is operated, the stop switch 7S for the third reel and the stop switch 7S for the fourth reel can detect the stop operation, and the main control circuit 91 is the stop switch for the third reel. When the 7S detects the stop operation, the rotation of the third reel 3-3 is stopped, and when the stop switch 7S for the fourth reel detects the stop operation, the rotation of the fourth reel 3-4 is stopped. As will be described later, one of the stop switch 7S for the third reel and the stop switch 7S for the fourth reel connected to the right stop button 7R may be invalidly controlled. When the control is invalid, the main control circuit 91 does not stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the invalid stop switch 7S, but stops only the rotation of the reel corresponding to the valid stop switch 7S.

(Relationship between reel and stop switch (first state))
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 299, the relationship between the reel and the stop switch in the first state (for example, in a normal state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 3A, in the first state, the visibility between the upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area of the fourth reel 3-4 is reduced. As a result, in the first state, the upper, middle, and lower three unit symbol display areas (3 × 3) in the three reels of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 and the third reel 3-3. Can be used to give the player the impression that the game is being played.

As shown in FIG. 299 (B), in this first state, the main control circuit 91 enables the stop switch 7S for the first reel connected to the left stop button 7L, while for the second reel. Disables the stop switch 7S for the second reel and enables the stop switch 7S for the second reel connected to the stop button 7C inside, while disabling the stop switch 7S for the third reel and also on the right. The stop switch 7S for the third reel and the stop switch 7S for the fourth reel connected to the stop button 7R are enabled.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 299 (C), when the left stop button 7L is operated in a situation where all of the four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are rotating, the main control circuit 91 causes the main control circuit 91 to rotate. The rotation of the first reel 3-1 in which the stop switch 7S is valid is stopped, while the rotation of the second reel 3-2 in which the stop switch 7S is invalid is not stopped. Similarly, when the stop button 7L inside is operated in a situation where all four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are rotating, the main control circuit 91 has a second reel 3 in which the stop switch 7S is effective. While the rotation of -2 is stopped, the rotation of the third reel 3-3 in which the stop switch 7S is invalid is not stopped. Further, when the right stop button 7R is operated in a situation where all four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are rotating, the main control circuit 91 is the third reel 3- to which the stop switch 7S is effective. Stop the rotation of the 3rd and 4th reels 3-4.

(Relationship between reel and stop switch (second state))
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 300, the relationship between the reel and the stop switch in the first state (for example, during CZ or AT) will be described. As shown in FIG. 3A, in the second state, the visibility between the upper unit symbol display area and the lower unit symbol display area of the first reel 3-1 is reduced. As a result, in the second state, the upper, middle, and lower three unit symbol display areas (3 × 3) in the three reels of the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4. It is possible to give the player the impression that the game is being performed using.

As shown in FIG. 300B, in this second state, the main control circuit 91 enables the stop switch 7S for the first reel and the stop switch 7S for the second reel connected to the left stop button 7L. To. Further, while enabling the stop switch 7S for the third reel connected to the inner stop button 7C, disabling the stop switch 7S for the second reel, and enabling the third reel connected to the right stop button 7R. The stop switch 7S for the 4-reel is enabled, while the stop switch 7S for the third reel is disabled.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 300 (C), when the left stop button 7L is operated in a situation where all of the four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are rotating, the main control circuit 91 causes the main control circuit 91 to operate. The stop switch 7S stops the rotation of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, which are effective. Further, when the stop button 7L inside is operated in a situation where all of the four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are rotating, the main control circuit 91 is the third reel 3- to which the stop switch 7S is effective. While the rotation of No. 3 is stopped, the rotation of the second reel 3-2 in which the stop switch 7S is invalid is not stopped. Further, when the right stop button 7R is operated in a situation where all four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are rotating, the main control circuit 91 is the fourth reel 3- to which the stop switch 7S is effective. While the rotation of No. 4 is stopped, the rotation of the third reel 3-3 in which the stop switch 7S is invalid is not stopped.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example, the reels used for the game (reels in which all the unit symbol display areas can be seen) are different depending on the game state, so that the pattern of the outcome is large according to the game state. Differently, the pattern of the outcome can be diversified. Further, the four reels 3-1 to 3-4 can be stopped by using the three stop buttons 7L to 7R, and the four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are stopped by the three stop buttons 7L to 7R. By switching the correspondence of the above according to the game state, the player can perform the game (stop operation) with the same feeling as that of the familiar 3-reel game machine.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example, the four reels 3-1 to 3-4 are stopped by using the three stop buttons 7L to 7R, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, as in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the visibility of the unit symbol display area is visible while stopping the four reels 3-1 to 3-4 using the four stop buttons 7-1 to 7-4. The reels for lowering the number may be different depending on the gaming state.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachislot machine 1 includes a plurality of reels 3-1 to 3-4 on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface, a display window 4 for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the reels, and a plurality of reels that the player can stop. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 is reel-controlled. It functions as a means and a winning judgment means. Further, since the main control board 71 can control a plurality of game states related to the game, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the plurality of reels 3-1 to 3-4 are four or more reels provided side by side in the horizontal direction, and the display window 4 has a plurality of reels 3-1 to 3-4. The upper, middle, and lower unit symbol display areas are provided for each of the above. The main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the visibility of the symbols displayed in a part of the unit symbol display areas provided in the display window 4 in the other unit symbol display areas. The main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 function as the visibility control means because the visibility of the symbol displayed on the screen is lower than the visibility of the symbol. Specifically, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 reduce the visibility of the unit symbol display areas of the upper and lower stages of the first reel 3-1 in the first state, and in the second state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 reduce the visibility. The visibility of the unit symbol display area of the upper and lower stages of the fourth reel 3-4 is reduced.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the stop switch 7S for the first reel 3-1 and the stop switch 7S for the second reel 3-2 are connected to the left stop button 7L, and the stop button 7C inside is connected to the stop switch 7S. , The stop switch 7S for the 2nd reel 3-2 and the stop switch 7S for the 3rd reel 3-3 are connected, and the stop switch 7S for the 3rd reel 3-3 and the stop switch 7S for the 3rd reel 3-3 are connected to the right stop button 7R. A stop switch 7S for 4 reels 3-4 is connected. The main control board 71 controls the enable / disable of the stop switch 7S when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are operated, and in the first state, the first reel is when the left stop button 7L is operated. While stopping the rotation of 3-1 the rotation of the second reel 3-2 does not stop, and when the stop button 7C inside is operated, the rotation of the second reel 3-2 is stopped while the rotation of the third reel is stopped. The rotation of 3-3 is not stopped, and the rotation of the 3rd reel 3-3 and the 4th reel 3-4 is stopped when the right stop button 7R is operated. Further, in the second state, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2 when the left stop button 7L is operated, and the stop button 7C inside stops the rotation. When operated, the rotation of the 3rd reel 3-3 is stopped, but the rotation of the 2nd reel 3-2 is not stopped, and when the right stop button 7R is operated, the rotation of the 4th reel 3-4 is stopped. While stopping, the rotation of the third reel 3-3 does not stop.

Further, the main control board 71 can notify the player of a predetermined stop operation mode when the notification target combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the first state, the first control board 71 is the first. Stop operation in which the symbol corresponding to the linear line is displayed on a straight line in the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by the 1-reel 3-1 and the 2nd reel 3-2 and the 3rd reel 3-3. In the second state, in the 3 × 3 unit symbol display area realized by the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3, and the fourth reel 3-4, a linear line is formed. Notifies the mode of the stop operation in which the corresponding symbol is displayed on a straight line. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a notification means.

[Game control using between RB flags]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 301 and 302, game control using the RB flags in the pachislot machine 1 will be described. In this control, the number of reels and stop buttons is arbitrary, but in the following, it will be described assuming that there are four reels and stop buttons.

(Outline of game status)
First, with reference to FIG. 301, an outline of a gaming state in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of this control example has a non-bonus state, an RB flag interval, and a bonus state (RB) as game states. The non-bonus state is a state in which the bonus (RB) is not determined as an internal winning combination and the bonus (RB) is not operating. Between the RB flags, the bonus (RB) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus (RB) is not operating. The bonus state (RB) is a state in which the bonus (RB) is operating.

In the non-bonus state, when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 91 shifts the gaming state from the non-bonus state to the RB flag. In other words, in the game in which the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 91 uses the RB as the internal winning combination until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the RB is displayed. carry over.

Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the RB is displayed, the main control circuit 91 starts the bonus state (RB) and shifts the gaming state to the bonus state (RB). Further, when the end condition is satisfied in the RB state, the main control circuit 91 starts the bonus state (RB) and shifts the gaming state to the non-bonus state. The end condition of the RB state is arbitrary, and for example, the end condition may be that the number of medals exceeding the specified number is paid out.

Here, in this control example, the RB is a so-called pull-in 1 role in which the corresponding symbol combination is always displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation in the game in which the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed. , When RB is determined as an internal winning combination in a game that has not been carried over as an internal winning combination (that is, when it has not been determined as an internal winning combination until the previous game and is determined as an internal winning combination in the current game) In the game, it is possible to display a combination of corresponding symbols.

Therefore, when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state, the combination of symbols corresponding to the RB is displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, the bonus (RB) is activated in the game, and the non-bonus state is started. It shifts to the bonus state (RB). In other words, the transition from the non-bonus state to the bonus state (RB) basically shifts directly from the non-bonus state to the bonus state (RB), and from the non-bonus state to the bonus state (RB) via the RB flags. ) Will not be transferred.

However, in this control example, by performing a predetermined operation, even if the RB is the pull-in 1, it is possible to shift between the RB flags without displaying the combination of the corresponding symbols in the game determined as the internal winning combination. I have to. Hereinafter, the operation for avoiding the winning of the RB of the pull-in 1 will be described.

(Between the RB flags of pull-in 1)
FIG. 301 (B) is a diagram for explaining an operation for avoiding winning of the RB of the pull-in 1. In the figure, as a result of the game being started in the non-bonus state, the RB is determined in the internal lottery process of the game. Since the RB is pull-in 1, when the rotation of all reels is stopped, the combination of the corresponding symbols is always displayed, and as a result of the RB winning, the bonus state (without shifting between the RB flags) ( It shifts to RB). Therefore, in this control example, the setting change operation is performed from the start of the game to the end of the game (for example, until the combination of symbols corresponding to the RB is displayed). If the setting is changed, the game will end, but as a process at the time of setting change, the bonus flag (RB) was maintained by keeping the bonus flag without clearing it. The game can be ended as it is. As a result, even if the RB is the pull-in 1, it is possible to prevent the combination of the corresponding symbols from being displayed in the game determined as the internal winning combination, and the game state can be shifted between the RB flags. it can.

Then, in this control, the main control circuit 91 contains the RB so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the RB is not displayed between the RB flags. Specifically, in the main control circuit 91, the probability that "missing" is determined in the internal lottery process for determining the internal winning combination between the RB flags (that is, only the RB carried over between the flags is the internal winning combination). The combination of symbols corresponding to the RB carried over as the internal winning combination is displayed by setting the probability of being determined as) to 0 and setting the lowest RB attraction priority among the small combination, replay combination, and bonus combination. Control so that it is not done. By confining the RB between the RB flags in this way, it does not shift to the bonus state (RB) after shifting between the RB flags (because the RB is not won), and (the bonus state (RB)). The game state is maintained between the RB flags without shifting to the non-bonus state (because is not started).

(1st game flow)
Subsequently, the first game flow in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control will be described with reference to FIG. 302 (C). In the first game flow, the game has a bonus, and when the RB is determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state, the bonus state (RB) starts in the game, and the non-bonus occurs after the bonus state (RB) ends. Return to state. The non-bonus state includes a notification state in which the player can be notified of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and a non-notification state in which the frequency of the notification is lower than the notification state (or not notified at all). The main control circuit 91 controls the notifying state and the non-notifying state according to the presence or absence of the privilege regarding the notifying state.

(2nd game flow)
Subsequently, the second game flow in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this control will be described with reference to FIG. 302 (D). In the second game flow, the game is playable without a bonus, and when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state, it shifts between the RB flags by the setting change operation described above, and then shifts to another game state. The game is played between the RB flags without doing anything. Between the RB flags, there is a notification state in which the player can be notified of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and a non-notification state in which the frequency of the notification is lower than the notification state (or not notified at all). The main control circuit 91 controls the notifying state and the non-notifying state according to the presence or absence of the privilege regarding the notifying state.

At this time, in the non-bonus state, the main control circuit 91 has a higher probability of granting the privilege related to the notification state than between the RB flags, while the magnitude of the privilege to be granted is larger between the RB flags. To control. By doing so, in the non-bonus state, the privilege related to notification is easily given, but the privilege given is small, and the privilege related to notification is difficult to be given between the RB flags, but the privilege given is large. .. Therefore, in the first game flow, the probability of the first hit of the notification state is high, but the duration of the notification state per one time is shortened, and the wave of the ball output becomes a gentle wave, while in the second game flow. The probability of the first hit of the notification state is low, but the duration of the notification state per notification is long, and the wave of balls is roughened. It should be noted that although the wave of the ball output is different between the first game flow and the second game flow, it is preferable that the payout rate is designed to be higher in the first game flow.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present control example, the probability of granting the privilege and the magnitude of the privilege when the privilege is granted cross each other between the non-bonus state and the RB flag. As a result, it is possible to have a game property in which a privilege is easily given but only a small privilege is given, and a game property in which a privilege is difficult to be given but a large privilege is given, which are different game performances. In this control example, the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege when the privilege is granted may be crossed between the non-bonus state and the RB flag. That is, contrary to the above example, in the non-bonus state, the main control circuit 91 lowers the probability of granting the privilege related to the notification state than between the RB flags, while the magnitude of the privilege to be granted is between the RB flags. It may be controlled so as to be larger than.

Further, in the game in which the combination of the corresponding symbols can be displayed, the RB always derives the combination of the corresponding symbols regardless of the mode of the stop operation, so that it cannot normally be transferred between the RB flags. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present control example, in the game in which the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined operation is performed during the game until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the RB is displayed. , The game can be ended while carrying over the RB, and by such a method, it is possible to shift between the RB flags which cannot normally be shifted. Further, since it is controlled that the combination of symbols corresponding to RB cannot be displayed between the RB flags, it is not possible to shift to the non-bonus state when shifting between the RB flags. As long as the normal game is performed in this way, the RB flag interval and the non-bonus state are maintained. Therefore, the clerk of the game store selects and sets the RB flag interval and the non-bonus state to set one game. It is possible to provide a player with different playability with different ball ejection performance using only the machine.

In addition, in order to shift between the RB flags, it is necessary to change the setting in the winning game of the RB. Therefore, when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, it is necessary to have a notification means for notifying that fact. preferable. In this case, the notification means may be a lamp, a speaker, a liquid crystal, or the like, and the control means for controlling the notification means may be the main control circuit 91 or the sub control circuit 101.

In addition, between the RB flags, the RB is not contained and a prize is not won, and the bonus flag is maintained when the setting is changed. Therefore, once the game playability between the RB flags is selected, other game playability Can no longer be selected. Therefore, an operation different from the setting change operation capable of erasing the bonus flag may be provided. For example, a RAM clear button is provided, and when the RAM clear button is operated, the main control circuit 91 executes an initialization process that clears the carried-over RB and puts it in a non-bonus state in which the RB is not carried over. May be.

Further, in this control example, the game state is shifted between the RB flags by changing the setting during the game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the mode of the stop operation (for example, batting order) is the correct mode, the combination of symbols for which one medal is paid out is displayed, and when the mode of the stop operation is incorrect, the combination of "missing" symbols is displayed. The displayed winning combination "1 batting order" and "RB" are duplicated to win the winning combination "1 batting order + RB", and the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is set low. Then, the attraction priority is set so that the combination of symbols for which one medal is paid out is prioritized over the combination of symbols corresponding to RB. By doing so, if the stop operation is performed in the correct manner at the time of winning the winning combination "Batting order 1 card combination + RB", the combination of symbols for which one medal is paid out is preferentially drawn in, and as a result, the RB is drawn. It is possible to shift between RB flags without winning a prize.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachi-slot machine 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub-control board (sub-control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachi-slot machine 1 are as follows. It has such a function.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn on the surface so that the player can stop the pachi-slot machine 1. The main control board 71 includes a start switch 6S and a stop switch 7S. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an RB of pull-in 1, and the main control board 71 can start a bonus state (RB) when a combination of symbols corresponding to the RB is displayed, and the bonus state (RB) can be started. ), The bonus state (RB) can be ended when the end condition is satisfied, so that the main control board 71 functions as a state control means. Further, in the game in which the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries over the RB as the internal winning combination until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the RB is displayed. Since it is possible, the main control board 71 functions as a carry-over means.

Further, the main control board 71 is capable of controlling the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the RB when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-bonus state in which the RB is not carried over as the internal winning combination. In order to control the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the RB between the RB flags carried over as the internal winning combination of the RB, the main control board 71 functions as a sealing means.

Further, the main control board 71 can execute a predetermined initialization process when the setting change operation is received via the setting key type switch 430. In particular, in the game in which the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, the RB can be executed. If a setting change operation is accepted during the game until the combination of symbols corresponding to is displayed, it is possible to execute an initialization process to end the game while carrying over the RB as an internal winning combination. When the operation of clearing the RAM is accepted via the RAM clear button or the like, the carry-over RB can be erased and the initialization process of putting the RB in a non-bonus state can be executed. Therefore, the main control board 71 can be used. Functions as an initialization means.

Further, the main control board 71 can give a privilege related to a notification state capable of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and in particular, in the non-bonus state, the probability is higher than that between the RB flags. On the other hand, the size of the privilege to be given is smaller than that between the RB flags, so that the main control board 71 functions as a privilege giving means.

[Other variants]
Further, the following modified examples can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above embodiment and other specification examples.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 such as the above-described embodiment, various lottery and privilege granting are performed based on the internal winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various types are based on the display by the internal winning combination. It may be possible to draw a lottery or give a privilege. In addition, various lottery and privilege grants based on the internal winning combination include various lottery and privilege granting based on the display by the internal winning combination, and conversely, the display by the internal winning combination is performed. Various lottery and privilege grants based on the facts include various lottery and privilege grants based on the internal winning combination.

For example, consider the validity / invalidity of privilege grant based on a fixed combination. When a fixed combination is determined as an internal winning combination while the fixed combination is valid, benefits are given based on the winning of the fixed combination in the valid state internally, but from the player's point of view, the fixed combination is accepted. It feels like the benefits have been granted based on the combination of symbols displayed. On the contrary, if the fixed combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the state where the fixed combination is invalid, the privilege is not given because it is the winning combination in the internally invalid state, but from the player's point of view. Since the combination of symbols according to the fixed role is not displayed, I feel that the privilege according to the fixed role is not given. In such a case, the internal trigger of granting the privilege based on the winning of the fixed combination in the valid state should be regarded as the apparent opportunity of granting the privilege based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the fixed combination being displayed. Also, the internal opportunity to not give a privilege because it is a winning combination of a fixed role in an invalid state is an apparent opportunity to not give a privilege because the combination of symbols according to the fixed combination is not displayed. Can be seen as.

(penalty)
In the pachislot machine 1, when the other stop operation is performed as a specification in which the mode of the stop operation is given a certain restriction (for example, a specification in which it is recommended that the left reel 3L be the target of the first stop operation). (For example, when the stop operation for the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation), the player draws a lottery for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a lottery for AT or ART, a lottery for mode transition). A penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player may be performed over a period of one game or a plurality of games or more. Such penalty states include, for example, a decrease in the probability of winning a lottery related to a predetermined privilege grant, a forced transition to a relatively disadvantageous lottery state (mode), and a lottery related to a predetermined privilege grant over a predetermined period. It can be used such as not performed.

(Judgment of penalty)
It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the stop operation has been performed according to the specifications is performed only during the advantageous section (the player is not notified of the stop operation) and is performed in the non-advantageous section (normal section). It may not be performed, or it may be performed only during the non-advantageous section (normal section) and not performed in the advantageous section, and the stop operation may be performed during the non-advantageous section (normal section) and (stop operation for the player). It may be performed in both of the advantageous sections. Further, it is preferable that this determination is performed on the main (main control circuit 91) side, which has high security.

(Occurrence of penalty condition)
In addition, the penalty state that occurs when the stop operation according to the specifications is not performed may be generated only in the advantageous section and not in the non-advantageous section (normal section), and is also non-advantageous. It may be generated only in the section (normal section) and not in the advantageous section, or may be generated in both the non-advantageous section (normal section) and the advantageous section.

(Notification of penalty status)
Further, a penalty notification means (notification lamp, segment, etc.) may be provided to notify the player of the penalty state while the penalty state is occurring. It is preferable to control such a penalty notification means on the main (main control circuit 91) side having high security.
Further, in addition to the penalty notification means controlled on the main side, a second penalty notification means (liquid crystal display) controlled on the sub (sub control circuit 101) side is provided, and the player is provided with a liquid crystal display, a projection image, or the like. It may be possible to notify that the penalty state is in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, as one aspect of the second penalty notification means, the penalty notification or the suggestion effect may be performed by voice, a decorative lamp, or the like.

(Release of penalty state)
In addition, the penalty state may be canceled when the setting is changed and may not be canceled only by the power interruption, or when the setting is changed and the power is cut for a long period of 4 hours or more (for example, the power is cut due to business suspension). However, it may not be released by a temporary power failure. Further, the penalty state may be canceled at the time of stopping.
In the specification that the penalty state is not released only by the power failure, the penalty notification means controlled on the main side maintains the penalty state notification when recovering from the temporary power failure, but the power failure is long-term for 4 hours or more. When returning from, the penalty state notification may not be maintained and the penalty non-notification mode may be used. Further, after the power failure is restored, only the notification by the penalty notification means (for example, the notification lamp) controlled by the main side is maintained, and the notification by the second penalty notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display) controlled by the sub side is performed. You may not do it.

(Stop function)
When a specific condition is satisfied, it may be provided with a stop function that generates a stop state in which the progress of the game cannot be stopped. By having a stop function, for example, the game ends when a predetermined number of game values are acquired, such as when the game ends when 1000 medals are acquired, and the game is used with a relatively high set value. The store rules can be set independently by the game store, and it becomes easy for the game store to prepare an environment in which the player can easily play even in a short time. Hereinafter, a specification example of the stop function will be described.

(Conditions for stopping)
The condition for generating the stop can be when a favorable state for the player ends, such as the end of the bonus operation or the end of the advantageous section. If the bonus is to be stopped at the end of operation, it may be limited to a specific bonus. For example, a bonus with a small number of acquired cards, such as 100, may not be stopped, but a bonus with a large number of acquired cards, such as 250, may be stopped at the end of the bonus operation.
Further, when the stop is generated at the end of the advantageous section, the stop may be generated only when the number of medals exceeding a predetermined number such as 1000 or more, 2000 or more is obtained from the start of the advantageous section. It is also possible to generate a stop at the end of the advantageous section due to satisfying the conditions for activating the limiter, such as digesting the advantageous section of 1500 games and acquiring 2400 medals. Further, the stop may be generated only when the stop condition is satisfied only in the case of a specific set value (setting 6 or the like). Further, for the number of medals to be stopped, a predetermined value of one may be used in the main ROM, or a plurality of values such as 1000, 2000, and 3000 may be prepared for the game. Any value selected by the store may be used.

(Setting of stop function)
The stop function operates the game machine by making it possible to switch between a setting in which the stop function is valid (a setting in which the stop occurs when the stop condition is met) and a setting in which the stop function is invalid (a setting in which the stop does not occur). It is preferable to enable switching according to the policy of the game store. For example, a dedicated switch is provided at a position where it is difficult for the player to operate, such as on the main board (main control board 71) or the power supply board in the housing of the game machine (in the case of a pachinko machine, the back side of the game table), and the dedicated switch is provided. It may be possible to switch between "with stop" and "without stop" with a switch.
Further, the hall menu may be displayed on a predetermined image display or the like when the power is turned on or the door key is operated, and the presence or absence of stopping may be set as an item in the hall menu.

(Settlement function settings)
In addition, a settlement function in which medals stored in credits are automatically settled and paid out to the lower plate when a stop occurs may also be installed. At this time, the presence / absence of the stop function and the presence / absence of the settlement function may be arbitrarily set, and if there is a stop function, there is also a settlement function, and if there is no stop function, there is no settlement function. It may be possible to set all at once.
In the enclosed game machine that manages the game value by information such as electronic data without using physical game media such as medals and game balls, the game value information stored in the credit is used for games such as prepaid cards. The storage medium that holds the value information may be automatically moved at the time of payment. At this time, it is preferable to notify the player so that the storage medium (prepaid card) is not forgotten.

(Switching operation of stop function)
Regarding the switching operation of the stop function, the operation may be enabled by using the input means provided in the game machine without providing the dedicated switch. For example, it may be possible to switch between the presence and absence of the stop function when the left stop button is operated in the state in which the stop switching can be performed triggered by an operation performed by the clerk, such as during setting change or setting confirmation. Further, in this state, when the middle stop button is operated, it may be possible to switch between production and non-production.
In addition, each setting state may be recognizable by the clerk depending on the display mode of the payout segment, the storage segment, the number of bets lamp, etc. (information display 14) on the front of the game machine. The setting state may be notified by displaying an image such as "with stop" or "with settlement".

(How to cancel the stop function)
If a stop occurs and the game cannot proceed, any operation method that the player cannot perform, such as inserting the door key into the keyhole of the game machine and turning it, operating the error release switch inside the housing, etc. When the clerk performs the above, the stopped state is released and the game can be played again.

(Display at the time of stop)
When the game is stopped and the game cannot proceed, the control means (sub-control circuit 101) can perform a predetermined display on the liquid crystal display (display unit 100). The predetermined display may be, for example, a display dedicated to stopping to notify that the machine is being stopped, a display of a demo screen provided for each pachislot machine, or a display to be stopped. It may be to display the previous effect screen. In addition, when displaying the effect screen before the stop, for example, the brightness may be changed (darkened) so that the display has a mode different from the normal state.

In addition, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the difference number. The duration may be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during the ART, or the continuation may be determined by the continuation judgment performed at an arbitrary timing during the ART. The period may be managed, or the ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of ART such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of navigations, the number of differences, and the like.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1, the notification (ART) function is operated under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub control board) is not limited to this. 72) The notification (ART) function may be operated by the control on the side.

Further, in the above description, the pachi-slot machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Features other than the features peculiar to the pachislot machine 1, such as the features related to reel control and the features related to setting change and confirmation of the present invention, can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and the same effect can be obtained. .. For example, checksum generation and judgment processing, various processing using the main CPU dedicated instruction code (address specification processing using the Q register, soft timer update processing, 7-segment LED drive processing, communication data generation and storage processing, etc. ), Various processes using the non-standard ROM area and the non-standard RAM area, and the like can also be applied to "pachinko". In addition, the front door (door body) of the pachislot machine corresponds to the part of the "pachinko" where the clerk of the amusement store opens to check the inside.

Further, the set value may be set to only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be left behind or may be eliminated. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be retyped, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode related to lottery (first hit and / or addition, etc.) of an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted. However, by switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause undulations in the ball output.

In this case, the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability by the specified value is one wave of balls. If it is specified that the value is switched by the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to a plurality of game machines provided. For example, if the business hours of a day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600 seconds, so if the shortest time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rules, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9695 times. Since it is not realistic to have no breaks (meals and toilets), the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball output can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous to the player are switched alternately each time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit will be stable in a two-day cycle. It can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if the number of set values is not changed, it is possible to make the wave of balls to be ejected more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Also, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and the monotony.

Moreover, if the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired ball output rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, since only game machines that meet the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be shortened.

[Extensibility of other game machines according to the present embodiment]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a player's medal insertion operation (that is, an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into a medal insertion slot, or an operation of a credited medal is operated by a MAX bet button or a 1-bet button. If the game is started by the operation of inserting the medal, and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device is driven to pay out the medal from the medal payout exit, or the medal is credited. I have explained, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is performed based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is input (hanged) and the game medium is paid out by the physical movement of the player, but also the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) itself is the game medium owned by the player. May be electronically managed to enable the game without medals. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the game media management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected so that it can be connected, and a prize is awarded for the operation of lending the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium necessary for the player to perform the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role of paying out the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium). When the combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the action of making the player acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium), or the game medium to be used for the game. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media possessed on the front surface of the pachislot machine 1 based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. In addition to the case of direct operation, when the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, the player may be stored by setting information such as a one-time password that only the player can know, or by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without medals, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector and the hopper device described above, these are controlled by the main control board 71, and the control result is transmitted. Based on this, it is also possible to adopt a method that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the game ball described above, the game medium management device is also provided in the same manner for the game. It is also possible to manage the game medium of the person.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the selectors and hopper devices inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the consumption of the game machine is reduced by reducing the number of devices. It also reduces power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

[Appendix 1]
The gaming machines in Appendix 1 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a device for facilitating the design related to so-called ball ejection, a gaming machine in which the internal winning combination is duplicated so that the ball ejection rate is less than 1 in some bonus states is known. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202331). In addition, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, there is also a game machine elaborately designed by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. It is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is premised that the player mainly plays in the bonus carry-over state, and the pleasure of winning the ball with the bonus winning is lost. Further, the gaming machine of Patent Document 2 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and a game machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and increasing the degree of freedom in ball ejection design by a method different from the conventional one. The purpose is to provide.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of "ART") in which there is a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than one advantageous state.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
In the first advantageous state, a notification suppression state (for example, a bell navigation non-occurrence state) in which notification is not performed by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the specific combination It has a notification permissible state (for example, a bell navigation generation possible state) in which notification by the operation mode notification means is permitted in the unit game determined as the internal winning combination.
The notification is suppressed from the start of the first advantageous state until a specific condition (for example, the passage of a predetermined number of games (100 G)) is satisfied.

According to such a configuration, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different possibilities of notification are provided, and the first advantageous state is basically terminated as a notification suppression state until a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, by appropriately setting such a specific condition, it is possible to suppress the notification of the operation mode and balance the advantages between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in ball ejection design while making it easier to understand.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The specific condition is that a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 100G) are executed, and the predetermined number of times is larger than the average number of unit games until the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized by many.

According to such a game machine, there is a high possibility that a predetermined bonus combination will be determined and a determination result of ending the advantageous state will be obtained by the time the specific condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous balance between the advantageous state and the bonus will be obtained. Can be properly planned.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and increasing the degree of freedom in ball ejection design by a method different from the conventional method.

[Appendix 2]
The gaming machines in Appendix 2 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. In addition, since the precursory production ends without any profit being obtained, there is a risk that the interest of the game will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and enhancing the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, an "ART" state) that can shift from the advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state is provided.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
The modes in the first advantageous state include the first mode (for example, "low accuracy" and "preparation for heaven" in the normal mode) and the second mode (for example, "heaven", "super heaven", and "special" in the normal mode. , "Next time precursor") and at least
The first mode and the second mode are characterized in that the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of "ART") is different.

According to such a configuration, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different possibility of notification are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the first mode and the first mode having different possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state are provided. Since the two modes are provided, the player can play the game while expecting to stay in either mode and shift to the second advantageous state, and while making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state and enhances the interest of the game.

[Appendix 3]
The gaming machines in Appendix 3 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easier for the player to grasp an advantageous state, reduces the risk of the player overlooking it, and makes the game state related to the AT lottery various. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control hand (for example, main control board 71) stage that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be executed. Board 71) and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, an "ART" state) that can shift from the advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state is provided.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
The modes in the first advantageous state include the first mode (for example, "low accuracy" and "preparation for heaven" in the normal mode) and the second mode (for example, "heaven", "super heaven", and "special" in the normal mode. , "Next time precursor") and at least
The second mode is more likely to shift to the second advantageous state than the first mode.
The general state is characterized in that the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of "ART") is higher than that of the first mode.

According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the state shifts to the second advantageous state. A first mode and a second mode are provided, which have different possibilities. Then, since the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the general state is higher than the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first mode of the first advantageous state, the player may be notified. Even in a general state where it is not possible, the game can be played while expecting a transition to the second advantageous state, making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state, and reducing the risk of the player overlooking the so-called AT. It is possible to make various game states related to lottery.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

[Appendix 4]
The game machines of Appendix 4 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easier for the player to grasp an advantageous state, reduces the risk of the player overlooking it, and makes the game state related to the AT lottery various. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be executed. Board 71) and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, an "ART" state) that can shift from the advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
When the end condition of the second advantageous state (for example, the number of games of "ART" is 0) is satisfied, it is determined whether to shift to the first advantageous state or the general state (for example, advantageous at the end). It is characterized in that the section end lottery) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and in the advantageous state, a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination. The notification is given, or the result display corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination is derived, or after satisfying either one, it may be shifted to the general state depending on the result of the end judgment, while the notification At the end of the second advantageous state, which is more likely, the player may be shifted to the first advantageous state and the advantageous state may continue without shifting to the general state, so that the player can grasp the advantageous state. It is possible to make the game state related to the so-called AT lottery various, while making it easier to make the game easier and reducing the risk that the player will miss it.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

[Appendix 5]
The gaming machines of Appendix 5 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easier for the player to grasp an advantageous state, reduces the risk of the player overlooking it, and makes the game state related to the AT lottery various. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An RT control means (for example, a main control board 71) that can be controlled by any of a plurality of RTs having different winning probabilities of at least one type of replay combination (for example, replay) as the internal winning combination.
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
The RT control means can be controlled to a specific RT (for example, RT0) when the setting is changed.
The advantageous state determined to be controlled by the specific RT may be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state determined to be controlled by an RT other than the specific RT. It is characterized by being expensive.

According to such a configuration, an advantageous state in which notification can be executed is provided, and in the advantageous state, a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and notification is performed, or a result display corresponding to a predetermined bonus combination is displayed. After being derived or satisfying either one, it may be terminated depending on the result of the end determination, but when the setting is changed, the game state is controlled to a specific RT, which is an advantageous state. Since there is a high possibility that the degree of advantage will be higher than that, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state, reduce the risk of the player overlooking it, and make the game state related to the so-called AT lottery various. it can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

[Appendix 6]
The gaming machines of Appendix 6 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39536 draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous for the player, and based on the lottery result, this precursor state (advantageous state). There are known gaming machines that can shift to a precursory state (a precursor when it is not determined to shift to an advantageous state) or a false precursor state (a precursor when the transition to an advantageous state does not occur).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform an effect of inciting a transition to an advantageous state during a sign (a sign state or a sign state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the game is in a sign state. In the case of the transition, since the transition to the advantageous state does not occur, as a result, the medals are only consumed and there is no benefit, so that there is a risk that the motivation to play may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and a player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) capable of stop operation, and a variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variablely displaying the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition. ), An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a plurality of the above. It is advantageous for the player and the stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of deriving the result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the stop operation via the stop operation means. The operation mode notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, and the operation mode notification means are used for notification. A gaming machine including a state control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling a possible notification state (for example, an advantageous section), and the operation mode notification means as the notification state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A first notification state (for example, "normally advantageous") that can be notified by, and a second notification that can be shifted from the first notification state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first notification state. When a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means as the internal winning combination which has at least a state (for example, "ART") and can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, the result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means is performed. Has a specific combination (for example, push order bell) and a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB) from which the state control means is derived, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the non-notification state, the state control means is released from the non-notification state. It is possible to shift to the first notification state, and notification is performed by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the predetermined determination in the plurality of variable display means. The notification state is terminated after at least one of the result displays corresponding to the bonus combination of is satisfied. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not the game is performed, and a counting means (for example, a main control board) for counting the number of unit games performed during the first notification state. 71), and a privilege giving means (for example, the main control board 71) that grants a privilege (for example, promotion of SCZ mode) according to the number of times the counting means counts are further provided.

According to such a game machine, a privilege is given according to the number of unit games counted during the first notification state. Here, since the first notification state is a gaming state in which it is possible to shift to the second notification state in which there is a high probability that an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, the second notification state, which is more advantageous in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, is available. Benefits can be granted when staying in the first notification state for a predetermined period without being able to shift to the notification state. As a result, even if the non-notification state cannot shift to the second notification state and the first notification state is entered, not only the medals are consumed but also the privilege can be expected to be given. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a remaining period management means (for example, a main control board 71) for managing the remaining duration in which the second notification state can be continued, and the state control means is the first. When the sum of the number of unit games played during the notification state and the number of unit games played during the second notification state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1500 times), the remaining period management means manages the number of times. Regardless of the remaining duration, the notification state may be terminated (for example, limit processing may be performed).

According to such a game machine, although a privilege can be expected to be given when staying in the first notification state for a predetermined period, the number of unit games performed during the first notification state and the second notification state is When the sum reaches a predetermined number of times, the notification state is forcibly terminated. As a result, even if a large privilege is given as a result of staying in the first notification state for a long period of time, the notification state (first notification state or second notification state) does not continue more than necessary, and the gambling spirit is maintained. It is possible to prevent it from being raised unnecessarily.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of variable display units. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) capable of a player to stop operation, and a variable control means (for example, main control) for variablely displaying the plurality of variable display units based on the establishment of a start condition. The substrate 71), the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of determining the internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the above. A stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units based on a stop operation via a plurality of stop operation means, and a player. An operation mode notification means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, a display unit 100) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous to the user, and a normal state (for example, a normal section). ), And a state control means for controlling a plurality of gaming states including at least an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state. A first advantageous state in which notification by the operation mode notification means is suppressed (for example, a normal advantage or effect section), and a second advantageous state in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed (for example, ART or an increase section). A privilege giving means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of giving a privilege when the first advantageous state continues for a predetermined period of time, and a unit game performed during the advantageous state. When the number of times of the above becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, when the game number limiter is activated), the end means (for example, the main control board 71) for terminating the advantageous state is further provided.

According to such a game machine, since the privilege is given when the first advantageous state continues for a predetermined predetermined period, the second advantageous state cannot be shifted to the second advantageous state as in the above-mentioned game machine. 1 Even in the case of shifting to an advantageous state, not only the medals are consumed but also the privilege can be expected to be given, so that the reduction of the motivation to play can be suppressed. On the other hand, the advantageous state (first advantageous state or second advantageous state) ends when the number of unit games played during the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, so that the first advantageous state is long. Even if a large benefit is given as a result of staying for a period of time, the advantageous state (first advantageous state or second advantageous state) will not continue more than necessary, and it will prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily enhanced. it can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing a game.

[Appendix 7]
The gaming machines of Appendix 7 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

As such a game machine, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-086863 discloses a game state and transmits an external signal when a special role advantageous to the player is displayed in the advantageous state, and a data counter or the like. A game machine that performs a lively production suggesting that a large number of medals can be obtained in conjunction with the external device of is disclosed. According to such a game machine, the production is performed not only by the game machine but also in conjunction with other devices, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, with such a game machine, there is a problem that since there are too many medals that can be obtained in a series of advantageous states, some players who feel that the gambling is too high are shunned.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a game machine in which the profit given to the player in a series of states is not excessive and an appropriate balance of gambling is achieved. The purpose is to do.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

When the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (for example, the advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player reaches the limit threshold value (for example, 1500 times), the gaming machine according to the present invention A gaming machine that performs limit processing for ending the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and has a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. Based on the 3R and the display window 4), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop and operate corresponding to the plurality of variable display units, and the establishment of the start condition. A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variablely displaying the plurality of variable display units, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition. ), And based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the variable display of the plurality of variable display units is stopped to display the result. Derivable stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and notification means (for example, main control board 71, notification lamp 147a, sub control board 72, display unit) capable of notifying a mode of stop operation advantageous to the player. 100) and a state control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the notification state capable of executing notification by the notification means, and as the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operation means in a specific operation mode, a specific result display (for example, single chili lip, double chili lip, triple chili lip) is derived from the plurality of variable display units. When the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display is derived to the plurality of variable display units (for example, replay). It has "F_single chili lip", "F_2 consecutive chili lip", "F_3 consecutive chili lip"), and in response to the specific combination being determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the privilege regarding the notification state is provided. The privilege granting means that can be granted (for example, the main control board 71) and the probability of changing the privilege probability, which is the probability that the privilege granting means can grant the privilege when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Further including a changing means (for example, a main control board 71), the probability changing means sets the privilege probability when the numerical value is less than a specific value. The probability is 1, and if the numerical value is equal to or more than the specific value, the privilege probability is set to the second probability lower than the first probability, and the notification means is described when the numerical value is less than the specific value. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the player is notified of the specific operation mode, and when the numerical value is equal to or greater than the specific value, the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The player is notified of an operation mode different from the specific operation mode.

According to such a game machine, normally, it is possible to give a privilege related to the notification state at the time of winning a specific combination, but after the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state reaches a specific value, it is specified. Even if the role is decided, the probability of granting the privilege is reduced. As a result, the profit given to the player during the notification state does not become excessive, and an appropriate balance of gambling can be achieved. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when this numerical value reaches the limit threshold value, the notification state is forcibly terminated, so that the gambling property can be balanced from this point as well. In addition, when the privilege is given at the time of winning the specific role, the specific result display is derived along with the notification of the notification means, while when the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific role, the notification of the notification means is used. A predetermined result display is derived accordingly. For the player, there is a possibility that he / she may feel dissatisfied if he / she can understand that the privilege is not given even though the specific role is won, but in the game machine according to the present invention, when the privilege is given. Since the result display differs depending on whether the result is given or not, it is not possible to know from the result display that it is the winning time of a specific combination. As a result, even if the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific role, the player does not feel dissatisfied, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the specific combination, when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode, the first result display is derived, and the game is stopped in an operation mode different from the first operation mode. A first specific combination that can derive a second result display different from the first result display when the operation is performed, and a third result display are derived when the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode. It has a second specific combination in which a fourth result display different from the third result display is derived when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the second operation mode. The privilege granting means can grant the privilege of the first size according to the determination of the first specific combination as the internal winning combination, and the second specific combination is the internal winning combination. It is possible to grant the privilege of the second size larger than the first size according to the determination as, and in the probability changing means, the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. At that time, the first privilege probability, which is the probability that the privilege granting means can grant the privilege, and the probability that the privilege granting means can grant the privilege when the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to change a certain second privilege probability, and when the numerical value is less than the first specific value, the first privilege probability is set as a predetermined probability, and when the numerical value is equal to or more than the first specific value. The first privilege probability is defined as a probability lower than the predetermined probability, and when the numerical value is less than the second specific value smaller than the first specific value, the second privilege probability is defined as a specific probability. When it is equal to or more than the second specific value, the second privilege probability is set to be lower than the specific probability, and when the numerical value is less than the first specific value, the first specific combination is used. When the internal winning combination is determined, the first operation mode is notified to the player, and when the numerical value is equal to or higher than the first specific value, the first specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the player is notified of an operation mode different from the first operation mode, and when the numerical value is less than the second specific value, the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the second operation mode is notified to the player, and when the numerical value is equal to or more than the second specific value and the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the second The player may be notified of an operation mode different from the operation mode of the above.

According to such a game machine, the value of the specific value, which is the threshold value for changing the probability of granting the privilege, is changed according to the size of the privilege associated with each type of the specific combination, and the associated privilege is changed. At the time of winning the second specific combination with a large value, the value of the threshold value is made smaller than that at the time of winning the first specific combination. As a result, it is possible to adjust the period in which the privilege is easily given for each size of the associated privilege, and it is possible to balance the gambling appropriately.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the profit given to the player in a series of states is not excessive and the gambling property is appropriately balanced.

[Appendix 8]
The gaming machines of Appendix 8 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

As such a game machine, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-086863 discloses a game state and transmits an external signal when a special role advantageous to the player is displayed in the advantageous state, and a data counter or the like. A game machine that performs a lively production suggesting that a large number of medals can be obtained in conjunction with the external device of is disclosed. According to such a game machine, the production is performed not only by the game machine but also in conjunction with other devices, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, with such a game machine, there is a problem that since there are too many medals that can be obtained in a series of advantageous states, some players who feel that the gambling is too high are shunned.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a game machine in which the profit given to the player in a series of states is not excessive and an appropriate balance of gambling is achieved. The purpose is to do.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

When the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (for example, the advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player reaches the limit threshold value (for example, 1500 times), the gaming machine according to the present invention A gaming machine that performs limit processing for ending the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and has a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information. Based on the 3R and the display window 4), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop and operate corresponding to the plurality of variable display units, and the establishment of the start condition. A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variablely displaying the plurality of variable display units, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition. ), And based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the result display is displayed by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. Derivable stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and notification means (for example, main control board 71, notification lamp 147a, sub control board 72, display unit) capable of notifying a mode of stop operation advantageous to the player. 100) and a state control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the notification state capable of executing notification by the notification means, and as the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operation means in a specific operation mode, a specific result display (for example, single chili lip, double chili lip, triple chili lip) is derived from the plurality of variable display units. When the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display is derived to the plurality of variable display units (for example, replay). If it has "F_single chili lip", "F_2 consecutive chili lip", "F_3 consecutive chili lip") and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the stock of the additional special zone is a predetermined number or more) during the notification state, a special state (for example, a predetermined number or more) is satisfied. A privilege regarding the notification state is given according to the state control means (for example, the main control board 71) for setting the special section) and the internal winning combination determining means determining the specific combination as the internal winning combination. When the possible privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) and the specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the privilege granting means The probability changing means (for example, the main control board 71) for changing the privilege probability, which is the probability of giving the privilege, is further provided, and the probability changing means sets the privilege probability to the first when it is not in the special state. As a probability, in the case of the special state, the privilege probability is set as a second probability lower than the first probability, and in the notification means, the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the privilege granting means is the privilege. When the specific operation mode is notified to the player, the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege, the specific operation mode and the said specific operation mode. Is characterized in that different operation modes are notified to the player.

According to such a game machine, when a specific combination wins during the notification state, the probability of granting the privilege differs depending on whether or not it is in the special state, and the probability of granting the privilege is different during the special state. Go down. As a result, the profit given to the player during the notification state does not become excessive, and an appropriate balance of gambling can be achieved. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state reaches the limit threshold value, the notification state is forcibly terminated. Therefore, it is possible to balance gambling from this point as well. it can. In addition, when the privilege is given at the time of winning the specific role, the specific result display is derived along with the notification of the notification means, while when the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific role, the notification of the notification means is used. A predetermined result display is derived accordingly. For the player, there is a possibility that he / she may feel dissatisfied if he / she can understand that the privilege is not given even though the specific role is won, but in the game machine according to the present invention, when the privilege is given. Since the result display differs depending on whether the result is given or not, it is not possible to know from the result display that it is the winning time of a specific combination. As a result, even if the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific role, the player does not feel dissatisfied, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined number or more of additional rights for extending the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued are held.

According to such a game machine, if the additional right is held in a predetermined number or more, the specific combination is reduced and the probability of granting the privilege is lowered, so that the profit given to the player during the notification state can be obtained. It does not become excessive and can balance the gambling properly.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific result display derived when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode is a plurality of combinations. Of these, the result display peculiar to the specific combination, and the predetermined result derived when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. The display may be a result display that can be derived even when a combination other than the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination among the plurality of combinations.

According to such a game machine, when a privilege is given at the time of winning a specific combination, a result display peculiar to the specific combination is derived. Since the game playability in which the result display (design) is aligned and added is preferable even from the player's point of view, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by displaying the unique result display when the privilege is given. On the other hand, if the privilege is not given at the time of winning a specific role, the result display that can be derived at the time of winning another role will be derived, so that the player can understand that it is the time of winning the specific role. There is no such thing, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the profit given to the player in a series of states is not excessive and the gambling property is appropriately balanced.

[Appendix 9]
The gaming machines of Appendix 9 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, conventionally, a game machine that gives a privilege by referring to the history of past game results is also known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-2523112, the winning history for five games is displayed according to a predetermined condition. At the same time, a game machine that holds the winning history data and draws ART based on the winning history becoming the winning history corresponding to the condition code data is disclosed. According to such a game machine, control is performed in consideration of not only the current game but also the history of past games, so that various game characteristics can be realized.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a game machine, it is necessary to keep the winning history data for 5 games at all times or prepare the judgment data referring to the winning history for 5 games, which increases the data capacity for processing. There was a problem that the development man-hours increased due to the complexity of the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of realizing various game playability while suppressing a data capacity and a processing load.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of a game using the above, and an effect execution means (for example, a sub control board 72) capable of executing an effect related to the game. A display unit (for example, a history display window displayed on the display unit 100) having a predetermined number of display areas provided corresponding to each of the predetermined number of games from the current game to the previous game, and a predetermined combination. Is further provided with a privilege giving means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of giving a privilege according to the fact that the winning combination is determined, and the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the effect executing means. Correspondingly, predetermined effect information (for example, history icon) is displayed in the display area corresponding to the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination among the predetermined number of display areas of the display unit. When the privilege granting means grants the privilege, the effect associated with the privilege can be executed on at least one of the display unit or the predetermined effect information.

According to such a game machine, a privilege can be given when a predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination, predetermined effect information is displayed on the display unit, and when a privilege is given, the display unit or predetermined effect information is displayed. Is used to perform an effect related to the granting of benefits. From the aspect of production, the player has the illusion that the privilege has been given as a result of winning the predetermined role, and it is possible to realize a variety of playability like a conventional game machine. On the other hand, the game machine according to the present invention does not need to hold the past history data as in the conventional game machine, and can realize the game property of controlling by referring to the past history from the production side. Therefore, the data capacity can be suppressed, and the development man-hours can be suppressed because the specifications are monotonous.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a second state (a second state) having a higher degree of advantage in granting the privilege than the first state according to the fact that the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination from the plurality of combinations. For example, a state control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of starting the second state and ending the second state when the game is played a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state is provided. May be good.

According to such a game machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination, the second state is subsequently set over a predetermined number of games, and when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination during the second state, the first winning combination is performed. The degree of advantage regarding the granting of benefits is higher than when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination during one state. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention does not need to retain the past history data as in the conventional gaming machine, and simply enters the second state with the first predetermined combination as an opportunity, as if the past history is stored. Since the game playability controlled by reference can be realized, the data capacity can be suppressed, and the development man-hours can be suppressed because the specifications are monotonous.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of realizing various game playability while suppressing a data capacity and a processing load.

[Appendix 10]
The gaming machines of Appendix 10 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue AT (the number of AT games). It is hoped that the number of navigation games) will increase.

Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, a privilege is given (the number of AT games is increased) according to the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game. Although the interest is improved, if a specific role such as watermelon or cherry that is easy for the player to pay attention to is decided as the internal winning role, but the privilege is not given frequently, the player will be disappointed. There was a risk that the interest of the game would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a request, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of notifying a player of the grant of a privilege at an appropriate frequency when a specific role is won. ..

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, a specific combination (for example, a rare combination), and a bonus combination (for example, MB). A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. The game state to be performed has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (for example, a normal section) and a specific game state (for example, "ART") different from the predetermined game state, and the bonus When the result display according to the combination is derived and the bonus is activated, the first additional determination means (for example, the number of additional games) capable of determining the additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) for extending the period during which the specific game state can be continued (for example). For example, when the main control board 71) and the specific combination are determined as winning combinations, a second addition determination means (for example, main control) capable of determining an addition amount for extending the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued can be determined. The substrate 71) and the addition control means (for example, main control) that extends the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued by the amount of the addition determined by the first addition determination means or the second addition determination means. The board 71), the notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the player of the additional amount, and the first additional determination means triggered by the operation of the bonus are the additional amount. Is further provided with an additional latent means (for example, a sub-control board 72) that keeps the additional amount unnotified without notifying the additional amount, and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification means. When the second addition determining means does not determine the addition amount despite the fact that the addition amount has been increased, the unreported addition amount held by the addition latency means is within the range of the addition amount that can be determined with the specific combination as an opportunity. It is characterized in that at least a part of the added amount can be notified.

According to such a game machine, when the additional amount is determined by the operation of the bonus, the additional amount is kept unnotified without being notified, and the additional amount is not determined at the time of winning a specific combination. In the case, the retained unnotified additional amount is notified instead. As a result, when the specific role is won, not only the additional processing amount triggered by the specific role but also the additional processing amount triggered by the activation of the bonus can be notified (additional effect), which is easy for the player to pay attention to. At the time of winning a specific role, it is possible to notify the player of the grant of the privilege at an appropriate frequency.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification means can be used by the additional latent means when the second additional determination means does not determine the additional amount even though the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. When notifying at least a part of the unnotified additional amount that is being held, the same additional amount as the additional amount that can be determined by the second additional determination means may be notified.

According to such a game machine, when the unnotified additional amount is notified instead, the additional amount that is the same as the additional amount that can be determined at the time of winning the specific combination is notified, so that the player is notified of the additional amount based on the specific combination. It is possible to give the illusion that it has been performed, and it is possible to notify the player of the grant of the privilege at an appropriate frequency at the time of winning a specific role that the player can easily pay attention to.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific combination is a combination having the same probability that it can be determined as a winning combination in each of a plurality of set values, and the bonus combination has a plurality of settings. The probability that the winning combination can be determined in at least a part of the values is different, and the probability that the first addition determining means and the second addition determining means determine the addition amount is a plurality of set values. It may be the same in each of the above.

According to such a game machine, the addition triggered by a specific combination is commonly performed in a plurality of set values, but the addition triggered by the activation of a bonus is performed with a different probability for each set value. Become. As described above, the addition triggered by the activation of the bonus is kept unnotified and is notified in place of the subsequent winning of the specific combination, so even if the specific combination has no difference in the set value, the addition can be added. The frequency of notification will differ depending on the set value. As a result, for example, even when the setting difference of the lottery table related to the addition processing is eliminated, the player can feel the setting difference of the addition, and the playability of guessing the setting from the addition frequency is realized. can do.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to notify the player of the grant of the privilege at an appropriate frequency when the specific role is won.

[Appendix 11]
The gaming machines of Appendix 11 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue AT (the number of AT games). It is hoped that the number of navigation games) will increase.

Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, a privilege is given (the number of AT games is increased) according to the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game. Although the interest was improved, there was room for further improvement in the production related to the granting of benefits.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of realizing an effect that enhances the interest of notification of privilege grant.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , Main control board 71), and as a gaming state for playing a game, a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, different from the predetermined gaming state) are provided. It has a plurality of gaming states including "ART"), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) that extends the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued can be determined. A determination means (for example, the main control board 71) and an addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) that extends the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued by the amount of the addition determined by the addition determination means. When the additional latent means (for example, the sub-control board 72) that can be held unnotified without notifying the additional amount and a specific condition are satisfied (for example, at the time of winning "F_SP lip A1" or the like), the above. The notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the player of at least a part of the unnotified additional amount held by the additional latent means and the additional latent means hold the additional latent means. The notification means further includes an effect stage determining means (for example, a sub-control board 72) capable of determining one effect stage from a plurality of effect stages according to the unannounced addition amount. It is characterized in that the unnotified additional amount can be notified to the player by the additional notification effect corresponding to the one effect stage determined by the effect stage determining means.

According to such a game machine, when the addition is performed internally, the addition amount may be held unnotified without being notified, and the additional amount held without being notified is subsequently subject to a specific condition. You will be notified when the condition is met. As a result, the amount of additional amount that can be notified at one time can be increased as compared with the case where the additional amount is notified each time a small amount of additional amount is determined, and the interest of the game can be improved along with the notification effect of granting the privilege. Can be done. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect stage is determined according to the unnotified additional amount, and the unnotified additional amount is notified by the notification effect corresponding to the effect stage. For the player, the unannounced additional amount can be predicted from the production stage. For example, when the player shifts to the production stage determined when the unannounced additional amount is large, the player expects the subsequent game. Can have. In addition, since the unannounced additional amount is notified by the notification effect corresponding to the effect stage, for example, a more lively effect is performed on the effect stage determined when the unannounced additional amount is large. Control can be realized.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, among a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop and operate corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and a plurality of roles. A stop control means (for example, mainly) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means according to the winning combination determined from the above and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means. A control board 71) is further provided, and in the plurality of combinations, when a stop operation is performed in the first operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, the first result is displayed on the plurality of variable display means ( For example, a replay) is derived, and when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operation means in the second operation mode, a second result display (for example, a red BAR lip) is derived to the plurality of variable display means. When a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operation means in the third operation mode, a third result display (for example, a W-aligned lip) is derived from the plurality of variable display means (for example, "W-aligned lip"). F_SP Lip B1 ") is included, and when the unreported additional amount is less than a predetermined value (for example, 100) and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the first operation mode is given to the player. On the other hand, when the unreported additional amount is equal to or more than a predetermined value and less than a specific value (for example, 150) and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the second operation mode is given to the player. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the additional amount that has not been notified is equal to or greater than a specific value, the third operation mode can be notified to the player. The notification means further comprises means, and when the unnotified additional amount is less than a predetermined value and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the unnotified addition is added without performing the additional notification effect. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the amount is equal to or more than a predetermined value and less than the specific value, the additional notification effect for notifying the additional amount for the predetermined value is performed, and the unnotified additional amount is the specific value. In the above case, if the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, it may be possible to execute the addition notification effect for notifying the addition amount of the specific value.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to associate the unnotified additional amount to be notified with the operation mode to be notified in order to derive the result display. Specifically, when the additional amount is not notified, the operation mode from which the first result display is derived is notified, and when the additional amount for a predetermined value is notified, the second result display is derived. When notifying the operation mode to be added and notifying the additional amount for a specific value, the operation mode from which the third result display is derived is notified. Since the playability of aligning and adding the result display (design) is also preferable for the player, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game by encouraging the derivation of a specific result display when performing the notification effect. Can be done.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize an effect that enhances the interest in the notification of the privilege grant.

[Appendix 12]
The game machines of Appendix 12 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue AT (the number of AT games). It is hoped that the number of navigation games) will increase.

Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, a privilege is given (the number of AT games is increased) according to the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game. Although the interest was improved, there was room for further improvement in the production related to the granting of benefits.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of realizing an effect that enhances the interest of notification of privilege grant.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , A game machine including the main control board 71), and a specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting a specific gaming state (for example, an advantageous section) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , A counting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of counting the first numerical value (for example, the number of games that have been digested) related to the specific gaming state, and a second indicating the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued. When the numerical value (for example, the number of remaining games) reaches the end threshold value (for example, 0), the specific gaming state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, the number of games). When the limiter activation condition) is satisfied, the specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that terminates the specific gaming state even when the value of the second numerical value does not reach the ending threshold. A remaining period notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72) capable of notifying a predetermined second numerical value (for example, the number of remaining games that have been notified) of the second numerical value as a remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued. The display unit 100) and a specific second numerical value (for example, the number of unnotified remaining games) other than the predetermined second numerical value among the second numerical values can be held as unnotified without being notified as the remaining period. When a specific condition is satisfied with the remaining period latent means (for example, the sub-control board 72), a part of the unnotified specific second numerical value held by the remaining period latent means is notified as the remaining period. At the same time, an additional notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) that updates the predetermined second numerical value and the specific second numerical value according to the notified value, and one production stage from the plurality of production stages. A first production stage and a first production stage in which the additional notification means performs the notification at a predetermined frequency as the plurality of production stages, further comprising an effect stage determining means (for example, a sub-control board 72) capable of determining the above. It has a second production stage whose frequency is higher than that of the first production stage, and a dedicated production stage that can be determined only when the first numerical value is later determined to satisfy the predetermined end condition. The effect stage determining means is the sum of the first numerical value and the predetermined second numerical value in the state where the first numerical value is determined to satisfy the predetermined end condition. In the first situation where is within the range of the first threshold value, the dedicated production stage can be determined as the one production stage with a predetermined probability, and the sum of the first numerical value and the predetermined second numerical value is said. In the second situation, which is within the range of the second threshold value, which is a value larger than the first threshold value, the dedicated production stage can be determined as the one production stage with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When the dedicated production stage is not determined as one production stage, the second production stage can be determined as the one production stage with a probability corresponding to the specific second numerical value.

According to such a game machine, a part (predetermined second numerical value) is notified and the remaining part (specific second numerical value) is kept unnotified during the remaining period of the specific gaming state. The remaining unnotified period is notified (that is, added) to the player at a frequency according to the production stage. By controlling the notification (addition) of the remaining period according to the production stage in this way, the production mode can be finely controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved. That is, the larger the remaining period of unnotification, the higher the frequency of notification of the remaining period is determined. Therefore, when the player can shift to the second production stage, the notification effect is performed. You can have expectations about that.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the period (first numerical value) of digesting a specific gaming state satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific gaming state is terminated regardless of the remaining period (second numerical value). , If it is decided that the predetermined end conditions will be met in the future from the remaining period, the stage may shift to the dedicated production stage. From the player's point of view, when the stage shifts to the dedicated production stage, it is possible to grasp that the specific gaming state continues until the first numerical value satisfies the end condition, so that the subsequent gaming can be performed with peace of mind. At this time, the transition to the dedicated production stage is performed with a higher probability as the sum of the first numerical value (digested period) and the predetermined second numerical value (notified remaining period) is larger, and the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Even if it has been decided, if the specific second numerical value (remaining unannounced period) is large, it will not shift to the dedicated production stage, but will shift to, for example, the second production stage and notify. The production is performed. For the player, the entertainment is improved when the notification (additional) production is performed. Therefore, as in the game machine according to the present invention, the production mode is controlled according to the notification status of the remaining period, so that the entertainment of the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize an effect that enhances the interest in the notification of the privilege grant.

[Appendix 13]
The gaming machines of Appendix 13 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233721 discloses an advantageous state (AT) with a predetermined number of games as one set, and an advantageous state after the advantageous state of one set is completed. A game machine with a production period that encourages the restart of the game is disclosed. According to such a game machine, regardless of the number of sets of advantageous states possessed, the expectation that the advantageous state of the next set may be started again even if the advantageous state of one set ends is played. It can be given to people and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the above-mentioned game machine, even if there is no remaining number of sets, the effect of inciting the advantageous state again after the end of the advantageous state of one set is performed, but the player indicates that there is no remaining number of sets. If it is grasped, this production does not make sense, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a game at the end of a specific gaming state.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , A game machine including the main control board 71), and a specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting a specific gaming state (for example, an advantageous section) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of counting the numerical value related to the specific gaming state and the numerical value counted by the counting means satisfy the specific condition (for example, when the number reaches 1500 times), the specific The specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the specific gaming state regardless of the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued, and the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued reach the end threshold. Then, when it is determined that the end-time processing determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not to perform the predetermined processing (for example, last freeze) and the ending-time processing determining means perform the predetermined processing, the above-mentioned The specific state ending means further includes an end-time processing execution means (for example, a main control board 71) that allows the continuation of the specific gaming state until the numerical value counted by the counting means satisfies the specific condition. When the end-time processing determining means determines that the predetermined processing is not performed, the specific gaming state is terminated.

According to such a gaming machine, when a numerical value counted in relation to a specific gaming state satisfies a specific condition, the specific gaming state is forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued. (Limit processing). On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining period of a specific gaming state reaches the end threshold value, it is determined whether or not to perform the predetermined processing, and when it is determined to perform the predetermined processing, the limit is determined. Allows the continuation of a specific gaming state until processing is performed (until the counted value satisfies a specific condition). As a result, when the predetermined processing is performed, the specific game state that is supposed to end is continued until the limit processing is performed, so that the interest of the game is lowered with the end of the specific game state. Not only can it be suppressed, but on the contrary, the player becomes strongly interested at the end of a specific gaming state, and the interest is improved. In addition, when the limit processing is performed, the specific game state is forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining period, so even if the predetermined processing is performed, the gambling spirit will not be unnecessarily enhanced. , A well-balanced playability can be realized. That is, even if the specific gaming state has already continued for a long period of time at the stage where the predetermined processing is performed, or conversely, the specific gaming state has continued for only a short period of time. Since it continues only until the limit processing is performed as a whole, it does not give an excessive profit to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the end-time processing executing means determines that the end-time processing determining means performs the predetermined processing, at least the above-mentioned numerical value is set in the remaining period during which the specific gaming state can be continued. The period required to satisfy the specific condition may be added.

According to such a game machine, when it is decided to perform a predetermined process at the end of a specific game state, the period required for the limit process to be performed is added to the remaining period during which the specific game state can be continued. As a result, not only can it be suppressed that the interest of the game is lowered with the end of a specific gaming state, but on the contrary, the player will have a strong interest at the end of a specific gaming state. , The interest is improved.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a game at the end of a specific gaming state.

[Appendix 14]
The gaming machines of Appendix 14 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39536, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous for the player, and the present precursor state (advantageous) is based on the lottery result. There are known gaming machines that can shift to a state (a sign that it is decided to shift to a state) or a state that is a sign of a mess (a sign that the state does not shift to an advantageous state).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform an effect of inciting a transition to an advantageous state during a sign (a sign state or a sign state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the game is in a sign state. In the case of the transition, since the transition to the advantageous state does not occur, as a result, the medals are only consumed and there is no benefit, so that there is a risk that the motivation to play may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , Main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation, it is possible to shift from the first notification state (for example, normal advantage) and the first notification state. It has at least a second notification state (for example, "ART") that is more likely to be notified than the first notification state, and the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ) Is reached, the gaming machine performs limit processing for ending the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and the first start condition is satisfied in the non-notification state (for example, a normal section). When the first state control means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting the first notification state and the second start condition in the first notification state are satisfied, the second notification state can be started. It is necessary from the time when the second state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the first state control means start the first notification state to the time when the second state control means starts the second notification state. A period determining means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of determining a period during which the second notification state can be continued is further provided according to the period, and the period determining means starts the first notification state. The longer the period required from the start of the second notification state to the start of the second notification state, the longer the period can be determined as the period in which the second notification state can be continued.

According to such a game machine, the second notification state is started when the second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state, but the second notification state started at this time is from the first notification state to the second notification state. It is determined according to the period required to transition to the state, and the longer the period, the longer the period is determined. As a result, even if the user cannot shift to the second notification state and stays in the first notification state for a long period of time, not only the medals are consumed but also the subsequent second notification state is maintained for a long period of time. Since it is possible to have expectations for continuation, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (first notification state and second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated. As a result, even if the user stays in the first notification state for a long period of time and a long period is determined as the period of the second notification state, the notification state (first notification state and second notification state) continues more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily increased.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the end condition is satisfied in the first notification state, the third state control means (for example, the main control board) capable of ending the first notification state and starting the non-notification state. 71) is further provided, and the average number of unit games until the first start condition is satisfied in the non-notification state is smaller than the average number of unit games until the second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state. It may be that.

According to such a game machine, the former has a higher frequency of transition between the transition from the non-notification state to the first notification state and the transition from the first notification state to the second notification state. As described above, in the first notification state, the longer the stay period, the longer the period of the second notification state. Therefore, the player feels that the first stage chance (first notification state) is near and continues the game. It becomes. On the other hand, if the end condition is satisfied before the second start condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the non-notification state, so even if the stage shifts to the first stage chance (first notification state), the state shifts to the non-notification state. Since it does not always shift to the second notification state and may shift to the non-notification state, it is possible to balance the game without increasing the gambling spirit.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing a game.

[Appendix 15]
The gaming machines of Appendix 15 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine having such an AT function, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099 turns on a section indicator (AT winning notification lamp) managed by the main control unit when shifting to an advantageous section such as AT. As a result, a game machine that notifies that the section is in an advantageous section is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, since the advantageous section is managed on the main control side, the game playability becomes clear, but on the other hand, whether or not the section indicator lights up determines whether or not the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is appropriate. Since it can be detected, the player may concentrate only on the section display, and the interest in the production such as video and audio may be diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is intended to provide a game machine in which a player does not lose interest in the production while surely notifying whether or not the transition to an advantageous state is appropriate. The purpose.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, and after the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the player can stop the operation. A game control unit (for example, a main control board) that controls the progress of a game in a game machine capable of deriving a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit based on the display result and giving a privilege according to the display result. 71), an effect control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the effect, a stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop and operate, and a transition of the gaming state are determined. A state in which the gaming state can be controlled into a possible transition determining means (for example, the main control board 71), at least a normal state (for example, a normal section), and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state. A control means (for example, a main control board 71) and an instruction means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, a display unit 100) capable of instructing a stop operation mode advantageous to the player. In preparation, the advantageous state includes a first state (for example, an effect section) in which the ball ejection rate is lower than 1, and a second state (for example, an increase) in which instructions are generated more frequently by the instruction means than in the first state. Section), and in the normal state, the transition determining means has at least a first pattern of transitioning to the first state (for example, a pattern of transitioning from the normal section to the effect section) and the first state. It is possible to determine the second pattern (for example, the pattern of shifting from the normal section to the increasing section via the effect section) after the transition to the second state, and that the gaming state is the second state. It is possible to notify that the notification means (for example, the state display 147b) controlled by the game control unit and the transition determination means have determined that the game state shifts to the second state. A notification effect execution means (for example, a display unit 100) that can execute a specific effect and is controlled by the effect control unit is provided, and the notification means notifies that the gaming state is the second state. In the unit game of the first state prior to the above, the specific effect can be executed by the notification effect executing means.

According to such a game machine, when the game state is the second state, the notification means notifies that fact. Here, since the notification means is controlled by the game control unit that controls the progress of the game, the main (game control unit) side reliably notifies whether or not the transition to the second state is advantageous for the player. Can be done. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when shifting from the normal state to the advantageous state, the transition to the first state is performed once regardless of whether the transition is made in the first pattern or the second pattern. However, during this first state, the specific effect is executed by the notification effect executing means controlled by the sub (effect control unit) side. At this time, in the game machine according to the present invention, in the unit game before the notification is performed on the main (game control unit) side, the effect is executed on the sub (effect control unit) side. The player has no way of knowing whether or not he has won the transition to the second state, and he does not lose interest in the production.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the state control means determines the length of the period for controlling the first state based on the determination of the first pattern and the determination of the second pattern. Based on this, the length of the period for controlling the first state may be set to the same length.

According to such a game machine, the length of the period for controlling to the first state is the same regardless of whether the transition is made in the first pattern or the second pattern. From the length of the period of one state, it is not possible to grasp whether or not to shift to the second state after that. For the player, since it is not possible to predict the subsequent development during the first state, the player will play the game without losing interest until the end, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player does not lose interest in the production while surely notifying the success or failure of the transition to the advantageous state.

[Appendix 16]
The gaming machines of Appendix 16 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As a game machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 states that if AT continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), AT is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games. A game machine that performs limit processing to be performed is disclosed. According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent an unlimited number of favorable states for the player from continuing, and thus it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, when terminating a state that is advantageous to the player (regardless of whether it is ended by limit processing or by exhausting the number of remaining games), all information regarding the terminating state is reset (initialized). There was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding the range of subsequent playability while resetting related information.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of winning combinations determined from a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine having a stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the variable display means of the above, and the result display has a specific state (for example, for example). , A specific result display (for example, downward-sloping replay) associated with (at the end of ART) is included, and a predetermined reset control (for example, initialization of information about ART) is performed in a state where the specific result display is derived. When performed, a state control means (for example, a main control board) for setting the specific state (for example, at the end of ART) based on the specific result display derived after returning from the reset control. 71) is further provided.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific result display is associated with the specific state, and after the predetermined reset control is performed (after the return), the specific result display is specified from the specific result display derived at that time. Read that it is in the state of. That is, when a predetermined reset control is performed in a state where the specific result display is derived, the related information is initialized according to the reset control, but it is in a specific state from the derived specific result display. Can be set. As a result, even after the related information has been reset, the range of playability can be expanded by using the specific state recognized after the return.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending a predetermined gaming state (for example, ART) and the ending means for ending the predetermined gaming state (for example, ART) according to the derivation of the specific result display. Further includes an initialization means (for example, a main control board 71) that resets information regarding the predetermined gaming state when the player finishes the predetermined gaming state, and the state control means provides the information by the initialization means. After the reset of, it may be set at the end of the predetermined gaming state based on the derived specific result display.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific result display is derived, the ending means terminates the predetermined gaming state, and the initialization means resets the information regarding the predetermined gaming state. Then, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, after the reset by the initialization means, it is set at the end of the predetermined gaming state from the derived specific result display. As a result, in the case of a conventional game machine, the game machine can only grasp that "it is not a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state)" due to the reset by the initialization means, but the present invention With the gaming machine according to the above, it is possible to grasp that it is a normal gaming state "immediately after the predetermined gaming state ends". As a result, for example, by making the transition from the normal gaming state to the predetermined gaming state different between immediately after the end of the predetermined gaming state and other than that, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is performed after the end of the predetermined gaming state. It is possible to have playability such that pullback is easy to be performed.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to widen the range of subsequent playability while resetting the related information.

[Appendix 17]
The gaming machines of Appendix 17 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As a game machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 states that if AT continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), AT is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games. A game machine that performs limit processing to be performed is disclosed. According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent an unlimited number of favorable states for the player from continuing, and thus it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, when terminating a state that is advantageous to the player (regardless of whether it is ended by limit processing or by exhausting the number of remaining games), all information regarding the terminating state is reset (initialized). There was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding the range of playability after a predetermined gaming state is completed.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , Main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, normal section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation, it is possible to shift from the first notification state (for example, normal advantage) and the first notification state. It has at least a second notification state (for example, "ART") that is more likely to be notified than the first notification state, and the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ) Is reached, the gaming machine performs limit processing for ending the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the second notification state is started. A state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the second notification state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and an operation reception that can accept a reset operation at the end of the second notification state by the state control means. Further including means (for example, a main control board 71), the state control means starts a non-notification state after the end of the second notification state when the operation reception means receives the reset operation, and the operation receives the operation. If the receiving means does not accept the reset operation, the first notification state is started after the end of the second notification state.

According to such a game machine, a reset operation can be accepted at the end of the second notification state, and when the player performs the reset operation, the state shifts to the non-notification state after the end of the second notification state. If the reset operation is not performed, the state shifts to the first notification state after the end of the second notification state. The first notification state is a notification state in which the mode of the stop operation is notified, and is a gaming state in which the mode of the stop operation can be notified. , You can expect to shift (pull back) to the finished second notification state. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (first notification state and second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated (limit processing). ). Here, when the reset operation is not performed, since the notification state (first notification state) is still in effect after the end of the second notification state, the numerical value related to the notification state continues to be counted, and then the limit processing is performed. It will be easier. Therefore, if the reset operation is not performed, the pullback can be expected, but there is a demerit that the limit processing is easily performed. For the player, since the selection of whether or not to perform the reset operation is performed after considering the merits and demerits, it is possible to give strategicity to the selection after the second notification state is completed. , The range of playability can be expanded.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the probability that the first notification state satisfies the predetermined start condition may be higher than that in the non-notification state.

According to such a game machine, it is easier to shift to the second notification state when the state shifts to the first notification state without performing the reset operation, so it is strategic to select after the second notification state ends. Can be given, and the range of playability can be expanded.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to widen the range of playability after the predetermined gaming state is completed.

[Appendix 18]
The gaming machines of Appendix 18 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a game machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 increases the number of AT games when a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role (the number of AT games is increased). The game machine (to be added) is disclosed.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional game machine equipped with the AT function, since the gaming state is advantageous for the player during the AT period in which the navigation is performed, the player only plays the game aiming at the AT period, and the game playability. Was monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine rich in game playability.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A first unit that includes a game control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game using the above, and is counted in relation to a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation. When the numerical value reaches a specific value (for example, 1500 times), a game that performs limit processing for ending the notification state and starting a non-notification state (for example, a normal section) regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued. In the machine, a specific result display (for example, 7-match replay) is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of combinations, and a predetermined operation different from the specific operation mode is derived. It relates to a specific combination (for example, "F_selection number lip") from which a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display is derived when the stop operation is performed in the embodiment, and the operation of the re-game. When the replay combination is included and the specific result display is derived, the RT state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts a high RT state with a high probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination A state start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the notification state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the non-notification state, and a second numerical value relating to the notification state when the state start means starts the notification state. When the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) and the specific result display (for example, 7-match replay) are derived in the notification state, the notification state is terminated and the non-notification state is started. When the state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) and the specific combination (for example, "F_selection number lip") are determined as winning combinations during the notification state, the specific operation mode (for example, 7) is determined. A notification means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, and a display unit 100) capable of notifying a stop operation necessary for displaying a uniform replay) is further provided, and the notification means is the counting. Until the second numerical value counted by the means reaches a predetermined value, the second numerical value becomes a predetermined value without notifying the specific operation mode even when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination after reaching the winning combination, the specific operation mode is notified.

According to such a game machine, when a specific result display is derived, the notification state ends and shifts to the non-notification state, but a high RT state with a high probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination is started. To. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification state ends and the game shifts to the non-notification state, the high RT state starts. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to realize a game property aiming at a transition from a notified state to a non-notified state (high RT), and the interest is improved. You can expect it. Here, the specific result display is derived when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode when the specific combination is won, but when the specific combination is won during the notification state, this specific operation mode is notified. There are times. Specifically, the specific stop mode is not notified until the second numerical value counted during the notification state reaches a predetermined value, but the specific stop mode is notified after the predetermined value is reached. As a result, if the player stays in the notification state for a certain period of time, it can be expected to shift to a high RT (a specific stop mode is notified). Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period during the notification state. Can be set as the ceiling period to high RT, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the state start means starts the notification state, a predetermined value setting means (for example, main control) that determines one numerical value from a plurality of numerical values and sets it as the predetermined value. A substrate 71) may be further provided.

According to such a game machine, since the period until a specific stop mode is notified can be arbitrarily set, the ceiling period to the high RT changes each time, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in game playability.

[Appendix 19]
The gaming machines of Appendix 19 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (notifying), and the period during which the navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As a game machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 states that if the notification period (AT) continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), it is compulsory regardless of the number of remaining games. A game machine that performs limit processing for ending the notification period is disclosed in. According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent an unlimited number of favorable states for the player from continuing, and thus it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in such a game machine, since it is not possible to make different probabilities such as high probability / low probability regarding the transition from the non-notification period to the notification period, the notification period is divided into the first section and the second section. , The second section is set during AT in the conventional game machine, and the probability difference to shift to AT (second section) is provided by making a difference in the transition probability to the second section during the first section. It is supposed to be. However, since the first section is included in the notification period, in such control, when the first section continues for a long period of time and then shifts to the second section (AT section), the notification period is limited to the upper limit (1500 times). It becomes easier to reach, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be spoiled.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that does not impair the interest of the player while suppressing the increase in gambling. ..

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The game machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, a game control means) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means. , Main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, advantageous section) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation, it is possible to shift from the first notification state (for example, normal advantage) and the first notification state. It has at least a second notification state (for example, "ART") that is more likely to be notified than the first notification state, and the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ) Is reached, the gaming machine performs limit processing for ending the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and when the first condition is satisfied in the non-notification state (for example, a normal section), When the gaming state shifts to the first notification state and the second condition is satisfied in the non-notification state, the game state shifts to the second notification state, and when the third condition is satisfied in the first notification state, the game When the state is shifted to the non-notification state and the fourth condition is satisfied in the first notification state, a state control means for shifting the gaming state to the second notification state is further provided, and the second notification is provided in the non-notification state. The probability of satisfying the second condition that triggers the transition to the state is higher than the probability of satisfying the third condition that triggers the transition to the second notification state in the first notification state.

According to such a game machine, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (first notification state and second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated, so that the notification state (1st notification state and second notification state) The first notification state and the second notification state) do not continue more than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily enhanced. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transition to the second notification state, which is more advantageous for the player, may be performed from the first notification state or may be shifted from the non-notification state, but the first It is easier to shift to the second notification state from the non-notification state than from the notification state. As a result, the route to the second notification state is mainly a route that shifts from the first notification state to the second notification state via the non-notification state, instead of shifting from the non-notification state via the first notification state. It is possible to realize playability as a transition route. By doing so, when the state shifts to the second notification state, the gaming state immediately before that is often in the non-notification state, and as a result, the numerical value counted for the limit processing also shifts to the second notification state. It is reset once just before the migration of. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, while preventing the gambling from being unnecessarily increased by performing the limit processing, the numerical value used for the limit processing is set before the start of the second notification state. It does not count wastefully and does not spoil the interest of the player.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not impair the interest of the player while suppressing the increase in gambling.

[Appendix 20]
The gaming machines of Appendix 20 are as follows.

[Background technology]

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") by a player and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, in which benefits are given according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, in recent years, a game machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the role determined as the internal winning combination. Has been done. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a game machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-104425 discloses a game machine having a plurality of modes for determining the transition probability to AT.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a game machine, since there is a difference in the transition probability for each mode, the degree of expectation for transition to AT changes according to the current mode, and although the interest of the game is improved, the transition to AT is improved. In a situation where a mode with a low probability is suggested, there is a risk that the motivation for playing the game will be impaired and the interest of the game will be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in motivation to play when staying in a state that is not advantageous to the player. And.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can be stopped and operated by a player corresponding to a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information and the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R), a variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variably displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and the above. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of a start condition, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the plurality of stop operating means. A gaming machine including a stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on a stop operation via the machine. , The gaming state in which the game is performed has a normal state (for example, a normal section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. As the internal winning combination, the first winning combination (for example, "F_BB2 + special combination") in which the bonus combination and the specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination and at least the bonus combination are determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, the type of winning combination that is duplicated has a second winning combination (for example, "F_BB2") different from the first winning combination, and the internal winning combination determining means is the first winning combination or One of the second winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability in each of the plurality of set values, and the other is determined as the internal winning combination with a different probability in at least a part of the plurality of set values. When it is determined as a combination and the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state, the first privilege (for example, a privilege based on common processing) regardless of the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination. (For example, the main control board 71) and a combination having no setting difference between the first winning combination and the second winning combination (for example, “F_BB2 + special combination”) in the normal state. When determined as the internal winning combination, the second privilege is further provided with an individual processing means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of granting a second privilege (for example, a privilege based on special processing). , The feature is that the privilege is larger than that of the first privilege.

According to such a game machine, the privilege given depends on the game state when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, the first privilege is given regardless of the type of the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus combination is given during the normal state. Once determined as the internal winning combination, the second benefit is granted only if the determined combination is a combination with no setting difference. At this time, since the second privilege is a larger privilege than the first privilege, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, a larger second privilege is received during a relatively disadvantageous normal state. Can be done. As a result, even if the player is staying in a normal state that is not advantageous to the player, there is a chance of a big privilege (second privilege) that cannot be received during the advantageous state, so that the player is motivated to play during the normal state. Can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, the second privilege that can be given during the normal state is a high setting even if it is a low setting (easy to stay in the normal state), which is given when a combination with no setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. Since the second privilege can be given without changing, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation for playing due to the setting situation.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the stop control means is used when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in the game in which the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the second winning combination. It is characterized in that the same result display is derived when the plurality of variable display means are stopped variably, depending on whether the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in the game in which the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. ..

According to such a game machine, when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, the same result display is derived at the time of winning the first winning combination and at the time of winning the second winning combination. , Even if the winning combination with no setting difference between the first winning combination and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, the combination with the setting difference is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether a combination with no setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, the winning combination with no setting difference has a greater privilege to be given to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination during the normal state than to be determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state. Therefore, by controlling the game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being deprived of the feeling of loss and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when the player stays in a state that is not advantageous to the player.

[Appendix 21-Appendix 26]
The gaming machines of Appendix 21 to Appendix 26 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. The game machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

By the way, in the conventional game machine having an AT function, since the game during AT (specific game state) is a game that merely waits for navigation, there is a problem that the game during AT becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying games in a specific gaming state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 21 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. (For example, a game state) and a plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and in each game of the specific game state, game information (for example, for example). Numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information while acquiring the winning combination, the number of AT stocks, the number of remaining games of AT, etc. When the numerical value calculating means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of calculating the above and the numerical value information calculated by the numerical value calculating means exceed the threshold value, the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state is changed (for example). , 768 pt is further provided with an extension information changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of disabling the black BAR.

According to such a game machine, the extension information regarding the extension of the game period of the specific game state changes according to the numerical information regarding the game value amount that can be given in the specific game state, so that the extension information in the specific game state is changed. The game will be diversified and the interest of the game will be improved. Since the numerical information is updated in each game in a specific game state, the extension information can be updated for each game, and the game playability can be further diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of combinations include a specific combination (for example, a fixed combination) in which the expectation of extension of the gaming period in the specific gaming state is relatively higher than that of other combinations. When the numerical information exceeds the threshold value, the extension information changing means lowers (for example, invalidates) the expected extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state based on the specific combination. ..

According to such a game machine, if the numerical information does not exceed the threshold value, the game period of the specific game state is likely to be extended according to the winning of the specific combination, but if the numerical information exceeds the threshold value. , Even if a specific role is won, it is difficult to extend the game period in a specific game state. For the player, since the profits obtained differ depending on the winning timing of the specific role, the playability in the specific game state is diversified. Further, since the numerical information is information on the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state, the numerical information is when the player has already obtained a lot of profits in the specific game state or can obtain it in the future. Exceeds the threshold. In such a case, by lowering the extension expectation, it is possible to prevent the profit obtained by the player from becoming excessive, and as a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while preventing excessive devotion. ..

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 22 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. The game state) and a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and the plurality of combinations have a stop operation in a specific operation mode. When performed, a specific result display is derived, and when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a predetermined result display different from the specific result display is derived. A plurality of specific combinations (for example, fixed combinations) are included, and in each game in the specific gaming state, game information (for example, winning combination, number of AT stocks, number of remaining AT games, etc.) is acquired and acquired. Numerical value calculation means (for example, main control circuit 91) capable of calculating numerical information (for example, AT point) regarding a game value amount that can be given in the specific game state according to the game information, and the numerical value calculation means. A target combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining the type of the specific combination that notifies the predetermined operation mode when the winning combination is determined according to the numerical information calculated by When the specific combination of the type determined by the target combination determining means is determined as the winning combination, the specific combination is further provided with a notification means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the predetermined operation mode. Among the corresponding result displays, the specific result display derived when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode is a result display unique to each of the plurality of specific combinations (for example, "C_black BAR"). The predetermined result display derived when the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode is a combination other than the specific combination among the plurality of combinations (for example, a combination other than the specific combination). , "F_normal lip 1", etc.) is a general-purpose result display (for example, "C_TL lip") that can be derived even when the winning combination is determined, and the target combination determining means responds to the numerical information. , The specific combination of notifying the predetermined operation mode is increased.

According to such a game machine, the types of specific combinations that notify a predetermined operation mode increase according to the numerical information regarding the game value amount that can be given in a specific game state. Since the derived result display differs between the case where the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode and the case where the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the specific combination notifies the predetermined operation mode. The result display during a specific game state differs depending on whether the number of roles is small or large, the outcomes (result display) that the player pays attention to are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.
Here, the result display derived when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode is a result display peculiar to each of the plurality of specific combinations, while the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode. The result display derived in the case is a general-purpose result display that can be derived even when a combination other than the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether a specific combination has won or another combination has won from the derived predetermined result display (general purpose), and the variation of the outcome is not noticed by the player. Different states can be controlled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of specific combinations are expected to extend the gaming period of the specific gaming state when the winning combination is determined as compared with other combinations. The target combination determining means is characterized in that, among the plurality of specific combinations, the specific combination with the highest expectation is determined in order as the specific combination for notifying the predetermined operation mode.

According to such a game machine, notification is performed so that a predetermined result display (general purpose) is derived in order from a specific combination having a high expectation of extending the game period in a specific game state. From the viewpoint of the player, if a predetermined result display (general purpose) is derived, it is not possible to grasp the winning of the specific combination, and therefore it is not possible to have expectations regarding the extension of the game period, which is not preferable. However, since the numerical information is information on the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state, it is a specific role when the player has already obtained a lot of profits in the specific game state or can obtain it in the future. It hides the winning, does not give an unacceptable disadvantage to the player, and on the contrary, can prevent excessive immersiveness.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 23 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. The game state) and a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and the plurality of combinations have a stop operation in a specific operation mode. When a unique result display (for example, "C_black BAR lip", "C_W aligned lip", etc.) is derived and the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode different from the specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a definite combination) from which a general-purpose result display (for example, "C_TL lip") that can be derived even when another combination (for example, "F_normal lip 1") is determined as a winning combination is derived. ) Is included, and the privilege granting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of granting the privilege related to the specific gaming state, and the game information (for example, the winning combination, the stock of AT) in each game of the specific gaming state. Numerical calculation capable of acquiring numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information (number, number of remaining games of AT, etc.) When the means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the specific combination are determined as the winning combination in the specific game state, the first privilege triggered by the specific combination is determined according to the numerical information in the game. When the first privilege granting determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not to grant the first privilege and the first privilege granting determining means decide not to grant the first privilege, the specific combination In a game after the game determined as the winning combination (for example, at the end of AT), it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the second privilege of the granting opportunity different from the first privilege granting trigger. A second privilege granting determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a notification means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the player of the operation mode when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. When the first privilege granting determination means determines to grant the first privilege, the privilege granting means can grant the first privilege with the winning of the specific combination as an opportunity. The second privilege granting determination means gives the second privilege. If it is decided to grant, the second privilege can be granted triggered by the determination of the second privilege granting determining means, and the notification means has to grant the first privilege unless the first privilege granting determining means grants the first privilege. Once determined, the player is notified of the predetermined operation mode.

According to such a game machine, the first privilege can be given with the winning of a specific role as an opportunity, and if the first privilege is not given, the second privilege can be given in the subsequent game. .. Here, when the first privilege is not given, as a result of being notified of the predetermined operation mode, a general-purpose result display is derived as the result display. For the player, although the first privilege is not given and there is actually a disadvantage, the general-purpose result display is derived so that the player does not feel a loss. You won't feel dissatisfied. On the other hand, when the first privilege is not given, the second privilege can be given after that, so that the actual disadvantage can be compensated and the player is given an unnecessary disadvantage. There is no. By making it possible to grant the first privilege or the second privilege according to the winning of the specific role in this way, the privilege associated with the winning of the specific role can be diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second privilege granting determining means determines that the first privilege granting determining means does not grant the first privilege, the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. When the numerical information in the later game exceeds the threshold value (for example, 1024 pt), it is determined not to grant the second privilege.

According to such a game machine, when the numerical information exceeds the threshold value, the second privilege is not given. Here, since the numerical information is information on the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state, the numerical value is obtained when the player has already obtained or can obtain a large amount of profit in the specific game state. The information exceeds the threshold. In such a case, by not giving the second privilege, it is possible to prevent the profit obtained by the player from becoming excessive, and as a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while preventing excessive devotion. Can be done.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 24 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. (Game state) and a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and each game in the specific game state is given in the current game. Information on the amount of game value to be played (for example, winning combination and number of payouts) is acquired, and first numerical information (for example, the amount of game value given so far in the specific game state) is obtained according to the acquired information. , Cumulative points) and the remaining stock number of the specific game state and the rest of the specific game state in each game of the specific game state and the first numerical value calculation means (for example, the main control circuit 91). Along with acquiring the game period, it is possible to calculate second numerical information (for example, possession points) regarding the amount of game value that can be granted in the specific game state in the future according to the acquired number of remaining stocks and the remaining game period. The second numerical value calculation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the third numerical value information (for example) regarding the game value amount that can be given in the specific gaming state according to the calculated first numerical value information and the second numerical value information. For example, when the third numerical value calculation means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of calculating the AT point) and the third numerical value information calculated by the third numerical value calculation means exceed the threshold value, the specific gaming state is set. It is further provided with an extension information changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of changing the extension information regarding the extension of the game period (for example, disabling the black BAR when it exceeds 768 pt).

According to such a game machine, the extension information regarding the extension of the game period of the specific game state changes according to the third numerical information regarding the game value amount that can be given in the specific game state, so that the specific game state The games inside will be diversified, and the fun of the games will improve. Here, the third numerical information includes the first numerical information regarding the game value amount given so far and the second numerical information regarding the game value amount that can be given in the future calculated according to the remaining stock number and the remaining game period. Since it is calculated based on, it is possible to change the extension information regarding the extension of the game period when the player has already obtained or can obtain a lot of profits in a specific game state, and is excessively absorbed. It is possible to diversify the playability while preventing the above. Since the third numerical information (first numerical information) is updated in each game in a specific game state, the extension information can be updated for each game, and the game playability can be further diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a gaming period determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining the remaining gaming period of the specific gaming state by consuming the remaining stock number of the specific gaming state. The second numerical value calculation means may be provided based on the remaining game period of the specific game state according to the expected value of the game value amount given per unit game of the specific game state. The fourth numerical information (for example, 7 pt per 1 G) regarding the game value amount is calculated, the expected value of the remaining game period determined by the game period determining means from each remaining stock number, and the specific game state. Fifth numerical information regarding the amount of game value that can be given based on the number of remaining stocks in the specific game state according to the expected value of the amount of game value given per unit game (for example, 600 pt per stock). The second numerical information is calculated by calculating the fourth numerical information and the fifth numerical information, and the game period determining means consumes the remaining stock number to consume the remaining game. When the period is determined, it is calculated based on the remaining game period determined according to the remaining stock number of the consumed amount, instead of the fifth numerical information calculated based on the remaining stock number of the consumed amount. It is characterized in that the second numerical information is calculated by using the fourth numerical information.

According to such a game machine, the exact value of the game value that can be granted in the future is not known from the remaining stock number or the remaining game period in a specific game state, but from the expected value per unit in the future. It is possible to obtain a value close to the amount of game value that can be given. Then, by changing the extension information regarding the extension of the game period using this value, it is possible to diversify the game playability while preventing excessive immersiveness. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the remaining gaming period can be determined by consuming the remaining stock number, but in this case, instead of the expected value of the remaining gaming period with respect to the consumed remaining stock number, By using the remaining game period specifically determined by consuming the remaining stock number, numerical information regarding the amount of game value that can be granted in the future is calculated. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately manage the numerical information regarding the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 25 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. (For example, a game state) and a plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and in each game of the specific game state, game information (for example, for example). Numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information while acquiring the winning combination, the number of AT stocks, the number of remaining AT games, etc. (For example, a main control circuit 91) and a 2-byte counter (for example, a counter for an AT point, a main control circuit 91) capable of counting the numerical information calculated by the numerical calculation means. Further, an extension information changing means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of changing the extension information regarding the extension of the gaming period of the specific gaming state when the numerical information counted by the counter becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value is further provided. The threshold value is a predetermined number of times 256.

According to such a game machine, when the numerical information regarding the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state exceeds the threshold value, the extension information regarding the extension of the game period in the specific game state changes, so that the specific game state The games inside will be diversified, and the fun of the games will improve. Since the numerical information is updated in each game in a specific game state, the extension information can be updated for each game, and the game playability can be further diversified. Further, since the threshold value is a value several times a predetermined number of 256, the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the extension information changing means compares the value of the upper byte of the 2-byte counter with the predetermined number, and the value of the upper byte is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. In a certain case, it is characterized in that it is determined that the numerical information is equal to or higher than the threshold value.

According to such a game machine, since it is only necessary to have data (1 byte data) that can be compared with the upper byte as a threshold value, the data capacity and the processing load can be reduced.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 26 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. (E.g., AT), and a plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, between predetermined games (for example, 5 games). A history display means (for example, display unit 100) capable of displaying winning combination information (for example, history information of winning combination) related to the winning combination, and a specific combination (for example, rare combination) in the specific gaming state. When the winning combination is determined, the winning combination information to be displayed on the history display means is the first winning combination information (for example, jewel (red)) or the second winning combination information (for example, jewel (white)). When the history type determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not to play the game and the history type determining means determine the first winning combination information, the second winning combination information is thereafter between the predetermined games. A privilege giving means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of giving a privilege with a higher probability than when the above is determined, and game information (for example, a winning combination, the number of AT stocks) in each game in the specific game state. Numerical calculation means (for example, AT points) capable of acquiring numerical information (for example, AT points) regarding the amount of game value that can be given in the specific game state according to the acquired game information (such as the number of remaining games of AT). For example, the main control circuit 91) is further provided, and the history display means displays the first winning combination information when the history type determining means determines the first winning combination information, and also determines the history type. When the means determines the second winning combination information, the second winning combination information is displayed, and the history type determining means displays the winning combination on the history display means according to the numerical information calculated by the numerical value calculating means. It is characterized in that it is determined whether the combination information is the first winning combination information or the second winning combination information.

According to such a game machine, when the first winning combination information is determined according to the winning of the specific combination, the probability of granting the privilege increases during the subsequent predetermined games. Here, since the winning combination information is displayed in the history display means, when the first winning combination information is displayed in the history display means, the player expects that the privilege will be given in the subsequent game. Will play the game. As described above, since the subsequent game playability differs depending on the display content of the history display means, it is possible to diversify the game in a specific game state.
At this time, whether to determine the first winning combination information or the second winning combination information at the time of winning the specific winning combination is determined according to the numerical information regarding the game value amount that can be given in the specific gaming state. The probability of granting benefits changes accordingly, and various playability can be realized.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes an invalidation control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not to set the lottery invalid state according to the numerical information calculated by the numerical value calculation means. When the invalidity control means determines that the lottery invalid state is set, the history type determining means always determines the second winning combination information as the winning combination information to be displayed on the history display means. When the invalidity control means does not determine that the lottery invalid state is set, the first winning combination information is determined as the winning combination information to be displayed on the history display means with a predetermined probability.

According to such a game machine, in the case where the lottery is invalid, only the second winning combination information having a low probability of granting the privilege is determined even if the specific combination wins, which is not preferable for the player. However, since the numerical information is information on the amount of game value that can be given in a specific game state, the lottery invalid state means that the player has already obtained a lot of profits in the specific game state or will obtain it in the future. This is a case where it does not give an unacceptable disadvantage to the player, and on the contrary, it is possible to prevent excessive devotion.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is further provided with a lock control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of generating a lock state for stopping the progress of the game when the privilege granting means grants the privilege. It is characterized by.

According to such a game machine, a locked state is generated at the time of granting the privilege, so that the player can grasp that the privilege has been granted.

[Appendix 27]
The gaming machines of Appendix 27 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. The game machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

In a conventional game machine having an AT function, even if the AT is won, it waits in the winning state, and when the AT start condition is satisfied in the winning state, it is widely practiced to actually start the AT. There is. By the way, in the conventional gaming machine that stands by in such a winning state, information that is advantageous to the player is notified even while waiting, and in particular, the notification probability between the waiting state and during AT. There was no difference. Therefore, even in the standby state, the same feeling of ball ejection as during AT is obtained, and the game playability is not sharp.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and a game having a sharp game property between a specific game state and a standby game state which is a waiting period until the specific game state is started. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and the plurality of combinations include a player when the winning combination is determined. A notification target combination that can notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is included, and the game state in which the game is played is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (for example, the AT non-winning game state) and the predetermined game state. Specific game state (for example, AT or specialized zone) and standby game state (for example, waiting state until AT is started (specialized zone preparation)) which is a waiting period until the specific game state is started. A first notification mode (for example,) as a notification mode having a plurality of gaming states including) and having a different probability of notifying the advantageous stop operation mode when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination. It has a special mode ON) and a second notification mode (for example, special mode OFF) having a higher probability than the first notification mode, and a first transition condition (for example, winning an AT lottery) is set in the predetermined gaming state. When satisfied, the gaming state can be shifted to the standby gaming state, and when the second transition condition (for example, winning the special zone start lottery) is satisfied in the standby gaming state, the gaming state is changed to the specific gaming state. When the game state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that can be shifted and the game state shifts from the predetermined game state to the standby game state, the first notification mode can be set as the notification mode, and the first notification mode can be set. When the gaming state shifts from the standby gaming state to the specific gaming state, the notification mode setting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of setting the second notification mode as the notification mode and the first notification mode are described. When the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination, the advantageous stop operation mode can be notified with a predetermined probability, and the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination in the second notification mode. Further, the present invention is further provided with a notification means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the advantageous stop operation mode with a specific probability higher than the predetermined probability.

According to such a game machine, when the state shifts to the standby game state, which is the waiting period until the specific game state is started, the first notification mode is set as the notification mode, so that the notification probability is high during the standby game state. It is low, and it is difficult to notify the advantageous stop operation mode even if the notification target combination is won. On the other hand, when the state shifts from the standby game state to the specific game state, the second notification mode can be set as the notification mode. Therefore, the notification probability is high during the specific game state, and the stop is advantageous when the notification target combination is won. The mode of operation is notified. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the notification probabilities differ between the specific gaming state and the standby gaming state, the feeling of the ball coming out in both gaming states becomes sharp and the interest is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, there are a plurality of RT states including a first RT state and a second RT state as RT states in which the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is different, and the plurality of combinations include the plurality of RT states. The first result display (for example, a replay other than the XD lip) can be derived when the winning combination is determined in the first RT state, and the first result is determined as the winning combination in the second RT state. When a specific combination whose display cannot be derived (for example, an XD lip is displayed) is included and the specific combination is determined as a winning combination in the standby game state, the specific game The game state can be shifted to the state, and when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the standby game state and the first result display is derived, the notification mode setting means is the first notification mode. 2 It is characterized in that the notification mode can be set.

According to such a game machine, the transition from the standby game state to the specific game state is performed only when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, but the switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode is performed. , It is not performed only when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, but is performed when the first result display is derived. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification probability may be low even in the specific gaming state. Here, the first result display can be derived when the RT state when the specific combination is won is the first RT state, but is not derived when the RT state is the second RT state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification probability of the specific gaming state to be started after that can be changed according to the RT state during the standby gaming state, so that the feeling of the ball coming out of the specific gaming state immediately after the start can be obtained. It can produce sharpness.

[Appendix 28]
The gaming machines of Appendix 28 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. The game machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball output). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. By the way, when navigating under the control of the sub side as in the conventional case, the navigation has a meaning as an effect, and the navigation contents of the sub side may not match the navigation contents of the main side. As an example, in a specification having a three-choice push order combination that requires only the first stop operation and a six-choice push order combination that requires the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the winning of the three-choice push order combination. Occasionally, the main side navigates according to the three-choice push order, while the sub side dares to make it difficult to tell whether it is a six-choice push order or a three-choice push order. There were times when navigation was performed according to the order in which the was pressed. In such a control, although various navigations can be produced by the navigation on the sub side, the navigation contents on the main side and the navigation contents on the sub side do not match, which is not preferable.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is intended to provide a game machine capable of various navigations in a dramatic manner while matching the navigation contents on the main side and the navigation contents on the sub side. The purpose.

When the gaming machine according to the present invention detects a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and a start operation is detected, the symbols are changed by rotating the reels. When the stop operation is detected while displaying, the symbol is stopped and displayed by stopping the rotation of the reel according to the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations, so that the progress of the game using the reel is displayed. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the game and an effect control means (for example, a sub control circuit 101) capable of controlling an effect related to the game, and serving the plurality of roles. Can stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols when the mode of the M-stop operation (for example, the first stop operation), which is the stop operation for the reel that stops at the M-th position, is appropriate, and the M-stop can be displayed. A plurality of first-choice combinations (for example, three-choice push order combinations) in which the combination of the predetermined symbols cannot be stopped and displayed when the operation mode is not appropriate, and the M stop operation mode are appropriate and , A specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the mode of the Nth stop operation (for example, the second stop operation) after the M stop operation is appropriate, and the mode of the M stop operation or A plurality of second-choice combinations (for example, six-choice push order combinations) in which the combination of the specific symbols cannot be stopped and displayed when the mode of the Nth stop operation is not appropriate are included, and the plurality of combinations are included. In the first alternative combination, when the M stop operation is the first stop mode (for example, the right 1st), the combination of the predetermined symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the combination can be stopped. When the mode of operation is different from the first stop mode, the combination of the predetermined symbols cannot be stopped and displayed as a specific first-choice combination (for example, the right 1st is the correct three-choice push order combination). ) Is included, and the plurality of second alternative combinations include a second stop mode (for example, the M stop operation is the first mode and the N stop operation is the second mode). , Right and left middle push order), the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and when the mode of the stop operation is different from the second stop mode, the combination of the specific symbols The specific second-choice combination that cannot be stopped and displayed (for example, the right-left middle is the correct 6-choice push order combination), the M-stop operation is the first mode, and the N-stop operation is In the case of the third stop mode (for example, right middle left), which is the third aspect, the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the stop operation mode is different from the third stop mode. In this mode, a predetermined second-choice combination (for example, a right-middle-left 6-choice push order combination) in which the combination of the specific symbols cannot be stopped and displayed is included, and the game control Main side notifying means (for example,) that is controlled by means and can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation when the first-choice combination or the second-choice combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state. , Main control circuit 91, instruction monitor) and the effect control means, and when the first-choice combination or the second-choice combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state, the player Further, a sub-side notification means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a display unit 100) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation is further provided, and the specific first-choice combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state. The main side notifying means notifies the second stop mode or the third stop mode (for example, "5" or "6" in the instruction monitor), and the sub side notifying means is provided by the main side notifying means. When the second stop mode is notified, the second stop mode (for example, right and left middle) is notified, and when the main side notifying means notifies the third stop mode, the third stop mode (for example, right and left middle) is notified. , Right middle left), and when the specific second alternative combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state, the main side notification means and the sub side notification means have the second stop mode (for example, the second stop mode (for example). When the instruction monitor is notified of "5" and the display unit 100 is notified (in the middle right and left) and the predetermined second-choice combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state, the main side notification means and the sub-side notification means A gaming machine characterized in that the third stop mode (for example, "6" on the instruction monitor and right, middle, and left on the display unit 100) is notified.

According to such a game machine, when the second-choice combination is determined as the winning combination, both the main side notification means and the sub-side notification means are modes of stop operation appropriate for the winning second-choice combination. Is notified. On the other hand, when the first-choice combination is determined as the winning combination, the main-side notification means also notifies the mode of the Nth stop operation that is not required by the first-choice combination, and notifies the sub-side. The means notifies the content corresponding to the main side notification means. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform various navigations in a dramatic manner while matching the navigation contents on the main side and the navigation contents on the sub side.

[Appendix 29]
The gaming machines of Appendix 29 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. The game machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

By the way, as a game machine having such an AT function, there is also known a game machine capable of shifting to an additional section having a high probability of extending the AT period when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the additional section is also in AT, information advantageous to the player was notified even during the additional section. However, in such a game machine, in addition to the privilege of increasing the probability of extending the AT period during the additional section, the privilege of notifying the player of advantageous information is further given to the player. It was not preferable because the benefits given were too large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of keeping the benefits given to the player during the additional section within an appropriate range without impairing the playability of the additional section. The purpose is.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, other than during AT) as a game state for playing a game. The game state (for example) and a specific game state (for example, AT) different from the predetermined game state, and the specific game state includes a normal section (for example, AT). It has an additional section (for example, CZ during AT) with a higher expectation of extending the gaming period in the specific gaming state than the normal section, and a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of combinations. A specific combination (for example, a batting order bell) in which the game value amount given when the game value is given is different from the game value amount given when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode is included. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the specific gaming state, the notification means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the specific operation mode and the normal section of the specific gaming state When the start condition is satisfied, the additional section of the specific gaming state can be started, and when the end condition is satisfied in the additional section of the specific gaming state, the additional section control means (for example,) capable of ending the additional section. , And the main control circuit 91), and when the specific combination is determined as a winning combination in the normal section of the specific gaming state, the notification means has a predetermined probability of the specific operation mode. On the other hand, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the additional section of the specific gaming state, the specific operation mode is notified with a probability lower than the predetermined probability. And.

According to such a game machine, when the normal section of a specific game state is shifted to the additional section, the expectation of extending the game period of the specific game state is high, while the notification frequency when the specific combination is won is high. Will be low. As a result, it is possible to keep the privilege given to the player during the additional section within an appropriate range without impairing the playability of the additional section, which is the extension of the game period. Further, like the game machine according to the present invention, by lowering the notification frequency in the additional section, the ratio can be passed to other parts. For example, the game machine having a high notification frequency even in the additional section. Compared with this, it is possible to increase the frequency of transition to the additional section and increase the expectation of additional section during the additional section.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, additional control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of extending the gaming period in the specific gaming state according to the winning combination determined in the specific gaming state. Further, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the normal section of the specific gaming state, the additional control means does not extend the gaming period of the specific gaming state, while the specific gaming. When the specific winning combination is determined as the winning combination in the additional section of the state, the gaming period of the specific gaming state can be extended.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the frequency of notification when a specific combination is won in the additional section is low, so that it is not preferable for the player to win the specific combination in the additional section. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game period is not extended even if a specific combination is won in the normal section of the specific gaming state, but in the additional section of the specific gaming state, the game period is extended when the specific combination is won. May be extended. As a result, even if a specific combination is won during the additional section, the player does not feel dissatisfied, so that the interest of the game during the additional section is improved.

[Appendix 30]
The gaming machines of Appendix 30 are as follows.

Further, conventionally, a game machine that gives a privilege by referring to the history of past game results is also known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-2523112, the winning history for five games is displayed according to a predetermined condition. At the same time, a game machine that holds the winning history data and draws ART based on the winning history becoming the winning history corresponding to the condition code data is disclosed.

According to such a game machine, not only the current game but also the history of past games is taken into consideration for control, so that various game characteristics can be realized, but depending on the result of this game. Only one condition code data was satisfied, and there was room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of history control which has never existed before.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and the plurality of combinations are included in a first group (for example, a replay group). Specifics belonging to both the first group and the second group (for example, "F_normal lip 1"), the role belonging to the second group (for example, the rare role group) (for example, "F_weak chance") A history management means (for example, a main control circuit) that includes a combination (for example, "F_chance lip") and can manage winning combination information regarding a winning combination determined as a winning combination between predetermined games (for example, between 5 games). 91) and the first history condition that can be satisfied when a combination belonging to the first group is determined as a winning combination during the predetermined game (for example, winning a history lottery performed by three or more reels) is satisfied. (For example, CZ) can be granted, and the second history condition (for example, three or more rare combinations) that can be satisfied when a combination belonging to the second group is determined as a winning combination during the predetermined game A privilege granting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of granting a second privilege (for example, AT) when the history lottery to be performed is satisfied (winning) is further provided, and the privilege granting means is won by the specific combination. When both the first history condition and the second history condition are satisfied when the combination is determined, both the first privilege and the second privilege can be granted. To do.

According to such a game machine, it has a specific role belonging to both the first group that triggers the granting of the first privilege and the second group that triggers the granting of the second privilege, and the specific role of the specific role. When the history of the winning combination between the predetermined games satisfies both the first privilege granting condition (first history condition) and the second privilege granting condition (second history condition). Grant both the first and second benefits. As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of benefits can be given as a trigger of winning a specific role, so that new history control that is not available in the conventional history control becomes possible. Become.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means grants the first privilege when the number of times the combination belonging to the first group is determined as the winning combination during the predetermined game reaches the first number. In addition to being possible, the second privilege can be granted when the number of times the combination belonging to the second group is determined as the winning combination during the predetermined game reaches the second number, and the history management means is described as described above. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination between the predetermined games, both the number of times the combination belonging to the first group is determined as the winning combination and the number of times the combination belonging to the second group is determined as the winning combination. Is characterized by being able to add.

According to such a game machine, when a specific winning combination is won, both the number of winnings of the winning combination belonging to the first group and the winning number of winnings of the winning combination belonging to the second group are added. The possibility that the condition for granting the privilege or the condition for granting the second privilege is satisfied increases, and the player can have expectations for the subsequent game.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is further provided with a history display means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101, a display unit 100) capable of displaying the winning combination information for the predetermined game managed by the history management means. It is characterized by.

According to such a game machine, the player can grasp the winning combination information for the predetermined game interval, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix 31]
The gaming machines of Appendix 31 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. The game machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

In a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, various measures have been taken to control the transition from a normal state to a specific gaming state (AT). For example, a mode for determining the transition probability to a specific gaming state. It is also known that the control is provided with a plurality of modes and the transition expectation is different for each current mode. However, such control is adopted in many game machines, and the game becomes monotonous simply by providing a mode, and further improvement is required for the transition to a specific game state.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of new control capable of shifting to a specific gaming state.

The game machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, CZ) as a game state for playing a game. , A plurality of gaming states including a specific gaming state (for example, a first-time bonus or a continuous bonus), and the specific gaming state includes a first section (for example, a small role game) and a second section (for example, JAC). If the first condition (for example, winning a replay) is satisfied in the first section of the specific gaming state, the gaming state can be transferred to the second section of the specific gaming state. When the second condition (for example, after 4 games have passed) is satisfied in the second section of the specific gaming state, the game state can be transferred to the first section of the specific gaming state. (For example, when the main control circuit 91) and the end condition (for example, when 25 small-role games have elapsed) are satisfied in the specific game state, the specific game state is ended and the predetermined game state is started. A possible end control means (for example, a main control circuit 91), a numerical value giving means capable of giving numerical information (for example, acquisition points) according to a winning combination determined as a winning combination in the specific gaming state, and the above-mentioned identification. A plurality of counting means (for example, main control circuit 91) capable of counting the total of the numerical information given by the numerical value giving means in the game state of the above, and a plurality of different expectations for transition to the specific game state. One mode from the plurality of mode information according to a value obtained by having mode information (for example, a score rank) and summing up the numerical information counted by the counting means at the end of the specific gaming state. A mode determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining information and a specific game start for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state according to the one mode information in the predetermined gaming state. When the determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the specific game start determination means decide to shift to the specific game state, the start control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of starting the specific game state. The numerical value giving means can give more numerical information in the second section of the specific gaming state than in the first section of the specific gaming state. And.

According to such a gaming machine, numerical information is given in a specific gaming state, and at the end of the specific gaming state, mode information that determines the degree of expectation of transition to the specific gaming state is provided according to the acquired numerical information. It is determined. In the predetermined gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state, and if it is decided to shift, the transition to the finished specific gaming state is made again. .. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the game property of acquiring numerical information for re-shifting to the specific gaming state during the specific gaming state, and the result of the game during the specific gaming state can be obtained. Correspondingly, the degree of expectation of returning to a specific gaming state changes again. For the player, the transition to a specific gaming state does not end, but the game is concentrated on the game during the specific gaming state. It can be realized.
Further, in the present invention, the specific gaming state is composed of the first section and the second section, and the second section is given more numerical information than the first section. For the player, since the flow of the subsequent game differs depending on whether it is the first section or the second section, the game playability is further diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a first specific gaming state (for example, SBIG) and a second specific gaming state (for example, WBIG) as the specific gaming state, and determines the start of the specific game. When it is determined that the means shifts to the specific gaming state, a type determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining the type of the specific gaming state to be started is further provided, and the start control means determines the type. When the means determines to start the first specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state is started, and when the type determining means decides to start the second specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state is started. Starting, the numerical value giving means can give more numerical information in the second specific gaming state than in the first specific gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, more numerical information is given in the second specific gaming state than in the first specific gaming state. For the player, since the flow of the subsequent game differs depending on whether the player is in the first specific game state or the second specific game state, the game playability is further diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming transition control means satisfies the first condition when a predetermined combination (for example, replay) is determined as a winning combination in the first section of the specific gaming state. Assuming that the condition is satisfied, the gaming state can be transferred to the second section of the specific gaming state, and the number of games played in the second section of the specific gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 games). When the game state is reached, the game state can be shifted to the first section of the specific game state on the assumption that the second condition is satisfied, and the end control means is performed in the second section of the specific game state. When the number of games played in the first section excluding the number of games played reaches a specific number of times (for example, when 25 small-role games excluding JAC games have elapsed), the above-mentioned specification is assumed that the end condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that it is possible to end the gaming state of the above and start the predetermined gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific gaming state ends when the number of games played in the first section reaches the specific number of games, regardless of the number of games played in the second section. Therefore, if it is possible to shift to the second section in a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state does not end during the second section, and a lot of numerical information can be acquired in the second section. Therefore, as the number of transitions to the second section increases, it is possible to expect that the game will return to a specific gaming state after the end.

[Appendix 32]
The gaming machines of Appendix 32 are as follows.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. The game machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine having an AT function, an effect of notifying the success or failure of the transition to the AT (special section) may be performed (for example, if it succeeds, the transition to the AT is won, and if it fails, it is not won). In the game machine of, such a production was sometimes canceled in the middle. If the production was canceled, the production effect of the production would be reduced and the interest would be reduced, so there was room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of reducing a decrease in the effect of an effect that informs the success or failure of the transition to a special section.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and a predetermined game state (for example, a normal section) as a game state for playing a game. The first game state is composed of a plurality of game states including a specific game state (for example, an advantageous section), and the specific game state is composed of an effect section (for example, a precursor) in which a predetermined number of games are played. It is composed of a specific gaming state (for example, a sign of a ghost), the production section in which the predetermined number of games are performed, and a special section (for example, a villa with a pseudo bonus and a CZ) that is advantageous to the player thereafter. When a second specific gaming state (for example, this precursor and pseudo-bonus and a continuous villa with CZ) is held, and a predetermined combination (for example, a rare role) is determined as a winning combination in the predetermined gaming state, When the type determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining the type of the specific gaming state and the type determining means determine to start the first specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state is started. Then, when the predetermined number of games are performed in the first specific game state and the effect section ends, the first game state in which the first specific game state can be ended and the state can be shifted to the predetermined game state. When the control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the type determining means determine to start the second specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state is started, and the predetermined in the second specific gaming state. When the number of games is played and the effect section ends, the special section is started, and when the end condition of the special section is satisfied, the second specific game state is ended and the predetermined game state is completed. A second game state control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of shifting to, and an effect execution means (for example, an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect regarding success or failure of whether or not the special section is started in the effect section). For example, the sub-control circuit 101 (display unit 100) and the lock control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of generating a lock state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the first specific game state are further added. When the type determining means determines to start the first specific gaming state, the effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect using the effect section and the subsequent locked state. A game machine characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, when shifting from a predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state, first, regardless of the type of the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state or second specific gaming state), It shifts to the production section where a predetermined number of games are performed. In this effect section, after that, a predetermined effect regarding the success or failure of whether or not the special section is started is performed. Therefore, when the first specific game state is determined as the type of the specific game state, the failure effect is produced. Is performed, and when the second specific gaming state is determined as the type of the specific gaming state, a success effect is performed. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the locked state is generated at the end of the first specific gaming state, but in the first specific gaming state, the end time of the effect section coincides with the end time of the specific gaming state. Therefore, when the game shifts to the first specific gaming state, the predetermined effect can be executed using the effect section and the subsequent locked state, and the predetermined effect is not canceled and the transition to the special section occurs. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect that informs the result.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the lock control means can generate a lock state in which the progress of the game is stopped at the end of the second specific game state, and the effect executing means is the type determination means. Is determined to start the second specific gaming state, the locked state can be used to execute a specific effect relating to the gaming result of the special section.

According to such a game machine, in the second specific game state, the end time of the special section coincides with the end time of the specific game state. Therefore, by executing the specific effect using the locked state, for example, It is possible to inform the player of the game result during the special section, such as the number of medals won during the special section. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by using the locked state at the end of the specific gaming state, a predetermined effect for notifying the success or failure of the transition to the special section and a specific effect for notifying the game result during the special section are appropriately provided. It can be carried out.

[Appendix 33]
The gaming machines of Appendix 33 are as follows.

Regarding this reel stop control, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200497 describes a game in which the maximum number of symbol sliding pieces constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is drawn in. The machine (so-called No. 5 machine) is disclosed. According to such a game machine, the control that does not stop and control despite the internal winning, which was possible with the conventional game machine (so-called No. 4 machine), is abolished, and if the corresponding combination of symbols is aimed at, Since it is possible to always arrange the combination of symbols according to the winning combination, it is possible to realize a fair game.

In addition, as a game machine that performs such stop control, in recent years, a small role with a high winning probability such as a bell and a rare role with a low winning probability such as a watermelon are tempted at the time of the second stop, and at the time of the third stop. There is also known a game machine in which benefits such as bonuses are confirmed as a reach when no prize is won in any of the roles. However, in the conventional control in which the small role and the rare role are tempered, there is a problem that the stop operation of the player becomes complicated and troublesome. That is, when the small role and the rare role are tempted, the player will perform a stop operation so as not to miss the rare role, but the small role such as the bell is compared with the rare role and the bonus role. Since the probability of winning is high, if the small role and the rare role are tempted, the bell will basically win, and it is unlikely that the rare role's winning or reach will be displayed. In the conventional control, it is necessary to perform a stop operation that does not miss the rare role even in such a case, and the player feels annoyed.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a game machine capable of giving a player a sense of expectation according to a stop result while simplifying the stop operation of the player. The purpose is.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes reels of a predetermined number of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine that advances a game using the reels by stopping and displaying the symbol by stopping the rotation of the reel, and a unit symbol display that displays one symbol of each reel for the plurality of combinations. A specific combination (eg, bell) in which the first symbol (eg, bell) can be displayed side by side along a linear line (eg, center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up reel, cross-down line) connecting the regions. , "F_Reel 2 Bell A1" "F_Reel 2 Bell A2" "F_Reel 2 Bell B1" "F_Reel 2 Bell B2") and the second symbol (for example, watermelon) are displayed side by side along the line. Predetermined combinations (for example, "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2") that can be played are included, and the specific combination includes a first specific combination (for example, "F_reel 2 bell A1" and "F_reel 2 bell"). A2 ”) and a second specific combination (for example,“ F_strike order 2 bell B1 ”“ F_strike order 2 bell B2 ”) are included, and if the specific combination is determined as a winning combination, there is a first probability. A privilege granting means (for example, a privilege granting means that can grant a privilege (for example, winning the first bonus) and can grant the privilege with a second probability higher than the first probability when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the winning combination (for example). For example, when the main control circuit 91) and the stop operation are detected, the stop control means (for example, the main control means) capable of stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation according to the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. The stop control means further includes a control circuit 91), and when the first specific combination is determined as a winning combination, the stop control means stops a specific number of the reels out of a predetermined number of the reels. When the first symbol is tempered along the line, the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the second symbol is not tempered, and the second specific combination is determined as the winning combination, a predetermined number of When a specific number of the reels among the reels are stopped, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that both the first symbol and the second symbol are tempered along the line, and the predetermined combination is performed. Is determined as the winning combination, and when a specific number of the reels out of a predetermined number of the reels are stopped, both the first symbol and the second symbol are tempted along the line. Stop the rotation of the reel so that The probability that the specified combination is determined as the winning combination is higher than the probability that the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination.

According to such a game machine, the specific combination has a high probability of being determined as the winning combination, but the expectation of granting the privilege is low, and the predetermined combination has a low probability of being determined as the winning combination, but the benefit is granted. High expectations. Both of these specific roles and predetermined roles may be tempted at the time of the second stop, but if the first specific role among the specific roles is determined as the winning combination, the predetermined role is specified without tempting. Only the role is tempted. For the player, it is not necessary to worry about missing a predetermined role until the first specific role, which has a high probability of winning and it is difficult to expect the privilege to be given, so that the troublesomeness for the stop operation should be reduced. Can be done.

Here, it is conceivable to consider a stop control in which the predetermined combination is not tempted when the specific combination is won, and the predetermined combination is tempted only when the predetermined combination is won. It can be simplified. However, although such stop control is preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the stop operation, the winning combination can be grasped from the shape of the tempted stop roll, and the game becomes monotonous. Not preferable from the viewpoint. That is, when considering the playability, it is preferable that the player can have a feeling of expectation that he / she may play a predetermined role from the shape of the stop roll.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second specific combination among the specific combinations is determined as the winning combination, both the specific combination and the predetermined combination are tempted, so that both are tempted. The appearance frequency of the eyes can be increased by the winning probability of the second specific role. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player has a role in which only the specific role of the first specific role is tempered and a role in which both the specific role and the predetermined role of the second specific role are tempted. While simplifying the stop operation, the player can have a sense of expectation according to the stop result.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a specific number of the reels out of a predetermined number of the reels are stopped, the plurality of combinations include the first symbol and the second symbol along the line. A special role (for example, "F_reach eye lip A1") in which both of the symbols of the above can be tempted and neither the specific combination nor the predetermined combination is won is further included. When the winning combination is determined, the privilege is given with a higher probability than the second probability.

According to such a game machine, if neither a specific role nor a predetermined role wins a prize in a game that is tempted, a privilege based on the special role is given, so that the player can perform when both are tempted. You can play the game with a sense of expectation.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the probability that the first specific combination is determined as the winning combination and the probability that the second specific combination is determined as the winning combination are different. ..

According to such a game machine, it is possible to adjust the frequency of appearance of a stop roll in which only a specific role is tempted and a stop roll in which both a specific role and a predetermined role are tempted, according to the winning probability of each. it can.

[Appendix 34]
The gaming machines of Appendix 34 are as follows.

As a game machine having an AT function, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-169966 provides an advantageous section capable of notifying information that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous section (normal section) not notifying the information. Disclosed is a gaming machine that performs limit processing for forcibly ending an advantageous section regardless of the number of remaining games when the advantageous section continues for a long period of time (for example, when 1500 games have passed).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since the profit obtained by the player during the advantageous section can be kept within a certain range, it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased. However, if the advantageous section is executed a plurality of times in succession, the profit obtained in one advantageous section can be suppressed, but the profit obtained in the total of the multiple times may become excessive. In such a case, the gambling of the game is unnecessarily increased.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately suppressing gambling.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has the variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using a variable display means, and the game used for the game based on the amount of game value given as a result of the game. Whether the number of acquisition differences obtained by subtracting the value amount (for example, the number of difference sheets) can be counted by a counting means (for example, a stop counter) and the number of acquisition differences counted by the counting means exceeds a threshold value (for example, 14,500 sheets). When the determination means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not the game is present and the determination means determine that the acquisition difference number exceeds the threshold value, a stop state is set in which it is impossible to continuously play the game. A stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a stop release means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that releases the stop state and enables the game to continue when a predetermined release condition is satisfied. Further prepared.

According to such a game machine, when the acquisition difference number of the game value after the power is turned on exceeds the threshold value, it becomes impossible to continuously play the game. As a result, even if the range is appropriate for each game, if the total profit (game value) is given, the game can be forcibly stopped, so that the game cannot be played. The profit given to the person is not excessive, and the gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means clears the acquired difference number to 0 when the acquired difference number at the end of the unit game is a negative value.

According to such a game machine, when the acquisition difference number is negative, the stop state can be determined based on the negative time point, so that the profit given to the player is not excessive. , The gambling can be suppressed appropriately.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state in which the game is played includes a bonus state in which the bonus is activated and a non-bonus state in which the bonus is not activated, and the determination means is in the bonus state. Is characterized in that the determination is made at the end of the bonus state without making the determination at the end of the unit game.

According to such a game machine, since the player is not stopped during the bonus state, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, AT) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a non-bonus state in which the bonus is not activated, and the determination means. Is characterized in that, in the non-bonus state, the determination is made at the end of the unit game regardless of whether it is the normal state or the advantageous state.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to put it in a stopped state during an advantageous state that is not a bonus state. Since the duration of such an advantageous state may not be fixed and it is not known how long it will continue, the profit given to the player becomes excessive by stopping the advantageous state even during the advantageous state. It is possible to appropriately suppress gambling without causing a problem.

[Appendix 35]
The gaming machines of Appendix 35 are as follows.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-181226 discloses a gaming machine that irradiates the outer peripheral side of a reel band mounted along the outer peripheral surface of a reel with illumination light from a position (front) facing the front surface of the reel. According to such a game machine, the player can visually recognize the symbol facing the display area among the plurality of symbols arranged on the reel band by the illumination light.

However, in the conventional game machine, the game is monotonous because the amount of illumination light emitted from the front of the reel is constant regardless of the game state.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having intonation by using illumination light emitted from the front of a reel.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and rotates the reels according to a winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. A game machine that advances a game using the reel by stopping and displaying the symbol by stopping, and as a game state in which the game is performed, a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game) and a specific game It has a plurality of gaming states including a state (for example, a bonus state), and when the start condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state, the specific game state can be started, and the end condition is satisfied in the specific game state. And the gaming state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of ending the specific gaming state and shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state, and the outer peripheral surface of the reel can be irradiated from the front surface of the reel. A lighting means (for example, an upper lamp) and a lighting control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of controlling the lighting state of the lighting means are further provided, and the lighting control means is provided in the predetermined gaming state. The lighting means is kept turned off, while the lighting means is kept turned on in the specific gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, the front surface of the reel is continuously illuminated by the lighting means, whereas in a predetermined gaming state, the front surface of the reel is held without being illuminated by the lighting means. Reel. As a result, the amount of illumination light of the reel changes according to the gaming state, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine with intonation.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a lock control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of generating a lock state for stopping the progress of the game at the end of the specific gaming state, and the lighting control means The lighting means is switched from the off state to the lit state at the start of the specific gaming state, and the lighting means is switched from the lit state to the off state when the locked state is released with the end of the specific gaming state. And.

According to such a game machine, since the lighting state of the lighting means can be appropriately switched at the timing corresponding to the transition of the game state, it is possible to provide the game machine with intonation.

[Appendix 36]
The gaming machines of Appendix 36 are as follows.

As a fraudulent act against such a game machine, an external member provided outside the game machine is forcibly removed, and a fraudulent device such as a wire is inserted into the uncasing terminal board exposed at that time to turn on the power supply. Goto acts such as illicit operations are known, and game machine makers are making various efforts against such illicit acts. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-114328 discloses a gaming machine that does not require a design change of the front door and has a simple and inexpensive structure to prevent fraudulent acts by a power supply goto.

By the way, in recent years, not only the power supply is illegally operated, but also the setting value that determines the profit degree of the game machine is illegally operated, and countermeasures against such illegal setting change are required. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of detecting an illegal setting change.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming machine main body (cabinet 61) and a door body portion (front door) attached to the main body, and the game can proceed by changing or stopping a plurality of identification displays. A game machine, the open / close state holding means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) capable of holding the open / closed state of the door body portion at the time of power interruption, and the open / closed state holding means when the setting change is accepted. With reference to the open / closed state of the door body at the time of power failure, an open / close determination means (for example, sub-control circuit 101) for determining whether or not the door body is closed at the time of power failure. The door body portion is characterized by including a number counting means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) capable of counting the number of times that the door body portion is determined to be closed at the time of the power failure due to the setting change. And.

According to such a game machine, the number of times of setting change in which the door body is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change is totaled. Here, in a pachislot machine, the setting can be changed when the setting key (setting key type switch) is turned on while the power is off, and when the setting key is turned on while the power is on, it is simply the current state. You can only check the setting values, but you cannot change the settings. That is, in a pachislot machine, it is necessary to always turn off the power when changing the setting. When a clerk of a game store changes the setting normally, the power is turned off with the door body open. Therefore, in the regular setting change operation, the door body opens when the power is cut off due to the setting change. ing. On the other hand, when the Goto teacher or the like illegally changes the setting, the door body cannot be opened, so that the door body is closed when the power is cut off due to the setting change. Therefore, as in the game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to detect an illegal setting change by totaling the number of times the setting change is performed when the door body is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming machine main body (cabinet 61) and a door body portion (front door) attached to the main body, and advances the game by changing or stopping a plurality of identification displays. An open / closed state holding means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101) that can hold the open / closed state of the door body at the time of power failure, and the open / closed state holding means when a setting change is accepted. Refers to the open / closed state of the door body at the time of power failure, which is held by the door body, and determines whether or not the door body is closed at the time of power failure (for example, a sub-control circuit). 101) and the warning output means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101) capable of outputting predetermined warning information to the outside when the opening / closing determining means determines that the door body portion is closed at the time of the power failure accompanying the setting change. ) And.

According to such a game machine, when the door body is closed at the time of power failure due to the setting change, predetermined warning information is output to the outside, so that an illegal setting change can be detected.

[Appendix 37]
The gaming machines of Appendix 37 are as follows.

In such a game machine, a bet button operated by a player such as a MAX bet button or a 1-bet button is provided, and by operating the bet button, the number of medals corresponding to the operated button is this time. It is set as the number of sheets (number of bets) used for the game. Here, in recent years, a gaming machine having other functions in addition to the function for setting the number of bets on the bet button has been known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-170211 discloses a MAX bet button. A game machine in which a button that functions as a bet button can also function as a button for directing is disclosed.

By the way, even in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the function as a bet button is only one, the MAX bet button is used for MAX bet, and the 1-bet button is used only for 1 bet. For the player, it may be preferable to make the number of bets different, so it is not enough to add other functions as in the above-mentioned game machine, and there is room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of unprecedented bet control by using one bet button.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using the above, and as a game state in which a game is played, a first bet number (for example, 2 BET) and the first A bet operation means (for example, MAX) that has a predetermined gaming state (for example, a non-notification state) capable of playing a second bet number (for example, 3 BET) larger than the number of bets and can accept a bet operation by a player. The bet button 11) and a bet control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining the number of bets in the current game when the bet operation means accepts the bet operation are further provided, and the bet control means is provided. When the bet operation means accepts the bet operation in the predetermined gaming state in which a game value larger than the second bet number is stored, the first bet number can be determined as the bet number of the current game. It is characterized by being.

According to such a game machine, when the bet operation means is operated in a predetermined gaming state in which both the first bet number and the second bet number can be played, the first bet number and the second bet number Either one can be determined as the number of bets for this game. Since a plurality of bets can be determined by using one bet operation means in this way, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, unprecedented bet control can be performed by using one bet operation means.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined gaming state is composed of a first section (first lottery state) and a second section (second lottery state), and the bet control means is the second bet. When the bet operation means accepts the bet operation in the first section of the predetermined gaming state in which more game values than the number are stored, the second bet number can be determined as the bet number of the current game. When the bet operation means accepts the bet operation in the second section of the predetermined gaming state in which a game value larger than the second bet number is stored, the bet number of the current game is the same. The feature is that the number of first bets can be determined.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform unprecedented bet control by using one bet operation means as in the above-mentioned game machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as a gaming state in which a game is played, a specific gaming state (for example, a notification state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state is further provided, and the predetermined gaming state In the first section, when the transition determining means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the transition determining means shift to the specific gaming state When determined, a game state control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of shifting the game state to the specific game state from the first section of the predetermined game state via the second section is used. Further prepared.

According to such a gaming machine, until the transition to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player is determined, the game of the second bet number is performed, and after the transition to the specific gaming state is determined. In the waiting section (second section) until the transition to the specific gaming state, the game with the first bet number smaller than the second bet number is played, so that one bet operation means is performed in the same manner as the above-mentioned game machine. Allows unprecedented bet control using.

[Appendix 38-Appendix 44]
The gaming machines of Appendix 38 to Appendix 44 are as follows.

In the game machine, a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player are set, and a wave of balls is generated according to the set values. By the way, in the conventional game machine, a setting value of 6 steps is provided as such a setting value, but since a large number of setting values leads to an increase in data capacity and an increase in the burden of design and development, the installation value has been increased in recent years. A game machine with a reduced number of is also known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-064539 discloses a gaming machine provided with four-step setting values of "1", "4", "6" and "H".

However, even in such a game machine, the ball ejection wave is still generated according to the set value, and there is a demand for a gaming machine capable of producing the ball ejection wave regardless of the set value. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of producing a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of a set value.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 38 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is determined from a variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means according to the winning combination, and the plurality of winning combinations are determined as winning combinations. It has only one set value as a set value that determines the winning probability to be played, and the winning probability that the replay winning combination among the winning probabilities of the plurality of winning combinations determined by the one setting value is determined as the winning combination can be changed. RT control means (for example, main control circuit 91) capable of shifting the current RT state to another RT state when the transition conditions are satisfied, and a privilege (for example, a privilege (for example) for the player. For example, the privilege granting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of granting the AT) is further provided, and the privilege granting means grants the privilege with a probability according to the current RT state. ..

According to such a game machine, there is only one set value as a set value, but since the probability of granting the privilege is different depending on the RT state, the player's degree of advantage (outgoing) according to the RT state. The ball wave) can be different. In other words, the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of RT states are characterized in that the winning probabilities in which the re-gaming combination is determined as the winning combination are substantially the same.

If there is a large difference in the winning probabilities that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination in multiple RT states, the frequency with which the re-game is activated also changes significantly, so the wave of balls to be ejected is different from the viewpoint of the re-game operation. become. In such a case, the player can estimate the degree of advantage from the frequency at which the re-game is activated, and as a result of easily finding out the advantages and disadvantages, the bias of the operation becomes remarkable, which is not preferable. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the winning probabilities in which the replaying combination is determined as the winning combination in a plurality of RT states are substantially the same, the degree of advantage is estimated from the frequency at which the replaying combination is activated. It becomes difficult. As a result, the pseudo set value determined according to the RT state can be made difficult to understand from the appearance (operation of re-game) like the set value in the conventional game machine, and has the conventional multi-step setting value. It is possible to make the player feel the same playability as the game machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of RT states include a specific RT state (for example, a non-RT state) and a predetermined number of predetermined RT states (for example, RT1 state to RT7 state), and the RT. As a result display that triggers a state transition, the RT control means has the predetermined number of RT transition result displays (for example, RT2 transition symbol to RT7 transition symbol) corresponding to each of the predetermined number of predetermined RT states. When the RT transition result display is derived, the RT state can be shifted to the predetermined RT state of the type corresponding to the derived RT transition result display, and the game control means can shift the RT state to the plurality of RT states. Each of the above is characterized in that all of the predetermined number of RT transition result displays can be derived.

In a gaming machine in which the pseudo set value and the RT state correspond to each other, it is not preferable that the current RT state is specified because the pseudo set value is specified. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since all of the predetermined number of RT transition result displays can be derived in each of the plurality of RT states, it is possible to make it difficult to identify the current RT state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the pseudo set value (current RT state).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the RT transition result display is derived in the specific RT state, the RT control means has the predetermined RT state of the type corresponding to the derived RT transition result display. On the other hand, in the predetermined RT state, even if the RT transition result display is derived, the RT state is maintained as the current RT state without shifting to another RT state. It is characterized by.

According to such a game machine, the RT state basically shifts by deriving the result display that triggers the transition, but while the result display can be derived during the predetermined RT state, this result display can be derived. Even if the result display is derived, the current RT state is maintained without shifting the RT state. As a result, since the derivation of the result display that triggers the transition does not match the current RT state, it is possible to prevent the pseudo set value (current RT state) from being specified by the player. ..

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from It has a re-game combination related to the operation of the game, a small combination related to the granting of the game value, and a bonus combination related to the operation of the bonus state, and the winning probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination among the plurality of combinations. The RT control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of shifting the current RT state to another RT state when the transition condition is satisfied, and the player. A privilege granting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of granting a privilege (for example, AT) and a small winning combination probability variation in which the winning probability in which the small winning combination is determined as a winning combination among the plurality of winning combinations can be changed. A means (for example, a main control circuit 91) is further provided, the privilege giving means grants the privilege with a probability according to the current RT state, and the small winning combination probability changing means activates the bonus state. Only in the case, the small winning combination is characterized in that the winning probability determined as the winning combination can be changed.

In the game machine, the winning probability of the small winning combination related to the addition of the game value can be changed only under limited conditions such as when the bonus is activated or the set value is changed. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the winning probability of the small winning combination changes only when the bonus state is activated, the RT state can be used as a pseudo setting value as described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 39 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is determined from a variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means according to the winning combination, which is an advantageous stop operation mode for the player. Has a specific state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing a notification state (for example, pseudo bonus (AT)) capable of notifying the player, and a re-gaming combination among the plurality of combinations is used as a winning combination. A specific RT state (for example, a non-RT state) and a plurality of predetermined RT states (for example, RT1 to RT7 states) are set as RT states in which the determined winning probability can be changed, and when the transition condition is satisfied, An RT control means that can shift the current RT state to another RT state (for example, the main control circuit 91) and a privilege giving means that can give a privilege related to the notification state with a probability according to the current RT state (for example). , Main control circuit 91) and when the number of games executed in the specific state reaches the limit threshold value (for example, 1500 times), the specific state is terminated regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued. Further, the RT control means further includes a limit control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for terminating the notification state, and the RT control means derives a result display that triggers a transition to the RT state in the specific RT state. , The RT state is shifted to a predetermined RT state of a type according to the derived result display, and when the number of games executed in the plurality of predetermined RT states reaches the end threshold value, the specific RT state is changed from the predetermined RT state. The RT state is shifted to, and the number of games played according to the end threshold value of the predetermined RT state is larger than the number of games played according to the limit threshold value of the specific state.

According to such a game machine, since the probability of granting the privilege regarding the notification state differs depending on the RT state, the frequency of the notification state differs depending on the RT state. As a result, the degree of advantage of the player (wave of the ball output) differs depending on the RT state, and the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value.
Here, in recent game machines, an upper limit (limiter) is set in the period (advantageous section) in which the notification state can be executed so that the notification state does not continue for a long period of time. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the duration of the RT state used as the pseudo setting value is set longer than the upper limit of the specific state (advantageous section). As a result, the wave of the ball that is determined according to the RT state can be maintained for a period of a sufficient length, so that the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the end threshold value of the plurality of predetermined RT states is different for each predetermined RT state.

According to such a game machine, since the period of the predetermined RT state is different for each predetermined RT state, the period in which the pseudo set value is maintained can be made different according to the pseudo set value. For example, the pseudo setting value that is advantageous to the player can be set to be short so that the profit given to the player is not excessive.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the result display that triggers the transition of the RT state is not only the specific RT state but also a result display that can be derived not only in the specific RT state but also in at least a part of the plurality of predetermined RT states. The RT control means does not shift the RT state to another RT state even when the result display that triggers the transition of the RT state is derived in the plurality of predetermined RT states, and the current RT It is characterized by maintaining the state as it is.

According to such a game machine, the RT state basically shifts by deriving the result display that triggers the transition, but while the result display can be derived during the predetermined RT state, this result display can be derived. Even if the result display is derived, the current RT state is maintained without shifting the RT state. Here, in a gaming machine in which the pseudo set value and the RT state correspond to each other, it is not preferable that the current RT state is specified because the pseudo set value is specified. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the derivation of the result display that triggers the transition does not match the current RT state, a pseudo set value (current RT state) is given to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being identified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the plurality of predetermined RT states, the RT control means until the number of games executed in the predetermined RT state reaches the end threshold value unless a predetermined initialization process is executed. It is characterized in that the current RT state is maintained without shifting to another RT state.

According to such a game machine, the predetermined RT state is maintained until the number of games reaches the end threshold value, so that the wave of balls that is determined according to the RT state is maintained for a sufficiently long period of time. Therefore, the RT state can be used as a pseudo setting value.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the current RT state is not notified to the player.

According to such a game machine, since the RT state is not notified at all, it is possible to prevent the pseudo set value (current RT state) from being specified by the player.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 40 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is determined from a variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means according to the winning combination, and a replay of the plurality of combinations. An RT control means (for example, main) capable of shifting the current RT state to another RT state when the winning combination has a plurality of RT states in which the winning probability determined as the winning combination can be changed and the transition condition is satisfied. A control circuit 91), a counting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of counting specific numerical information according to the number of games executed in the same RT state without shifting to another RT state, and a privilege grant. A first determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining one granting state from a plurality of granting states (for example, zones) having different expectations, and the one determined by the first determining means. With a privilege granting means (for example, main control circuit 91) that can determine whether or not to grant a privilege (for example, AT) according to the granting state, and if it is determined to grant the privilege, the privilege can be granted to the player. , And further possesses a plurality of grant state determination information (for example, MAP) that defines the grant state in association with the specific numerical information, and the regulation contents are different from each other. A second determination means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of determining one grant state determination information from the plurality of grant state determination information according to the RT state of the above is further provided, and the first determination means is said. The one granting state determination information is characterized in that the granting state associated with the specific numerical information counted by the counting means is determined as the one granting state.

According to such a game machine, the granting of the privilege is performed according to the granting state, and the granting state is determined according to the granting state determination information determined according to the current RT state. Therefore, the probability of granting the privilege will differ depending on the RT state (for determining the grant state determination information for determining the grant state), and therefore the degree of advantage of the player (wave of the ball output) according to the RT state. ) Can be different. In other words, the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the expectation of privilege grant can be changed between a normal section (for example, a normal section) in which the expectation of privilege grant cannot be changed when staying and the expectation of privilege grant when staying. It has an advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section), and it is possible to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100), and when the end condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, the normal section is satisfied. A state control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of shifting to a section is further provided, and the first determination means is selected from the plurality of grant states only in the advantageous section of the normal section and the advantageous section. One granting state can be determined, and each of the plurality of granting state determining means defines the granting state for each of the specific numerical information (for example, 400 games) in a predetermined range, and the predetermined range is the usual. It is characterized in that it is larger than the reciprocal of the predetermined probability, which is the transition probability from the section to the advantageous section.

According to such a game machine, the interval of the granting state (number of games) that determines the degree of expectation of privilege granting is longer than the transition interval from the normal section to the advantageous section (the reciprocal of the transition probability). Therefore, even if the person is staying in the normal section, it can be expected that the section will shift to the advantageous section once before the grant state is switched.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the plurality of combinations have only one set value as a set value for determining the winning probability determined as the winning combination.

According to such a game machine, although the actual set value has only one step set value, it is possible to give a behavior having a pseudo multi-step set value by using the RT state. ..

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as a state related to the game, a predetermined gaming state (for example, a non-notification state) in which the privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means and the privilege are granted by the privilege granting means. A game that has a specific gaming state (for example, a notification state (pseudo-bonus)) that can be stayed when the game is played, and the counting means is executed in the predetermined gaming state without shifting to the specific gaming state. The predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the number of times can be counted, and the predetermined numerical value information counted by the counting means can be notified to the player, but the specific numerical value information counted by the counting means is to the player. It is characterized in that it is not notified.

Since the granting state that determines the degree of expectation of privilege granting is associated with the specific numerical value information, the player can guess whether or not the situation is advantageous when the specific numerical value information is notified. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, predetermined numerical information is notified without notifying the player of the specific numerical information. As a result, the player can grasp the number of games (the number of addictive games) since the previous privilege was given, and therefore guesses whether the pseudo set value (RT state) is an advantageous RT state. It is possible to provide a loose guessing factor.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the RT control means shifts to another RT state until the number of games executed in the current RT state reaches the end threshold value unless a predetermined initialization process is executed. It is characterized by maintaining the current RT state.

According to such a game machine, the RT state is maintained until the number of games reaches the end threshold value, so that the wave of balls that is determined according to the RT state can be maintained for a sufficiently long period of time. Therefore, the RT state can be used as a pseudo setting value.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 41 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is determined from a variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means according to the winning combination, which is an advantageous stop operation mode for the player. Has a notification state (for example, pseudo-bonus (AT)) that can notify the player, and the winning probability that the re-gaming combination among the plurality of combinations is determined as the winning combination is set as a variable RT state. , It has a specific RT state (for example, non-RT state) and a plurality of predetermined RT states (for example, RT1 to RT7 states), and when the transition condition is satisfied, the current RT state can be shifted to another RT state. RT control means (for example, main control circuit 91), privilege giving means (for example, main control circuit 91) capable of giving a privilege related to the notification state with a probability according to the current RT state, and a carry-over combination (for example). , "F_BB") is determined as the winning combination, and if the specific result display corresponding to the carry-over combination is not derived, the carry-over combination is used as the winning combination until the specific result display is derived. When the carry-over means (for example, the main control circuit 91), the disallowed state which is disadvantageous to the player when the specific result display is derived, and the specific result display are derived. In addition, the permission state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that can control the permission state that does not become the disadvantageous state (for example, disadvantageous if the specialization is not won, and advantageous if the specialization is won). The RT control means is derived when the result display that triggers the transition to the RT state is derived in the specific RT state in the non-carry-over state in which the carry-over combination is not carried over as the winning combination. While shifting the RT state to the predetermined RT state of the type according to the result display, the specific RT state of the carry-over state in which the carry-over combination is carried over as the winning combination, the predetermined RT state of the carry-over state, and the non-carry-over state. In the predetermined RT state of the carry-over state, when the result display that triggers the transition of the RT state is derived, the RT state is maintained as the current RT state without shifting to another RT state, and the above-mentioned When the number of games executed in the predetermined RT state reaches the end threshold value, the RT state is shifted from the predetermined RT state to the specific RT state regardless of whether it is in the carry-over state or the non-carry-over state, and the permission is given. State system When the carry-over combination is determined as the winning combination in the non-carry-over state, the means sets the non-permission state, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific RT state of the carry-over state, the non-permission state is changed to the non-permission state. It is characterized in that the non-permitted state is updated to the permitted state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined RT state in the carry-over state.

According to such a game machine, since the probability of granting the privilege is different depending on the RT state, the degree of advantage of the player (wave of the ball output) can be changed according to the RT state. In other words, the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transition from the specific RT state to the predetermined RT state is performed according to the derived result display, but this transition is performed in the non-carry-over state in which the carry-over combination is not carried over as the winning combination. It is possible only, and it cannot be performed in the carry-over state in which the carry-over role is carried over as the winning role. Therefore, in order to shift to the RT state, it is necessary to derive a specific result display according to the carry-over combination and put it in the non-carry-over state during the carry-over state. Basically, the disallowed state is set, and the derivation of a specific result display is unfavorably controlled. As a result, the carry-over state is basically maintained, and the transition to the RT state is also restricted. On the other hand, when the state is changed from the non-permitted state to the permitted state, the derivation of a specific result display is not disadvantageous, and as a result, the carry-over state can be canceled and the RT state can be changed. Here, when the RT state is used as a pseudo set value as described above, the transition of the RT state corresponds to the change of the pseudo set value, but the carry-over state is canceled and the state is changed to the non-carry-over state. If it is permitted to shift to the RT state, the pseudo set value (RT state of the migration destination) can also be set by grasping the result display that triggers the transition of the RT state derived after canceling the carry-over state. I can grasp it.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the predetermined RT state, regardless of whether it is in the carry-over state or the non-carry-over state, even if the result display that triggers the transition to the RT state is derived, the RT Maintain state without transition. Then, not only the specific RT state that can shift the RT state when the result display that triggers the transition of the RT state is derived, but also the predetermined RT that maintains the RT state without shifting when the result display is derived. Even in the state, the carry-over state can be canceled by controlling the non-permitted state to the permitted state. As a result, even if the carry-over state is released to the non-carry-over state and then the result display that triggers the transition to the RT state is derived, if the RT state in the game is the specific RT state, The state shifts to the predetermined RT state according to the result display, but when the RT state in the game is the predetermined RT state, the current RT state is maintained, so that the RT state is derived from the derived result display. Will not be grasped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the pseudo set value while using the RT state as the pseudo set value.

Further, when the game machine according to the present invention is updated from the non-permitted state to the permitted state by the permitted state control means, it is possible to urge the player to derive the specific result display. It is characterized by further including means (for example, a display unit 100).

According to such a game machine, when the non-permitted state is updated to the permitted state, the derivation of a specific result display is promoted, so that the carry-over state can be canceled and the non-carry-over state can be set, and as a result, then It is possible to shift the RT state (in a specific RT state).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific RT state is an RT state in which the probability of granting a privilege related to the notification state is low.

The carry-over state is not released unless a specific result display is derived, and the specific RT state is maintained unless the carry-over state is released. Therefore, when the specific RT state is an RT state that is advantageous to the player, a specific RT state is specified. By continuing to avoid deriving the result display, a favorable state for the player is maintained. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by setting the specific RT state to the RT state which is disadvantageous to the player, the player derives a specific result display immediately after the unauthorized state is updated to the permitted state. Therefore, the playability of a pseudo set value using the RT state can be appropriately used.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 42 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means, and a replay combination among the plurality of combinations is determined as a winning combination. When a specific RT state (for example, RT7 state for setting) and a plurality of predetermined RT states (for example, RT1 to RT6 states) are set as RT states in which the winning probability can be changed and the winning combination is determined. A plurality of result displays (for example, RT1 transition lip to RT6 transition lip) are associated as derivable result displays, and any of these multiple result displays depending on the mode of the stop operation when the winning combination is determined. It has a specific combination (for example, "F_6 selection replay") from which the result display can be derived, and at least two or more result displays of the plurality of result displays associated with the specific combination are each result. When the display is derived in the specific RT state, it is a plurality of RT transition result displays that can shift to the predetermined RT states that are different from each other, and when the RT transition result display is derived in the specific RT state, the said. An RT control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of shifting to the predetermined RT state corresponding to the RT transition result display derived from the specific RT state is further provided, and in a plurality of the predetermined RT states, per unit game. It is characterized by different expected values of the balance of game value.

According to such a game machine, in order to make the expected value of the balance of the game value per unit game different according to the predetermined RT state, if the player's degree of advantage (wave of balls) is different according to the predetermined RT state. Can be made. In other words, the predetermined RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value.
Further, the RT transition result display is derived to the predetermined RT state, and the RT transition result display is derived according to the mode of the stop operation in the game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. The clerk of the amusement store can set a pseudo set value depending on the mode of the stop operation at the time of winning a specific role.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means, and a replay combination among the plurality of combinations is used as a winning combination. A specific RT state (for example, RT7 state for setting) and a plurality of predetermined RT states (for example, RT1 to RT6 states) are set as RT states in which the determined winning probability can be changed, and the winning combination is determined. A plurality of result displays (for example, RT1 transition lip to RT6 transition lip) are associated as derivable result displays, and when the winning combination is determined, these multiple result displays are displayed according to the mode of the stop operation. It has a specific combination (for example, "F_6 selection replay") from which any of the result displays can be derived, and at least two or more result displays among the plurality of result displays associated with the specific combination are each. Is a plurality of RT transition result displays that can shift to the predetermined RT states that are different from each other when the result display is derived in the specific RT state, and the RT transition result display is derived in the specific RT state. The RT control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of shifting to the predetermined RT state corresponding to the RT transition result display derived from the specific RT state, and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player are described by the player. A privilege granting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of granting a privilege relating to a notification state (for example, AT) that can be notified to the user is further provided, and in the plurality of predetermined RT states, the privilege granting means is said. It is characterized in that the probability of granting a privilege related to the notification state is different.

According to such a game machine, the probability of giving a privilege regarding the notification state differs depending on the predetermined RT state. Therefore, as in the above-mentioned game machine, the player's degree of advantage (wave of ball output) depends on the predetermined RT state. ) Can be different. In other words, the predetermined RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value. In addition, this pseudo set value can be set according to the mode of the stop operation at the time of winning a specific combination.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the specific result display corresponding to the carry-over combination is not derived in the unit game in which the carry-over combination (for example, the bonus combination) is determined as the winning combination, the specific result display is described. Is further provided with a carry-over means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of carrying over the carry-over combination as the winning combination, and the RT control means carries over the carry-over combination as the winning combination. Even when the RT transition result display is derived, the RT state is maintained as the current RT state without shifting to another RT state.

According to such a game machine, the transition of the RT state based on the RT transition result display cannot be performed in the carry-over state in which the carry-over combination is carried over as the winning combination. Therefore, for example, the RT state can be maintained by playing the game so as to avoid the derivation of the specific result display corresponding to the carry-over combination, and the pseudo set value is frequently updated in a short period of time. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 43 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means, and the plurality of combinations include a plurality of bonus combinations (for example, BB1 to Bonus control that can start the bonus state when BB6) is included and the result display corresponding to the bonus combination is derived, and can end the bonus state when the end condition is satisfied in the bonus state. In the means (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination, if the result display corresponding to the bonus combination is not derived, the bonus is derived until the result display is derived. The carry-over means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of carrying over the winning combination as the winning combination is further provided, and the expected value of the balance of the game value per unit game is the bonus carried over as the winning combination by the carry-over means. It is characterized in that the plurality of combinations have only one set value as a set value for determining the winning probability determined as the winning combination, which differs depending on the type of combination.

According to such a game machine, there is only one set value as a set value, but the expected value of the balance of the game value per unit game differs depending on the type of bonus role carried over as the winning combination. .. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the player (wave of the ball output) can be different depending on the type of carry-over combination carried over in the carry-over state, and the type of carry-over state can be used as a pseudo setting value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the carry-over state in which the bonus combination is carried over as the winning combination by the carry-over means, a bonus for controlling the start of the bonus state according to the carried-over bonus combination is impossible. It is characterized by further providing a sealing means.

According to such a game machine, when the bonus combination is carried over to the carry-over state, it is impossible to derive the result display corresponding to the carried-over bonus combination, so that the carry-over state is maintained. As a result, in a gaming machine that uses the type of carry-over state as a pseudo set value, the game can be continued while maintaining the pseudo set value.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined operation is accepted, the carry-over means can clear the bonus combination carried over as the winning combination and control the bonus combination to a non-carry-over state in which the bonus combination is not carried over. It is characterized by further including an initialization means (for example, a main control circuit 91).

According to such a game machine, by clearing the carry-over bonus combination, the pseudo setting value can also be cleared, and a new pseudo setting value can be set.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, each of the plurality of bonus combinations is determined as a winning combination with substantially the same probability in a non-carryover state in which the bonus combination is not carried over.

According to such a game machine, a plurality of pseudo set values can be set with substantially the same probability.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 44 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means, and the plurality of combinations are determined as winning combinations. When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode, a specific result display (for example, an RT transition symbol to the previous stage) can be derived, and when the stop operation is performed in a mode different from the specific mode, the specific result display (for example, the RT transition symbol to the previous stage) can be derived. A plurality of specific combinations (for example, "F_RT1 medium rip_123" to "F_RT4 medium rip_321") from which a result display different from the result display can be derived are included, and the probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination is different. When the RT state has a plurality of stages of RT states including a specific RT state (for example, RT5 state) and the specific result display is derived, the RT state is changed to the RT state of a stage prior to the current RT state. A shiftable RT control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege regarding a notification state (for example, AT) capable of notifying the player of a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player. (For example, the main control circuit 91) is further provided, and the privilege granting means grants the privilege so that the expectation regarding the grant of the privilege becomes the first expectation at a stage prior to the specific RT state. Is controlled, and in the specific RT state, the granting of the privilege is controlled so as to have a second expectation degree different from the first expectation degree.

According to such a game machine, when the stop operation can be performed in a specific mode at the time of winning a specific combination, the RT state advances to the RT state of the previous stage. Then, the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits related to the notification state differs between the RT state and the specific RT state in the stage before the specific RT state, so when the specific RT state can be reached, a different output is obtained. You can create a wave of balls.

Further, when the gaming machine according to the present invention has a specific state (for example, an advantageous section) in which the notification state can be executed and the number of games executed in the specific state reaches the limit threshold value (for example, 1500 times). The RT control means further includes a limit control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that terminates the notification state by terminating the specific state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued. In the specific RT state, when the number of games executed in the specific RT state reaches the end threshold value, the RT state is shifted from the specific RT state to the RT state at a stage before the specific RT state, and the specific RT state is changed. The number of games played according to the end threshold value of the RT state is larger than the number of games played according to the limit threshold value of the specific state.

In recent game machines, an upper limit (limiter) is set in the period (advantageous section) in which the notification state can be executed so that the notification state does not continue for a long period of time. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the duration of the specific RT state in which the ball ejection wave becomes a wave corresponding to another set value is set longer than the upper limit of the specific state (advantageous section). As a result, the specific RT state can be maintained for a sufficient period of time, so that the specific RT state can be used as a pseudo set value.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is further provided with a setting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. In the RT state at a stage prior to the specific RT state, the privilege granting means grants the privilege according to the set value set by the setting means, and in the specific RT state, the privilege granting means is set by the setting means. It is characterized in that the above-mentioned privilege is given according to a set value different from the set value.

According to such a game machine, the privilege regarding the notification state is basically given according to the set value, so that the wave of the ball is created according to the set value. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the RT state can reach a specific RT state, a privilege related to the notification state is given according to a set value different from the set set value. , When a specific RT state can be reached, it is possible to create a wave of balls that is different from the set value. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific RT state can be used as a pseudo set value, and the specific RT state can be used to create a wave of balls that has nothing to do with the current set value. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the result display corresponding to the special combination (for example, SB) is derived in the non-special state (for example, non-bonus state), the special state (for example, bonus state (SB)) is derived. ), And when one unit game is performed in the special state, a state control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of ending the special state and starting the non-special state. Further prepared, the expected value of the balance of game value per unit game in the special state is lower than the expected value of the balance of game value per unit game in the non-special state, and the special combination is determined as the winning combination. It is a feature that the winning combination is not carried over to the winning combination after the next game when the corresponding result display is not derived in the game.

Generally, a gaming machine having an AT function has a bonus state that is disadvantageous to the player, and the basic game is performed during the carry-over state (between the flags) in which the bonus role for activating this bonus state is carried over. It is supposed to be. By the way, since the transition of the RT state is restricted during the period between the flags, the conventional gaming machine is not preferable for the playability that presupposes the transition of the RT state. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a special state disadvantageous to the player is realized by a special role (SB (single bonus)) that is not carried over as a winning combination. As a result, the AT function can be realized as in the conventional game machine even in the game playability premised on the transition of the RT state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a notification state control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of controlling the notification state and the non-notification state according to the presence or absence of the privilege, and a notification target combination in the notification state. Further provided with a notification means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player when the (for example, push order bell) is determined as the winning combination. The notification state control means can control the notification state and the non-notification state in any of the plurality of stages of RT states, and the notification target combination is the same in all of the plurality of stages of RT states. It is characterized by being a role.

As described above, when the specific RT state can be reached, the wave of the ball output will be different from that up to that point, but in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification state is controlled in any of the plurality of stages of RT state. It is possible, and since the notification target combination is the same combination in all of the RT states of the plurality of stages, the player can proceed with the game without being aware of the current RT state. Further, during the specific RT state, the notification state can be performed in the specific RT state, so that the state in which the waves of the balls are ejected can be continued.

[Appendix 45]
The gaming machines of Appendix 45 are as follows.

In such a game machine, a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player are set, and a wave of balls to be ejected is created according to the set values. By the way, in the conventional game machine, a setting value of 6 steps is provided as such a setting value, but since a large number of setting values leads to an increase in data capacity and an increase in the burden of design and development, the installation value has been increased in recent years. A game machine with a reduced number of is also known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-064539 discloses a gaming machine provided with four-step setting values of "1", "4", "6" and "H".

By the way, in order to reduce the data capacity and the burden of design development, it is preferable to set the set value in one step, but when the set value is set in one step, the process of changing the set value becomes unnecessary. Here, the conventional game machine is provided with an operation unit for changing the set value, but in the game machine that does not require the change of the set value, this operation unit is also unnecessary. However, in a game machine, removing this operation unit also requires a change in the manufacturing method, which in turn leads to an increase in the burden.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of effectively utilizing unnecessary processing.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 45 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that advances a game by using variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays. That is, the setting operation receiving means (for example, the setting key type switch 430) capable of accepting the operation related to the setting value that defines the degree of advantage for the player and the setting operation receiving means accepting the operation. Correspondingly, the processing control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of executing a predetermined process is provided, and the processing control means changes the set value when the setting operation receiving means receives the operation. It is characterized in that a predetermined initialization process is executed on the game information related to the game without any problem.

Such a game machine has a setting operation receiving means capable of accepting an operation related to a set value, but when the setting operation receiving means accepts an operation, a predetermined initialization is performed without changing the set value. Execute the process. As a result, it is not necessary to remove the setting operation receiving means, and a predetermined initialization process is executed instead of the setting change process, so that unnecessary processes can be effectively utilized.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is characterized in that it has only one set value as the set value.

According to such a game machine, a predetermined initialization process is executed instead of the unnecessary setting change process, so that the unnecessary process can be effectively utilized.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that advances a game using the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations, and is a re-game of the plurality of combinations. An RT control means (for example, main) capable of shifting the current RT state to another RT state when the winning combination has a plurality of RT states in which the winning probability determined as the winning combination can be changed and the transition condition is satisfied. The control circuit 91) is further provided with a privilege granting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of granting a privilege to the player with a probability according to the current RT state.

According to such a game machine, since the probability of granting the privilege is different depending on the RT state, the degree of advantage of the player (wave of the ball output) can be changed according to the RT state. In other words, the RT state can be used as a pseudo set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to create a wave of balls to be ejected regardless of the set value.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of RT states have an initial RT state and a plurality of predetermined RT states, and the RT control means serves as a trigger for shifting the RT state in the initial RT state. When the result display is derived, the RT state is shifted to the predetermined RT state of the type corresponding to the derived result display, and the number of games executed in the plurality of predetermined RT states is the plurality of predetermined RTs. When the end threshold value determined for each of the states is reached, the RT state is shifted from the predetermined RT state to the initial RT state, while in the plurality of predetermined RT states, the result that triggers the transition of the RT state. Even when the display is derived, the RT state is maintained as the current RT state without shifting to another RT state, and when the initialization process is executed by the process control means, RT It is characterized in that the initial RT state is determined as the state.

When the RT state is used as a pseudo set value as described above, the transition of the RT state corresponds to the change of the pseudo set value, but from the initial RT state as in the game machine according to the present invention. In a gaming machine that shifts to a plurality of predetermined RT states, the initial RT state functions as a setting RT state for setting a pseudo setting value. Then, by determining the initial RT state as the RT state in the predetermined initialization process, when the setting operation receiving means accepts the operation, the RT state for setting can be set, and then a pseudo setting is performed. You can set the value.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the RT control means does not shift the RT state to another RT state even when the initialization process is executed by the process control means, and the current RT It is characterized by maintaining the state as it is.

According to such a game machine, in a game machine that uses the RT state as a pseudo set value, it is possible to control the pseudo set value to be maintained (deferred).

[Appendix 46]
The gaming machines of Appendix 46 are as follows.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

As game machines having an AT function, so-called ART machines and AT machines are known. In AT machines, for example, a bonus prize is awarded during a carry-over state (inter-flag state) in which a bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination. By continuing to avoid it, the carry-over state is maintained in both the non-notification state and the notification state, and by switching the presence / absence of notification during the carry-over state, the notification state and the non-notification state are switched. As such an AT machine, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083245 describes a game machine that makes it difficult to win a bonus and allows both a non-notification state (normal game) and a notification state (AT game) to be carried out in a carry-over state. It is disclosed.

By the way, in the conventional AT machine, in the normal game and the AT game, the bonus is contained so as not to win a prize, and the bonus cannot be used for the playability and the production.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of meaningfully using a bonus in a specification for playing a game exclusively in a bonus carry-over state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 46 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is determined from a variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means according to the winning combination, which is advantageous for the player as a state related to notification. It has a notification state (for example, pseudo-bonus (AT)) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation, and a normal state (for example, general (non-AT)) in which the frequency of the notification is lower than that of the notification state. A bonus control means (for example, a main control circuit) that can start the bonus state when the result display corresponding to the bonus combination is derived and can end the bonus state when the end condition is satisfied in the bonus state. 91) In the unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination, if the result display corresponding to the bonus combination is not derived, the bonus combination can be carried over as the winning combination until the result display is derived. Specified when the carry-over means (for example, the main control circuit 91), the privilege granting means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of granting the privilege related to the notification state, and the privilege granting means grant the privilege. The notification state can be executed in a specific carry-over state (for example, between BB flags) in which a bonus combination (for example, "F_BB") is carried over as a winning combination, and when the privilege is not given, the specific carry-over state When the notification state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of executing the normal state and a specific condition (for example, special winning) are satisfied in the specific carry-over state, the winning combination is carried over. While encouraging the derivation of a specific result display according to the specific bonus combination, at least the period from the start of the bonus state that starts with the derivation of the specific result display until the specific bonus combination is determined again as the winning combination. The special state control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) that can be controlled as a special state (for example, specialization) is further provided, and the privilege giving means is the normal state and the notification during the period during the special state. It is characterized in that the granting of the privilege regarding the notification state is controlled so as to be more advantageous to the player than the period during the state.

According to such a game machine, both the normal state and the notification state can be executed in the specific carry-over state in which the specific bonus combination is carried over as the winning combination, so that the game is exclusively performed in the specific carry-over state. Then, when a specific condition is satisfied in the specific carry-over state, the derivation of a specific result display according to the specific bonus combination is promoted, and the specific result display is specified from the start of the bonus state that starts with the derivation of the specific result display. The period until the bonus combination is determined again as the winning combination is controlled as a special state. At this time, since it is advantageous for the player to give the privilege related to the notification state during this special state, the specific bonus combination carried over in the specific carry-over state, which is the basic game period, can be meaningfully used.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the bonus combination, a predetermined bonus combination (for example, "F_RB") different from the specific bonus combination is further provided, and the special state control means is the specific state in the special state. When the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the winning combination before the bonus combination, the special is also in the bonus state (for example, type 1 RB) that starts with the derivation of the predetermined result display corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination. It is characterized by being controlled as a state.

According to such a game machine, if a predetermined bonus combination is won before the specific carry-over state is reached again after the specific carry-over state, which is the basic game period, is canceled and the non-carry-over state is released, this predetermined It will be in a special state even during the bonus state according to the bonus role. As a result, not only the specific bonus combination that triggers the specific carry-over state, which is the basic game period, but also the predetermined bonus combination can be meaningfully used.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the expected value of the balance of game value per unit game during the period during the special state is higher than the expected value of the balance of game value per unit game during the period during the notification state. It is characterized by being low.

According to such a game machine, during the period in the specific state, the expectation of the privilege grant regarding the notification state is higher than in the notification state, but the expected value of the balance of the game value per unit game is higher than in the notification state. Since it is low, it does not give an excessive profit to the player.

[Appendix 47]
The gaming machines of Appendix 47 are as follows.

Regarding reel stop control, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200497 states that a gaming machine is designed to pull in as much as possible within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces of symbols constituting the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Is disclosed. According to such a game machine, if the corresponding combination of symbols is aimed at, the combination of symbols according to the winning combination can be surely arranged, so that a fair game can be realized.

By the way, the skill of the stop operation (so-called eye-pressing force) differs depending on the player, and it is preferable to control the stop operation so as not to be significantly disadvantageous even for a beginner who cannot aim at the corresponding combination of symbols. More specifically, if you win a bonus role that is carried over as an internal winning role until you win a prize, the skill of a skilled person who can immediately arrange the bonus role and a beginner who can not easily arrange the bonus role There is a risk that the difference will have a large effect on the ball output.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not become significantly disadvantageous even for a player having a low skill in stopping operation.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 47 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is determined from a plurality of reels (for example, first reel 3-1 to fourth reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols, and a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that advances a game by controlling the plurality of reels according to a winning combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is stopped and displayed. If this is the case, the bonus state can be started, and if the end condition is satisfied in the bonus state, the bonus control means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of ending the bonus state and the bonus combination are the winning combinations. In the unit game determined as, if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed, the bonus combination can be carried over as the winning combination until the symbol combination is stopped and displayed (for example, main control). The circuit 91), and the bonus combination includes a first bonus combination (for example, “F_RB”) and a second bonus combination (for example, “F_BB”), and the first by the carry-over means. The expected value of the balance of the game value per unit game in the first carry-over state in which the bonus combination is carried over as the winning combination is the second carry-over state in which the second bonus combination is carried over as the winning combination by the carry-over means. It is characterized in that the bonus combination is higher than the expected value of the balance of the game value per unit game in the non-carry-over state in which the bonus combination is not carried over as the winning combination by the carry-over means.

According to such a game machine, in the first carry-over state in which the first bonus combination is carried over as the winning combination, the second carry-over state in which the second bonus combination is carried over as the winning combination and the bonus combination are used as the winning combination. Compared to the non-carry-over state, which is not carried over, the expected value of the balance of the game value per unit game is high. As a result, in the first carry-over state, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination cannot be stopped and displayed, the loss suffered by the player can be reduced, and the player with a low skill of the stop operation is remarkably low. It is possible to prevent it from becoming disadvantageous.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the player randomly performs a stop operation in a game in which the first symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination can be stopped and displayed, the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The ratio to be displayed is higher than the ratio to stop and display the second symbol combination when the player randomly performs a stop operation in a game in which the second symbol combination corresponding to the second bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. It is characterized by being low.

According to such a game machine, the more difficult the bonus combination (first bonus combination) is to stop and display the corresponding symbol combination, the more the balance of the game value per unit game during the carry-over state of the bonus combination. Expected value is high. The effect of the difference in the skill of the stop operation between the beginner and the expert becomes larger as the stop operation is difficult. Therefore, the balance of the game value per unit game in the carry-over state is increased for the first bonus role in which the stop operation is difficult. By increasing the expected value, it is possible to prevent a player having a low skill in the stop operation from being significantly disadvantaged.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the symbols constituting the first symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination and the symbols constituting the second symbol combination corresponding to the second bonus combination are a plurality of the symbols. The reels other than the specific reel among the reels (for example, the first reel 3-1 and the second reel 3-2, the third reel 3-3) are common, and the specific reel among the plurality of reels (for example, the specific reel). Although different in the 4th reel 3-4), the arrangement interval of the symbols on the specific reel is within the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the game in which the first symbol combination can be stopped or the second symbol combination is stopped. A displayable game is further provided with an effect executing means (for example, a display unit 100) capable of executing an effect for urging the second symbol combination to be stopped and displayed.

The second carry-over state in which the second bonus role is carried over is a disadvantageous period for the player because the expected value of the balance of the game value per unit game is lower than the first carry-over state in which the first bonus role is carried over. Yes, on the contrary, the first carry-over state is a favorable (not disadvantageous) period for the player. In such game playability, when the effect of urging the stop display of the first symbol combination and the effect of urging the stop display of the second symbol combination are individually performed, depending on the player (especially, the more skilled the player is), the game is played. Avoid the stop display of the first symbol combination that ends the first carry-over state that is advantageous to the player, and stop the operation so that only the stop display of the second symbol combination that ends the second carry-over state that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed. May be done.
Therefore, in the game machine according to the present invention, in both the game in which the first symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination can be stopped and displayed and the game in which the second symbol combination corresponding to the second bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. The effect of urging the second symbol combination to be stopped and displayed is executed. At this time, the symbols constituting the first symbol combination and the symbols constituting the second symbol combination are common to the reels other than the specific reels, and are arranged at intervals within the maximum number of sliding pieces also in the specific reels. , When the stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol combination, the first symbol combination is also aimed at. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the end of the second carry-over state, which is disadvantageous to the player, is terminated, but the termination of the first carry-over state, which is advantageous to the player, is continuously avoided, and the profit is excessive depending on the skill of the player. It is possible to prevent a difference from appearing.

[Appendix 48]
The gaming machines of Appendix 48 are as follows.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

In a game machine having such an AT function, the player has a strong interest in whether or not the privilege related to AT is given. Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity has been devised from various viewpoints regarding the granting of privilege related to AT. It has been done. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-039431 provides a low-probability state (normal) in which the probability of granting a privilege related to AT is low and a high-probability state (CZ) in which the probability is high. A game machine having a difference in probability is disclosed.

Although the game playability is diversified by providing a state in which the probability of granting a privilege is different as in the above-mentioned game machine, in order to provide such a state, a flag for managing a plurality of states and each state are provided. A large amount of data was required for the lottery table used in the above, and there was room for further improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of realizing various game playability while suppressing a data capacity.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 48 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is determined from a variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means according to the winning combination, and a replay of the plurality of combinations. A counting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that has an RT state in which the winning probability at which the winning combination is determined as the winning combination can be changed, and can count numerical information according to the number of games executed in the same RT state. And a first privilege granting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of granting a privilege to the player, the first privilege granting means is predetermined with respect to the numerical information counted by the counting means. When the result of the calculation (for example, dividing by 500) satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the remainder is 131 or more), the privilege can be given with a predetermined probability.

According to such a game machine, when the result of a predetermined calculation for the numerical information according to the number of games executed in the same RT state satisfies the predetermined condition, the privilege can be given. It is possible to have a certain rule regarding grant. For example, by using the remainder value obtained by dividing the numerical information by a predetermined value as a predetermined condition, it is possible to provide a state in which the privilege is easily given for each number of games according to the predetermined value, and it is possible to set a state in which the privilege is easily given. Such a state can be provided. Further, since the privilege is not given unless the result of the predetermined calculation for the numerical information satisfies the predetermined condition, the actual probability can be reduced even in the lottery having a small probability denominator (for example, 1/256). Here, if the probability denominator is small, the area for storing the random number value used for lottery and the area for storing the lottery coefficient can be small, so that the data capacity can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to realize various playability while suppressing the data capacity.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a second privilege granting means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of granting a privilege for each unit game with a specific probability, and the first privilege granting means is the first privilege granting means. 2 When the privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means and the result of the predetermined calculation for the numerical information satisfies the predetermined condition, the privilege can be granted with a predetermined probability, and the privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. When is performed, the privilege is not given regardless of the numerical information.

According to such a game machine, even if the result of a predetermined calculation for numerical information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, there is a probability that a privilege is given, so that the game is prevented from becoming monotonous. be able to. In addition, even if the result of a predetermined calculation for the numerical information satisfies the predetermined condition, if the privilege is given in the lottery performed every game, the privilege is not given to the player. It is possible to prevent the profit given from being excessive.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is characterized in that it has a plurality of RT states as the RT state, and the calculation content of the predetermined calculation is different for each of the plurality of RT states. Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is characterized in that it has a plurality of RT states as the RT state, and the predetermined conditions are different for each of the plurality of RT states.

According to such a game machine, since the calculation contents and predetermined conditions are different for each RT state, various game playability can be realized.

[Appendix 49]
The gaming machines of Appendix 49 are as follows.

In many conventional game machines, games are played using three reels, but in recent years, game machines with different numbers of reels are also known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-167357 A game machine that plays a game using four reels is disclosed.

According to the game machine using four reels, it is possible to provide an unprecedented roll pattern and the game playability is diversified, but there is room for further improvement from the viewpoint of diversification of the roll.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of diversifying the pattern of the outcome (combination of symbols displayed as stopped).

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 49 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, first reel 3-1, second reel 3-2, third reel 3-3, fourth reel 3-4) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed. , A symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reel and a unit symbol display area for displaying one symbol of each reel in the symbol display means are connected to each other. An effective line (for example, a center line) formed by the reels, and a reel control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that displays a variable display and a stop display of a symbol displayed on the symbol display means by rotating and stopping the reel. ) And whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning when the symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol display means due to the stop of the reel by the reel control means. A gaming machine including a winning prize determination means (for example, a main control circuit 91) for determining, the plurality of reels are four or more reels provided side by side in the horizontal direction, and the symbol display means A plurality of unit symbol display areas are provided for each of the plurality of reels, and a state control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of controlling a plurality of game states related to the game and the symbol display means are provided. Display area control means that can reduce the visibility of symbols displayed in some of the unit symbol display areas of a plurality of unit symbol display areas to be lower than the visibility of symbols displayed in other unit symbol display areas ( For example, a main control circuit 91 and a sub control circuit 101) are further provided, and the display area control means may display a symbol of a specific reel (for example, the first reel 3-1) in a specific gaming state. In a predetermined gaming state different from the specific gaming state, the visibility of the unit symbol display area excluding the unit symbol display area connected by the effective line in the unit symbol display area is lowered, and a predetermined reel different from the specific reel is used. (For example, the visibility of the unit symbol display area excluding the unit symbol display area connected by the effective lines among the plurality of unit symbol display areas for displaying the symbols of the fourth reel 3-4) is reduced. ..

According to such a game machine, it has four or more reels, but in the specific gaming state, in the specific reel among these four reels, the unit symbol display area other than the unit symbol display area through which the effective line passes can be seen. In the predetermined gaming state, it becomes difficult to see the unit symbol display area other than the unit symbol display area through which the effective line passes on a predetermined reel different from the specific reel. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the reels used for the game (reels in which all the unit symbol display areas can be seen) are made different according to the gaming state. As a result, the pattern of the outcome is greatly different depending on the game state, so that the pattern of the outcome can be diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the reels of the plurality of reels excluding the specific reel and the reels of the plurality of reels excluding the predetermined reel are three adjacent reels. It is a feature.

According to such a game machine, the reels used for the game (reels in which all the unit symbol display areas can be seen) are three adjacent reels, so that the reels are similar to those of a three-reel game machine familiar to the player. Pattern can be created.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of reels are four reels, which are the first reel, the second reel, the third reel and the fourth reel in order from the left side, and are provided side by side in the horizontal direction. The reel control means further includes three stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) capable of accepting a stop operation, and the reel control means receives a stop operation when the left stop button of the three stop buttons accepts the stop operation. , The rotation of the first reel and the second reel of the four reels can be stopped, and when the stop button among the three stop buttons accepts the stop operation, the four reels When the rotation of the second reel and the third reel can be stopped and the right stop button of the three stop buttons accepts the stop operation, the third reel of the four reels And the rotation of the fourth reel can be stopped, and the display area control means is a unit in which the effective line of the plurality of unit symbol display areas for displaying the symbol of the first reel is connected in the specific gaming state. The unit symbol display area excluding the symbol display area is reduced in visibility, and in the predetermined gaming state, the unit symbol display area connected by the effective line among the plurality of unit symbol display areas for displaying the symbols of the fourth reel. In the specific gaming state, the reel control means reduces the visibility of the unit symbol display area excluding the above, and when the left stop button accepts the stop operation, the first reel and the second reel control means. When the rotation of the reels is stopped and the stop button in the above accepts the stop operation, the rotation of the third reel is stopped, the rotation of the second reel is not stopped, and the right stop button is pressed. When the stop operation is accepted, the rotation of the fourth reel is stopped, but the rotation of the third reel is not stopped. In the predetermined gaming state, when the left stop button accepts the stop operation. Stops the rotation of the first reel while not stopping the rotation of the second reel, and when the stop button in the above accepts the stop operation, the rotation of the second reel is stopped. The rotation of the third reel is not stopped, and when the right stop button accepts the stop operation, the rotation of the third reel and the fourth reel is stopped.

According to such a game machine, four reels can be stopped by using three stop buttons, and the correspondence of the four reels stopped by three stop buttons can be switched according to the game state. , The player can play the game (stop operation) with the same feeling as the familiar 3-reel game machine.

[Appendix 50]
The gaming machines of Appendix 50 are as follows.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue AT (the number of AT games). It is hoped that the number of navigation games) will increase. Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, whether or not the privilege related to the AT period is granted and the size of the privilege to be granted are associated with each combination in advance, so that the player determines the winning combination. From the type of role played, it was possible to grasp whether or not the privilege was granted and the size of the privilege to be granted, and there was a possibility that the game would become monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having unprecedented playability with respect to a decision result of granting a privilege.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine of Appendix 50 having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is determined from a variable display means (for example, 1st reel 3-1 to 4th reel 3-4, display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a plurality of combinations. A gaming machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 91) that controls the progress of a game using the variable display means according to the winning combination, and corresponds to the plurality of combinations. When the plurality of identification displays are stopped and displayed in association with the stop operation in a game in which the result display can be derived, a special combination (for example, RB) from which the corresponding result display is always derived is included regardless of the mode of the stop operation. Then, when the result display corresponding to the special combination is derived, the special state (for example, the bonus state (RB)) can be started, and when the end condition is satisfied in the special state, the special state is changed. In the state control means that can be terminated (for example, the main control circuit 91) and the game in which the special combination is determined as the winning combination, the result display is derived when the result display corresponding to the special combination is not derived. In a carry-over means (for example, main control circuit 91) in which the special role can be carried over as a winning combination and a non-carry-over state in which the special combination is not carried over as a winning combination by the carry-over means, the special combination is a winning combination. When it is determined as, while controlling the derivation of the result display corresponding to the special combination to be possible, in the carry-over state in which the special combination is carried over as the winning combination, the derivation of the result display corresponding to the special combination is derived. (For example, the main control circuit 91), the initialization means (for example, the main control circuit 91) capable of executing a predetermined initialization process according to the received operation, and the player. The initialization means further includes a privilege giving means (for example, a main control circuit 91) capable of giving a privilege regarding a notification state (for example, AT) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode. In a game in which the special role is determined as the winning combination, when a predetermined operation is accepted during the game until the result display corresponding to the special combination is derived, the special role is carried over as the winning combination. The initialization process for terminating the game can be executed as it is, and the privilege granting means can grant the privilege with different probabilities between the non-carry-over state and the carry-over state, while granting the privilege. It is characterized in that, among the non-carry-over state and the carry-over state, the state in which the probability of granting the privilege is low can be granted a larger privilege than the state in which the probability of granting the privilege is high. To.

According to such a game machine, in the non-carry-over state and the carry-over state, the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege when the privilege is granted cross each other. As a result, it is possible to provide a game state in which a privilege is easily granted but only a small privilege is granted, and a game state in which a privilege is difficult to be granted but a large privilege is granted. It is possible to realize new playability.
Here, the special combination cannot normally shift to the carry-over state because the corresponding result display is always derived regardless of the mode of the stop operation in the game in which the corresponding result display can be derived. In this respect, in the game machine according to the present invention, in the game in which the special role is determined as the winning combination, a predetermined operation is performed during the game until the result display corresponding to the special combination is derived. The game can be ended while carrying over the special role, and it is possible to shift to a carry-over state that cannot normally be shifted by such a method. Further, in the carry-over state, since the corresponding result display cannot be derived, it is not possible to shift to the non-carry-over state when shifting to the carry-over state. As a result, the carry-over state and the non-carry-over state are maintained as long as the normal game is performed. Therefore, by selecting and setting the non-carry-over state and the carry-over state by the clerk of the game store, it is possible to provide the player with different game performances with different ball ejection performances with only one game machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the initialization means receives a specific operation different from the predetermined operation, the special combination carried over is cleared and the special combination is not carried over to a non-carryover state. It is characterized in that the initialization process of the above can be executed.

According to such a game machine, the carry-over state can be canceled and the non-carry-over state can be set by a specific operation, so that the clerk of the game store can select and set the non-carry-over state and the carry-over state. It is possible to realize game playability with different ball ejection performance with only one game machine.

<7th Embodiment>
First, a basic outline of the game system including the game display device 1001 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 303. As shown in the figure, the game system according to the present embodiment is constructed in a game field such as a so-called pachinko parlor, and includes a game display device 1001, a game machine 1002, a game medium rental device 1003, and a server. It is configured to include the device 1004, and each of them is connected as shown in the figure.

In the present embodiment, a card is used as an example of the "storage medium", but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the present embodiment includes coins, tokens, etc. on which an IC chip or the like is mounted. It shall include everything applicable to the invention.

Further, in the present embodiment, banknotes are used as an example of "money", but the present invention is not limited to this, and all items such as banknotes, coins, coins, etc. that can be applied to the invention according to the present embodiment are used. Shall include.

Further, in the present embodiment, when simply described as "card", a membership card lent to a player who has become a member of the game store, and a counting card (visitor card) temporarily lent by the game store. Both shall be included.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the term "holding ball" is simply described, both the stored ball stored in association with the membership card and the counting holding ball stored in association with the counting card are included, and simply. When described as "ball holding information", the ball holding information indicating the stored balls (hereinafter referred to as "ball storage information") and the holding ball information indicating the counting holding balls (hereinafter referred to as "counting ball information"). .) Both shall be included. Further, the information indicating the amount of money input by the player is referred to as "money information" (or also referred to as "remaining amount information"), and when particularly indicated, "money information" is included in "money information". There may be cases. In addition, the membership card shall be able to store the ball storage information, the counting ball information, and the monetary information separately. Further, for convenience of explanation, the expression "mochidama", which usually indicates information about a game ball owned by the player, is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can refer to the "mochidama". Information on medals held, information on game value held by the player by electromagnetic means, and all other similar information shall be included.

[Display device for games]
The game display device 1001 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 303. The detailed configuration of the game display device 1001 will be described later.

The game display device 1001 of the present embodiment displays various game information as a projected image by a transmissive projector device, and is installed so as to be located above the game machine 1002, for example. As the game information, the number of acquired game media (number of acquired cards or acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history, and the like are displayed in graphs and numerical values (see FIG. 307). The game display device 1001 is provided with a plurality of buttons 1014A to 1014F, which will be described later, for the player to operate (see FIG. 307). The game display device 1001 is connected to the game machine 1002, the game medium lending device 1003, and the server device 1004, and various game information is based on the input signal, the received signal, or the operation of the player. Is displayed on the screen (projected portion) 110A described later. The game display device 1001 may be installed in units of so-called game islands.

The game display device 1001 includes a projector main body 1012, which will be described later, and a control unit (not shown) for controlling the projector main body 1012 as electrical or optical components. The control unit controls the projector main body 1012 and controls communication between the game machine 1002, the game medium lending device 1003, and the server device 1004. Further, when the operation of the buttons 1014A to 1014F is detected by the sensor, the control unit controls the display on the screen 1110A according to the operation. Although the physical buttons 1014A to 1014F are provided in the present embodiment, for example, the screen 1110A may be configured by a touch panel, and the control unit may detect an operation on the touch panel.

Although not particularly shown, the game display device 1001 includes an interface unit for communicating with the game machine 1002, the game medium lending device 1003, and the server device 1004. The interface unit and the external connection terminal plate described later in the game machine 1002 are connected by a contact input method, and communication from the game machine 1002 to the game display device 1001 is possible in one direction. The interface unit and the game medium lending device 1003 are connected by, for example, a harness in a contact input / output system, and bidirectional communication is possible. Further, the interface unit and the server device 1004 are connected by a wired LAN method by, for example, a coaxial cable, and are connected by a contact output method by a harness, so that bidirectional communication is possible. The connection method is not limited to these methods. For example, a wireless LAN method may be used for each connection, or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used. Further, a combination of these methods may be used.

[Game machine]
The game machine 1002 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 303. As the game machine 1002, for example, a pachinko game machine 1002a or a pachislot game machine 1002b is applied. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine 1002a and the pachislot gaming machine 1002b are collectively referred to as the gaming machine 1002.

The pachinko game machine 1002a is a game in which a game ball (game medium) is ejected on the board surface, and when a game ball that hits a nail and flows down irregularly enters a specific winning opening, the prize ball is paid out or points are added. Is mainly performed. The pachinko gaming machine 1002a includes a main control unit for controlling a main gaming device, a sub-control unit for controlling an effect operation related to display and voice output, and a payout control for controlling a payout operation of a game ball as a prize ball. Equipped with a unit, etc. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 1001 via an external connection terminal plate, and plays a game information signal, an error signal, etc. for each game or when the internal state changes. Output to the display device 1001. Further, this payout control unit is connected to the game ball lending device 3a via an external connection terminal plate, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the operation of the player.

The pachislot game machine 1002b rotates a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn by inserting a coin (game medium) and operating a start lever, and presses a stop button corresponding to each reel to release the reels. By sequentially stopping, when the symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination are aligned on the effective line, the game such as paying out coins is mainly performed. Like the pachinko gaming machine 1002a, the pachislot gaming machine 1002b also controls a main control unit for controlling the main gaming device, a sub-control unit for controlling the production operation related to display and voice output, and a coin payout operation. It is equipped with a payout control unit and the like. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 1001 via an external connection terminal plate, and plays a game information signal, an error signal, etc. for each game or when the internal state changes. Output to the display device 1001. Further, this payout control unit is connected to the medal lending device 3b via an external connection terminal plate, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the operation of the player.

[Game media rental device]
The game medium lending device 1003 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 303. The game medium lending device 1003 includes a game ball lending device 3a installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1002a and a medal lending device 3b installed adjacent to the pachislot gaming machine 1002b. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the game ball lending device 3a and the medal lending device 3b are collectively referred to as a game medium lending device 1003.

The game medium lending device 1003 is connected to the server device 1004 via, for example, a switching hub or a controller (not shown). When the card is inserted by the player, the game medium lending device 1003 uses identification information such as a card ID and a member ID added to the IC chip or the like of the card (hereinafter, simply referred to as "identification information") as a server device. Send to 1004. The server device 1004 transmits the player's ball information stored in association with the received identification information to the game medium lending device 1003. Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 1004 updates the possession ball information, and the game medium lending device 1003 drives a payout device (not shown) to execute the payout control of the game medium. Further, when a bill is inserted by the player, the balance information corresponding to the amount (inserted amount) of the bill is transmitted to the server device 1004. Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 1004 updates the balance information, and the game medium lending device 1003 similarly executes the payout control of the game medium.

Further, when the game medium is thrown into a counting device (not shown) by the operation of the player or directly from the game machine 1002, the game medium lending device 1003 counts the number of the thrown game media and counts the counting result. It is transmitted to the server device 1004 as the player's counting ball information, and the server device 1004 stores the received counting ball information in association with the identification information added to the card. When the card is not inserted, the counting ball information received in association with the identification information previously added to the counting card stored in the game medium lending device 1003 is stored.

In the present embodiment, the player's ball holding information and the balance information are managed by the server device 1004, but the game medium lending device 1003 may manage these information. Further, not only the identification information may be added to the card, but also a storage area may be provided, the information may be stored in the storage area, and the information may be managed. Then, the server device 1004 or the game media lending device 1003 may update the information. Further, the ball holding information may be managed by the game medium lending device 1003 or the server device 1004, and the remaining amount information may be directly stored in the storage area of the card.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the card is not inserted, the counting ball information and the remaining amount information are associated with the identification information previously added to the counting card stored in the game medium lending device 1003. However, when there is a request to return the card, the game media lending device 1003 or the server device 1004 newly adds the identification information to the counting card stored in the game media lending device 1003. , The newly added identification information and the counting ball information or the balance information may be stored in association with each other.

Further, the game medium lending device 1003 is also connected to the lending terminal board when the game machine 1002 is provided with a game ball or the like lending device connecting terminal board (hereinafter, referred to as “rental terminal board”). Based on the receipt of the lending request signal, the return request signal, and the like output from the lending terminal board, the payout request signal is transmitted to the game machine 1002, the card is returned, and the like.

The game media lending device 1003 is also connected to the game display device 1001 via a converter or the like, and receives a game information signal, an error signal, or the like output from an external connection terminal board provided on the game machine 1002. At the same time, the player's ball holding information is transmitted to the game display device 1001.

[Server device]
The server device 1004 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 303. The server device 1004 is used as a so-called hall computer, and is connected to the game display device 1001 and also to the game medium lending device 1003. The server device 1004 uses the game result management information to be managed (for example, ball ejection history information including the past several days, fraud detection information, etc.) and information about the game store (for example, new machine information, vacant machine information, etc.) for the game. It is transmitted to the display device 1001.

The server device 1004 is also connected to an external management device (not shown) managed by a center operator, which is a third party other than the game store, and can store card identification information, member information, and player's ball information. It is transmitted regularly (for example, once a day). The external management device backs up each transmitted information. When the connection with the external management device is interrupted for a predetermined number of days (for example, 15 days), the server device 1004 stops updating the player's ball information.

In the game system as described above, when the player enters the game store (game hall), he / she first sits in the desired game machine 1002 while looking at various information displayed on the game display device 1001. Next, if the player is a member of the game store, the membership card is inserted into the game medium lending device 1003, and after identity verification (for example, input of a registered password), the server device 1004 If the ball information is stored in, the ball is used, and if the ball information is not stored or the ball information is the number of balls that cannot be rented by the game machine 1002, the bill is used. Is thrown in, a loan request is made, the game medium is lent out, and the game is started by throwing the game medium into the game machine 1002. Alternatively, if the player is not a member of the game store, the game is started by inserting banknotes, making a loan request, receiving the loan of the game medium, and inserting the game medium into the game machine 1002. At this time, the ball holding information and the remaining amount information stored in the server device 1004 are updated (subtracted) by the amount lent out.

Then, when the game is continued without being able to receive the payout of the game medium from the game machine 1002, the ball holding information and the remaining amount information stored in the server device 1004 are stored every time a loan request is made. , It will be updated (subtracted) sequentially by the amount lent out. On the other hand, when the game medium can be paid out from the game machine 1002, when the paid out game medium is thrown into the game medium lending device 1003, the number of the thrown game media is counted and the counting result is obtained. Based on this, the ball information stored in the server device 1004 is updated (added).

After that, when the game on the game machine 1002 is ended, the player requests the return of the card. Here, when the membership card is inserted in the game medium lending device 1003, the membership card is returned as it is after identity verification (for example, input of a registered password). When the membership card is not inserted in the game medium lending device 1003, it is stored in the game medium lending device 1003 when the counting ball information is stored in the server device 1004 or when there is the remaining amount information. Return (issue) the counting card. If the counting card information is not stored in the server device 1004 and there is no remaining amount of the input amount, the counting card is not returned (issued).

If the counting card is returned (issued) and you want to play a game on another game machine 1002, the counting card is attached to the game medium lending device 1003 provided corresponding to the other game machine 1002. By inserting, the game can be started (replayed) in the same procedure as the membership card (excluding identity verification). In the above case, the replay based on the ball storage information is referred to as "ball storage replay", and the replay based on the counting ball information is referred to as "ball holding replay".

[Configuration of game display device]
Next, the configuration of the game display device 1001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 307.

As shown in FIG. 305, the game display device 1001 includes a housing 1010, a screen unit 1011A, a projector main body (projection means) 1012, a reflector 1013, and an operation unit 1014 as basic components. The housing 1010 houses a projector main body 1012, a reflector 1013, an operation unit 1014, and a control unit (not shown) for controlling the overall operation of the game display device 1001. The screen unit 1011A is attached so as to cover the opening surface 1010A provided on the front surface side of the housing 1010. FIGS. 304 to 306 show a standard type screen unit 1011A, and unless otherwise specified, the screen unit 1011A will be described basically using the screen unit 1011A, but any screen unit may be used.

As shown in FIG. 305, the housing 1010 is formed in a rectangular box shape so as to have a bottom surface 1010a, side surfaces 1010b and 10c on both left and right sides, a back surface 1010d, an upper surface 1010e, and an opening surface 1010A on the front surface side. The projector main body 1012 is installed at the rear portion of the bottom surface 1010a, and the operation unit 1014 is installed at the front portion of the bottom surface 1010a. A reflector 1013 is installed on the upper part of the back surface 1010d.

The screen unit 1011A is formed so as to have a front portion 1011a that covers the opening surface 1010A of the housing 1010 and side portions 1011b and 1011c on both left and right sides that are detachably fixed to the side surfaces 1010b and 1010c of the housing 1010. There is. The screen unit 1011A has a screen (projected portion) 1110A provided in the opening 1011aa of the front portion 1011a, and LED substrates 1111 provided on both left and right sides on the rear surface of the front portion 1011a as shown in FIG. 306.

In the front portion 1011a, in addition to the opening 1011aa for arranging the screen 1110A, the light emitting surface 1111a that emits light on the left and right sides of the screen 1110A, and the opening 112 for exposing the buttons 1014A-1014F of the operation unit 1014 to the front. And are provided.

The screen 1110A is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear. For example, the screen 1110A is formed mainly of a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film, and is milky white when not projected. , Translucent, or grayish. The screen 1110A of the screen unit 1011A is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. Such a screen 1110A is a projected image by transmitting the incident surface 1100 (FIG. 306) on the back surface side on which the light projected from the projector main body 1012 is incident and the light incident on the incident surface 1100. Has a front side display surface 1101 (FIG. 305) on which is projected.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the light emitting surface 1111a is formed of a translucent plate-shaped member, and the LED substrate 1111 is provided on the back surface side thereof. Although not particularly shown, the LED board 1111 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs, and is connected to the control unit on the housing 1010 side via the connector 111A and the cable 111B. Note that FIG. 306 shows the connector 111A and the cable 111B corresponding to one LED board 1111. However, the other LED board 1111 is also provided with the connector and the cable, and the other LED board 1111 is provided. Is also connected to the control unit via a connector and a cable.

By this control unit, a plurality of LEDs on the LED substrate 1111 are turned on or blinked, and the light of these LEDs is emitted forward through the light emitting surface 1111a.

The light emitting surface 1111a is composed of a plate-shaped member having translucency, but is not limited to this, and is composed of at least a part having translucency and not partially translucent. You may do so.

Further, in the translucent portion, a decorative sheet may be arranged between the LED substrate and the plate-shaped member, or the plate-shaped member itself may be decorated with a color having translucency. .. In such a case, the LED substrate functions as a light emitting means having a light source, while the plate-shaped member functions as a decorative member decorated by the light emitting means, and the decorative member optically transmits and diffuses light. Those having characteristics such as polarization, refraction, and reflection are applied.

The projector main body 1012 projects light for displaying information about the game as a projected image on the screen. For example, a liquid crystal system using a liquid crystal panel or a DLP (Digital Micromirror Device) element using a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) element is used. Registered trademark: Digital Light Processing) method is applied.

The projector main body (projection means) 12 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and the operation is controlled by this control unit. The projector main body 1012 includes an LED or a lamp as a light source, a dichroic mirror, a projection lens, and the like, in addition to a liquid crystal panel or a DMD element. The projection lens is adjustable in the optical axis direction.

Such a projector main body 1012 is arranged so that the light emitted from the projection lens directly directs to the reflector 1013. When the screen unit 1011A is attached, the focus can be adjusted by finely adjusting the projection lens of the projector main body 1012 in the optical axis direction. As a result, a clear projected image that is accurately focused can be projected on the screen 1110A of the screen unit 1011A.

The reflector 1013 is composed of a member that reflects light, and the light incident from the projector main body 1012 is reflected toward the opening surface 1010A of the housing 1010 (incident surface 1100 of the screen 1110A). It is installed on the back surface 10d in an inclined posture with respect to the 1010A.

The operation unit 1014 has a plurality of buttons 1014A to 1014F that can be operated by a player or the like side by side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 307, the operation unit 1014 is provided with a switching button 1014A, a history button 1014B, a call button 1014C, a setting button 1014D, a confirmation button 1014E, and a cross button 1014F in this order from the left side. There is. The operation unit 1014 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and when the operation of each button 1014A-1014F is detected by a switch (not shown), a detection signal is supplied from the switch to the control unit, and the control unit becomes the detection signal. Display control is performed accordingly.

The switching button 1014A is a button for switching a graph display, a numerical display, or the like, which will be described later. The history button 1014B is a button for displaying today's game history. The call button 1014C is a button for calling a clerk at the amusement park. The setting button 1014D is a button for changing display settings and the like. The confirmation button 1014E is a button for confirming various settings. The cross-shaped button 1014F is a button for changing numerical values and scrolling.

As illustrated in FIG. 307, as the projected image V1 on the screen 1110A, a chart image showing the number of medals acquired from the start of the game as a line graph is displayed. As the projected image V2, a text image showing the number of bonuses executed today and the cumulative number of games is displayed.

As the projected image V3, a text image showing the number of past bonuses and the cumulative number of games as a history is displayed. The surface on which light is incident is defined as the incident surface 1100, but the surface on which light is projected (display surface) is the back region of the LED substrate 1111 or the upper and lower regions of the incident surface 1100 (front portion 1011a, etc.). Further, the left and right regions (side portions 1011b, 1011c) may be included.

Even if the surface on which the light is projected is included inside the screen unit, it is sufficient that the projected image can be projected in the region in front of the projector main body 1012 or in front of the reflector 1013.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the game display device according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 308 to 309. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 308 and 309, the game display device 1001 according to the eighth embodiment is composed of a concave screen 1110D on the entire front surface of the screen unit 1011D, and the entire front surface side of the screen 1110D is gently inclined. It is a concave display surface 1101 having a. The light emitting surface and buttons are omitted from the game display device 1001.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308, an LED substrate 1060 and a reflector 1061 are provided on the outside of the back surface 1010d of the housing 1010, which is the back surface side of the reflector 1013. A plurality of LEDs 1060A are mounted on the LED substrate 1060 so as to be positioned in an annular shape with respect to the back surface 1010d, and the LEDs 1060A are arranged so as to be able to irradiate light toward the reflector 1061. The light of the LED 1060A is reflected by the reflector 1061 to illuminate the periphery of the game display device 1001 and the peripheral edge of the screen 1110A from behind.

According to such a game display device 1001, a projected image can be projected on the entire display surface 1101 of the screen 1110D, and the decoration effect can be enhanced by the light from the rear by the LED 1060A.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, since the screen 1110D is formed in a concave shape, it is possible to display a three-dimensional image having a depth. This makes it possible to further enhance the visual effect and the decorative effect.

<9th embodiment>
Next, the game display device according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 to 312. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the ninth embodiment, for example, the upper edge of the concave screen 1110D shown in FIG. 308 is made to emit light to improve the visual effect and the decorativeness.

As shown in FIG. 310, the game display device 1001 according to the ninth embodiment has a screen 1110D having an incident surface 1100 (light guide portion) having a predetermined thickness and transmitting light, and a projected image having a predetermined thickness. It is composed of a display surface 1101 (display unit) to be displayed. Further, at least one board (LED board) 70 is installed on the bottom surface 1010a of the housing 1010 near the lower edge of the screen 1110D, and light is emitted to the upper edge of the incident surface (light guide) 1100 of the screen 1110D. A diffused reflection portion 1072 composed of an uneven portion or the like for diffuse reflection is provided.

The diffused reflection portion 1072 is provided over the entire upper edge portion of the screen 1110D. Further, the base 1070 may be provided over the entire lower edge portion of the screen 1110D, but may be appropriately divided and provided. Further, the arrangement position and the emission angle of one or a plurality of light emitting elements 1071 are appropriately adjusted so that the light from the light emitting element reaches the entire diffused reflection unit 1072 uniformly.

As a result, horizontally long reflected light that borders the upper edge of the screen 1110D is formed, and the visual effect and the decorative effect can be improved. In the figure shown in FIG. 310, the LED substrate 1060 and the reflector 1061 are provided on the back surface of the reflector 1013, but these can be omitted as appropriate.

Further, in order to prevent the light from the light emitting element 1071 from leaking from the gap between the base 1070 and the bottom surface 1010a, a light-shielding member 1073 is installed in the gap to prevent the light from leaking to the housing 1010.

Further, a light-shielding member may be appropriately provided around the light-emitting element 1071 so that the light from the light-emitting element 1071 does not direct to the display surface 1101 of the screen 1110D.

According to the ninth embodiment, the light from the light emitting element 1071 of the base 1070 provided near the lower edge portion of the screen 1110D emits light so as to border the upper edge portion of the screen 1110D, thereby causing the game display device 1001 to emit light. The visual effect and decorativeness of the can be improved. Moreover, by preventing the generation of leaked light from the light emitting element 1071 to the inside of the housing 1010, the irradiation efficiency is improved and the projected image on the screen 1110D is not affected. Further, the base 1070 is provided in the vicinity of the upper edge portion, the left edge portion, and / or the right edge portion of the screen 1110D, and the diffused reflection portion 1072 is provided in the vicinity of the upper edge portion, the left edge portion, and / or the right edge portion of the screen 1110D. It may be provided on the right edge and / or the left edge. As a result, each edge portion (upper edge portion, lower edge portion, right edge portion, and / or left edge portion) of the screen 1110D can be appropriately made to emit light.

(Modification example 1)
In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 311, in order to prevent the light from the light emitting element 1071 from leaking into the housing 1010 from the gap between the base 1070 and the bottom surface 1010a, the bottom surface 1010a having a light shielding function is formed in the gap. It transforms to close the part. As a result, the same effects as those of the ninth embodiment can be obtained, and the number of parts can be reduced.

(Modification 2)
In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 312, the base 1070 having a light-shielding function is arranged in the vertical direction, and the base 1070 itself prevents the light from the light emitting element from leaking into the housing 1010. As a result, the same effects as those of the ninth embodiment can be obtained, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, in this modification 1 and 2, the LED substrate 1060 and the reflector 1061 can be omitted as appropriate.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the gaming device according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 to 319. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 313 is a perspective view of the gaming device G1 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 313, the gaming device G1 has a housing G10 and a screen unit G11 composed of a screen G110 having a concave front surface as a whole. The housing G10 has a base G101 and a projector housing G102.

FIG. 314 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming device G1. As shown in FIG. 314, the substrate G101 has a flat plate-shaped back surface portion G101a and a bottom surface portion G101b, and constitutes a back surface wall and a bottom surface wall of the housing G10, respectively. The projector main body 1012 is mounted on the bottom surface portion G101b so as to be mounted. Further, the reflector 1013 is arranged along the inner wall of the back surface portion G101a.

The projector accommodating body G102 is attached to the bottom surface portion G101b so as to cover the projector main body 1012, thereby accommodating the projector main body 1012 in the internal space. The upper part of the internal space is opened so that the image light emitted from the projector main body 1012 can reach the reflector 1013 arranged on the back surface portion G101a. The screen unit G11 is attached so as to cover the reflector 1013, and is configured so that the image light reflected by the reflector 1013 is applied to the screen G110.

As described above, the game device G1 of the tenth embodiment is a game display device that functions as a transmissive projector device as in the above-described embodiment, but is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming display device incorporating a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence). Further, the game device is not limited to the game display device, and may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine, or the like.

In the following description of the tenth embodiment, the direction perpendicular to the main surface of the back surface portion G101a may be referred to as a front-rear direction for convenience. In the front-rear direction, the screen unit G11 side of the back portion G101a may be referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming device G1, and the side opposite to the front side may be referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). Further, the right side and the left side when viewed from the front side may be referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming device G1, respectively, and the directions including the right side and the left side may be referred to as the left and right direction. Further, the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction and the left-right direction may be referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

FIG. 315 is a perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the back side. As shown in FIGS. 313 to 315, a light guide plate G61 is arranged on the rear side of the back surface portion G101a of the substrate G101 so as to be parallel to the back surface portion G101a. That is, the light guide plate G61 is arranged in parallel in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The light guide plate G61 has translucency, and the incident light can be guided. In the tenth embodiment, the light guide plate G61 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may have any shape such as a circular shape. As shown in FIG. 315, the light guide plate G61 is fixed to the substrate G101 by the back substrate cover G62.

The gaming device G1 is generally arranged above the gaming machine 1002, and the screen G110 is arranged so as to face the player's face with the screen G110 tilting downward from the front direction. Will be done. At this time, it is preferable that the light guide plate G61 is configured at a position and / or size at which the light guide plate G61 can be seen above the screen G110 from the player.

FIG. 316 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the back side. As shown in FIG. 316, the light guide plate G61 has an annular opening G61a formed so as to penetrate in the thickness direction. That is, the light guide plate G61 has an annular end surface (opening side end surface G61b) on the opening G61a side. In other words, the opening side end surface G61b forms the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61. In the tenth embodiment, the opening G61a is formed in an annular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening G61a may have a square shape or the like. Further, a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G61a may coincide with the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. That is, the light guide plate G61 may be provided with a notch to form an opening G61a.

The LED substrate G60 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the light guide plate G61 and the substrate G101. That is, the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided on the LED substrate G60, which is separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED substrate G60 mounts a plurality of LEDs G60A at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b on the light guide plate G61 side. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs G60A are arranged side by side at equal intervals on the LED substrate G60 so as to surround the opening G61a along the opening side end surface G61b. When the opening G61a is formed by a notch, the plurality of LED G60A are arranged in an arc shape along the notch. Each LED G60A has an outlet in a direction facing the opening side end surface G61b. Therefore, the LED substrate G60 radiates light from the plurality of LEDs G60A toward the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61. Further, the optical axis of the light emitted from the plurality of LED G60A is parallel to the light guide plate G61, and the light incident on the light guide plate G61 travels in the light guide plate G61 to form the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. It is made reachable to the outer end face G61c. The thickness of the light guide plate G61 is set to be longer than the length of the LED G60A in the front-rear direction. This prevents the back substrate cover G62 fixing the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LED G60A located in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61.

As described above, the light from the plurality of LEDs G60A arranged in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61 is guided in the light guide plate G61 after being incident from the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61, and is outside the light guide plate G61. Illuminate so as to cover the entire region of the end face G61c. As a result, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end surface G61c, so that the entire circumference of the light guide plate G61 can be illuminated in an annular shape. The light guide plate G61 illuminated from any direction can be visually recognized, and the distinctiveness of the game machine or the like to which the game device G1 is attached can be improved.

The LED substrate G60 can individually control the lighting of a plurality of LEDs G60A. The LED substrate G60 has a memory (not shown) in which a plurality of lighting patterns are stored, and controls the plurality of LED G60A with lighting patterns corresponding to an external signal or the like. For example, the LED board G60 selects a signal indicating a game state transmitted from the game machine and a lighting pattern according to an operation performed on an input device (not shown) included in the game device G1. A plurality of LEDs G60A are controlled based on the lighting pattern. For example, by controlling with a lighting pattern in which a plurality of LED G60As are sequentially lit in the order of arrangement, it is possible to produce a drive effect in which light flows around the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. In addition, by selecting full-color LEDs for multiple LEDs G60A, it lights red when a call input is made by the player by operating a touch sensor, which will be described later, and blinks yellow when an abnormality occurs in the game machine. It is possible to perform various notifications such as.

The light guide plate G61 is subjected to reflection processing for reflecting a part of the light from the LED G60A in the light guide plate G61 in the thickness direction on the substrate G101 side at a plurality of places. The light guide plate G61 is subjected to reflection processing so as to form a shape having a design, so that the illumination of the shape emerges on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. Hereinafter, the reflection processing of the light guide plate G61 will be specifically described by illustrating an optical path pattern of light traveling in the light guide plate G61.

317A and 317B are explanatory views showing an example of an optical path pattern of light from the LED G60A traveling on the light guide plate G61. As shown in FIG. 317A, when the optical path of the light from the LED G60A is not reflected, the light emitted from the LED G60A is incident on the light guide plate G61 from the opening side end surface G61b and enters the light guide plate G61 in the plane direction. It proceeds in the (vertical direction) and reaches the outer end surface G61c. As a result, the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 is illuminated in an annular shape.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 317B, the light guide plate G61 has a reflecting portion G61d that reflects light traveling in the surface direction (vertical direction) of the light guide plate G61. In the tenth embodiment, the reflecting portion G61d is a recess formed on the main surface of the light guide plate G61 opposite to the LED substrate G60. The reflecting portion G61d has a reflecting surface whose normal line is inclined by 45 degrees in the thickness direction (forward direction) with respect to the light path of the light from the LED G60A, and the light reaching the reflecting portion G61d is directed in the thickness direction (front) of the light guide plate G61. The direction) is reflected toward the LED substrate G60 side. The reflecting portion G61d may be provided inside the light guide plate by processing such as laser processing.

FIG. 318 is an explanatory view showing an example of the illumination mode of the light guide plate G61. As shown in FIG. 318, light is radially emitted from the LED G60A (see FIG. 316) arranged in the opening G61a, reaches the outer end surface G61c, and illuminates the peripheral edge of the light guide plate G61. Further, a part of the light from the LED G60A (see FIG. 316) is reflected in the forward direction by the reflecting portion G61d to form a bright spot on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. The reflective portions G61d are collectively provided so as to form the design, and the bright spots formed by the reflection portion G61d reflecting the reflective portion G61d stippling the design.

FIG. 319 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the back side. As shown in FIG. 319, the plurality of LED G60A is provided on the LED substrate G60 which is separate from the light guide plate G61. An alignment portion G60e and an alignment portion for aligning a plurality of LEDs G60A on the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 so as to be arranged at positions facing each other of the light guide plate G61 on the opening side end surface G61b. G61e are provided respectively.

Specifically, the alignment portion G60e is four through holes provided in the four corner portions of the light guide plate G61 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The alignment portion G61e is four through holes corresponding to the four alignment portions G60e. Similarly, the alignment portion G62e is formed on the back substrate cover G62 that sandwiches the light guide plate G61 with the LED substrate G60.

The back surface portion G101a of the base G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e for performing alignment in cooperation with the LED substrate G60 and the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the light guide plate G61. The alignment member G101e has a cylindrical shape having a cross section that engages with the alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e, and is longer than the combined thickness of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the back substrate cover G62. It is provided so as to project rearward from the substrate G101.

In this way, the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the back substrate cover G62 are detachably arranged with respect to the substrate G101. The alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the back substrate cover G62 are sequentially inserted into the alignment member G101e of the substrate G101 to perform alignment.

When the light guide plate G61 is aligned, first, the alignment portion G61e of the light guide plate G61 is aligned with the protruding end portion of the alignment member G101e of the base G101 and inserted. Then, the light guide plate G61 is moved in the forward direction while being restricted from moving in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by the alignment member G101e, and is arranged so as to be mounted on the LED substrate G60. In this way, the light guide plate G61 is restricted only to movement in the front-rear direction by the alignment member G101e. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LED G60A provided so as to be placed on the LED substrate G60 at the time of alignment.

(Outline of the 10th Embodiment)
As described above, the gaming device G1 of the tenth embodiment is detachably arranged on the base G101, and the light guide plate G61 having a translucent property is formed so that the opening side end surface G61b having a predetermined shape penetrates in the thickness direction. And a plurality of LED G60A arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b forming the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61, and the plurality of LED G60A are arranged side by side along the opening side end surface G61b. The light guide plate G61 is subjected to a reflection process that reflects a part of the light guided from the plurality of LEDs G60A into the light guide plate G61 via the opening side end faces G61b in the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61. The applied reflective portion G61d is formed.

According to the above configuration, the light from the plurality of LEDs G60A arranged in the opening of the light guide plate G61 is guided in the light guide plate G61 after being incident from the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61, and is guided in the light guide plate G61. Illuminate so as to cover the entire region of the outer end face G61c of. On the other hand, a part of the light guided in the light guide plate G61 by the reflection processing applied to the light guide plate G61 is emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61 by the reflection portion G61d subjected to the reflection processing. As a result, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs G60A spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end surface G61c, so that the entire circumference of the light guide plate G61 can be illuminated in an annular shape. The light guide plate G61 illuminated from any direction can be visually recognized, and the distinctiveness of the game machine to which the game device G1 is attached can be improved. Further, the design can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61, and since the light guide plate G61 is removable from the base G101, it can be replaced with a light guide plate G61 which has been subjected to a reflection process of a different design. Since it is possible, the gaming device G1 can be applied to various types of gaming machines.

Further, in the gaming device G1 of the tenth embodiment, the plurality of LEDs G60A are provided on the LED substrate G60 which is separate from the light guide plate G61, and the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 are guided by the plurality of LEDs G60A. Alignment portions G60e and G61e are provided so as to be arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b of the light plate G61.

According to the above configuration, the light guide plate G61 that is detachably arranged is arranged by the alignment portions G60e and G61e so that the plurality of LEDs G60A are positioned so as to face the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61. To. As a result, the alignment portions G60e and G61e perform accurate alignment, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the visual effect due to misalignment.

Further, in the gaming device G1 of the tenth embodiment, the substrate G101 is provided with the LED substrate G60 and the alignment member G101e for aligning in cooperation with the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the light guide plate G61. ing.

According to the above configuration, the LED substrate G60 and the alignment portions G60e and G61e of the light guide plate G61 cooperate with the alignment member G101e provided on the substrate G101 to perform alignment. As a result, the LED substrate G60 and the light guide plate G61 are aligned with each other and also with respect to the substrate G101, so that it is possible to prevent the visual effect from being lowered due to the misalignment.

Further, in the gaming device G1 of the tenth embodiment, the shape of the opening G61a is annular, and the plurality of LED G60A are arranged in an annular shape along the opening side end surface G61b in the annular opening G61a.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of LED G60As are arranged in an annular shape along the opening side end surface G61b in the annularly formed opening G61a. As a result, a plurality of LED G60A are arranged in an annular shape along the opening side end surface G61b of the light guide plate G61, thereby minimizing the number of LED G60A and further making the light of the plurality of LED G60A more efficient with respect to the light guide plate G61. It is possible to make the outer end surface G61c of the light guide plate G61 shine more effectively.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the gaming device according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 to 323. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the eleventh embodiment, different aspects of the projector housing G102 (see FIGS. 314 and 315) described in the tenth embodiment will be described, and other configurations and the like are the same as those in the tenth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. To do.

FIG. 320 is a perspective view of the projector housing F102 included in the gaming device F1 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 320, the projector accommodating body F102 is attached to the base G101 below the screen unit G11 so as to cover the projector main body 1012 (see FIG. 314), thereby accommodating the projector main body 1012 in the internal space. Similar to the tenth embodiment, the upper part of the internal space is opened so that the image light emitted from the projector main body 1012 can reach the reflector 1013 arranged on the back surface portion G101a. Further, the projector housing F102 of the eleventh embodiment has a function of an input device for receiving an input of a player and a function of notifying the player. Hereinafter, the projector housing F102 will be specifically described.

The projector housing F102 has an exterior panel F1021 that forms the front outer shape of the projector housing F102. The exterior panel F1021 has a touch region F1021a, a speaker unit F1021c, and a light receiving unit F1021d.

The touch area F1021a is a rectangular input area set according to the shape of the touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 321) described later. The touch region F1021a is provided with a translucent portion F1021b having translucency, so that light emitted from the back side can be transmitted. In the eleventh embodiment, the translucent portion F1021b is composed of a rectangular design indicating the touch area F1021a, a pattern indicating a "hand" arranged in the rectangular design, and a text indicating "CALL". Not limited to. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the exterior panel F1021 is formed of a translucent material and then printed with a non-transparent ink so as to leave the translucent portion F1021b, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed by providing a translucent material so as to be flush with the exterior panel F1021, or it may be simply a through hole penetrating the exterior panel F1021. Further, the light transmitting portion F1021b may be provided with an optical sheet (optical film) for diffusely reflecting light on the back side after forming a through hole penetrating the exterior panel F1021.

The speaker unit F1021c is a through hole for outputting sound from the speaker F10253 (see FIGS. 321 and 322) described later to the outside. Further, the light receiving unit F1021d is an input device for receiving a signal by infrared rays or the like from the outside.

FIG. 321 is an exploded perspective view of the projector housing F102. As shown in FIG. 321, the projector housing F102 includes the above-mentioned exterior panel F1021, the touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023, the LED array F1024 provided on the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023, the substrate F1025, and a frame. It has a body F1026 and a housing base F1027.

The accommodating substrate F1027 forms the outer shape of the projector accommodating body F102 with the exterior panel F1021, and accommodates the touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023, the LED array F1024, and the substrate F1025 between the accommodating substrate F1027 and the exterior panel F1021. Further, the accommodating substrate F1027 is provided with a light receiving element for the above-mentioned speaker and the light receiving unit F1021d to receive an optical signal from the outside. The projector main body 1012 (see FIG. 314) is housed on the opposite side of the housing base F1027 from the exterior panel F1021. Further, the accommodating base F1027 is provided with a speaker F10253 for outputting sound from the speaker unit F1021c at the upper left portion on the front surface side.

The substrate F1025 has a function of receiving input from the touch sensor F1022 and the light receiving unit F1021d, and a function of controlling the lighting of the LED array F1024.

The LED array F1024 is an LED unit in which a plurality of full-color LEDs are arranged in parallel, and emits light in a planar manner from the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023 toward the light guide plate F1023. The light guide plate F1023 is provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022, and the light from the LED array F1024 is transmitted while being reflected by the reflective sheet provided on the rear surface side of the light guide plate F1023, and is provided on the front side of the light guide plate F1023. Surface light is emitted from the diffused sheet. That is, the light guide plate F1023 has a function of guiding the light from the LED array F1024 toward the light transmitting portion F1021b of the exterior panel F1021 provided on the front side via the touch sensor F1022. As a result, the translucent portion F1021b having translucency is illuminated.

The touch sensor F1022 has translucency and is arranged on the back side of the exterior panel F1021 in association with the touch region F1021a. As a result, the touch sensor F1022 can detect the touch input to the touch area F1021a by the player.

The light guide plate F1023 on which the touch sensor F1022 and the LED array F1024 are arranged, and the substrate F1025 are attached to the frame body F1026 and also attached to the central portion of the housing base F1027 on the exterior panel F1021 side.

(Structure of 11th Embodiment)
FIG. 322 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the projector housing F102. As shown in FIG. 322, the substrate F1025 includes a control circuit F10250, a ROMF10251, a RAMF10252, and a communication interface F10254. The control circuit F10250 has a CPU, a circuit for controlling the LED array F1024, and the speaker F10253. The ROMF10251 stores a lighting pattern or the like for controlling the lighting of the LED array. RAMF10252 temporarily stores input information and the like from the outside. The communication interface F10254 is for communicating with, for example, the LED substrate G60 (see FIG. 316) in addition to the game machine 1002 (see FIG. 303). The communication from the game machine 1002 may be performed via the LED board G60 or a control board (not shown) that controls the LED board G60. Further, instead of receiving the signal directly from the game machine, it may be indirectly received from another device, for example, a server or a controller in the game hall.

As described above, the substrate F1025 is configured so that the illumination of the translucent portion F1021b can be changed based on the information from the touch sensor F1022 and the game machine 1002. Further, since it is connected to the LED substrate G60 for illuminating the light guide plate G61 arranged on the back surface of the game device G1, for example, the illumination of the light transmitting portion F1021b and the illumination of the light guide plate G61 are synchronized. It is possible to perform various effects and notifications.

FIG. 323 is a flowchart of the control process executed by the control circuit F10250. The operation of the control circuit F10250 will be described with reference to FIG. 323.

As shown in FIG. 323, first, the control circuit F10250 determines whether or not there is an input (step S1001). The input includes an input to the touch sensor F1022 by the player and an input of a signal indicating the game state from the game machine 1002. If there is no input (step S1001: NO), step S1001 is executed again. In addition, there may be a control process when there is no input. For example, as long as there is no input to the touch sensor F1022, the translucent unit F1021b (LED array F1024) may continue to be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

When there is an input (step S1001: YES), the control circuit F10250 determines the input type (step S1002). After that, the control circuit F10250 determines the control target (step S1003). That is, the control circuit F10250 selects an actuator to be controlled according to the input type. The actuator includes an LED array F1024, a speaker F10253, and a plurality of LEDs G60A of the LED substrate G60. That is, the ROM F10251 stores a data table associated with the actuator to be controlled according to the input type, and the control circuit F10250 refers to the data table to acquire the actuator according to the input type.

Then, the control circuit F10250 selects a control pattern in which a predetermined control pattern is used to control the actuator (step S1004). That is, the ROM F10251 stores a data table associated with the actuator control patterns according to the input type, and the control circuit F10250 acquires the control pattern for each actuator with reference to the data table.

After that, the control circuit F10250 controls the actuator with the selected control pattern (step S1005), and ends the process. Specifically, when there is an input from the player to the touch sensor F1022, control is performed to change the illumination mode of the translucent unit F1021b (LED array F1024) to a predetermined pattern. When controlling a plurality of LEDs G60A in response to an input to the touch sensor F1022, the control circuit F10250 transmits a control signal to the LED board G60 or a control board that controls the LED board G60, and a plurality of LEDs G60A are controlled. LEDG60A is controlled.

Further, when touch-operated by the player, the control circuit F10250 emits light of the LED G60A in a predetermined manner with respect to the LED substrate G60 and / or the projector control means described above, and / or displays a predetermined image on the screen G110. You may instruct it to be displayed. When the control circuit F10250 gives a light emission instruction to the LED substrate G60, not only the translucent part F1021b and the screen G110 of the touch area F1021a in front of the player, but also the light guide plate G61 which is larger than the main body visible from the side of the game machine. Is lit in a predetermined mode (for example, lit in red), so that the manager of the game hall identifies the game machine being called (the game machine to which the game device G1 for which the call input is made by the player is attached). It will be easier. Further, the game hall manager normally operates the touch sensor F1022 (touch area F1021a) to turn off the light when arriving at the called game machine, but the LED board F1025 side of the LEDG60A according to the time from the touch operation. The lighting mode may be changed. For example, the control circuit F10250 lights the LEDG60A in red at the timing when the player's operation is performed, changes it to blinking red 30 seconds after the player's operation timing, and 1 minute elapses from the player's operation timing. After that, it may be controlled to change to red blinking faster than before. As a result, the time from the timing operated by the player can be determined at a glance even if the game hall manager is away from the game machine, and even if there are multiple game machines called, the priority of correspondence is given. By making it possible to attach an appropriate service to the player, it becomes possible to provide an appropriate service.

In this way, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting mode of the LED G60A, which is a plurality of light sources for the light guide plate G61, when there is a touch input to the touch region F1021a. Further, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDG60A according to the elapsed time from the timing when the touch input to the touch area F1021a is received. Here, the change of the lighting mode includes a change from a non-lighting state to a lighting state and a change from a certain lighting state to a specific lighting state. Further, the change in the lighting mode of the LEDG60A may be intermittently changed at predetermined timings as described above, or may be continuously changed according to the elapsed time (color gradually changes, The blinking interval may change gradually). Further, the control of the plurality of LEDs G60A based on the touch input to the touch area F1021a is performed by sending an instruction signal from the control circuit F10250 to the LED substrate G60 and / or the projector control means as described above. Not limited. For example, the control circuit F10250 may directly control the plurality of LEDG60A by configuring the gaming device F1 so that the plurality of LEDG60A are connected to the control circuit F10250.

(Outline of 11th Embodiment)
The gaming device F1 of the eleventh embodiment has an exterior panel F1021 provided with a translucent portion F1021b having translucency in a touch region touched by the player, and a translucent exterior panel F1021 on the back side of the exterior panel F1021. The touch sensor F1022, which is provided in association with the touch area F1021a to detect the touch input to the touch area F1021a, the LED array F1024, and the light from the LED array F1024, which is provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022, is provided on the exterior panel F1021. It has a light guide plate F1023 that guides the light-transmitting unit F1021b in the direction, and a control circuit F10250 that controls lighting of the LED array F1024.

According to the above configuration, when there is a touch input from the player in the touch area F1021a, the touch sensor F1022 detects the touch input. On the other hand, the control circuit F10250 is turned on by the lighting control of the LED array F1024, the light from the LED array F1024 is guided to the translucent portion F1021b, and the player can visually recognize the light from the translucent portion F1021b. It becomes. With such a configuration, the translucent portion F1021b in the touch region F1021a of the exterior panel F1021 is irradiated with the light from the LED array F1024, so that the player can easily recognize the place to be touched, and further, the conventional call button can be used. Since the input is performed on the touch region F1021a formed in a plane instead of being movable, it is possible to prevent a failure due to dust or the like entering the operating part and a failure due to fatigue of the moving part. Become.

In the gaming device F1 of the eleventh embodiment, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting mode of the LED array F1024 when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a.

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that his / her touch has been input by changing the lighting mode of the LED array F1024 that illuminates the translucent unit F1021b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the touch area F1021a many times until the clerk is called, and the surface of the touch area is deteriorated.

In the gaming device F1 of the eleventh embodiment, a light guide plate G61 having a translucent property, which is detachably arranged on the base G101 and formed so that the opening side end surface G61b having a predetermined shape penetrates in the thickness direction, and the guide The light plate G61 has a plurality of LED G60A arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface G61b forming the opening G61a, and the plurality of LED G60A are arranged so as to be arranged side by side along the opening side end surface G61b. The light guide plate G61 has a reflective portion that is subjected to a reflection process that reflects a part of the light guided from a plurality of LEDs G60A into the light guide plate G61 via the end face G61b on the opening side in the thickness direction of the light guide plate G61. G61d is formed, and the control circuit F10250 may control to change the plurality of LED G60A to a specific lighting mode when there is a touch input to the touch region F1021a.

According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the plurality of LED G60A in response to the touch input of the player has a specific lighting mode, and spreads radially in the light guide plate G61 to reach the outer end face of the light guide plate G61. It becomes possible to illuminate the entire surroundings of the game ring in a ring shape, and the light guide plate G61 illuminated in a specific lighting mode can be visually recognized from any direction of the game device F1, and the manager of the game hall can perform touch input. It becomes easy to identify the game machine to which the broken game device F1 is attached. Further, the design can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate G61, and since the light guide plate G61 is removable from the substrate, it can be replaced with the light guide plate G61 which has been subjected to reflection processing of a different design. Therefore, the gaming device F1 can be applied to various types of gaming machines.

In the gaming device F1 of the eleventh embodiment, the control circuit F10250 may perform control to change the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDG60A according to the elapsed time from the timing when the touch input to the touch area F1021a is received. ..

According to the above configuration, the manager of the game hall can determine at a glance the time from the timing when the player touch-inputs the time, even if the position is far from the game machine, by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the light guide plate G61. , Even if there are a plurality of gaming devices F1 to which touch input has been performed, it is possible to prioritize the correspondence, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate service to the player.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the gaming device according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 to 337. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the game device of the twelfth embodiment is a game display device that functions as a transmissive projector device as in the above-described embodiment, but is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming display device incorporating a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence). Further, in the present embodiment, the game device is a data display, but the device is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a game medium lending device, a unit for decorating a game machine provided in the game machine, or the like. You may.

(Structure of the 12th Embodiment)
FIG. 324 is a perspective view of the data display H1 and the game machine H2 according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 325 is a perspective view of the data display H1 according to the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 324, the data display H1 is individually installed above the game machine H2 in the game hall. In the present invention, the game machine H2 is configured to have a different effect mode depending on the gaming state, and the data display H1 is configured to perform an effect according to the effect mode of the game machine H2. That is, the data display H1 is configured to be able to detect the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 based on the effect mode of the gaming machine H2.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 324, the game machine H2 has a main body H32 and a base door H33 pivotally attached to the main body H32 so as to be openable and closable. The top lamp H60 is arranged so as to form the upper end region of the base door H33. The top lamp H60 is an illumination device having a full-color LED and projecting light from the full-color LED onto a translucent member forming a part of a housing of the base door H33 to emit light. Since the top lamp H60 is provided so as to form the upper end region of the base door H33, the light emitting mode of the top lamp H60 can be visually recognized from the front side, the side surface side, and the upper surface side of the game machine H2. It has become. The top lamp H60 is controlled in the game machine H2 so as to function as a light emitting means for producing different lighting modes according to the game state. Further, the data display H1 has an accommodating body H102 having the same function as the projector accommodating body G102 of the above-described embodiment, and supports the screen unit H11. Note that FIG. 324 shows an example in which the pachinko gaming machine is provided with the data display H1 as the gaming machine H2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot gaming machine may be used.

As shown in FIGS. 324 and 325, the housing body H102 includes a camera unit H12 in addition to the same configuration as the projector housing body G102 of the above-described embodiment. The camera unit H12 has a CMOS image sensor and a control device for controlling the sensor. The camera unit H12 is arranged below the housing H102 so that at least a part of the top lamp H60 can be imaged. That is, the data display H1 is arranged above the gaming machine H2 so that the top lamp H60 is included in the imaging range of the camera unit H12. For example, the data display H1 is configured as a housing separate from the game machine H2, and is held on the upper part of the game machine H2 by a predetermined holding means.

As a result, the camera unit H12 functions as an image acquisition means that captures the top lamp H60 and acquires an image including the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. Therefore, the data display H1 can have a function of acquiring a continuous image by the camera unit H12, determining the lighting mode of the game machine H2, and determining the gaming state of the game machine H2. That is, the camera unit H12 functions as a lighting mode detecting means for detecting the lighting mode by the top lamp H60. The camera unit H12 has been mentioned as an example of the lighting mode detecting means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any sensor or the like that can detect the lighting state of the light may be used.

As described above, the data display H1 is configured so that the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 can be grasped by detecting the lighting mode of the gaming machine H2 by the top lamp H60. As a result, the data display H1 can determine the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 based on the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 detected by the camera unit H12. Therefore, the data display H1 can have a function of executing the effect of the mode according to the lighting mode by the top lamp H60 detected by the camera unit H12.

The gaming device of the present invention has a state detection function for detecting the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the gaming device has a different effect mode depending on the gaming state in order for the gaming device to detect the gaming state. As long as it has an apparatus, it is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the game machine may be provided with a directional speaker that directs the direction in which the game device is installed (the upper part of the own machine), and may output different patterns of effect sounds depending on the game state. As a result, the gaming device has a microphone (sound collecting device), so that the gaming state of the gaming machine can be detected by the detected voice. Further, it may be determined whether or not the voice is the voice of the own machine based on the loudness of the voice detected by the microphone. Further, by using the directional speaker, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the sound is from the corresponding game machine of the game device. Further, in order to improve the accuracy, the gaming device may be provided with a directional microphone that directs the direction of the speaker of the gaming machine. As a result, the gaming device can determine the gaming state of the gaming machine regardless of the presence or absence of a wired or wireless data communication path.

(Electrical configuration: game machine)
FIG. 326 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine. The game machine H2 includes a main control unit H301a that controls the main device group H303a, a sub control unit H302a that controls the sub device group H304a, and a payout control unit H305 that controls the payout device group H306. Is connected to the sub control unit H302a by one-way communication, and the main control unit H301a and the payout control unit H305 are connected to each other so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. Further, an external terminal plate H308a is connected to the payout control unit H305 by unidirectional communication. The main control unit H301a and the sub control unit H302a each include a CPU, a ROM for storing programs, and an RWM (Read Write Memory) for storing information related to games and effects.

The main device group H303a is composed of, for example, a start port switch, a count switch, a winning port switch, an ordinary electric accessory solenoid, a winning port solenoid, and the like, and the main control unit H301a controls these devices. Controls the progress of the game in the game machine 1002. Further, the main control unit H301a transmits a command corresponding to a change in the gaming state or the like to the sub control unit H302a and the payout control unit H305.

The sub-device group H304a has a top lamp H60 and an illumination control circuit H61 that controls the top lamp H60 and other lamps. In addition, the sub-device group H304a also includes, for example, a liquid crystal module, an effect button sensor, an accessory control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, and the like. The sub-control unit H302a controls the effect in the game machine 1002 by controlling these devices based on the command transmitted from the main control unit H301a.

The payout device group H306 is composed of, for example, a payout control circuit, a payout ball detection switch, a launch control circuit, a touch switch, and the like, and the payout control unit H305 is based on a command transmitted from the main control unit H301a. By controlling the devices of the above-mentioned devices or automatically controlling these devices, the launching and paying out of the game balls in the game machine H2 are controlled.

Further, although not shown, the game machine H2 has a rental terminal plate connected to the payout control unit H305. The game machine H2 is connected to the game medium lending device 1003 (see FIG. 303) via a lending terminal plate, and outputs a lending request signal and a return request signal based on the operation of the player.

Further, the payout control unit H305 is connected to the data display H1 via the external terminal plate H308a, and a game information signal, an error signal, etc. are used for each game or when the internal state is changed. Is output.

In addition, referring to FIG. 327, a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine H2 as a pachislot machine is illustrated. The game machine H2 includes a main control unit H301b that controls the main device group H303b and a sub control unit H302b that controls the sub device group H304b, and is connected from the main control unit H301b to the sub control unit H302b by one-way communication. ing. Further, an external terminal plate H308b is connected to the main control unit H301b by one-way communication. The main control unit H301b and the sub control unit H302b each include a CPU, a ROM for storing programs, and an RWM for storing information related to games and effects.

The main device group H303b is composed of, for example, a reel control circuit, a medal sensor, a start lever sensor, a stop button sensor, a hopper control circuit, and the like, and the main control unit H301b controls these devices to play a game machine. Controls the progress of the game in H2. Further, the main control unit H301a transmits a command corresponding to a change in the gaming state or the like to the sub control unit H302b.

The sub-device group H304b includes a top lamp H60 and an illumination control circuit H61 that controls the top lamp H60 and other lamps. Further, the sub-device group H304b is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal module, an effect button sensor, an accessory control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, and the like, and the sub-control unit H302b is transmitted from the main control unit H301b. By controlling these devices based on the command, the effect on the game machine H2 is controlled.

The main control unit H301b is connected to the data display H1 via the external terminal plate H308b, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, etc. for each game or when the internal state changes. To do.

In the game machine H2 as a pachislot machine, the main control unit H301b is also connected to the game medium lending device 1003 via a lending terminal plate, and a lending request signal or a return request signal is sent based on the operation of the player. It may be configured to output.

(Electrical configuration: data display)
FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the data display H1. The data display H1 includes a camera unit H12, a video display unit H405 exemplified by the projector main body 1012, a screen unit G11 and the like, an illumination unit H406 exemplified by the LED G60A and the like, and audio exemplified by the speaker F10253 and the like. It includes an output unit H407, a sensor group H404, a control unit H401, a ROM H402, and a RAM H403. The control unit H401 includes a CPU, a control circuit board provided with the CPU, and the like, and drives and controls the connected device.

The ROM H402 stores a control program for realizing the function of the data display H1. The control unit H401 has a function of controlling each component by reading and executing a control program stored in the ROM H402 to determine the game state of the game machine H2, and a game state (lighting mode) of the game machine H2. ), And so on. Further, the control unit H401 controls communication with the server device H4 and the game machine H2.

The sensor group H404 includes the touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 321) of the above-described embodiment, and is a plurality of sensors for detecting an external operation on the touch region F1021a (see FIG. 321) of the exterior panel F1021. is there. When the operation is detected by these sensors, the control unit H401 controls the display content on the video display unit H405, the light emission mode on the illumination unit H406, and the audio output mode on the audio output unit H407 according to the operation. .. When the display screen of the video display unit H405 functions as a touch panel, the sensor group H404 includes a sensor for detecting a touch operation on the touch panel.

The communication interface H410 is an interface for communicating with the server device H4 and the game machine H2, and is also a conversion module that converts the input information into an optimum method when outputting the input information. Although not shown, the communication interface H410 is connected to the game medium lending device 1003 (see FIG. 303) by a harness in a contact input / output system, and bidirectional communication is possible. Further, the communication interface H410 and the server device H4 are connected by a wired LAN method by a coaxial cable and by a contact output method by a harness, so that bidirectional communication is possible. The communication interface H410 and the external terminal plate H308 in the game machine H2 are connected by a contact input method, and unidirectional communication is performed from the game machine H2 to the data display H1. The connection method is not limited to these methods, and a wireless LAN method may be used for each connection, or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used. Further, a combination of these methods may be used.

The RAM H403 functions as a storage means for storing various data. For example, the control unit H401 stores the control result of each connected component in the RAM H403. Further, the RAM H403 stores a data table for determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and a data table for executing an effect according to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the data display H1 makes it possible to download these data tables, video data used for production, audio data, and the like from the server device H4. That is, the control unit H401 downloads the data table for determining the game state of the game machine H2 and the data table for executing the effect according to the game state from the server device H4 via the communication interface H410. Has a function. That is, the server device H4 has a function of delivering to the data display device H1 a data table for determining the game state of the game machine H2 and a data table for executing an effect according to the game state. The data display H1 is not limited to this, and for example, the communication interface H410 may have a USB connection terminal so that the data table can be transferred from an external storage device or the like to the RAM H403. Further, the data display H1 may be configured such that the sensor group H404 has an infrared sensor and the data table can be set by using a remote controller or the like.

As described above, the camera unit H12 is provided to image the top lamp H60 of the game machine H2. When the camera unit H12 acquires an image including the top lamp H60 of the game machine H2, the control unit H401 determines the game state based on the image and executes an effect according to the game state. The control unit H401 controls the video display unit H405, the illumination unit H406, and the audio output unit H407 to execute the effect.

(Electrical configuration: Data display: Data table)
A data table stored in the RAM H403 of the data display H1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 and 330. FIG. 329 is a game state determination table for determining the game state. FIG. 330 is an effect pattern table for executing the effect according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 329, the game state determination table has a lighting mode column and a game state column. The lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is stored in the lighting mode column. In the game status column, the game status according to the lighting pattern is stored. The control unit H401 of the data display H1 determines the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 based on the image acquired by the camera unit H12, and refers to the game state determination table to acquire the gaming state corresponding to the determined lighting mode. To do.

Here, a lighting mode of the top lamp H60 controlled by the sub-control unit H302b of the game machine H2 will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit H302b controls the top lamp H60 to have a different blinking cycle within a range that is difficult for humans to recognize, so that the top lamp H60 is turned on according to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the range of the blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to recognize is set to 50 Hz or more, but the present embodiment is not limited to this.

For example, when the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz, the top lamp H60 repeats the setting of turning on and off every 1/50 second. That is, the top lamp H60 is turned on for 1/100 second, then turned off for 1/100 second, and these are repeated. When the frame rate of the camera unit H12 is 100 fps (Frames Per Second) with respect to the top lamp H60 in such a lighting mode, an image in which lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated in frame units is acquired. In this case, the control unit H401 determines that the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz (repeated lighting for 1/100 second and extinguished for 1/100 second). In this way, the control unit H401 determines the pattern of turning on and off the top lamp H60 by the image recognition program, and identifies the lighting mode (blinking cycle) of the top lamp H60. That is, in the present embodiment, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is stored in the lighting mode column of the game state determination table.

Further, by changing the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 and not changing the lighting time of one blinking, the blinking cycle is determined by the ratio of the number of images in the lighting state to the number of images captured in a predetermined period. It may be.

It should be noted that the lighting mode according to the game state is not limited to being different in the blinking cycle in a range that is difficult for the person of the top lamp H60 to recognize. For example, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 may be any blinking cycle (for example, blinking of less than 50 Hz), or the gaming state may be indicated by different emission colors. The game state may be indicated by a combination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game state is determined by the game state determination table, and then the effect pattern according to the game state is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect pattern may be set in association with the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 of the game machine H2. That is, the data display H1 may be configured so that the effect according to the game state can be executed.

The game machine H2 is also provided with a storage unit (not shown) having a data table similar to the game state determination table. The game machine H2 refers to the lighting pattern in the lighting mode column corresponding to its own gaming state, and controls the top lamp H60 by the lighting pattern.

As shown in FIG. 330, the effect pattern table has a game state column, a video display column, an audio output column, an illumination column, and an end condition column. In the game status column, the game status to which the game machine H2 can be transferred is stored. That is, not only the gaming state determined based on the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 but also the gaming state directly transmitted from the gaming machine H2 via the external terminal plate H308 is stored. In the video display column, a video pattern displayed by the video display unit H405 corresponding to the game state is stored. For example, the video pattern indicates a video data or a combination of video data stored in the RAM H403 by the data display H1. In the audio output column, the audio pattern output by the audio output unit H407 corresponding to the gaming state is stored. For example, the voice pattern indicates a voice data or a combination of voice data stored in the RAM H403 by the data display H1. In the illumination column, an illumination pattern in which the illumination unit H406 emits light corresponding to the gaming state is stored. For example, the illumination pattern indicates a lighting pattern of each illumination provided on the game machine H2.

In the end condition column, the end condition of the effect corresponding to the game state is stored. For example, this end condition is referred to in an error state in which the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected, such as being blocked by the player's hand or luggage after the start of the effect on the data display H1, and the end condition is satisfied. If so, the production is forcibly terminated. If the effect of the data display H1 corresponds to a gaming state that can be determined based on the information transmitted from the external terminal board H308, the end condition may be omitted.

A specific example of the end condition stored in the end condition column will be described. For example, a case where the gaming state is the BB gaming state described later will be described. Generally, the ON state is maintained on the external terminal plate H308 during the period when the game machine state is the BB game state. Then, when the end state of the BB game state (for example, when the game machine H2 executes the payout of more than 300 sheets) is satisfied on the game machine H2 side, the dedicated terminal is turned off. That is, the data display H1 can recognize from the start to the end of the BB game state from the external terminal plate H308. Therefore, the data display H1 may stop the effect corresponding to the BB game state when the signal is turned off, and it is not necessary to set the forced termination condition due to an error.

Further, for example, when the game state is the special ART game state described later, there is a possibility that the additional special zone described later will be started immediately after the game started in the ART game state. Since it is confirmed that the additional special zone will continue for 1 G or more, the compulsory end condition for the production of the special ART game state when the start of the special ART game state can be detected is for one game, which is the minimum number of continuous games. The production time of is the end condition. Since the pachislot machine in this embodiment is set to 4.1 seconds between games, if an error state occurs in which the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected, counting is started and the previous IN is started. If the (input) signal cannot be detected within 4.1 seconds after being received from the external terminal plate H308, it is set as the end condition of the effect. In addition, it may be set to 4.1 seconds from the OUT (payout) signal, or 4.1 seconds from the timing when the start of the special ART game state can be detected, and further changed as appropriate depending on the corresponding game machine. May be good. As an actual operation, on the game machine side, an IN (input) signal is transmitted from the external terminal plate H308 based on the start operation after betting, and the additional special zone is started. On the display side, counting is started after receiving the IN signal, and if a state in which the lighting mode cannot be detected does not occur during that period, the lighting mode is the special zone after a predetermined number of games (for example, the special zone continues for 5G). Change the effect on the display side when it becomes something other than. On the other hand, if an error that cannot be detected occurs 1 second after the 1G count, the production is continued when it occurs, and if the error is not resolved even after a total of 4.1 seconds have passed since the start of counting. Change the effect on the display side. If the error is resolved before 4.1 seconds have passed, the production related to the special zone will continue as it is.

As described above, as the end condition, it is preferable to set a period during which the top lamp H60 is surely executed even if an error state occurs in which the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected. That is, when the minimum guaranteed number of games in the game state is fixed, the end condition is the time obtained by multiplying the number of games by the specified time, and when the game state ends with a predetermined amount of payout, It is preferable that the quotient obtained by dividing the predetermined amount by the maximum number of payouts in one game and excluding the surplus is the fixed number of games, and the time obtained by multiplying this by the specified time is the end time.

(Electrical configuration: Data display: External terminal board)
FIG. 331 is a diagram showing an example of details of a signal for each terminal transmitted from the external terminal plate H308a of the gaming machine H2 in the connection between the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine and the data display H1. Note that, in FIG. 331, only the connection between the game machine H2 and the data display device H1 is shown, and the connection to the other game medium lending device 1003 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 331, from the external terminal plate H308a in the game machine H2 to the communication interface H410 in the data display H1, a "prize ball signal" indicating the number of game balls paid out to the player, the game machine H2 "External information 1" signal indicating that a big hit has occurred or a big hit is being made, an "external information 2" signal indicating that the game machine H2 has become a probable change, or a game machine H2 has a probable change. "External information 3" signal indicating that the special symbol game has started, "External information 4" signal indicating that the game ball launched in the game machine H2 has won a prize in the starting port, some error (abnormality) in the game machine H2 A "security signal" indicating that the above has occurred, and a "door / frame opening signal" indicating that the base door H33 or the glass door (not shown) of the game machine H2 is in the open state are input. The contents of the "external information 1" signal to the "external information 7" signal may be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the game machine H2 on the transmitting side and the specifications of the data display H1 on the receiving side. it can.

Further, the "out ball information" signal indicating that the game ball launched in the game machine H2 did not win in any of the winning openings and entered the out opening (not shown) is out in another device (not shown). It is input from another signal line based on the detection result of the ball sensor, but when the out ball sensor is controlled by the control of the game machine H2, it is output from the external terminal plate H308a in the game machine H2. May be good.

Further, from the communication interface H410 in the data display H1 to the server device H4, the above-mentioned "out information" based on the "out ball information" signal, "safe information" based on the "prize ball signal", and "external information 1" "Big hit information" based on the signal, "Probability change information" based on the "External information 2" signal, "Start signal" based on the "External information 3" signal, "Starting port information" based on the "External information 4" signal, "Door" -"Door opening information" based on the "frame opening signal" and "abnormality 1 information" based on the "security signal" are input. If the type of error (abnormality) can be determined from the output time of the "security signal", "abnormality 1 information", "abnormality 2 information", or "abnormality 2 information" or "abnormality 2 information" is used according to the type of error (abnormality). It may be converted into "abnormality 3 information" and output to the server device H4. Further, as will be described later, predetermined information may be added by the control of the control unit H401 and output to the server device H4. In addition, the communication interface H410 may also receive each signal input from the external terminal plate H308a by itself and output each input signal to the server device H4 as it is (through signal).

As for the type of error (abnormality) indicated by the "security signal" in the game machine H2, the start port switch is turned on even though the game ball has not entered due to improper means or other factors. A count indicating that the start port switch error, the count switch, has been counted even though the winning port solenoid has not been driven (the winning port is open) due to improper means or other factors. A switch error, a sensor detection error (for example, a magnetic sensor error) indicating that various sensors (for example, a magnetic sensor) provided in the game machine H2 for fraud prevention have been in a detection state can be given as an example. it can.

With reference to FIG. 332, in the connection of the game machine H2 as a pachislot machine and the data display device H1, the details of the signal for each terminal transmitted from the external terminal plate H308b of the game machine H2 will be illustrated. Note that, in FIG. 332, only the connection between the game machine H2 and the data display device H1 is shown, and the connection to the other game medium lending device 1003 is not shown.

From the external terminal plate H308b in the game machine H2 to the communication interface H410 in the data display H1, a "medal insertion signal" indicating the number of medals inserted by the player and a "medal" indicating the number of medals paid out to the player. "Disbursement signal", "external signal 2" indicating that BB has occurred in the game machine H2 or is in BB, "external signal 1" indicating that RB has occurred in the game machine H2 or is in RB , An "external signal 3" indicating that the game machine H2 has become ART or is in ART, and a "security signal" indicating that some error (abnormality) has occurred in the game machine H2 are input. In the gaming machine H2, the fact that the front door (not shown) is open means that it is input to the data display H1 by a "security signal", but it is the same as the gaming machine H2 as the above-mentioned pachinko machine. In addition, for example, by outputting the "external signal 4" separately from the "security signal", a signal indicating that the front door is in the open state may be output. The contents of the "external signal 1" to "external signal 4" can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the game machine H2 on the transmitting side and the specifications of the data display H1 on the receiving side.

Further, from the communication interface H410 in the data display H1 to the communication interface H410 in the server device H4, the above-mentioned "IN information" based on the "medal insertion signal", "OUT information" based on the "medal payout signal", and "external" "BB information" based on "signal 2", "RB information" based on "external signal 1", "ART information" based on "external signal 3", and "error information" based on "security signal" are input. If the type of error (abnormality) can be determined from the output time of the "security signal", "error information", "abnormality 1 information", and "abnormality" are determined according to the type of error (abnormality). It may be converted into "2 information" or "abnormality 3 information" and output to the server device H4. Further, as will be described later, predetermined information may be added by the control of the control unit H401 and output to the server device H4. In addition, the communication interface H410 may also receive each signal input from the external terminal plate H308b by itself and output each input signal to the server device H4 as it is (through signal).

The types of errors (abnormalities) indicated by the "security signal" in the game machine H2 include a door opening error indicating that the front door is in the open state and an RWM indicating that the reading and writing of the RWM has not been performed normally. Selector error indicating that normal detection is no longer performed due to an error, fraudulent means in the selector, or other factor (eg, medal jam), fraudulent means in the hopper, or other factor (eg, medal). Due to empty), a hopper error indicating that normal payout has not been performed, and in the medal auxiliary storage that stores the surplus medals that could not be stored in the hopper, the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage are full. An example is a medal auxiliary storage error that indicates that the situation has occurred.

As described above, since the external terminal board H308 (external terminal board H308a, H308b) generally adopts a parallel transfer method of transmitting one type of signal for each terminal, the upper limit of the number of terminals of the external terminal board H308 is reached. Limits the number of signals that can be transmitted. Therefore, it is impossible to transmit to the data display H1 all the gaming states that the gaming machine H2 can shift to. That is, the gaming machine H2 has a limited gaming state among the gaming states that the gaming machine H2 can shift to (in the above example, if it is a pachinko machine, it is a big hit, probability change information, and if it is a pachislot machine, it is BB, RB, ART information. ) Only can be transmitted.

Hereinafter, the gaming state acquired and determined by being transmitted via such an external terminal plate H308 may be referred to as a “first gaming state”. Further, among the gaming states in which the game machine H2 can shift, the game machine H2 indicates the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, and the data display H1 detects and determines the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 by the camera unit H12. The gaming state may be referred to as a "second gaming state". In the present embodiment, the "second game state" does not include the "first game state", but the "second game state" may include a part or all of the "first game state". Good.

(Game state)
With reference to FIG. 333, a gaming state in which the gaming machine H2 can shift will be described. FIG. 333 is a diagram showing an example of a state transition diagram of the gaming state of the gaming machine H2. Hereinafter, the case where the gaming machine H2 is a pachislot machine will be mainly described.

The game state in the present embodiment is mainly controlled by the main control unit H301 (main control unit H301a, main control unit H301b) of the game machine H2. The transfer destination of the main control unit H301 is determined based on a lottery or the like of the internal winning combination. For example, winning a predetermined internal winning combination, winning a specific internal winning combination a predetermined number of times, winning a predetermined internal winning combination, executing a predetermined number of games on the game machine H2, a predetermined number of times. Winning a lottery to shift to a gaming state, or displaying a symbol that is predetermined to shift to a predetermined gaming state.

In addition, as the end conditions of the game state, winning a predetermined internal winning combination, winning a predetermined internal winning combination, paying a predetermined amount in the current gaming state, and predetermined in the current gaming state. The number of games is played, a lottery for shifting to a predetermined gaming state is won, or a symbol predetermined to shift to another gaming state is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 333, the game machine H2 has a normal section, a general game state, an RT (replay time) game state, a BB (big bonus) game state, an advantageous section 1 (AT (assist time) game state, and a CZ (chance). Zone) game state, ART (assist replay time) 1 game state), advantageous section 2 (premium BB (big bonus) game state, ART2 game state) are provided as game states that can be transferred.

(Game state: normal section)
The normal game state is divided into a general game state, an RT game state, and a BB game state. That is, the normal section is a gaming state having a general gaming state, an RT gaming state, and a BB gaming state.

The general gaming state is a gaming state that is not advantageous as compared with other gaming states. For example, the general gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the replay will be won as an internal winning combination is lower than that in the RT gaming state (replay low probability). In the general game state, the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the bonus is carried over, the game shifts to the RT game state. That is, the general game state includes the fact that the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination as the end condition.

The RT gaming state is started on the condition that the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination and carried over in the general gaming state. The RT gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the replay will be won as an internal winning combination is higher than that in the general gaming state (high probability of replay). If a bonus is won in the RT game state, the game shifts to the BB game state. That is, the RT game state is terminated on the condition that the bonus is won.

The BB game state is started by winning a bonus. In the BB game state, the RB game state (not shown) is repeated a predetermined number of times, and when a predetermined number of payouts are reached, the game shifts to the general game state. That is, the BB gaming state has a predetermined number of payouts as an end condition. In the RB game state, the winning probability of any of the small wins is set to be high.

(Advantageous section)
The game machine H2 has an advantageous section 1 and an advantageous section 2 as advantageous sections. The advantageous section is a section that can have the performance related to the instruction function. The instruction function is a function of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player when the internal winning combination is a so-called push order combination, and is operated in the AT game state and the ART game state.

The advantageous section 1 is divided into an AT gaming state, a CZ gaming state, and an ART gaming state. That is, the advantageous section 1 is a gaming state having a CZ gaming state and an ART gaming state.

The AT game state is changed when the player wins the AT game transition lottery performed at the time of winning a predetermined combination in the general game state. That is, the general game state includes winning in the AT game transition lottery as an end condition. The winning probability of the AT game transition lottery is common to all the set values. The AT game state is shifted to the CZ game state after a predetermined number of games have been executed. That is, the AT game state is set on the condition that the game is executed a predetermined number of times.

The CZ gaming state is a gaming state that can shift to the ART gaming state. The upper limit of the number of games is set for the CZ game state, and if a specific combination is won within the period of the number of times, the CZ game state shifts to the ART game state. If the maximum number of games is exhausted without winning a specific combination, the advantageous section 1 ends together with the CZ game state, and the game shifts to the general game state of the normal section. That is, the CZ game state is subject to the end condition of winning a specific combination and digesting the maximum number of games.

The ART gaming state is a gaming state in which the instruction function is enabled in the same manner as the AT gaming state, and the probability that the replay will be won as an internal winning combination is higher than that in the AT gaming state. The ART game state is set on the condition that the game is executed a predetermined number of times, and after the end, the game shifts to the general game state.

The advantageous section 2 is divided into a premium BB gaming state and a special ART gaming state. That is, the advantageous section 1 is a gaming state having a premium BB gaming state and a special ART gaming state.

The premium BB gaming state is started by winning a premium bonus in the general gaming state. The winning probability of the premium bonus is common to all the set values. Further, although not shown, when the internal winning combination of the premium bonus is carried over, the game state is a waiting section until the premium bonus is won, and the transition to the advantageous section 2 is waited. In the premium BB game state, the RB game state (not shown) is repeated a predetermined number of times, and when a predetermined number of payouts are reached, the game shifts to the special ART game state. That is, the premium BB gaming state has a predetermined number of payouts as an end condition.

The special ART game state is the same as the ART game state, except that it has an additional special zone in which the number of games can be added. In the special ART game state, when a specific internal winning combination is obtained, a lottery is performed for each game in which a predetermined number is added to the default number of games by entering the additional special zone. When all the games including the added number of games are executed in the additional special zone, the advantageous section 2 ends together with the special ART game state, and the game shifts to the general game state of the normal section. That is, the end condition of the special ART game state is that all the games including the added number of times are digested.

Regarding the above game state, the game state of the transition source, the game state of the transition destination, the start condition, and the end condition are not limited to this. For example, it may be as described below.

A plurality of RT game states are provided, and in addition to the above-mentioned RT state, one of a plurality of predetermined replay combinations is won, and a stop operation is performed according to a predetermined push order according to the winning replay symbol. The RT gaming state may be entered when a specific combination of replay symbols displayed only in the case is displayed. In that case, the RT state of carrying over the bonus may be set to RT1, and the above-mentioned RT state may be set to RT2. Then, the transition condition to RT2 may be a case where it is not RT1 or a case where it is not in the BB game state, and a specific combination of replay symbols may be displayed.

The advantageous section includes a normal state in the advantageous section, an AT game state in the advantageous section, and an AT + RT game state (ART game state) in the advantageous section, and the start condition of the advantageous section is set without a predetermined setting difference in the normal section. Alternatively, winning an advantageous section with a certain probability of setting difference, or starting a predetermined bonus and performing the instruction function related to the winning combination only once in the advantageous section, or winning one of the bonuses, or It may be decided in advance whether or not the game by the instruction function is performed until the end condition such as the specified number of games is exhausted. In that case, if it is decided to win the advantageous section and perform the instruction function related to the winning combination only once, the AT state is entered, but the instruction function related to the winning combination is performed once (for example, the push order bell). When the stop operation navigation) is performed, it automatically shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, if it is decided to win the advantageous section and perform until the end condition such as the instruction function regulation game number digestion related to the winning combination is satisfied, the state shifts to the AT state, and then a specific replay symbol combination is displayed. The instruction function may be performed from the time when the instruction is given and a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed until the ART game state is started and, for example, 50 games are played.

By winning a lottery with no or different settings before 50 games are played, or by starting a predetermined bonus, you will enter the special zone for extra games, and you can add more games or set 50 games. May be added to the set. The number of ART games may be simply added.

The above-mentioned additional special zone does not send any signal from the external terminal plate H308, but the additional special zone is started on the data display H1 side by setting the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 different from the ART state. Can be recognized, and data can be collected by totaling the number of times.

In addition, the AT state in which it is decided to win the advantageous section and perform the instruction function related to the winning combination only once, and the instruction function related to the winning combination in the advantageous section are performed until the end conditions such as the specified number of games are satisfied. The same display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the game machine in the AT state (ART state) in which it is determined, and the lighting mode is different in the top lamp H60 so that the player can see it once. Although it is unclear whether it will be terminated or executed multiple times, the data display H1 side will be able to determine which state it is in.

Furthermore, in this example, in the AT state where it is decided to perform until the end condition such as the specified number of games for the winning combination is satisfied by winning the advantageous section, the instruction function is specified when the predetermined replay combination is won. The stop order in which the combination of replay symbols is displayed is notified. By playing according to the stop order, the game shifts to the ART state in the advantageous section. The external terminal board H308 turns on an external signal to detect the start of ART on the data display H1 side when a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed, but the instruction is given depending on the operation mode of the player. It is assumed that a specific replay symbol combination is displayed and a signal is sent from the external terminal plate H308 even though it has not been performed. Even in such a case, in the top lamp H60, it is decided to perform until the end condition such as winning the advantageous section and satisfying the end condition such as the instruction function specified number of games related to the winning combination is satisfied, and the specific replay symbol is used. By lighting when the combination is displayed in a detectable lighting mode, it is possible to determine whether a specific replay symbol combination is displayed by chance or a specific replay symbol combination is displayed according to the instruction. If a specific replay symbol combination is displayed by chance and the ART count is not added, the data display H1 side can measure the accurate ART count.

In this way, the gaming states that the gaming machine H2 can shift to exceed the number of "first gaming states" that can be transmitted from the external terminal plate H308. Therefore, the gaming machine H2 has a CZ gaming state, a special ART gaming state, and a special ART gaming state, excluding the "first gaming state (in this embodiment, the start of the BB gaming state, the start of the RB gaming state, the ART gaming state)". The additional special zone in the state, the advantageous section, and the like are shown as the second game state in the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, and the data display H1 can grasp the second game state.

The second game state is not limited to the game state determined by the main control unit H301. For example, the execution is controlled by the main device group H303 whose execution is controlled by the main control unit H301 and the sub control unit H302. It may indicate the state of the sub-device group H304. For example, even in the same game state, when different effects are continuously performed as the number of games progresses, the game machine H2 is shown by showing these effects as different second game states in the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. It becomes possible to perform the effect linked to each effect in the data display H1.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine, for example, when the holding lamp contains a highly reliable emission color of the jackpot, or in a predetermined fluctuation time determination table, the fluctuation is relatively longer than other fluctuations. When the time is selected at the time of the start winning, the period from this point to the determination of the jackpot of the holding lamp may be indicated as the second gaming state of the look-ahead special zone in the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. As a result, the data display H1 can perform an effect linked to the special effect of the look-ahead special zone in the game machine H2. Similarly, the execution of a specific effect such as the premier reach during the special symbol change in the special symbol game may be indicated by the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 as the second game state.

Further, for example, a game machine classified into the second type (so-called blade) is a V that constantly rotates inside an accessory provided in the center of the game board surface on which the game ball rolls and becomes a big hit. The position of the winning opening has been changed. When the relationship between the timing when the game ball enters the approach passage to the inside of this accessory acquired by the sensor and the position of the V winning opening at this timing indicates that there is a high possibility of a big hit, this is the second. The gaming state may be indicated by the lighting mode of the top lamp H60.

(Example of production display of data display)
FIG. 334 shows an effect linked to the effect of the game machine H2 by the image display unit H405 when the data display H1 detects the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 and determines that the game state of the game machine H2 is the CZ game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the display. As shown in FIG. 334, in the CZ gaming state in which the gaming machine H2 can shift to the ART gaming state, the data display H1 displays an image indicating that the gaming machine H2 can shift to the ART gaming state on the video display unit H405. , The effect linked to the effect (not shown) in the CZ game state executed in the game machine H2 is performed. At that time, on the game machine side, the liquid crystal effect is the same in the ART state and the CZ state, and when the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is also different from each other, which is difficult for the player to recognize, the display side is viewed. You can create the meaning of things.

Further, although not shown, the display mode of the data display H1 indicates a state that is difficult to discriminate in the production mode on the game machine side by setting the display mode different between the additional special zone and the ART state and the AT state and the ART state. It is desirable that the player can distinguish by looking at it. The state of comparison is not limited to this, and any state may be used as long as it is two or more gaming states in which it is difficult for the player to discriminate in the production mode on the game machine side.

In addition, the game machine side has an advantageous section that ends only at AT and an advantageous section that is confirmed to shift to ART as an advantageous section, and a state that is difficult to distinguish from the game machine side is determined by the signal of the second game state. It is also possible to make the determination on the data display side. Furthermore, the so-called precursory state, which is expected to shift to an advantageous state over a predetermined number of games, which is difficult for the game machine to determine, also shifts to an advantageous state on the premise that it shifts to an advantageous state (this precursor). It is also possible for the data display side to discriminate even the precursors (precursors) for which the fact has not been confirmed by the signal of the second game state.

As described above, the data display H1 according to the present invention is interlocked with the specific effect performed by the game machine H2 according to the gaming state by the specific mode in which the data display H1 is interlocked with the specific effect. It is possible to have a function to produce the effect.

(motion)
The effect execution process executed by the control unit H401 of the data display device H1 will be described with reference to FIG. 335. First, the control unit H401 determines whether or not a signal indicating the game state is received from the external terminal plate H308 of the game machine H2 (step S1010). When receiving a signal indicating the game state (step S1010: YES), the control unit H401 refers to the effect pattern table (see FIG. 330) and changes the effect according to the game state indicated by the received signal to produce the effect. The count is started according to (step S1011).

After the end of step S1011 or when the signal indicating the gaming state is not received in step S1010 (step S1010: NO), the control unit H401 is based on the image obtained by the camera unit H12 capturing the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. It is determined whether or not the lighting mode is detected (step S1012). When the lighting mode is detected (step S1012: YES), the control unit H401 determines whether or not the lighting mode has changed from the previous time (step S1013). When the lighting mode has changed (step S1013: YES), the control unit H401 changes the effect according to the lighting mode (step S1014), and returns the process to step S1010. On the other hand, when the lighting mode has not changed (step S1013: NO), the control unit H401 continues the current effect (step S1015) and returns the process to step S1010.

If the lighting mode is not detected in step S1012 (step S1012: NO), the control unit H401 determines whether or not a specific lighting mode is being detected (step S1016). If a specific lighting mode is not being detected (step S1016: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S1010. When a specific lighting mode is being detected (step S1016: YES), the control unit H401 detects an error state (step S1017). Then, the control unit H401 determines whether or not the count value that started counting in step S1011 satisfies the end condition (step S1018). When the count value satisfies the end condition (step S1018: YES), the control unit H401 stops the effect being executed (step S1019), and returns the process to step S1010. On the other hand, when the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S1018: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S1010.

(Modification example 1)
In the first modification of the twelfth embodiment, as the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, not only the blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to recognize is set, but also the gaming machine H2 executes a continuous effect including a plurality of stages in one gaming state. In this case, in the lighting mode corresponding to this gaming state, different blinking cycles are set in association with each of the plurality of stages.

Specifically, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 will be described with reference to FIG. 336. In this modification, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is changed in two steps from 50 Hz to 75 Hz. That is, in this gaming state, the gaming machine H2 changes the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 from 50 Hz to 75 Hz according to each of the continuous effects changed in two stages. In this way, in one game state, the effect is configured into a plurality of blocks, and the blinking cycle is set for each block, so that even if the lighting mode is somehow obstructed in the middle of the game state (the player's hands and belongings are the top). Even if there is a period during which the camera unit H12 cannot detect the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 due to (such as being placed on the lamp H60), the data display H1 responds to the effect of the corresponding block when the lighting mode is detected again. It is possible to return to the interlocking production.

For example, when the game machine H2 outputs a song as a voice during BB, displays a character matching the song as a video, and displays the lyrics matched to the song on the data display H1, the game machine H2 blocks a plurality of songs. (For example, A melody, B melody, etc.) are divided into blocks, and blinking patterns of different frequencies are associated with each block to control the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. As a result, the data display H1 can select and display the lyrics image according to the blinking pattern of each block, and detects the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 by being blocked by the player's hand, luggage, or the like. Even if there is a period during which it cannot be detected, when it becomes possible to detect it again, it is possible to display appropriate lyrics according to the voice in the game machine H2 and perform the interlocking effect again.

An example of an effect of displaying lyrics in accordance with a song output by the game machine H2 on the data display device H1 when the game machine H2 performs an effect of outputting a song in the BB game state will be given. The effect on the game machine side and the effect on the data display side in the BB game state are composed of a series of effect blocks composed of a plurality of stages. Here, an example of an effect consisting of three stages of the first effect block to the third effect block will be described.

The game machine H2 associates a series of first production blocks to third production blocks with the elapsed time of the song. For example, the first production block is associated with the 1st to 30th seconds, the second production block is associated with the 31st to 70th seconds, and the third production block is associated with the 71st to 130th seconds. It is attached. Then, the game machine H2 controls so that the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is different according to the elapsed time of the song (each production block). For example, if the song is the elapsed time of the first production block, it is lit with a blinking cycle of 50 Hz, and if it is the elapsed time of the second production block, it is lit with a blinking cycle of 75 Hz, which is the elapsed time of the third production block. In that case, it is turned on at a blinking cycle of 80 Hz. That is, the game machine H2 stores a pattern table in which the elapsed time and the blinking cycle are associated with each effect block. The data display device H1 displays a video in which lyrics are sequentially shown according to the passage of time for each production block of the song output by the game machine H2. For example, the data display H1 displays the lyrics of the A melody in the first production block when the first production block is the A melody, and the B melody in the second production block when the second production block is the B melody. If the third production block is chorus, the lyrics of chorus are displayed in the third production block. That is, the data display H1 stores a pattern table in which the blinking cycle and the image to be displayed are associated with each effect block.

When the game machine H2 starts outputting a song in the BB game state, it determines at which stage the production block is based on the elapsed time of the song, and controls the lighting of the top lamp H60 at a blinking cycle according to the production block. To do. Specifically, the top lamp H60 is turned on at 50 Hz from the 1st to 30th seconds after the song is started, the top lamp H60 is turned on at 75 Hz from the 31st to 70th seconds, and the top lamp H60 is turned on from the 71st to 130th seconds. At the second second, the top lamp H60 is turned on at 80 Hz. On the other hand, the data display H1 corresponds to the first effect block when it detects that the top lamp H60 of the game machine H2 is blinking at 50 Hz while receiving the ON signal of the BB game state from the external terminal plate H308. The lyrics of the verse are displayed, and the lyrics of the verse are continuously displayed while the blinking of 50 Hz is detected. Further, when the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle from 50 Hz to 75 Hz, it considers that the B melody has started in the game machine H2, displays the lyrics of the B melody corresponding to the second production block, and blinks at 75 Hz. Continues to display the lyrics of B-melody while detecting. In addition, when a change in the blinking cycle from 75 Hz to 80 Hz is detected, it is considered that the rust has started in the game machine H2, and the lyrics of the rust corresponding to the third production block are displayed, and the rust is displayed while the blinking of 80 Hz is detected. Continue to display the lyrics of. In this way, the data display H1 determines the switching of the effect block by detecting the change in the blinking cycle, and takes the opportunity to perform the effect corresponding to the next effect block.

For example, if the data display H1 starts a situation in which the lamp lighting mode cannot be recognized due to the occurrence of some trouble while the data display H1 is displaying the lyrics of the second production block, the data display H1 displays the lyrics at that time. Discontinue. After that, even if the obstacle is removed during the production block and the data display H1 can detect it again in the lighting mode of 75 Hz, the lyrics of B melody are not displayed at that time, and then the lighting cycle is changed. When it can be detected that it has been done, the corresponding lyrics are displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the lyrics actually flowing on the game machine H2 and the lyrics displayed on the data display H1 from being misaligned when the lyrics of the B melody are restarted. .. Specifically, when the B melody has 6 lines of lyrics, the data display H1 outputs the sound of the lyrics of which line on the game machine H2 at the timing when the data display H1 can detect again in the lighting mode of 75Hz. It is difficult to determine whether or not the song is played, and even if the lyrics of the B melody are displayed sequentially from the beginning, there is a high possibility that the song will deviate from the actual song. Therefore, the data display H1 restarts the display of the lyrics at the timing when the change in the blinking cycle is detected to prevent the song output by the game machine from being misaligned with the displayed lyrics, and the data display H1 and the game machine H2. It is possible to execute an accurate interlocking effect. If the BB signal is turned off before the detection of the lamp lighting mode by the camera is restored, the lyrics display is also stopped from being restored.

In the above example, the series of production blocks in the game machine H2 correspond to the elapsed time, but the blinking cycle may be changed according to the progress of the game. For example, play an A melody during the first 5G, start a B melody when the 6G starts, and play a loop or intro if the lyrics of the A melody are finished before the start of the 6G. You may do so.

(Modification 2)
In the second modification of the twelfth embodiment, as the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, not only a blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to recognize is set, but also a lighting mode that changes a plurality of emission colors (rainbow colors) stepwise is adopted. doing.

Specifically, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 corresponding to the gaming states 1 to 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 337. In the game state 1, a lighting mode in which the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz and the emission color is a single color is set. On the other hand, when the camera unit H12 operating at a frame rate of 100 fps acquires an image in frame units, it acquires an image in which monochromatic lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated. Further, in the game state 2, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz, and it is set to sequentially change to five colors each time the emission color is turned on. On the other hand, when the camera unit H12 operating at a frame rate of 100 fps acquires an image in frame units, it acquires an image in which lighting and extinguishing of five colors are alternately repeated. That is, the control unit H401 of the data display H1 determines in addition to the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 whether the emission color of the top lamp H60 is equal to or greater than a specific number to determine the gaming state. In this way, by adding a change in the emission color to the lighting mode, it is possible to set an effect corresponding to a different gaming state even with the same blinking pattern, and it is possible to further increase the effect pattern.

Further, FIG. 337 shows only one pattern of "red-> orange-> green-> blue-> purple-> red-> ...", but the color change mode is not limited to this. For example, this is set as the first color change mode, and other than this, the second color change mode (for example, "red → orange → green → blue → purple → white → red → ...") and the third color change mode (for example, , "Red-> Orange-> Blue-> Purple-> Green-> Red-> ...") may be provided. As a result, the data display H1 can be recognized as a different effect pattern even if the player who visually recognizes the game machine H2 has the same rainbow-colored lighting mode. For example, when the game machine H2 has three types of BBs (red 7BB, blue 7BB, and white 7BB, which are different flags, respectively), these three types are used as the first color change mode, the second color change mode, and the first color change mode. It is possible to associate with the three color change modes. The player can visually recognize the top lamp H60 whose lighting mode changes to the rainbow color of the game machine H2 and recognize that the BB is established, but any of the red 7BB, the blue 7BB, and the white 7BB is established. It is difficult to determine if it is. However, the data display H1 can determine which BB the color change mode of the top lamp H60 indicates, and can specify the type of the BB that is established. Then, the data display H1 can appropriately notify the player by displaying the type of BB such as "BB confirmed! This time is red 7BB" based on the determined type of BB. It is possible to reduce the player's medal loss. In this way, by establishing the BB flag, which cannot be discriminated by a normal data display, and making it possible to discriminate the type, it is possible to give an advantage over other data displays, and the hall manager can be given an advantage. It is possible to have an introduction promotion effect. Further, various conditions such as whether or not to execute the BB type notification may be set. For example, it is introduced by recognizing the membership card inserted in the sand or data display, notifying the visitor player if the player is a member, and notifying the visitor player only with a predetermined probability. It is possible to promote the recruitment of members in the hall. Needless to say, it is possible to set that the BB during ART is always notified and the BB during normal notification is notified with a predetermined probability. Further, the detection in rainbow color is not limited to BB, and may be set in ART having a plurality of advantageous stages internally, or in a pachinko jackpot that does not notify the amount of balls to be ejected at the time of winning. Further, in the above example, the pattern is identified by changing the order of the color components, but for example, the pattern may be identified according to the color that is not lit out of the five colors. Specifically, patterns that do not include orange (for example, red → green → blue → purple → red →…), patterns that do not include green (for example, red → orange → blue → purple → red →…), and patterns that do not include blue A pattern such as a pattern (for example, red → orange → green → purple → red → ...) may be provided.

(Modification example 3)
A modified example of a light emitting means or the like that changes the lighting mode according to the game state will be described. For example, one or more LED lamps may be provided on the upper surface of the game machine, and the data display may detect the LED lamps. In this case, the gaming state may be determined by the blinking pattern as in the twelfth embodiment, or the gaming state may be determined by the combination of turning on or off the plurality of LED lamps. That is, by providing X LED lamps and turning them on or off, it is possible to determine the gaming state of 2 to the Xth power.

When the game machine H2 is provided with one predetermined LED and the data display H1 receives the second game state by the LED, the data display H1 only needs to be able to image only the LED, and the shooting range to be detected is narrow. There is no problem. Further, when a plurality of predetermined LEDs are provided on the game machine H2 and the data display H1 receives the second game state by the plurality of LEDs, as described above, whether or not the LEDs are lit on the data display H1. It is possible to determine the second gaming state only by detecting the combination. As described above, in the game machine H2, an LED for communicating the second game state to be driven separately from the effect may be provided. It should be noted that the LED may be any of the top lamps without being specified as a specific LED. In this case, the processing load on the game machine H2 side can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in arranging the data display H1 is increased because only the top lamp needs to be within the imaging range.

Further, in order to prevent the influence of ambient light, the light emitting means may be provided on the back side of the upper surface of the game machine, and the lighting mode detecting means may be provided on the back side of the data display. Further, it is not limited to the light emitting means that the different effects are executed according to the gaming state, and for example, the gaming state may be indicated by combining the modes of the reels in the pachislot machine. In this case, the camera unit is arranged in front of the game machine so that the reel is included in the imaging range. With this configuration, for example, in the second modification, the light emitting means is rainbow-colored, and the interlocking effect is performed only when the reel is performing the freeze effect, so that the pattern of the effect on the data display can be further increased. It will be possible. The data display determines whether or not the stopped state of the reel detected by the camera is due to the effect, on condition that the IN signal from the external terminal plate is received. That is, when the data display receives the IN signal and the camera detects the stopped state of the reel within a predetermined time, the data display executes the interlocking effect of the reel freeze effect.

Further, when the game machine is activated, the light emitting means is turned on in a predetermined mode, and the light emitting means that is turned on in the predetermined mode is imaged and analyzed by the camera unit to identify the position of the light emitting means in the imaging range. It may improve the determination accuracy of the gaming state.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, the gaming device according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 338 to 340. The components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Electrical configuration: Data display: Data table)
FIG. 338 is an effect pattern table for executing the effect according to the game state. The effect pattern table of the present embodiment is different from the effect pattern table of the twelfth embodiment because the priority order is set for each effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 338, the effect pattern table of the present embodiment has a priority column in addition to the same items as the effect pattern table of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 330). In the present embodiment, the priority is set for all the effects in the priority column. For example, if the same gaming state is obtained from each of the signals from the external terminal plate H308 and the detection of the lighting mode of the top lamp H60, and different effect patterns are set for them, the priority to be set is set. Which effect pattern is to be executed is determined according to the order. Specifically, when the BB game state is transmitted from the external terminal plate H308 and the premium BB game state is detected from the top lamp H60, the premium BB game state is prioritized.

Not limited to this, the second gaming state may be a gaming state different from the first gaming state. That is, the signal of the limited first gaming state may be transmitted from the external terminal plate H308, and the top lamp H60 may indicate the second gaming state excluding the first gaming state. In this case, for example, when the general gaming state is determined as the first gaming state (no signal from the external terminal plate H308) and the advantageous section is transmitted as the second gaming state, the advantageous section of the second gaming state is set. It may be set in the effect pattern table so as to be prioritized. Further, for example, when the BB gaming state is transmitted as the first gaming state and the advantageous section is transmitted as the second gaming state, the BB gaming state in the first gaming state is set in the effect pattern table so as to be prioritized. It may have been done.

Further, a modified example of the above example will be described. An effect pattern that partially overlaps in the effect mode based on the signal of the first game state from the external terminal plate H308 and the effect mode based on the second game state that detects and determines the lighting mode of the top lamp H60. You may remember. In addition, "overlapping" means that the elements constituting the effect are set for the same element. The elements constituting the effect are, for example, the color of the lamp, the content of the text displayed on the liquid crystal screen, the presence or absence of characters on the liquid crystal screen, the content of output from the speaker, and the like. For example, when a character is displayed in a certain effect pattern and the text "A" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the text "B" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen in another effect pattern, the content of the text to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Are duplicated, and the presence or absence of characters on the liquid crystal screen is not duplicated.

Here, when the signal of the first game state and the signal of the second game state are output from the game machine H2 at the same timing, the effect mode based on the first game state is prioritized for the overlapping elements in both effect patterns. However, the non-overlapping portion may execute the effect mode based on the second gaming state. For example, the signal of the first gaming state related to the BB gaming state has an element of displaying a "character" on the liquid crystal image and an element of displaying the text "in BB!" On the liquid crystal image. The effect pattern is associated with it. Further, the signal of the second gaming state related to the normal BB gaming state includes an element of displaying the text "BB in!" On the liquid crystal image and a lamp on the outer circumference of the data display H1 (for example, the guidance shown in FIG. 318). An effect pattern having an element of lighting "illumination by the light plate G61" in "red" is associated with the effect pattern. Therefore, when the data display H1 normally receives both the signal of the first game state and the signal of the second game state when the game machine H2 shifts to the normal BB game state, first, the first game state The effect based on the signal of is prioritized, and the text "character" and the text "in BB!" Are displayed on the liquid crystal image. However, the element that does not overlap with the effect pattern based on the first game state and that the lamp on the outer circumference of the data display H1 is turned on in "red" becomes effective, and the effect is added to the effect pattern based on the first game state. It will be executed. In this way, in the effect patterns that can be executed under the same conditions and at the same timing, if an element that is not set in the effect pattern with high priority is set in the effect pattern with low priority, it is limited to the element. An effect of an effect pattern having a low priority may be executed.

If only the signal of the first game state cannot be acquired, the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state (in addition to the effect "BB!" Of the liquid crystal image, the lamp on the outer circumference is set to "red". The effect of turning on) is executed. If only the signal of the second game state cannot be acquired, only the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state (the effect of displaying "character + BB in progress!" On the liquid crystal image) is executed. There is no directing by the lamp on the outer circumference. If both the signal in the first game state and the signal in the second game state cannot be acquired, the effect on the data display is naturally the same as in the normal state, and no special effect is performed.

Further, in the above-described example, the signal in the second gaming state generated at the same timing under the same conditions as the signal in the first gaming state is 1: 1, but the signal is not limited to this. For example, as a signal of the second gaming state regarding the BB gaming state, a plurality of effects corresponding to two or more types of blinking patterns may be stored. Specifically, there is only one type of signal of the first gaming state as the BB gaming state, but in the game machine H2, there are two types of the BB gaming state, the normal BB gaming state and the BB gaming state in the advantageous section. In that case, each may be distinguished as a signal of the second gaming state. That is, when the normal BB game state occurs in the game machine H2, the effect pattern associated with the signal of the first game state is executed on the data display H1 and the elements not set in the effect pattern are executed. In the normal BB game state, the effect of the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state is executed. Further, when the BB game state occurs in the advantageous section in the game machine H2, the effect pattern associated with the signal of the first game state is executed on the data display H1 and is set by the effect pattern. In the element that does not exist, the effect of the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state in the BB game state during the advantageous section is executed.

Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned example, the signal of the second gaming state in the BB gaming state during the advantageous section has an element of displaying the text "BB in the advantageous section!" On the liquid crystal image, and the data display H1. It is assumed that an effect pattern having an element of turning on the lamp on the outer circumference of the above is associated with the element of lighting "blue". Then, when the data display H1 normally receives both the signal of the first gaming state and the signal of the second gaming state when the gaming machine H2 shifts to the BB gaming state during the advantageous section, first, the first The effect based on the signal of the game state is prioritized, and the "character" and the text "in BB!" Are displayed on the liquid crystal image. However, the element that does not overlap with the effect pattern based on the first game state and that the lamp on the outer circumference of the data display H1 is turned on in "blue" becomes effective, and the effect is added to the effect pattern based on the first game state. It will be executed.

If only the signal of the first game state cannot be acquired, the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state (in addition to the effect of the liquid crystal image "BB in the advantageous section!" The effect of turning on "blue") is executed. If only the signal of the second game state cannot be acquired, only the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second game state (the effect of displaying "character + BB in progress!" On the liquid crystal image) is executed. There is no directing by the lamp on the outer circumference. If both the signal in the first game state and the signal in the second game state cannot be acquired, the effect on the data display is naturally the same as in the normal state, and no special effect is performed.

Further, the signal of the second gaming state regarding the BB gaming state during the advantageous section may be exceptionally given priority over the signal of the first gaming state. In that case, if both the signal of the first gaming state and the signal of the second gaming state related to the BB gaming state during the advantageous section can be normally acquired, the effect based on the signal of the second gaming state is prioritized and the liquid crystal is displayed. The text "During BB in the advantageous section!" Is displayed on the image, and the lamp on the outer circumference of the data display H1 is lit in "blue". However, the element that does not overlap with the effect pattern based on the second game state related to the BB game state during the advantageous section and that the "character" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the data display H1 becomes effective, and the effect pattern based on the second game state becomes effective. In addition to that, the effect will be executed.

In this way, not only the signal relating to the second gaming state is uniformly lowered in priority, but also the information useful to the player may be given a higher priority than the signal relating to the first gaming state. It should be noted that such a priority can be set by the server device H4 that sets the data display H1 from the outside or the data display H1 main body. In the above example, there are two types of BB gaming states, but in the second gaming state, three types can be distinguished and priorities can be set by adding something like premium BB, which is advantageous among BBs. Alternatively, the priority may be set by distinguishing more types.

Further, in the effect pattern table of the present embodiment, an effect synchronized with another data display H1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a synchronized effect) can be set. The synchronous effect is set to have a lower priority than the effect based on other game states (first game state and second game state). The synchronous effect is an effect executed by a plurality of data display devices H1, and each of a plurality of gaming machines set in a group within a predetermined range (for example, parallel arrangement, island arrangement, etc.) by the server, the main body, or the like. This is an effect of executing the image display unit H405 of the data display H1 as if it were one common screen. For example, a character image or a text image is moved from the image display unit H405 at the right end to the image display unit H405 at the left end. It is such a production. It should be noted that the priority of the synchronous effect and the effect based on other gaming states can be appropriately determined. Further, a plurality of synchronous effects may be provided, and the priority may be set among them. For example, as a priority, the first game state> the synchronous effect 1> the second game state> the synchronous effect 2 and the like.

Further, FIG. 339 is an example of a game state transition table showing a shiftable destination of the game state. The game state transition table is realized by being stored in the RAM H403 of the data display H1 or being accessible to the dedicated ROM via a server or by a detachable ROM in which the fact is stored based on the type of the game machine to be installed. Will be done. The mode to be stored is not limited to this, and various methods can be applied. As shown in FIG. 339, the vertical axis represents the game state of the shift source, the horizontal axis represents the game state of the shift destination, and circles are stored in the game states that can be shifted as the shift destination. When the data display H1 detects the transition of the gaming state, it refers to the gaming state transition table and confirms whether or not the transition of the gaming state performed is correct.

(motion)
The effect execution process executed by the control unit H401 of the data display device H1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 340. First, the control unit H401 determines whether or not a signal indicating the game state is received from the external terminal plate H308 of the game machine H2 (step S1020). When the signal indicating the game state is received (step S1020: YES), the control unit H401 refers to the effect pattern table (see FIG. 330) and changes the effect according to the game state indicated by the received signal to produce the effect. The count is started according to (step S1021).

After the end of step S1021 or when the signal indicating the gaming state is not received in step S1020 (step S1020: NO), the control unit H401 is based on the image obtained by the camera unit H12 capturing the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. It is determined whether or not the lighting mode is detected (step S1022). When the lighting mode is detected (step S1022: YES), the control unit H401 determines whether or not the lighting mode has changed from the previous time (step S1023). When the lighting mode has changed (step S1023: YES), the control unit H401 determines whether or not the transition destination of the gaming state is abnormal (step S1024). That is, the control unit H401 refers to the game state transition table (see FIG. 339) and determines whether or not the game state corresponding to the changed effect is abnormal as the transition destination from the current game state. .. If the transition destination of the gaming state is abnormal, the control unit H401 detects it as an error (step S1025). Here, when detected as an error, the control unit H401 may transmit a signal for notifying the error to the server device H4, or the data display H1 may notify the error by using a video display or an audio output. .. After that, the control unit H401 returns the process to step S1020.

When the migration destination is not abnormal (step S1024: NO), the control unit H401 determines whether or not the effect timings overlap, including the synchronous effect (step S1026). When the effect timings overlap (step S1026: YES), the control unit H401 selects a priority effect (step S1027). The selection method may be to compare the effects with each other, or may be to compare the gaming states related to the effects. When it is determined in step S1026 that the effect timings do not overlap, or after step S1027, the effect is changed according to the lighting mode (step S1028), and the process is returned to step S1020. On the other hand, if the lighting mode has not changed in step S1023 (step S1023: NO), the control unit H401 continues the current effect (step S1029) and returns the process to step S1020.

If the lighting mode is not detected in step S1022 (step S1022: NO), the control unit H401 determines whether or not a specific lighting mode is being detected (step S1030). If a specific lighting mode is not being detected (step S1030: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S1020. When a specific lighting mode is being detected (step S1030: YES), the control unit H401 detects an error state (step S1031). Then, the control unit H401 determines whether or not the count value that started counting in step S1021 satisfies the end condition (step S1032). When the count value satisfies the end condition (step S1032: YES), the control unit H401 stops the effect being executed (step S1033), and returns the process to step S1020. On the other hand, when the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S1032: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S1020.

(Modification example 1)
A modified example according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. For example, when the data display H1 cannot read the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 a plurality of times (or more than a predetermined time), the video display, audio output, and illumination of the data display H1 are used for demonstration. It may be changed to a production pattern.

Further, the light emitting means included in the game machine H2 is not limited to visible light, and may be, for example, infrared light. As a result, for example, the data display H1 can detect the lighting mode of the light emitting means with the infrared sensor included in the sensor group H404, and can directly specify the effect pattern.

Further, the priority setting is not limited to the effect, and for example, the priority can be set for the data screen display (see FIG. 307) displayed by the player operating the data display H1. May be good. For example, it is preferable that the data screen display has priority over other effect displays.

Further, depending on the blinking timing of the top lamp H60 and the image acquisition timing of the camera unit H12, the image may not include the image of the top lamp H60 at the time of lighting, and the data display H1 may not be able to accurately receive the second gaming state. Therefore, this may be avoided by the following method. That is, even if the game machine H2 blinks the top lamp H60 for a predetermined period of time and then waits for a period of time such that the blinking timing shifts (for example, a time shorter than the blinking interval) to restart the blinking. Good. For example, the blinking pattern for 1 second may be repeated 4 times, and then the same pattern may be repeated after waiting for several milliseconds. Similarly, imaging may be waited for at predetermined time intervals so that the image acquisition timing of the camera is shifted on the data display H1 side. Further, the timing of imaging by the camera unit H12 on the data display H1 may be determined based on the signal from the external terminal plate H308.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a data display is taken as an example of the game device, but if the device is a game device capable of performing an effect equipped with a camera unit or the like individually provided for the game machine, the game is played. It is not limited to the data display installed on the upper part of the machine, and can be applied to various game devices such as a rental device attached to a game machine and a data display between machines installed between machines. is there.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, the gaming system according to the 14th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 341 to 359.

(Composition of game machine and game device)
As shown in FIG. 341, the gaming system 5001 of the present invention includes a gaming machine 3001 and a data display 2001 arranged above the gaming machine 3001. The game machine 3001 is provided with a lamp 3305 above the lamp 3305 for transmitting data such as an effect pattern, and the data display 2001 receives light from the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 from the game machine 3001. Receives data such as game status and production patterns. In this way, when the light from the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 is received by the data display 2001, data such as the game state and the effect pattern are transmitted from the game machine 3001 to the data display 2001. Therefore, a lot of information can be transmitted efficiently and with high accuracy. It should be noted that such communication can be said to be one-way non-contact communication from the game machine 3001 which is an external device for the data display 2001 to the data display 2001.

Here, the gaming machine 3001 is, for example, a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned gaming machines 1002 and H2, which includes a pachinko gaming machine 1002a and a pachislot gaming machine 1002b. Further, the data display 2001 is similar to the above-mentioned game display device 1001, but may be various game devices including a game medium lending device, a game machine decoration unit provided in the game machine, and the like. be able to.

The data display 2001 shown in FIG. 341 is, for example, a data display called a signage. The data display 2001 includes a liquid crystal display 2002, an LED 2003, a speaker 2004, a call button 2005, and an image sensor unit 2311. The call button 2005 is a button for calling the staff of the amusement park, and when the touch sensor detects the pressing of the call button 2005, the output corresponding to the detection is output to the liquid crystal display 2002, the LED 2003, the speaker 2004, and the like. Is controlled to be performed.

The data display 2001 detects the light from the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 by the image sensor unit 2311, grasps the effect pattern of the game machine 3001 based on the detection result, and responds to the grasped effect pattern. The liquid crystal display 2002 is controlled to display the corresponding image. Further, if necessary, the speaker is controlled to output sound corresponding to the effect pattern and to turn on the LED 2003.

The image sensor unit 2311 includes, for example, a CMOS image sensor that captures an image including the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 at predetermined time intervals. This CMOS image sensor is configured to image the lamp 3305 at, for example, 220 fps or 440 fps.

Further, this CMOS image sensor is based on a predetermined angle of view (for example, an angle of view of 30 ° or less) and a light source distance (that is, a distance between the CMOS image sensor and the lamp 3305, for example, 30 mm to 300 mm). An image of the lamp 3305 of the machine 3001 and its surroundings is taken. Therefore, the captured image acquired by the CMOS image sensor includes not only the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 but also the production lamp of the game machine 3001 (for example, a lamp such as the top lamp H60 of the game machine H2) and the adjacent lamp. The light from the game machine 3001, the light from the lighting equipment of the game hall, the reflected light of those lights, and the like are included.

In the present embodiment, the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 is composed of an optical output device such as one or a plurality of LEDs, but is not limited to such a configuration. In addition, the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 can also function as a dedicated optical output device for transmitting data such as the effect pattern of the game machine 3001. It can also function as a dual-purpose optical output device that transmits data such as patterns. The top lamp H60 of the game machine H2 described above is an optical output device that also serves as the latter.

Next, the configuration of the game machine 3001 as a pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 342. The game machine 3001 includes a main control unit 3301 that controls the main device group 3303 and a sub control unit 3302 that controls the sub device group 3304, and the main control unit 3301 is connected to the sub control unit 3302 by one-way communication. ing. Further, an external terminal plate 3308 is connected to the main control unit 3301 by one-way communication. The main control unit 3301 and the sub control unit 3302 each include a CPU, a ROM for storing programs, and an RWM for storing information related to games and effects.

The main device group 3303 is composed of, for example, a reel control circuit, a medal sensor, a start lever sensor, a stop button sensor, a hopper control circuit, and the like, and the main control unit 3301 controls these devices to play a game machine. Controls the progress of the game in 3001. Further, the main control unit 3301 transmits a command corresponding to a change in the gaming state or the like to the sub control unit 3302.

The sub-device group 3304 includes a lamp 3305 and a lamp control circuit 3306 that controls the lamp 3305 and other lamps. Further, the sub-device group 3304 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal module, an effect button sensor, an accessory control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, and the like, and the sub-control unit 3302 is transmitted from the main control unit 3301. By controlling these devices based on the command, the effect in the game machine 3001 is controlled.

The main control unit 3301 is connected to the data display 2001 via the external terminal plate 3308, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, etc. for each game or when the internal state changes. To do. The information input from the external terminal plate 3308 is, for example, information including external signals 1 to 4 as shown in FIG. 332.

The sub-control unit 3302 controls the output of light by the lamp 3305 by the lamp control circuit 3306, thereby transmitting data such as a game state and an effect pattern to the data display 2001 (by non-contact communication). When the lamp 3305 also functions as a lamp for effect, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to light the lamp 3305 in a predetermined color according to the effect.

Although the gaming machine 3001 has been described as a pachislot machine in FIG. 342, similarly for the pachinko machine, the data display 2001 is obtained from the external terminal board (see FIG. 331) and the lamps of the sub-device group. Each is configured to enter information.

Next, the configuration of the data display 2001 will be described with reference to FIG. 343. The data display 2001 includes an image display unit 2305 such as a liquid crystal display 2002, an illumination unit 2306 such as an LED 2003, and an audio output unit 2307 such as a speaker 2004 (see FIG. 341). Further, the data display 2001 includes a sensor group 2304, a control unit 2301, a ROM 2302, and a RAM 2303. The control unit 2301 includes a CPU, a control circuit board provided with the CPU, and the like, and controls connected devices.

The ROM 2302 stores a control program for realizing the functions of the data display 2001. The control unit 2301 has a function of controlling each component by reading and executing the control program stored in the ROM 2302, and executing the effect of the mode according to the game state and the effect pattern of the game machine 3001. Realize.

Further, the control unit 2301 performs communication control with the game machine 3001 and communication control with the server device 4001. The server device 4001 has the same function as the server device H4 described above.

The sensor group 2304 is a sensor group including a touch sensor or the like for determining the pressing of the call button 2005 shown in FIG. 341. When the operation is detected by these sensors, the control unit 2301 controls the display content on the video display unit 2305, the light emitting mode on the illumination unit 2306, and the audio output mode on the audio output unit 2307 according to the operation. .. When the display screen of the video display unit 2305 functions as a touch panel, the sensor group 2304 includes a sensor for detecting a touch operation on the touch panel.

The communication interface 2310 is an interface for communicating with the game machine 3001 and the server device 4001, and is also a conversion module that converts the input information into an optimum method when outputting the input information.

The communication interface 2310 receives the information from the game machine 3001 in two communication modes. One is the above-mentioned non-contact communication via light, and the other communication mode is that the communication interface 2310 is connected to the external terminal plate 3308 of the game machine 3001 by the contact input method, and the game machine 3001 The data display 2001 is a one-way communication.

Although not shown, the communication interface 2310 is connected to the game medium lending device 1003 (see FIG. 303) by a harness in a contact input / output system, and bidirectional communication is possible. Further, the communication interface 2310 and the server device 4001 are connected by a wired LAN method by a coaxial cable and by a contact output method by a harness, so that bidirectional communication is possible.

The RAM 2303 functions as a storage means for storing various data. For example, the control unit 2301 stores the control result of each connected component in the RAM 2303. Further, the RAM 2303 is a data table (game state determination table) for determining the game state and effect pattern of the game machine 3001, and a data table (effect pattern) for executing the effect according to the game state and effect pattern. Table) is stored.

In the present embodiment, the data display 2001 downloads the game state determination table and the effect pattern table (including video data and audio data used for the effect) from the server device 4001 via the communication interface 2310. Can be done.

The data table for determining the game state and the effect pattern of the game machine 3001 and the data table for executing the effect according to the game state and the effect pattern are via the USB connection terminal of the communication interface 2310. The data table may be transferred to the RAM 2303 from an external storage device or the like, and the data table can be transferred by various other methods and routes.

As described above, the image sensor unit 2311 is provided to image the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001. Further, when the image sensor unit 2311 acquires an image including the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001, it transmits data such as a game state and an effect pattern to the control unit 2301 of the data display 2001 based on the image, and controls the data. The unit 2301 executes an effect according to the data. The control unit 2301 controls the video display unit 2305, the illumination unit 2306, and the audio output unit 2307 to execute the effect.

Next, the configuration of the image sensor unit 2311 will be described with reference to FIG. 344. FIG. 344 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the CMOS image sensor 2432 and the control LSI 2434 included in the image sensor unit 2311.

The CMOS image sensor 2432 is, for example, a CMOS image sensor having a resolution of 640 × 240 pixels and a frame rate of 220 fps or 440 fps. In the present embodiment, the CMOS image sensor 2432 is used as an image pickup device that images the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 and acquires the image data, but another image pickup device such as a CCD image sensor is used. You can also do it.

The control LSI 2434 includes a host controller 2441, a DSP (digital signal processor) circuit 2442, a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 2443 to which a backup power supply (not shown) is connected, a flash memory 2444, an ISP (Image Signal Processing) circuit 2445, and the like. It is equipped with a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) 2452. The devices constituting these control LSIs 2434 are connected to each other via a bus, and in the control LSI 2434 of the present embodiment, AXI (Advanced eXtensible Interface) is adopted as a bus protocol.

Further, the control LSI 2434 includes an ISI (Image Sensor Interface) circuit 2451. The ISI circuit 2451 is electrically connected to the CMOS image sensor 2432 and the ISP circuit. The ISI circuit 2451 converts the image data transmitted from the CMOS image sensor 2432 by the LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) method into an RGB Bayer image and outputs the image data. At this time, a unique image ID is attached to the RGB image output from the ISI circuit 2451. By this image ID, each image that is sequentially acquired with the passage of time can be identified.

The ISP circuit 2445 inputs an RGB bayer image from the ISI circuit 2451. Here, the ISP circuit 2445 can be configured to perform lens distortion processing. The lens distortion correction process is a process for correcting distortion caused by the characteristics of the lens on the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2432 in order to improve the accuracy of the process described later.

Next, the ISP circuit 2445 performs a color conversion process for converting the RGB bayer image (if the lens correction process is performed, the image after the process) into various formats. In the color conversion process, the ISP circuit 2445 converts the RGB bayer image into image data (YUV image data) corresponding to the YUV color space, and stores the YUV image data in the SRAM 2443. The SRAM 2443 is provided with a storage area that can store a predetermined number of YUV image data. When the number of YUV image data stored in SRAM 2443 reaches the upper limit, the stored order is overwritten from the oldest YUV image data.

Further, when the ISP circuit 2445 stores the YUV image data in the SRAM 2443, the ISP circuit 2445 outputs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt signal to the host controller 2441.

Further, in the color conversion process, the ISP circuit 2445 corresponds to a color space (HSV color space) composed of three components (H: hue, S: saturation, V: lightness), if necessary, for the RGB bayer image. It is also possible to convert to image data (HSV image data) and store the HSV image data in SRAM 2443.

When only the RGB image data is used, the ISP circuit 2445 stores the RGB image data in the SRAM 2443 as it is.

The DSP circuit 2442 performs data reception processing (for example, processing such as light source search processing, noise removal processing, decoding processing, etc.) in the present embodiment under the control of the host controller 2441, and the input image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2432. From (YUV image data), data such as a game state and an effect pattern transmitted by the game machine 3001 is acquired.

Further, the DSP circuit 2442 performs Fourier transform, inverse Fourier transform, etc. as described later in the noise removal process according to the control of the host controller 2441, and a dedicated circuit provided in the image sensor unit 2311 for these processes is provided. It can also be configured to be carried out using. Further, even when decoding an error correction code, a CDMA code, a PSM code, or the like in the decoding process, the dedicated circuit provided in the image sensor unit 2311 can be used to perform these processes.

The UART 2452 sends the data generated by the image sensor unit 2311 (for example, the data such as the game state and the effect pattern transmitted by the game machine 3001) to the control unit 2301 of the data display 2001 via the communication interface 2310. A device for serial communication for transmission.

The host controller 2441 controls each device constituting the control LSI 2434, for example, the DSP circuit 2442, the UART 2452, and the like.

Further, when the host controller 2441 receives the VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2445 (when the YUV image data is stored in the SRAM 2443), the host controller 2441 performs the data reception process described later, so that various processes are performed as necessary. , Instruct the DSP circuit 2442.

The flash memory 2444 stores parameters used for various processes by various devices constituting the control LSI 2434, for example, the host controller 2441, the DSP circuit 2442, and the like, and data necessary for various processes. It also stores the coding method handled in the data reception process of the image sensor unit 2311.

In the present embodiment, the ISP circuit 2445 that converts the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2432 into image data (YUV image data) corresponding to the YUV color space and stores it in the SRAM 2443 as input image data (input information). , Configure the input information generation means.

(Production execution processing on the data display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the effect execution process executed by the control unit 2301 of the data display 2001 will be described. It should be noted that this process is basically started when the power is turned on to the data display 2001, and is periodically executed at predetermined intervals until the power is turned off.

First, the control unit 2301 inputs an output signal output from the external terminal plate 3308 of the game machine 3001 (step S1050). Next, in step S1051, it is determined whether or not any of the external signals 1 to 4 is changed. The external signals 1 to 4 are contents that can be appropriately adjusted between the game machine 3001 and the data display 2001. For example, as shown in FIG. 332, the “external signal 1” is generated in the game machine 3001 by RB. The "external signal 2" is a signal indicating that BB has occurred in the game machine 3001 or is in BB, and the "external signal 3" is a game. It can be a signal indicating that the machine 3001 has become ART or is in ART, and the "external signal 4" can be a signal indicating that the front door of the game machine 3001 is in the open state.

When there is a change in any of the external signals 1 to 4 (step S1051: YES), the control unit 2301 refers to, for example, an effect pattern table as shown in FIG. 330, and depending on the state of the external signals 1 to 4. The effect is changed, and counting is started according to the effect (step S1052).

After the end of step S1052, or when there is no change in any of the external signals 1 to 4 in step S1051 (step S1051: NO), the control unit 2301 transmits (transmitted by the game machine 3001) from the image sensor unit 2311. ) Acquire communication data (step S1053). This communication data is data generated by the image sensor unit 2311 from the image captured by the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 by the data reception process described later, and is stored in the communication data storage area of the RAM 2303 when the decoding is successful. Will be done.

Next, in step S1054, it is determined whether or not the control unit 2301 has acquired the communication data from the game machine 3001. When the communication data can be acquired (step S1054: YES), the control unit 2301 determines whether or not the acquired data is an effect instruction command including an effect pattern (step S1055). When the acquired data is an effect instruction command (step S1055: YES), the control unit 2301 refers to the effect pattern table, changes the effect according to the effect instruction command (step S1056), and processes to step S1050. Return. On the other hand, if the acquired data is not an effect instruction command (step S1055: NO), the control unit 2301 continues the current effect (step S1057) and returns the process to step S1050.

In step S1054, when the communication data from the game machine 3001 is not acquired (step S1054: NO), the control unit 2301 detects an error state (step S1058). Next, it is determined whether or not the count value at which counting is started in step S1052 satisfies the end condition (step S1059). When the count value satisfies the end condition (step S1059: YES), the control unit 2301 stops the effect being executed (step S1060), and returns the process to step S1050. On the other hand, when the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S1059: NO), the control unit 2301 returns the process to step S1050.

(LED control processing (data transmission processing) in the game machine)
Next, the LED control process executed by the sub-control unit 3302 of the game machine 3001 will be described with reference to FIG. 346. It should be noted that this process is basically started when the power is turned on to the game machine 3001 and is periodically executed at predetermined intervals until the power is turned off.

First, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether or not there is transmission data to be transmitted to the data display 2001 based on a change in the gaming state or the like (step S1080). If it is determined that there is no transmission data (step S1080: NO), the process ends.

If it is determined that there is transmission data (step S1080: YES), in step S1081, the sub-control unit 3302 performs an error coding process. This error coding process is, for example, a process of converting 8 bits of the original data into an error correction code (error correction code (16, 8)) having a length of 16 bits.

Next, in step S1082, it is determined whether or not the coding is CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access). This process is determined, for example, by referring to the coding method stored in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302. The coding method stored in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302 (of the game machine 3001), which is the transmission side of the communication data, and the flash memory of the image sensor unit 2311 (of the data display 2001), which is the reception side of the communication data. It is assumed that the encoding methods stored in 2444 match. In the present embodiment, this coding method is coding by CDMA or PSM (Manchester coding).

If it is determined that the coding is CDMA (step S1082: YES), the CDMA coding process is performed in step S1083. In this process, the converted transmission data converted into the error correction code in step S1081 is encoded by CDMA. This CDMA coding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 358.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the coding is not CDMA (step S1082: NO), the PSM coding process is performed in step S1084. In this process, the converted transmission data converted into the error correction code in step S1081 is encoded by the PSM. This PSM coding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 359.

After the end of step S1083 or after the end of step S1084, in step S1085, the LED effect pattern being executed or to be executed is acquired. This process is, for example, a process of extracting an illumination pattern (that is, a light emitting pattern of an LED (lamp 3305)) in an effect pattern being executed or to be executed, which is determined based on the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 330. Is. The light emission pattern extracted in this way is developed in, for example, the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302.

Next, in step S1086, the LED light emission pattern based on the transmission data encoded by CDMA or PSM and the LED light emission pattern based on the effect pattern acquired in step S1085 are combined. After that, the light emission pattern of the LED synthesized in this way is registered in the effect pattern being executed (step S1087), and the process is terminated. This registration process is realized, for example, by rewriting the light emission pattern of the LED developed in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302 to the synthesized light emission pattern. Then, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 based on the registered effect pattern, and the lamp control circuit 3306 controls the lighting (luminance and emission color) of the lamp 3305 based on this.

When synthesizing the LED light emission pattern based on the encoded transmission data with the LED light emission pattern in the effect pattern being executed, for example, when the bit of the transmission data is "1", the LED light emission is slightly brightened. Then, when the bit of the transmission data is "0", the pulse related to the transmission data is expressed by slightly dimming the light emission of the LED. By such synthesis, the player visually recognizes the LED (lamp 3305) emitting light by the effect as a natural lamp effect without recognizing that it contains the encoded transmission data, and as a result, the result. The transmitted data can be transmitted to the data display 2001 without making the player aware of it.

In the example shown in FIG. 346, the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 functions as a dual-purpose optical output device that executes the effect expression of the game machine 3001 and transmits data such as the game state and the effect pattern. Although it is configured, it can also be configured as a dedicated optical output device that only transmits data such as a game state and an effect pattern.

When the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 is configured as a dedicated optical output device, instead of the processing of steps S1085 to S1087, the transmission data encoded by CDMA or PSM and a reference constant brightness value are used. The light emission mode of the lamp 3305 is controlled based on the light emission pattern of the LED based on the light emission pattern. This is to deal with the problem that when the brightness due to the transmitted data itself is weak, the amount of light is too small to take a picture, and when the brightness is 0, the problem that the light emission data in the negative direction cannot be generated.

Further, in the example of FIG. 346, when transmitting data such as a game state and an effect pattern, error correction information is added by, for example, error correction coding, and 8 bits of the original data are error corrected with a length of 16 bits. Although it is converted into a code, such coding makes it possible to correct a 2-bit random error and further correct a 3-bit burst error. The error correction code in the present embodiment is, for example, a BCH code which is a kind of cyclic code, and the transmission data is encoded by the generation polynomial represented by the following equation 1.
G (x) = x ⁸ + x ⁷ + x ⁶ + x ⁴ + x ² + x + 1 ... (Equation 1)

Further, in the example of FIG. 346, CDMA coding and PSM coding are selectively used as the coding, but other coding can be configured to be used.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 3302 that executes the LED control process constitutes a transmission data generation means and a brightness generation means with information.

(Data reception processing in the image sensor unit of the data display)
Next, the data reception process controlled by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 will be described with reference to FIG. 347. It should be noted that this process is basically started when the power is turned on to the data display 2001, and is periodically executed at predetermined intervals until the power is turned off.

First, the host controller 2441 receives a plurality of image data (YUV image data) obtained by imaging the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 acquired by the ISP circuit 2445, and from the image data, the light source, that is, the image of the lamp 3305. A light source search process for specifying a position (region) is performed (step S1100). The details of the light source exploration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 348.

Next, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the light source can be specified. If the light source cannot be specified (step S1101: NO), the process returns to step S1100. On the other hand, when the light source can be specified (step S1101: YES), the image data acquisition process is performed in step S1102. This process is a process of sequentially acquiring image data (YUV image data) obtained by imaging the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 acquired by the ISP circuit 2445.

Next, noise removal processing is performed on the position of the light source determined in step S1100 and the received data grasped based on the image data acquired in step S1102 (step S1103). The details of the noise removal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 353.

Here, it is determined whether or not the received data that enables the decoding process is not accumulated, that is, whether or not the data is delayed (step S1104). Specifically, in the noise removal process of step S1103, when the noise removal process delay counter and the flicker removal delay counter do not reach the specified values, it is determined that the decoding process is not ready and the process is being delayed. Will be done.

If it is determined that the delay is in progress (step S1104: YES), the image data acquisition process in step S1102 is further executed. When it is determined that the delay is not in progress (step S1104: NO), the decoding process is performed (step S1105). The details of the decoding process will be described later with reference to FIG. 357.

After the decoding process, in step S1106, it is determined whether or not the decoding is successful. If the decoding is successful (step S1106: YES), an error correction process for converting the error correction code into the original data is performed (step S1107). Next, in step S1108, it is determined whether or not the error correction in the error correction code processing is successful.

If the error correction is successful (step S1108: YES), in step S1109, the decrypted data (received data received from the game machine 3001) is stored in the communication data storage area of the RAM 2303 of the data display 2001. Next, in step S1110, the reception error counter is cleared, and the process returns to the image data acquisition process in step S1102.

When it is not determined in step S1106 that the decoding was successful (step S1106: NO), or in step S1108, when it is not determined that the error correction in the error correction code processing was successful (step S1108: NO). In step S1111, the reception error counter stored in SRAM 2443 is updated by 1 (that is, 1 is added).

Next, in step S1112, it is determined whether or not the reception error counter is larger than ERROR_MAX. When it is determined that the reception error counter is not larger than ERROR_MAX (step S1112: NO), the process returns to the image data acquisition process in step S1102. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reception error counter is larger than ERROR_MAX (step S1112: YES), the reception error counter is cleared in step S1113, and the noise removal counter = 0 and the flicker removal counter = 0 in step S1114. After that, the process returns to the image data acquisition process of step S1102.

In the present embodiment, the host controller 2441, the DSP circuit 2442, and the ISP circuit 2445 that execute the extraction of the received data from the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2432 constitute an information extraction means and a light receiving control means. To do.

(Light source exploration processing in the image sensor unit of the data display)
Next, the light source search process controlled by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 348 to 352. The light source search process identifies the position of the LED light source in the image captured by the image sensor unit 2311 by utilizing the blinking control characteristic of the LED light source. In the present embodiment, the LED light source is analyzed and specified from the four characteristics of the brightness, periodicity, color, and size of the light source.

First, the host controller 2441 waits until it receives the VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2445 described above (step S1170). Then, in step S1171, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S1171: YES), the process returns to step S1170 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S1171: NO), the process proceeds to step S1172.

Such a time filter is for thinning out YUV image data obtained at 220 fps or 440 fps, for example, and is, for example, a time for acquiring YUV image data once every 3 to 8 times of VSYNC interrupt signal. It is a thinning filter. As described above, the time filter of the present embodiment simply thins out the YUV image data, but various other time direction LPFs (Low-pass filters) can be applied.

If it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S1171: NO), the input image data is acquired in step S1172. This process is a process of acquiring YUV image data stored in SRAM 2443.

FIG. 349 illustrates the acquired input image data. The input image data is YUV image data, and is represented by a two-dimensional array composed of a Y component, a U component, and a V component, respectively. Each element of the two-dimensional array corresponds to each pixel of the captured image, and FIG. 349 shows the value of each component at 12 × 12 pixels for convenience. The image sensor unit 2311 of the present embodiment provides, for example, YUV image data captured at 640 × 240 pixels.

Each component (that is, Y component, U component, V component) in the YUV image data can take a value of 8 bits per pixel, and in this case, the resolution of each component is 256 (floor) of 0 to 255. Tone). It should be noted that different resolutions can be adopted depending on the components. For example, the Y component can be set to 8 bits, and the U component and the V component can be set to 4 bits each. Further, in the present embodiment, YUV image data is used as the input image data, but RGB image data and HSV image data can also be used.

Next, in step S1173, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the average image generation process. The average image generation process is performed on the average image of this time from the average image data generated based on the YUV image data which is the input image data input up to the previous time and the YUV image data which is the input image data input this time. This is the process of generating data.

FIG. 349 illustrates the average image data of this time. Like the input image data, the average image data is also YUV image data, and is represented by a two-dimensional array composed of a Y component, a U component, and a V component, respectively. Each element of the two-dimensional array corresponds to each pixel of the captured image as well as the input image data.

The average image data is calculated by the following equation 2 for each component and each pixel. The initial value of the average image data is the first input image data in the monitoring time.
Average image data (x, y) = previous average image data (x, y) + difference * Learning coefficient ... (Equation 2)
The "previous average image data" is the average image data updated every time the input image data is acquired from the input image data input in the past. The "difference" is the input image data (x, y) of this time-the average image data (x, y) of the previous time, and the "learning coefficient" is a constant such as "0.91".
Here, assuming that the "learning coefficient" is 0.91, the above equation 2 can be rewritten to the following equation 3.
Average image data (x, y) = previous average image data (x, y) * 0.09 + current input image data (x, y) * 0.91 ... (Equation 3)
That is, as is clear from Equation 3, this average image data is obtained by a weighted average of the average image data up to the previous time and the input image data this time, and 91% of the elements of the latest input image data are in the past. 9% of the elements of the input image data are reflected.

Next, in step S1174, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the difference image generation process. The difference image generation process is a process of calculating the difference between the Y component of the input image data and the Y component of the average image data for each pixel at the same position and obtaining the difference image data.

FIG. 349 illustrates the difference image data. The difference image data shows the difference between the input image data (Y component) shown in FIG. 349 and the average image data (Y component). In the example of FIG. 349, there is a difference for the three pixels surrounded by the thick line (when the position of the upper left pixel is represented by (0,0)), the pixel (1,7) and the pixel (4,6). ) Are assigned a value of "1", and pixels (7, 6) are assigned a value of "2".

Next, in step S1175, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the cumulative value calculation process. In the cumulative value calculation process, when the value related to the pixel having a value other than "0" in the difference image data satisfies a predetermined condition, "1" is added to the pixel at the corresponding position for a certain period of time. Is a process of obtaining as cumulative image data. In the present embodiment, in order to efficiently search the light source, the cumulative image data is obtained by paying attention not only to the variable component but also to the color component.

For example, for each pixel having a value other than "0" in the difference image data, "1" is added to the position of the corresponding pixel in the cumulative image data when both the following condition 1 and condition 2 are satisfied.
<Condition 1>
Threshold 1a ≤ difference image data (Y component) (x, y) ≤ threshold 1b ... (Equation 4)
<Condition 2>
(Threshold 3 ≤ average image data 1 (x, y) ≤ threshold 4) & (threshold 5 ≤ average image data 2 (x, y) ≤ threshold 6) ... (Equation 5)

Equation 4 of condition 1 is conditional on the fluctuation component (vibration component) being within a predetermined range (for example, 0.5 to 3.0), and the value of the difference image data (x, y) is this fluctuation. It is a value representing a component, which is the difference between the Y component of the input image data and the Y component of the average image data. Further, since the fluctuation component is small, other values obtained based on the value of the difference image data (x, y), such as the squared value of the value of the difference image data (x, y), are used to satisfy the condition 1. Judgment can also be made.

Equation 5 of Condition 2 is conditional on the color component being within a predetermined range, where "average image data 1 (x, y)" is the (U component) of the average image data shown in FIG. 349. The "average image data 2 (x, y)" is the value of the corresponding pixel of the (V component) of the average image data shown in FIG. 349. It is also possible to determine the condition regarding the color component by using another value representing the color component of the average image data.

FIG. 349 illustrates the cumulative image data obtained as a result of performing the above cumulative value calculation process for a predetermined period based on the data including the average image data and the difference image data of FIG. 349.

When the cumulative image data is obtained in step S1175, the host controller 2441 performs the light source identification process in step S1176. In the light source identification process, the LED is an area having an area equal to or larger than a certain area based on the cumulative image data, and the area where the total of the cumulative values (values arranged in the pixels of the area in the cumulative image data) is maximum. It is regarded as a light source.

In the light source identification process of the present embodiment, when a set of pixels in which pixels having a cumulative value of 1 or more are arranged adjacent to each other in the cumulative image data is surrounded by a rectangular area, the x-coordinates are 3 pixels or more and , When the area is 2 pixels or more in the y coordinate (that is, an area of 3 × 2 (pixels) or more), this area (pixel area) is a light source candidate. In this example, even if two pixels having a cumulative value of 1 or more have an oblique positional relationship (that is, diagonally upper left, diagonally upper right, diagonally lower left, and diagonally lower right), these pixels are considered to be adjacent to each other. Although it is considered, it is also possible to prevent such an oblique positional relationship from being regarded as adjacent.

Here, a light source specifying process for specifying a pixel region as a light source candidate will be described with reference to FIGS. 350 to 352. The light source specifying process described in this embodiment is only an example, and the pixel region can be specified by various methods.

In order to explain an example of the light source specifying process according to the present invention, an example of cumulative image data in which cumulative values are arranged in a two-dimensional array is shown in FIGS. 350 to 352. This is similar to the cumulative image data shown in FIG. 349. Here, a two-dimensional array of 9 × 5 pixels consisting of pixels (0,0) to pixels (8,4) is illustrated.

In this two-dimensional array, exploration points for exploring the cumulative value are detected in order, labeling and concatenation are performed according to the cumulative value of the pixels, and finally, the above-mentioned fixed area (here, 3 × 2 pixels). ) A pixel area having an area equal to or larger than that is specified as a light source candidate. Labeling is the tentative marking of pixels in a pixel area that may be identified as a light source candidate. Hereinafter, each pixel of the cumulative image data shown in FIGS. 350 to 352 will be referred to as a "cell". This cell corresponds to the pixel position of the imaging data obtained as a result of imaging the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 with the image sensor unit 2311.

In FIGS. 350 to 352, the exploration points (cells targeted for exploration) at that time are indicated by vertical line hatching, the exploration points before the previous time are indicated by horizontal line hatching, and the labeled cells are indicated. It is shown by hatching with diagonal lines.

Further, in FIGS. 350 to 352, the search areas shown by thick lines are shown as P1-1 to P1-8, respectively, which are located at the search point and the left, upper left, upper, and upper right of the search point. It is an area containing four inspection points. The search area is controlled so that its range is sequentially moved by exploration, and at least the cumulative value of this search area is read into SRAM 2443 together with the cell position information at the time of exploration.

Here, in the cumulative image data shown in FIGS. 350 to 352, the flow of processing until the search point is detected in order and the region of the light source candidate is finally specified will be described.

First, the search point detection is started from the cell (0,0). In the search point detection, first, the cell (0,0) proceeds to the right to search for the first row of the cumulative image data, and then the second row at the lower row is searched. That is, in FIG. 350, the search is performed in order from cell (0,0)-> cell (8,0) to cell (0,1)-> cell (4,1). Up to this point, the cumulative value of each cell is "0", and these cells do not contribute to the identification of the light source, so they are skipped.

When the exploration point advances to cell (5,1), the cumulative value of this cell (5,1) is "67", and this situation is shown in FIG. 350A. As described above, the cell (5, 1) which is a search point and the search area P1-1 including four inspection points located on the left, upper left, upper, and upper right of this search point are shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 350B, the exploration point advances to the cell (6,1), and the cumulative value of this cell (6,1) is "57". At this time, the cells (5, 1) are grasped as the exploration points before the previous time.

Here, since the cells (5, 1) grasped as the search points before the previous time are included in the search area P1-2, the cells (5, 1) are labeled as shown in FIG. 350C. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 350D, the exploration point advances to the cell (7.1), and the cumulative value of this cell (7.1) is "39". At this time, the cells (6, 1) are grasped as the exploration points before the previous time.

Here, the cells (6, 1) grasped as the search points before the previous time are included in the search area P1-3, and the cells (6, 1) are labeled as shown in FIG. 350E. Further, since the cells (6, 1) are adjacent to the cells (5, 1) that have already been labeled, these cells are connected and grasped.

Next, the search is continued with cell (8,1), cell (0,2), and cell (1,2), and since the cumulative value of these cells is "0", it is skipped. After that, as shown in FIG. 351A, the exploration point advances to the cell (2,2), and the cumulative value of this cell (2,2) is "76". At this time, the cell (7, 1) is grasped as a search point before the previous time.

Here, since the cell (7, 1) grasped as the search point before the previous time is not included in the search area P1-4, the cell (7, 1) is not labeled at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 351B, the exploration point advances to the cell (3,2), and the cumulative value of this cell (3,2) is "103". At this time, the cells (2, 2) are grasped as the exploration points before the previous time.

Here, since the cell (7, 1) grasped as the search point before the previous time is still not included in the search area P1-5, the cell (7, 1) is not labeled at this point. Therefore, the cell (7,1) and the cell (2,2) are grasped as the exploration points before the previous time.

Here, as shown in FIG. 351C, the cells (2, 2) grasped as the search points before the previous time are included in the search area P1-5, and the cells (2, 2) are labeled.

Next, as shown in FIG. 351D, the exploration point advances to the cell (4,2), and the cumulative value of this cell (4,2) is "141". At this time, the cells (3, 2) are grasped as the exploration points before the previous time.

Here, as shown in FIG. 351E, the cells (3, 2) grasped as the search points before the previous time are included in the search area P1-6, and are therefore labeled. Further, since the cells (3, 2) are adjacent to the cells (2, 2) that have already been labeled, these cells are connected and grasped.

In addition, the cell (7, 1) grasped as the search point before the previous time is adjacent to the cell (6, 1) to be combined with the cell (5, 1) to be included in the search area P1-6. Therefore, here, the cells (5, 1), the cells (6, 1), and the cells (7, 1) are linked and grasped by being labeled.

Next, the search is continued with cells (5, 2) to cells (8, 2) and cells (0, 3), and since the cumulative value of these cells is "0", they are skipped. After that, as shown in FIG. 352A, the exploration point advances to the cell (1,3), and the cumulative value of this cell (1,3) is "49". At this time, the cells (4, 2) are grasped as the exploration points before the previous time.

Here, as shown in FIG. 352B, the cells (4, 2) grasped as the search points before the previous time are connected to the cells (2, 2) to be included in the search area P1-7. Since it is adjacent to (3, 2), it is labeled here. Further, since the cell (4, 2) is adjacent to the already labeled cell (3, 2), the cell (2, 2), the cell (3, 2), and the cell (4, 2) are connected. Be grasped. Further, the connected cells (2,2), cells (3,2), and cells (4,2) are the connected cells (5,1), cells (6,1), and cells (7,1). ) And the cell (2,2), the cell (3,2), the cell (4,2), the cell (5,1), the cell (6,1), the cell (7). , 1) are connected and grasped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 352C, the exploration point advances to the cell (2, 3), and the cumulative value of this cell (2, 3) is "4". At this time, the cells (1, 3) are grasped as the exploration points before the previous time.

Here, as shown in FIG. 352D, the cells (1,3) grasped as the search points before the previous time are labeled because they are included in the search area P1-8. Further, since the cell (1,3) is adjacent to the already labeled cell (2,2), it is connected to this cell (2,2) and grasped, and further, the cell (2,3) at the exploration point is grasped. ) Also has a cumulative value of "4" and is adjacent to the cell (2, 2), so that the cell (2, 3) is also connected to the cell (2, 2) and grasped, and finally the cell. (1,3), cell (2,3), cell (2,2), cell (3,2), cell (4,2), cell (5,1), cell (6,1), cell ( 7 and 1) are all connected and grasped.

Next, the search is continued with cell (3,3) to cell (8,3), cell (0,4) to cell (8,4), and skipped because the cumulative value of these cells is "0". And all exploration is completed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 352E, the combined and grasped cells (that is, cells (1,3), cells (2,3), cells (2,2), cells (3,2), cells (that is, cells) A pixel area P2 composed of rectangular cells including 4, 2), cell (5, 1), cell (6, 1), cell (7, 1)) is obtained, and this pixel area P2 has a fixed area (here, it is). Since it is an area of 3 × 2 pixels or more), it is finally specified as a light source candidate.

By applying the processing described above to the entire cumulative image data, a pixel region consisting of a set of cells whose cumulative value is not zero can be specified as a light source candidate, and if there are a plurality of such sets, a plurality of such sets can be specified. Light source candidates are identified.

In the present embodiment, the pixel area specified as the light source candidate is a rectangular area including a set of cells whose cumulative value is not zero, but based on the set of cells whose cumulative value is not zero or the set. The obtained area can also be specified as a pixel area.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the search of each cell, the cell having a cumulative value of zero is skipped, and such a cell having a cumulative value of zero is controlled so as not to be involved in the identification of the pixel region as a light source candidate. However, it skips cells whose cumulative value is less than a given value (for example, a value greater than zero, such as 5, 10) so that these cells are not involved in identifying pixel regions that are potential light sources. You can also do it.

When it is determined by the above-mentioned light source identification process that a plurality of pixel regions of light source candidates appear, the region having the largest sum of cumulative values in the pixel regions is specified as the position of the LED light source. In the present embodiment, the LED light source is set to one place, and one pixel area corresponding to the LED light source is specified as the position of the LED light source.

For example, taking the cumulative image data shown in FIG. 349 as an example, the pixel area R1 surrounded by a thick line is arranged in an area where pixels having a cumulative value of 1 or more are 2 × 2 (pixels). As described above, since it is not an area of 3 × 2 (pixels) or more, it cannot be a light source candidate.

Further, the pixel areas R2 and R3 surrounded by the thick line are both areas of 3 × 2 (pixels) or more having a cumulative value of 1 or more, and these are light source candidates, but are included in the area R2. Since the total of the cumulative values is "469" and the total of the cumulative values included in the area R3 is "162", finally, the area R2 where the total sum (total) of the cumulative values is large is the position of the LED light source. Specified as.

Next, in the light source identification process of step S1176, it is determined whether or not the position of the LED light source is specified (step S1177). When the position of the LED light source is specified (step S1177: NO), the process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the input image data and the average image data shown in FIG. 349 are updated frame by frame (for each thinned frame), and the difference image data and the cumulative image are updated accordingly. It is configured so that the position of the LED light source is specified based on the data.

When the position of the LED light source is not specified (step S1177: YES), it is determined in step S1178 whether or not it is within the monitoring time. In this embodiment, the monitoring time is 2 to 7 seconds. If it is within the monitoring time (step S1178: YES), the process returns to step S1170 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. If it is not within the monitoring time (step S1178: NO), the initialization process is performed (step S1179). In this initialization process, the average image data of each of the Y, U, and V components is used as the input image data corresponding to each pixel, and the difference image data and the cumulative image data are cleared, respectively. After step S1179, the process returns to step S1170 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal.

The LED light source can be effectively obtained by the light source exploration process as described above. The transmitted signal of the LED light source has characteristics in frequency and amplitude, and when the disturbance component is suppressed and passed through the threshold filter of the color, amplitude, and periodic component, the characteristics appear in the vicinity of the LED light source. Further, although the pulse of the transmitted data is spread over a wide band, if background subtraction (difference from the average image) is taken, the vicinity of the plateau can be easily extracted. Furthermore, the disturbance component can be suppressed to some extent by the time filter. The light source exploration process of the present invention is constructed based on such a principle, whereby effective light source exploration can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the host controller 2441, the DSP circuit 2442, and the ISP circuit 2445 that execute the light source search process constitute an optical output specifying means, and instruct the DSP circuit 2442 to execute the average image generation process. , The host controller 2441 that generates the average image data (average information) constitutes the average information generation means, instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to execute the difference image generation process, and generates the difference image data (difference information). The host controller 2441 configures the difference information generation means, and the host controller 2441 configures the cumulative information generation means by instructing the DSP circuit 2442 to execute the cumulative value calculation process and generate the cumulative image data (cumulative information). To do.

(Noise removal processing in the image sensor unit of the data display)
Next, the removal process controlled by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 353 to 356. The noise removal process is a process for removing noise such as blinking of the LED light source and flicker for the effect.

First, the host controller 2441 determines whether or not the noise removal delay counter is 10 or more (step S1130). When the noise removal delay counter is 10 or more (step S1130: YES), the light source image data acquisition process is performed in step S1132 to obtain the time-series observed values.

In this light source image data acquisition process, the value of the Y component is extracted from the pixel region (position of the LED light source in the YUV image data) specified in the light source identification process (see FIG. 348) of the light source search process, and the average thereof is calculated. .. In the example of FIG. 349, since the pixel region R2 (8 × 2 (pixels)) is specified as the LED light source, in the input image data (Y component) sequentially obtained, each Y component of the pixel corresponding to this region is specified. The values of are summed, and the total value is divided by the number of pixels 16 in the pixel area R2. Here, the average value of the values of the Y component corresponding to the pixel region R2 is grasped as the observed value, but the observed value may be obtained by another method. For example, the value of the Y component is weighted based on the cumulative value of each pixel in the pixel area R2, the value of the Y component corresponding to a specific pixel in the pixel area R2, the average value thereof, or the pixel. The average value of a certain region (for example, 3 × 2 (pixels)) centered on the largest value in the region R2 can be used as the observed value.

Next, in step S1133, edge retention smoothing filter processing is performed to estimate the effect value of the LED light emission pattern related to the effect. The edge retention smoothing filter, also called a domain transform filter, is a filter that smoothes small edges while retaining the signal of large edges. With the filter, the LED light emission pattern related to the effect can be estimated and extracted from the observed value on which the transmission data (data such as the game state and the effect pattern) transmitted from the game machine 3001 is superimposed.

FIG. 354 is a diagram conceptually showing an observed value on which transmission data (data such as a game state and an effect pattern) transmitted from the game machine 3001 is superimposed. As shown in FIG. 354, the value of the Y component at a specific position extracted from the YUV image data varies from the maximum luminance value (for example, MAX = 255) to the minimum luminance value (for example, MIN = 0). The transmission data is superimposed on the LED light emission pattern related to the effect represented by the thick line. That is, when the LED light emission pattern based on the transmission data is superimposed (combined) on the LED light emission pattern related to the effect, for example, when the bit of the transmission data is "1", it is slightly brighter than the LED light emission related to the effect. When the light is emitted and the bit of the transmission data is "0", the emission is slightly darker than the emission of the LED related to the effect.

For example, when the LED brightness is "128" in the LED light emission pattern related to the effect, and the transmission data bit is ON (that is, "1"), the LED brightness is "130" in the combined LED light emission pattern. On the other hand, if the bit of the transmission data is OFF (that is, "0"), the brightness of the LED is adjusted to "126" in the combined LED emission pattern. As described above, the fluctuation range of the luminance value superimposed by the transmission data is "2", which is extremely small compared to the width of the maximum luminance value and the minimum luminance value as shown in FIG. 354, and the thick line in FIG. 354. It is considerably smaller than the fluctuation range of the LED light emission pattern according to the effect represented by.

Further, in FIG. 354, the left end portion and the right end portion of the observed value are enlarged and displayed, and as these displays show, the fluctuation period of the luminance value superimposed by the transmitted data is shown by the thick line in FIG. 354. It can be seen that the fluctuation timing of the LED light emission pattern related to the represented production (basic fluctuation timing of the LED light emission due to the production) is considerably shorter.

FIG. 355A shows the observed value on which the transmitted data is superimposed in a more specific manner. In FIG. 355A, each of the YUV image data continuously captured is represented as a frame. Then, it can be seen that with the passage of time, there is a large fluctuation of the Y component as the LED light emission pattern related to the effect, and in addition, a small fluctuation of the Y component related to the transmission data is superimposed.

Next, in step S1134, the effect light emission removing process is performed. In this effect light emission removing process, the effect value (in the effect) extracted in step S1133 from the observed value acquired in step S1132 (the value obtained by superimposing the LED light emission pattern related to the effect and the transmission data transmitted from the game machine 3001). The signal value is obtained by subtracting the value (value corresponding to the LED light emission pattern).

FIG. 355B shows an example of the signal value obtained as a result of subtracting the effect value from the observed value.

When the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001 is configured as a dedicated optical output device that only transmits data such as a game state and an effect pattern, the effect value is not included, so that it is a reference constant brightness value. Should be subtracted.

Next, the host controller 2441 determines whether or not the flicker removal delay counter is 64 or more (step S1135). When the flicker removal delay counter is 64 or more (step S1135: YES), in step S1137, the flicker removal process is performed to remove the flicker component.

FIG. 356 shows the state of the flicker removing process. In FIG. 356A, the signal value after subtraction of the effect value shown in FIG. 355B is shown by a dotted line. The result of Fourier transforming the data represented in this way is shown in FIG. 356B. At this time, for example, a signal (flicker component) is extracted from periodic noise having a frequency of 100 Hz or 120 Hz due to disturbance of a fluorescent lamp or the like and suppressed. The suppressed flicker component is represented by the dotted line in FIG. 356B.

Next, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform an inverse Fourier transform to generate a signal value from which flicker has been removed. The solid line portion shown in FIG. 356A shows the pulse sequence generated by the inverse Fourier transform. As described above, in the flicker removal process, a signal value from which the flicker component has been removed is generated by using the Fourier transform and the inverse Fourier transform, as shown in FIG. 356A. The Fourier transform performed in the present embodiment employs a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), which depends on the characteristics of the light source, the lens used in the image sensor, and the like. , Other Fourier transforms can also be adopted.

If the noise removal delay counter is not 10 or more (step S1130: NO), 1 is added to the noise removal delay counter in step S1131. If the flicker removal delay counter is not 64 or more (step S1135: NO), 1 is added to the flicker removal delay counter. As described in the data reception process shown in FIG. 347, the noise removal process delay counter and the flicker removal delay counter are controlled so as not to perform the decoding process when the specified values are not reached. However, in the present embodiment, the decoding process is not performed. , Step S1132-Controlled to be delayed by 10 frames for the noise removal process in step S1134, and controlled to be delayed by 64 frames for the flicker removal process using the Fourier transform in step S1137. There is.

After the processing of step S1137, step S1131, and step S1136, the noise removal processing is completed.

(Decoding process in the image sensor unit of the data display)
Next, the decoding process controlled by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 will be described with reference to FIG. 357. The decoding process is a process of obtaining transmission data (data such as a game state and an effect pattern) transmitted from the game machine 3001 based on a signal value (pulse wave) obtained as a result of the noise removal process.

First, the host controller 2441 determines in step S1150 whether or not the coding is CDMA. This process is determined based on, for example, the data stored in the flash memory 2444 of the image sensor unit 2311.

If it is determined that the coding is CDMA (step S1150: YES), the CDMA decoding process is performed in step S1151. In this process, the signal value obtained as a result of the noise removal process is decoded by CDMA. The fact that the coding is CDMA indicates that the CDMA coding was used as the coding of the transmission data in the LED control process in the game machine 3001 shown in FIG. 346. This CDMA decoding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 358.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the coding is not CDMA (step S1150: NO), the PSM decoding process is performed in step S1152. In this process, the signal value obtained as a result of the noise removal process is decoded by PSM. The fact that the coding is PSM indicates that the PSM coding was used as the coding of the transmission data in the LED control process in the game machine 3001 shown in FIG. 346. This PSM decoding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 359.

Further, in the example of FIG. 357, CDMA decoding or PSM decoding is used according to the selection of coding in the LED control process in the game machine 3001 shown in FIG. 346, but in the LED control process in the game machine 3001. If other coding is used, it can be configured to use the corresponding decoding method accordingly.

(Encoding method and decoding method)
As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game machine 3001, the transmission data consisting of data such as the game state and the effect pattern is encoded in 1-bit units and transmitted to the data display 2001 as a pulse wave via the light emission of the LED. To do. Further, the data display 2001 received based on the image obtained by capturing the light emission of the LED calculates the correlation value with the code from the received pulse wave, and receives the pulse wave having the correlation value equal to or higher than the threshold value from the game machine 3001. Recognize as transmitted data.

For example, when the transmission data is 4-bit data "0011", the code bit "0101" is assigned to the bit "1", and the code bit corresponding to the bit "1" is inverted to the bit "0". When the bit "1010" is assigned, the encoded transmission data becomes a bit string "1010, 1010, 0101, 0101" (note that the comma in the bit is inserted for convenience because it separates 4 bits of the transmission data in an easy-to-understand manner. It was done).

In such a coded bit string, the start position of the code is unclear, and when the bit string data is slid to perform processing with a 4-bit window size, the same code appears in the window and the code is displayed. It includes a problem at the time of decoding that the correlation value with and becomes high.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is important to select a code whose start position of the code is easy to understand (that is, easy to synchronize) and whose autocorrelation and cross-correlation are low. The autocorrelation is a measure of how well the signal matches the signal when the signal itself is time-shifted, and the cross-correlation is a measure of the similarity between the two signals.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem at the time of decoding, in the present embodiment, a unique diffusion code is adopted in the CDMA coding. CDMA coding is a method used to perform two or more communications (multiple access) within the same frequency band.

Here, the CDMA code is set from the following viewpoints.
A. Select a CDMA code with low autocorrelation and low cross-correlation. That is, a diffusion code is adopted in which both the autocorrelation and the cross-correlation when inverted are small, and the correlation value when the window (separation window based on the processing unit or the like) is slid is small. ..
B. Two types of 16-bit diffusion codes are prepared. That is, the two diffusion codes are arranged so that the correlation value when the window is slid is low.
C. Only one bit at the tip of the transmission data is associated with a 32-bit spreading code, and the remaining bits are associated with a 16-bit spreading code. With this configuration, the start position of the transmitted data can be clearly grasped.

FIG. 358 shows an example of CDMA coding using the above diffusion code. FIG. 358A shows (in hexadecimal numbers) a leading 32-bit code and two 16-bit codes (16-bit code (1) and 16-bit code (2)) set according to the bits of the transmitted data. ing. When the leading bit of the transmission data is "1", the leading 32-bit code associated therewith is "36553cca", and when it is "0", it is "c9aac335". When the bit other than the tip bit of the transmission data is "1", the 16-bit code (1) associated with the bit is "3c35" and the 16-bit code (2) is "91da". When the bit other than the tip bit of the transmission data is "0", the 16-bit code (1) associated with the bit is "c3ca" and the 16-bit code (2) is "6e25".

Here, when the bit of the transmission data is "1", the leading 32-bit code, the 16-bit code (1), and the 16-bit code (2) are each when the bit of the transmission data is "0". , Bit "0" and bit "1" are inverted values.

For example, the 16-bit code (1) when the corresponding bit of the transmission data is “1” is “3c35” as shown in FIG. 358A, and is represented as “0011110000110101” in binary. On the other hand, the 16-bit code (1) when the corresponding bit of the transmission data is "0" is "c3ca" as shown in FIG. 358A, and is represented as "1100001111001010" in binary. Comparing the binary representations, it can be seen that the bit "1" and the bit "0" are inverted in each corresponding digit.

FIG. 358B shows what kind of code sequence is associated with the transmission data. The tip 32-bit code, 16-bit code (1), and 16-bit code (2) are indicated by the notations "tip", "(1)", and "(2)", respectively. Here, the transmission data is shown as 2-byte data. A leading 32-bit code is arranged in the first bit (first bit) of the transmission data, and if the bit is "1", the leading 32-bit code "1" corresponding to the bit "1" shown in FIG. 358A. If "36553cca" is associated and the bit is "0", the leading 32-bit code "c9aac335" corresponding to the bit "0" shown in FIG. 358A is associated.

A 16-bit code (1) is arranged in the second bit of the transmission data, and if the bit is "1", the 16-bit code (1) "3c35" corresponding to the bit "1" shown in FIG. 358A. , And if the bit is “0”, the 16-bit code (1) “c3ca” corresponding to the bit “0” shown in FIG. 358A is associated. Further, a 16-bit code (2) is arranged in the third bit of the transmission data, and if the bit is "1", the 16-bit code (2) corresponding to the bit "1" shown in FIG. 358A. If "91da" is associated and the bit is "0", the 16-bit code (2) "6e25" corresponding to the bit "0" shown in FIG. 358A is associated. Subsequently, similarly, the transmission data is encoded according to the sequence of codes shown in FIG. 358B and the contents of the corresponding bits.

The result of coding by the above method is shown in FIG. 358C. In Example 1 of FIG. 358C, the transmission data (2-byte error correction code “c53a” (hexary number) subjected to error coding processing) is converted by the above-mentioned coding, and the CDMA coded data shown in the bottom line is obtained. can get. The CDMA coded data is expressed in hexadecimal numbers, and finally becomes data having a length of 34 bytes (272 bits).

For example, in the case of Example 1, since the first bit (B0) is "1", the leading 32-bit code "36553cca" corresponding to the bit "1" is associated with the second bit (B1). Since it is "1", the 16-bit code (1) "3c35" corresponding to the bit "1" is associated with it, and since the third bit (B2) is "0", it corresponds to the bit "0". The bit code (2) "6e25" is associated, and thereafter, the association is performed in the same manner.

Example 2 of FIG. 358C shows an example of coding for different transmitted data. Here, the 2-byte error correction code "453a" (hexary number) subjected to the error coding process is converted by the above-mentioned coding, and the CDMA coded data shown in the bottom line is obtained. The CDMA coded data is expressed in hexadecimal numbers, and finally becomes data having a length of 34 bytes (272 bits).

The transmission data of Example 2 (error correction code “453a”) is different from the transmission data of Example 1 (error correction code “c53a”) only in the first bit when the bit arrangement is compared. Therefore, the first bit (B0) is associated with the leading 32-bit code “c9aac335” corresponding to the bit “0”, and the remaining bits are coded in the same manner as in Example 1.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 358A, the tip 32-bit code and the two 16-bit codes (16-bit code (1) and 16-bit code (2)) are set according to the bit contents of the transmission data. However, it is not limited to the value of each code as described above, and the effect of the present application can be achieved by using a combination of codes composed of other values.

Further, with respect to the arrangement of the symbols shown in FIG. 358B, various other patterns can be used to achieve the effect of the present application. Further, in the coding process for generating the CDMA coded data as shown in FIG. 358C, the sequence of the transmission data (error correction code) is rearranged in bit units or other units, and then the coding process is performed. May be done.

By using such CDMA coded data, preferable coding is realized in which the start position of the code becomes clear and the correlation value when the dividing window is slid becomes small.

In CDMA decoding, the original transmission data can be preferably grasped by reversing the coding process as described above.

Next, in PSM coding, the correspondence in the present embodiment for solving the above-mentioned problem at the time of decoding will be described. PSM coding uses Manchester code, in which bit "0" and bit "1" are represented by low-level to high-level transitions and high-level to low-level transitions, respectively. (It may be set in the opposite correspondence).

Here, Manchester code is set from the following viewpoints.
A. One bit of transmission data is represented by two bits. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the code from becoming monotonous and prevent noise from being recognized as a code.
B. Introduce a preamble (synchronous signal). That is, a 32-bit length preamble is introduced into one transmission data, and the preamble is complicated. With this configuration, the start position of the signal becomes clear, and the identification rate at the time of decoding can be improved.

In this embodiment, a Manchester code in which the transmission data bit "1" is encoded into a 2-bit "01" and the transmission data bit "0" is encoded into a 2-bit "10" is used.

FIG. 359 shows an example of PSM coding using the above Manchester code. FIG. 359A shows an example of transmission data (error correction code). This transmission data is the same 2-byte data "c53a" (hexary number) as the error correction code shown in FIG. 358C.

FIG. 359B shows an example in which the transmission data “c53a” shown in FIG. 359A is encoded. At the beginning of the data obtained as a result of the coding process, a bit string in which the 2-bit "10" is repeated 15 times and then the 2-bit "01" is added once is arranged as a preamble. .. After that, the Manchester code corresponding to each bit of the transmission data is arranged. The resulting PSM-encoded data is 8-byte (64-bit) long data.

Such coding complicates the coded data, prevents noise from being recognized as a code, and preambles make the start of the signal clear and improve the identification rate during decoding. Can be made to.

In PSM decoding, the original transmission data can be preferably grasped by executing the coding process as described above in reverse.

Although the gaming system according to the 14th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment. Further, it can be applied to the embodiments and modifications described in the 7th to 13th embodiments. Further, the data display 2001 may be the game device or the game display device shown in the seventh to thirteenth embodiments, and further, the game medium lending device and the game machine decoration provided in the game machine. It can be various gaming devices including a unit for games and the like.

Further, regarding the display device for games, a different screen unit may be applied to each game machine, or the same type of screen unit may be applied to so-called island units.

Further, the game display device may be configured as a transmissive projector device and may be replaceable with a screen unit having a different screen form. For example, the projector main body is installed on the upper surface or the side surface of the housing. You may do so. Further, for example, the light projected from the projector main body may be directly incident on the incident surface on the back side of the screen without using a reflector.

The replaceable type of the screen unit is not limited to the three types of the above-described embodiment, and may be two types or four or more types as long as the screen form is different. Further, the material of the screen may be different regardless of the form of the screen.

The position of the light emitting surface is not limited to the left and right ends of the front surface, and may be, for example, an upper portion, a lower portion, or a side surface of the front surface.

The second display surface is not limited to the shape described above, and may have, for example, a parallelogram, a rhombus, or a circular shape as long as it has a thickness in front of the first display surface.

The operation unit including the button may be provided integrally with the screen unit.

When replacing the screen unit, it may be necessary to change the projection data corresponding to the projection image or optically correct the projection image because the shape and characteristics of the screen are different. In order to deal with such a case, the control unit of the game display device stores in advance the projection image data and the setting information related to the optical correction data according to the form of each screen, and responds to each screen. The setting information may be called and applied.

Further, in order to realize a configuration in which the corresponding setting information can be applied when the screen unit is replaced, (1) a process of determining whether or not the LED board (cable) is connected by the control unit is provided, and (2) the screen unit. When the control unit of the chassis is started after the screen unit is replaced, a specific command is sent from the control unit to the control unit to determine which screen unit the control unit is connected to. The setting screen may be displayed by providing a process for determining in (3) by operating the button of the operation unit, and the administrator may be able to input the type of the screen unit after replacement as setting information on this setting screen. ..

Such setting information can be said to be information that determines what kind of projection method (method) is used to project one image data. Further, the setting information may be changed from the server device as a hall computer, or when it is changed in one game display device by the master-slave method, it is also changed in another game display device. You may.

[Extensibility of game machines]
In the gaming machines of the 7th to 14th embodiments, a player's medal insertion operation (that is, an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into a medal insertion slot, or a credited medal being inserted into a MAX bet button, or 1 When the game is started by operating the bet button and the medal is paid out at the end of the game, the hopper device is driven to pay out the medal from the medal payout exit, or The form of credit has been described, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is performed based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is input (hanged) and the game medium is paid out by the physical movement of the player, but also the main control circuit (main control board) itself electromagnetically transmits the game medium owned by the player. It may be the one that manages the game in a targeted manner and enables the game without medals. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit (main control board) and manages the game medium.

In this case, the game medium management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the game machine, and is bidirectional with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected so as to be communicable, and wins a prize for the operation of lending the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium necessary for the player to perform the operation of inserting the game medium) or the payout of the game medium. (That is, the operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the action of making the player acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium) when the winning combination is established), or the game medium used for the game. It suffices that the operation of electromagnetically recording is possible. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the game machine based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. In addition to the case of direct operation, when the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. May be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown) is performed. It may be feasible. In that case, the player may be stored by setting information such as a one-time password that only the player can know, or by using an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without medals, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, or these are controlled by a main control circuit (main control board) and controlled therefor. Based on the result being transmitted, it is also possible to adopt a method that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed. ..

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachislot game machine is described, but the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned game ball are also provided with the game medium management device in the same manner, and the game is played. It is also possible to manage the game medium of the person.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors, hopper devices, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced. It also reduces power consumption. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

It should be noted that the gaming device, the optical communication device, the gaming machine, and the gaming system according to the embodiment of the present invention basically have the following features and effects.

[Appendix 1A1]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and is a gaming device capable of removing ambient light and identifying an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy. An object of the present invention is to provide an optical communication device and a game system.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A non-contact receiving device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) is provided.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) for inputting an optical signal from an optical output means (for example, a lamp 3305) included in an external device (for example, a game machine 3001), and
It has an optical output specifying means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) that specifies an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means (for example, ISP circuit 2445) that generates input information (for example, input image data) of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
An average information generating means (for example, host controller 2441, DSP circuit 2442) that generates average information (for example, average image data) of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
Difference information generating means (for example, host controller 2441, DSP circuit 2442) for generating difference information (for example, difference image data) between the input information and the average information, and
A cumulative information generation means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442) that generates cumulative information (for example, cumulative image data) based on the difference information is provided.
A gaming device (for example, data display 2001) that identifies the output of the optical output means based on the cumulative information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from an optical output means provided in an external device, and
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means that generates input information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an input information generating means.
An average information generating means that generates average information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an average information generating means.
A difference information generating means for generating difference information between the input information and the average information,
A cumulative information generation means for generating cumulative information based on the difference information is provided.
An optical communication device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) that identifies the output of the optical output means based on the cumulative information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
With a non-contact transmitter (for example, game machine 3001),
A non-contact receiver (for example, data display 2001) is provided.
The non-contact transmitter is
Transmission data generation means (for example, sub-control unit 3302) for generating transmission data, and
It has an optical output means (for example, a lamp 3305) that converts the transmission data generated by the transmission data generation means into an optical signal and outputs the signal.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from the optical output means of the non-contact transmitter, and an optical input means.
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means that generates input information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an input information generating means.
An average information generating means that generates average information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an average information generating means.
A difference information generating means for generating difference information between the input information and the average information,
A cumulative information generation means for generating cumulative information based on the difference information is provided.
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system 5001) that specifies the output of the optical output means based on the cumulative information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

[Appendix 1A2]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and is a gaming device capable of removing ambient light and identifying an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy. An object of the present invention is to provide an optical communication device and a game system.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A non-contact receiving device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) is provided.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) for inputting an optical signal from an optical output means (for example, a lamp 3305) included in an external device (for example, a game machine 3001), and
It has an optical output specifying means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) that specifies an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means (for example, ISP circuit 2445) that generates input information (for example, input image data) of the input optical signal on a frame-by-frame basis based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
An average information generating means (for example, host controller 2441, DSP circuit 2442) that generates average information (for example, average image data) of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means is provided.
The output of the optical output means is specified based on the difference information (for example, difference image data) between the input information and the average information.
The average information generating means is
The average information is sequentially updated based on the difference information between the input information of the generated frame and the average information related to the frames before the frame, and a predetermined coefficient (for example, a learning coefficient such as 0.91) (for example, a learning coefficient such as 0.91). For example, a gaming device (for example, data display 2001) that generates average information by updating the average image data according to the formula 1 described later.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from an optical output means provided in an external device, and
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means that generates input information of the input optical signal on a frame-by-frame basis based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
An average information generating means for generating average information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means is provided.
The output of the optical output means is specified based on the difference information between the input information and the average information.
The average information generating means is
An optical communication device that generates average information by sequentially updating the average information based on the difference information between the input information of the generated frame and the average information related to the frames before the frame, and a predetermined coefficient. (For example, image sensor unit 2311).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
With a non-contact transmitter (for example, game machine 3001),
A non-contact receiver (for example, data display 2001) is provided.
The non-contact transmitter is
Transmission data generation means (for example, sub-control unit 3302) for generating transmission data, and
It has an optical output means (for example, a lamp 3305) that converts the transmission data generated by the transmission data generation means into an optical signal and outputs the signal.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from the optical output means of the non-contact transmitter, and an optical input means.
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means that generates input information of the input optical signal on a frame-by-frame basis based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
An average information generating means for generating average information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means is provided.
The output of the optical output means is specified based on the difference information between the input information and the average information.
The average information generating means is
A gaming system that generates average information by sequentially updating the average information based on the difference information between the input information of the generated frame and the average information related to the frames before the frame, and a predetermined coefficient ( For example, the game system 5001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

[Appendix 1B1]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and is a gaming device capable of removing ambient light and identifying an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy. An object of the present invention is to provide an optical communication device and a game system.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A non-contact receiving device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) is provided.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) for inputting an optical signal from an optical output means (for example, a lamp 3305) included in an external device (for example, a game machine 3001), and
It has an optical output specifying means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) that specifies an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means (for example, ISP circuit 2445) that generates input information (for example, input image data) of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
An average information generating means (for example, host controller 2441, DSP circuit 2442) that generates average information (for example, average image data) of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
Difference information generating means (for example, host controller 2441, DSP circuit 2442) for generating difference information (for example, difference image data) between the input information and the average information, and
A cumulative information generation means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442) for generating cumulative information (for example, cumulative image data) composed of an array of cumulative values based on the difference information is provided.
Based on the cumulative information, a determination range of the array of the cumulative information (for example, pixel regions R1 to R3 shown in the cumulative image data of FIG. 349) is detected, and when the detected determination ranges are plural, the determination range A gaming device (for example, data display 2001) that specifies the determination range in which the sum of the cumulative values in the above is the largest (for example, the pixel region R2 shown in the cumulative image data of FIG. 349) as the output of the optical output means.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from an optical output means provided in an external device, and
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means that generates input information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an input information generating means.
An average information generating means that generates average information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an average information generating means.
A difference information generating means for generating difference information between the input information and the average information,
A cumulative information generation means for generating cumulative information consisting of an array of cumulative values based on the difference information is provided.
Based on the cumulative information, the determination range of the array of the cumulative information is detected, and when the detected determination ranges are plural, the determination range having the largest sum of the cumulative values in the determination range is output by the optical output means. (For example, image sensor unit 2311).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
With a non-contact transmitter (for example, game machine 3001),
A non-contact receiver (for example, data display 2001) is provided.
The non-contact transmitter is
Transmission data generation means to generate transmission data,
It has an optical output means that converts the transmission data generated by the transmission data generation means into an optical signal and outputs it.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from the optical output means of the non-contact transmitter, and an optical input means.
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means that generates input information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an input information generating means.
An average information generating means that generates average information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an average information generating means.
A difference information generating means for generating difference information between the input information and the average information,
A cumulative information generation means for generating cumulative information consisting of an array of cumulative values based on the difference information is provided.
Based on the cumulative information, the determination range of the array of the cumulative information is detected, and when the detected determination ranges are plural, the determination range having the largest sum of the cumulative values in the determination range is output by the optical output means. (For example, game system 5001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

[Appendix 1B2]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and is a gaming device capable of removing ambient light and identifying an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy. An object of the present invention is to provide an optical communication device and a game system.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A non-contact receiving device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) is provided.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) for inputting an optical signal from an optical output means (for example, a lamp 3305) included in an external device (for example, a game machine 3001), and
It has an optical output specifying means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) that specifies an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means (for example, ISP circuit 2445) that generates input information (for example, input image data) of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
An average information generating means (for example, host controller 2441, DSP circuit 2442) that generates average information (for example, average image data) of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means.
Difference information generating means (for example, host controller 2441, DSP circuit 2442) for generating difference information (for example, difference image data) between the input information and the average information, and
Cumulative information generation means (for example, host controller 2441, DSP circuit 2442) that generates cumulative information (for example, cumulative image data) composed of an array of cumulative values based on the difference information.
A determination range detecting means (for example, a host controller 2441) for detecting a determination range of an array of the accumulated information based on the accumulated information is provided.
The determination range detecting means is
Search for the cumulative value of the cumulative information
When the cumulative value of the predetermined value or more is arranged in the array adjacent to the array in which the cumulative value of the predetermined value or more is arranged (for example, when a plurality of arrays having one or more accumulated values are arranged adjacent to each other). ), And the range of the array including those cumulative values satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the rectangular area including the array group in which a plurality of arrays having one or more cumulative values are arranged adjacently is 3). A gaming device (for example, data display 2001) that detects the range of the array as the determination range (for example, the pixel areas R1 to R3 shown in the cumulative image data of FIG. 349) in the area of × 2 or more). ..

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from an optical output means provided in an external device, and
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means that generates input information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an input information generating means.
An average information generating means that generates average information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an average information generating means.
A difference information generating means for generating difference information between the input information and the average information,
Cumulative information generation means for generating cumulative information consisting of an array of cumulative values based on the difference information,
A determination range detecting means for detecting a determination range of an array of the accumulated information based on the cumulative information is provided.
The determination range detecting means is
Search for the cumulative value of the cumulative information
In an array adjacent to an array in which cumulative values of a predetermined value or more are arranged, when cumulative values of the predetermined value or more are arranged and the range of the array including those cumulative values satisfies a predetermined condition. An optical communication device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) that detects the range of the array as the determination range.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
With a non-contact transmitter (for example, game machine 3001),
A non-contact receiver (for example, data display 2001) is provided.
The non-contact transmitter is
Transmission data generation means to generate transmission data,
It has an optical output means that converts the transmission data generated by the transmission data generation means into an optical signal and outputs it.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from the optical output means of the non-contact transmitter, and an optical input means.
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the optical output means based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light output specifying means
An input information generating means that generates input information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an input information generating means.
An average information generating means that generates average information of the input optical signal based on the optical signal input by the optical input means, and an average information generating means.
A difference information generating means for generating difference information between the input information and the average information,
Cumulative information generation means for generating cumulative information consisting of an array of cumulative values based on the difference information,
A determination range detecting means for detecting a determination range of an array of the accumulated information based on the cumulative information is provided.
The determination range detecting means is
Search for the cumulative value of the cumulative information
In an array adjacent to an array in which cumulative values of a predetermined value or more are arranged, when cumulative values of the predetermined value or more are arranged and the range of the array including those cumulative values satisfies a predetermined condition. , A game system that detects the range of the array as the determination range (for example, the game system 5001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to remove ambient light and identify an LED light source for data communication efficiently and with high accuracy.

[Appendix 1C]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and is configured so that the effect LED is also used as the communication LED, thereby suppressing an increase in component cost and information transmitted by the LED. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine and a game system capable of preventing the player from recognizing the LED.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit (for example, lamp 3305) whose brightness can be adjusted, and
A light emitting control unit (for example, a sub control unit 3302 and a lamp control circuit 3306) that controls the brightness of the light emitting unit is provided.
The light emission control unit
Luminance generation means for generating the brightness value of the light emitting portion from the light emission pattern corresponding to the effect, and
It has a luminance generating means with information that generates an information-attached luminance value by adding information (for example, data such as a technique state and an effect pattern) to the luminance value generated by the luminance generating means.
The brightness of the light emitting unit is controlled based on the brightness value with information.
The information added to the luminance value is a game machine (for example, a game machine 3001) having a change amount smaller than the luminance value and a cycle shorter than the fluctuation timing in the light emission pattern (see FIG. 354).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the effect LED can be configured to be also used as the communication LED, whereby the increase in the component cost can be suppressed and the information transmitted by the LED can be transmitted to the player. It can be prevented from being recognized.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Further, it has a coding means for generating coded data by performing a first coding and a second coding different from the first coding with respect to the information-attached luminance value.
The light emitting control unit is configured to control the brightness of the light emitting unit based on the coded data.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the effect LED can be configured to be also used as the communication LED, whereby the increase in the component cost can be suppressed and the information transmitted by the LED can be transmitted to the player. It can be prevented from being recognized. In addition, the transmission data can be decoded with higher accuracy by the first coding and the second coding.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
With a non-contact transmitter (for example, game machine 3001),
A non-contact receiver (for example, data display 2001) is provided.
The non-contact transmitter is
A light emitting part that can adjust the brightness of light,
It has a light emitting control unit that controls the brightness of the light emitting unit, and has a light emitting control unit.
The non-contact receiving device is
An optical input means for inputting an optical signal from the light emitting unit of the non-contact transmitter, and
It has an optical output specifying means for specifying an output of the light emitting unit based on an optical signal input by the optical input means.
The light emission control unit
Luminance generation means for generating the brightness value of the light emitting portion from the light emission pattern corresponding to the effect, and
It has a luminance generating means with information that adds information to the luminance value generated by the luminance generating means to generate a luminance value with information.
The brightness of the light emitting unit is controlled based on the brightness value with information.
The information added to the luminance value is a gaming system (for example, a gaming system 5001) in which the amount of change is smaller than the indicated luminance value and the cycle is shorter than the fluctuation timing in the light emitting pattern.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the effect LED can be configured to be also used as the communication LED, whereby the increase in the component cost can be suppressed and the information transmitted by the LED can be transmitted to the player. It can be prevented from being recognized.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, when the effect LED is also used as the communication LED, the increase in the component cost is suppressed, and the LED transmits information related to the effect other than the definite information (such as the medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal). Since the information cannot be recognized by the player based on the light emission pattern, the interest of the game is not impaired.

[Appendix 1D1]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and the transmission data is transmitted so that the transmission data transmitted by the LED can be received with high accuracy by encoding with an error correction code. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming device, an optical communication device, a gaming machine, and a gaming system capable of playing a game.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, gaming machines, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
Specific information (for example, data obtained by superimposing an LED light emission pattern based on transmission data on an LED light emission pattern related to production) from a light emitting unit (for example, lamp 3305) of an external device (for example, a game machine 3001) that emits light). A light receiving unit (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) that receives light including
An information extraction means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information is information in which error correction information (for example, an error correction code such as a BCH code) is added to the basic basic information.
The information extraction means is a gaming device (for example, a data display 2001) that extracts the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and acquires the basic information from the extracted specific information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data can be transmitted so that the transmission data transmitted by the LED is encoded by the error correction code and can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving part that receives light containing specific information from a light emitting part of an external device that emits light, and a light receiving part that receives light containing specific information.
An information extraction means for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information is information in which error correction information is added to the basic basic information.
The information extraction means is an optical communication device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) that extracts the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and acquires the basic information from the extracted specific information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data can be transmitted so that the transmission data transmitted by the LED is encoded by the error correction code and can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit that emits light (for example, a lamp 3305) and
The light emitted by the light emitting unit includes specific information (for example, data obtained by superimposing an LED light emitting pattern based on transmission data on the LED light emitting pattern related to the effect) of an external device (for example, data display 2001). A light emitting control unit (for example, a sub-control unit 3302 and a lamp control circuit 3306 of the game machine 3001) that controls the light emitting unit so that the light receiving unit (for example, the CMOS image sensor 2432) can receive light from the light emitting unit. , With
The specific information is information in which error correction information is added to the basic basic information.
The light emission control unit is a game machine (for example, a game machine 3001) that transmits the specific information by emitting light from the light emitting unit based on the specific information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data can be transmitted so that the transmission data transmitted by the LED is encoded by the error correction code and can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit that emits light (for example, lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001) and
A light emitting control unit (for example, a light emitting control unit) that controls the light emitting unit by including specific information (for example, data in which an LED light emitting pattern based on transmission data is superimposed on the LED light emitting pattern related to the effect) in the light emitted by the light emitting unit. , Sub-control unit 3302 and lamp control circuit 3306) of the game machine 3001
A light receiving unit that receives the light emitted by the light emitting unit (for example, the CMOS image sensor 2432 of the data display 2001) and
An information extraction means (for example, a host controller 2441 of a data display 2001, an ISP circuit 2445) for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information is information in which error correction information is added to the basic basic information.
The information extraction means is a gaming system (for example, a gaming system 5001) that extracts the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and acquires the basic information from the extracted specific information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data can be transmitted so that the transmission data transmitted by the LED is encoded by the error correction code and can be received with high accuracy.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, by encoding the transmission data transmitted by the LED with an error correction code, for example, a random error up to 2 bits and a burst error having a length of 3 bits can be corrected. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.

[Appendix 1D2]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and is high by encoding the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. An object of the present invention is to provide a game device, an optical communication device, a game machine, and a game system capable of transmitting transmission data so that the data can be received with high accuracy.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, gaming machines, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
Specific information (for example, data obtained by superimposing an LED light emission pattern based on transmission data on an LED light emission pattern related to production) from a light emitting unit (for example, lamp 3305) of an external device (for example, a game machine 3001) that emits light). A light receiving unit (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) that receives light including
An information extraction means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information includes a first coding (for example, error correction coding) by error correction information (for example, an error correction code such as a BCH code) and the first coding for the underlying basic information. Is a different second coded information,
The second coding is
CDMA coding,
The first bit is associated with a second spreading code that is longer than the first spreading code associated with the remaining bits.
As the first diffusion code, a set of two codes having low autocorrelation and low cross-correlation is used.
The information extraction means is a gaming device (for example, a data display) that acquires the basic information by extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and decoding the extracted specific information. 2001).

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data transmitted by the LED encodes the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving part that receives light containing specific information from a light emitting part of an external device that emits light, and a light receiving part that receives light containing specific information.
An information extraction means for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information is information in which the basic basic information is first encoded by error correction information and a second coding different from the first coding is applied.
The second coding is
CDMA coding,
The first bit is associated with a second spreading code that is longer than the first spreading code associated with the remaining bits.
As the first diffusion code, a set of two codes having low autocorrelation and low cross-correlation is used.
The information extraction means is an optical communication device (for example, an image sensor unit) that acquires the basic information by extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and decoding the extracted specific information. 2311).

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data transmitted by the LED encodes the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit that emits light (for example, a lamp 3305) and
The light emitted by the light emitting unit includes specific information (for example, data obtained by superimposing an LED light emitting pattern based on transmission data on the LED light emitting pattern related to the effect) of an external device (for example, data display 2001). A light emitting control unit (for example, a sub-control unit 3302 and a lamp control circuit 3306 of the game machine 3001) that controls the light emitting unit so that the light receiving unit (for example, the CMOS image sensor 2432) can receive light from the light emitting unit. , With
The specific information is information in which the basic basic information is first encoded by error correction information and a second coding different from the first coding is applied.
The second coding is
CDMA coding,
The first bit is associated with a second spreading code that is longer than the first spreading code associated with the remaining bits.
As the first diffusion code, a set of two codes having low autocorrelation and low cross-correlation is used.
The light emission control unit is a game machine (for example, a game machine 3001) that transmits the specific information by emitting light from the light emitting unit based on the specific information.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data transmitted by the LED encodes the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit that emits light (for example, lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001) and
A light emitting control unit (for example, a light emitting control unit) that controls the light emitting unit by including specific information (for example, data in which an LED light emitting pattern based on transmission data is superimposed on the LED light emitting pattern related to the effect) in the light emitted by the light emitting unit. , Sub-control unit 3302 and lamp control circuit 3306) of the game machine 3001
A light receiving unit that receives the light emitted by the light emitting unit (for example, the CMOS image sensor 2432 of the data display 2001) and
An information extraction means (for example, a host controller 2441 of a data display 2001, an ISP circuit 2445) for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information is information in which the basic basic information is first encoded by error correction information and a second coding different from the first coding is applied.
The second coding is
CDMA coding,
The first bit is associated with a second spreading code that is longer than the first spreading code associated with the remaining bits.
As the first diffusion code, a set of two codes having low autocorrelation and low cross-correlation is used.
The information extraction means extracts the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and decodes the extracted specific information to acquire the basic information (for example, the game system 5001). ..

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data transmitted by the LED encodes the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, highly reliable data reception is realized by encoding the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding.

[Appendix 1D3]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and is high by encoding the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. An object of the present invention is to provide a game device, an optical communication device, a game machine, and a game system capable of transmitting transmission data so that the data can be received with high accuracy.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, gaming machines, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
Specific information (for example, data obtained by superimposing an LED light emission pattern based on transmission data on an LED light emission pattern related to production) from a light emitting unit (for example, lamp 3305) of an external device (for example, a game machine 3001) that emits light). A light receiving unit (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) that receives light including
An information extraction means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information includes a first coding (for example, error correction coding) by error correction information (for example, an error correction code such as a BCH code) and the first coding for the underlying basic information. Is a different second coded information,
The second coding is
Manchester coding,
Includes a given sync signal at the beginning
The information extraction means is a gaming device (for example, a data display) that acquires the basic information by extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and decoding the extracted specific information. 2001).

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data transmitted by the LED encodes the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving part that receives light containing specific information from a light emitting part of an external device that emits light, and a light receiving part that receives light containing specific information.
An information extraction means for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information is information in which the basic basic information is first encoded by error correction information and a second coding different from the first coding is applied.
The second coding is
Manchester coding,
Includes a given sync signal at the beginning
The information extraction means is an optical communication device (for example, an image sensor unit) that acquires the basic information by extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and decoding the extracted specific information. 2311).

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data transmitted by the LED encodes the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit that emits light (for example, a lamp 3305) and
The light emitted by the light emitting unit includes specific information (for example, data obtained by superimposing an LED light emitting pattern based on transmission data on the LED light emitting pattern related to the effect) of an external device (for example, data display 2001). A light emitting control unit (for example, a sub-control unit 3302 and a lamp control circuit 3306 of the game machine 3001) that controls the light emitting unit so that the light receiving unit (for example, the CMOS image sensor 2432) can receive light from the light emitting unit. , With
The specific information is information in which the basic basic information is first encoded by error correction information and a second coding different from the first coding is applied.
The second coding is
Manchester coding,
Includes a given sync signal at the beginning
The light emission control unit is a game machine (for example, a game machine 3001) that transmits the specific information by emitting light from the light emitting unit based on the specific information.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data transmitted by the LED encodes the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.

The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit that emits light (for example, lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001) and
A light emitting control unit (for example, a light emitting control unit) that controls the light emitting unit by including specific information (for example, data in which an LED light emitting pattern based on transmission data is superimposed on the LED light emitting pattern related to the effect) in the light emitted by the light emitting unit. , Sub-control unit 3302 and lamp control circuit 3306) of the game machine 3001
A light receiving unit that receives the light emitted by the light emitting unit (for example, the CMOS image sensor 2432 of the data display 2001) and
An information extraction means (for example, a host controller 2441 of a data display 2001, an ISP circuit 2445) for extracting the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The specific information is information in which the basic basic information is first encoded by error correction information and a second coding different from the first coding is applied.
The second coding is
Manchester coding,
Includes a given sync signal at the beginning
The information extraction means extracts the specific information from the light received by the light receiving unit and decodes the extracted specific information to acquire the basic information (for example, the game system 5001). ..

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the transmission data transmitted by the LED encodes the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding. Transmission data can be transmitted so that it can be received with high accuracy.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, highly reliable data reception is realized by encoding the transmission data transmitted by the LED by the first coding by the error correction code and the second coding.

[Appendix 1E]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and when the lighting control of the LED is performed based on the light emission pattern based on the effect pattern and the transmission data such as the game state and the effect pattern, the effect is achieved. An object of the present invention is to provide a game device, an optical communication device, and a game system capable of extracting components related to transmission data such as a game state and an effect pattern by eliminating components of a light emission pattern based on the pattern.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving unit (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) that receives light from a light emitting unit (for example, a lamp 3305) of an external device (for example, a game machine 3001), and
A light receiving control means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) that acquires light information based on the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The light from the light emitting unit is controlled to emit light so as to include a light emitting pattern for effect and specific information (for example, data such as a game state and an effect pattern).
The light receiving control means
The light emission pattern for effect is detected based on the light information (for example, as shown in FIG. 355A, edge retention smoothing filter processing is performed to estimate the effect value of the LED light emission pattern related to the effect).
The specific information is acquired by excluding the light emission pattern for effect detected from the light information from the light information (for example, as shown in FIG. 355B, the estimated effect value is subtracted from the observed value). A game device (for example, a data display 2001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, even when the lighting control of the LED is performed based on the light emitting pattern based on the effect pattern and the transmission data such as the game state and the effect pattern, the light emitting on the receiving side is based on the effect pattern. It is possible to eliminate the component of the pattern and extract the component related to the transmission data such as the game state and the effect pattern.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving part that receives light from the light emitting part of an external device,
A light receiving control means for acquiring light information based on the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The light from the light emitting unit is controlled to emit light so as to include a light emitting pattern for effect and specific information.
The light receiving control means
Based on the light information, the light emission pattern for production is detected, and the light emission pattern is detected.
An optical communication device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) that acquires the specific information by removing the light emission pattern for effect detected from the optical information from the optical information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even when the lighting control of the LED is performed based on the light emitting pattern based on the effect pattern and the transmission data such as the game state and the effect pattern, the light emitting on the receiving side is based on the effect pattern. It is possible to eliminate the component of the pattern and extract the component related to the transmission data such as the game state and the effect pattern.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit that emits light (for example, lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001) and
A light emitting control unit that controls the light emitting unit (for example, a sub control unit 3302 and a lamp control circuit 3306 of the game machine 3001) and
A light receiving unit that receives the light emitted by the light emitting unit (for example, the CMOS image sensor 2432 of the data display 2001) and
A light receiving control means (for example, a host controller 2441 of a data display 2001, an ISP circuit 2445) that acquires light information based on the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The light emission control unit performs light emission control by including specific information in the light emission pattern for production.
The light receiving control means
Based on the light information, the light emission pattern for production is detected, and the light emission pattern is detected.
A game system (for example, a game system 5001) that acquires the specific information by removing the light emission pattern for effect detected from the light information from the light information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even when the lighting control of the LED is performed based on the light emitting pattern based on the effect pattern and the transmission data such as the game state and the effect pattern, the light emission based on the effect pattern is performed on the receiving side. It is possible to eliminate the component of the pattern and extract the component related to the transmission data such as the game state and the effect pattern.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, even when the lighting control of the LED is performed based on the light emitting pattern based on the effect pattern and the transmission data such as the game state and the effect pattern, the light emission pattern based on the effect pattern is displayed on the receiving side. Since the component can be eliminated, the LED communication can be performed by superimposing the light emission pattern based on the effect pattern and the transmission data related to the game state or the like.

[Appendix 1F]
[Background technology]

Various game devices are connected to the conventional game machine, and the game device is configured to control the display on the display device based on the information transmitted from the game machine.

For example, when the game machine transmits information including jackpot information and game results to a game display device (so-called data display device), the game display device displays the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, and after the end of the previous hit game state. It is configured to be able to display game information such as the number of games in the game and the number of medals acquired in the winning game state, and to execute an effect based on such game information.

Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device. Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-209747

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in a game machine such as Patent Document 1, the information that can be transmitted by the game machine is small, and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device of the stand display. Therefore, the LED from the game machine to the stand display is displayed. It has been proposed to transmit information by performing LED communication by the above.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game machine store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting in the store and the light from the adjacent game machine (for example, output for production). Light) becomes ambient light, which reduces the accuracy of communication.

Further, since the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display are often shifted depending on the layout of the game store and the installer, non-contact communication may not be possible or the accuracy may be lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and is for games that can suppress noise caused by ambient light such as fluorescent lamps in a game store, which is one of the weak points when LED communication is used. It is an object of the present invention to provide a device, an optical communication device, and a game system.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following gaming devices, optical communication devices, and gaming systems.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving unit (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) that receives light from a light emitting unit (for example, a lamp 3305) of an external device (for example, a game machine 3001), and
A light receiving control means (for example, a host controller 2441, a DSP circuit 2442, an ISP circuit 2445) that acquires light information based on the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The light from the light emitting unit is controlled to emit light so as to include a light emitting pattern for effect and specific information (for example, data such as a game state and an effect pattern).
The light receiving control means
The acquired optical information is Fourier transformed to obtain the converted information (for example, the converted information as shown in FIG. 356B).
The flicker component contained in the converted information is suppressed to obtain post-suppression information (for example, information after removing the dotted line portion shown in FIG. 356B).
A gaming device (for example, data display 2001) that further performs Fourier inverse transform of the post-suppression information to acquire the specific information (for example, information based on the component represented by the solid line portion shown in FIG. 356A).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to suppress noise caused by ambient light such as a fluorescent lamp in a game store with respect to the light information acquired in the light receiving unit.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving part that receives light from the light emitting part of an external device,
A light receiving control means for acquiring light information based on the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The light from the light emitting unit is controlled to emit light so as to include a light emitting pattern for effect and specific information.
The light receiving control means
The acquired optical information is Fourier transformed to acquire the converted information.
The flicker component contained in the converted information is suppressed to obtain the suppressed information.
An optical communication device (for example, an image sensor unit 2311) that further performs an inverse Fourier transform on the post-suppression information to acquire the specific information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to suppress noise caused by ambient light such as a fluorescent lamp in a game store with respect to the light information acquired in the light receiving unit.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light emitting unit that emits light (for example, lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001) and
A light emitting control unit that controls the light emitting unit (for example, a sub control unit 3302 and a lamp control circuit 3306 of the game machine 3001) and
A light receiving unit that receives the light emitted by the light emitting unit (for example, the CMOS image sensor 2432 of the data display 2001) and
A light receiving control means (for example, a host controller 2441 of a data display 2001, an ISP circuit 2445) that acquires light information based on the light received by the light receiving unit is provided.
The light emission control unit performs light emission control by including specific information in the light emission pattern for production.
The light receiving control means
The acquired optical information is Fourier transformed to acquire the converted information.
The flicker component contained in the converted information is suppressed to obtain the suppressed information.
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system 5001) that obtains the specific information by further Fourier inverse transforming the post-suppression information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to suppress noise caused by ambient light such as a fluorescent lamp in a game store with respect to the light information acquired in the light receiving unit.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress noise caused by ambient light such as a fluorescent lamp in a game store, which is one of the weak points when LED communication is used.

[Appendix 2A]
In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. Some are provided with a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Further, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to the game corresponding to the game machine, and it has been proposed that such a game display device be configured by a projector device. ..

However, in recent years, a projector device is applied to a game display device because a display form of the game display device according to the layout and visual effects of the game hall and the design of the corresponding game machine is desired. It was not possible to freely change such a display form by itself, and there was room for improvement in the design and variety of the display form.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points. For example, a game in which a display form can be freely changed according to a game hall or a game machine, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for use.

(Appendix 2A1)
The game display device (for example, the game display device 1001) according to one aspect of the present invention includes a projection means (for example, a projector main body 1012) for projecting light for displaying information related to the game as a projection image, and the projection. A light passing surface through which the light projected from the means passes (for example, an opening surface 1010A) and a projected portion (for example, a screen 1110A) on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light passing through the light passing surface. The projected portion has a display surface (for example, the (first) display surface 1101) on which the projected image is projected, and is arranged so as to be replaceable with respect to the light passing surface. It is characterized in that the visual impression of the projected image can be changed according to the replacement of the projected portion.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed by replacing the projected portion. Therefore, for example, the projected portion is replaced according to the layout of the game hall or the design of the game machine. The display form can be freely changed only by itself, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix 2A2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention has at least another display surface (for example, a light emitting surface 1111a) different from the display surface, and the other display surface can be displayed by a method different from the display of the projected image. It is characterized by being.

According to such a configuration, the information about the game can be displayed separately on the display surface for displaying the projected image and the other display surface. Further, for example, on the other display surface, the display of the projected image is Since the display can be performed by another method, the design and variety of the display form can be further enhanced.

[Appendix 2B]
In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. Some are provided with a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Further, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to the game corresponding to the game machine, and it has been proposed that such a game display device be configured by a projector device. .. Some such projector devices enhance the visual effect by deforming the screen into an uneven shape (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828).

However, in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828, since the entire front and back surfaces of the screen are uneven, the projection distance from the projection means to the screen becomes significantly uneven according to the unevenness, and such unevenness. When this screen is applied to a transmissive projector device, there is a problem that the adjustment and arrangement of optical systems such as a projection lens and a reflecting surface become complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game display device capable of easily enhancing a visual effect while having a simple configuration without complicating an optical system for projection. The purpose is.

(Appendix 2B1)
The game display device (for example, the game display device 1001) according to one aspect of the present invention includes a projection means (for example, a projector main body 1012) for projecting light for displaying information related to the game as a projection image, and the projection. A projected portion (for example, screen 1110A) on which a projected image is projected by the light projected from the means is provided, and the projected portion is an incident surface (for example, incident surface) on which the light projected from the projection means is incident. It has a surface 1100) and a display surface (for example, the (first) display surface 1101) on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface, and the incident surface is uniform. The display surface is composed of a surface, and the display surface is characterized by having at least a first region and a second region partitioned by providing a thickness different from that of the first region.

According to such a configuration, the incident surface of the projected portion is composed of a uniform surface, and the distance from the projection means to the incident surface is constant. Therefore, an optical system for projection from the projection means to the incident surface can be used. While it can be configured simply, it is possible to easily enhance the visual effect by changing the visual impression of the projected image simply by making the thickness of the first region and the second region of the display surface different. it can.

(Appendix 2B2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention includes a light passing surface (for example, an opening surface 1010A) through which light projected from the projection means passes, and the projected portion is arranged so as to be replaceable with respect to the light passing surface. It is characterized by being done.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed only by replacing the projected portion arranged on the light passing surface, so that the display form can be freely changed. , The design and variety of display forms can be enhanced.

[Appendix 2C]
The conventional game machine is provided with a sheet member (decorative sheet), and the back surface of the sheet member is irradiated with light so that the pattern (image) drawn on the sheet member can be visually recognized from the front surface side. Some have enhanced effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-165868).

Further, there is a game display device that displays various information related to the game corresponding to the game machine, and it has been proposed to apply a seat member to such a game display device.

However, in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-165868, it is difficult to adjust the brightness of light due to the characteristics of the relatively thin sheet member, so that it is difficult to change the contrast of the image displayed on the sheet member. There was a drawback.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and is a game display device capable of easily changing the contrast of an image displayed on a sheet member and, by extension, easily enhancing a visual effect. And to provide a game machine.

(Appendix 2C1)
The game display device (for example, the game display device 1001) according to one aspect of the present invention includes a light emitting means that emits light and a plurality of light guides for guiding light from the light emitting means from the back surface side to the front surface side. The first position and the first position are such that a plurality of seat members having portions and arranged so as to face each other and at least one of the plurality of seat members can be displaced relative to the other seat member. When a driving means for moving between two positions is provided and the one seat member is in the first position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one seat member are the said one of the other seat members. When the one sheet member partially or wholly overlaps with the plurality of light guide portions and the one sheet member moves from the first position to the second position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one sheet member may be said to be the same. The other sheet member is characterized in that it is displaced with respect to the plurality of light guide portions.

According to such a configuration, for example, as one seat member moves from the first position to the second position, the overlapping portion of the light guide portions in both seat members gradually becomes smaller, and these guides are introduced. The light guided from the light emitting means on the back surface side to the front surface side through the light portion gradually decreases. That is, since one sheet member can be appropriately displaced with respect to the other sheet member and the illuminance can be changed according to the degree of overlap between the light guide portions of both, the display is performed by a plurality of sheet members facing each other. The contrast of the resulting image can be easily changed by adjusting the illuminance, and thus the visual effect can be easily enhanced.

(Appendix 2C2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is a projection means (for example, a projector main body 1012) for projecting light for displaying information about a game as a projected image, and a main body portion (for example, a housing 1010) for accommodating the projection means. A projected portion (for example, screen 1110A) on which a projected image is projected by the light projected from the projection means, and a cover portion (for example, screen unit 1011A) that exteriors the main body portion while holding the projected portion. ), The one seat member is provided on the main body, the other seat member is provided on the cover, and the cover is replaceable with respect to the main body. It is characterized by.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the projected portion can be changed by replacing the cover portion integrally with the projected portion. Therefore, for example, depending on the layout of the amusement park or the design of the game machine. The display form of the projected image can be freely changed simply by replacing the cover portion, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix 2C3)
The gaming machines according to other aspects of the present invention (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1002a, pachislot gaming machine 1002b) include a light emitting means for emitting light and a plurality of gaming machines for guiding light from the light emitting means from the back surface side to the front surface side. First, the plurality of seat members having the light guide portion of the above and arranged so as to face each other, and at least one of the plurality of seat members can be displaced relative to the other seat member. When a driving means for moving between a position and a second position is provided and the one seat member is in the first position, the plurality of light guide portions of the one seat member are the other seat. When the one sheet member moves from the first position to the second position due to partial or total overlap with the plurality of light guide portions of the member, the plurality of light guide portions of the one sheet member. Is characterized in that the other sheet member is displaced with respect to the plurality of light guide portions.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine that has the same function and effect as the game display device according to one aspect of the present invention.

[Appendix 2D]
As a game system including a game display device and a game machine, for example, those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-96100 are known. However, since this game system does not have a configuration or a function as a game display device or a game machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game display device and a game machine capable of improving the interest.

(Appendix 2D1)
The game display device according to one aspect of the present invention includes a projection means for projecting light for displaying information about the game as a projected image, a light passing surface through which the light projected from the projection means passes, and the light. It includes a projected portion on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light that has passed through a passing surface, and the projected portion has a display surface on which a projected image is projected, with respect to the light passing surface. The display surface is interchangeably arranged, and the display surface is configured so that the visual impression of the projected image can be changed according to the replacement of the projected portion.

According to such a configuration, the visual impression of the projected image on the display surface can be changed by replacing the projected portion. Therefore, for example, the projected portion is replaced according to the layout of the game hall or the design of the game machine. The display form can be freely changed only by itself, and the design and variety of the display form can be enhanced.

(Appendix 2D2)
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is characterized in that it has at least another display surface different from the display surface, and the other display surface can be displayed by a method different from the display of the projected image. ..

According to such a configuration, the information about the game can be displayed separately on the display surface for displaying the projected image and the other display surface. Further, for example, on the other display surface, the display of the projected image is Since the display can be performed by another method, the design and variety of the display form can be further enhanced.

[Appendix 2E]
The present invention also relates to a game display device corresponding to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

In a conventional game machine, light is projected upward from a projection means provided below the housing, and light is reflected forward by a reflecting surface provided inside the housing. Some are provided with a so-called transmissive projector device that projects an image on a front screen (projected portion) as a display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-99743).

Further, as this type of display device, there is a game display device that displays various information related to the game corresponding to the game machine, and it has been proposed that such a game display device be configured by a projector device. ..

However, in recent years, a projector device is applied to a game display device because a display form of the game display device according to the layout and visual effects of the game hall and the design of the corresponding game machine is desired. It was not possible to freely change such a display form by itself, and there was room for improvement in the design and variety of the display form.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game display device capable of enhancing the design and variety of display forms and visual effects.

(Appendix 2E1)
In order to achieve the above object, the game display device according to the present invention is a projection means provided in the housing (10) of the game display device and projecting light for displaying information about the game as a projection image. In a gaming display device having a (projector body 1012) and a projected portion (screen 1110A) on which the projected image is projected, at least one edge portion of the projected portion (for example, a lower edge of the projected portion). A base (70) on which at least one light emitting element is mounted and an edge portion (for example, an upper edge portion of the projected portion) facing the edge portion of the projected portion. It is characterized by including a diffused reflection portion (72) and a light-shielding member (73) provided in a gap portion formed between the base and the housing.

According to the present invention, by providing a light emitting means that borders at least one edge of the projection screen in addition to the projected image by the projection means, the visual effect and the decorative effect of the display form can be enhanced.

Further, by preventing the generation of leaked light from the light emitting element to the inside of the housing, the irradiation efficiency is improved and the brightness and resolution of the projected image projected on the projected portion are not affected.

(Appendix 2E2)
Further, in the game display device according to the present invention, the projected portion is composed of a light guide unit (incident surface 1100) and a display unit (display surface 1101) having a predetermined thickness, respectively, and the light guide unit is from the light emitting element. It is characterized in that the light of the above is guided to the diffused reflection portion. According to the present invention, the light from the light emitting element can be efficiently guided to the diffused reflection portion.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game display device capable of enhancing the design and variety of display forms and the visual effect.

[Appendix 2F, 2G]
The present invention also relates to a gaming device corresponding to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. The game display device can display game information such as the number of hits of a bonus game or the like, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals acquired during the hit game state (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-99743). See Gazette).

Generally, a call button is provided on the game display device, and when a trouble occurs in the game machine, the call button is pressed by the player to display a lamp provided on the game display device. The corner lamps installed at the corners of the island are lit, making it possible to draw the attention of the staff.

By the way, a general call button is a movable type that moves in the pressing direction when pressed by a player, and lighting control of a lamp is performed based on a signal from a sensor that detects the movement. Since such a movable call button has a gap in the moving part structurally, it is easy for moisture, dust, etc. to enter, and when a trouble occurs in the game machine, a player who wants to continue the game quickly calls. There is a possibility that the operating part may be tired by repeatedly hitting the button, and there is a problem that a failure due to these factors is likely to occur. In addition, since the player usually pays attention to mainly playing the game, he / she rarely pays attention to the arrangement mode of such a call button, and calls for the first time when some trouble occurs. I often look for where the buttons are located. Therefore, it is preferable that the call button is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to understand.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming device which can reduce the possibility of failure and whose operation location is easy for a player to understand. ..

(Appendix 2F1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming device (gaming device F1) according to the present invention is provided with a translucent design unit (design unit) in the touch area (touch area F1021a) touched by the player. A touch sensor (touch sensor F1022) having a translucent property and being provided in association with the touch area on the back side of the exterior panel (exterior panel F1021) and detecting a touch input to the touch area. ), A light source (LED array F1024), a light guide plate (light guide plate F1023) provided on the back side of the touch sensor and guiding light from the light source toward the design portion of the exterior panel, and lighting of the light source. It is characterized by having a control means (control circuit F10250) for performing control.

According to the above configuration, when there is a touch input from the player in the touch area, the touch sensor detects the touch input. On the other hand, the control means is turned on by the lighting control of the light source, the light from the light source is guided to the design unit, and the player can visually recognize the light from the design unit. With such a configuration, the design part in the touch area of the exterior panel is illuminated by the light from the light source, which makes it easier for the player to recognize the place to be touched, and is not movable like the conventional call button. Since the input is performed on the touch region formed in a plane, it is possible to prevent a failure due to dust or the like entering the operating portion and a failure due to fatigue of the moving portion.

(Appendix 2F2)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, the control means may perform control to change the lighting mode of the light source when there is a touch input to the touch region.

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that his / her touch has been input by changing the lighting mode of the light source that illuminates the design unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the touch area many times until the clerk is called, and the surface of the touch area is deteriorated.

(Appendix 2F3)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, a light source plate having a translucent property, which is detachably arranged on a substrate (base G101) and is formed so that an opening (opening G61a) having a predetermined shape penetrates in the thickness direction. It has a light guide plate G61) and a plurality of light sources for light guide plates (LEDG60A) arranged at positions facing the opening side end surface (opening side end surface G61b) forming the opening of the light guide plate. A plurality of light sources for light guide plates are arranged so as to be arranged side by side along the end faces on the opening side, and the light sources for the light guide plates are guided from the light sources for the plurality of light guide plates into the light guide plate via the end faces on the opening side. A reflecting portion (reflecting portion G61d) that has been subjected to a reflection process that reflects a part of the emitted light in the thickness direction of the light source plate is formed, and the control means receives a touch input to the touch region. In this case, control may be performed to change the plurality of light source for the light guide plate to a specific lighting mode.

According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the plurality of light sources in response to the player's touch input has a specific lighting mode, and spreads radially in the light guide plate to reach the outer end face, thereby surrounding the light guide plate. It is possible to illuminate the entire area in a ring shape, and the light source plate illuminated in a specific lighting mode can be visually recognized from any direction of the game device. It becomes easier to identify the game machine to which the device is attached. Further, the design can be improved by the light emitted from the surface of the light guide plate, and since the light guide plate is removable from the substrate, it can be replaced with a light guide plate having a different design of reflection processing. It becomes possible to apply the gaming device to various types of gaming machines.

(Appendix 2F4)
Further, in the gaming device according to the present invention, the control means controls to change the lighting mode of the plurality of light source for the light guide plate according to the elapsed time from the timing when the touch input to the touch region is received. You may go.

According to the above configuration, the manager of the game hall can determine at a glance the time from the timing when the player touch-inputs the time, even if the position is far from the game machine, by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the light guide plate. Even if there are a plurality of gaming devices to which touch input has been performed, it is possible to prioritize the correspondence, so that it is possible to provide an appropriate service to the player.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the possibility of failure, and it is possible to provide a gaming device whose operation location is easy for the player to understand.

(Appendix 2G1)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a gaming device individually provided in a gaming machine (game machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the gaming state. (Data display H1), the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60) and the lighting mode detected by the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). It has an effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing the effect of the mode according to the mode.

The game system according to the present invention includes a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display device H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2) in the game machine (game machine H2). In the game system, a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state, a lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) that detects the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and With the effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes the effect of the mode according to the lighting mode detected by the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). Has.

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Generally, there is a limit to the type of signal transmitted from the external terminal plate of the game machine, but since the game device determines by the light emitting means of the lighting mode different for each game state of the game machine, the game machine The gaming state can be determined without limitation. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix 2G2)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a gaming machine (gaming machine) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the gaming state and a terminal plate capable of transmitting a signal to the outside. A signal relating to a predetermined type of gaming state among the gaming states that can be transferred to the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) via the terminal plate of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2), which is individually provided in H2), can be received. The lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60) and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). A game state determination means (control unit H401) capable of determining a game state different from the predetermined type of game state based on the lighting mode detected by), and a game determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401). It has an effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing an effect according to a state.

The gaming system according to the present invention comprises a gaming machine (gaming machine H2) having a terminal plate capable of transmitting a signal to the outside, and the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) separately provided for the gaming machine (gaming machine H2). A gaming system having a gaming device (data display H1) capable of receiving a signal relating to a predetermined type of gaming state among the gaming states to which the gaming machine (game machine H2) can shift via the terminal plate. A light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state, a lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) that detects the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the lighting. A game state determination means (control unit H401) capable of determining a game state different from the predetermined type of game state based on the lighting mode detected by the aspect detection means (camera unit H12), and the game state determination means (control). It has an effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes an effect of an aspect according to the gaming state determined by the unit H401).

According to the above configuration, the gaming device receives a signal relating to a predetermined type of gaming state from a terminal plate capable of transmitting a signal to the outside, and also emits light of a gaming state different from the predetermined type of gaming state. Judgment is made based on the means, and the effect according to the game state of the game machine is executed. Generally, there is a limit to the type of signal transmitted from the terminal plate of the game machine, but since the game device determines by the light emitting means of the lighting mode different for each game state of the game machine, the game of the game machine The state can be determined without limitation. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix 2G3)
The game device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a game machine (game machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for the production on the game side and has a different lighting mode depending on the game state. A gaming device (data display H1) that is individually provided, the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit). When the H12) detects the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the game state determining means (control unit H401) for determining the gaming state indicated by the lighting mode and the game state determining means (control unit H401). Production execution means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, which can execute an effect linked to the effect on the game machine (game machine H2) side executed by the game machine (game machine H2) in the game state determined by It has an illumination unit H406, an audio output unit H407, etc.).

The game system according to the present invention is a game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display device H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2). A light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is arranged in the machine (game machine H2) and is used for the production on the game side to change the lighting mode according to the game state, and a lighting that detects the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60). When the mode detecting means (camera unit H12) and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) detect the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the gaming state determination for determining the gaming state indicated by the lighting mode is determined. The means (control unit H401) and the effect on the game machine (game machine H2) side executed by the game machine (game machine H2) in the game state determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401) are linked. It has an effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) capable of executing the effect.

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means arranged in the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Generally, there is a limit to the type of signal transmitted from the game machine to the game device, but since the game device is determined by a light emitting means having a different lighting mode for each game state of the game machine, the game machine The gaming state can be determined without limitation. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix 2G4)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a gaming machine (game machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for a game-side effect and has a different lighting mode according to a game state. A gaming device (data display H1) that is individually provided, the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit). When the H12) detects the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the game state determining means (control unit H401) for determining the gaming state indicated by the lighting mode and the period during which the lighting mode is continued. Production execution that continues the execution of the effect linked to the effect on the game machine (game machine H2) side executed by the game machine (game machine H2) in the game state determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401). It has means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.).

The game system according to the present invention is a game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display device H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2), and is on the game side. A light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for the production of the above, which changes the lighting mode according to the game state, a lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the above. When the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) detects the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the gaming state determining means (control unit H401) for determining the gaming state indicated by the lighting mode and the lighting mode. The effect linked to the effect on the game machine (game machine H2) side executed by the game machine (game machine H2) in the game state determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401) during the period in which (Control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Generally, there is a limit to the type of signal transmitted from the game machine, but the game device limits the game state of the game machine because it is determined by a light emitting means having a different lighting mode for each game state of the game machine. It can be judged without being done. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. In addition, the gaming device continues to execute the corresponding effect for the period during which the lighting mode is continued in the gaming machine. As a result, if there is a lighting mode, it can be executed by a simple process of performing the effect for the same period, and it is possible to reduce resources and contribute to an increase in the effect pattern.

(Appendix 2G5)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a gaming machine (top lamp H60) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for production on the game side and has a different blinking cycle in a range that is difficult to recognize depending on the gaming state. A gaming device (data display H1) individually provided in the gaming machine H2), which is an image acquiring means for capturing an image of the light emitting means (top lamp H60) and acquiring an image, and a blinking cycle based on the image. When the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) detect the blinking cycle, the gaming state determining means (control unit) for determining the gaming state indicated by the blinking cycle. H401) and the effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing the effect corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401). ) And.

According to the above configuration, the gaming device (data display H1) determines the gaming state of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) based on the blinking cycle of the light emitting means (top lamp H60) of the gaming machine (game machine H2). Judgment is made, and the effect according to the game state of the game machine (game machine H2) H2 is executed. Generally, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2), but the data display (data display H1) H1 is used for each game state of the game machine (game machine H2) H2. Since the determination is made based on the blinking cycle of the top lamps H60 having different lighting modes, it is possible to determine the gaming state of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) H2 without limitation. As a result, the data display (data display H1) H1 can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the game machine (game machine H2) H2.

The game system according to the present invention is a game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display device H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2), and is on the game side. A light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for the production of the above and has a different blinking cycle in a range that is difficult to recognize according to the game state, an image acquisition means that captures an image of the light emitting means (top lamp H60) and acquires an image. When the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the blinking cycle based on the image and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) detect the blinking cycle, the gaming state indicated by the blinking cycle is determined. The game state determining means (control unit H401) and the effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit) for executing the effect corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determining means (control unit H401). H406, audio output unit H407, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the blinking cycle of the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Generally, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the game machine, but since the game device determines by the blinking cycle of the light emitting means having a blinking cycle different for each game state of the game machine, the game of the game machine. The state can be determined without limitation. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix 2G6)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention provides a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for a series of game-side effects composed of a plurality of stages and has different blinking cycles in a range that is difficult to recognize for each stage. An image acquisition means (data display H1) that is individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2) and that acquires an image by imaging the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the image. When the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the blinking cycle based on the above and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) detect the blinking cycle of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the blinking cycle is set. Based on this, the game state determining means (control unit H401) for determining which stage of the effect on the game side is, and the effect corresponding to the stage determined by the game state determining means (control unit H401) are executed. It has an effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.).

The game system according to the present invention is a game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display device H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2), and has a plurality of stages. An image is acquired by imaging a light emitting means (top lamp H60) and the light emitting means (top lamp H60), which are used for a series of productions on the game side and have different blinking cycles in a range that is difficult to recognize for each stage. The image acquisition means, the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) that detects the blinking cycle based on the image, and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) detect the blinking cycle of the light emitting means (top lamp H60). If so, the game state determination means (control unit H401) for determining which stage of the effect on the game side is based on the blinking cycle, and the stage determined by the game state determination means (control unit H401). It has an effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing the effect corresponding to the above.

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect including a plurality of stages according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Generally, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the game machine, but the game device determines each stage of a series of productions consisting of a plurality of stages of the game state of the game machine by light emitting means having a different blinking mode. Therefore, even if it is temporarily impossible to determine the light emitting means, it is possible to easily determine which stage of the effect is being executed at the time of restoration. As a result, the gaming device can perform an effect linked to the complicated effect of the game machine, and it is possible to increase the effect pattern based on the game state of the game machine.

(Appendix 2G7)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a gaming machine (gaming machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is used for a game-side effect and has a different lighting mode according to a gaming state. A gaming device (data display H1) that is individually provided, the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit). When the H12) detects the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the game state determining means (control unit H401) for determining the gaming state indicated by the lighting mode and the game state determining means (control unit H401). The effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for selecting the effect corresponding to the game state determined by the camera and executing the effect, and the game state in advance. It has an end condition storage means for storing each end condition in association with each other, and an effect end means for ending the effect when the end condition corresponding to the gaming state of the effect being executed is satisfied.

The game system according to the present invention is a game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display device H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2), and is on the game side. A light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for the production of the above, which changes the lighting mode according to the game state, a lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the above. When the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) detects the lighting mode of the light emitting means (top lamp H60), the gaming state determining means (control unit H401) for determining the gaming state indicated by the lighting mode and the gaming state. An effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that selects an effect corresponding to the gaming state determined by the determination unit (control unit H401) and executes the effect. When the end condition storage means for storing the end conditions for each game state in advance and the end conditions corresponding to the game state of the effect being executed are satisfied, the effect ends. Means and.

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Then, when the end condition of the effect is satisfied, the effect is ended. Generally, there is a limit to the type of signal transmitted from the game machine, but the game device limits the game state of the game machine because it is determined by a light emitting means having a different lighting mode for each game state of the game machine. It can be judged without being done. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. Further, by setting the end condition, it is possible to perform as much effect as possible in the gaming device even if the lighting mode of the light emitting means cannot be detected.

(Appendix 2G8)
The game device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a game individually provided in a game machine (game machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors used for producing a game. An image acquisition means for capturing an image of the light emitting means (top lamp H60) and acquiring an image in frame units, and a plurality of images acquired by the image acquisition means within a predetermined period. In the above, when the emission color of the light emitting means (top lamp H60) is equal to or more than a specific number, the effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing a specific effect, etc. ) And.

The game system according to the present invention is a game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display device H1) individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2). A light emitting means (top lamp H60) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors used for production, an image acquisition means for capturing an image of the light emitting means (top lamp H60) and acquiring an image in frame units, and the image acquisition means for a predetermined period of time. When the emission color of the light emitting means (top lamp H60) is equal to or more than a specific number in the plurality of images acquired in the image, the effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit) for executing a specific effect. H406, audio output unit H407, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Generally, the type of signal transmitted from the game machine is limited, but the game device is determined by the light emitting means having a different lighting mode (blinking mode and light emitting color) for each game state of the game machine. , The gaming state of the gaming machine can be determined without limitation. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine.

(Appendix 2G9)
The game device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a game having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that is communicably connected to a server, is used for producing a game, and has a different lighting mode depending on the game state. It is a game device (data display H1) individually provided in the machine (game machine H2), and is set for each model of the game machine (game machine H2) from the server, and the lighting mode corresponds to the game state. An effect acquisition means capable of downloading the attached effect pattern, a storage means for storing the effect pattern acquired by the effect acquisition means, a lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means, and the like. The effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit) that executes the effect according to the effect pattern stored in the storage means according to the lighting mode detected by the lighting mode detecting means. H407 etc.) and.

The game system according to the present invention is a game device (data display device H1) that is connected to a server, a game machine (game machine H2), and the server so as to be communicable, and is individually provided in the game machine (game machine H2). A game system having the above, for each model of the game machine (game machine H2) from the server, and a light emitting means (top lamp H60) used for the production of the game and changing the lighting mode according to the game state. The effect acquisition means that can download the effect pattern that is set and the lighting mode and the gaming state are associated with each other, the storage means that stores the effect pattern acquired by the effect acquisition means, and the lighting mode by the light emitting means are detected. An effect executing means (control unit H401) that selects and executes an effect according to the effect pattern stored in the storage means according to the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) and the lighting mode detected by the lighting mode detecting means. , Video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Generally, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the external terminal board of the game machine, but the game device has an effect pattern in which light emitting means having different lighting modes for each game state of the game machine is downloaded from the server in advance. Therefore, the gaming state of the game machine can be determined without limitation. As a result, the data display can increase the effect pattern based on the game state of the game machine.

(Appendix 2G10)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is individually provided so as to be communicable with a gaming machine (gaming machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the gaming state. A signal interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405) that is a game device (data display H1) and executes an effect based on a signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) by the communication. , Lighting unit H406, sound output unit H407, etc.), lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). Lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the signal interlocking effect executing means (control) that execute the effect according to the detected lighting state. Production by unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) A priority setting means (such as the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 338) capable of setting a priority with the effect according to the method, and an effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting an effect to be executed according to the set priority. Has.

The game system according to the present invention is a game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display H1) individually provided to the game machine (game machine H2) so as to be able to communicate with each other. A light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state, and a signal interlocking effect executing means (top lamp H60) that executes an effect based on a signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) by the communication. The control unit H401, the image display unit H405, the illumination unit H406, the audio output unit H407, etc.), the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the lighting mode. Lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes an effect according to the lighting state detected by the detection means (camera unit H12). The effect by the signal interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting interlocking effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit). Priority setting means (such as the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 338) that can set the priority with the effect by the effect (H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the effect selection that selects the effect to be executed according to the set priority. It has means (control unit H401).

According to the above configuration, the data display determines the game state of the game machine based on the light emitting means of the game machine, and executes an effect according to the game state of the game machine. Generally, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the external terminal board of the game machine, but since the data display is determined by the light emitting means of the lighting mode different for each game state of the game machine, the game machine The gaming state can be determined without limitation. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. Further, since the priority is set according to the effect, the gaming device can reduce the management load by increasing the effect pattern based on the game state of the game machine.

(Appendix 2G11)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a gaming machine (gaming machine) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the gaming state and a terminal plate capable of transmitting a signal to the outside. A signal relating to a predetermined type of gaming state among the gaming states that can be transferred to the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) via the terminal plate of the gaming machine (gaming machine H2), which is individually provided in H2), can be received. Terminal plate signal game state determination that specifies the predetermined type of game state based on the signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) by the communication in the game device (data display H1). The lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting the lighting mode by the means (control unit H401), the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the lighting mode detected by the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). Priority is given to a game state determination means (control unit H401) capable of determining a game state different from the predetermined type of game state based on the predetermined type, the predetermined type of game state, and a game state different from the predetermined type of game state. It has a priority order setting means (such as an effect pattern table shown in FIG. 338) capable of setting an order, and an effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting a game state for executing an effect according to the set priority. ..

The game system according to the present invention is a game machine (game machine H2) having a terminal plate capable of transmitting a signal to the outside, and the game machine (game machine H2) separately provided for the game machine (game machine H2). A gaming system including a gaming device (data display H1) capable of receiving a signal relating to a predetermined type of gaming state among the gaming states to which the gaming machine (game machine H2) can shift via the terminal plate. The predetermined type of gaming state is specified based on the light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the gaming state and the signal transmitted from the gaming machine (gaming machine H2) by the communication. External terminal board signal game state determination means (control unit H401), lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). ) Detects a gaming state determining means (control unit H401) capable of determining a gaming state different from the predetermined type of gaming state based on the lighting mode, the predetermined type of gaming state, and the predetermined type of gaming state. A priority setting means (such as an effect pattern table shown in FIG. 338) capable of setting a priority with a game state different from the above, and an effect selection means for selecting a game state for executing an effect according to the set priority (the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 338). It has a control unit H401) and.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming device, in addition to transmitting a predetermined type of gaming state from a terminal plate capable of transmitting a signal to the outside, a predetermined type of gaming state and a predetermined type of gaming state are transmitted by a light emitting means of the gaming machine. Judgment is made based on the above, and the effect according to the game state of the game machine is executed. Generally, there is a limit to the type of signal transmitted from the external terminal plate of the game machine, but since the game device determines by the light emitting means of the lighting mode different for each game state of the game machine, the game machine The gaming state can be determined without limitation. Further, since the priority order is set for each game state, it is sufficient to determine the game state, select the game state having a high priority, and perform the corresponding effect, and the game device is a game of the game machine. It is possible to reduce the management load by increasing the production pattern based on the state.

(Appendix 2G12)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is a gaming machine (game) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that shifts the gaming state based on a lottery and changes the lighting mode according to the gaming state. A signal-linked effect that is a gaming device (data display H1) individually provided on the machine H2) so as to be able to communicate, and executes an effect based on a signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) by the communication. Execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.), lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and Lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) that executes the effect of the mode according to the lighting state detected by the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). ), The effect by the signal interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.), and the lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, etc.). Select a priority setting means (effect pattern table or the like shown in FIG. 338) that can set a priority with the effect by the illumination unit H406, the sound output unit H407, etc., and an effect to be executed according to the set priority. When the effect selection means (control unit H401), the transition storage means for storing the transition pattern of the game state, and the transition pattern are collated each time the effect is executed, and the transition pattern is not matched. , And an error detecting means for detecting as an error.

The game system according to the present invention includes a game machine (game machine H2) that shifts the game state based on a lottery, and a game device (data display device H1) that is individually provided to the game machine (game machine H2) so as to be able to communicate with each other. ), Which is based on a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state, and a signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) by the communication. A lighting mode detecting means for detecting a lighting mode by a signal interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing the effect and the light emitting means (top lamp H60). (Camera unit H12) and lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit) for executing an effect according to the lighting state detected by the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). H406, audio output unit H407, etc.), production by the signal interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.), and lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit). Priority setting means (effect pattern table or the like shown in FIG. 338) capable of setting priority with the effect by the effect by H401, video display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc., and the set priority order. The effect selection means (control unit H401) that selects the effect to be executed according to the above, the transition storage means that stores the transition pattern of the game state, and the transition pattern are collated each time the effect is executed. It has an error detecting means for detecting as an error when the transition pattern is not matched.

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Generally, there are restrictions on the types of signals transmitted from the game machine, but the data display limits the game state of the game machine because it is determined by the light emitting means of the lighting mode that differs depending on the game state of the game machine. It can be judged without being done. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. Further, since the priority is set according to the effect, the gaming device can reduce the management load by increasing the effect pattern based on the game state of the game machine. Further, the transition pattern of the game state is stored, and if the actual transition does not follow this, an error can be detected and security can be improved.

(Appendix 2G13)
The gaming device (data display H1) according to the present invention is individually provided so as to be communicable with a gaming machine (gaming machine H2) having a light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the gaming state. Synchronized effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406) that is a game device (data display H1) and can execute an effect synchronized with another game device (data display H1). , Audio output unit H407, etc.) and signal interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit) that executes an effect based on a signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) by the communication. H406, audio output unit H407, etc.), a lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting a lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and the lighting detected by the lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12). Lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the signal interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video) for executing the effect according to the state. The display unit H405, the illumination unit H406, the audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting interlocking effect execution means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, illumination unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.). A priority setting means (effect pattern table or the like shown in FIG. 338) capable of setting a priority with the synchronized effect, and an effect selection means (control unit H401) for selecting an effect to be executed according to the set priority. And have.

The game system according to the present invention is a game system having a game machine (game machine H2) and a game device (data display device H1) individually provided so as to be communicable with the game machine (game machine H2). , A light emitting means (top lamp H60) that changes the lighting mode according to the game state, and a synchronous effect executing means (control unit H401, video display) that can execute an effect synchronized with another game device (data display H1). Unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and signal interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video) that executes an effect based on a signal transmitted from the game machine (game machine H2) by the communication. Display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.), lighting mode detecting means (camera unit H12) for detecting lighting mode by the light emitting means (top lamp H60), and lighting mode detecting means (camera unit). The lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) for executing the effect according to the lighting state detected by H12) and the signal interlocking effect execution. Production by means (control unit H401, image display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit H407, etc.) and the lighting interlocking effect executing means (control unit H401, video display unit H405, lighting unit H406, audio output unit). Priority setting means (such as the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 338) for setting the priority of the effect by the effect (H407, etc.) and the synchronized effect, and the effect selection for selecting the effect to be executed according to the set priority. It has means (control unit H401).

According to the above configuration, the gaming device determines the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the light emitting means of the gaming machine, and executes an effect according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. Then, when the end condition of the effect is satisfied, the effect is ended. Generally, there is a limit to the type of signal transmitted from the external terminal plate of the game machine, but since the game device determines by the light emitting means of the lighting mode different for each game state of the game machine, the game machine The gaming state can be determined without limitation. As a result, the gaming device can increase the effect pattern based on the gaming state of the gaming machine. In addition, since the priority of the effect including the synchronous effect in which a plurality of game devices participate is set, the game device reduces the management load by increasing the effect pattern based on the game state of the game machine. Is possible.

[15th Embodiment]
The first to fourteenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game system 5001 according to the fifteenth embodiment is the same as that of the game system 5001 according to the fourteenth embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game system 5001 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the fourteenth embodiment also applies to the fifteenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Game system 5001>
FIG. 360 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the fifteenth embodiment.

The game system 5001 includes a game machine 3001, a data display 2001, and a management server 4001. Similar to the 14th embodiment, the data display 2001 is arranged on the upper side of the game machine 3001. Further, the data display 2001 is configured to be able to communicate with the management server 4001.

In the fourteenth embodiment, it has been described that the game machine 3001 is provided with a lamp 3305 on the game machine 3001 (see FIG. 341). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 360, in the present embodiment, the game machine 3001 is provided with a lamp 3305a and a lamp 3305b as a lamp 3305 on the upper portion thereof.

Similar to the 14th embodiment, the data display 2001 includes the image sensor unit 2311 in the present embodiment as well. The image sensor unit 2311 includes a CMOS image sensor, and can capture an image including the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b at predetermined time intervals.

The lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are each configured to have a full-color LED, and have a plurality of kinds of colors including white, red, yellow, yellowish green, green, bluish green, blue, purple, magenta, and pink. It is possible to emit.

In the present embodiment, the game machine 3001 is configured so that the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b can be lit in colors according to the state of the game machine 3001, respectively. That is, the combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b corresponds to the state of the game machine 3001 (see FIG. 361). In the present specification, "a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b" is also referred to as a lighting pattern of the lamp 3305.

The data display 2001 can recognize the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b by imaging the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b with the CMOS image sensor. As a result, the data display 2001 controls the liquid crystal display 2002, the LED 2003, the speaker 2004, etc., and communicates with the management server 4001 in an manner corresponding to the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305 (the state of the game machine 3001) in the game machine 3001. Or do.

<Lighting pattern of lamp 3305>
FIG. 361 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of the lamp.

A large number of lighting patterns are provided as the lighting patterns of the lamp 3305, but FIG. 361 shows some of the lighting patterns. In the figure, "LED left" indicates the lamp 3305a, and "LED right" indicates the lamp 3305b.

In "Pattern 1", the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 1" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that the front door has been opened while the power is off. The gaming machine 3001 according to the present embodiment can adopt the same configuration as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and in this case, the front door is the upper door 62a or the lower door 62b (FIG. 2). See). Where the lamps 3305a and 3305b cannot be turned on when the power is off, the above detection is performed by the door monitoring unit that constantly monitors (the door open / closed state is constantly monitored) when the power is turned on. When the information to the effect is received, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are turned on according to the pattern at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on.

In "Pattern 2", the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits green light. "Pattern 2" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed with the front door closed. The setting change and the setting confirmation can be performed by, for example, the method described with reference to FIG. 246.

In "Pattern 3", the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits reddish purple. “Pattern 3” is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that hopper emptyness has occurred. As described in the second embodiment, the hopper empty refers to the medals of the hopper device running out.

In "Pattern 4", the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 4" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that a medal overflow has occurred. As described in the second embodiment, the medal overflow means that the medal auxiliary storage is full.

"Pattern 1" to "Pattern 4" are examples of "error patterns", respectively. The error pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when an abnormality (error) is detected in the game machine 3001.

In "Pattern 10", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits red light. “Pattern 10” is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game by the character A is started. In "Pattern 11", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. “Pattern 11” is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game by the character B is started. In "Pattern 12", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits green light. “Pattern 12” is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game by the character C is started.

"Pattern 10" to "Pattern 12" are examples of "custom start patterns", respectively. The custom start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game is started (a custom start operation is performed). The custom game (character customization) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 363 and 364.

In "Pattern 20", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. The “pattern 20” is a lighting pattern (custom end pattern) that appears when the custom game is completed (custom end operation is performed).

In the "pattern 30", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. The “pattern 30” is a lighting pattern that appears during AT and when no custom game is being performed. In the "pattern 31", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light and the lamp 3305b emits green light. "Pattern 31" is a lighting pattern that appears during AT and when a custom game by character A is being performed. In "Pattern 32", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 32" is a lighting pattern that appears during AT and when a custom game by character B is being performed. In the "pattern 33", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. "Pattern 33" is a lighting pattern that appears during AT and when a custom game by character C is being performed.

"Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33" are examples of "AT intermediate patterns", respectively. The pattern for AT is a lighting pattern that appears during AT. The pattern for AT is an example of a pattern for producing during a game (a lighting pattern according to the effect performed during the game). Since a predetermined effect is performed by a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, or the like during AT, it can be said that the pattern for AT is a lighting pattern that appears when the predetermined effect is performed.

In the "pattern 40", the lamp 3305a emits green light and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. The "pattern 40" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT is started in a state where the custom game is not performed. In "Pattern 41", the lamp 3305a emits green light and the lamp 3305b emits red light. The “pattern 41” is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT is started in a state where the custom game by the character A is being performed. In the "pattern 42", the lamp 3305a emits green light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow light. The “pattern 42” is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT is started in a state where the custom game by the character B is being performed. In "Pattern 43", the lamp 3305a emits green light and the lamp 3305b emits yellowish green. The “pattern 43” is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT is started in a state where the custom game by the character C is being performed.

"Pattern 40" to "Pattern 43" are examples of "AT start patterns", respectively. The AT start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT is started (enters the AT). The AT start pattern is an example of a pattern for directing during a game. Since a predetermined effect is performed by a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, or the like when the AT is started, it can be said that the AT start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the predetermined effect is performed. ..

In the "pattern 50", the lamp 3305a emits reddish purple light and the lamp 3305b emits red light. "Pattern 50" is a lighting pattern that appears when the effect A is performed. In the "pattern 51", the lamp 3305a emits reddish purple light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow light. The “pattern 51” is a lighting pattern that appears when the effect B is performed. In the "pattern 52", the lamp 3305a emits reddish purple light and the lamp 3305b emits yellowish green light. “Pattern 52” is a lighting pattern that appears when the effect C is performed.

"Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52" are examples of "patterns for directing during a game", respectively. The effects A to C are effects performed based on the type of internal winning combination when the start lever is operated. As the effects A to C, for example, an effect performed when a combination for which the transition to AT is confirmed, a rare combination, a bonus combination, or the like is determined as an internal winning combination can be adopted.

As described above, as the in-game production pattern, a lighting pattern that appears in a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT, ART, BB, etc.), a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT, ART, BB, etc.) In addition to the lighting pattern that appears when the start is started and the lighting pattern that appears when the start lever is operated, the lighting pattern that appears when a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT, ART, BB, etc.) ends, and A lighting pattern or the like that appears when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed along the effective line is provided.

Further, in the in-game production pattern, a lighting pattern in which the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are lit in a predetermined color occurs in one unit game (the state is not carried over to the next unit game). Further, a lighting pattern in which the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are lit in a predetermined color is continued over a plurality of unit games is included. For example, "Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52" are lighting patterns in which the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are lit in a predetermined color in one unit game, and in "Pattern 50", the start is started. After the lamp 3305a emits reddish purple and the lamp 3305b emits red when the lever is operated, the lamp 3305a emits reddish purple and the lamp 3305b emits red by the end of the unit game. The light emission ends. Further, "Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33" are lighting patterns in which the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are lit in a predetermined color continuously over a plurality of unit games. In "Pattern 30", the lamps are lit. The yellow-green light emission of the 3305a and the pink light emission of the lamp 3305b continue until the AT ends.

Although not shown, both the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are displayed during the display of the demo screen or during normal non-customization (when the character is not customized and a specific effect does not occur). It emits white light. The specific effect is an effect that triggers the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b to be turned on in the pattern shown in FIG. 361 (factor for changing the lighting pattern). That is, basically, both the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are lit in white when the custom game is not performed.

<Pattern for model identification>
FIG. 362 is a diagram for explaining a model identification pattern.

As the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305, in addition to the lighting pattern described with reference to FIG. 361, the model identification pattern shown in FIG. 362 is provided. The model identification pattern is a lighting pattern according to the model to which the game machine 3001 belongs, and is used for causing the data display 2001 or the management server 4001 to recognize the model.

After the power is turned on in the game machine 3001 and the predetermined initialization process is executed, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are turned on in the pattern shown in FIG. 362. Usually, in a hall (game store), it is common to adopt a method of starting up game machines and peripheral devices all at once on an island-by-island basis. As a result, the initialization process on the peripheral device (data display 2001) side is completed before the initialization process on the game machine (game machine 3001) side, and the data is displayed when the lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit. The camera (CMOS image sensor) of the machine 2001 is in a standing state. Therefore, the data display 2001 can recognize the model identification pattern shown in FIG. 362 without missing it.

Specifically, in the model identification pattern, first, as a first step, the lamp 3305a emits white light and the lamp 3305b emits white light, and this state continues for 10 seconds. Subsequently, as the second step, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits blue-green light and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light continues for 1 second. Similarly, as the third step, the lamp 3305a emits pink light and the lamp 3305b emits light. The state of emitting pink light continues for 1 second, and as the 4th step, the state of the lamp 3305a emitting green and the state of the lamp 3305b emitting green continues for 1 second, and as the 5th step, the lamp 3305a turns reddish purple. The state in which the lamp 3305b emits reddish blue light continues for 1 second while emitting light, and as the sixth step, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits yellowish green and the lamp 3305b emits yellowish green continues for 1 second, and the 7th step. As a result, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light continues for 1 second, and as the eighth step, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow light continues for 1 second. In the ninth step, the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light for 1 second, and in the tenth step, the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits red light. Continue for 1 second.

Subsequently, as the eleventh step, the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light for 1 second, and as the twelfth step, the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. The state continues for 1 second, and as the thirteenth step, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits red light continues for 1 second.

The lighting pattern in the eleventh step corresponds to the manufacturer (manufacturer information) that manufactured the game machine 3001. For example, in the eleventh step, the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. It shows that the machine 3001 is a product of the game machine maker X company. The lighting patterns in the twelfth step and the thirteenth step correspond to the model (model information) to which the game machine 3001 belongs. For example, in the twelfth step, the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. Then, as the thirteenth step, the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits red light, indicating that the game machine 3001 belongs to the model A.

The lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined pattern (learning pattern) in the first to tenth steps before being lit in a pattern corresponding to the manufacturer information and the model information in the eleventh to thirteenth steps. It is configured to do.

<Character customization>
FIG. 363 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 363 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a menu screen. FIG. 364 is a diagram showing a character customization screen for customizing a character.

When the decision button of the operation button is operated in the situation where the game is not performed, the sub-control unit 3302 (see FIG. 342) calls the menu screen shown in FIG. 363 (A) and displays it on the liquid crystal display device. Although not shown, the operation buttons include a cross key and a decision button, and when the player operates the cross key, the selection cursor moves in the direction in which the selection cursor is operated, and when the player operates the decision button, the selection cursor points to the operation button. The item is selected (determined). The liquid crystal display device is included in the sub-device group 3304 (see FIG. 342). The screens (including the character customization screen) shown in FIGS. 363 and 364 may be displayed on a dedicated touch panel liquid crystal provided separately from the liquid crystal display device.

As shown in FIG. 363 (B), the menu screen is provided with "custom game", "volume adjustment", "game data", "payout / arrangement", and "dedicated site" as main menus, and some main menus have. More detailed submenus are provided. For example, the main menu "custom game" is provided with submenus "character selection", "easy start", "enter password", "view intermediate record", "record and end", and "member registration".

The submenu "Character selection" is a menu for customizing (customizing) characters used for the production performed on the liquid crystal display device.

The submenus "Easy Start" to "Membership Registration" are menus used for registered games of players. In recent pachislot machines, by registering a player who plays a game, a privilege that does not affect the payout may be given as compared with a player who does not register. Specifically, when the player is registered, the sub-control unit 3302 executes the game in addition to the game history after the registration (for example, the number of bonuses and the winning probability of a small winning combination). (Including the production history of the production) is managed, and certain benefits are given based on this history. The history of this game can include not only the one related to the current game but also the one related to the previous game. Specifically, the game history for each player is managed on the server, and when the game is played, the server notifies the game machine of the game history via a mobile phone or the like to notify the game machine of the previous game. You can take over the history and play the game.

The submenu "Easy Start" is a menu that is operated to only accumulate the history of the current game without inheriting the history of the previous game, that is, to perform a simple login. In addition, the submenu "Enter password" is a menu that is operated to carry over the history of the previous game and further accumulate the history of the current game, that is, to perform a formal login. Here, simple login is completed only by operating the submenu "Easy Start", while formal login is performed by entering the password in the game machine 3001 after registering as a member. It is said. Therefore, comparing simple login and formal login, it can be said that simple login is a simpler registration procedure than formal login, and conversely, formal login is more complicated registration than simple login. It can be said that it is a procedure.

The submenu "View midway record" is a menu that is operated when checking the midway record of the game history accumulated up to that point when logging in (simple or official). The submenu "Record and end" is a menu that is operated when the history of games accumulated up to that point is recorded on the server when logging in (simple or formal). When these submenus "view intermediate recording" and "record and end" are operated, the accumulated game history is read from the game machine 3001 on the player's mobile phone or server. Further, the submenu "member registration" is a menu operated for initial registration of a player on the server.

The character customization screen shown in FIG. 364 is provided with a "character" selection field, a "costume" selection field, a "pose" selection field, and an "accessory" selection field, and each selection field has a plurality of selectable icons. Provided. In the game machine 3001, the character is customized based on the icon content selected in each selection field at the timing when the decision icon is operated.

The "character" selection field is used to select a character, and the sub-control unit 3302 determines one character selected in the "character" selection field from a plurality of types of characters. In addition, the "costume" selection field is used to select the character's costume, the "pose" selection field is used to select the character's pose, and the "accessory" selection field is used to select the character's accessories. Used to do. The "costume" selection field to the "accessory" selection field are used to customize the display mode (costume, pose, accessory) of the character. The sub-control unit 3302 determines one display mode selected in the selection field from among a plurality of display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection fields.

On this character customization screen, the player can customize the character by performing a touch operation on the touch panel provided on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device or a button operation using the operation buttons. When the character is customized, the sub-control unit 3302 selects the costume selected in the "costume" selection field and the character selected in the "character" selection field wearing the accessory selected in the "accessory" selection field. The pose selected in the "Pause" selection field is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In the custom game, the effect using the character according to the content of the customization is performed. The custom game starts when the enter icon is operated (custom start operation is performed), and ends when the end icon (not shown) is operated (custom end operation is performed).

The character may be customized by operating a mobile terminal owned by the player (for example, the mobile terminal 6001 shown in FIG. 370). For example, a player who has registered as a member by a predetermined method displays a character customization screen (similar to FIG. 364) on the mobile terminal with a predetermined application activated on the mobile terminal, and the character is displayed. The character may be customized by performing a touch operation or a button operation on the mobile terminal on the customization screen. In this case, the content of the customization may be configured so that it can be transmitted to the game machine 3001 via the management server 4001, or from the mobile terminal to the game machine 3001 by non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like. It may be configured so that it can be transmitted directly.

<Ramp control processing (when the power is turned on)>
FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing a lamp control process (when the power is turned on) performed in the game machine.

The lamp control process (at the time of power-on) shown in FIG. 365 is a process performed by the sub-control unit 3302 when the power is turned on to the game machine 3001.

In the lamp control process (when the power is turned on), first, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is opened while the power is off (during power failure). Is determined (step S1001). The gaming machine 3001 according to the present embodiment can adopt the same configuration as the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, and the main control unit 3301 (see FIG. 342) has a door relay terminal plate 460. A door open / close monitoring switch 462 (see FIG. 69) is connected via the door open / close monitoring switch 462 (see FIG. 69). The door open / close monitoring switch 462 constitutes a 24H door monitoring unit capable of monitoring the open / closed state of the front door when the power is off. Is remembered. Information indicating the open / closed state of the front door is transmitted as a command from the main control unit 3301 to the sub control unit 3302, and the sub control unit 3302 may recognize the open / closed state of the front door when the power is off. it can.

When it is determined that the front door is opened while the power is off, the sub-control unit 3302 causes the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b to emit light according to the "pattern 1" shown in FIG. 361. 342) is controlled (step S1002). As a result, the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. After executing the process of step S1002, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

If the front door is opened while the power is off, there is a possibility that a goto action (for example, an illegal setting change operation) has been performed. Here, the open / closed state of the front door in the state where the power is turned off can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the hall menu by performing a predetermined operation, whereby the clerk of the amusement store can display it. , It is possible to check whether the front door has been opened while the power is off. On the other hand, the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b by the "pattern 1" is automatically performed when the power is turned on without requiring any special operation. Therefore, it is possible to discover the fact that the goto act was performed more reliably and earlier, and it is possible to strengthen the security.

Here, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the front door has been opened (at least once) while the power is off, but the number of times the front door is opened (number of times of monitoring) is appropriately designed. It is possible to determine whether or not the front door has been opened a predetermined number of times (twice) or more while the power is off. Further, the predetermined number of times (the number of times of monitoring) may be configured so that the game store can set it. In a game store where the power is turned on manually, the front door can always be opened once when the power is off. Can be adapted. By executing the process of step S1002, the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b may be turned on in the pattern 1 for a predetermined time, and then another process (processes of steps S1003 to S1007) may be executed.

When it is determined in step S1001 that the front door is not opened while the power is off, the sub-control unit 3302 sets the key type switch 430 (see FIG. 69) with the front door closed. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (step S1003). The setting key type switch 430 is connected to the main control unit 3301, and when the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON, information indicating that fact is sent from the main control unit 3301 to the sub control unit 3302. Sent as a command. As a result, the sub-control unit 3302 can recognize whether or not the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON.

When it is determined that the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON with the front door closed, the sub-control unit 3302 fires the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b according to the "pattern 2" shown in FIG. 361. The control circuit 3306 is controlled (step S1004). As a result, the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits green light. After executing the process of step S1004, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 246, in order to perform the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation, it is necessary to set the setting key type switch 430 to ON, but the setting key type switch 430 is a cabinet. Since it is provided inside 61 (see FIG. 2), it is necessary to open the front door in order to set the setting key type switch 430 to ON. If the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON with the front door closed, there is a possibility that an illegal setting change operation has been performed. In the present embodiment, by executing the process of step S1003, it is possible to detect the possibility that an illegal setting change operation has been performed. The method of detecting the possibility that an illegal setting change operation has been performed is not limited to this example, and the illegal setting change operation has been performed by, for example, the method described with reference to FIG. 246 (B). It may be to detect the possibility.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines, where a setting change switch is provided on the back side (rear side) of the main body, basically no one can enter the island, so the back side of the main body (board case arranged on the back side, etc.) In order to operate the setting change switch) housed in, it is necessary to rotate the frame using a key. In addition to configuring such frame rotation to be detectable, when the setting change switch is set to ON in the frame non-rotation (state in which frame rotation is not detected), it is determined as YES in step S1003. May be.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the setting key type switch 430 is not set to ON when the front door is closed, the sub-control unit 3302 determines that the other (the front door is turned off while the power is off). It is determined whether or not an error has occurred (other than that the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON with the front door closed and that the setting key type switch 430 has been opened) (step S1005).

The errors include "abnormalities with a strong suspicion of fraud" described in the second embodiment (for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write inability, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage. Abnormal, winning abnormalities that the symbols related to the winning combination are displayed on the valid line, when payout is detected at the timing when payout is not possible, when the set value shows a value other than 6 levels, etc.) , And "abnormalities that occur in normal games" (for example, hopper empty where the medals of the hopper device run out, detection of medal clogging at the payout exit of the hopper device, medal overflow that fills the medal auxiliary storage, medal insertion When a medal jam or backflow of medals is detected, or when the number of inserted medals is detected as an abnormal number such as 4, the hall clerk opens the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) to replenish medals. It can be mentioned (for example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper is disconnected during an error or medal replenishment). In step S1005, among these errors, an error that may occur when the power is turned on is a determination target.

When it is determined that another error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to cause the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b to emit light according to the lighting pattern according to the type of error (step S1006). For example, when it is determined that hopper emptyness has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to cause the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b to emit light according to the "pattern 3" shown in FIG. 361. As a result, the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits reddish purple. When it is determined that a medal overflow has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to cause the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b to emit light according to the "pattern 4" shown in FIG. 361. As a result, the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. After executing the process of step S1006, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

When the lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a lighting pattern (see FIG. 361) corresponding to such an error pattern and the lighting pattern is detected in the data display 2001, for example, an image corresponding to the type of error is displayed. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002 (see step S1107 in FIG. 368). Further, as described in the 17th embodiment, it is also possible to light (blink) the LED 2003 in an manner corresponding to the type of error (see step S1312 in FIG. 377). As a result, for example, when a hopper empty error that frequently occurs as a normal error (such as the above-mentioned "abnormality that occurs in a normal game") or a selector error described later occurs in a normal game (see step S1012 in FIG. 366). In addition, by making it possible to identify the type of error that occurred through the liquid crystal display 2002 (liquid crystal display) and LED 2003 (illuminated display) that are easy to see from the outside, it is possible for the clerk of the amusement store (manager of the amusement park). It is possible to notify the type of error, and even if a store clerk or the like does not come to the game machine 3001, it is possible to take an appropriate and prompt response according to the error occurrence situation.

When a plurality of errors occur in duplicate, it is predetermined which of the errors the lighting pattern corresponding to the priority is given when the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are made to emit light. Specifically, the lighting pattern (pattern 1) corresponding to the opening of the front door while the power is off has the highest priority, and the setting key type switch 430 is turned on when the front door is closed. The lighting pattern (pattern 2) corresponding to the setting of is given priority next. Further, basically, the lighting pattern corresponding to the "abnormality with a strong suspicion of cheating" has priority over the lighting pattern corresponding to the "abnormality occurring in the normal game". Even if one error occurs, if a higher priority error occurs at the same time, the lighting pattern corresponding to the one error does not appear immediately (the high priority error occurs). Appears after it is resolved).

When it is determined in step S1005 that no other error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to cause the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b to emit light according to the model identification pattern (step S1007). As a result, the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b emit light in the pattern shown in FIG. 362. After executing the process of step S1007, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

In the "model identification pattern", the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b in the first step to the thirteenth step shown in FIG. 362 is repeatedly performed. That is, when the light emission control of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b in the first step to the thirteenth step is completed, the light emission control of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b in the first step to the thirteenth step is performed again. In the present specification, the cycle of the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b in the first step to the thirteenth step is also referred to as one "loop". The "loop" continues until a factor that changes the lighting pattern (for example, a start lever operation or a custom start operation) occurs.

Alternatively, the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b in the first step to the thirteenth step may be performed only once (the "loop" is not performed). In this case, after the light emission control of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b in the first step to the thirteenth step is performed once, both the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b may be made to emit white light. Then, the state in which the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are made to emit white light may be continued until the next factor for changing the lighting pattern occurs (the emission color changing condition of the lamp 3305 is satisfied). Further, the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b (process of step S1007) by the "model identification pattern" is performed before the process of step S1001 and after the light emission control (first step to thirteenth step) is completed. , The process of step S1001 may be executed.

When an error occurs, the lighting pattern corresponding to the error is prioritized, and the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b by the "model identification pattern" is performed after the error is resolved. After the error is resolved, the "loop" continues until a factor for changing the lighting pattern occurs, as described above. Alternatively, after the error is resolved and the light emission control of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b in the first step to the thirteenth step is performed once, the lighting pattern is displayed with the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b emitting white light. You may wait for the change factor to occur.

<Ramp control processing>
FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing a lamp control process performed in the game machine.

The lamp control process shown in FIG. 366 is a process that is repeated at a predetermined timing in the sub-control unit 3302 after the processes of steps S1001 to S1007 of FIG. 365 are completed.

In the lamp control process, first, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether or not an error has occurred (step S1011). Examples of the error include the above-mentioned "abnormality with strong suspicion of cheating" and "abnormality occurring in normal games". In step S1011, a determination of "whether or not the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON with the front door closed" (the same determination as in step S1003 of FIG. 365) is also performed.

When it is determined that an error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to cause the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b to emit light according to the lighting pattern according to the type of error (step S1012). After that, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether or not the game is being performed (step S1013). Here, the "situation in which the game is being performed" is a state in which the game processing is not performed on the main control unit 3301 side (that is, one game is completed and the BET operation or the start lever operation is awaited). Refers to the non-existent state. The game process is, for example, a process related to a game performed between the BET operation (start lever operation) and the payout of medals. The “situation in which the game is being played” may refer to a situation in which the demo screen is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The demo screen is a screen that is transitioned when it is determined that the game is not being performed (waiting for customers). As the conditions for shifting to the demo screen, conventionally known conditions can be appropriately adopted. For example, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the medals have been paid out without BET. It can be configured to display a demo screen at times. For example, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the medal is paid out without BET being performed, the demo transition command is transmitted from the main control unit 3301 to the sub control unit 3302. Just do it. As a result, the sub-control unit 3302 can recognize that the transition condition to the demo screen has been satisfied.

When it is determined that the game is being performed, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether or not at least one "loop" has been completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b according to the model identification pattern. (Step S1014).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to cause the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b to emit light according to the lighting pattern according to the effect performed during the game. (Step S1015). The “lighting pattern according to the effect performed during the game” is the above-mentioned “pattern for effect during the game” (see FIG. 361). The "effect performed during the game" is a production performed by a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, or the like according to the situation of the game (a production generally performed in a pachislot machine). The sub-control unit 3302 includes information corresponding to the type and game state of the internal winning combination included in the start command data (see step S10 in FIG. 49) and the combination included in the winning operation command data (see step S14 in FIG. 49). Based on the information corresponding to (combination of symbols displayed stopped along the effective line), the "effect performed during the game" is determined.

A data table (table corresponding to FIG. 361) in which such "effects performed during the game" (for example, effects A to C shown in FIG. 361) and "lighting patterns" are associated with each other is a storage device such as a ROM. In the process of step S1015, the sub-control unit 3302 causes the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b to emit light in a "lighting pattern" according to the "effect performed during the game" by referring to the table. .. After executing the process of step S1015, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

As the "effect performed during the game", an effect performed in response to the BET operation may be provided, and the lighting patterns of the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b may be changed based on the effect. For example, in order to start the next game (unit game) in a state where the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b are lit in a predetermined pattern as the winning effect is performed as the effect in one game (unit game). When the final effect is performed triggered by the BET operation, the lighting pattern of the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b may be changed to the lighting pattern corresponding to the final effect.

If it is determined in step S1013 that the game is not being performed, or if it is determined in step S1014 that one "loop" has not yet been completed, the sub-control unit 3302 uses the model identification pattern. The lamp control circuit 3306 is controlled so as to cause the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b to emit light (step S1016). As a result, if the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are in the middle of being controlled by the model identification pattern, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (progress from the first step to the thirteenth step). Continue the steps inside). On the other hand, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b is not performed by the model identification pattern, the sub-control unit 3302 starts the light emission control from the first step. After executing the process of step S1016, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

With the above configuration, for example, after the power is turned on, the start lever is operated by the time when one "loop" is completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b according to the model identification pattern. If so, the "loop" will continue. That is, the light emission control by the lighting pattern corresponding to the effect performed by operating the start lever is not performed (the lighting pattern is discarded). As described above, the in-game effect pattern includes a lighting pattern in which the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are lit in a predetermined color in one unit game, and the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b. There is a lighting pattern in which the state of being lit in a predetermined color continues over a plurality of unit games. If an effect corresponding to the former lighting pattern occurs by the end of one "loop" as the light emission control of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b by the model identification pattern, the lighting pattern is discarded while the latter. When the effect corresponding to the lighting pattern of is generated, the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b may be made to emit light according to the lighting pattern after one "loop" is completed. Further, even if an effect corresponding to the former lighting pattern is generated by the end of one "loop" for controlling the light emission of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b by the model identification pattern, the unit game is completed. If the one "loop" is completed by the time, the process of step S1015 may be continuously performed. As a result, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b can be turned on in a pattern corresponding to the effect without missing the effect in the unit game.

<Ramp control process (at the start of custom)>
FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing a lamp control process (at the time of custom start) performed in the game machine.

The lamp control process (at the time of custom start) shown in FIG. 367 is a process performed by the sub-control unit 3302 when the custom start operation is performed.

In the lamp control process (at the start of customizing), first, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether or not at least one "loop" has been completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b according to the model identification pattern (at the time of custom start). Step S1021).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to make the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b emit light according to the lighting pattern according to the content of customization (step S1022). ). The lighting pattern is the above-mentioned "custom start pattern" (see FIG. 361), and is a lighting pattern according to the type of the character selected by the custom start operation. As a result, for example, when the character A is selected by the custom start operation, the light emission control is performed by the "pattern 10" shown in FIG. 361, and when the character B is selected by the custom start operation, the "pattern" is performed. When the character C is selected by the custom start operation, the light emission control by "11" is performed, and the light emission control by "Pattern 12" is performed.

After executing the process of step S1022, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1021 that one "loop" has not been completed yet, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to make the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b emit light according to the model identification pattern (step S1023). As a result, if the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are in the middle of being controlled by the model identification pattern, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (progress from the first step to the thirteenth step). Continue the steps inside).

Next, the sub-control unit 3302 sets the custom lighting standby flag to ON (step S1024). The custom lighting standby flag is a flag indicating that the light emission control of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b according to the custom start pattern is suspended. When one "loop" is completed to control the light emission of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b according to the model identification pattern, if the custom lighting standby flag is set to ON, the sub-control unit 3302 is operated by the custom start operation. The lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are made to emit light according to the lighting pattern according to the type of the selected character.

After executing the process of step S1024, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

<Lighting pattern detection process>
FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing a lighting pattern detection process performed on the data display. FIG. 369 is a diagram showing a model identification table.

The lighting pattern detection process shown in FIG. 368 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing in the control unit 2301 (see FIG. 343) of the data display 2001. As described in the thirteenth embodiment, the image sensor unit 2311 (see FIG. 344) can search for a light source (positions of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b) while removing the influence of ambient light. Therefore, the control unit 2301 can specify the light emission color of the lamp 3305a and the light emission color of the lamp 3305b (detect the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305).

In the lighting pattern detection process, first, the control unit 2301 first sees a lighting pattern in which the combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b corresponds to the model identification pattern (see step S1007 in FIG. 365 and step S1016 in FIG. ) (Step S1101). Specifically, the control unit 2301 determines whether or not the lighting pattern in the 11th to 13th steps shown in FIG. 362 is detected as a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b.

When it is determined that the lighting pattern in the 11th to 13th steps of the model identification pattern is detected, the control unit 2301 corresponds to the learning pattern as a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b. It is determined whether or not the lighting pattern to be used is detected (step S1102). As described above, the learning pattern is a lighting pattern that appears before the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are lit in a pattern corresponding to the manufacturer information and the model information (lighting patterns in the first step to the tenth step shown in FIG. 362). Is. In the process of step S1102, the control unit 2301 determines whether or not the lighting pattern in the first step to the tenth step is detected for a predetermined time (19 seconds) before the lighting pattern in the eleventh step is detected. To do. The combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b in the model identification pattern (each lighting pattern in the first step to the thirteenth step) is one of the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 361. The combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b may be the same. Even if these combinations are the same, the control unit 2301 determines the type of lighting pattern by detecting the combination of emission colors and the lighting time by making the lighting time different, and the model identification pattern. Can be recognized.

When it is determined that the lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern is detected, the control unit 2301 determines whether or not the data for the model corresponding to the lighting pattern in the eleventh step to the thirteenth step is stored. (Step S1103).

Prior to performing the process of step S1103, the control unit 2301 detects the lighting pattern in the eleventh step to the thirteenth step. The control unit 2301 identifies the model corresponding to the lighting pattern in the 11th to 13th steps by referring to the model identification table (see FIG. 369) stored in the storage device such as ROM 2302 (see FIG. 343). To do.

In the model identification table shown in FIG. 369, one model and one manufacturer are defined in association with each other for three lighting patterns (“11”, “12”, and “13” in the figure). There is. “11”, “12”, and “13” indicate the eleventh step, the twelfth step, and the thirteenth step in the model identification pattern, respectively. The control unit 2301 identifies a model corresponding to the three lighting patterns based on the detected three lighting patterns (11th step to 13th step) and the model identification table. For example, in the control unit 2301, the three most recently detected lighting patterns are a pattern in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light, and the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. When the pattern and the pattern in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits red light, the model A is specified.

In the process of step S1103, whether the control unit 2301 stores data for the specified model (model corresponding to the lighting pattern in the 11th to 13th steps) in a storage device such as RAM 2303 (see FIG. 343). Judge whether or not. The "model data" is the production data for performing the production according to the specified model. As will be described later, since the production data is configured to be downloaded from the management server 4001, the process of step S1103 determines whether or not the production data corresponding to the specified model has been downloaded. It can also be rephrased as the process of doing.

When it is determined that the effect data corresponding to the specified model has been downloaded, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect data corresponding to the specified model has not been downloaded, the control unit 2301 requests the management server 4001 to transmit the effect data according to the model (step S1104). Then, the control unit 2301 receives the effect data corresponding to the model from the management server 4001 (step S1105).

In the process of step S1104, the control unit 2301 transmits an effect data request signal including information (model information) indicating the specified model to the management server 4001. In the management server 4001, effect data corresponding to a plurality of models including models A to F shown in FIG. 369 are stored in a storage device such as a hard disk drive. Upon receiving the effect data request signal, the management server 4001 transmits the effect data corresponding to one model indicated by the model information included in the effect data request signal to the data display 2001. As a result, the data display 2001 can download the effect data corresponding to the model to which the game machine 3001 belongs from the management server 4001. In the process of step S1105, the control unit 2301 stores the downloaded effect data in a storage device such as RAM 2303.

After executing the process of step S1105, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the model is specified by the data display 2001, but the model may be specified by the management server 4001. In this case, for example, it is preferable to store the model identification table in the management server 4001 and transmit the information indicating the model identification pattern detected by the data display 2001 to the management server 4001.

Further, although it has been described that the effect data according to the model is stored in the management server 4001, the effect data may not be stored in the management server 4001. In this case, the management server 4001 may be configured to download the effect data from the outside and transmit the downloaded effect data to the data display 2001 each time the effect data request signal is received. Further, in the data display 2001, every time the effect data is downloaded from the management server 4001, the old effect data may be deleted and replaced with new effect data as the effect data stored in the storage device. The production data corresponding to a number of models (for example, the production data for the three most recently downloaded models) may be stored.

When it is determined in step S1101 that the lighting pattern in the 11th to 13th steps is not detected, the control unit 2301 corresponds to an error pattern as a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b. It is determined whether or not the lighting pattern (see step S1002, step S1004, and step S1006 of FIG. 365, and step S1012 of FIG. 366) is detected (step S1106). As described above, the error pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when an abnormality (error) is detected in the game machine 3001 (see FIG. 361). A data table (table corresponding to FIG. 361) in which the lighting pattern and the pattern type (error pattern, custom start pattern, custom end pattern, in-game effect pattern, etc.) are associated with each other is stored in the ROM 2302 or the like. It is stored in the device, and the control unit 2301 can recognize the pattern type by referring to the data table.

When it is determined that the lighting pattern corresponding to the error pattern is detected, the control unit 2301 notifies that an error has occurred (step S1107). Specifically, the control unit 2301 controls the video display unit 2305 and the audio output unit 2307 (see FIG. 343) to display an image notifying that an error has occurred on the liquid crystal display 2002, or an error occurs. A sound for notifying that the operation has been performed is output from the speaker 2004. At that time, the control unit 2301 changes the notification mode according to the type of error corresponding to the detected error pattern.

Then, the control unit 2301 transmits an error signal indicating that an error has occurred to the management server 4001 (hall computer) (step S1108). The error signal contains information indicating the type of error. After executing the process of step S1108, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1106 that the lighting pattern corresponding to the error pattern is not detected, the control unit 2301 sets the lighting corresponding to the custom start pattern as a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b. It is determined whether or not the pattern (see step S1022 in FIG. 367) is detected (step S1109). As described above, the custom start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game is started (a custom start operation is performed) (see FIG. 361).

When it is determined that the lighting pattern corresponding to the custom start pattern is detected, the control unit 2301 executes the custom start effect (step S1110). The custom start effect is an effect indicating that the custom game is started, and is an effect according to the type of character corresponding to the detected custom start pattern. As a result, the image corresponding to the character selected by the custom start operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002, and the sound corresponding to the character is output from the speaker 2004. After executing the process of step S1110, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1109 that the lighting pattern corresponding to the custom start pattern is not detected, the control unit 2301 corresponds to the custom end pattern as a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b. It is determined whether or not the lighting pattern is detected (step S1111). As described above, the custom end pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the custom game is completed (custom end operation is performed) (see FIG. 361). That is, when the custom end operation is performed, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b emit light according to the lighting pattern 20 (custom end pattern) shown in FIG. 361.

When it is determined that the lighting pattern corresponding to the custom end pattern is detected, the control unit 2301 executes the custom end effect (step S1112). The custom end effect is an effect indicating that the custom game is completed, and the image corresponding to the character selected by the custom is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002, or the sound corresponding to the character is output from the speaker 2004. Or something. After executing the process of step S1112, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1111 that the lighting pattern corresponding to the custom end pattern is not detected, the control unit 2301 corresponds to the in-game effect pattern as a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b. It is determined whether or not the lighting pattern (see step S1015 of FIG. 366) is detected (step S1113). As described above, the in-game effect pattern is a lighting pattern corresponding to an effect performed during the game (an effect generally performed in a pachislot machine) (see FIG. 361).

When it is determined that the lighting pattern corresponding to the in-game effect pattern is detected, the control unit 2301 executes the in-game effect (step S1114). The in-game effect is an effect according to the type of detected in-game effect pattern (an effect corresponding to the effect performed during the game in the game machine 3001), and an image according to the game situation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002. It is displayed, or a sound corresponding to the situation of the game is output from the speaker 2004. As a result, the effect performed by the game machine 3001 and the effect performed by the data display device 2001 can be linked. In addition, during the period when the custom game is being performed (between the custom start operation and the custom end operation), the effect may be performed according to the content of the customization and the situation of the game. is there.

When it is determined in step S1113 that the lighting pattern corresponding to the effect pattern during the game is not detected, or after the process of step S1114 is executed, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game system 5001, the game machine 3001, and the data display 2001 according to the fifteenth embodiment have been described.

<Appendix H>
Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. The game display device can display game information such as the number of hits of bonus games, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals won during the hit game state, and can produce effects based on the game information. It is composed.

Generally, the data display device is configured to receive information from the game machine via an external terminal plate of the game machine, and displays and directs the game information based on the information from the game machine. .. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-036585, the data display device is configured to perform an effect linked to the effect on the game machine based on the information from the game machine.

By the way, since there is a limit to the number of terminals that a general external terminal board can use for transmitting a signal to a data display, and it is necessary to use terminals for each type of signal, from a game machine to a data display. The types of game information that could be sent were limited. Therefore, it has been difficult for the data display to increase the effect pattern based on the game information.

In the process of diligently studying a game system including a game machine and a data display, the present inventor efficiently transfers the information to an external device such as a data display by devising a method of expressing information in the game machine. I came up with the idea that it could be communicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game system, a game machine, and a game device capable of efficiently transmitting information to the outside of the game machine. And.

In this regard, the game system 5001, the game machine 3001, and the data display 2001 according to the fifteenth embodiment have the following features.

(H1-1) A game machine belonging to a predetermined model (game machine 3001) and
A gaming device (data display 2001) provided for the gaming machine, and
A server (management server 4001) capable of communicating with the game device and storing data related to the predetermined model is provided.
The game machine
Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light, and
A light emitting control means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the processes of step S1007 of FIG. 365 and step S1016 of FIG. 366) capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a mode (model identification pattern) corresponding to the predetermined model. And with
The gaming device is
A light emitting mode detecting means (control unit 2301 that executes a process of specifying the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means.
A data acquisition means (FIG. 368) capable of requesting the server to transmit data relating to a model corresponding to the light emitting mode detected by the light emitting mode detecting means and acquiring data relating to the predetermined model from the server. A control unit 2301) that executes the processes of step S1104 and step S1105 of the above.
A game system characterized by that.

According to the game system 5001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) belongs to a predetermined model, and the light emitting means (lamp 3305a) is in a mode (model identification pattern) corresponding to the predetermined model. And the lamp 3305b) can be made to emit light. On the other hand, the gaming device (data display 2001) can detect the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001), and the detected light emitting mode can be used. It is configured so that it is possible to request the server (management server 4001) to transmit data related to the corresponding model. As a result, information that the game machine (game machine 3001) belongs to a predetermined model can be transmitted to the server (management server 4001) via the game device (data display 2001). There is. Then, through the transmission of the information, the gaming device (data display 2001) can acquire the data related to the predetermined model from the server (management server 4001). As a result, in the game device (data display 2001), it is possible to realize an output such as an effect corresponding to the model of the game machine (game machine 3001).

The server (management server 4001) may be a hall computer or an island computer. The island computer is configured to collectively manage a dozen game devices (data display 2001) installed for a dozen game machines (game machine 3001) that form a group called a so-called game island. Has been done.

(H1-2) A game machine (game machine 3001) belonging to a predetermined model.
Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light in a manner recognizable from the outside, and
A light emitting control means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the processes of step S1007 of FIG. 365 and step S1016 of FIG. 366) capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light is provided.
The light emission control means
It is possible to make the light emitting means emit light in a mode (model identification pattern) corresponding to the predetermined model at a predetermined timing when the game is not performed (when returning from the power failure).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) belongs to a predetermined model, and the game machine (game machine 3001) is said to belong to a predetermined model at a predetermined timing when the game is not performed (at the time of recovery from the power failure). It is configured so that the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) can emit light in a manner corresponding to a predetermined model (model identification pattern) and in a manner recognizable from the outside. Thereby, through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b), it is possible to recognize from the outside the information that the game machine (game machine 3001) belongs to a predetermined model, and the game machine (game machine 3001). ) Can be efficiently transmitted to the outside.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the light emitting means is in a mode corresponding to the predetermined model (model identification pattern) and in a mode recognizable from the outside at a predetermined timing when the game is not performed (when returning from the power failure). (Lamp 3305a and Lamp 3305b) have been described as emitting light. In the present invention, the predetermined timing at which the game is not performed is not limited to the time of returning from the power failure, and may be when the demo screen is displayed or when the setting change operation is performed ( It may be (when the setting key type switch 430 is set to ON).

In the fifteenth embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine. As a condition for shifting to the demo screen, in the pachislot game machine, in addition to the condition described in the fifteenth embodiment, a predetermined time elapses without operating the start lever after automatic loading by re-game, and a C / P button. It can be mentioned that all the medals that are operated and credited are paid out, and that the power is turned on (until BET is performed). Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation of the steering wheel after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped without winning a prize at the starting port. The condition that the state where there is no hold and the symbol does not change continues for a predetermined time can be mentioned as a condition for transition to the demo screen.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, after the power is turned on, the start lever is operated before one "loop" is completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b according to the model identification pattern. Explained that the "loop" is to be continued. Similarly, even if a power failure occurs while the reel is rotating, the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are not lit according to the rotation of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b when the power is restored from the power failure. , The "loop" of the model identification pattern has priority.

(H1-3) The gaming machine according to (H1-2).
The light emission control means
It is possible to make the light emitting means emit light in a predetermined pattern (learning pattern) before causing the light emitting means to emit light in a mode corresponding to the predetermined model.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, before the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) are made to emit light in a manner corresponding to a predetermined model, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) are subjected to a predetermined pattern (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b). It is configured so that it can emit light with a learning pattern). As a result, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) emit light in a predetermined pattern (learning pattern) prior to the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) emitting light in a mode corresponding to a predetermined model. Using a predetermined pattern (learning pattern) as a mark, it is easy to grasp the timing at which the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) emit light in a mode corresponding to the predetermined model. Therefore, the information that the game machine (game machine 3001) belongs to a predetermined model can be more appropriately transmitted to the outside of the game machine (game machine 3001).

(H1-4) The light emitting mode detecting means (the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001). The control unit 2301) that executes the specified process and
By requesting the server to transmit data based on the light emitting mode detected by the light emitting mode detecting means, data relating to the model of the game machine (effect data corresponding to the specified model) is acquired from the server. A data acquisition means (control unit 2301 that executes the processes of step S1104 and step S1105 of FIG. 368) that can be used is provided.
A gaming device characterized by this.

According to the data display 2001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming device (data display 2001) detects the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) included in the game machine (game machine 3001). It is possible to request the server (management server 4001) to transmit data (effect data according to the specified model) based on the detected light emission mode. .. As a result, the information of the game machine (game machine 3001) indicated by the light emitting mode can be transmitted to the server (management server 4001) via the game device (data display 2001). Then, through the transmission of the information, the gaming device (data display 2001) transmits data related to the model of the gaming machine (game machine 3001) (directing data according to the specified model) from the server (management server 4001). It is possible to get it. As a result, in the game device (data display 2001), it is possible to realize an output such as an effect corresponding to the model of the game machine (game machine 3001).

(H2-1) A game machine (game machine 3001) and
A gaming device (data display 2001) provided for the gaming machine is provided.
The game machine
Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light, and
Fraud detection means capable of detecting the possibility of fraud (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the processes of step S1001 and step S1003 of FIG. 365) and
When the possibility that fraud has been performed is detected by the fraud detecting means, the light emitting control means (steps S1002 and step S1004 of FIG. 365) capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined mode is executed. Sub-control unit 3302)
The gaming device is
A light emitting mode detecting means (control unit 2301 that executes a process of specifying the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means.
Output means capable of producing a predetermined output when the light emitting mode detected by the light emitting mode detecting means is the predetermined mode (control unit 2301 that executes the processes of steps S1107 and S1108 of FIG. 368). And
A game system characterized by that.

According to the game system 5001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can detect the possibility of fraud and the possibility of fraud being detected. In some cases, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) can be made to emit light in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, the gaming device (data display 2001) can detect the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamp 3305b) included in the game machine (game machine 3001), and the detected light emitting mode is In the case of the predetermined aspect, it is configured so that a predetermined output can be performed. As a result, information indicating the possibility of fraud can be transmitted from the game machine (game machine 3001) to the game device (data display 2001) through the light emission mode of the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b). It is possible, and it is possible to notify the possibility of fraud through a predetermined output.

(H2-2) Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light in a manner recognizable from the outside, and
Fraud detection means capable of detecting the possibility of fraud (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the processes of step S1001 and step S1003 of FIG. 365) and
When the possibility that fraud has been performed is detected by the fraud detecting means, the light emitting control means (steps S1002 and step S1004 of FIG. 365) capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined mode is executed. Sub-control unit 3302)
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can detect the possibility that the fraud has been committed, and the possibility that the fraud has been committed has been detected. In some cases, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) can be made to emit light in a predetermined manner and in a manner recognizable from the outside. As a result, information indicating the possibility of fraud can be recognized from the outside through the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b), and the information can be recognized outside the game machine (game machine 3001). Can be transmitted efficiently.

(H2-3) The game machine of the above (H2-2).
A rotary opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is provided.
The fraud detection means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the process of step S1001 in FIG. 365) is
It is possible to detect that the rotary opening / closing part is opened when the power is not turned on.
The light emission control means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the process of step S1002 in FIG. 365) is
When the fraud detecting means detects that the rotary opening / closing portion is opened while the power is not turned on, the light emitting means is made to emit light in the predetermined mode when the power is turned on. Is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) detects that the rotary opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is opened while the power is not turned on. When it is detected that the rotary opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is opened when the power is not turned on, a predetermined value is set when the power is turned on. It is configured so that the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) can emit light in a mode and a mode recognizable from the outside. As a result, through the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b), information indicating that the rotary opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is opened while the power is not turned on is recognized from the outside. This information can be efficiently transmitted to the outside of the game machine (game machine 3001).

When it is detected that the rotary opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is opened (possibly fraudulent) when the power is not turned on, light emission by the learning pattern is performed. Even while the light emission control of the means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) is being performed, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) is made to emit light in a pattern (for example, pattern 1) corresponding to the error by interrupting. It may be that. In this case, after the error is resolved (the error screen is cleared in the game machine 3001), the light emission control of the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) by the learning pattern may be returned. At that time, the light emission control of the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) by the learning pattern may be restarted from the interrupted step, or may be performed again from the first step.

Further, even after the error is resolved in the game machine 3001 (the error screen is cleared), the error notification in the data display 2001 may be continued.

(H2-4) The gaming machine according to (H2-2).
Rotating opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) and
A game control means capable of controlling game execution based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values, and a game control means.
It is provided with a setting operation means capable of performing a setting operation (setting change operation) for setting one setting value from the plurality of setting values.
The fraud detection means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the process of step S1003 in FIG. 365) is
It is possible to detect the possibility that the setting operation has been performed in a state where the rotary opening / closing portion is not opened.
The light emission control means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the process of step S1004 in FIG. 365) is
When it is detected by the fraud detecting means that the setting operation may have been performed in a state where the rotating opening / closing portion is not opened, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the predetermined mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) performs a setting operation (setting change operation) in a state where the rotation opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is not opened. It is possible to detect the possibility that the setting operation (setting change operation) has been performed while the rotary opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) has not been opened. When this is done, the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) can be made to emit light in a predetermined manner and in a manner recognizable from the outside. As a result, there is a possibility that the setting operation (setting change operation) is performed in a state where the rotary opening / closing part (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is not opened through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b). It is possible to recognize the information indicating the above from the outside, and the information can be efficiently transmitted to the outside of the game machine (game machine 3001).

The means for detecting that the rotary opening / closing portion (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) is not opened is not particularly limited, and for example, the open / closed state of the front door can be physically detected. A door open / close detection sensor may be provided on the front door (for example, in the vicinity of the door open / close monitoring switch 462). The door open / close detection sensor detects that the front door has been opened (changed from a closed state to an open state) and closed (changed from an open state to a closed state). To do. On top of that, it is possible to configure the main control unit 3301 to transmit information indicating that the state of the front door (open state or closed state) has changed to the sub control unit 3302.

Further, the rotary opening / closing portion is not limited to the front door of the pachislot gaming machine, and may be a main body frame (a portion rotatable with respect to the outer frame) of the pachinko gaming machine.

(H2-5) The light emitting mode detecting means (the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001). The control unit 2301) that executes the specified process and
When a predetermined light emitting mode is detected by the light emitting mode detecting means, an output means (FIG.) capable of performing a predetermined output (error notification) that can suggest the state of the game machine corresponding to the predetermined light emitting mode. The control unit 2301) that executes the process of step S1107 of 368, and
When the predetermined light emitting mode is detected by the light emitting mode detecting means, it is possible to transmit a signal (error signal) corresponding to the detection of the predetermined light emitting mode to the server (management server 4001). A signal transmitting means (control unit 2301 that executes the process of step S1108 of FIG. 368) is provided.
A gaming device characterized by this.

According to the data display 2001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming device (data display 2001) detects the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) included in the game machine (game machine 3001). When a predetermined light emitting mode is detected, it is possible to perform a predetermined output (error notification) that can suggest the state of the game machine corresponding to the predetermined light emitting mode. It is configured so that a signal (error signal) corresponding to the detection of a predetermined light emitting mode can be transmitted to the server (management server 4001). As a result, information that can suggest the state of the game machine (game machine 3001) corresponding to the predetermined light emitting mode can be transmitted to the game device (data display 2001) and the server (management server 4001). It has become. Then, through a predetermined output (error notification) in the game device (data display 2001) to an output in the server (management server 4001), the state of the game machine (game machine 3001) corresponding to the predetermined light emitting mode is determined by the game store. It is possible to notify the clerk and the like.

In the present specification, an error refers to a phenomenon that cannot occur (very unlikely) as long as the game is normally performed, or a phenomenon that hinders the progress of the game. It means that a situation has occurred that should be notified to the store clerk. In the fifteenth embodiment, as an example of the error, an error assumed mainly in a pachislot machine has been described. When the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine, a well-known error in the pachinko gaming machine may be adopted as the error. Specifically, as a phenomenon that cannot occur (very unlikely) as long as the game is normally performed, a phenomenon that occurs when cheating is performed can be assumed, for example. Magnetic detection error (magnet is in the vicinity of the game machine), vibration detection error (vibration with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold occurs), radio wave detection error (predetermined radio wave reaches the game machine) , Abnormal winning error (the winning is detected even though the big winning opening and the starting opening are not open) and the like. Examples of the phenomenon that hinders the progress of the game include a plate full tank error (the game ball overflows from the plate) and a ballless error (the payout mechanism does not have the game ball). Such an error can be detected by a conventionally known means (for example, a sensor, a switch, a circuit, etc.).

(H3-1) A game machine (game machine 3001) and
A gaming device (data display 2001) provided for the gaming machine is provided.
The game machine
Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light, and
A production custom selection method that allows you to select one production custom from multiple production customs (character customization), and
A light emitting control means capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light in an embodiment (patterns 10 to 12, patterns 31 to 33, and patterns 41 to 43 shown in FIG. 361) according to the effect custom selected by the effect custom selection means. And with
The gaming device is
A light emitting mode detecting means (control unit 2301 that executes a process of specifying the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means.
It is provided with an output means (control unit 2301 that executes the processes of steps S1110 and S1114 of FIG. 368) capable of outputting the effect custom according to the light emission mode detected by the light emission mode detecting means.
A game system characterized by that.

According to the game system 5001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can select one production custom (character customization) from a plurality of production customs (character customization). , It is possible to make the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) emit light in a manner corresponding to the selected effect custom (character customization). On the other hand, the gaming device (data display 2001) can detect the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001), and the detected light emitting mode can be used. It is configured so that it is possible to output the production custom (character customization) according to it. As a result, information indicating the selected effect custom (character customization) is transmitted from the gaming machine (game machine 3001) to the gaming device (data display 2001) through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b). This is possible, and in the game device (data display 2001), it is possible to realize the output of the effect or the like corresponding to the effect custom (character customization).

(H3-2) An operating means capable of being operated by the player,
Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light in a manner recognizable from the outside, and
A light emitting control means capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light,
Equipped with a production execution means that can perform production,
The operation means may perform a start operation (custom start operation) for starting an effect custom selection mode (custom game) according to one effect custom selected from a plurality of effect customs (character customization). It is possible and
The effect executing means can perform an effect according to the effect custom selection mode.
The light emitting control means can make the light emitting means emit light in an mode corresponding to the effect custom selection mode (patterns 10 to 12, patterns 31 to 33, and patterns 41 to 43 shown in FIG. 361).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) is a production custom selection according to one production custom (character customization) selected from a plurality of production customs (character customization). It is possible to perform a start operation (custom start operation) for starting a mode (custom game), and it is possible to perform an effect according to one effect custom selection mode (custom game). Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) are emitted in a mode (patterns 10 to 12, patterns 31 to 33, patterns 41 to 43 shown in FIG. 361) according to a selection mode (custom game) and in a mode recognizable from the outside. It is configured so that it can be made to. As a result, it is possible to recognize from the outside the information indicating the selected effect custom (character customization) through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b), and to the outside of the game machine (game machine 3001). The information can be transmitted efficiently.

(H3-3) The gaming machine according to (H3-2).
The operation means can perform an end operation (custom end operation) for ending the effect custom selection mode.
When the termination operation is performed, the light emitting control means can make the light emitting means emit light in a predetermined mode (pattern 20 shown in FIG. 361).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can perform an end operation (custom end operation) for ending one effect custom selection mode (custom game). Yes, when the end operation (custom end operation) is performed, the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) can be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (pattern 20 shown in FIG. 361) and in a mode recognizable from the outside. It is configured to be possible. Thereby, through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b), it is possible to recognize from the outside the information indicating that the effect custom selection mode (custom game) has ended, and the effect custom selection mode (lamp 3305a). The end timing of the custom game) can be appropriately notified.

(H3-4) The light emitting mode detecting means (the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001). The control unit 2301) that executes the specified process and
From the time when the first predetermined light emitting mode (custom start pattern) is detected by the light emitting mode detecting means until the second predetermined light emitting mode (custom end pattern) is detected, the light emitting mode detecting means detects the light emitting mode. It is provided with an output means (control unit 2301 that executes the process of step S1114 of FIG. 368) capable of outputting the effect custom (character customization) according to the light emission mode.
A gaming device characterized by this.

According to the data display 2001 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming device (data display 2001) detects the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) included in the game machine (game machine 3001). From the time when the first predetermined light emitting mode (custom start pattern) is detected to the time when the second predetermined light emitting mode (custom end pattern) is detected, the light emitting mode is determined according to the detected light emitting mode. It is configured so that output related to production custom (character customization) can be performed. As a result, the first predetermined light emitting mode (custom start pattern) includes information indicating the timing to start the output related to the effect custom (character customization), while the second predetermined light emitting mode (custom end pattern) contains information. Information indicating the timing to end the output related to the production custom (character customization) will be included. Then, through the light emitting mode, information indicating these timings can be transmitted from the game machine (game machine 3001) to the game device (data display 2001), and the game machine (game machine 3001) and the game can be used. It is possible to realize that the device (data display 2001) and the device (data display 2001) can link the effects according to the effect custom (character customization) while matching the period during which the output related to the effect custom (character customization) is performed. ..

The production custom is not limited to the character custom, and a custom related to the production can be appropriately adopted. For example, the effect mode can be configured so that the player can select it, and examples of such an effect mode include a mode for increasing the appearance rate of the premium effect.

As an effect according to the effect custom (character customization), it is possible to perform an effect using a character. As the effect using the character, for example, a continuous effect that suggests the degree of expectation over a plurality of unit games can be adopted. As such a continuous effect, for example, a precursor effect that suggests that a gaming state (for example, AT) that is advantageous to the player occurs can be mentioned. For example, in a custom game in which character A is selected, as a precursor effect suggesting that AT will occur, a precursor effect using character A and a precursor effect using character B are provided, and character A is used. It is assumed that the precursory effect that was present has a higher degree of expectation than the precursory effect that uses the character B. In such a mode, the light emitting modes of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are different depending on whether the precursor effect using the character A is performed or the precursor effect using the character B is performed in the game machine 3001. On the other hand, the data display 2001 can be configured to produce an effect according to the light emitting mode of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b. As a result, when the precursor effect using the character A is performed in the game machine 3001, the effect using the character A can be performed in the data display 2001 as well, and the character B is displayed in the game machine 3001. When the precursor effect used is performed, the effect using the character B can be performed in the data display 2001, and the expectation level can be suggested in the data display 2001 as well.

Similar to the 14th embodiment, in the 15th embodiment, the external terminal plate 3308 is connected to the main control unit 3301 of the game machine 3001 (see FIG. 342). The external terminal plate 3308 is connected to the control unit 2301 of the data display 2001 via the communication interface 2310 (see FIG. 343). As a result, information can be transmitted from the game machine 3001 to the data display 2001 via the external terminal plate 3308. However, information regarding character customization (information indicating the content of customization and information indicating that a custom start operation or custom end operation has been performed) may not be transmitted to the data display 2001 via the external terminal board 3308. Absent.

Further, in the case where a plurality of specific gaming states are provided as advantageous gaming states for the player, when any of the plurality of specific gaming states occurs, the plurality of specific gaming states are not distinguished. , Information indicating that any one of the plurality of specific gaming states has occurred is transmitted to the data display 2001 via the external terminal plate 3308, while the light emitting modes of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are identified as having occurred. It may be different depending on the type of the game state. For example, when red BB, blue BB, and white BB are provided as BBs, and any of the BBs is generated (or internal winning), BBs are generated without distinguishing between these BBs. (Or, the information indicating that the internal winning is achieved) is transmitted to the data display 2001 via the external terminal plate 3308, while the light emitting mode of the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b is generated (or the internal winning) of the type of BB. It may be different depending on the situation. As a result, it is possible for the data display 2001 to recognize the type of the specific game state (hit) that occurs, and the data display 2001 produces an effect according to the type of the specific game state (hit) that occurs. Can be performed at. Further, the effect can be linked between the game machine 3001 and the data display machine 2001.

[16th Embodiment]
The first to fifteenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the 16th embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game system 5001 according to the 16th embodiment is the same as that of the game system 5001 according to the 15th embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game system 5001 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first to fifteenth embodiments also applies to the sixteenth embodiment.

<Game system 5001>
FIG. 370 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the 16th embodiment.

The game system 5001 includes a game machine 3001, a data display 2001, a management server 4501, and a mobile terminal 6001. The mobile terminal 6001 and the management server 4501 can exchange data with each other by communicating via the Internet. Although not shown, the game system 5001 also includes the management server 4001 described in the fifteenth embodiment.

Prior to starting the game, the player receives a password issued from the management server 4501 in a state where a predetermined application is started on the mobile terminal 6001 owned by the player. The password is an encrypted history of the games played up to the last time. The management server 4501 stores game history information indicating the history of the games played up to the previous time, and the management server 4501 describes the game history as a symbol composed of a plurality of symbols (including characters and numbers). Convert to a column. The password is a symbol string corresponding to such a game history. The player can display the password on the mobile terminal 6001 by performing a predetermined operation.

After that, when starting the game, the player operates the operation buttons on the game machine 3001 to display the menu screen (see FIG. 363 (A)) on the liquid crystal display device, and the main menu "custom game" is displayed on the menu screen. "Is selected. As a result, one of "Character selection", "Easy start", "Enter password", "View intermediate record", "Record and end", and "Member registration" can be selected as the submenu screen. A screen for selection (see FIG. 363 (B)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Then, the player selects the submenu "Enter password" on the submenu screen. As a result, a screen for inputting a password (password input screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. On the password input screen, the player can perform a formal login by performing a touch operation on the touch panel or a button operation using the operation buttons and inputting the password issued from the management server 4501. As a result, the history of the games played this time is accumulated while inheriting the history of the games played up to the previous time.

The game history (game history) includes the total number of games, the number of times a game state (specific game state) that is advantageous to the player occurs (for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, etc.), the number of wins and the probability of winning each role, and the game. In addition to the number of input and the number of media to be paid out, the history of the executed effect (effect history) is included. The production history includes the history of custom games (character customization) as well as the number of occurrences of various effects. Examples of the history related to the custom game include the number of times various characters are selected and the game history for each type of custom game (type of selected character). The game history for each type of selected character includes the number of games played with various characters customized (for example, the number of games played with character A selected, and the character. The number of times a game was played with B selected) or the number of times a specific game state (eg, bonus, ART, etc.) occurred while various characters were customized (for example, character A was selected). The number of times the specific gaming state has occurred in the state, the number of times the specific gaming state has occurred in the state in which the character B has been selected), and the like can be mentioned.

In the management server 4501, such a game history is managed in association with a member ID assigned to each player who has registered as a member. For example, the management server 4501 stores the number of games played by one player with the character A selected and the number of games played with the character B selected, and another player can store the number of games played. The number of games played with the character A selected and the number of games played with the character B selected are also stored. As a result, the management server 4501 can compare the game history of each player.

The password also includes an encrypted comparison result of the game history of each player (rank determined by a predetermined method). The game machine 3001 has a structure such as a table for specifying the information encrypted by the password, and the information can be deciphered. Since the technique related to password decryption is a conventionally well-known technique in the field of gaming machines (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-081521), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

To end the game, the player selects the submenu "Record and end" on the submenu screen. As a result, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The two-dimensional code is a code of the address information of the management server 4501 and the game history information accumulated in the game machine 3001. The player can image the two-dimensional code with the camera included in the mobile terminal 6001. The mobile terminal 6001 recognizes the two-dimensional code from the image data obtained when the camera captures the two-dimensional code, and generates the address information of the management server 4501 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 4501. Further, the game history information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 6001 to the management server 4501. As a result, the game history is managed by the management server 4501.

<Lighting pattern of lamp 3305>
FIG. 371 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of the lamp.

FIG. 371 shows a “password pattern” among the lighting patterns of the lamp 3305. The password pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a password is entered on the password entry screen. Similar to FIG. 361, in the figure, “LED left” indicates lamp 3305a, and “LED right” indicates lamp 3305b.

In the "pattern 50", the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits green light. The "pattern 50" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games in history is the highest in the country. In the "pattern 51", the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. The “pattern 51” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games in history is the second highest in the country. In the "pattern 52", the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits purple light. The “pattern 52” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games in history is the third highest in the country.

In the "pattern 53", the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits reddish purple. The "pattern 53" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played on the previous day is the highest in the country. In the "pattern 54", the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. The “pattern 54” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in a week is the highest in the country. In the "pattern 55", the lamp 3305a emits purple light and the lamp 3305b emits red light. "Pattern 55" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games per month is the highest in the country.

In "Pattern 60", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. The “pattern 60” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with the character A selected is the highest in the nation in history. In the "pattern 61", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits green light. The “pattern 61” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with the character A selected is the second highest in the nation in history. In "Pattern 62", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. The “pattern 62” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with the character A selected is the third highest in the nation in history.

In "Pattern 63", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. The “pattern 63” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with the character A selected is the highest in the nation on the previous day. In "Pattern 64", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits purple light. The “pattern 64” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with the character A selected is the highest in the whole week. In "Pattern 65", the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits reddish purple. The “pattern 65” is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with the character A selected is the highest in the whole country for a month.

Similarly, "Pattern 70" to "Pattern 75" are lighting patterns that appear when the password contains information indicating the order of the number of games played with the character B selected. Further, "Pattern 80" to "Pattern 85" are lighting patterns that appear when the password includes information indicating the order of the number of games played with the character C selected.

The management server 4501 is configured to update the above ranking (comparison result of the game history of each player) at a predetermined timing. As the predetermined timing, any timing can be adopted, and it may be once a day (for example, a predetermined time) or once a week (for example, a predetermined day of the week (Monday, etc.)). The above ranking may be updated in real time (for example, every predetermined second to minute).

<Ramp control process (when entering password)>
FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing a lamp control process (at the time of password input) performed in the game machine.

The lamp control process (at the time of password input) shown in FIG. 372 is a process performed by the sub-control unit 3302 when the password input operation is completed.

In the lamp control process (when the password is input), first, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether or not at least one "loop" has been completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b by the model identification pattern (see FIG. 362). (Step S1201).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to make the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b emit light according to the lighting pattern according to the game history (step S1202). .. The lighting pattern is the above-mentioned "password pattern" (see FIG. 371), and is a lighting pattern according to the game history information included in the password. As a result, for example, when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games in history is the highest in the country, the light emission control is performed by the "pattern 50" shown in FIG. 371, and the character A is selected. When the password contains information indicating that the number of games played in is the highest in the nation in history, the light emission control is performed by "Pattern 60".

After executing the process of step S1202, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1201 that one "loop" has not been completed yet, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 so as to make the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b emit light according to the model identification pattern (step). S1023). As a result, if the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are in the middle of being controlled by the model identification pattern, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (progress from the first step to the thirteenth step). Continue the steps inside).

Next, the sub-control unit 3302 sets the password lighting standby flag to ON (step S1204). The password lighting standby flag is a flag indicating that the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b according to the password pattern is suspended. When one "loop" is completed to control the light emission of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b according to the model identification pattern, if the password lighting standby flag is set to ON, the sub-control unit 3302 is included in the password. The lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are made to emit light according to the lighting pattern according to the game history information.

After executing the process of step S1204, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

<Lighting pattern detection process>
FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing a lighting pattern detection process performed on the data display.

The lighting pattern detection process shown in FIG. 373 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing in the control unit 2301 (see FIG. 343) of the data display 2001. Similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the image sensor unit 2311 (see FIG. 344) is capable of exploring the light sources (positions of the lamps 3305a and 3305b) while removing the effects of ambient light. The control unit 2301 can specify the light emission color of the lamp 3305a and the light emission color of the lamp 3305b (detect the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305).

In the lighting pattern detection process, the control unit 2301 executes the processes of steps S1251 to S1264, but these processes are the same as the processes of steps S1101 to S1114 of FIG. 368, and thus will be described here. Is omitted.

When it is determined in step S1263 that the lighting pattern corresponding to the effect pattern during the game is not detected, the control unit 2301 corresponds to the password pattern as a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b. It is determined whether or not the lighting pattern (see step S1202 in FIG. 372) is detected (step S1265). As described above, the password pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a password is entered on the password entry screen (see FIG. 371).

When it is determined that the lighting pattern corresponding to the password pattern is detected, the control unit 2301 displays the game history according to the detected password pattern (step S1266). Specifically, the control unit 2301 controls the video display unit 2305 (see FIG. 343) to display an image related to the game history corresponding to the detected password pattern on the liquid crystal display 2002. As a result, for example, when the detected password pattern is the pattern 50 shown in FIG. 371, a character image corresponding to the content of "the number one in the total number of games in the nation" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002 and detected. When the password pattern is the pattern 60 shown in FIG. 371, a character image corresponding to the content of "Character A number of games nationwide is No. 1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002.

When it is determined in step S1265 that the lighting pattern corresponding to the password pattern is not detected, or after executing the process of step S1266, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game system 5001, the game machine 3001, and the data display 2001 according to the 16th embodiment have been described. The game system 5001, the game machine 3001, and the data display 2001 according to the 16th embodiment have the following features.

(H4-1) A game machine (game machine 3001) and
A gaming device (data display 2001) provided for the gaming machine is provided.
The game machine
Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light, and
An input means that allows you to enter encrypted information (password) for game history information,
When the information is input in the input means, the light emitting control means capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information specified from the information (secondary execution of the process of step S1202 in FIG. 372). With a control unit 3302)
The gaming device is
A light emitting mode detecting means (control unit 2301 that executes a process of specifying the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means.
It includes an output means (control unit 2301 that executes the process of step S1266 of FIG. 373) capable of outputting the game history according to the light emitting mode detected by the light emitting mode detecting means.
A game system characterized by that.

According to the game system 5001 according to the 16th embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can input information (password) in which information related to the game history (game history related information) is encrypted. At the same time, when the information (password) is input, it is possible to make the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) emit light in a manner corresponding to the information specified from the information (password). On the other hand, the gaming device (data display 2001) can detect the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001), and the detected light emitting mode can be used. It is configured so that it is possible to output the history of the corresponding game. As a result, the game history-related information included in the information (password) is transmitted from the game machine (game machine 3001) to the game device (data display 2001) through the light emission mode of the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b). This is possible, and in the game device (data display 2001), it is possible to realize an output corresponding to the game history-related information.

(H4-2) Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light in a manner recognizable from the outside, and
An input means that allows you to enter encrypted information (password) for game history information,
When the information is input in the input means, the light emitting control means capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information specified from the information (secondary execution of the process of step S1202 in FIG. 372). Control unit 3302)
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the 16th embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can input information (password) in which information related to the game history (game history related information) is encrypted. At the same time, when the information (password) is input, the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) can be made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information specified from the information (password) and in a manner recognizable from the outside. It is configured as follows. As a result, the game history-related information included in the information (password) can be recognized from the outside through the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b), and the information can be recognized outside the game machine (game machine 3001). Information can be transmitted efficiently.

(H4-3) The gaming machine according to (H4-2).
It is equipped with a production execution means that enables production in a production custom selection mode (custom game) according to one production custom selected from a plurality of production customs (character customization).
The information includes the effect custom selection mode history information regarding the history of the games played in the effect custom selection mode according to the effect custom.
The light emission control means
When the information is input in the input means, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the effect custom selection mode history information specified from the information.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the 16th embodiment, the information (password) is the effect custom selection mode related to the history of the game performed in the effect custom selection mode (custom game) according to one effect custom (character customization). The game machine (game machine 3001) includes the history information, and when the information (password) is input, the game machine (game machine 3001) emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect custom selection mode history information specified from the information (password). The lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b) are configured to emit light. As a result, it is possible to recognize the effect custom selection mode history information included in the information (password) from the outside through the light emission mode in the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b), and the effect custom selection mode (custom). It is possible to notify the history of the game played in (game).

(H4-4) A light emitting mode detecting means capable of detecting a light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001), and a light emitting mode detecting means.
When the information (password) in which the information related to the game history is encrypted is input in the game machine, it is possible to output the game history according to the light emitting mode detected by the light emitting mode detecting means. An output means (control unit 2301 that executes the process of step S1266 of FIG. 373) is provided.
A gaming device characterized by this.

According to the data display 2001 according to the 16th embodiment, the gaming device (data display 2001) detects the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) included in the game machine (game machine 3001). Is possible, and when the information (password) in which the information related to the game history (game history related information) is encrypted in the game machine (game machine 3001) is input, the game according to the detected light emission mode. It is configured to be able to output history. As a result, the game history-related information included in the information (password) is transmitted from the game machine (game machine 3001) to the game device (data display 2001) through the light emission mode of the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b). This is possible, and in the game device (data display 2001), it is possible to realize an output corresponding to the game history-related information.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the information indicating the comparison result (rank determined by a predetermined method) of the game history of each player is adopted as the game history related information included in the password is included in the password. The game history related information is not limited to this example. As the game history-related information included in the password, information related to the above-mentioned game history (including production history) can be appropriately adopted. For example, in a form in which the password includes information indicating the total number of games (or the number of games played in a state where various characters are customized) as game history-related information, the number of games is the first predetermined. Light emitting means (lamp 3305a) in different modes depending on whether the number is less than the number, the number of games is the first predetermined number or more and less than the second predetermined number, and the number of games is the second predetermined number or more. And the lamp 3305b) may be configured to emit light. As a result, the gaming device (data display 2001) can recognize the number of games, and can display (direct) differently according to the number of games.

The encryption information (password) input by the input means may include information indicating the content of customization. For example, the types of character costumes, poses, accessories, etc. may be converted into characters such as the alphabet, and the combination thereof may be included in the password as a character string. As a result, when the password is input in the game machine 3001, the content of customization corresponding to the password can be reflected in the display mode of the character image displayed in the game machine 3001. Further, in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) may be different depending on the content of customization. For example, in FIG. 371, when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with the character A selected is the highest in the nation in history (see “Pattern 60”), the customization content of the character A Regardless of the above, the light emitting mode of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b is constant, but when the information is included in the password, the light emitting mode of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b is changed according to the customized contents of the character A. It may be that. As a result, in the game device (data display 2001), along with the image corresponding to the game history-related information included in the password (character image corresponding to the content of "Character A number of games nationwide"), the content of customization can be added. It is also possible to display the corresponding character image. In addition to the game history related information, if the password contains information indicating the content of customization, the password input operation also serves as a custom start operation. In this case, a custom start pattern (figure). The password pattern may be given priority over (see 361) to cause the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) to emit light.

Further, the method of inputting such encrypted information into the game machine is not limited to the method of inputting the password using an operating means such as a touch panel or a button. For example, a camera may be provided in the game machine, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal as the encrypted information may be read by the camera.

[17th Embodiment]
The first to sixteenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the 17th embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game system 5001 according to the 17th embodiment is the same as that of the game system 5001 according to the 16th embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game system 5001 according to the 16th embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first to sixteenth embodiments applies to the seventeenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Lighting pattern of lamp 3305>
FIG. 374 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of the lamp.

As described with reference to FIG. 361, a large number of lighting patterns are provided as the lighting patterns of the lamp 3305, but FIG. 374 shows some lighting patterns. In the figure, "LED left" indicates the lamp 3305a, and "LED right" indicates the lamp 3305b. Of the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 374, "pattern 1" to "pattern 52" are the same as "pattern 1" to "pattern 52" shown in FIG. 361.

In "Pattern 90", the lamp 3305a emits purple light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow light. “Pattern 90” is a lighting pattern that appears when the setting suggestion effect I occurs. In the "pattern 91", the lamp 3305a emits purple light and the lamp 3305b emits green light. “Pattern 91” is a lighting pattern that appears when the setting suggestion effect II occurs. In the "pattern 92", the lamp 3305a emits purple light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. “Pattern 92” is a lighting pattern that appears when the setting suggestion effect III occurs.

In "Pattern 93", the lamp 3305a emits purple light and the lamp 3305b emits reddish purple. “Pattern 93” is a lighting pattern that appears when the setting suggestion effect IV occurs. In "Pattern 94", the lamp 3305a emits purple light and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. “Pattern 94” is a lighting pattern that appears when the setting suggestion effect V is generated. In "Pattern 99", the lamp 3305a emits pink light and the lamp 3305b emits purple light. "Pattern 99" is a lighting pattern that appears when the reservation lock is established.

"Pattern 90" to "Pattern 94" are examples of "patterns for setting suggestion effect", respectively. The setting suggestion effect pattern is an example of an in-game effect pattern (lighting pattern corresponding to the effect performed during the game), and is a lighting pattern that appears when the setting suggestion effect occurs. The setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 375.

"Pattern 99" is an example of a "reservation lock pattern". The reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the reservation lock is established. The reservation lock will be described in the 18th embodiment.

<Setting suggestion production>
FIG. 375 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect lottery table.

In the setting suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 375, the lottery value for each set value is obtained for each of the setting suggestion effect I, the setting suggestion effect II, the setting suggestion effect III, the setting suggestion effect IV, and the setting suggestion effect V. Are associated with each other. As a result, in FIG. 375, the selection probabilities of the setting suggestion effects I to V for each set value are defined.

Specifically, when the set value is 1, the setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 256/256. When the set value is 2, the setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 128/256, and the setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256. When the set value is 3, the setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and the setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 160/256. When the set value is 4, the setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 32/256, the setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and the setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256. Will be done. When the set value is 5, the setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 32/256, the setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and the setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 128/256. Will be done. When the set value is 6, the setting suggestion effect I is selected with a probability of 8/256, the setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 24/256, and the setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256. Then, the setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256.

From the above, the setting suggestion effect I is an effect that can be selected only when the set value is 6. “6 Confirmation” in “Pattern 90” shown in FIG. 374 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect II is an effect that can be selected only when the set value is any one of 4 to 6. “4 to 6 confirmed” in “Pattern 91” shown in FIG. 374 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect III is an effect that cannot be selected when the set value is 1. The "1 negation" in the "pattern 92" shown in FIG. 374 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect IV is an effect that can be selected only when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5). The "odd number determination" in the "pattern 93" shown in FIG. 374 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect V is an effect that can be selected only when the set value is an even number (2, 4, or 6). The “even number determination” in the “pattern 94” shown in FIG. 374 indicates this.

In the present embodiment, the set value can be suggested by using the setting suggestion effects IV. Specifically, in each setting suggestion effect, an image for suggesting a set value (setting suggestion image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. For example, in the setting suggestion effect I, an image including a number corresponding to "666" (for example, a character image such as "defeated 666 enemies") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, whereby the set value is displayed. Is suggested to be 6. Further, in the setting suggestion effect II, an image including a number corresponding to "456" (for example, a character image such as "defeated 456 enemies") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, whereby the set value is displayed. Is suggested to be any of 4-6. Similarly, in the setting suggestion effect III, an image suggesting that the set value is not 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and in the setting suggestion effect IV, it suggests that the set value is an odd number. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and in the setting suggestion effect V, an image suggesting that the set value is an even number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The sub-control unit 3302 of the game machine 3001 refers to the setting suggestion effect lottery table when a predetermined condition for performing the setting suggestion effect is satisfied, and is based on the extracted random number value and the currently set set value. Then, one setting suggestion effect is selected from the setting suggestion effect I, the setting suggestion effect II, the setting suggestion effect III, the setting suggestion effect IV, and the setting suggestion effect V. As a result, the setting suggestion image corresponding to the selected one setting suggestion effect (any of the setting suggestion effects I to V) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The player can obtain information on the set value by visually recognizing the setting suggestion image. The setting suggestion effect (display of the setting suggestion image) is performed only for a very short time (for example, within 1 second), and when the setting suggestion effect is started in one unit game, the setting suggestion effect is performed. , Completed by the end of the one unit game (the state in which the setting suggestion image is displayed ends immediately and is not carried over to the next unit game). Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect ends when the start lever operation for starting the next unit game is performed.

The predetermined condition for performing the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but for example, the condition that the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed along the effective line. The condition that the current gaming state is a predetermined gaming state and the like can be appropriately adopted. These conditions may be adopted alone or in combination of a plurality of conditions. When a plurality of conditions are used together as a predetermined condition for performing the setting suggestion effect, the probability of selecting the setting suggestion effect I to V is different according to each condition (setting suggestion effect lottery table according to each condition). May be provided). For example, in the case where the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and when a plurality of types of combinations are provided as the predetermined combination, the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. A setting suggestion effect lottery table may be provided so that the probability of selection of the setting suggestion effects I to V differs depending on the type of the winning combination.

It should be noted that each setting suggestion effect may be an effect that occurs only when the set value is a predetermined value (it is determined that the set value is a predetermined value), and there is a high possibility that the set value is a predetermined value. It may be a production that suggests. For example, unlike FIG. 375, a lottery value "2" is associated with the setting suggestion effect I when the set value is 5 (for other set values, the same lottery as in FIG. 375). The values are associated with each other). In such an example, the setting suggestion effect I is an effect that suggests that the set value is 6 with a probability of 80% (when the effect appears, the probability that the set value is 6 is 80%). There is).

The sub-control unit 3302 includes information corresponding to the type and game state of the internal winning combination included in the start command data (see step S10 in FIG. 49) and the combination included in the winning operation command data (see step S14 in FIG. 49). One setting suggestion effect is selected by referring to the setting suggestion effect lottery table based on the information corresponding to (combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the valid line). At that time, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may not be performed. The setting suggestion effect lottery table is stored in a storage device such as a ROM.

When the setting suggestion effect is selected (executed) as described above, the sub-control unit 3302 causes the lamp control circuit 3306 (FIG. 342) to emit light of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b according to the lighting pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion effect. See). The lighting pattern is the above-mentioned “setting suggestion effect pattern” (see FIG. 374). As a result, for example, when the setting suggestion effect I is selected, the light emission control is performed by the "pattern 90" shown in FIG. 374, and when the setting suggestion effect II is selected, the light emission by the "pattern 91" is performed. When the control is performed and the setting suggestion effect III is selected, the light emission control is performed by the "pattern 92", and when the setting suggestion effect IV is selected, the light emission control is performed by the "pattern 93". When the setting suggestion effect V is selected, the light emission control by the "pattern 94" is performed.

The light emission of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b according to the setting suggestion effect pattern is performed over a predetermined period. The start timing of the light emission may be when the setting suggestion effect starts, during the setting suggestion effect, or after the setting suggestion effect ends (for example, the next unit game). It may be (when the start lever operation for starting) is performed, or it may be before the setting suggestion effect is started. As the end timing of light emission, it is possible to appropriately adopt when a factor for changing the lighting pattern in the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b occurs. For example, when the setting suggestion effect starts, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b start to emit light according to the setting suggestion effect pattern, and the light emission ends when the start lever operation for starting the next unit game is performed. May be. Further, when the start lever operation for starting the next unit game is performed, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b start to emit light according to the setting suggestion effect pattern, and the lighting pattern change factor (“game” shown in FIG. 374. The light emission may be terminated when any one of the "states of the machine") occurs.

<Processing when a pattern is detected during a game>
FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing a pattern detection processing for in-game effect performed on the data display.

In the in-game effect pattern detection processing shown in FIG. 376, it was determined that the control unit 2301 (see FIG. 343) of the data display 2001 detected a lighting pattern corresponding to the in-game effect pattern in step S1263 of FIG. 373. This is the processing performed in the case.

In the in-game effect pattern detection processing, first, the control unit 2301 determines whether or not the detected in-game effect pattern is a setting suggestion effect pattern (step S1301). As described above, the setting suggestion effect pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the setting suggestion effect occurs (see FIG. 374).

When it is determined that the detected pattern for the effect during the game is the pattern for the setting suggestion effect, the control unit 2301 executes the setting suggestion effect (step S1302). In this process, the control unit 2301 controls the image display unit 2305, the audio output unit 2307, and the illumination unit 2306 (see FIG. 343) to display an image for suggesting a set value on the liquid crystal display 2002. , The sound for suggesting the set value is output from the speaker 2004, and the light for suggesting the set value is output from the LED 2003 (see FIG. 341). At that time, the control unit 2301 changes the output mode of the image, sound, and light according to the type of the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the detected pattern for the setting suggestion effect. As a result, for example, the pattern 90 shown in FIG. 374 is detected, the pattern 91 is detected, the pattern 92 is detected, the pattern 93 is detected, and the pattern 94 is detected. In some cases, a different image (for example, an image similar to the image displayed on the game machine 3001 in the setting suggestion effects IV) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002, or the LED 2003 is lit in a different manner.

Here, the LED 2003 is configured to have a plurality of full-color LEDs, and can emit a plurality of types of colors including red, blue, and green. Thereby, for example, when the pattern 90 is detected, the LED 2003 is turned on in rainbow colors (in a manner including seven colors of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple), and the pattern 91 is detected. In this case, the LED 2003 is lit in orange, the LED 2003 is lit in yellow when the pattern 92 is detected, the LED 2003 is lit in indigo when the pattern 93 is detected, and the LED 2003 is lit when the pattern 94 is detected. Can be lit in purple.

After executing the process of step S1302, the control unit 2301 sets the setting suggestion flag on (step S1303). The setting suggestion flag is a flag indicating that the condition for lighting the LED 2003 is satisfied in a manner capable of suggesting the set value (see step S1313 in FIG. 377). After executing the process of step S1303, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

The processes of steps S1302 and S1303 are executed only when a part of the lighting patterns (for example, patterns 90 and 91) of the plurality of setting suggestion effect patterns (patterns 90 to 94) are detected. It may be configured as follows. In this case, for example, when the setting suggestion effect I is selected and when the setting suggestion effect II is selected, both the game machine 3001 and the data display 2001 perform an effect for suggesting the set value. , Setting suggestion effect When any of the setting suggestion effects III to V is selected, the effect for suggesting the set value is performed only in the game machine 3001 (the data display 2001 suggests the set value). No production will be done to do this).

Further, the setting suggestion effect (see step S1302) generated on the data display 2001 side is configured to be executed for a longer time than the setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 375) generated on the game machine 3001 side. May be good. For example, in the setting suggestion effect performed on the game machine 3001 side, the setting suggestion image is displayed for only one second (the image disappears by the end of the unit game), while the setting performed on the data display 2001 side. In the suggestion effect, the display of the setting suggestion image may be continued until the next unit game is started. As a result, when comparing the game machine 3001 in which the data display 2001 is installed and the game machine 3001 in which the data display 2001 is not installed, the superiority of the game machine 3001 in which the data display 2001 is installed is improved. be able to.

Further, when the setting suggestion flag is set to on (see step S1303), as will be described later, the LED 2003 according to the type of the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect I to V) performed on the game machine 3001 side. The lighting (setting suggestion LED display) can be continued until the power of the data display 2001 is turned off (see FIG. 377). Such a setting suggestion LED display may be executed only when a predetermined operation is performed on the data display 2001. In addition, when the setting suggestion flag is set to on (when a pattern for setting suggestion effect is detected), a lottery is performed on the data display 2001 side, and the setting suggestion LED display is continued only when the lottery is won. You may let it. Whether or not to display (continue) such a setting suggestion LED display may be configured so that the game store side or the player side can arbitrarily set.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the detected in-game effect pattern is not the setting suggestion effect pattern, the control unit 2301 executes the in-game effect (step S1304). The in-game effect is an effect according to the type of detected in-game effect pattern (an effect corresponding to the effect performed during the game in the game machine 3001), and an image according to the game situation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002. It is displayed, or a sound corresponding to the situation of the game is output from the speaker 2004. This in-game effect is the same as the in-game effect described in step S1114 of FIG. 368. After executing the process of step S1304, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

<Illuminations control processing>
FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the illumination unit control process performed on the data display.

The illumination unit control process shown in FIG. 377 is a process that is repeatedly performed by the control unit 2301 at a predetermined timing.

In the illumination unit control process, first, the control unit 2301 determines whether or not the error flag is set to ON (step S1311). Although not shown, the error flag is set on when an error occurs in the game machine 3001 and turned off when the error is resolved in the game machine 3001. The control unit 2301 can recognize that an error has occurred in the game machine 3001 by detecting a lighting pattern corresponding to the error pattern (see step S1256 in FIG. 373). Further, although not shown, when an error is resolved in the game machine 3001, the sub-control unit 3302 (see FIG. 342) of the game machine 3001 causes the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b to emit light according to the error resolution pattern (for example, the lamp 3305a). The lamp control circuit 3306 is controlled so that the lamp 3305b emits light in red and the lamp 3305b emits light in pink). The control unit 2301 can recognize that the error has been resolved in the game machine 3001 by detecting a lighting pattern corresponding to the error resolution pattern as a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b. it can.

When it is determined that the error flag is set to ON, the control unit 2301 controls the illumination unit 2306 so as to light (blink) the LED 2003 in an manner corresponding to the type of error (step S1312). The error flag is managed in association with the error type corresponding to the error pattern detected in step S1256 of FIG. 373, and the control unit 2301 can recognize the error type. As a result, for example, when a hopper empty occurs, the LED 2003 lights up (blinks) in blue, and another error (for example, a selector that guides a medal determined to be appropriate to the hopper performs normal detection). When a selector error) occurs, the LED 2003 lights up (blinks) in red. The lighting (blinking) of the LED 2003 according to the type of error continues until the error is resolved. Further, as described above, when an error occurs, an image corresponding to the type of error (an image notifying that the error has occurred) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2002 (see step S1107 in FIG. 368). In the present embodiment, such error notification on the liquid crystal display 2002 continues until the error is resolved.

As described in the 14th embodiment, the external terminal plate 3308 is connected to the main control unit 3301 of the game machine 3001 (see FIG. 342). When an error occurs in the game machine 3001, information indicating that the error has occurred is transmitted from the game machine 3001 to the data display 2001 via the external terminal plate 3308. However, the information indicating the type of the error that has occurred is not transmitted to the data display 2001 via the external terminal plate 3308. In this regard, the data display 2001 recognizes the type of error through the light emitting modes of the lamps 3305a and 3305b, and lights (blinks) the LED 2003 in a mode corresponding to the type of error (displays an image on the liquid crystal display 2002). )Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to notify the clerk of the amusement store of the type of error through the lighting (blinking) mode of the LED 2003 (the display mode of the image on the liquid crystal display 2002), and it is appropriate and quick according to the error occurrence status. Can be dealt with.

After executing the process of step S1312, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1311 that the error flag is not set to ON, the control unit 2301 determines whether or not the setting suggestion flag (see step S1303 in FIG. 376) is set to ON (step S1313).

When it is determined that the setting suggestion flag is set to ON, the control unit 2301 controls the illumination unit 2306 so as to light the LED 2003 in a manner corresponding to the type of the setting suggestion effect (step S1314). The setting suggestion flag is managed in association with the type of the setting suggestion effect pattern (type of the setting suggestion effect) detected in step S1301 of FIG. 376. As a result, for example, when the pattern 90 shown in FIG. 374 is detected (when the setting suggestion effect I occurs), the LED 2003 turns iridescent (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple). It lights up (in a mode including 7 colors), and when the pattern 91 is detected (when the setting suggestion effect II occurs), the LED 2003 lights up in orange, and when the pattern 92 is detected (the setting suggestion effect III occurs). When the LED 2003 is lit in yellow, when the pattern 93 is detected (when the setting suggestion effect IV is generated), the LED 2003 is lit indigo, and when the pattern 94 is detected (setting suggestion effect). When V is generated), the LED 2003 lights up in purple.

The lighting of the LED 2003 according to the type of the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect IV) basically continues until the power of the data display 2001 is turned off. However, when an error occurs, the LED 2003 lights (blinks) in a manner corresponding to the type of error until the error is resolved (see step S1312), and during that time, the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect I to). The lighting of the LED 2003 according to the type of V) is interrupted. After the error is resolved, the lighting of the LED 2003 according to the type of the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect IV) is restarted. On the other hand, when a factor for changing the lighting pattern other than an error (any of the "states of the game machine" shown in FIG. 374) occurs, it corresponds to the type of setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect IV). The lighting of the LED 2003 continues uninterrupted.

It should be noted that, in a state where the LED 2003 is lit in a mode corresponding to the setting suggestion effect due to the occurrence of one setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect II), it is advantageous for the player as compared with the setting suggestion effect. When a setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect I) that can suggest various information occurs, the lighting mode of the LED 2003 is changed to the setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect I) that can suggest the advantageous information. It may be switched to a mode according to the situation. On the other hand, in a state where the LED 2003 is lit in a mode corresponding to the setting suggestion effect due to the occurrence of one setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect II), it is advantageous for the player as compared with the setting suggestion effect. When a setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect III) that cannot suggest information is generated, the lighting mode of the LED 2003 may not be switched.

When it is determined in step S1313 that the setting suggestion flag is not set on, or after executing the process of step S1314, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game system 5001, the game machine 3001, and the data display 2001 according to the 17th embodiment have been described. The game system 5001, the game machine 3001, and the data display 2001 according to the 17th embodiment have the following features.

(H5-1) A game machine (game machine 3001) and
A gaming device (data display 2001) provided for the gaming machine is provided.
The game machine
Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light, and
A game control means capable of controlling game execution based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values, and a game control means.
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects IV) that can be suggested with respect to the set value, and
When the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the light emission control means capable of causing the light emission means to emit light in a predetermined mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374) is provided.
The gaming device is
A light emitting mode detecting means (control unit 2301 that executes a process of specifying the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means.
Control to execute the processing of the output means (step S1302 of FIG. 376 and step S1314 of FIG. 377) capable of performing a predetermined output when the light emitting mode detected by the light emitting mode detecting means is the predetermined mode. Part 2301) and
A game system characterized by that.

According to the game system 5001 according to the 17th embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can execute suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects IV) that can be suggested with respect to the set value, and also suggests effects. When (setting suggestion effects IV) are executed, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) can be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374). On the other hand, the gaming device (data display 2001) can detect the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001), and the detected light emitting mode is It is configured so that a predetermined output can be performed in a predetermined mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374). Thereby, the information regarding the suggestion of the set value can be transmitted from the gaming machine (game machine 3001) to the gaming device (data display 2001) through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b). Through a predetermined output, suggestions can be made regarding the set value.

(H5-2) Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light in a manner recognizable from the outside, and
A light emitting control means capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light,
A game control means capable of controlling game execution based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values, and a game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects IV) that can be suggested with respect to the set value.
The light emission control means
When the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the 17th embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can execute suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects IV) that can be suggested with respect to the set value, and also suggests effects. When (setting suggestion effects IV) are executed, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374) and in a mode recognizable from the outside. It is configured to be possible. Thereby, the information regarding the suggestion of the set value can be recognized from the outside through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b), and the information is efficiently transmitted to the outside of the game machine (game machine 3001). can do.

(H5-3) The gaming machine according to (H5-2).
Variable display means (reel) capable of variable display of identification information,
It is provided with a variable display starting means capable of starting variable display of identification information when a predetermined condition (operation of the start lever) is satisfied.
The light emission control means
After the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to end the light emitting means from emitting light in the predetermined mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the 17th embodiment, it is possible to start the variable display of the identification information when a predetermined condition (operation of the start lever) is satisfied, while the suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect I to). When the predetermined condition (operation of the start lever) is satisfied after V) is executed, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) are made to emit light in a predetermined mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374). Is configured so that it can be terminated. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) can be made to emit light in another mode when a predetermined condition (operation of the start lever) is satisfied.

In the present invention, the timing at which light emission starts in a predetermined mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374) in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) may be when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. However, it may be when the identification information is stopped and displayed. When the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine, for example, a symbol drawn on a reel corresponds to identification information. Further, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine, for example, it is adopted as the above-mentioned predetermined condition that the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device corresponds to the identification information and the gaming ball enters the starting port. Can be done.

(H5-4) The light emitting mode detecting means (the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001). The control unit 2301) that executes the specified process and
When a predetermined light emitting mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374) is detected by the light emitting mode detecting means, an output means (FIG. 377) capable of continuously performing a predetermined output until a power failure occurs. A control unit 2301) that executes the process of step S1314 of the above.
A gaming device characterized by this.

According to the data display 2001 according to the 17th embodiment, the gaming device (data display 2001) detects the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) included in the game machine (game machine 3001). When a predetermined light emitting mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374) is detected, the predetermined output can be continuously performed until a power failure occurs. There is. As a result, information that can suggest the state of the game machine (game machine 3001) corresponding to the predetermined light emitting mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374) is transmitted from the game machine (game machine 3001) to the game device (data display). It can be transmitted to the machine 2001). Then, through a predetermined output of the gaming device (data display 2001), a power failure occurs with respect to the state of the gaming machine (gaming machine 3001) corresponding to the predetermined light emitting mode (patterns 90 to 94 shown in FIG. 374). Can be continuously notified to players and the like.

As the predetermined output in the present invention, any one of image display, sound output, and light output, or any combination thereof can be appropriately adopted.

[18th Embodiment]
The first to seventeenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the 18th embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game system 5001 according to the eighteenth embodiment is the same as that of the game system 5001 according to the seventeenth embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game system 5001 according to the 17th embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the seventeenth embodiment also applies to the eighteenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Game system 5001>
FIG. 378 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the eighteenth embodiment.

As described in the fifteenth embodiment, the game system 5001 includes a game machine 3001, a data display 2001, and a management server 4001. As shown in FIG. 378, the game system 5001 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of game machines 3001 (game machine 3001a, game machine 3001b, game machine 3001c, and game machine 3001d) and a plurality of data display devices 2001 (game machine 3001a). A data display 2001a, a data display 2001b, a data display 2001c, and a data display 2001d) are provided.

The plurality of game machines 3001 and the plurality of data display machines 2001 each have a one-to-one correspondence, and each data display device 2001 (data display device 2001a, data display device 2001b, data display device 2001c, and data display device 2001d) is arranged above each game machine 3001 (game machine 3001a, game machine 3001b, game machine 3001c, and game machine 3001d).

Each game machine 3001 (game machine 3001a, game machine 3001b, game machine 3001c, and game machine 3001d), and each data display 2001 (data display 2001a, data display 2001b, data display 2001c, and data). The display 2001d) has the same configuration as the game machine 3001 and the data display 2001 in the above-described embodiment, respectively. Further, each data display 2001 (data display 2001a, data display 2001b, data display 2001c, and data display 2001d) can communicate with the management server 4001 respectively. The communication between each data display 2001 and the management server 4001 may be performed directly or indirectly via the island computer.

As a result, each data display 2001 (data display 2001a, data display 2001b, data display 2001c, and data display 2001d) becomes the corresponding game machine 3001 (game machine 3001a, game machine 3001b, game machine 3001c). By imaging the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b provided in the game machine 3001d) with the CMOS image sensor, the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b can be recognized. Then, each data display 2001 (data display 2001a, data display 2001b, data display 2001c, and data display 2001d) corresponds to the corresponding game machine 3001 (game machine 3001a, game machine 3001b, game machine 3001c, The liquid crystal display 2002, the LED 2003, the speaker 2004, and the like are controlled, and communication is performed with the management server 4001 in an manner corresponding to the lighting pattern (state of the game machine 3001) of the lamp 3305 in the game machine 3001d).

<Lock-related processing>
FIG. 379 is a flowchart showing the lock-related processing performed in the game machine.

The lock-related process shown in FIG. 379 is a process performed by the main control unit 3301 (see FIG. 342) of the game machine 3001 after the process (internal lottery process) of step S4 of FIG. 49 is executed. As in the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 according to the present embodiment can adopt the same configuration as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and the gaming machine 3001 is shown in FIG. It has the configuration shown in FIG. 5 and the like. The main control unit 3301 and the sub control unit 3302 (see FIG. 342) correspond to the main control board 71 (main control circuit) and the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit) shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, respectively.

In the lock-related process, first, the main control unit 3301 determines whether or not the reserved lock flag is set to ON (step S1401). The reservation lock flag is a flag indicating that the game lock is reserved (see step S1410), and locks the game after a predetermined number (three times) of unit games have been played (after the number of reserved games has elapsed). Used for

The game lock is an effect of invalidating the operation by the player for a predetermined time. In the present embodiment, the game lock (freeze) may be performed before the first stop operation is performed as the stop operation for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (see FIG. 3). When the freeze is performed, all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are locked (full rotation body lock), and until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the start lever 6 (see FIG. 2) is operated. , The operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) is invalidated. It should be noted that the operation by the player may be invalidated and a predetermined reel action (for example, slow rotation, high speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) may be performed. Further, unlike the present embodiment, the game lock may be performed after all or part of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped rotating.

Freeze is a lock effect that can occur only when a specific combination (see step S1406) is determined as an internal winning combination, and when a freeze occurs, the player is informed that the specific combination has been internally won. On the other hand, it is definitely notified. As will be described later, while the freeze is occurring, the effect (freeze effect) is also performed on the liquid crystal display device. As a specific role, a role that is advantageous to the player (for example, a role that determines the transition to AT, a rare role, a bonus role, etc.) can be adopted. In the present embodiment, a plurality of predetermined roles are provided as a role for determining that the AT starts after a predetermined number (three times) of unit games are played (after the precursor game is digested), and the plurality of predetermined roles are provided. Some of the predetermined roles are adopted as the above-mentioned specific roles. That is, the reservation lock flag may be set on when some predetermined combinations are determined as internal winning combinations.

When it is determined that the reserved lock flag is set to ON, the main control unit 3301 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved lock game number counter (step S1402). The value of the reserved lock game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games played before the game lock (freeze) is performed, and is stored in the main RAM 33 (see FIG. 4).

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether or not the value of the reserved lock game number counter is 0 (step S1403). When it is determined that the value of the reserved lock game number counter is not 0, the main control unit 3301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the reserved lock game number counter is 0, the main control unit 3301 sets the lock activation flag to ON (step S1404). The lock activation flag is a flag indicating that the game lock can be activated, whereby the game lock (freeze) is performed (see FIG. 380).

In the present embodiment, if the reserved lock lottery is not won, the unit game in which a specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination is performed without waiting for a predetermined number (three times) of unit games to be played. ), The game lock (freeze) is to be performed (see step S1409). However, if the reserved lock lottery is not won, the game lock (freeze) is not performed in the unit game, and after a predetermined number (3 times) of unit games are performed (a production other than the game lock (liquid crystal production)). Etc.) may be used to notify the AT that it has won (AT starts).

Then, the main control unit 3301 sets the reserved lock flag to off (step S1405), and ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1401 that the reservation lock flag is not set to ON, the main control unit 3301 determines whether or not a specific combination has been determined as the internal winning combination (step S1406). When it is determined that a specific combination has not been determined as the internal winning combination, the main control unit 3301 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main control unit 3301 executes the reservation lock lottery (step S1407). In this process, the main control unit 3301 determines the winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. For example, the main control unit 3301 has a 10% probability of winning and a 90% probability of non-winning.

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether or not the reserved lock lottery has been won (step S1408). When it is determined that the reserved lock lottery has not been won, the main control unit 3301 sets the lock activation flag to ON (step S1409). As a result, if the reserved lock lottery is not won, without waiting for a predetermined number (three times) of unit games to be performed (in the unit game in which a specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination). A game lock (freeze) will be performed (see FIG. 380).

After executing the process of step S1409, the main control unit 3301 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1408 that the reserved lock lottery has been won, the main control unit 3301 sets the reserved lock flag on (step S1410) and sets "3" in the reserved lock game number counter (step S1411).

Next, the main control unit 3301 generates reserved lock command data, and transmits the generated reserved lock command data to the sub control unit 3302 (step S1412). As a result, the sub-control unit 3302 can recognize that the game lock is generated (the reserved lock is established) after the number of reserved games has elapsed. Then, upon receiving the reserved lock command data, the sub-control unit 3302 causes the lamp control circuit to emit light of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b according to the lighting pattern corresponding to the "reserved lock pattern" (see FIG. 374). Control 3306 (see FIG. 342). As a result, light emission control is performed according to the "pattern 99" shown in FIG. 374. As described above, the reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the reservation lock is established.

After executing the process of step S1412, the main control unit 3301 ends this subroutine.

<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process performed in the game machine.

The reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 380 is a process performed in step S11 of FIG. 49 in the main control unit 3301.

In the reel rotation start processing, first, the main control unit 3301 determines whether or not the lock activation flag (see step S1404 and step S1409 in FIG. 379) is set to ON (step S1421).

When it is determined that the lock activation flag is set to ON, the main control unit 3301 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the lock timer (step S1422). Although not shown, the lock timer is updated by the timer update process executed in the interrupt process. The interrupt process is executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec).

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether or not the lock timer is 0 (step S1423). If it is determined that the lock timer is not 0, the main control unit 3301 returns the process to step S1423. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lock timer is 0, the main control unit 3301 sets the lock activation flag to off (step S1424).

As a result, the game lock (freeze) is performed, all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are locked (full rotation body lock), and until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the start lever 6 is operated. , The operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) is invalidated.

Although not shown, the main control unit 3301 generates lock command data after executing the process of step S1422, and transmits the generated lock command data to the sub control unit 3302. As a result, the sub-control unit 3302 can recognize that the game lock (freeze) has occurred. Then, upon receiving the lock command data, the sub-control unit 3302 sets the effect data corresponding to the effect (freeze effect) performed while the freeze is occurring. As a result, as a freeze effect, the screen of the liquid crystal display device is darkened.

If it is determined in step S1421 that the lock activation flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S1424, the main control unit 3301 executes the normal acceleration process (step S1425). In this process, the main control unit 3301 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is requested, the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R (see FIG. 4) is controlled by the interrupt processing described above, and the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts. Will be done. Then, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is accelerated until its rotation reaches a constant speed, and then is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

After executing the process of step S1425, the main control unit 3301 ends this subroutine.

<Reservation lock production related processing>
FIG. 381 is a flowchart showing a reservation lock effect-related process performed on the data display.

The reservation lock effect-related process shown in FIG. 381 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing in the control unit 2301 (see FIG. 343) of the data display 2001.

In the reservation lock effect-related processing, first, the control unit 2301 detects a lighting pattern (see step S1412 in FIG. 379) corresponding to the reservation lock pattern as a combination of the light emission color of the lamp 3305a and the light emission color of the lamp 3305b. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1451). As described above, the reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the reservation lock is established (see FIG. 374).

When it is determined that the lighting pattern corresponding to the reserved lock pattern is detected, the control unit 2301 transmits the reserved lock detection signal to the management server 4001 (step S1452). The reservation lock detection signal is a signal indicating that the reservation lock has been established in the game machine 3001 associated with the data display 2001 of the transmission source of the signal.

Here, in the present embodiment, the plurality of data display 2001s installed in the amusement store are classified into a plurality of groups (group I, group II, group III, ...), and are group-by-group by the management server 4001. It is managed. Specifically, each data display 2001 is associated with a group identification number (I, II, III ...), For example, one data display 2001 is associated with a group identification number I. If the data display 2001 belongs to the group I, and the group identification number II is associated with the data display 2001, the data display 2001 belongs to the group II. be able to.

When the group identification numbers associated with one data display 2001 and the other data display 2001 are the same, the management server 4001 treats the data display 2001 as belonging to the same group. It is possible. The data display 2001a, the data display 2001b, the data display 2001c, and the data display 2001d shown in FIG. 378 are all associated with the same group identification number (I), and these data display 2001 Belong to the same group (Group I). A plurality of data display 2001s belonging to the same group are installed on the same island.

Upon receiving the reserved lock detection signal transmitted from the data display 2001 in step S1452, the management server 4001 is placed in the same group as the data display 2001 (for example, the data display 2001a) that is the source of the reserved lock detection signal. A reservation lock effect execution signal is transmitted to all the data display 2001 (for example, the data display 2001a, the data display 2001b, the data display 2001c, and the data display 2001d) to which the data display belongs. Since the reserved lock detection signal includes information indicating the group identification number associated with the data display 2001 that is the source of the signal, the management server 4001 recognizes the group to which the data display 2001 belongs. can do. The reservation lock effect execution signal is a game machine 3001 (for example, a game machine 3001) associated with a data display 2001 (for example, a data display 2001a) belonging to the same group as the data display 2001 to which the signal is transmitted. This is a signal indicating that the reservation lock has been established in the game machine 3001a).

When the reserved lock detection signal transmitted from the data display 2001 is received in step S1452, the management server 4001 is the same as the data display 2001 (for example, the data display 2001a) that is the source of the reserved lock detection signal. Among the data display 2001 (for example, data display 2001a, data display 2001b, data display 2001c, and data display 2001d) belonging to the group, other than the data display 2001 that is the source of the reservation lock detection signal. The reservation lock effect execution signal may be transmitted to all the data display 2001 (for example, the data display 2001b, the data display 2001c, and the data display 2001d). That is, in the data display 2001 (for example, the data display 2001a) of the transmission source of the reservation lock detection signal, the reservation lock is released in the game machine 3001 (for example, the game machine 3001a) associated with the data display 2001. Since it is possible to recognize that the data has been established (see step S1451), the reservation lock effect execution signal may not be transmitted to the data display 2001.

When it is determined in step S1451 that the lighting pattern corresponding to the reservation lock pattern is not detected, the control unit 2301 determines whether or not the reservation lock effect execution signal has been received from the management server 4001 (step S1453).

After executing the process of step S1452, or when it is determined in step S1453 that the reserved lock effect execution signal has been received, the control unit 2301 executes the reserved lock effect (step S1454). The reservation lock effect is an effect that suggests that the reservation lock has been established, and is performed grandly using images, sounds, lights, etc., which makes it possible to raise the expectations of the player. ing. In the process of step S1454, the control unit 2301 controls the image display unit 2305, the audio output unit 2307, and the illumination unit 2306 (see FIG. 343) to raise the image, sound, and mood of the player. , Light is output from the liquid crystal display 2002, the speaker 2004, and the LED 2003, respectively. When the LED 2003 is lit in a manner capable of suggesting a set value (see step S1314 in FIG. 377), the control unit 2301 preferentially executes the reservation lock effect.

Such a reservation lock effect is simultaneously executed on all the data display 2001s belonging to one group. As a result, it is possible to link the reservation lock effect executed in each data display 2001, and it is possible to realize an attractive effect in the group. The execution of the reservation lock effect means that the reservation lock has been established in the one game machine 3001 associated with the one data display 2001 belonging to the group. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player with respect to the possibility that the game lock (freeze) occurs in the game machine 3001 in which the player is playing the game. Through this, it is possible to have the player play the game while making the player excited during the reservation period (until the number of reserved games elapses), and the period can be a great pleasure in the game system 5001.

When it is determined in step S1453 that the reservation lock effect execution signal has not been received, or after the process of step S1454 is executed, the control unit 2301 ends this subroutine.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game system 5001, the game machine 3001, and the data display 2001 according to the eighteenth embodiment have been described. The game system 5001, the game machine 3001, and the data display 2001 according to the eighteenth embodiment have the following features.

(H6-1) With a plurality of game machines (game machine 3001),
A plurality of gaming devices (data display 2001) provided for each of the plurality of gaming machines are provided.
The gaming device of one of the plurality of gaming devices and the other gaming device can communicate directly or indirectly.
Each of the plurality of game machines
Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light, and
A privilege granting means that can grant a privilege that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the process of steps S1421 to S1423 of FIG. 380) capable of executing the suggestion effect (freeze) suggesting that the privilege can be granted by the privilege granting means. When,
When the suggestion effect execution means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, the light emission control means capable of causing the light emission means to emit light in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) is provided. ,
Each of the plurality of gaming devices
A light emitting mode detecting means (control unit 2301 that executes a process of specifying the light emitting color of the lamp 3305a and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b) capable of detecting the light emitting mode in the light emitting means.
When the suggestion effect execution means determines that the suggestion effect is to be executed, it may be suggested that the suggestion effect is determined to be executed before the suggestion effect is executed. A specific effect executing means (control unit 2301 that executes the process of step S1454 in FIG. 381) capable of executing a specific effect (reserved lock effect) is provided.
When the predetermined mode is detected by the light emitting mode detecting means in the one game device, the specific effect is executed in the one game device, and the specific effect is also executed in the other game device. Is possible to execute,
A game system characterized by that.

According to the game system 5001 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can execute a suggestion effect (freeze) suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player can be given. When it is determined that the suggestion effect (freeze) is to be performed, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) can be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374). On the other hand, the gaming device (data display 2001) can detect the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) provided in the game machine (game machine 3001), and also has a suggestion effect (freeze). When it is decided to be executed, a specific effect (reserved lock effect) that can suggest that the suggestion effect (freeze) is decided to be executed before the suggestion effect (freeze) is executed. ) Can be executed. Then, when a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) is detected in one game device (data display 2001), a specific effect (reservation lock) is detected in the one game device (data display 2001). It is configured so that it is possible to execute a specific effect (reserved lock effect) on another gaming device (data display 2001) as well as execute the effect). As a result, information corresponding to the determination that the suggestion effect (freeze) is executed through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) is transmitted from the game machine (game machine 3001) to the game device (data). It can be transmitted to the display 2001). Then, when it is determined that the suggestion effect (freeze) is executed in one game machine (game machine 3001), one game is provided for the one game machine (game machine 3001). Not only the device (data display 2001) but also other gaming devices (data display 2001) can execute the specific effect (reservation lock effect). Therefore, not only the player playing the game on the game machine (game machine 3001) associated with the one game device (data display 2001), but also the other game device (data display 2001). It is possible to allow a player who is playing a game on the game machine (game machine 3001) associated with the above to enjoy a specific effect (reserved lock effect). As a result, both players can be expected to perform the suggestion effect (freeze) on the game machine (game machine 3001) in which they are playing.

(H6-2) Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light in a manner recognizable from the outside, and
A light emitting control means capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light,
A specific game generating means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the processes of steps S1421 to S1423 in FIG. 380) capable of generating a specific game (freeze) advantageous to the player is provided.
The light emission control means
When it is decided to generate the specific game, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) before the specific game is generated.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can generate a specific game (freeze) that is advantageous to the player, and also generates a specific game (freeze). When it is determined that the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) are set in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) and externally recognizable before the specific game (freeze) is generated. It is configured so that it can emit light. As a result, it is possible to recognize from the outside the information corresponding to the determination to generate the specific game (freeze) through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b), and it is possible to recognize the information corresponding to the game machine (game). The information can be efficiently transmitted to the outside of the machine 3001).

(H6-3) Light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) capable of emitting light in a manner recognizable from the outside, and
A light emitting control means capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light,
A lock determination means (sub-control unit 3302 that executes the process of FIG. 379) capable of determining that a lock is executed in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time is provided.
The light emission control means
When the lock determination means determines that the lock is executed, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a predetermined mode before the lock is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the game machine (game machine 3001) can determine that the lock in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time is executed, and the lock can be executed. When it is determined that the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) are executed in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) and externally recognizable before the lock is executed. It is configured so that it can emit light. As a result, it is possible to recognize from the outside the information corresponding to the determination that the lock is executed through the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b), and the game machine (game machine 3001). The information can be efficiently transmitted to the outside of the.

(H6-4) The gaming machine of the above (H6-3).
The lock determining means is
A first lock determining means capable of determining that the lock is executed at the first timing (in the unit game), and
A second lock determining means capable of determining that the lock is executed at a second timing (after a predetermined number of unit games have been played), which is later than the first timing, is provided.
The light emission control means
When the lock is determined to be executed by the second lock determining means, the light emitting means can be made to emit light in the predetermined mode before the lock is executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 3001 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the lock is performed at the first timing (in the unit game) or at the second timing (a predetermined number of unit games) later than the first timing. If it is possible to execute at (later) and it is determined that the lock will be executed at the second timing (after a predetermined number of unit games have been played), before the lock is executed, The light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) is configured to be capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374). As a result, if it is determined that the lock is executed at the second timing (after a predetermined number of unit games have been played), the lock is executed at the first timing (in the unit game). The time until the lock is executed is longer than when it is decided that the lock is executed. In such a situation, the information corresponding to the decision to execute the lock is provided to the gaming machine. It can be transmitted to the outside of (game machine 3001) as soon as possible.

In the above example, when it is determined that the lock is executed in one game machine (game machine 3001), one game device (data) provided for the one game machine (game machine 3001). When the display (2001) transmits a reservation lock detection signal to the server (management server 4001) and receives the reservation lock detection signal, the server (management server 4001) sends another gaming device (data display 2001). This has been described as transmitting a reservation lock effect execution signal to the user (see step S1452 in FIG. 381). That is, it has been described that one game device (data display 2001) indirectly communicates with another game device (data display 2001) via the server (management server 4001). On the other hand, one gaming device (data display 2001) may directly communicate with another gaming device (data display 2001). For example, the data display 2001 according to the eighteenth embodiment may be configured as follows.

(H6-5) A gaming device (data display 2001) capable of communicating with other gaming devices.
Execution of a process for specifying the light emitting mode (lamp 3305a) and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b, which can detect the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamp 3305b) included in the game machine (game machine 3001). Control unit 2301) and
When a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) is detected by the light emitting mode detecting means, a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (reserved lock effect) and a specific effect executing means.
A signal transmitting means capable of transmitting a signal for causing the other gaming device to execute an effect related to the specific effect when the predetermined aspect is detected by the light emitting mode detecting means. , With
A gaming device characterized by this.

According to the data display 2001 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the game device (data display 2001) can communicate with another game device (data display 2001), and the game machine (game machine 3001). It is possible to detect the light emitting mode in the light emitting means (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) provided with the above, and when a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) is detected, a specific effect (reserved lock effect). Is possible, and a signal for causing another gaming device (data display 2001) to execute an effect related to the specific effect (reserved lock effect) can be transmitted. It is configured in. As a result, information that can suggest the state of the game machine (game machine 3001) corresponding to the predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) is transmitted from the game machine (game machine 3001) to the game device (data display 2001). It is possible to convey to. Then, when a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) is detected, a specific effect (reservation lock effect) or an effect related thereto is exchanged with another game device (data display 2001). Can be linked, and an attractive production situation can be created.

For example, the game device (data display 2001) is described as "a signal for causing another game device (data display 2001) to execute an effect related to the specific effect (reserved lock effect)". It is possible to configure the reservation lock effect execution signal to be transmitted. The "effect related to the specific effect (reserved lock effect)" is not particularly limited as long as it has some relation to the specific effect (reserved lock effect). For example, the effect related to the specific effect (reserved lock effect) may be the same as the specific effect (reserved lock effect), or the output is linked or synchronized with the specific effect (reserved lock effect). It may be an effect, or it may be an effect in which an image that is conceptually related to the image displayed in the specific effect (reserved lock effect) is displayed.

In the eighteenth embodiment, it has been described that the suggestion effect (freeze) is always executed when a specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. However, even when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the suggestion effect (freeze) may not be executed. For example, when a specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a lock lottery (freeze lottery) is executed, and when a lock lottery (freeze lottery) is won, the processes of steps S1407 to S1412 of FIG. 379 are performed. You may do it. Further, in the eighteenth embodiment, it has been described that the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) are made to emit light in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374) only when the reserved lock lottery is won. However, even if the reserved lock lottery is not won, the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374). Information indicating that the specific combination has been determined as the internal winning combination is not transmitted to the data display 2001 via the external terminal plate 3308.

In the present invention, the suggestion effect (freeze) is an effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player can be given. The suggestion effect (freeze) is an effect with a high degree of expectation, but it does not have to be a definite notification that the privilege is given. That is, when the suggestion effect (freeze) is executed, the privilege is given with a high probability (for example, 80% or more), but the privilege may not be given with a low probability (for example, 20% or less). May be good. The suggestive effect is not limited to freeze, and any effect using an image, sound, or light can be appropriately adopted. The privilege advantageous to the player may be a specific game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which a relatively large amount of game value can be given to the player), or a game value (a game such as a medal). It may be the medium) itself, or it may be information that is advantageous to the player. Specific gaming states include bonus gaming states (BB gaming states, MB gaming states, etc.), RT gaming states, AT gaming states (ART gaming states), jackpot gaming states, probabilistic gaming states, and time reductions in pachinko machines. A gaming state such as a gaming state can be appropriately adopted. Further, the specific game in the present invention may be the above-mentioned suggestive effect or the above-mentioned specific game state. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the freeze is adopted as the specific game has been described. Freezing is a phenomenon that does not bring any benefit to the player in itself, but suggests a situation that is favorable to the player. The specific game is a concept that includes all the phenomena in which such a player can detect an advantage.

Further, in the eighteenth embodiment, it has been described that when the reservation lock is established in one unit game, the suggestion effect (freeze) is executed after a predetermined number (three times) of unit games are performed. In the present invention, the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed is not particularly limited, and the suggestion effect may be executed when the game is played a predetermined number of times after the suggestion effect is determined to be executed. However, the suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the suggestion effect is determined to be executed. As the above-mentioned game, a game (including a unit game in a pachislot game machine and a special symbol game in a pachinko game machine) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the stop display of the symbol can be adopted. As a form in which the suggestion effect is executed when a predetermined time elapses after the suggestion effect is determined to be executed, a predetermined number (for example, 60) of numbers (timers) displayed on the liquid crystal display device is used. It can be mentioned as an example in which a success effect or a failure effect is performed when the number gradually decreases from. In this example, the success effect corresponds to the suggestion effect. Further, in this case, as a specific effect performed on the gaming device (data display 2001), an effect in which the displayed number (timer) gradually decreases from a predetermined number (for example, 60) may be adopted. Good.

Further, in the eighteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the suggestion effect (freeze) is executed in one game machine (game machine 3001), it is provided for the one game machine (game machine 3001). It has been described that the specific effect (reserved lock effect) is executed in all the game devices (data display 2001) belonging to the same group as one game device (data display 2001). In the present invention, the specific effect (reserved lock effect) is executed only in a part of the game devices (data display 2001) among all the game devices (data display 2001) belonging to the same group. It may be that. The part of the gaming device (data display 2001) may be selected by lottery, or may be selected according to the game history. For example, it is provided for a game machine (game machine 3001) in which the number of games (for example, the number of games played today after the above-mentioned login or the total number of games including the history up to the previous time) is a predetermined number or more. The specific effect (reserved lock effect) may be executed only in the game device (data display 2001).

Further, in the present invention, even if it is determined that the suggestion effect (freeze) is executed in one game machine (game machine 3001), in any game device (data display 2001). The specific effect (reserved lock effect) may not be executed. For example, when it is determined that the suggestion effect (freeze) is executed in one game machine (game machine 3001), one game device (game machine 3001) provided for the one game machine (game machine 3001). Whether or not to execute a specific effect (reservation lock effect) according to the operating status of the game machine (game machine 3001) associated with the game device (data display 2001) belonging to the same group as the data display device 2001). It may be decided. For example, in the game machine (game machine 3001) associated with the game device (data display 2001) belonging to the same group, the game machine (game machine 3001) in which the game is being performed is A specific effect (reserved lock effect) may be executed on condition that a predetermined number or more (for example, one or more units) exist. In this case, the specific effect (reservation lock effect) may be executed only in the game device (data display 2001) provided for the game machine (game machine 3001) in which the game is being performed. Good. The "situation in which the game is being played" refers to a situation in which the demo screen is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The conditions for moving to the demo screen are as described above, so the description here will be omitted.

Further, in the present invention, the number and installation locations of the light emitting means (lamps 3305) are particularly limited as long as the game device (data display 2001) can detect the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamps 3305). However, it is possible to install an arbitrary number of light emitting means (lamps 3305) at an arbitrary position. In the above-described embodiment, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b have been described as being provided on the upper portion of the game machine 3001. As a result, the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b can be easily imaged by the gaming device (data display 2001), and the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b can be easily imaged by the security camera provided on the ceiling of the game store. Further, the clerk of the game store can easily visually recognize the light emitting mode of the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b. When the light emitting means (lamp 3305) is provided on the upper part of the game machine (game machine 3001), the light emitting means (lamp 3305) protrudes upward from the upper end region of the base door (for example, the base door H33 shown in FIG. 324). It may be installed, or a light emitting means (lamp 3305) may be embedded in the recess while forming a recess at the upper end of the base door. If the light emitting means (lamp 3305) is embedded in the recess in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamp 3305) while sitting on the game machine (game machine 3001). Here, for example, when the player sees that the light emitting means (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) emit light in a predetermined mode (pattern 99 shown in FIG. 374), this causes a suggestion effect (freeze). It is possible that the player will know that it has been decided to be performed. Then, the significance of trying to raise the player's expectation by performing a specific effect (reservation lock effect) may be lost. In this regard, as described above, if a configuration is adopted in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamp 3305), it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b corresponds to the state of the game machine 3001 (see FIGS. 361, 371, and 374). In the present invention, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamp 3305) corresponding to the state of the game machine (game machine 3001) is not limited to this example. For example, in addition to the emission color, the blinking cycle of the light emitting means as described in the twelfth embodiment, the light emitting time, the light emitting mode according to the combination thereof, etc. can be made to correspond to the state of the game machine (game machine 3001). is there. Alternatively, the light emitting color of the light emitting means, the blinking cycle, and the like may be changed over time, and the variation of the change over time may be made to correspond to the state of the game machine (game machine 3001). Thereby, the state of the game machine (game machine 3001) can be expressed by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (lamp 3305), and the state of the game machine (game machine 3001) can be expressed by an external (for example, a game device (for example). It can be transmitted to the data display 2001), the server (management server 4001), the clerk of the game store, etc.).

<Additional notes (others)>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. The stepping motor is operated based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmitting the driving force of each reel to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”). A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated is known.

Further, conventionally, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a start area provided in the game area where the launched game ball can roll, the ball is identified on the display area of the variable display device. A variable display control means for controlling the variable display of information and controlling the derivation and display of the identification information on which the variable display is performed is provided, and the player when the derived identification information becomes a predetermined combination. There is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a jackpot gaming state (so-called “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player.

However, since the conventional pachislot machine and the pachinko machine do not have the configuration and function as the game machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The first to eighteenth embodiments have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.).

The first to eighteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but only specific examples are exemplified, and the present invention is not particularly limited, and specific configurations of each means and the like are appropriately redesigned. It is possible. In addition, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable effects arising from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not it.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly described so that the present invention can be understood more easily. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description described above, and can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is diverse. In addition, the terms and usages used in the present specification are used to accurately explain the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Further, those skilled in the art will find it easy to infer other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in the present specification. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims must be regarded as including an equal structure without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and essence of this application by the Japan Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms, or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a prompt judgment through a thorough investigation. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the statement of claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the peculiar effect of the present invention, it is desired that the interpretation is made with full consideration of the documents and the like already disclosed.

The detailed description described above includes processing performed on the computer. The above explanations and expressions are described for the purpose of being understood by those skilled in the art most efficiently. In the present specification, each process used to derive the result of 1 should be understood as a self-consistent process. Further, in each process, transmission / reception, recording, etc. of an electric or magnetic signal are performed. In the processing in each processing, such signals are expressed by bits, values, symbols, letters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used merely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processing in each processing may be described in terms common to human behavior, but the processing described in the present specification is, in principle, executed by various devices. In addition, other configurations required to perform each process are self-evident from the above description.

[19th Embodiment]
The first to eighteenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the 19th embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game system 5001 according to the 19th embodiment is the same as that of the game system 5001 according to the 18th embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game system 5001 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the eighteenth embodiment also applies to the nineteenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Game system 5001>
FIG. 382 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the 19th embodiment.

As described in the fifteenth embodiment, the game system 5001 includes a game machine 3001, a data display 2001, and a management server 4001. As shown in FIG. 382, the data display 2001 is arranged above the game machine 3001. Further, the data display 2001 is configured to be able to communicate with the management server 4001.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 382, the game machine 3001 is provided with a lamp 3305a and a lamp 3305b as a lamp 3305 on the upper portion thereof.

Similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the data display 2001 includes the image sensor unit 2311 in the present embodiment as well. The image sensor unit 2311 includes a CMOS image sensor, and can capture an image including the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b at predetermined time intervals.

The lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are each configured to have a full-color LED, and have a plurality of kinds of colors including white, red, yellow, yellowish green, green, bluish green, blue, purple, magenta, and pink. It is possible to emit. Further, in the present embodiment, the LEDs used as the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are controlled to blink by dynamic lighting, for example, the frequency is 110 Hz and the duty ratio is 50%.

In the present embodiment, the game machine 3001 is configured so that the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b can be lit in colors according to the state of the game machine 3001, respectively. That is, the combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b corresponds to the state of the game machine 3001 (see FIG. 361). In the present specification, "a combination of the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b" is also referred to as a lighting pattern of the lamp 3305.

The data display 2001 can recognize the emission color of the lamp 3305a and the emission color of the lamp 3305b by imaging the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b with the CMOS image sensor. As a result, the data display 2001 controls the liquid crystal display 2002, the LED 2003, the speaker 2004, etc., and communicates with the management server 4001 in an manner corresponding to the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305 (the state of the game machine 3001) in the game machine 3001. Or do.

<Lighting pattern of lamp 3305>
As shown in FIG. 361, the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305 includes an error pattern (for example, "pattern 1" to "pattern 4"), a custom start pattern (for example, "pattern 10" to "pattern 12"), and the like. Custom end patterns (eg, "Pattern 20"), AT intermediate patterns (eg, "Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33"), AT start patterns (eg, "Pattern 40" to "Pattern 43"), and In-game production patterns (for example, "Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52") are included. In each of these patterns, for example, the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are controlled to emit different colors.

Further, as a lighting pattern of the lamp 3305, there is a model identification pattern as shown in FIG. 383. The model identification pattern is a lighting pattern according to the model to which the game machine 3001 belongs, and the model is used in order to execute each function described later in the data display 2001, or in the data display 2001 or the management server 4001. It is used for recognition. In such a model identification pattern, for example, the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b are controlled to emit light in the colors described on the left side of the LED (lamp 3305a) and the right side of the LED (3305b) in FIG. 383.

As for the model identification pattern, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are turned on in the pattern shown in FIG. 383 after the power is turned on in the game machine 3001 and the predetermined initialization process is executed. Usually, in a hall (game store), it is common to adopt a method of starting up game machines and peripheral devices all at once on an island-by-island basis. As a result, the initialization process on the peripheral device (data display 2001) side is completed before the initialization process on the game machine (game machine 3001) side, and the data is displayed when the lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit. The image sensor unit 2311 of the machine 2001 is in a standing state. Therefore, the data display 2001 can recognize the model identification pattern shown in FIG. 383 without missing it.

Specifically, in the model identification pattern, first, as a first step, the lamp 3305a emits white light and the lamp 3305b emits white light, and this state continues for 10 seconds. Subsequently, as the second step, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits blue-green light and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light continues for 1 second. Similarly, as the third step, the lamp 3305a emits pink light and the lamp 3305b emits light. The state of emitting pink light continues for 1 second, and as the 4th step, the state of the lamp 3305a emitting green and the state of the lamp 3305b emitting green continues for 1 second, and as the 5th step, the lamp 3305a turns reddish purple. The state in which the lamp 3305b emits reddish blue light continues for 1 second while emitting light, and as the sixth step, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits yellowish green and the lamp 3305b emits yellowish green continues for 1 second, and the 7th step. As a result, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light continues for 1 second, and as the eighth step, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits yellow light and the lamp 3305b emits yellow light continues for 1 second. In the ninth step, the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light for 1 second, and in the tenth step, the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits red light. Continue for 1 second. The first step is a learning start pattern, and the second to tenth steps are learning patterns.

Subsequently, as the eleventh step, the state in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light continues for 1 second. In this example, the fact that the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light as the eleventh step indicates a maker code indicating that the game machine 3001 belongs to the maker A. The eleventh step is a model information pattern.

As described above, the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are configured to be lit in a predetermined pattern in the first to tenth steps before being lit in a pattern according to the model information in the eleventh step. Therefore, at least a part of the light emission of the lamp 3305 in the first step to the tenth step triggers the execution of each function in the present embodiment, and the details will be described later.

In the model identification pattern shown in FIG. 383, light emission by the first step is repeated while the demo screen is displayed. In addition, from the start of the game machine 3001 to the first game, or during normal non-customization (when the character is not customized and a specific effect does not occur), the first step to the eleventh step Is repeated. The specific effect is, for example, an effect that triggers the lamps 3305a and the lamp 3305b to be turned on in the pattern shown in FIG. 361 (factor for changing the lighting pattern).

<Structure of game machine and game device>
The hardware configuration of the game machine 3001 in the present embodiment is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 342, for example, and the main control unit 3301 for controlling the main device group 3303 and the sub device group 3304 for controlling the sub device group 3304 are controlled. It is provided with a control unit 3302, and is connected from the main control unit 3301 to the sub control unit 3302 by one-way communication. Further, an external terminal plate 3308 is connected to the main control unit 3301 by one-way communication. The main control unit 3301 and the sub control unit 3302 each include a CPU, a ROM for storing programs, and an RWM for storing information related to games and effects.

Further, here, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the light output by the lamps 3305 (lamps 3305a, lamps 3305b) by the lamp control circuit 3306, thereby transmitting data such as the game state and the effect pattern to the data display 2001. Send (by non-contact communication).
Therefore, the sub-control unit 3302 that controls the light output of the lamp 3305 and / or the lamp control circuit 3306 constitutes a light emission control means.

The hardware configuration of the data display 2001 in the present embodiment is the same as that described with reference to, for example, FIG. 343, and the image display unit 2305 such as the liquid crystal display 2002 and the illumination unit 2306 such as the LED 2003. It includes an audio output unit 2307 such as the speaker 2004 (see FIG. 341). Further, the data display 2001 includes a sensor group 2304, a control unit 2301, a ROM 2302, and a RAM 2303. The control unit 2301 includes a CPU, a control circuit board provided with the CPU, and the like, and controls connected devices.

The ROM 2302 stores a control program for realizing the functions of the data display 2001. The control unit 2301 has a function of controlling each component by reading and executing the control program stored in the ROM 2302, and executing the effect of the mode according to the game state and the effect pattern of the game machine 3001. Realize. Further, the control unit 2301 performs communication control with the game machine 3001 and communication control with the server device 4001.

The sensor group 2304 is a sensor group including a touch sensor or the like for determining the pressing of the call button 2005, as shown in FIG. 341. When the operation is detected by these sensors, the control unit 2301 controls the display content on the video display unit 2305, the light emitting mode on the illumination unit 2306, and the audio output mode on the audio output unit 2307 according to the operation. .. When the display screen of the video display unit 2305 functions as a touch panel, the sensor group 2304 includes a sensor for detecting a touch operation on the touch panel.

The communication interface 2310 is an interface for communicating with the game machine 3001 and the server device 4001, and is also a conversion module that converts the input information into an optimum method when outputting the input information.

The communication interface 2310 receives the information from the game machine 3001 in two communication modes. One is the above-mentioned non-contact communication via light, and the other communication mode is that the communication interface 2310 is connected to the external terminal plate 3308 of the game machine 3001 by the contact input method, and the game machine 3001 The data display 2001 is a one-way communication.

The RAM 2303 functions as a storage means for storing various data. For example, the control unit 2301 stores the control result of each connected component in the RAM 2303. Further, the RAM 2303 is a data table (game state determination table) for determining the game state and effect pattern of the game machine 3001, and a data table (effect pattern) for executing the effect according to the game state and effect pattern. Table) is stored.

As described above, the image sensor unit 2311 is provided to image the lamp 3305 of the game machine 3001. Further, the image sensor unit 2311 grasps the light emission from the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b of the game machine 3001, and the control unit 2301 bases the video display unit 2305, the illumination unit 2306, and the audio output unit 2307 on the basis of the light emission. Control and perform production.

Next, the configuration of the image sensor unit 2311 will be described with reference to FIG. 384. FIG. 384 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the CMOS image sensor 2432 and the control LSI 2434 included in the image sensor unit 2311.

The CMOS image sensor 2432 is, for example, a CMOS image sensor having a resolution of 640 × 480 pixels and a frame rate of 440 fps. Further, the CMOS image sensor 2432 is provided with an exposure time setting mechanism capable of setting the exposure time according to an input signal from the outside.

Further, a temperature sensor 2432a is provided inside the CMOS image sensor 2432. The temperature sensor 2432a is composed of a PN junction (diode) formed on the silicon substrate of the image sensor. The PN junction has a temperature coefficient of about 2 mV / ° C., and when a predetermined constant current flows, a change in the terminal voltage of the PN junction follows the substrate temperature. The temperature change of the image sensor can be monitored from the detection output of the terminal voltage change by the temperature sensor 2432a. The detection output by the temperature sensor 2432a is provided to the host controller 2441 via, for example, the ISI circuit 2451, and the host controller 2441 grasps the temperature in the CMOS image sensor 2432 based on the detection output by the temperature sensor 2432a. be able to. The temperature sensor 2432a is preferably arranged near the lens in the CMOS image sensor 2432, for example.

In the present embodiment, the CMOS image sensor 2432 is used as an image pickup device that images the lamps 3305a and 3305b of the game machine 3001 and acquires the image data, but another image pickup device such as a CCD image sensor is used. It can also be.

The control LSI 2434 includes a host controller 2441, a DSP (digital signal processor) circuit 2442, a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 2443 to which a backup power supply (not shown) is connected, a flash memory 2444, an ISP (Image Signal Processing) circuit 2445, and a GPIO. It is equipped with (General Purpose Input / Output) 2453 and UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) 2452. The devices constituting these control LSIs 2434 are connected to each other via a bus, and in the control LSI 2434 of the present embodiment, AXI (Advanced eXtensible Interface) is adopted as a bus protocol.

Further, the control LSI 2434 includes an ISI (Image Sensor Interface) circuit 2451. The ISI circuit 2451 is electrically connected to the CMOS image sensor 2432 and the ISP circuit. The ISI circuit 2451 converts the image data transmitted from the CMOS image sensor 2432 by the LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) method into an RGB Bayer image and outputs the image data. At this time, a unique image ID is attached to the RGB image output from the ISI circuit 2451. By this image ID, each image that is sequentially acquired with the passage of time can be identified.
Therefore, the CMOS image sensor 2432, the ISI circuit 2451, and the ISP circuit 2445 that convert the captured image into image data constitute an optical signal receiving means.

The ISP circuit 2445 inputs an RGB bayer image from the ISI circuit 2451. Next, the ISP circuit 2445 performs a color conversion process for converting the RGB bayer image (if the lens correction process is performed, the image after the process) into various formats. In the color conversion process, the ISP circuit 2445 converts the RGB bayer image into image data (YUV image data) corresponding to the YUV color space, and stores the YUV image data in the SRAM 2443. The SRAM 2443 is provided with a storage area that can store a predetermined number of YUV image data. When the number of YUV image data stored in SRAM 2443 reaches the upper limit, the stored order is overwritten from the oldest YUV image data.

Further, when the ISP circuit 2445 stores the YUV image data in the SRAM 2443, the ISP circuit 2445 outputs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt signal to the host controller 2441. Further, the ISP circuit 2445 includes a WB (White Balance) circuit as a dedicated circuit for realizing a white balance adjustment function for adjusting the white balance of the RGB bayer image input from the ISI circuit 2451, and inputs according to the control of the host controller 2441. Adjust the white balance of the RGB bayer image (hardware white balance).
Therefore, the ISP circuit 2445 that inputs the RGB bayer image by the WB circuit constitutes an optical input means.

Further, in the color conversion process, the ISP circuit 2445 corresponds to a color space (HSV color space) composed of three components (H: hue, S: saturation, V: lightness), if necessary, for the RGB bayer image. It is also possible to convert to image data (HSV image data) and store the HSV image data in SRAM 2443.

The DSP circuit 2442 performs each process according to the present embodiment under the control of the host controller 2441.

The UART 2452 is a serial communication device for transmitting the data generated by the image sensor unit 2311 to the control unit 2301 of the data display 2001 via the communication interface 2310.

The host controller 2441 controls each device constituting the control LSI 2434, for example, the DSP circuit 2442, the UART 2452, and the like.

Further, when the host controller 2441 receives the VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2445 (when the YUV image data is stored in the SRAM 2443), the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform various processes as necessary.

The flash memory 2444 stores parameters used for various processes by various devices constituting the control LSI 2434, for example, the host controller 2441, the DSP circuit 2442, and the like, and data necessary for various processes.

Further, the AE setting port of GPIO2453 is connected to the CMOS image sensor 2432, and the exposure time setting mechanism of the CMOS image sensor 2432 can be controlled (exposure time can be set).

<Light source search process>
Next, the light source search process of this embodiment will be described.

The light source search of the present embodiment includes a "sparse search" that roughly grasps the position of the LED in the captured image and a "dense search" that grasps the detailed LED position based on the LED position grasped by the sparse search. Is included.

Here, the light source search process controlled by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 will be described. The light source search process uses the blinking control characteristics of the LED light source to specify the position of the LED light source in the image captured by the image sensor unit 2311. In the present embodiment, the LED light source is analyzed and specified from the four characteristics of the brightness, periodicity, color, and size of the light source.

FIG. 385 is a diagram showing an outline of a sparse search in the light source search process of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, first, the CMOS image sensor 2432 of the image sensor unit 2311 images the upper side of the game machine 3001, and the acquired image data is converted into an RGB Bayer image. FIG. 385 (A) schematically shows the RGB bayer image. The RGB Bayer image is, in this example, a VGA image of 640 x 480 pixels. The RGB bayer image of FIG. 385 (A) is a color image, and shows two LED light sources (lamps 3305a and 3305b) on the upper part of the game machine 3001.

Next, the RGB bayer image is converted into a YUV image, and grayscale image data based on the image data of the YUV image (for example, based on the Y component) is generated. A grayscale image based on such grayscale image data is shown in FIG. 385 (B). The grayscale image also has a size of 640 × 480 pixels, like the RGB Bayer image described above. In the grayscale image of FIG. 385 (B), a portion having a high luminance value is represented by white, and a portion having a high luminance value is represented by black or a dark color. The two LED light sources mentioned above are shown in white, and two other small dots in the upper right are also shown in white.

After that, the grayscale image shown in FIG. 385 (B) is reduced to 1/4 in vertical and horizontal sizes, respectively, and reduced image data is generated. FIG. 385 (C) shows a grayscale reduced image based on the reduced image data thus obtained. The size of the reduced image is 160 × 120 pixels, and the total number of pixels is 1/16 of the grayscale image shown in FIG. 385 (B). However, for convenience of display, in FIG. 385 (C), the size of the reduced image is expressed larger than the actual size in comparison with the gray scale image. In this reduced image, 16 pixels of the original image is represented as one pixel by reduction, so the two LED light sources and the two small points shown in white in the grayscale image of FIG. 385 (B) are , Boundaries, etc. will be expressed in a rough state (that is, expressed in low resolution).

Here, the light source region including the two LED light sources is specified by the sparse search of the present embodiment, and the specific identification method will be described later.

The size of the light source area is 35 x 25 pixels in this example. When the light source area is specified, the pixel component corresponding to the light source area is cut out. However, the target for such cropping is not the reduced image of FIG. 385 (C) but the grayscale image of FIG. 385 (B). Therefore, the grayscale image before reduction corresponding to the specified light source region is cropped, and its size is 140 × 100 pixels, which is four times the vertical and horizontal sizes. The cropped image obtained as a result of the cropping is shown in FIG. 385 (D). In the cropped image, the boundary between the two LED light sources is displayed in detail with the original number of pixels (original resolution).

Next, a dense search is performed based on the data of each pixel (crop image data) related to such a cropped image, and the position of the LED light source is specified. The specific method for dense search will also be described in detail later.

Here, the light source search process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 390. 386 and 387 are flowcharts showing the flow of the light source search process controlled by the host controller 2441. This light source search process is executed, for example, when the data display 2001 is started.

First, the sparse search process in the light source search process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 and 388. The host controller 2441 waits until it receives the VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2445 described above (step S2170). Then, in step S2171, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S2171: YES), the process returns to step S2170 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2171: NO), the process proceeds to step S2172.

Such a time filter is for thinning out YUV image data obtained at 440 fps, for example, and for example, time thinning out for acquiring YUV image data at a rate of once every 2 to 8 times for a VSYNC interrupt signal. It is a filter. As described above, the time filter of the present embodiment simply thins out the YUV image data generated from the RGB bayer image, but various other time direction LPFs (Low-pass filters) can be applied. It is possible.

If it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2171: NO), grayscale image data is acquired in step S2172. This process is a process of acquiring grayscale image data (for example, corresponding to the Y component) based on the YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2443 by the process of the ISP circuit 2445.
Therefore, the ISP circuit 2445 that converts YUV image data into grayscale image data constitutes a luminance image conversion means.

Although not shown, the grayscale image data can be represented as a two-dimensional array consisting of pixel data corresponding to each coordinate of the imaging position. The image sensor unit 2311 of the present embodiment provides, for example, grayscale image data captured at 640 × 480 pixels.

The grayscale image data (for example, the Y component of the YUV image data) can take an 8-bit value for one pixel, and in this case, the color depth of the component is 256 (gradation) of 0 to 255. .. In addition, each pixel can have various bit numbers (for example, 4 bits).

Next, in step S2173, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to reduce the number of pixels in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) of the acquired grayscale image data to 1/4, respectively. Generate reduced image data. In this example, 160 × 120 pixel reduced image data is generated from the 640 × 480 pixel grayscale image data, and the total number of pixels is reduced from 307200 to 19200, which is 1/16 of the reduced image data.
Therefore, the host controller 2441 that instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to convert the grayscale image data of 640 × 480 pixels into the reduced image data of 160 × 120 pixels constitutes an image accuracy conversion means.

FIG. 388 illustrates the reduced image data. This reduced image data is represented as a two-dimensional array of 16 × 12 pixels for convenience of explanation. In the two-dimensional array of FIG. 388, the coordinates in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) are 0 to 15, and the coordinates in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) are 0 to 11. For example, the upper left of the reduced image data in FIG. 388. The corner pixels of are indicated by the coordinates (0,0), and the lower right corner pixels are indicated by (15,11) (also for other two-dimensional arrays of FIGS. 388 and 389, which will be described later). the same).

In this process, for example, a value of 1 pixel of the reduced image data is generated from the value of 16 pixels of the gray scale image data, but the average value of the values of 16 pixels of the gray scale image data is taken. The value may be one pixel of the reduced image data, or the value of the representative pixel (for example, the pixel at a predetermined position or the pixel having the center value) among the 16 pixels of the gray scale image data may be taken as the reduced image data. It may be a value of 1 pixel of. In addition, reduced image data can be generated from grayscale image data by various methods.

Next, in step S2174, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform average image data generation processing on the reduced image data. This average image data generation process is a process of generating the current average image data from the average image data generated based on the reduced image data input up to the previous time and the reduced image data input this time.

FIG. 388 illustrates average image data. Like the reduced image data, this average image data is also represented by, for example, a two-dimensional array composed of Y components. The average image data is 160 × 120 pixels like the reduced image data, but in FIG. 388, it is represented by 16 × 12 pixels for convenience.

The average image data is calculated for each pixel by the following equation 6. The initial value of the average image data is the reduced image data based on the first grayscale image data in the monitoring time.
Average image data (x, y) = previous average image data (x, y) + difference * Learning coefficient ... (Equation 6)
The "previous average image data" is the average image data updated every time the reduced image data is acquired from the reduced image data input in the past. The "difference" is the current reduced image data (x, y) -the previous average image data (x, y), and the "learning coefficient" is a constant such as "0.91".
Here, assuming that the "learning coefficient" is 0.91, the above equation 6 can be rewritten to the following equation 7.
Average image data (x, y) = previous average image data (x, y) * 0.09 + current reduced image data (x, y) * 0.91 ... (Equation 7)
That is, as is clear from Equation 7, this average image data is obtained by a weighted average of the average image data up to the previous time and the reduced image data this time, and 91% of the elements of the latest reduced image data in the past. 9% of the elements of the reduced image data are reflected.

Next, in step S2175, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the difference image data generation process. The difference image data generation process is a process of calculating the difference between the reduced image data and the average image data for each pixel at the same position and obtaining the difference image data.

FIG. 388 illustrates the difference image data. The difference image data shows the difference for each pixel between the reduced image data shown in FIG. 388 and the average image data. The difference image data is 160 × 120 pixels like the reduced image data, but in FIG. 388, it is represented by 16 × 12 pixels for convenience.

Next, in step S2176, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the cumulative value calculation process. In the cumulative value calculation process, when the value related to the pixel having a value other than "0" in the difference image data satisfies a predetermined condition, "1" is added to the pixel at the corresponding position for a certain period of time. Is a process of obtaining as cumulative image data.

For example, for each pixel having a value other than "0" in the difference image data, "1" is added to the position of the corresponding pixel in the cumulative image data when the following condition 1 is satisfied.
<Condition 1>
Threshold 1a ≤ difference image data (Y component) (x, y) ≤ threshold 1b ... (Equation 8)

Equation 8 of condition 1 is conditional on the fluctuation component (vibration component) being within a predetermined range (for example, 0.5 to 3.0), and the value of the difference image data (x, y) is this fluctuation. It is a value representing a component, which is the difference between the reduced image data (Y component) and the average image data (Y component). Further, since the fluctuation component is small, other values obtained based on the value of the difference image data (x, y), such as the squared value of the value of the difference image data (x, y), are used to satisfy the condition 1. Judgment can also be made.

Further, the condition 2 regarding the color component with respect to the position of the corresponding pixel of the cumulative image data can be added to the above condition 1. For example, for the pixel position (16 pixels) of the corresponding pixel of the cumulative image data before reduction, the U component and the V component of the YUV image data are acquired, and the U component and the Y component are within predetermined ranges, respectively. In some cases, condition 2 is satisfied, and in this case, "1" can be added to the position of the corresponding pixel in the cumulative image data.

FIG. 388 illustrates the cumulative image data obtained as a result of performing the above cumulative value calculation process for a predetermined period based on the data including the average image data and the difference image data shown in FIG. 388. There is. This cumulative image data can also be represented by a two-dimensional array of 160 × 120 pixels in the same manner as the reduced image data, but in FIG. 389, it is represented by 16 × 12 pixels for convenience.

When the cumulative image data is obtained in step S2176, the host controller 2441 performs the light source region specifying process in step S2177. The light source area specifying process is performed based on the cumulative image data.

In the light source area specifying process of the present embodiment, first, in the cumulative image data, a region (a set of pixels) having an area of a certain area or more and a cumulative value (arranged in the pixels of the region in the cumulative image data). The area with the largest total value) and the area with the next largest value are defined as pixel areas, and their coordinates are specified.

Specifically, in the cumulative image data, when a set of pixels in which pixels having a cumulative value of 1 or more are arranged adjacent to each other is surrounded by a rectangular area, the x-coordinate is 2 pixels or more and the y-coordinate is When it becomes an area of 1 pixel or more (that is, an area of 2 × 1 (pixel) or more), this area is defined as a pixel area. In this example, even if two pixels having a cumulative value of 1 or more have an oblique positional relationship (that is, diagonally upper left, diagonally upper right, diagonally lower left, and diagonally lower right), these pixels are considered to be adjacent to each other. Although it is considered, it is also possible to prevent such an oblique positional relationship from being regarded as adjacent.

Further, for example, when the total of the cumulative values in the area (set of pixels) having an area of a certain area or more is calculated, if the cumulative value of the pixel area having the largest cumulative value does not reach a predetermined value, It can be determined that the pixel area cannot be specified, and as a result, the light source area cannot be specified.

Then, in this example, the region including the coordinates of the two pixel regions specified as described above is specified as the light source region (see the light source region R1 in the cumulative image data of FIG. 388).

In this embodiment, the light source area is rectangular. In this case, the data for identifying the light source region is, for example, the pixel positions corresponding to the upper left and lower right corners of the light source region (in the case of the light source region R1 of FIG. 387, (4,5), (12, 9). )) And the number of pixels representing the pixel position corresponding to the upper left corner of the light source area and the width and height of the light source area (in the case of the light source area R1 of FIG. 387, (4,5), 9, 5 ).

Further, this light source area is an area surrounding the two found pixel areas as described above, but this light source area can be set based on various criteria. For example, the size of the light source area may be specified in advance, a certain distance may be provided outside the two pixel areas, or a predetermined number of pixels may be included in a predetermined direction outside the two pixel areas. You may.

Further, in the cumulative image data, if the total area of the cumulative values is not used as a judgment criterion only on the condition that the area has an area of a certain area or more, three or more pixel areas may be specified. is there. Of course, in the cumulative image data, even if the area has an area of a certain area or more and the total of the cumulative values is used as a judgment criterion, if the total of the cumulative values is the same value, three or more pixels. Areas may be identified.

In such a case, the two closest to a specific pixel position (reference coordinate) in the cumulative image data can be specified as the final pixel area (first coordinate). For example, in a two-dimensional array of cumulative image data, the reference coordinates are positions that are approximately the center in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and approximately the center in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) (that is, approximately the center of the captured image). Then, the two closest to the reference coordinates can be determined as the final pixel area. Further, for example, in a two-dimensional arrangement of cumulative image data, a position slightly lower than a position that is approximately the center in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and approximately the center in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) (that is, imaging). The reference coordinates are set (slightly below the center of the image), and the two closest to the reference coordinates can be determined as the final pixel area.

For example, when four pixel regions are found in the cumulative image data of FIG. 388 and the light source region R1 and the light source region R2 are considered, the reference coordinates are set horizontally as described above, for example, in the two-dimensional arrangement of the cumulative image data. If the reference coordinate Q, which is a position slightly below the position that is approximately the center of the direction (X-axis direction) and is approximately the center of the vertical direction (Y-axis direction), is set, the reference coordinate is finally set. The light source region R1 including the pixel region close to Q is specified as the light source region. In FIG. 388, the light source region R1 is shown in a size of 9 × 5 pixels for convenience, but in this example, it is assumed that the size is 35 × 25 pixels as shown in FIG. 385 (C). ..

When the lamps 3305a and 3305b of the game machine 3001 are imaged by the image sensor unit 2311 of the data display 2001, the lamps 3305a and 3305b generally specify the pixel area based on the reference coordinates. This is because the angle of view is set so that the image is taken close to the position corresponding to the reference coordinates. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light at a completely different position from being mistakenly recognized as an LED light source due to the influence of ambient light and reflection.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 382, the lamps 3305a and 3305b are arranged side by side on the gaming machine 3001. Therefore, the light sources are based on the positional relationship of the LED light sources. The area may be specified.

When three or more pixel areas are found, the effectiveness of the pixel area is judged based on the number of pixels in the pixel area and the sum of the cumulative values of the pixel values, and the light source area is specified. You may.

Next, in step S2178, it is determined whether or not the light source region in the sparse search is specified. When the light source region is specified (step S2178: YES), the process proceeds to step S2192 of the dense search process. As described above, in the sparse search of the present embodiment, the reduced image data and the average image data shown in FIG. 388 are updated frame by frame (for each thinned frame), and the difference image data updated accordingly. And the light source region is specified based on the cumulative image data.
The light source region specified in the sparse search is coordinates that can identify the light source region, and the coordinates are, for example, the upper left coordinates of the light source region and the size of the region (140 × 100) based on grayscale image data. It may also be the four coordinates of the light source area (upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right). Further, the coordinates of the reduced image data may be specified as the light source region.

When the light source region is not specified (step S2178: NO), it is determined in step S2179 whether or not it is within the monitoring time. In this embodiment, the monitoring time is 2 to 7 seconds. If it is within the monitoring time (step S2179: YES), the process returns to step S2170 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. If it is not within the monitoring time (step S2179: NO), the initialization process and the synchronization shift correction process are performed (step S2180), and the sparse search is repeated. In this case, the initialization process is, for example, a process of resetting the monitoring time, clearing the average image data, the difference image data, and the cumulative image data, and initializing the monitoring time as well. The synchronization shift correction process is, for example, a process of adjusting a time filter or the like so that grayscale image data captured at a timing (cycle) different from the conventional one can be acquired.
Therefore, the host controller 2441 that specifies the first coordinate by the sparse search constitutes the first coordinate specifying means, and constitutes the image acquisition means that specifies the light source region from the specified first coordinate.

Further, if it is not within the monitoring time (step S2179: NO), it can be controlled to end the light source search process.

Next, the dense search process in the light source search process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387, 389, and 390. In the dense search process, the same processing procedure as in the sparse search process (that is, a method of generating difference image data from sequentially input image data and average image data and calculating a cumulative value based on the difference image data). Is used to specify the position of the LED light source.

The host controller 2441 waits until it receives the VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2445 described above (step S2190). Then, in step S2191, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S2191: YES), the process returns to step S2190 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2191: NO), the process proceeds to step S2192.

In step S2192, grayscale image data is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring grayscale image data (for example, corresponding to the Y component) based on the YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2443 by the process of the ISP circuit 2445. The grayscale image data can be represented as a two-dimensional array of data corresponding to each pixel at the imaging position. The image sensor unit 2311 of the present embodiment provides, for example, grayscale image data captured at 640 × 480 pixels.

Next, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to partially cut out the area of the corresponding coordinates from the acquired grayscale image data based on the light source area specified by the sparse search, and cut out the image data. Is generated (step S2193). The size of the light source area specified by the sparse search is a size of 35 × 25 pixels, and when this is associated with the original grayscale image data, it becomes an area of 140 × 100 pixels (total number of pixels = 14000). Since the original grayscale image data is 640 × 480 pixels (total number of pixels = 307200), about 4.6% of the pixels of the grayscale image data are cropped as cropped image data.

Since the coordinates of the light source region specified by the sparse search are obtained based on the reduced image data of 1/4, in order to apply to the grayscale image data, the x-coordinates of the coordinates of the light source region are obtained. , And the y-coordinate values need to be multiplied by 4, respectively.

FIG. 389 illustrates the cropped image data. This cropped image data is represented as a two-dimensional array of 14 × 10 pixels for convenience of explanation. In the two-dimensional array of FIG. 389, the coordinates in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) are 0 to 13, and the coordinates in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) are 0 to 9. The pixels in the corner of are indicated by the coordinates (0,0), and the pixels in the lower right corner are indicated by (13,9).

Next, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 in step S2194, and performs an average image data generation process on the cutout image data generated in step S2193. This average image data generation process is a process of generating the current average image data from the average image data generated based on the cutout image data input up to the previous time and the cutout image data input this time.

FIG. 389 illustrates the average image data. Like the cropped image data, this average image data is also represented by, for example, a two-dimensional array composed of Y components. The average image data is 140 × 100 pixels like the cropped image data, but in FIG. 389, it is represented by 14 × 10 pixels for convenience.

The average image data can be obtained, for example, by the same method as the average image data in the sparse search described above.

Next, in step S2195, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the difference image data generation process. The difference image data generation process is a process of calculating the difference between the cropped image data and the average image data for each pixel at the same position and obtaining the difference image data.

FIG. 389 illustrates the difference image data. The difference image data shows the difference for each pixel between the cropped image data shown in FIG. 389 and the average image data. The difference image data is 140 × 100 pixels like the cropped image data, but in FIG. 389, it is represented by 14 × 10 pixels for convenience.

Next, in step S2196, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the cumulative value calculation process. In the cumulative value calculation process, when the value related to the pixel having a value other than "0" in the difference image data satisfies a predetermined condition, "1" is added to the pixel at the corresponding position for a certain period of time. Is a process of obtaining as cumulative image data.

For example, for each pixel having a value other than "0" in the difference image data, "1" is added to the position of the corresponding pixel in the cumulative image data when the following condition 1 is satisfied.
<Condition 1>
Threshold 1a ≤ difference image data (Y component) (x, y) ≤ threshold 1b ... (Equation 9)

Equation 9 of condition 1 is conditional on the fluctuation component (vibration component) being within a predetermined range (for example, 0.5 to 3.0), and the value of the difference image data (x, y) is this fluctuation. It is a value representing a component, which is the difference between the cropped image data (Y component) and the average image data (Y component). Further, since the fluctuation component is small, other values obtained based on the value of the difference image data (x, y), such as the squared value of the value of the difference image data (x, y), are used to satisfy the condition 1. Judgment can also be made.

Further, the condition 2 regarding the color component with respect to the position of the corresponding pixel of the cumulative image data can be added to the above condition 1. For example, it is assumed that the U component and the V component of the YUV image data of the corresponding pixel of the cumulative image data are acquired, and the U component and the Y component are within a predetermined range, respectively, and the condition 2 is satisfied. , "1" can be added to the position of the corresponding pixel in the cumulative image data.

FIG. 389 illustrates the cumulative image data obtained as a result of performing the above cumulative value calculation process for a predetermined period based on the data including the average image data and the difference image data shown in FIG. 389. There is. This cumulative image data can also be represented by a two-dimensional array of 140 × 100 pixels in the same manner as the cropped image data, but in FIG. 389, it is represented by 14 × 10 pixels for convenience.

When the cumulative image data is obtained in step S2196, the host controller 2441 performs the light source identification process in step S2197. The light source identification process is an area having an area of a certain area or more based on the cumulative image data, and the total of the cumulative values (values arranged in the pixels of the area in the cumulative image data) is the maximum value. , And the region with the next largest value are regarded as LED light sources, respectively.

In the light source identification process of the present embodiment, when a set of pixels in which pixels having a cumulative value of 1 or more are arranged adjacent to each other in the cumulative image data is surrounded by a rectangular area, the x-coordinates are 2 pixels or more and , When the area is 1 pixel or more (that is, an area of 2 × 1 (pixel) or more) in the y coordinate, this area (pixel area) is a light source candidate. In this example, even if two pixels having a cumulative value of 1 or more have an oblique positional relationship (that is, diagonally upper left, diagonally upper right, diagonally lower left, and diagonally lower right), these pixels are considered to be adjacent to each other. Although it is considered, it is also possible to prevent such an oblique positional relationship from being regarded as adjacent.

In the light source specifying process, two pixel regions are determined as the positions of the LED light sources, so the center coordinates of the light source (light source center coordinates: second coordinates) are specified for each of them. The coordinates of the center of the light source can be obtained by various methods. For example, the pixel that becomes the center coordinate of the light source can be specified by grasping the upper end, the lower end, the left end, and the right end of the pixel area and then finding the center thereof. Further, in addition to the upper end, the lower end, the left end, and the right end of the pixel area, the central pixel can be obtained based on the value of each pixel in the pixel area. Further, here, the coordinates of one pixel are specified for each of the coordinates of the light source center with respect to the LED light source, but the coordinates of the center of the light source can also be specified as the coordinates of a plurality of pixels.
Therefore, the host controller 2441 that specifies the second coordinate by the light source specifying process of the dense search of the light source search process constitutes the second coordinate specifying means.

In the cumulative image data shown in FIG. 389, the center S1 is specified as the center coordinates (LED light source position) of the pixel region T1 on the left side, and the coordinates are (4,5). Further, the center S2 is specified as the center coordinates (LED light source position) of the pixel region T21 on the right side, and the coordinates are (9, 5).

As described above, the cumulative image data is a two-dimensional array of 140 × 100 pixels, and the coordinates of the specified light source center are relative coordinates. Therefore, based on the coordinates of the center of these light sources and the coordinates of the light source region specified by the sparse search, the coordinates indicating the position in the grayscale image data (that is, in the captured image) are obtained.

Next, in step S2198, it is determined whether or not the light source in the dense search is specified. When the light source is specified (step S2198: YES), the process proceeds to step S2201.

When the light source is not specified (step S2198: NO), in step S2199, it is determined whether or not it is within the monitoring time. In this embodiment, the monitoring time is 2 to 7 seconds. If it is within the monitoring time (step S2199: YES), the process returns to step S2190 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. If it is not within the monitoring time (step S2199: NO), the initialization process and the synchronization shift correction process are performed (step S2200), and the dense search is repeated. In this case, the initialization process is, for example, a process of resetting the monitoring time, clearing the average image data, the difference image data, and the cumulative image data, and initializing the monitoring time as well. The synchronization shift correction process is, for example, a process of adjusting a time filter or the like so that grayscale image data captured at a timing (cycle) different from the conventional one can be acquired.

Further, if it is not within the monitoring time (step S2199: NO), it can be controlled to end the light source search process.

When the light source is specified (step S2198: YES), in step S2201, mask image data is generated from the cumulative image data. In the mask image data, since the light source center coordinates are specified by the coordinates of one pixel for each of the LED light sources, the pixels of the two light source center coordinates are set to "1", and the other pixels are set to "0".

In addition, each LED light source can be specified as the coordinates of a plurality of pixels. For example, in the cumulative image data, the pixels whose cumulative value is 1 or more and included in the two pixel areas determined as the positions of the LED light sources are set to "1", and the other pixels are set to "1". Set to "0". The mask image data is the size of the original grayscale image data (640 × 480), and “0” is also set for the pixels corresponding to the area other than the light source area specified by the sparse search.

FIG. 390 (A) shows an example of mask image data. The size is 640 × 480 pixels, and it is possible to mask the grayscale image data and the RGB Bayer image of the present embodiment. A light source region (140 × 100) on the mask image data corresponding to the light source region identified by the sparse search exists near the center. In FIG. 390 (A), the light source area is enlarged and shown, but here, the pixel set to "0" is shown in black, and the pixel set to "1" is shown in white.

Next, the mask image data generated in step S2201 is subjected to pixel loss correction processing (step S2202). In this pixel loss correction process, for example, in the two pixel regions determined as the positions of the LED light sources, the central portion of the pixel region may appear dark depending on the lighting of the LED and the imaging timing of the CMOS image sensor 2432. (That is, the Y component of the pixel in the center becomes "0" or a small value close to "0"), and in order to deal with such an event, the central part of the pixel area that appears dark is the peripheral part. Set to "1" in the same way as above.

For example, FIG. 390 (B) shows a donut-shaped grasp of each pixel area when two pixel areas are recognized in the light source area (light source area shown in FIG. 385 (D)) specified in the sparse search. Here is an example that has been done. In such a case, the above pixel loss correction process is performed to correct the pixel area so that it is set to "1" up to the center of the pixel area so that the position of the LED light source is correctly masked.

Next, in step S2203, the host controller 2441 stores the generated mask image data and the coordinates of the specified LED light source (light source center coordinates) in, for example, SRAM 2443, and ends the process.
Therefore, the host controller 2441 that executes the light source search process constitutes a light emitting position specifying means.

As described above, in the light source search process of the present embodiment, first, reduced image data having a vertical and horizontal size of 1/4 is generated from the full-size grayscale image data, and the position of the LED light source is set to the light source region. (Sparse search), and then a process of specifying the light source in the range of the specified light source region in the full-size grayscale image data (dense search) is performed. Therefore, in the sparse search, the processing load is reduced by handling the reduced image data, and in the dense search, the processing load is reduced by processing only the range of the light source region specified by the sparse search, and as a result, the LED. The position of the light source can be specified quickly and with high accuracy.
In addition, when the light source search is simply performed, processing of a maximum of 640 × 480 = 307,200 pixels is required, but in the sparse search of the light source search processing of the present embodiment, 160 × 120 = 19,200, dense search. 140 × 100 = 14,000, and the total number of pixels is 33,200 pixels. The light source search process of the present embodiment searches for the light source in a number of times of about 1/9 or less of the case where the light source search is performed. Will be possible.

In the light source search process of the present embodiment, in the sparse search and the dense search, a series of grayscale image data generated based on the image data from the CMOS image sensor 2432 is acquired based on the VSYNC interrupt signal and the time filter. In the dense search, the past grayscale image data stored in the SRAM 2443 (for example, used in the sparse search) is read in chronological order. In order to further improve the accuracy, the light source search process may be performed using YUV image data instead of the grayscale image data.

In addition, the light source search process of the present embodiment can be variously modified while maintaining the effect of the present application. Further, the light source search process of the present embodiment described above is only an example, and an embodiment based on the technical idea of the present invention can be constructed by using various other methods.

<White balance adjustment processing>
Next, the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment will be described.

The white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment is executed, for example, when it is detected that two LED light sources (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) are turned on in a combination of (white and white). For example, since the two LED light sources are turned on in a combination of (white and white) immediately after the game machine 3001 is started or at a predetermined timing thereafter, the white balance adjustment process is also controlled to be executed at these timings. Will be done. When the white balance adjustment process is executed for the first time, the white balance has not been adjusted, so whether or not the two LED light sources are a combination of (white and white) is stored in the flash memory 2444. Judgment is made based on the threshold value of the RGB value and the condition of the RGB value.

In the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment, the hardware white balance adjustment process that adjusts the white balance by transmitting the correction value to the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445 and the theoretical white balance correction by the host controller 2441. The software balance adjustment process for calculating the software white balance correction value is performed. Furthermore, in the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment, the white balance adjustment process of the two LED light sources described above is performed individually.

Here, the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. 391 and 392 are flowcharts showing the flow of the white balance adjustment process controlled by the host controller 2441. This white balance adjustment process is called from another process executed by the host controller 2441 as needed. Further, such a white balance adjustment process is basically called when the two LED light sources (lamps 3305a and 3305b) are both controlled to blink in white.

First, the hardware white balance adjustment process is performed.

The host controller 2441 waits until it receives the VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2445 described above (step S2210). Then, in step S2211, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S2211: YES), the process returns to step S2210 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2211: NO), the process proceeds to step S2212.

Such a time filter is for thinning out YUV image data, and is, for example, a time thinning filter for acquiring YUV image data at a rate of once for receiving a plurality of VSYNC interrupt signals.

If it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2211: NO), an RGB bayer image is generated in step S2213. This process is a process of obtaining an RGB value based on the YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2443 by the process of the ISP circuit 2445.

In this hardware white balance adjustment process, the light source center coordinates of each of the two LED light sources are obtained by the above-mentioned light source search process and stored in the SRAM 2443. Therefore, in the above YUV image data, the first LED light source is used. A pixel at a position corresponding to the center coordinate of the light source is specified, and the YUV value of the pixel is converted into an RGB value. Further, when the coordinates of a plurality of pixels are obtained as the light source center coordinates of the first LED light source, the RGB values for one pixel can be obtained by various methods from the plurality of YUV values corresponding to those pixels. For example, the average value or the representative value of the RGB values obtained for each can be used as the RGB value. Here, it is assumed that the coordinates of one pixel are obtained as the light source center coordinates of the first LED light source. The first LED light source refers to one of the two LED light sources (lamps 3305a and 3305b).

Next, the host controller 2441 calculates the RGB value error in the first LED light source in step S2214. The RGB value error calculated in step S2214 represents the degree of variation in the RGB values of the light source center coordinates based on the value of the G component (green component), and is the light source center coordinates of the first LED light source. If the RGB values in the above are R0, G0, and B0, respectively, they are represented by, for example, MAX (R0, G0, B0) -MIN (R0, G0, B0). Here, MAX (R0, G0, B0) represents the maximum value among R0, G0, B0, and represents the minimum value among MIN (R0, G0, B0) R0, G0, B0.

For example, when the RGB values are 0 to 255 and the RGB values are (185, 180, 179), the MAX (R0, G0, B0) is 185 (R0 value), and the MIN (R0, G0, B0) is 179 (B0 value), and the RGB value error (MAX (R0, G0, B0) -MIN (R0, G0, B0)) is "6".

Next, in step S2215, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned RGB value error is larger than a predetermined threshold value (threshold value 1). If the RGB value error is not greater than the predetermined threshold value, that is, if it is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value (No in step S2215), the process proceeds to step S2221 and the hardware white balance adjustment is completed.

This determination determines whether or not the light output as "white" by the first LED light source is correctly recognized as "white" by the image sensor unit 2311. When the RGB values captured by the light source center coordinates of the first LED light source are values that are not biased to any color and are evenly mixed, it is determined that "white" is correctly recognized in the image sensor unit 2311. Will be done. Therefore, when there is no large difference between the RGB values of the center coordinates of the light source, it is considered that no further white balance adjustment is necessary, and the hardware white balance adjustment is terminated.

On the other hand, when the error of the RGB value is larger than a predetermined threshold value, the white balance adjustment value (WB correction value) is obtained by parabolic fitting. This adjustment is repeated while transmitting the WB correction value to the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445 until it is determined that the image sensor unit 2311 correctly recognizes "white".

When the difference between the RGB values is larger than the predetermined threshold value (Yes in step S2215), in step S2216, the G0 value and the R0 value are set with reference to the G component (green component) value (G0 value) of the first LED light source. The difference is obtained as errR, and the difference between the G0 value and the B0 value is obtained as errB (first-order error component). Further, the difference between the previous errR errR'' and the current errR is calculated as errR', and the difference between the previous errB errB'' and the current errB is calculated as errB'(secondary error component). ).

Next, in step S2217, the WB correction value (correction coefficient) is estimated for each color component of RB. Here, for the R component, a value obtained based on the previous WB correction value (wbHR') multiplied by a predetermined gain count for each of the above-mentioned first-order error component and second-order error component is added. The WB correction value (wbHR) of the R component is estimated, and for the B component, the previous WB correction value (wbHB') is multiplied by the above-mentioned first-order error component and second-order error component, respectively, by a predetermined gain count. The WB correction value (wbHB) of the B component is estimated by adding the value obtained based on the above. Here, denR and denB represent, for example, predetermined constants. “1” is set in the WB correction value (wbHG) of the G component. This means that the hardware white balance is not adjusted for the G component.

Next, in step S2218, errR'is stored as the previous error errR ″ and errB'is stored as the previous error errB ″.

Next, in step S2219, the difference (absolute value) between the WB correction value (wbHR) regarding the current R component and the previous WB correction value (wbHR') is stored as wbR_diff, and the WB correction value (WB correction) regarding the current B component is stored. The difference (absolute value) between wbHB) and the previous WB correction value (wbHB') is stored as wbB_diff.

Then, wbR_diff is 0 (that is, the WB correction value (wbHR) for the current R component is equal to the previous WB correction value (wbHR')), and wbB_diff is 0 (that is, the WB correction for the current B component). When the value (wbHB) and the previous WB correction value (wbHB') are equal) (Yes in step S2220), it is determined that the hardware white balance adjustment has converged, the process proceeds to step S2221, and the hardware white balance adjustment is completed. To do.

On the other hand, when either wbR_diff or wbB_diff is not 0 (No in step S2220), the process proceeds to step S2222 in order to repeat the hardware white balance adjustment, and therefore, the WB correction value (wbHR) for the R component this time. Is stored as the previous WB correction value (wbHR'), and the WB correction value (wbHB) for the current B component is stored as the previous WB correction value (wbHB').

Next, in step S2223, the WB correction value (wbHR, wbHB) is transmitted to the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445. In the subsequent imaging process, the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445 performs image processing on the image data captured by the first LED light source based on the received WB correction value, and stores the YUV image data in the SRAM 2443.

In step S2213, the host controller 2441 receives the YUV image data and generates an RGB bayer image based on the YUV image data. In this way, the hardware white balance adjustment process is repeated.

After the hardware white balance adjustment process for the first LED light source is completed in step S2221, the software white balance adjustment process is started as shown in FIG. 392 (step S2231). At this time, for the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445, an appropriate WB correction value is provided (at least for the white color of the first LED light source) by the above hardware white balance adjustment process, and the WB to which the WB correction value is applied is applied. The circuit provides YUV image data and the like.

First, in step S2232, the host controller 2441 waits until it receives the VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2445 described above. Then, in step S2233, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S2233: YES), the process returns to step S2232 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2233: NO), the process proceeds to step S2234.

Such a time filter is for thinning out YUV image data, and is, for example, a time thinning filter for acquiring YUV image data at a rate of once for receiving a plurality of VSYNC interrupt signals.

If it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2233: NO), an RGB bayer image is generated in step S2234. This process is a process of obtaining an RGB value based on the YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2443 by the process of the ISP circuit 2445.

In this software white balance adjustment process, the light source center coordinates are obtained for each of the two LED light sources in the above-mentioned light source search process, and the light source center coordinates are stored in the SRAM 2443. Therefore, in the above YUV image data. , The pixel at the position corresponding to the light source center coordinate of the first LED light source and the pixel at the position corresponding to the light source center coordinate of the second LED light source are specified, and the YUV values of those pixels are converted into RGB values, respectively.

Further, when the coordinates of a plurality of pixels are obtained as the light source center coordinates of the first LED light source, the RGB values for one pixel can be obtained by various methods from the plurality of YUV values corresponding to those pixels. For example, the average value or the representative value of the RGB values obtained for each can be used as the RGB value. Such processing is the same for the second LED light source. Further, here, it is assumed that the coordinates of one pixel are obtained as the center coordinates of the light sources of the first LED light source and the second LED light source.

Next, in step S2235, the host controller 2441 determines whether or not the counter is less than a predetermined threshold value (threshold value 2). In this determination, for example, whether or not the RGB values corresponding to the pixels at the position corresponding to the light source center coordinates of the first LED light source and the pixels at the position corresponding to the light source center coordinates of the second LED light source could be acquired for 32 frames. It is for determining whether or not.

When the counter is less than a predetermined threshold value (Yes in step S2235), the values of each color component of each LED light source are cumulatively added in step S2236. That is, for the first LED light source, the R component value (R0 value) is cumulatively added to sumR0, the G component value (G0 value) is cumulatively added to sumG0, and the B component value (B0 value) is cumulatively added to sumB0. to add. Further, for the second LED light source, the R component value (R1 value) is cumulatively added to sumR1, the G component value (G1 value) is cumulatively added to sumG1, and the B component value (B1 value) is cumulatively added to sumB1. to add.

In step S2236, the RGB values in each frame are cumulatively added, but it is also possible to add a weight to the RGB values to be added at the time of cumulative addition. For example, the weight can be increased as the RGB value of the most recent frame increases.

Next, in step S2237, the counter is incremented by 1.

When the counter is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (No in step S2235), that is, when it is determined that the cumulative addition of the RGB values for 32 frames is completed, the correction value (correction coefficient) is determined in step S2238. To do. Here, the correction value of each color component is determined based on the cumulatively added value of the G component.

For example, the correction value (wbSR0) for the R component of the first LED light source is obtained by sumR0 / sumG0, and the correction value (wbSB0) for the B component of the first LED light source is obtained by sumB0 / sumG0. Since the correction value (wbSG0) for the G component related to the first LED light source is based on the component, the reference value "1" is set.

Further, the correction value (wbSR1) for the R component of the second LED light source is obtained by sumR1 / sumG1, and the correction value (wbSB1) for the B component of the second LED light source is obtained by sumB1 / sumG1. Since the correction value (wbSG1) for the G component related to the second LED light source is based on the component, the reference value "1" is set.

In the present embodiment, the correction value is obtained individually for the first LED light source and the second LED light source, but the color components related to the first LED light source and the second LED light source are cumulatively added to obtain the first LED light source and the second LED light source. It is also possible to obtain a correction value common to the two LED light sources (correction value corresponding to each RGB component).

When each correction value is determined, in step S2239, the correction values (wbSR0, wbSB0, wbSG0) for each color component related to the first LED light source are stored in the SRAM 2443.

Next, in step S2240, the correction values (wbSR1, wbSB1, wbSG1) for each color component related to the second LED light source are stored in the SRAM 2443, and then the software white balance adjustment process is terminated.

By the white balance adjustment process including the hardware white balance adjustment process and the software white balance adjustment process, the first LED light source is subjected to two-step white balance adjustment. That is, the white balance is adjusted by applying the WB correction value to the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445 by the hardware white balance adjustment process, and then the first LED light source stored by the software white balance adjustment process is related. The white balance is adjusted using the correction values (wbSR0, wbSB0, wbSG0) for each color component.

For example, if the RGB values (R0, G0, B0) of the pixels corresponding to the light source center coordinates of the first LED light source are not applied with the WB correction value by the hardware white balance adjustment process, (185, 180, 179). ), The hardware white balance adjustment process adjusts to (179, 180, 181), and the software white balance adjustment process adjusts to (180, 180, 180). At this time, in the hardware white balance adjustment process and the software white balance adjustment process, the adjustment is performed based on the G component (G0), so that there is no change in the G component.

Further, the RGB values (R1, G1, B1) of the pixels corresponding to the light source center coordinates of the second LED light source become (185, 190, 188) after the WB correction value by the hardware white balance adjustment process is applied. If so, it is adjusted to (190, 190, 190) by the software white balance adjustment process. At this time, in the software white balance adjustment process, the adjustment is performed based on the G component (G0), so that there is no change in the G component.

The white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment has been described above, but such a configuration is only an example. The technical idea of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hardware white balance adjustment process and the software white balance adjustment process are configured to be adjusted based on the G component, but the hardware white balance adjustment process and the software white balance adjustment process are performed. It is also possible to set different reference color components with and. Further, in the software white balance adjustment process, the first LED light source and the second LED light source are both configured to be adjusted based on the G component, but the reference color component is different depending on the LED light source. It can also be set to.

Further, as described above, in the software white balance adjustment process, in order to absorb the adjustment time in the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445 and the occurrence of slight color unevenness due to the fluctuation of the LED control cycle (PWM cycle), 32 Although the correction value is obtained using the RGB values for the frames, the correction value may be obtained based on the RGB values based on the number of frames other than that and the image data captured in various periods.

Further, in the present embodiment, the YUV image data is thinned out by using the time filter in each of the hardware white balance adjustment process and the software white balance adjustment process, but such a time filter process is omitted. You can also.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the hardware white balance adjustment process and the software white balance adjustment process, an RGB Bayer image is generated from the acquired YUV image data and the RGB value is grasped. The processing procedure is just an example. The RGB value can be grasped by another method, and the white balance correction value can be obtained from the YUV image data itself or a component other than the RGB value.

In the hardware white balance adjustment process in the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment, the correction value is transmitted to the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445, and the correction value is repeatedly applied to the WB circuit to obtain an appropriate correction value. Therefore, when the hardware white balance adjustment process is completed, the application of the correction value to the WB circuit is completed. On the other hand, in the software balance adjustment process, the software white balance correction value is calculated and stored from the image data of a plurality of RGB bayer images, and the actual correction value is applied to the image data of the RGB bayer image. It is executed when the color judgment is performed from. For example, in the disappearance determination / light source re-search process of the present embodiment, the correction process due to temperature change, etc., which will be described later, the RGB values acquired based on the stored software white balance correction value when the color determination is performed. The correction is made.

<Color learning process>
Next, the color learning process of this embodiment will be described.

The color learning process of this embodiment is executed in the image sensor unit 2311 of the data display 2001 that captures images of two LED light sources (lamps 3305a and 3305b). When the game machine 3001 is started, the lamp control circuit 3306 is controlled by the sub-control unit 3302 of the game machine 3001, the lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit by the model identification pattern (FIG. 383), and the data display 2001 The image sensor unit 2311 (host controller 2441) starts the color learning process according to the lighting pattern.

As shown in FIG. 383, in the model identification pattern, as a first step, the lamp 3305a emits white light and the lamp 3305b emits white light for 10 seconds. After that, from the second step to the tenth step, a learning pattern in which the lamps 3305a and the lamps 3305b are lit in the same color other than white for 1 second in the order of specific emission colors continues. Further, after that, a model information pattern appears in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light for 1 second. Then, this model identification pattern is repeated (looped) until a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the game is started by the player or when a custom setting is made.

Further, when the start lever 6 is operated or a custom setting is made in the middle of the above-mentioned loop, the lamp 3305 continues to emit light until the end of the loop.

FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the flow of the color learning process of the present embodiment. In FIG. 393, the lamp control process in the sub-control unit 3302 of the game machine 3001 and the color learning process in the image sensor unit 2311 of the data display 2001 are shown in time series, respectively.

On the left side of FIG. 393, as described above, two LED light sources (lamp 3305a, lamp 3305b) are formed based on the model identification pattern including the learning pattern by the lamp control process in the sub-control unit 3302 of the game machine 3001. Lighting is controlled.

On the right side of FIG. 393, first, in step S2251, the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 executes the light source search process after starting the data display 2001. This light source search process is the light source search process in the present embodiment described above. In step S2252, it is determined whether or not a light source has been found by the light source search process, and if the light source is not found (No in step S2252), the light source search process is repeated. If the light source is not found for a predetermined time, the light source search process is terminated. Further, in such a case, in order to notify the video display unit 2305 or the like of the data display 2001 of an error indicating that fact, the corresponding error code may be transmitted to the control unit 2301.

As described above, in the hall, the power of the game machine and the peripheral device is usually turned on at the same time, and in that case, the initialization process of the peripheral device is completed first. Therefore, when the two LED light sources (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) first light up in the combination of (white and white) in the model identification pattern of the game machine 3001, a loop for the light source search process in the data display 2001. Is executed, and by controlling steps S2251 and S2252, the model identification pattern of the game machine 3001 can be recognized without being missed.

As a result of the light source search process, the center coordinates of the light sources for the two LED light sources are specified and stored in SRAM 2443. Further, here, the mask image data as shown in FIG. 390 (A) is also stored in the SRAM 2443.

When the light source center coordinates are specified (Yes in step S2252), in step S2253, the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 acquires the image data of the RGB bayer image and two LED light sources (lamp 3305a, lamp 3305b). It is determined whether or not the color in the center coordinates of the light source of is a combination of (white, white). Here, the above-mentioned mask image data can also be used to specify the position of the light source. Whether or not the color of the LED light source is white is determined based on the RGB value of the light source center coordinates in the image data of the RGB bayer image by generating an RGB bayer image from the acquired YUV image data. When the RGB values are a combination of predetermined values (values in a predetermined range), the color is determined to be white.

If the two LED light sources are not a combination of (white, white) (No in step S2253), this determination is repeated. In this iterative determination, in order to acquire the next frame, it waits until the VSYNC interrupt signal is received from the ISP circuit 2445 described above, and then it is determined whether or not the time filter is being performed, and the time filter is not being performed. When the determination is made, an RGB bayer image is generated from the acquired YUV image data, and based on the image data of the RGB bayer image, it is determined whether or not the color at the center coordinates of the light source is a combination of (white, white). ..

In the model identification pattern of the game machine 3001, the two LED light sources are turned on in a combination of (white and white) for a relatively long time such as 10 seconds, so actually two are determined in step S2253. It is unlikely that it will be determined that the LED light source is not a combination of (white, white) (of course, troubles such as light emission and poor control of the LED light source are possible), but even in such a case, this model identification Since the combination of (white, white) in the pattern appears shortly thereafter by the loop, it can again be determined that the two LED light sources are (white, white).

As described above, it is necessary to determine that the LED light source is emitting white light in the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311, but at this point, the white balance adjustment process has not yet been performed. Therefore, the host controller 2441 can read and use the correction value related to the hardware white balance adjustment and the correction value related to the software white balance adjustment stored in the flash memory 2444, if necessary.

Next, in step S2254, the exposure compensation process is performed by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311. In this exposure compensation processing, for example, in the image data (RGB bayer image data or HSV image data) obtained by imaging the LED light source, the data value corresponding to the light source center coordinates of the LED light source is within the preset brightness range. If there is no such data, or if the brightness exceeds the preset brightness range, the exposure time setting mechanism of the CMOS image sensor 2432 is controlled to set an appropriate exposure time. Generally, it corresponds to the shutter time of the camera. That is, if the shutter is open for a long time, the exposure is large, and if the shutter is open for a short time, the exposure is small.

Next, the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 executes the white balance adjustment process in step S2255. This process is the same as the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment described above. In the hardware white balance adjustment process, the WB correction value is applied to the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445 while receiving a plurality of frames, and the WB correction value is applied to the WB circuit until an appropriate WB correction value is obtained. Repeated. In the software white balance adjustment process, software white balance correction values (wbSR0, wbSB0, wbSG0, wbSR1, wbSB1, wbSG1) are calculated by receiving a plurality of frames, and these are stored in SRAM 2443.

The process from step S2251 to step S2255 described above is basically completed within the time (10 seconds) in which the two LED light sources are lit in the combination of (white and white) in the game machine 3001.

Next, the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 specifies the light source center coordinates of the two LED light sources using the above-mentioned mask image data, and the emission color at the light source center coordinates is other than the combination of (white, white). The color determination is repeated until the two LED light sources are lit in the same color, and when the two LED light sources are in a combination other than (white, white), the color learning process is started, and the color learning process (blue-green) is first executed. (Step S2256).

When the image data is acquired by imaging each frame, the ISP circuit 2445 uses the software white balance correction value (wbSR0) stored in the SRAM 2443 for the RGB bayer image which is the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2432. , WbSB0, wbSG0, wbSR1, wbSB1, wbSG1) (Note that the hardware white balance adjustment is appropriate for the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445 in the white balance adjustment process in step S2255 as described above. WB correction value is applied). Next, the image data of the RGB bayer image whose white balance has been adjusted is converted into image data (HSV image data) corresponding to the HSV color space, and the HSV image data is stored in the SRAM 2443.

Here, the color data (H component) of the HSV image data representing the hue is accumulated as the color data related to the "blue-green" color (for example, in SRAM 2443), and this process is repeated a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, color data is acquired for each of the two LED light sources, but here, both color data are accumulated. Since the two LED light sources emit light in a combination of (blue-green, blue-green) for one second, color data related to a plurality of frames can be accumulated during this period. At this time, the color data of each frame varies depending on the temperature rise of the image sensor, individual differences, individual differences of LEDs, installation environment, etc., but all the patterns of those color data are accumulated. For example, in the case of a "blue-green" color, the H component representing the hue is distributed from 170 ° to 184 ° around 174 °.

In the present embodiment, since the two LED light sources are lit in the combination of (white, white) and then lit in the combination of (blue-green, blue-green), another color is used in the center coordinates of the light source. When it is determined that the combination of the above has appeared, the color learning process is terminated.

As described above, when the light emission patterns of the two LED light sources do not match the learning pattern, or when the learning pattern is interrupted in the middle, the color learning process is terminated and the stored color data is discarded. Further, in such a case, in order to notify the video display unit 2305 or the like of the data display 2001 of an error indicating that fact, the corresponding error code may be transmitted to the control unit 2301.

The host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 repeats the above color learning process (blue-green) until the two LED light sources are lit in the same color other than the combination of (blue-green, blue-green), and the two LED light sources (blue-green) When a combination other than blue-green and blue-green) is used, the color learning process (peach) is started (step S2257).

Also here, when the image data is acquired by imaging each frame, the ISP circuit 2445 performs white balance adjustment processing by the software white balance correction value for the RGB Bayer image which is the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2432. I do. Next, the image data of the RGB bayer image whose white balance has been adjusted is converted into image data (HSV image data) corresponding to the HSV color space, and the HSV image data is stored in the SRAM 2443.

Here, the color data (H component) of the HSV image data representing the hue is accumulated as the color data related to the "peach" color (for example, in SRAM 2443), and this process is repeated a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, color data is acquired for each of the two LED light sources, but here, both color data are accumulated. Since the two LED light sources emit light in a combination of (peach, peach) for 1 second, color data related to a plurality of frames can be accumulated during this period. At this time, the color data of each frame varies depending on the temperature rise of the image sensor, individual differences, individual differences of LEDs, installation environment, etc., but all the patterns of those color data are accumulated. For example, in the case of "peach" color, the H component representing the hue is distributed from 322 ° to 336 ° around 332 °.

After that, similarly, the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 obtains color data for the LED light sources that change sequentially up to step S2264 on the premise that the emission colors of the two LED light sources transition based on the learning pattern. It is stored in association with the expected color.
Therefore, the host controller 2441 that discriminates the color of the LED light source that changes sequentially constitutes the emission color discriminating means.

In the game machine 3001, the two LED light sources whose lighting is controlled by the model identification pattern are lit in a combination of (blue and blue) for 1 second after emitting light based on the learning pattern. This is as described above. In addition, it corresponds to the model information pattern, and when the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 recognizes this pattern, it grasps that the game machine 3001 belongs to the manufacturer A, but this process is described in FIG. 393. It is omitted in the flowchart.

Here, when the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 determines that the two LED light sources are lit in the same color other than the combination of (red, red) (that is, when it is determined that the two LED light sources are lit in the combination of (blue, blue)). ), An interhue threshold for identifying the hue of each light emitting color is set based on the color data accumulated in steps S2256 to S2264 (step S2265).

In this process, a hue threshold for identifying the hue of each emission color, that is, a boundary with the emission color of the adjacent hue is determined and stored in SRAM 2443. For example, the "red" color, the "yellow" color, and the "yellow-green" color are positioned adjacent to each other as the values of the color data (H component of the HSV image data).

Here, for example, for the "red" color, when the color data of 6 ° to 14 ° is accumulated in the process of step S2264 and the value of the accumulated color data is 2 bits per 1 °, it is "red". Values of 12 (6 °) to 28 (14 °) are accumulated in the color data indicating the color. Further, regarding the "yellow" color, the color data of 28 ° to 34 ° is accumulated in the process of step S2262, and again, when the value of the accumulated color data is 2 bits per 1 °, the "yellow" color is obtained. As the color data indicating, values of 56 (28 °) to 68 (34 °) are accumulated. Then, when the average of the accumulated color data is calculated, the color data of the "red" color is 10 ° (20) and the color data of the "yellow" color is 32 ° (64), and the "red" color and the "yellow" are obtained. The threshold value of 21 ° for distinguishing colors should be "42", but as described above, the colors also vary depending on the temperature rise of the image sensor, individual differences, individual differences of LEDs, installation environment, and the like. As a result, for example, the value of 21 °, which is the threshold value of the “red” color and the “yellow” color of the accumulated color data, may be set to 40 instead of 42.

Further, as another method for obtaining the threshold value between hues, for example, for the "red" color, the color data of 6 ° to 14 ° is accumulated in the process of step S2264, and for the "yellow" color, the process of step S2262. Then, if the color data of 28 ° to 34 ° is accumulated and the color data of 60 ° to 68 ° is accumulated in the process of step S2260 for the "yellow-green" color, the "red" color and the "yellow" color are stored. The threshold for identification is between the upper limit of the "red" color data and the lower limit of the "yellow" color data, that is, 21 ° = (14 ° + (28 ° -14 °) / 2) can be set. Similarly, the threshold for distinguishing between the "yellow" color and the "yellow-green" color is between the upper limit of the "yellow" color data and the lower limit of the "yellow-green" color data, that is, 47 ° = (34 ° + (60 ° −34 °) / 2) can be set.

Such a method of obtaining the threshold value between hues is only an example, and can be set by various other methods. For example, when color data of 6 ° to 14 ° is accumulated for the "red" color, the threshold value is set to 6 ° to 14 ° according to the accumulated color data, and the same applies to the "yellow" color. In addition, it can be 28 ° to 34 °. Further, at this time, 15 ° to 27 ° can be treated as an error as no corresponding color.

Further, in this example, the concept of determining the emission color of the LED light source based on the H component (hue) of the HSV value has been described, but the determination by adding the S component (saturation) and the V component (brightness) of the HSV value has been described. Can also be done.

In this way, by the color learning process, it is possible to grasp how many colors are lit by the two LED light sources by the threshold value. Further, in the color learning process, since the learning pattern in which the two LED light sources are lit in the same color is used, the colors of the two LED light sources grasped by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 are also the same color. Depending on the quality of the LED parts and the characteristics of the CMOS image sensor 2432, the hues may not always be exactly the same. Therefore, in consideration of these circumstances, a threshold value can be set for each of the two LED light sources, and the color can be individually determined by the threshold value for each LED light source.

As described above, in the color learning process of the present embodiment, the light source search process, the exposure compensation process, and the white balance adjustment process are executed, so that the color of the LED light source can be determined with high accuracy.

Further, by the color learning process of the present embodiment, the data display 2001 can recognize the number of colors of the same light of the LED light source, and in the above-described 15th to 18th embodiments, the lamp 3305a The state of the game machine 3001 can be appropriately grasped by the combination (lighting pattern) of the light emitting color and the light emitting color of the lamp 3305b.

FIG. 394 shows in what color order the two LED light sources (lamps 3305a and lamps 3305b) are controlled to emit light based on the learning pattern described above. The circled numbers indicate the order of light emission control. Further, in FIG. 394, the emission color of the LED light source is represented in association with the so-called hue circle, and further, a hue value (HSV value H) corresponding to each emission color of the LED light source used in the present embodiment. Ingredients) are shown.

In the color wheel shown in FIG. 394, each emission color is arranged in the order of hue, and the two emission colors having a distance (as if they are located substantially opposite to each other) have a large difference in hue value due to the arrangement in the hue circle. It turns out that there is. Here, when each emission color is followed in the emission order (circle number 1 to circle number 8) based on the learning pattern, first, the emission color is "blue-green" (H component = 174 °), and then "peach". The color changes to (H component = 332 °) (circle number 1), and then changes from "peach" color (H component = 332 °) to "green" color (H component = 108 °) (circle number 2). .. Furthermore, the color changes from "green" color (H component = 108 °) to "red purple" color (H component = 284 °) (circle number 3), and then from "red purple" color (H component = 284 °). It changes to a "yellowish green" color (H component = 64 °) (circle number 4).

After that, similarly, the emission color of the LED light source based on the learning pattern repeats a transition such that the hue value has a large difference. That is, the following large differences in hue values are observed for the transitions of the emission colors in the learning pattern (in the present specification, the order of the transitions of the emission colors is based on "non-correlation". It is called "light emission"). However, since the hue value of each emission color actually detected may vary slightly from the above-mentioned representative value, the difference between the following hue values is an approximate number.
・ "Blue-green"color->"Peach" color ・ ・ ・ 158 ° (= 332 ° -174 °)
・ "Peach"color->"Green" color ・ ・ ・ 224 ° (= 332 ° -108 °)
・ "Green"color->"Red-purple" color ・ ・ ・ 176 ° (= 284 ° -108 °)
・ "Red-purple"color->"Yellow-green" color ・ ・ ・ 220 ° (= 284 ° -64 °)
・ "Yellow-green"color->"Purple" color ・ ・ ・ 188 ° (= 252 ° -64 °)
・ "Purple"color->"Yellow" color ・ ・ ・ 218 ° (= 252 ° -32 °)
・ "Yellow"color->"Blue" color ・ ・ ・ 178 ° (= 210 ° -32 °)
・ "Blue"color->"Red" color ・ ・ ・ 200 ° (= 210 ° -10 °)

Since the emission colors in such a learning pattern are to be sequentially transitioned to colors having completely different hues, it is possible to accurately capture the color change of the LED light source without overlooking it. On the contrary, when the emission color of the LED light source changes from a "red" color to a similar color such as "yellow", the change in the hue value is 22 ° (= 32 ° -10 °). In such a case, it may not be possible to grasp the change in the emission color of the LED light source.
The reason why it is not possible to grasp the change in emission color is that if the change in hue value is small, the color will be dragged due to afterimages, etc., and even though the color is actually changing, the change in the captured color data will change. The change is smaller than the change in hue value. Therefore, it becomes impossible to grasp the color change normally.

Further, in particular, the "blue-green" color for determining the start of the color learning process has a difference in hue value from the adjacent "green" color and the "blue" color, as can be seen from FIG. 394. Since it is larger than the color of, the "blue-green" color can be recognized reliably, and the color learning process can be started reliably and easily.

Here, when the spectral distributions related to the hues of the two LED light sources (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) in the present embodiment are obtained (not shown), for example, the "red" color is 6 ° to 14 ° centered on 10 °. The "yellow" color is distributed from 28 ° to 34 ° centered on 32 °, the "yellow-green" color is distributed from 60 ° to 68 ° centered on 64 °, and the "green" color is , 108 ° centered from 104 ° to 118 °, "blue-green" color distributed from 170 ° to 184 ° centered on 174 °, "blue" color distributed from 228 ° centered on 230 ° Distributed at 232 °, the "purple" color is distributed from 250 ° to 256 ° centered on 252 °, and the "reddish purple" color is distributed from 278 ° to 292 ° centered on 284 °, "peach". The colors are distributed from 322 ° to 336 ° around 332 °.

The hue distribution of such an LED light source indicates that in the color learning process described above, there is a possibility of accumulating hue data of hues corresponding to the distribution of each emitted color.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the change in the color of the LED light source is grasped based on the H component of the HSV value, but when the hue value changes significantly, the corresponding RGB Since the value also changes significantly, it is possible to effectively capture the color change when grasping the color change of the LED light source by the RGB value as in the case of the hue. Further, the setting of the distribution area and the threshold value when determining the emission color of the LED light source can be considered in the same manner as those based on the HSV value described above.

Further, in the color learning process of the present embodiment, the color data of the light source center coordinates is acquired and accumulated for the acquired frame at the emission time of 1 second for each emission color. Since the learning pattern may be executed not only immediately after the game machine 3001 is started but also under predetermined conditions, color data is accumulated based on the learning pattern executed a plurality of times in this way, and the accumulated colors are accumulated. A threshold for identifying the emission color can be set based on the data.

The color learning process of this embodiment has been described above, but such a configuration is only an example. The technical idea of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

<Disappearance judgment / light source re-search processing>
Next, the disappearance determination / light source re-search process of the present embodiment will be described.

In the disappearance determination / light source re-search process of the present embodiment, the disappearance determination process of determining whether or not the two LED light sources (lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b) are lit at the light source position (light source center coordinates) is repeatedly executed. Then, when the disappearance is determined at the light source position of the LED light source, the light source re-search process is executed.

395 and 396 are flowcharts showing the flow of the disappearance determination / light source re-search process of the present embodiment. This disappearance determination / light source re-search process is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 after the data display 2001 is started.

First, in step S2281, the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 determines whether or not the light source positions of the two LED light sources can be specified. This determination is made by determining whether or not the light source center coordinates representing the light source positions of the two LED light sources can be obtained from the SRAM 2443.

Based on the light source center coordinates acquired from SRAM 2443, the light source positions of the two LED light sources can be specified from the imaging data obtained by imaging the two light sources. The light source center coordinates are stored, for example, by the light source search process of the present embodiment described above. Further, if the mask image data is stored in the SRAM 2443, the light source positions of the two LED light sources can be specified by using the mask image data.

When it is determined that the light source center coordinates cannot be found and the light source positions for specifying the light source positions of the two LED light sources cannot be specified (No in step S2281), error processing is executed in step S2282. In this error processing, a corresponding error code is transmitted to the control unit 2301 in order to notify the video display unit 2305 or the like of the data display 2001 of an error indicating that fact. After that, the disappearance determination / light source re-search process is completed.

If it is determined that the position of the light source cannot be specified, the disappearance determination / light source re-search process can be repeated until the center coordinates of the light source can be obtained from SRAM 2443. It can also be configured to perform search processing.

When it is determined that the light source center coordinates are stored in the SRAM 2443 and the light source positions for specifying the light source positions of the two LED light sources cannot be specified (Yes in step S2281), the host controller 2441 is described above. It waits until the VSYNC interrupt signal is received from the ISP circuit 2445 (step S2283). Then, in step S2284, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S2284: Yes), the process returns to step S2283 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2284: No), the process proceeds to step S2285.

In step S2285, an RGB bayer image is generated. This process is a process of generating an RGB bayer image based on the YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2443 by the process of the ISP circuit 2445. The image data of the RGB Bayer image can be represented as a two-dimensional array of data (RGB values) corresponding to each pixel at the imaging position.

Next, the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 executes the RGB value adjustment process using the software white balance correction value in step S2286. This process is the image data of the RGB bayer image using the software white balance correction values (wbSR0, wbSB0, wbSG0, wbSR1, wbSB1, wbSG1) calculated by the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment and stored in the SRAM 2443. For each pixel (RGB value) of, correction processing related to software white balance adjustment is performed.

Regarding the hardware white balance adjustment, when the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment is performed, the WB correction value is repeatedly applied to the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445. For example, the image data in the ISP circuit 2445. At the time of acquisition, the optimum WB correction value is applied to the WB circuit.

The YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2443 by the processing of the ISP circuit 2445 is a correction value (correction value for hardware white balance adjustment) obtained by the previous white balance adjustment processing (white balance adjustment processing of the present embodiment). The hardware white balance was adjusted using the WB correction value).

Next, in step S2287, YUV image data is generated based on the RGB bayer image that has undergone software white balance correction.

Next, in step S2288, the brightness values (Y component) at the light source positions of the two LED light sources are acquired by using the acquired light source center coordinates. Basically, with respect to the two LED light sources, the light source center coordinates each refer to one pixel (one pixel in the YUV image data), but a plurality of pixels may be defined as the light source center coordinates, in which case. Is obtained as a brightness value such as an average value or a center value of a plurality of brightness values corresponding to the plurality of pixels. Here, in order to specify the coordinates of the center of the light source, it is also possible to perform a predetermined operation (for example, AND operation) using the mask image data.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the luminance value is not acquired from the YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2443 by the processing of the ISP circuit 2445, but is once converted into an RGB bayer image and then the software white balance adjustment is performed. After that, it is converted into YUV image data again and the brightness value is obtained. By such a procedure, it is possible to grasp the brightness value with higher accuracy.

When the luminance value is acquired, the luminance value and the frame difference are accumulated in the SRAM 2443 in step S2289. The frame difference is the current brightness value and the previous brightness value (the brightness value of the light source center coordinates related to the current frame and the brightness value of the light source center coordinates related to the previous frame). Both the brightness value and the frame difference are stored for each of the two LED light sources.

Next, in step S2290, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of luminance values have been accumulated. Here, since the brightness value and the number of frame differences are the same, the determination may be made based on the number of accumulated frame differences. Further, for example, the determination is made based on the relationship between the number of frame differences exceeding a predetermined value (absolute value) and the number of frame differences exceeding a predetermined value (absolute value). You can also do it.

When it is determined that the luminance values have not been accumulated by a predetermined number (No in step S2290), the process returns to step S2283 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, when it is determined that a predetermined number of luminance values are accumulated (Yes in step S2290), the unevenness of the frame difference is analyzed in step S2291. This analysis is performed separately for the two LED light sources.

In the process of step S2291, for example, for a predetermined number of accumulated frame differences, the number of frame differences (number of irregularities) which is a difference (absolute value) equal to or more than a threshold value at a predetermined time is obtained. For example, FIG. 397 shows the relationship between the change in the brightness of the LED light source with the passage of time and the timing of the frame (the timing at which the brightness value is acquired from the YUV image data). Note that FIG. 397 shows one of the two LED light sources.

Here, in the light emission control of the LED light source in the present embodiment, for example, the frequency (blinking cycle) is 110 Hz and the duty ratio is 50%. Therefore, it is assumed that lighting and extinguishing are repeated every 1/110 seconds (that is, lighting for 1/220 seconds and extinguishing for 1/220 seconds are repeated).

The CMOS image sensor 2432 in the present embodiment is, for example, a 440 fps CMOS image sensor, and the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor is thinned out in half by the processes of steps S2283 and S2284 described above, resulting in a result. , 220 fps YUV image data is generated, and it is assumed that the brightness value can be grasped at the timing of this frame.

Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (A), the brightness value of the LED light source that repeatedly turns on and off every 1/110 seconds is grasped at the frame timing (P0 to P17) every 1/220 seconds. Here, for example, at the timing P0, the luminance value when the LED light source is on is grasped, and at the timing P1, the luminance value when the LED light source is off is grasped, and at this time, the timing P0 The difference (frame difference) between the luminance value and the luminance value of the timing P1 is a large value (absolute value) such as 200 or more, and is subject to counting the number of irregularities. Similarly, the difference (frame difference) between the luminance value of the timing P1 and the luminance value of the timing P2 is a large value (absolute value) such as 200 or more, which is also a target for counting the number of irregularities.

After that, similarly, it is determined whether or not the absolute value of the difference in luminance value (frame difference) at the timing of adjacent frames is or more than a predetermined value (for example, 200), and if it is equal to or more than the predetermined value, it is determined. It is counted as the number of irregularities.

In FIG. 397 (B), the CMOS image sensor 2432 in the present embodiment is, for example, a CMOS image sensor of 440 fps, and the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor is 1/3 of the processing in steps S2283 and S2284 described above. As a result, YUV image data of about 146.7 fps is generated, and the brightness value can be grasped at the timing of this frame. Then, for the LED light source that repeats turning on and off every 1/110 seconds, the brightness value is grasped at the frame timing (Q0 to Q11) every 1 / about 146.7 (440/3) seconds. Here, for example, at the timing Q0, the luminance value when the LED light source is on is grasped, and at the timing Q1, the luminance value when the LED light source is off is grasped, and at this time, the timing Q0 The difference (frame difference) between the luminance value and the luminance value of the timing Q1 is a large value (absolute value) such as 200 or more, and is subject to counting the number of irregularities. However, the difference (frame difference) between the brightness value of the timing Q1 and the brightness value of the timing Q2 is 0 or a value close to 0 (absolute value), and is not subject to counting the number of irregularities. After that, the difference (frame difference) between the brightness value of the timing Q2 and the brightness value of the timing Q3 becomes a large value (absolute value) such as 200 or more, and the number of irregularities is counted.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 397 (B), as shown in FIG. 397 (A), the turning off and turning on of the LED light source are not counted every time, but nearly half of the turning off and turning on of the LED light source are counted. It will be counted.

Although the two examples of FIG. 397 are examples, it is possible to set various timings (frame timings) for acquiring the luminance value in the YUV image data with respect to the blinking cycle of the LED light source. Further, as shown in FIGS. 397 (A) and 397 (B), it is desirable that the acquisition timing (frame timing) of the luminance value is earlier than the blinking cycle (control cycle) of the LED light source, and the setting is made in this way. This makes it easier to grasp the on and off of the LED light source, and as a result, the off and on can be counted with higher accuracy.

Here, returning to FIG. 395, in step S2292, it is determined whether or not the counted unevenness number is larger than a predetermined threshold value. As described above, the number of irregularities does not always match the total number of times the LED light source is turned on and off. As described above, this threshold value can estimate the expected value of the number of unevenness to be counted to some extent based on the blinking cycle of the LED light source and the timing of acquiring the luminance value (frame timing) in the YUV image data. It can be set in an appropriate range. This determination is made individually for the two LED light sources.

When it is determined that the number of irregularities counted for the two LED light sources is larger than the predetermined threshold value (Yes in step S2292), it is determined in step S2293 that both of the two LED light sources can be grasped (lighting determination). After that, the process returns to step S2283 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal.

When any of the unevenness counts for the two LED light sources is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (No in step S2292), it is determined in step S2294 that at least one of the two LED light sources cannot be normally grasped. After that, the light source re-search process is executed. This light source re-search process is a process similar to the dense search process (FIG. 387) in the light source search process of the present embodiment.

FIG. 396 shows the light source re-search process in the disappearance determination / light source re-search process of the present embodiment. When the disappearance determination is made in step S2294 of FIG. 395, the host controller 2441 waits until the VSYNC interrupt signal is received from the ISP circuit 2445 described above (step S2301). Then, in step S2302, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S2302: Yes), the process returns to step S2301 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S2302: No), the process proceeds to step S2303.

In step S2303, grayscale image data is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring grayscale image data (for example, corresponding to the Y component) based on the YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2443 by the process of the ISP circuit 2445. The grayscale image data can be represented as a two-dimensional array of data corresponding to each pixel at the imaging position. The image sensor unit 2311 of the present embodiment provides, for example, grayscale image data captured at 640 × 480 pixels.

Next, in step S2304, the light source region is set based on the light source center coordinates representing the light source positions of the two LED light sources acquired from the SRAM 2443 in the determination of step S2281 (FIG. 395). The light source region is a region of a predetermined size including the coordinates of the center of the light source, and can be, for example, 140 × 100 pixels as in the dense search process in the light source search process of the present embodiment. Here, the light source center coordinates specified by the light source search process of the present embodiment are used, but once the light source center coordinates are specified by the light source research process, the light source center coordinates are used. ..

Next, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to partially cut out the area of the corresponding coordinates from the acquired grayscale image data based on the above light source area, and generate the cutout image data ( Step S2305).

Next, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 in step S2306, and performs an average image data generation process on the cutout image data generated in step S2305. This average image data generation process is a process of generating the current average image data from the average image data generated based on the cutout image data input up to the previous time and the cutout image data input this time. The generation of such average image data is the same as the dense search process in the light source search process of the present embodiment.

Next, in step S2307, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the difference image data generation process. The difference image data generation process is a process of calculating the difference between the cropped image data and the average image data for each pixel at the same position and obtaining the difference image data. The generation of such difference image data is also the same as the dense search process in the light source search process of the present embodiment.

Next, in step S2308, the host controller 2441 instructs the DSP circuit 2442 to perform the cumulative value calculation process. In the cumulative value calculation process, when the value related to the pixel having a value other than "0" in the difference image data satisfies a predetermined condition, "1" is added to the pixel at the corresponding position for a certain period of time. Is a process of obtaining as cumulative image data. Such a cumulative value calculation process is also the same as the dense search process in the light source search process of the present embodiment.

When the cumulative image data is obtained in step S2308, the host controller 2441 performs the light source identification process in step S2309. The light source identification process is an area having an area of a certain area or more based on the cumulative image data, and the total of the cumulative values (values arranged in the pixels of the area in the cumulative image data) is the maximum value. , And the region with the next largest value are regarded as LED light sources, respectively. Such a light source identification process is also the same as the dense search process in the light source search process of the present embodiment.

The cumulative image data is a two-dimensional array of 140 × 100 pixels, like the cropped image data, and the coordinates of the specified light source center are relative coordinates. Therefore, based on the coordinates of the center of these light sources and the positional relationship when the cropped image data is cropped based on the light source region, the light source re-searches the coordinates indicating the position in the grayscale image data (that is, in the captured image). Obtained as the center coordinates of the light source by.

Next, in step S2310, it is determined whether or not the light source has been specified by the light source re-search. When the light source is specified (step S2310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2312.

When the light source is not specified (step S2310: No), it is determined in step S2311 whether or not it is within the set time. In the present embodiment, the set time is, for example, a period longer than the number of grayscale image data that can be re-searched for the light source can be acquired. If it is within the set time (step S2311: Yes), the process returns to step S2301 and waits for the generation of the VSYNC interrupt signal. If it is not within the monitoring time (step S2311: No), the initialization process and the synchronization shift correction process are performed (step S2312), and the process returns to step S2301 to repeat the light source re-search. In this case, the initialization process is, for example, a process of clearing the average image data, the difference image data, and the cumulative image data. The synchronization shift correction process is, for example, a process of adjusting a time filter or the like so that grayscale image data captured at a timing (cycle) different from the conventional one can be acquired.

When the light source is specified (step S2310: Yes), in step S2313, the light source center coordinates specified in step S2309 are the original light source center coordinates (light source center coordinates used in step S2304) for each of the two LED light sources. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not there is a deviation of at least 6 pixels or more in either the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) or the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). If there is no deviation of 6 pixels or more for each of the two LED light sources (Yes in step S2313), it is determined that the re-search is successful, and the process proceeds to step S2314.

In step S2314, mask image data is generated from the cumulative image data. In the mask image data, since the light source center coordinates are specified by the coordinates of one pixel for each of the LED light sources, the pixels of the two light source center coordinates are set to "1", and the other pixels are set to "0". In addition, each LED light source can be specified as the coordinates of a plurality of pixels.

Further, it is also possible to perform the pixel loss correction process as in the dense search process in the light source search process of the present embodiment.

Next, in step S2315, the host controller 2441 stores the generated new mask image data and the coordinates of the specified new LED light source (light source center coordinates) in, for example, SRAM 2443, and starts the disappearance determination again. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S2281 (FIG. 395).

If there is a deviation of 6 pixels or more for each of the two LED light sources (No in step S2313), it is determined that the re-search has failed, the process proceeds to step S2312, initialization, etc. are performed, and then the light source is re-searched again. Execute the process.

In the light source re-search process of the present embodiment, as described above, after it is determined that the LED light source has disappeared, the newly obtained light source center coordinates deviate within 5 pixels from the light source center coordinates specified so far. If there is, the configuration is such that the newly obtained light source center coordinates are used in the color determination of the LED light source, but the standard of "5 pixels" is an example for determining that the fluctuation is slight. Not too much, various other values can be set.

Although the disappearance determination / light source re-search process of the present embodiment has been described above, such a configuration is only an example. The technical idea of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

<Correction processing due to temperature change>
Next, the correction process due to the temperature change of the present embodiment will be described.

The correction process due to the temperature change of the present embodiment is executed at the start-up of the data display 2001 in the image sensor unit 2311 of the data display 2001 that images the two LED light sources (lamps 3305a and 3305b). In the temperature change correction process of the present embodiment, when a fluctuation of the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 is detected after a certain period of time has passed since the data display 2001 was started, the exposure compensation process is performed. Perform white balance adjustment processing.

FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the flow of the correction process due to the temperature change of the present embodiment.

First, in step S2321, the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 is detected. As described above, the temperature sensor 2432a is provided inside the CMOS image sensor 2432, and the detection output by the temperature sensor 2432a is provided to the host controller 2441 via, for example, the ISI circuit 2451, and the host controller 2441 Can grasp the temperature in the CMOS image sensor 2432 based on the detection output by the temperature sensor 2432a. It is preferable that the temperature sensor 2432a is arranged near the lens in the CMOS image sensor 2432, and can detect a temperature that can be estimated as the temperature of the lens, but what if it is inside the image sensor unit 2311? It may be installed in various places.

When the temperature is detected, the reference temperature is compared with the detected temperature in step S2322. Here, the reference temperature is set to a predetermined reference temperature initial value stored in the flash memory 2444 when the correction process due to the temperature change is started, and then the exposure compensation process and the white balance adjustment process are executed. , As will be described later with respect to step S2329, the detected temperature at that time is stored in the SRAM 2443 as a reference temperature.

Next, in step S2323, it is determined whether or not the comparison result of step S2322 has an absolute value of 3 ° C. or more and 60 seconds or more have passed since the start of the correction process due to the temperature change. If any of the conditions is not satisfied (No in step S2323), the process returns to step S2321 and the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 is detected after a lapse of a predetermined time. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not color correction is performed depending on whether or not the temperature change is 3 ° C. or higher, but other various temperature-related conditions can be set.

If the comparison result in step S2322 exceeds 3 ° C. in absolute value and 60 seconds have passed since the start of the correction process due to the temperature change (Yes in step S2323), the process proceeds to step S2324, where the light source re-search process is performed. Do. This light source re-search process is the light source re-search process (see FIG. 396) of the disappearance determination / light source re-search process of the present embodiment described above, and is the light source of the LED light source based on the light source position stored in the SRAM 2443. Specify the position (light source center coordinates).

However, in the light source re-search process called in the correction process due to temperature change, when the light source center coordinates of the specified 2 LED light sources do not deviate by 6 pixels or more from the original light source center coordinates (re-search is successful). ), The specified light source center coordinates are stored in the SRAM 2443 to end the process, and if the light source center coordinates of the LED light source 2 are not specified, the process ends as it is.

Next, in step S2325, it is determined whether or not the two LED light sources are specified by the light source re-search process in step S2324. If the two LED light sources are not specified (No in step S2325), the process returns to step S2321 and the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 is detected after a lapse of a predetermined time. When two LED light sources are specified (Yes in step S2325), in step S2326, it is determined whether or not the colors of the two LED light sources are a combination of (white, white).

Whether or not the color of the LED light source is white is determined based on the RGB value of the light source center coordinates in the image data of the RGB bayer image by generating an RGB bayer image from the acquired YUV image data. When the RGB values are a combination of predetermined values (values in a predetermined range), the color is determined to be white. Here, in order to specify the coordinates of the center of the light source, it is also possible to perform a predetermined operation (for example, AND operation) using the mask image data.

When it is determined that at least one of the two LED light sources is not white (No in step S2326), the process returns to step S2321 and the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 is detected after a lapse of a predetermined time.

When it is determined that both of the two LED light sources are white (Yes in step S2326), the exposure compensation process is performed in step S2327. This exposure compensation process is the same process as the exposure compensation process (see FIG. 393) of the color learning process of the present embodiment described above, and corresponds to, for example, the light source center coordinates of the LED light source in the RGB bayer image data. When the RGB value is not within the preset brightness range or exceeds the preset brightness range, an appropriate exposure time is set for the exposure time setting mechanism of the CMOS image sensor 2432. Control to do.

Next, the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 executes the RGB value adjustment process using the software white balance correction value in step S2328. This process is the image data of the RGB bayer image using the software white balance correction values (wbSR0, wbSB0, wbSG0, wbSR1, wbSB1, wbSG1) calculated by the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment and stored in the SRAM 2443. For each pixel (RGB value) of, correction processing related to software white balance adjustment is performed.

Regarding the hardware white balance adjustment, when the white balance adjustment process of the present embodiment is performed, the WB correction value is repeatedly applied to the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445. For example, the image data in the ISP circuit 2445. At the time of acquisition, the optimum WB correction value is applied to the WB circuit.

Next, in step S2329, the temperature related to the CMOS image sensor 2432 detected in step S2321 is stored in the SRAM 2443 as a reference temperature. Then, the process returns to step S2321, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 is detected. In the example of the temperature change correction process shown in FIG. 398, the temperature change correction process is repeated at a predetermined timing, but the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311 performs the temperature change correction process at predetermined intervals. May be executed.

FIG. 399 illustrates how the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 changes after the data display 2001 is started. As shown in the figure, the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 fluctuates greatly for about 60 seconds after the start of the data display 2001, and then gradually stabilizes. In the correction process due to temperature change of the present embodiment, in consideration of such characteristics of the CMOS image sensor 2432, it is controlled so that the correction process due to temperature change is not performed 60 seconds before the start of the correction process due to temperature change. doing. Since the correction process due to the temperature change is executed immediately after the start of the data display 2001 by the host controller 2441 of the image sensor unit 2311, the data can be determined by determining 60 seconds after the start of the correction process due to the temperature change. It is controlled so that the correction process due to the temperature change is not performed 60 seconds before the start of the display 2001.

In the present embodiment, the correction process due to the temperature change is not performed 60 seconds before the start of the correction process due to the temperature change, but other timings for not performing the correction process due to the temperature change are set. It may be set.

FIG. 400 illustrates the relationship between temperature and RGB values in the CMOS image sensor 2432. In FIG. 400, when the LED light source emits light of the same color, the RGB value grasped by the CMOS image sensor 2432 is obtained along with the change in the temperature of the CMOS image sensor 2432 (for example, the temperature in the die of the CMOS image sensor 2432). Is shown to be changing.

In the correction process due to the temperature change of the present embodiment, it can be estimated that the temperature (for example, in particular, the lens of the CMOS image sensor 2432, etc.) may be such a temperature in consideration of the characteristics of the CMOS image sensor 2432. The exposure compensation process and the white balance adjustment process are performed so as to absorb the change in the RGB value according to the change in the temperature).

Although the correction process due to the temperature change of the present embodiment has been described above, such a configuration is only an example. The technical idea of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

It should be noted that the optical receiver according to the embodiment of the present invention basically has the following features and effects, as an additional note.

[Appendix I-1]
[Background technology]
Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. Such a data display displays game information such as the number of hits of bonus games, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals won during the hit game state, and the effect is based on the game information. It is configured to be possible.

Further, this data display device is configured to receive information from the game machine, and displays and produces game information based on the information from the game machine. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device.

Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-209747 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

In a game machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the information transmitted by the game machine is small and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device. A configuration that provides information to LEDs has been proposed.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting used in the store lighting and the production of the adjacent game machine becomes ambient light, and the communication is performed. Accuracy is reduced. Furthermore, the installation positions of the game machine and the stand display often differ depending on the layout of the game store and the installation company.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and when information is provided from a game machine to a data display using an optical signal, the information can be easily and efficiently received. An object of the present invention is to provide an optical receiver (data display).

A further object of the present invention is to provide an optical receiver (data display) capable of shortening the processing time without degrading the accuracy when receiving information using an optical signal. And.

Further, an object of the present invention is to provide an optical receiver (data display) capable of reducing the load on hardware resources without degrading the accuracy when receiving information using an optical signal. The purpose is to provide.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following optical receivers.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical receiver (for example, data display 2001 or image sensor unit 2311) that receives an optical signal from an optical transmitter (for example, a game machine 3001).
The light transmission device has light emission control means (for example, sub-control unit 3302, lamp control circuit 3306, etc.) for controlling light emission.
The optical receiver is
Optical signal receiving means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432, ISI circuit 2451, ISP circuit 2445) that receives an optical signal from the optical transmitter and converts it into image data (for example, image data of an RGB Bayer image).
It has a light emitting position specifying means (for example, a host controller 2441, an ISP circuit 2445, a DSP circuit 2442) for specifying a light emitting position of the light transmitting device based on the image data.
The light emitting position specifying means
Luminance image conversion means (for example, ISP circuit 2445) that converts the image data into luminance image data (for example, YUV image data (grayscale image data)), and
An image accuracy conversion means (for example, DSP circuit 2442) that converts the image accuracy of the brightness image data into low-precision image data (for example, reduced image data in which the vertical and horizontal sizes of the gray scale image data are 1/4 each). )When,
Based on the low-precision image data, the first coordinate in the brightness image data (for example, in the cumulative image data, the coordinates of the region where the total cumulative value is the largest and the coordinates of the region next to the largest (coordinates of the pixel region). )) With the first coordinate specifying means (for example, host controller 2441)
An image acquisition means (for example, a host controller 2441) that acquires predetermined image area data (for example, a light source area) from the luminance image data with reference to the first coordinates.
It is configured to have a second coordinate specifying means (for example, a host controller 2441) for specifying a second coordinate (for example, a light source center coordinate) in the luminance image data from the predetermined image area data and the first coordinate. Will be done.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when receiving information provided by using an optical signal or the like emitted by an LED, the information can be easily and efficiently received. Further, in the present invention, after the approximate light source position is specified using the reduced image data, the position of the light source such as the LED light source is specified in order to perform detailed search processing for the image area around the specified light source position. When doing so, the processing time can be shortened without degrading the accuracy, and the load on the hardware resources such as the host controller and the memory can be reduced.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Reference coordinates are set for the luminance image data, and
The light emitting position specifying means is configured to specify the first coordinate based on the reference coordinate when a plurality of candidates exist as the first coordinate.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the approximate light source position is specified by using the reduced image data, the preset position can be used as a reference, so that the processing time can be shortened and the hardware can be used. It is possible to reduce the load on resources.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
The reference coordinates are set at a substantially center position on the horizontal axis of the luminance image data and at an arbitrary distance from the center of the vertical axis.
When a plurality of candidates exist as the first coordinates, the light emitting position specifying means is configured to specify the coordinates closest to the reference coordinates as the first coordinates.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the approximate light source position is specified by using the reduced image data, the preset position can be used as a reference, so that the processing time can be shortened and the hardware can be used. It is possible to reduce the load on resources.
"Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, when information is provided from a game machine to a data display using an optical signal, the information can be easily and efficiently received. Further, when information is received using an optical signal, the processing time can be shortened without degrading the accuracy of the specified light source position, and the load on the hardware resources can be reduced.

Since the actual LED blinks at a speed that is invisible to the human eye, when trying to identify the light source by searching all the captured images, due to hardware resources such as the host controller (CPU) and memory, , Each process may exceed the time of the frame interval. Therefore, in the present invention, first, as a sparse search, the light source position of the LED light source is specified by lowering the resolution, and then, as a dense search, only the image area related to the specified light source position is searched from the high resolution image. Cut out and search to identify the position of the light source with high accuracy. With such a configuration of the present invention, in the process of specifying the light source position, the processing time can be shortened and the load on the hardware resource can be reduced without deteriorating the accuracy of the light source position.

[Appendix I-2]
[Background technology]
Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. Such a data display displays game information such as the number of hits of bonus games, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals won during the hit game state, and the effect is based on the game information. It is configured to be possible.

Further, this data display device is configured to receive information from the game machine, and displays and produces game information based on the information from the game machine. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device.

Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-209747 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

In a game machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the information transmitted by the game machine is small and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device. A configuration that provides information to LEDs has been proposed.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting used in the store lighting and the production of the adjacent game machine becomes ambient light, and the communication is performed. Accuracy is reduced. Furthermore, when using multiple LEDs, there are individual differences even if they are the same LED, and the image sensor on the receiving side may not always be able to input light of the same color in a constant state due to temperature changes or the like. Absent.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to input image data in which color development is stable by absorbing changes in the characteristics of an image sensor due to individual differences in LEDs on the light emitting side and changes in temperature. An object of the present invention is to provide an optical receiver (data display).
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following optical receivers.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical receiver (for example, data display 2001 or image sensor unit 2311) that receives an optical signal from an optical transmitter (for example, a game machine 3001).
The optical receiver is
Hardware white balance means (for example, the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445), which is a white balance circuit capable of adjusting the white balance when receiving an optical signal from the optical transmitter,
An optical input means (for example, ISP circuit 2445) that receives an optical signal from the optical transmitter and converts it into image data (for example, an RGB bayer image) adjusted by the hardware white balance means.
It has an adjustment control means (for example, a host controller 2441) capable of controlling the hardware white balance means.
The adjustment control means
Hardware white balance adjusting means for adjusting the white balance of the hardware white balance means (for example, in the host controller 2441, a processing means for obtaining WB correction values and transmitting them to the WB circuit (for example, step 391 in FIG. 391). S220-step S2223)) and
Software white balance adjusting means for adjusting the white balance of the image data (for example, in the host controller 2441, a processing means for obtaining an optimum correction value based on the cumulative value of each RGB value (steps S2231 to FIG. 392). Step S2240)) and
The unit data of the image data (for example, each pixel of the image data of the RGB bayer image) is composed of three primary colors (RGB).
The hardware white balance adjusting means is
Hardware for adjusting the second primary color based on the first primary color (for example, G (green)) of the three primary colors of the image data Hardware for adjusting the first primary color and hardware for adjusting the third primary color The white balance of the hardware white balance means is adjusted by obtaining the second wear adjustment value.
The software white balance adjusting means is
Software second adjustment value (for example, wbSR0, wbSR1) for adjusting the second primary color based on the first primary color (for example, G (green)) among the three primary colors of the image data, and , The software third adjustment value (for example, wbSB0, wbSB1) for adjusting the third primary color is calculated, and the software first adjustment value (for example, wbSG0, wbSG1) is used to maintain the first primary color. It is configured to set a reference value (for example, "1").

With such a configuration of the present invention, the white balance is adjusted in the white balance circuit by obtaining the hardware adjustment value based on the first primary color, and further, the software adjustment value is performed based on the first primary color. Since it is possible to perform software-like white balance adjustment by obtaining the above, appropriate white balance adjustment is performed by absorbing individual differences in the LED on the light emitting side and changes in the characteristics of the image sensor due to temperature changes, and color development is performed. Can input stable image data.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
White using the software first adjustment value, the software second adjustment value, and the software third adjustment value for each unit data of the image data adjusted by the hardware white balance adjusting means. It is configured to adjust the balance.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the white balance is adjusted in the white balance circuit by obtaining the hardware adjustment value based on the first primary color, and further, the software adjustment value is performed based on the first primary color. Since it is possible to perform software-like white balance adjustment by obtaining the above, the appropriate white balance adjustment is performed by absorbing the individual difference of the LED on the light emitting side and the characteristic change of the image sensor due to the temperature change, and the color is developed. Can input stable image data.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to input image data in which appropriate white balance adjustment is performed by absorbing individual differences in LEDs on the light emitting side and changes in the characteristics of the image sensor due to temperature changes, and stable color development is performed.

[Appendix I-3]
[Background technology]
Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. Such a data display displays game information such as the number of hits of bonus games, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals won during the hit game state, and the effect is based on the game information. It is configured to be possible.

Further, this data display device is configured to receive information from the game machine, and displays and produces game information based on the information from the game machine. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device.

Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-209747 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

In a game machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the information transmitted by the game machine is small and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device. A configuration that provides information to LEDs has been proposed.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting used in the store lighting and the production of the adjacent game machine becomes ambient light, and the communication is performed. Accuracy is reduced. Furthermore, when many colors are used and each of the many colors is meaningful, color identification is important. However, depending on the temperature rise of the image sensor, individual differences, individual differences of LEDs, installation environment, etc., for example, Even if it is the same red, colors may be entered with different numerical values, and similar colors may be mistaken.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and accurately identifies colors by eliminating the effects of temperature rise and individual differences of image sensors, individual differences of LEDs, installation environment, and the like. It is an object of the present invention to provide an optical receiver (data display) capable of performing.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following optical receivers.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical receiver (for example, data display 2001 or image sensor unit 2311) that receives an optical signal from an optical transmitter (for example, a game machine 3001).
The optical receiver is
An optical signal receiving means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) that receives an optical signal from the optical transmitter and converts it into image data.
It has an interhue threshold setting means (for example, a host controller 2441) that sets an interhue threshold for identifying a plurality of hues based on the image data.
The interhue threshold setting means
As the first step, the reception adjustment of the optical signal receiving means is performed with the reception of the first specific color (for example, the combination of the light emission of the two LED light sources (white and white)).
As the second step, when the second specific color (for example, the emission of two LED light sources is a combination of (blue-green, blue-green)) is received, the inter-hue threshold including the second specific color is set. Started accumulating color data for
As a third step, a plurality of specific colors to be received in a predetermined order are received, and the color data of the received specific colors is accumulated.
As a fourth step, after receiving the specific colors in a predetermined order, the third specific color (for example, a combination of (red, red) emitted by two LED light sources) is received, and the above-mentioned After accumulating the color data of the third specific color, it is configured to set a plurality of interhue thresholds from all the accumulated color data.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the two LED light sources emit colors in a predetermined order, and an interhue threshold for identifying hues can be effectively set according to the order. As a result, it is possible to accurately identify the color by eliminating the influence of the temperature rise and individual difference of the image sensor, the individual difference of the LED, the installation environment, and the like.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The optical signal receiving means is an image sensor (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432).
A white balance adjusting means (for example, the WB circuit of the ISP circuit 2445) for adjusting the white balance of the image data output from the image sensor is further provided.
The reception adjustment executed in the first step is configured to be a white balance adjustment by the white balance adjusting means.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the interhue threshold value is set, the white balance is adjusted at a predetermined timing, so that the color data acquired by the image sensor can be determined more accurately. Allows for more accurate color identification.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to accurately identify colors by eliminating the influence of temperature rise and individual difference of the image sensor, individual difference of LED, installation environment and the like.

[Appendix I-4]
[Background technology]
Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. Such a data display displays game information such as the number of hits of bonus games, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals won during the hit game state, and the effect is based on the game information. It is configured to be possible.

Further, this data display device is configured to receive information from the game machine, and displays and produces game information based on the information from the game machine. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device.

Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-209747 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

In a game machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the information transmitted by the game machine is small and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device. A configuration that provides information to LEDs has been proposed.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting used in the store lighting and the production of the adjacent game machine becomes ambient light, and the communication is performed. Accuracy is reduced. In addition, the installation positions of the game machine and the table display (data display) may be displaced by opening and closing the front door of the game machine and by the player touching the table display (data display).

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and when the position of a game machine or an optical receiver (data display) is displaced, the position of the gaming machine or the optical receiver (data display) is automatically adjusted to the displacement, and the optical signal An object of the present invention is to provide an optical receiving device capable of maintaining reception accuracy.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following optical receivers.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical receiver (for example, data display 2001 or image sensor unit 2311) that receives an optical signal from an optical transmitter (for example, a game machine 3001).
The optical receiver is
An optical signal receiving means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432, ISP circuit 2445) that receives an optical signal from the optical transmitter and converts it into image data (for example, YUV image data).
A light emission specifying determination means for determining whether or not the light emission position of the optical signal of the optical transmission device can be specified based on the image data (for example, a host controller 2441 that determines the number of irregularities based on the accumulated difference between frames). )When,
It has a light emitting position specifying means (for example, a host controller 2441) for specifying a light emitting position of the light transmitting device when it is determined that the light emitting position cannot be specified by the light emitting specifying determination means.
The emission identification determination means extracts brightness data from the image data, determines whether the emission position can be specified based on the accumulated data accumulated over the extracted brightness data over a plurality of frames, and determines whether the emission position can be specified.
When the light emitting position of the light transmitting device is specified by the light emitting position specifying means, the light emitting position of the light transmitting device specified in advance and the specified light emitting position are within a predetermined range (for example, within 5 pixels). If there is, the specified light emitting position is configured to be a new light emitting position of the light transmitting device.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the position of the game machine or the optical receiver (data display) shifts, the position shift can be automatically dealt with and the reception accuracy of the optical signal can be maintained.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The accumulation of the luminance data of the light emission specifying determination means is the accumulation of the image data received at a frame rate earlier than the control cycle when the optical transmission device emits an optical signal.
When the optical transmitter emits light, it is repeatedly turned on and off at a ratio according to the brightness based on the control cycle.
The optical signal receiving means can receive the repetition of turning on and off, and can receive the repetition of turning on and off.
As the accumulated data, the brightness data corresponding to the repetition of turning on and off is accumulated, and the luminance data is accumulated.
The light emitting position specifying means is configured to determine that the light emitting position can be specified if the on / off repetition is repeated a predetermined number of times or more, and that the light emitting position cannot be specified if the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times. Will be done.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the position of the game machine or the optical receiving device (data display) is deviated, it is possible to automatically cope with the misalignment and maintain the reception accuracy of the optical signal.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, when the position of the game machine or the optical receiving device (data display) is displaced, the displacement can be automatically dealt with and the reception accuracy of the optical signal can be maintained.

[Appendix I-5]
[Background technology]
Various gaming devices are connected to the conventional gaming machine, and control is performed based on the information transmitted from the gaming machine. For example, a game display device (so-called data display) that displays statistical information such as game results can be connected to the game machine. Such a data display displays game information such as the number of hits of bonus games, the number of games since the end of the previous hit game state, and the number of medals won during the hit game state, and the effect is based on the game information. It is configured to be possible.

Further, this data display device is configured to receive information from the game machine, and displays and produces game information based on the information from the game machine. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a stand display that is installed in a game machine, receives jackpot information from the game machine, and displays the received information on a liquid crystal display device.

Further, Patent Document 2 discloses a non-contact communication device that converts a transmission signal into an optical signal to emit light, receives the emitted optical signal, and outputs a reception signal.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-087321 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-209747 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

In a game machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the information transmitted by the game machine is small and it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to perform various effects with the liquid crystal display device. A configuration that provides information to LEDs has been proposed.

Further, in the case of non-contact communication as in Patent Document 2, in the game store where the game machine and the stand display are installed, the lighting used in the store lighting and the production of the adjacent game machine becomes ambient light, and the communication is performed. Accuracy is reduced. In addition, when many LED colors are used and each of the many colors is meaningful, color identification is important. However, depending on the temperature rise and individual difference of the image sensor, individual difference of LED, installation environment, etc., for example. , Even if it is the same red, you may enter a color with a different numerical value, and you may misunderstand a similar color.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and maintains the state before the change even if the image sensor characteristics change with the temperature change or the shape of the lens of the image sensor changes. It is an object of the present invention to provide an optical receiver capable of providing a capable optical receiver.
[Means to solve problems]

The present invention provides the following optical receivers.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An optical receiver (for example, data display 2001 or image sensor unit 2311) that receives an optical signal from an optical transmitter (for example, a game machine 3001).
The optical receiver is
A temperature measuring means (for example, temperature sensor 2432a, host controller 2441) for measuring the temperature inside the optical receiver, and
An optical signal receiving means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432, ISP circuit 2445) that receives an optical signal from the optical transmitter and converts it into image data (for example, image data of an RGB Bayer image).
A light emitting position specifying means (for example, CMOS image sensor 2432) for specifying a light emitting position of the light transmitting device based on the image data, and
An exposure time adjusting means for adjusting the exposure time of the optical signal receiving means (for example, an exposure time setting mechanism of the CMOS image sensor 2432, a host controller 2441).
A white balance adjusting means (for example, a host controller 2441) that adjusts the white balance of the image data from the optical signal receiving means, and
The light emitting position specifying means has a light emitting color discriminating means (for example, a host controller 2441) for discriminating the light emitting color of the specified light emitting position.
The optical receiver is
When the temperature change is determined by the temperature measuring means to be a predetermined temperature or higher (for example, 3 ° C. or higher), the light emitting color discriminating means has a specific light emitting color at the light emitting position specified by the light emitting position specifying means. (For example, when it is determined that the two LED light sources are a combination of (white and white)), the exposure time is adjusted by the exposure time adjusting means and the white balance is adjusted by the white balance adjusting means. It is composed.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if an image sensor characteristic that changes with a temperature change or a shape change of the lens of the image sensor occurs, the exposure time and white balance are adjusted, and the color can be accurately grasped. Can be done.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The optical receiver is
Even if the temperature change by the temperature measuring means is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature, when a predetermined time has not elapsed after starting the optical receiver (for example, 60 seconds after starting the data display 2001). Within), the exposure time is not adjusted and the white balance is not adjusted.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if an image sensor characteristic that changes with a temperature change or a shape change of the lens of the image sensor occurs, the exposure time and white balance are adjusted, and the color can be accurately grasped. Can be done.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, even if the image sensor characteristics change with temperature change or the shape of the lens of the image sensor changes, the exposure time and white balance are adjusted, and the color can be accurately grasped.

1 Pachislot machine 3L, 3C, 3R reel 4 Display window 7L, 7C, 7R Stop button 71 Main control board 72 Sub control board 100 Display unit 147b Status display 1001 Game display device 1002 Game machine 1002a Pachinko game machine 1002b Pachislot machine 1003 Game medium lending device 1003a Game ball lending device 1003b Medal lending device 1010 Housing 1011A, 1011D Screen unit 1110A, 1110D screen (projected part)
1100 Incident surface (light guide)
1101 Display surface (display unit)
1012 Projector body (projection means)
1013 Reflector 1014 Operation unit 1070 Board 1071 Light emitting element (LED)
1072 Diffuse reflection part 1073 Light-shielding member G1 Game device G101 Base G61a Aperture G61 Light guide plate G61b Aperture side end face G60A LED
G61d Reflector G60 LED board G60e, G61e Alignment part G101e Alignment member F1 Gaming device F1021b Translucent part F1021 Exterior panel F1021a Touch area F1022 Touch sensor F1024 LED array F1023 Light guide plate F10250 Control unit 2311 Image sensor unit 2432 CMOS image sensor 2434 Control LSI
2441 Host controller 3001 Game machine 3302 Sub-control unit 3305 Lamp 5001 Game system

Claims (2)

An optical receiver that receives an optical signal from an optical transmitter.
The optical receiver is
An optical signal receiving means that receives an optical signal from the optical transmitter and converts it into image data.
A light emission specifying determination means for determining whether or not the light emitting position of the optical signal of the optical transmitting device can be specified based on the image data.
It has a light emitting position specifying means for specifying a light emitting position of the light transmitting device when it is determined that the light emitting position cannot be specified by the light emitting specifying determination means.
The emission identification determination means extracts brightness data from the image data, determines whether the emission position can be specified based on the accumulated data accumulated over the extracted brightness data over a plurality of frames, and determines whether the emission position can be specified.
When the light emitting position of the light transmitting device is specified, the light emitting position specifying means can emit the specified light if the light emitting position of the light transmitting device specified in advance and the specified light emitting position are within a predetermined range. An optical receiving device characterized in that the position is a new light emitting position of the optical transmitting device. The accumulation of the luminance data of the light emission specifying determination means is the accumulation of the image data received at a frame rate earlier than the control cycle when the optical transmission device emits an optical signal.
When the optical transmitter emits light, it is repeatedly turned on and off at a ratio according to the brightness based on the control cycle.
The optical signal receiving means can receive the repetition of turning on and off, and can receive the repetition of turning on and off.
As the accumulated data, the brightness data corresponding to the repetition of turning on and off is accumulated, and the luminance data is accumulated.
The light emitting position specifying means is characterized in that it determines that the light emitting position can be specified if the on / off repetition is repeated a predetermined number of times or more, and determines that the light emitting position cannot be specified if the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times. The optical receiver according to claim 1.

Images